Learn Punjabi as an English Speaker
Author: Omar Khan
Date: 2024-08-11T17:43:09.783336+00:00
Keywords: language; learning; punjabi; english

The next word is here. English: Here is your book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹੋ ਜਿਹਾ[/hi] [hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੀ[/hi] [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹੋ ਜਿਹਾ[/hi] [hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੀ[/hi] - This is your

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is

The word [hi]ਇਹੋ ਜਿਹਾ[/hi] literally means "this like" and is often used to emphasize something or specify that something is the exact thing. The word [hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੀ[/hi] is the possessive form of "you" meaning your. In this sentence, it implies that the book belongs to the person being addressed.

Key Concepts:

Possessive pronouns: [hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੀ[/hi] means "your"

Demonstrative pronouns: [hi]ਇਹੋ ਜਿਹਾ[/hi] means "this" and emphasizes the object being shown.

Verb "to be" in present tense: [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] means "is"

Translation: Here is your book.

The next word is fill. English: The pitcher is full of water.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘੜਾ ਪਾਣੀ ਨਾਲ ਭਰਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਘੜਾ[/hi] [hi]ghara[/hi] (masculine noun) - pitcher

[hi]ਪਾਣੀ[/hi] [hi]pani[/hi] (masculine noun) - water

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] [hi]nal[/hi] (postposition) - with

[hi]ਭਰਿਆ[/hi] [hi]bharya[/hi] (past participle, masculine singular) - filled

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] [hi]hoya[/hi] (past participle, masculine singular) - is/has become

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] (present tense, masculine singular) - is/exists

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have grammatical genders. In this case, [hi]ਘੜਾ[/hi] is a masculine noun. Therefore, the past participles [hi]ਭਰਿਆ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] must be in the masculine singular form.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions rather than prepositions like English. The postposition [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] means "with" in this case.

Past Participles: The past participles in this sentence, [hi]ਭਰਿਆ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi], form a "perfect participle" construction, which is very common in Punjabi to indicate a state of being.

English: The pitcher is full of water.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘੜਾ ਪਾਣੀ ਨਾਲ ਭਰਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is round. English: The round table is in the center of the room.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਮਰੇ ਦੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਗੋਲ ਮੇਜ਼ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਮਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]kamre[/hi] - This is the word for "room" and is in the locative case using the postposition [hi]ਦੇ[/hi].

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - This is the postposition used to indicate "in" and is in the locative case because it is describing the location of the table.

[hi]ਗੋਲ[/hi] - [hi]gol[/hi] - This is the word for "round". It is an adjective describing the table.

[hi]ਮੇਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]mez[/hi] - This is the word for "table".

Key Concepts:

Postpositions - are used to express grammatical relations such as location, time, and possession. In this case we are using the postposition [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] to create the locative case.

Locative Case - This grammatical case is used to indicate location or position. It is often formed by adding a postposition to a noun.

This sentence is a great example of the use of postpositions in Punjabi to express location. It is also an excellent way to practice using the locative case.

The next word is photograph. English: He took a photograph of the beautiful scenery.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਨਜ਼ਾਰੇ ਦੀ ਫੋਟੋ ਖਿੱਚੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine form of the verb "to take" in the past tense. It translates to "He" in English.

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - This is an adjective meaning "beautiful".

[hi]ਨਜ਼ਾਰੇ[/hi] - This is a noun meaning "scenery".

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is a possessive particle that indicates ownership or belonging. It translates to "of" in English.

[hi]ਫੋਟੋ[/hi] - This is a noun meaning "photograph".

[hi]ਖਿੱਚੀ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to take a photograph". It translates to "took" in English.

Key concepts:

The sentence uses the past tense of the verb "to take a photograph", which is [hi]ਖਿੱਚੀ।[/hi]

The sentence also uses the possessive particle [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] to indicate that the photograph is "of" the scenery.

English: He took a photograph of the beautiful scenery.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਨਜ਼ਾਰੇ ਦੀ ਫੋਟੋ ਖਿੱਚੀ।[/hi]

The next word is difficult. English: This work is very difficult.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kaam bahut mushkil hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (pronounced "ay")

[hi]kaam[/hi] - Work

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Very (pronounced "buh-hut")

[hi]mushkil[/hi] - Difficult (pronounced "mook-kil")

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (pronounced "hay")

Key concepts:

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense of the verb "to be" (in Punjabi, [hi]hona[/hi] )

[hi]mushkil[/hi] is an adjective, meaning "difficult"

English translation: This work is very difficult.

The next word is until. English: He waited until the sun set.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੂਰਜ ਡੁੱਬਣ ਤੱਕ ਇੰਤਜ਼ਾਰ ਕਰਦਾ ਰਿਹਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] - sun

[hi]ਡੁੱਬਣ[/hi] - setting

[hi]ਤੱਕ[/hi] - until

[hi]ਇੰਤਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - wait

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - does

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - was.

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਤੱਕ[/hi] literally means "until" and is used to denote the point in time when an action is completed.

The verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] is in the present tense, but is used to describe a past action that is ongoing.

The word [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] is a past tense marker that indicates the action was ongoing.

English: He waited until the sun set.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੂਰਜ ਡੁੱਬਣ ਤੱਕ ਇੰਤਜ਼ਾਰ ਕਰਦਾ ਰਿਹਾ।[/hi]

The next word is style. English: He has a stylish way of dressing.

Punjabi: [hi]Us da kapde pahanne da andaaz bahut stylish hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - This is the third-person singular pronoun, meaning "he" or "him".

[hi]da[/hi] - This is the possessive marker, indicating that the noun following it belongs to the person or thing mentioned before. It's similar to "his" in English.

[hi]kapde pahanne[/hi] - This is the verb phrase meaning "to wear clothes".

[hi]da[/hi] - This is another possessive marker, showing that the noun following it is related to the previous phrase ("wearing clothes").

[hi]andaaz[/hi] - This is the noun meaning "style" or "manner".

[hi]bahut[/hi] - This is the adverb meaning "very".

[hi]stylish[/hi] - This is the adjective meaning "stylish".

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be", meaning "is".

Key Concepts:

This sentence uses the possessive form with the word "da". You can use "da" to show possession in Punjabi.

This sentence also uses the verb phrase "pahanne" which is a common verb for wearing clothes.

The sentence demonstrates the use of adjectives in Punjabi.

Translation: He has a stylish way of dressing.

The next word is number. English: He has three children.

Punjabi: [hi]Usde teen bacche ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usde[/hi] - This is the possessive form of the pronoun [hi]us[/hi] (he). It means "his" or "of him."

[hi]teen[/hi] - This means "three."

[hi]bacche[/hi] - This is the plural form of [hi]bachcha[/hi], which means "child."

[hi]ne[/hi] - This is the Punjabi equivalent of the English "have," indicating possession. It's important to note that [hi]ne[/hi] is not a verb in the sense of "to have," but rather a marker of possession.

This is how the Punjabi sentence translates literally: "His three children."

The next word is lay. English: The carpenter laid the bricks carefully.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੱਕੜਹਾਰ ਨੇ ਇੱਟਾਂ ਸਾਵਧਾਨੀ ਨਾਲ ਲਾਈਆਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲੱਕੜਹਾਰ[/hi] - This word means "carpenter" and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This particle indicates the subject of the sentence performs the action.

[hi]ਇੱਟਾਂ[/hi] - This is the object of the sentence and refers to "bricks".

[hi]ਸਾਵਧਾਨੀ ਨਾਲ[/hi] - This phrase means "carefully" and acts as an adverb modifying the verb.

[hi]ਲਾਈਆਂ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to lay".

Key concepts:

Sentence Structure: Subject - Verb - Object

Case Markers: [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] marks the subject performing the action.

Adverbs: [hi]ਸਾਵਧਾਨੀ ਨਾਲ[/hi] modifies the verb.

Verb Conjugation: The past tense of the verb "to lay" is [hi]ਲਾਈਆਂ[/hi].

English: The carpenter laid the bricks carefully.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੱਕੜਹਾਰ ਨੇ ਇੱਟਾਂ ਸਾਵਧਾਨੀ ਨਾਲ ਲਾਈਆਂ।[/hi]

The next word is oppose. English: We oppose this new law.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਇਸ ਨਵੇਂ ਕਾਨੂੰਨ ਦਾ ਵਿਰੋਧ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਨਵੇਂ[/hi] - New (adjective)

[hi]ਕਾਨੂੰਨ[/hi] - Law (noun)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਵਿਰੋਧ[/hi] - Opposition (noun)

[hi]ਕਰਦੇ[/hi] - Do (verb)

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - Are (verb)

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses the verb [hi]ਕਰਦੇ[/hi] (do) to express opposition, similar to using "oppose" in English.

The possessive particle [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is used to show that the opposition is directed at the "new law".

The word order in the Punjabi sentence is Subject-Object-Verb, which is different from the Subject-Verb-Object order in English.

English: We oppose this new law.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਇਸ ਨਵੇਂ ਕਾਨੂੰਨ ਦਾ ਵਿਰੋਧ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is issue. English: There is an issue with the car.

Punjabi: [hi]गाڑی چ [hi] گاڑی [hi] ਵਿੱਚ ਕੋਈ ਮੁਸ਼ਕਿਲ ਹੈ। [hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]गाڑی [hi] - means car.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ [hi] - means in or inside.

[hi]ਕੋਈ [hi] - means some or any.

[hi]ਮੁਸ਼ਕਿਲ [hi] means problem, issue, or difficulty.

[hi]ਹੈ। [hi] - means is.

The sentence is structured as follows:

[hi]गाड़ी [hi] (Subject) + [hi]ਵਿੱਚ [hi] (Preposition) + [hi]ਕੋਈ [hi] (Indefinite pronoun) + [hi]ਮੁਸ਼ਕਿਲ [hi] (Noun) + [hi]ਹੈ। [hi] (Verb)

Remember, [hi]ਵਿੱਚ [hi] - is a preposition and it indicates location. The use of [hi]ਕੋਈ [hi] means "any" and suggests an unspecified problem. [hi]ਮੁਸ਼ਕਿਲ [hi] is the noun that is the object of the sentence, the "issue" itself. The sentence is in the present tense.

English: There is an issue with the car.

Punjabi: [hi]गाڑی چ [hi] گاڑی [hi] ਵਿੱਚ ਕੋਈ ਮੁਸ਼ਕਿਲ ਹੈ। [hi]

The next word is may. English: He may come today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੋ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਅੱਜ ਆਵੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹੋ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - This is a common phrase in Punjabi that means "may" or "it is possible that". It is literally translated as "to be able to happen". This is a very useful phrase to know. Think of it as a way of expressing possibility.

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - This is a conjunction that means "that". It is used to introduce a subordinate clause.

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is a pronoun that means "he".

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - This is an adverb that means "today".

[hi]ਆਵੇ[/hi] - This is a verb that means "to come". It is in the present tense.

This sentence is in the indicative mood, which means it is stating a fact. The phrase [hi]ਹੋ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] is used to express possibility.

English Translation: He may come today.

Punjabi Translation: [hi]ਹੋ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਅੱਜ ਆਵੇ।[/hi]

The next word is civil. English: The civil engineer is responsible for the construction of the bridge.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਿਵਲ ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰ ਪੁਲ਼ ਦਾ ਨਿਰਮਾਣ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਿਵਲ[/hi] [sivl] - civil

[hi]ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰ[/hi] [injiniar] - engineer

[hi]ਪੁਲ਼[/hi] [pul] - bridge

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [da] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਨਿਰਮਾਣ[/hi] [nirman] - construction

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] [krn] - to do

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] [lai] - for

[hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ[/hi] [zimmevar] - responsible

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hai] - is

Key Concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is typically Subject-Object-Verb (SOV).

The possessive particle [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [da] is used to show possession.

The word [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] [lai] is used to express purpose.

The verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hai] is used for the present tense.

Translation: The civil engineer is responsible for the construction of the bridge.

The next word is include. English: The class includes both theory and practical work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲਾਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਥਿਊਰੀ ਅਤੇ ਪ੍ਰੈਕਟੀਕਲ ਕੰਮ ਦੋਨੋ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਲਾਸ[/hi] - [hi]class[/hi] - refers to the classroom or the group of students.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]in[/hi] - indicates location within the class.

[hi]ਥਿਊਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]theory[/hi] - refers to theoretical concepts.

[hi]ਅਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]and[/hi] - connects the two elements of the class.

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੈਕਟੀਕਲ[/hi] - [hi]practical[/hi] - refers to hands-on work.

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - [hi]work[/hi] - refers to the activities or tasks involved.

[hi]ਦੋਨੋ[/hi] - [hi]both[/hi] - emphasizes the inclusion of both theory and practical work.

[hi]ਸ਼ਾਮਲ[/hi] - [hi]included[/hi] - indicates that the elements are part of the class.

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - [hi]are[/hi] - is the plural verb form indicating that both theory and practical work are present.

Key Concepts:

Postposition: [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a postposition that follows the noun [hi]ਕਲਾਸ[/hi] to indicate location.

Conjunction: [hi]ਅਤੇ[/hi] is a conjunction that joins the two nouns [hi]ਥਿਊਰੀ[/hi] and [hi]ਪ੍ਰੈਕਟੀਕਲ ਕੰਮ[/hi].

Word Order: Punjabi sentences generally follow a Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) structure.

English: The class includes both theory and practical work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲਾਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਥਿਊਰੀ ਅਤੇ ਪ੍ਰੈਕਟੀਕਲ ਕੰਮ ਦੋਨੋ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is noise. English: The loud noise of the traffic was distracting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਟ੍ਰੈਫਿਕ ਦੀ ਆਵਾਜ਼ ਬਹੁਤ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਸੀ, ਇਹ ਧਿਆਨ ਭੰਗ ਕਰਨ ਵਾਲੀ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਟ੍ਰੈਫਿਕ[/hi] - traffic

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਆਵਾਜ਼[/hi] - noise, sound

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very

[hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ[/hi] - much, excessive

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - was

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - this

[hi]ਧਿਆਨ[/hi] - attention

[hi]ਭੰਗ[/hi] - to break, to disrupt

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] - to do, to make

[hi]ਵਾਲੀ[/hi] - (feminine participle) - doing, making

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - was

Key Concepts:

Possessive particle: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to show possession.

Adjectives: [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] and [hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ[/hi] are both adjectives, used to describe the noise.

Participles: [hi]ਕਰਨ ਵਾਲੀ[/hi] is a participle. It describes the noun (noise) as having the quality of being distracting.

Subject-Verb Agreement: The subject is [hi]ਆਵਾਜ਼[/hi] (noise) and the verb is [hi]ਸੀ[/hi] (was). Both are in the singular form.

English: The loud noise of the traffic was distracting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਟ੍ਰੈਫਿਕ ਦੀ ਆਵਾਜ਼ ਬਹੁਤ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਸੀ, ਇਹ ਧਿਆਨ ਭੰਗ ਕਰਨ ਵਾਲੀ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is proper. English: The proper way to greet someone is to say "Sat Sri Akal".

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਹੀ ਤਰੀਕਾ ਸਤਿ ਸ੍ਰੀ ਅਕਾਲ ਕਹਿਣਾ ਹੈ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਹੀ[/hi] (Sahi) - Proper, correct

[hi]ਤਰੀਕਾ[/hi] (Tareeka) - Way, method

[hi]ਸਤਿ ਸ੍ਰੀ ਅਕਾਲ[/hi] (Sat Sri Akal) - A common Punjabi greeting meaning "God is true and time is eternal"

[hi]ਕਹਿਣਾ[/hi] (Kehna) - To say, to speak

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (Hai) - Is

Key concepts:

[hi]ਸਹੀ[/hi] - It's a very common word and useful for expressing correctness, appropriateness, or accuracy.

[hi]ਤਰੀਕਾ[/hi] - This is a great word for expressing methods and procedures, it can be used in many contexts.

[hi]ਕਹਿਣਾ[/hi] - This verb is used for expressing the act of speaking or saying something, it's a very common word in Punjabi.

Remember: When learning a new language, focusing on the verbs and common words will give you the best foundation.

The next word is requirement. English: The requirement for this course is to attend all classes.

Punjabi: [hi]Is course di [hi]requirement[hi] saare classan vich haazir hona hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]course[/hi] - course

[hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]requirement[/hi] - requirement

[hi]saare[/hi] - all (plural)

[hi]classan[/hi] - classes

[hi]vich[/hi] - in (preposition)

[hi]haazir[/hi] - present (adjective)

[hi]hona[/hi] - to be (verb)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, third person singular)

Key Concept: [hi]di[/hi] (possessive particle) is a common particle that forms the possessive case in Punjabi. It is used before the noun that is being possessed. For example, [hi]Is course di requirement[hi] means "the requirement of this course".

English: The requirement for this course is to attend all classes.

Punjabi: [hi]Is course di [hi]requirement[hi] saare classan vich haazir hona hai.[/hi]

The next word is chapter. English: This is the first chapter of the book.

Punjabi: ਇਹ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਪਹਿਲਾ [hi]ਅਧਿਆਇ[/hi] ਹੈ।

Breakdown:

ਇਹ [hi]eh[/hi] - This

ਕਿਤਾਬ [hi]kitaab[/hi] - Book

ਦਾ [hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive marker, used before the word "chapter")

ਪਹਿਲਾ [hi]pehlaa[/hi] - First

[hi]ਅਧਿਆਇ[/hi] [hi]adhyaay[/hi] - Chapter

ਹੈ [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concept:

[hi]ਅਧਿਆਇ[/hi] [hi]adhyaay[/hi] is the Punjabi word for chapter.

Note the use of the possessive marker ਦਾ [hi]da[/hi], which is used to show that the chapter belongs to the book.

[hi]ਪਹਿਲਾ[/hi] [hi]pehlaa[/hi] can be used to mean "first" in many different contexts. It can be used for ordinal numbers or just to describe something that comes before others.

English: This is the first chapter of the book.

Punjabi: ਇਹ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਪਹਿਲਾ [hi]ਅਧਿਆਇ[/hi] ਹੈ।

The next word is clothes. English: He wears nice clothes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੋਹਣੇ ਕੱਪੜੇ ਪਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun, meaning "he."

[hi]ਸੋਹਣੇ[/hi] - This is an adjective meaning "nice" or "beautiful." It modifies the noun "[hi]ਕੱਪੜੇ[/hi]".

[hi]ਕੱਪੜੇ[/hi] - This is the noun, meaning "clothes." It's plural.

[hi]ਪਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense verb, meaning "wears." It's in the masculine singular form.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is a grammatical particle indicating the sentence is in the present tense and is a statement.

Key concepts:

This sentence demonstrates the basic structure of a Punjabi sentence: subject, adjective, noun, verb, particle.

Punjabi has grammatical genders (masculine and feminine) and numbers (singular and plural) that must be considered when using adjectives and verbs.

The word order in Punjabi is usually subject-object-verb, but there are some exceptions.

English: He wears nice clothes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੋਹਣੇ ਕੱਪੜੇ ਪਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is okay. Okay. Let's get started!

The next word is minister. English: The minister is responsible for the education system.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੰਤਰੀ ਸਿੱਖਿਆ ਪ੍ਰਣਾਲੀ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੰਤਰੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "minister." It is a noun and the subject of the sentence. Remember it means the person in charge of a particular department.

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਿਆ[/hi] - This word means "education" in Punjabi. It is a noun and the object of the preposition "for".

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਣਾਲੀ[/hi] - This means "system." It is a noun that modifies the noun "education" to create the phrase "education system."

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - This is a Punjabi preposition that means "for." It is part of the prepositional phrase "for the education system."

[hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ[/hi] - This word means "responsible." It is an adjective that modifies the noun "minister" to tell us what the minister is.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is a Punjabi verb that means "is." It is the verb that connects the subject ("minister") with the predicate ("responsible for the education system").

Remember this sentence structure! It follows the pattern "Subject + Verb + Adjective + Prepositional Phrase". Think of it as a model you can follow to create similar sentences.

The next word is guess. English: I guess you are right.

Punjabi: ਮੈਨੂੰ ਲੱਗਦਾ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਸਹੀ ਹੋ।

[hi]mainu lagda hai ki tusi sahi ho[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]mainu[/hi] - means "to me" or "I" in the dative case, which is used to indicate the recipient of an action.

[hi]lagda hai[/hi] - means "it seems" or "I think". It is a common phrase that expresses an opinion or belief.

[hi]ki[/hi] - means "that" or "whether" and introduces a clause.

[hi]tusi[/hi] - means "you" in the polite plural form.

[hi]sahi[/hi] - means "right" or "correct".

This sentence structure is very common in Punjabi. It uses the phrase [hi]lagda hai[/hi] to express an opinion or belief. The clause following [hi]ki[/hi] explains the reason for the speaker's belief.

The next word is appreciate. English: I appreciate your help.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਤੁਹਾਡੀ ਮਦਦ ਦੀ ਕਦਰ ਕਰਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - I (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੀ[/hi] - your (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਮਦਦ[/hi] - help (noun)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of the (possessive particle)

[hi]ਕਦਰ[/hi] - appreciation (noun)

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - do (verb)

[hi]ਹਾਂ।[/hi] - I am (auxiliary verb)

Key Concepts:

This sentence uses the verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] which is used to express an action.

The possessive particle [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to connect the noun [hi]ਮਦਦ[/hi] with the possessive pronoun [hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੀ[/hi]

The sentence is in the present tense.

English: I appreciate your help.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਤੁਹਾਡੀ ਮਦਦ ਦੀ ਕਦਰ ਕਰਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is medical. English: He is a medical student.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਮੈਡੀਕਲ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - one, a, an

[hi]ਮੈਡੀਕਲ[/hi] - [hi]medical[/hi] - medical

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]vidyarthi[/hi] - student

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

The Punjabi sentence uses the [hi]hai[/hi] (is) verb to be in the present tense. It is a simple sentence that clearly states that the subject, [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he/she/it), is a medical student.

English: He is a medical student.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਮੈਡੀਕਲ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is balance. English: The scales balanced perfectly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਤਰਾਜੂ ਬਿਲਕੁਲ ਸੰਤੁਲਿਤ ਸਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਤਰਾਜੂ[/hi] - This word means "scales" and is used to refer to the weighing device.

[hi]ਬਿਲਕੁਲ[/hi] - This word means "perfectly" and is used to emphasize the accuracy of the balance.

[hi]ਸੰਤੁਲਿਤ[/hi] - This word means "balanced" and describes the state of the scales.

[hi]ਸਨ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the verb "to be" in the past tense. It is used because "scales" is plural.

This sentence uses a common Punjabi grammatical structure where the subject ([hi]ਤਰਾਜੂ[/hi]) comes first, followed by the verb ([hi]ਸਨ[/hi]) and then the adjective ([hi]ਸੰਤੁਲਿਤ[/hi]) that describes the subject. The adverb [hi]ਬਿਲਕੁਲ[/hi] modifies the adjective, adding emphasis to the statement.

The next word is strange. English: This is a strange book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kitaab ajeebee hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This, (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]kitaab[/hi] - Book

[hi]ajeebee[/hi] - Strange

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is, (copula, marks present tense)

Key Concepts:

Demonstrative Pronouns: [hi]Eh[/hi] is a demonstrative pronoun, used to point out something specific. [hi]Eh[/hi] is used for singular and plural, masculine and feminine.

Copula: [hi]hai[/hi] is a copula, a verb that links a subject to a predicate. [hi]hai[/hi] is the most common form of the copula, used in the present tense.

English: This is a strange book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kitaab ajeebee hai[/hi].

The next word is payment. English: The payment for the goods has been made.

[hi]ਸਾਮਾਨ ਦੀ ਅਦਾਇਗੀ ਹੋ ਚੁੱਕੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਮਾਨ[/hi] - means "goods"

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - is the possessive particle (of the goods)

[hi]ਅਦਾਇਗੀ[/hi] - means "payment"

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - is the auxiliary verb "to be" in the present perfect tense

[hi]ਚੁੱਕੀ[/hi] - is the past participle of the verb "to do"

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is the copula "is"

This sentence is in the passive voice, emphasizing the fact that the payment has been made, rather than who made it.

Punjabi: The payment for the goods has been made.

The next word is percent. English: The price of wheat has increased by ten percent.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੰਨਾ ਦੀ ਕੀਮਤ ਦਸ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਸ਼ਤ ਵਧ ਗਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੰਨਾ[/hi] - [hi]ganna[/hi] - wheat

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਕੀਮਤ[/hi] - [hi]qimet[/hi] - price

[hi]ਦਸ[/hi] - [hi]das[/hi] - ten

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਤਿਸ਼ਤ[/hi] - [hi]pratishat[/hi] - percent

[hi]ਵਧ[/hi] - [hi]vadh[/hi] - increase

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - [hi]gai[/hi] - went (feminine singular past tense of [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]jaana[/hi] - to go)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is (present tense of [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]hona[/hi] - to be)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a possessive particle that is used to show ownership.

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] is a past tense form of the verb [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] which means "to go". It is used here to show that the price has gone up.

The sentence uses the present tense form of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] to indicate that the price increase is a current state of affairs.

English Translation: The price of wheat has increased by ten percent.

The next word is accord. English: We are in accord with the decision.

Punjabi: [hi]Aapnaa faisla nu aasī sahmati dete hāan.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Aapnaa[/hi] - This is a possessive pronoun meaning "our" or "our own." It's used to indicate that the decision belongs to us.

[hi]faisla[/hi] - This word means "decision" or "judgment."

[hi]nu[/hi] - This is a postposition that marks the object of the verb. It's similar to the English "to" or "with."

[hi]aasī[/hi] - This is the first-person plural pronoun meaning "we."

[hi]sahmati[/hi] - This means "agreement" or "accord."

[hi]dete[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to give." It's used here to indicate that we are giving our agreement.

[hi]hān[/hi] - This is the particle that marks the end of a sentence and indicates a positive statement. It's equivalent to "are" or "do" in English.

Key Concepts:

Possessive Pronouns: [hi]Aapnaa[/hi] is a possessive pronoun, marking ownership.

Postpositions: [hi]nu[/hi] is a postposition, marking the object.

Verb Conjugation: [hi]dete[/hi] is the present tense conjugation of the verb "to give."

Sentence Structure: Subject ([hi]Aasī[/hi]) + Verb ([hi]dete[/hi]) + Object ([hi]sahmati[/hi] + [hi]nu[/hi]).

Translation: We agree with the decision.

The next word is camp. English: He is camping in the mountains.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਹਾੜਾਂ 'ਤੇ ਕੈਂਪ ਲਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਪਹਾੜਾਂ[/hi] - Mountains (plural)

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - On, upon

[hi]ਕੈਂਪ[/hi] - Camp

[hi]ਲਾ[/hi] - To set up

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - Is (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is a sentence-ending particle.

Key concepts:

Word Order: In Punjabi, the word order is typically Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) while in English it is Subject-Verb-Object (SVO).

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions (words that come after the noun they modify) instead of prepositions like English. For example, in the above sentence [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] acts as a postposition.

Tense Markers: Punjabi uses different endings to mark tense. For instance, the verb [hi]ਲਾ ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] indicates the present continuous tense.

English: He is camping in the mountains.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਹਾੜਾਂ 'ਤੇ ਕੈਂਪ ਲਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is present. English: He presented the book to the teacher.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਪੇਸ਼ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - means "He" (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ[/hi] - [hi]adhyapak[/hi] - means "teacher" (object of the preposition)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - means "to" (preposition)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitab[/hi] - means "book" (direct object)

[hi]ਪੇਸ਼[/hi] - [hi]pesh[/hi] - means "presented" (past tense verb)

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi] - [hi]kiti. [/hi] - means "did" (past tense auxiliary verb)

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses a direct object (kitab - book) and an indirect object (adhyapak - teacher).

The verb "pesh" is used in the past tense, indicating an action that already happened.

The word order is subject-verb-object, which is the typical order in Punjabi.

English: He presented the book to the teacher.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਪੇਸ਼ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is reflect. English: She reflects on her past mistakes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਪਿਛਲੀਆਂ ਗ਼ਲਤੀਆਂ 'ਤੇ ਸੋਚਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - She (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਆਪਣੀਆਂ[/hi] - her (possessive pronoun, modifies [hi]ਗ਼ਲਤੀਆਂ[/hi])

[hi]ਪਿਛਲੀਆਂ[/hi] - past (adjective, modifies [hi]ਗ਼ਲਤੀਆਂ[/hi])

[hi]ਗ਼ਲਤੀਆਂ[/hi] - mistakes (noun, object of the verb [hi]ਸੋਚਦੀ ਹੈ[/hi])

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - on (postposition, indicates location)

[hi]ਸੋਚਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi] - reflects (verb, present tense, third person singular)

Key concepts:

Postposition: [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] functions as a postposition, similar to a preposition in English, indicating location or direction.

Gender Agreement: The pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (she) and the verb [hi]ਸੋਚਦੀ ਹੈ[/hi] (reflects) agree in gender (feminine).

English: She reflects on her past mistakes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਪਿਛਲੀਆਂ ਗ਼ਲਤੀਆਂ 'ਤੇ ਸੋਚਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is instance. English: There was one instance where he was late.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu ek [hi]var [hi]der ho gayi si. [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Usnu[hi] - "to him/her/it" (indicates an indirect object)

[hi]ek [hi]var[hi] - "one time" (literally "one instance"). Var means "time" in this context.

[hi]der ho gayi si [hi] - "it was late" (this is the past tense). "Der" means late. Ho is the verb "to be" and gayi is the past tense marker for the feminine gender.

Key Concept: This sentence uses the concept of an indirect object. The indirect object is receiving the action, in this case, being late. It is also in the past tense.

Memorization Aid: This sentence is useful for remembering how to say "one time" or "one instance" in Punjabi. It is also a good example of how to use the past tense.

The next word is eat. English: He eats breakfast every morning.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਸਵੇਰੇ ਨਾਸ਼ਤਾ ਖਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - Every

[hi]ਸਵੇਰੇ[/hi] - Morning

[hi]ਨਾਸ਼ਤਾ[/hi] - Breakfast

[hi]ਖਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - Eats (masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is (masculine singular)

Key Concept: The Punjabi word for "eat" is [hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] and it is a verb. However, the verb "to eat" in the sentence is conjugated to [hi]ਖਾਂਦਾ[/hi] because it is a masculine singular subject "he".

The next word is product. English: This is the product of our hard work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਸਾਡੀ ਸਖਤ ਮਿਹਨਤ ਦਾ ਨਤੀਜਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This, [hi]ਸਾਡੀ[/hi] - our, [hi]ਸਖਤ[/hi] - hard, [hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ[/hi] - work, [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of, [hi]ਨਤੀਜਾ[/hi] - product, [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] indicates a possessive relationship. The word [hi]ਨਤੀਜਾ[/hi] literally means “result” but can also mean “product” in this context.

English: This is the product of our hard work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਸਾਡੀ ਸਖਤ ਮਿਹਨਤ ਦਾ ਨਤੀਜਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is course. English: He is taking a course in Punjabi literature.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਾਹਿਤ ਦਾ ਕੋਰਸ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It - This is a pronoun that refers to the subject of the sentence. It is in the nominative case.

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - Punjabi - This is an adjective that modifies the noun "literature."

[hi]ਸਾਹਿਤ[/hi] - literature - This is a noun that refers to the subject of the course.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of - This is a possessive marker that connects "literature" to the course.

[hi]ਕੋਰਸ[/hi] - course - This is a noun that refers to the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - to do - This is the present tense of the verb "to do."

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - is/am/are - This is a helping verb that indicates present continuous tense. It is a part of the verb "is doing."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is - This is a helping verb that indicates present continuous tense. It is a part of the verb "is doing."

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses a present continuous tense, which is formed by combining a helping verb with the present participle of the main verb. This tense is used to describe an action that is happening now.

The sentence also uses the possessive marker "da" to connect the noun "literature" to the course.

The word order in the Punjabi sentence is subject-verb-object.

The next word is foreign. English: He is a foreigner.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਵਿਦੇਸ਼ੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - "he" (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਵਿਦੇਸ਼ੀ[/hi] - [hi]videśī[/hi] - "foreigner" (adjective used as noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - "is" (present tense, singular, masculine)

Key concepts:

Gender agreement: The adjective [hi]ਵਿਦੇਸ਼ੀ[/hi] agrees in gender with the masculine subject pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi].

Use of adjectives as nouns: The adjective [hi]ਵਿਦੇਸ਼ੀ[/hi] acts as a noun in this sentence, meaning "a foreigner."

Memorization tip:

Remember the sound of the word [hi]ਵਿਦੇਸ਼ੀ[/hi], which is similar to the English word "foreigner."

The next word is fund. English: He funded the project.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਨੂੰ ਫੰਡ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This translates to "he" or "she" in English and is the subject of the sentence. It is the third person singular pronoun in the past tense.

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ[/hi] - This translates to "project" in English and is the direct object of the verb.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the preposition "to" in English and indicates the direction of the action. It is used before the direct object in Punjabi.

[hi]ਫੰਡ[/hi] - This translates to "fund" in English and is the verb in the sentence. It is in the past tense.

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] - This translates to "gave" in English and is the past tense of the verb.

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) order is commonly used in Punjabi sentences, similar to English. However, Punjabi uses postpositions, which function similarly to prepositions in English.

Punjabi has a rich system of conjugations, and the verb forms change based on the tense and person.

English: He funded the project.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਨੂੰ ਫੰਡ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is above. English: The bird is flying above the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]chidiya darakht de upar udd rahi hai[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]chidiya[/hi] - bird (feminine, singular)

[hi]darakht[/hi] - tree (masculine, singular)

[hi]de[/hi] - of (possessive marker, used with [hi]darakht[/hi])

[hi]upar[/hi] - above

[hi]udd[/hi] - fly (present participle)

[hi]rahi[/hi] - is (present continuous tense marker, feminine)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense marker, singular)

Key concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have gender, and the verb conjugations change depending on the gender of the noun.

Possessive markers: The word [hi]de[/hi] is used to show possession and is placed between the noun and its possessor.

Present continuous tense: The present continuous tense is formed using the present participle of the verb and the appropriate tense marker.

English: The bird is flying above the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]chidiya darakht de upar udd rahi hai[/hi]

The next word is observe. English: He observed the children playing in the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਬੱਚਿਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਪਾਰਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਖੇਡਦੇ ਦੇਖਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun, "he," in the past tense.

[hi]ਬੱਚਿਆਂ[/hi] - This is the plural noun, "children."

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the object marker, indicating that the children are the object of the verb.

[hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] - This is the noun, "park."

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is the preposition, "in."

[hi]ਖੇਡਦੇ[/hi] - This is the present participle verb, "playing."

[hi]ਦੇਖਿਆ।[/hi] - This is the past tense verb, "observed."

Key Concepts:

This sentence demonstrates the use of the past tense in Punjabi.

The sentence also uses the object marker, which is essential in Punjabi grammar.

English: He observed the children playing in the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਬੱਚਿਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਪਾਰਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਖੇਡਦੇ ਦੇਖਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is pause. English: Please pause for a moment.

Punjabi: ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਥੋੜਾ ਜਿਹਾ [hi]virah[/hi] ਕਰੋ।

Breakdown:

[hi]virah[/hi] means "pause" or "break". It is a noun.

[hi]thoda jia[/hi] means "a little bit" or "for a moment". It is an adverbial phrase.

[hi]kiṛpā kar ke[/hi] means "please". It is a polite phrase.

This sentence is a polite request to someone to pause for a moment. It is a common phrase used in everyday conversation.

The next word is view. English: He has a different view of life.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਜ਼ਿੰਦਗੀ ਦਾ ਵੱਖਰਾ ਨਜ਼ਰੀਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]Oh-noo[/hi] - To him/her - This is a dative case marker, it indicates the recipient of the action.

[hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਦਗੀ[/hi] - [hi]Zindagi[/hi] - Life - This is a noun.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]Da[/hi] - Of - This is a possessive marker showing that the view belongs to life.

[hi]ਵੱਖਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]Vakhra[/hi] - Different - This is an adjective modifying the noun "view."

[hi]ਨਜ਼ਰੀਆ[/hi] - [hi]Nazaria[/hi] - View, perspective - This is a noun, which is the object of the verb "has."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]Hai[/hi] - Is/has - This is a verb, present tense. The subject "he/she" is implied as the sentence is using the dative case.

Important Concept: Punjabi uses dative case markers to indicate the recipient of the action. You often see dative markers in conjunction with possessive markers in Punjabi. Be sure to remember that dative case markers are used when the recipient is not the direct object of the action (in this case "he/she" does not directly possess the view).

English: He has a different view of life.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਜ਼ਿੰਦਗੀ ਦਾ ਵੱਖਰਾ ਨਜ਼ਰੀਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is bar. English: The bar is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਾਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਉੱਚੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]bar[/hi] (noun) - bar

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] (adverb) - very

[hi]ਉੱਚੀ[/hi] - [hi]uchchi[/hi] (adjective) - high

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] (verb) - is

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi word for "bar" is [hi]ਬਾਰ[/hi].

Punjabi adjectives agree with the noun in gender and number. Since "bar" is feminine, the adjective "high" is also feminine: [hi]ਉੱਚੀ[/hi].

Important: "[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi]" is an important adverb in Punjabi. It's often used to express intensity or a large quantity.

The next word is credit. English: He got credit for his hard work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ ਉਸਦੀ ਸਖ਼ਤ ਮਿਹਨਤ ਦਾ ਸਿਹਰਾ ਮਿਲਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he), which means "to him" or "for him."

[hi]ਉਸਦੀ[/hi] - This is the possessive form of the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi], which means "his."

[hi]ਸਖ਼ਤ[/hi] - This word means "hard."

[hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ[/hi] - This word means "work."

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is the possessive particle which connects [hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ[/hi] (work) to [hi]ਸਿਹਰਾ[/hi] (credit)

[hi]ਸਿਹਰਾ[/hi] - This word means "credit."

[hi]ਮਿਲਿਆ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਮਿਲਣਾ[/hi] (to get/receive).

The sentence is in the simple past tense and expresses that the subject received recognition or appreciation for his efforts.

The next word is finally. English: Finally, the sun came out.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਖੀਰ[/hi] [hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] [hi]ਨਿਕਲਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਖੀਰ[/hi] ([hi]akhir[/hi]) means "finally" or "at last" in Punjabi. It is an adverb.

[hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] ([hi]sooraj[/hi]) means "sun." This is a noun.

[hi]ਨਿਕਲਿਆ[/hi] ([hi]niklya[/hi]) means "came out" and is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਨਿਕਲਣਾ[/hi] ([hi]nikalnaa[/hi]) meaning "to come out." It is a past tense verb conjugation.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi word order: Subject-Verb-Object

The verb conjugation in Punjabi (the ending of the verb) indicates the tense (past, present, future).

English: Finally, the sun came out.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਖੀਰ[/hi] [hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] [hi]ਨਿਕਲਿਆ[/hi].

The next word is during. English: He was working during the meeting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਦੌਰਾਨ ਉਹ ਕੰਮ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ[/hi] ([hi]meeting[/hi]) - This is the noun, meaning "meeting."

[hi]ਦੌਰਾਨ[/hi] ([hi]dauran[/hi]) - This is the preposition, meaning "during." It modifies the noun "meeting," indicating the time frame of the action.

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] ([hi]oh[/hi]) - This is the pronoun, meaning "he."

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] ([hi]kamm[/hi]) - This is the noun, meaning "work."

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] ([hi]kar[/hi]) - This is the verb, meaning "to do," here it is used in the present continuous tense - "doing."

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] ([hi]riha[/hi]) - This is the verb "to be," in the past continuous tense.

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] ([hi]si[/hi]) - This is the auxiliary verb, "to be" in past continuous tense.

Key Concept: Punjabi uses a similar structure to English in terms of prepositions and the tense of verbs.

English: He was working during the meeting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਦੌਰਾਨ ਉਹ ਕੰਮ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is upon. English: He walked upon the stage.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੰਚ ਉੱਤੇ ਚੱਲਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (pronoun, subject of the verb)

[hi]ਮੰਚ[/hi] - Stage (noun, object of the preposition)

[hi]ਉੱਤੇ[/hi] - upon (preposition, shows the relationship between the subject and the object)

[hi]ਚੱਲਿਆ[/hi] - walked (verb, past tense, action of the subject)

This sentence uses the preposition [hi]ਉੱਤੇ[/hi] to show the location of the subject ([hi]ਉਹ[/hi]) relative to the object ([hi]ਮੰਚ[/hi]). The preposition [hi]ਉੱਤੇ[/hi] is a versatile word that can also be translated as "on" or "over" depending on the context.

Key concept: Prepositions are words that connect a noun or pronoun to another word in the sentence, showing the relationship between them. In this case, the preposition [hi]ਉੱਤੇ[/hi] shows that the man is on the stage.

English: He walked upon the stage.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੰਚ ਉੱਤੇ ਚੱਲਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is tradition. English: Our traditions are very important to us.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਡੀਆਂ ਰੀਤਾਂ-ਰਿਵਾਜਾਂ ਦਾ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਾਣ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਡੀਆਂ[/hi] - [saadiyaan] - our (plural, feminine)

[hi]ਰੀਤਾਂ[/hi] - [riitaaN] - traditions (plural, feminine)

[hi]ਰਿਵਾਜਾਂ[/hi] - [rivaajaN] - customs (plural, masculine)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [da] - of (masculine)

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - [saanu] - to us

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [bahut] - very

[hi]ਮਾਣ[/hi] - [maan] - pride

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hai] - is (present tense, singular, masculine)

Key Concepts:

The use of plural forms for the words "traditions" and "customs" (e.g., [hi]ਰੀਤਾਂ[/hi] and [hi]ਰਿਵਾਜਾਂ[/hi] ).

The use of the masculine gender for the word "pride" ([hi]ਮਾਣ[/hi]).

The grammatical structure of the sentence: subject + possessive + object + verb.

The next word is progress. English: The students are making progress in their Punjabi studies.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆ ਦਿ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਦੀ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਵਿੱਚ ਤਰੱਕੀ ਕਰ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the word [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi], meaning "students." The [hi]ਆ[/hi] ending marks it as plural.

[hi]ਦਿ[/hi] - This is the equivalent of the English definite article "the," but it is rarely used in Punjabi. It's here for emphasis.

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - This word means "Punjabi," but it can refer to the language, people, or culture. Here, it's the language.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is the possessive marker "of" or "belonging to." It's used to show that the studies belong to Punjabi.

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ[/hi] - This means "study" or "learning."

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is the preposition "in." It shows that the progress is happening within the context of Punjabi studies.

[hi]ਤਰੱਕੀ[/hi] - This means "progress" or "advancement."

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - This is the verb "to do" or "to make." Here, it's conjugated to the present continuous tense with the ending [hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi].

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the verb "to be." It is used to indicate that the students are the ones who are making progress.

Key Concepts:

Possessive marker: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a common possessive marker in Punjabi.

Pluralization: [hi]ਆ[/hi] is a common plural marker in Punjabi.

Present continuous tense: The [hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] ending conjugates the verb [hi]ਕਰ[/hi] into the present continuous tense, indicating that the action is ongoing.

English: The students are making progress in their Punjabi studies.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆ ਦਿ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਦੀ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਵਿੱਚ ਤਰੱਕੀ ਕਰ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is know. English: I know the answer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਜਵਾਬ ਪਤਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] (I) meaning “to me”. The dative case is used to indicate the indirect object of a verb. It can be translated as "to me" or "for me."

[hi]ਜਵਾਬ[/hi] - This is the noun [hi]ਜਵਾਬ[/hi] (answer). It is in the nominative case, the subject of the verb.

[hi]ਪਤਾ[/hi] - This is the adjective [hi]ਪਤਾ[/hi] (known) in this case it acts as an adjective in the predicate.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is) This is in the present tense and agrees with the subject [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] (I).

English: I know the answer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਜਵਾਬ ਪਤਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is responsibility. English: He has a big responsibility.

Punjabi: [hi]Us di badi zimmedari hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - means "his" or "her" and is the third person singular subject pronoun. (This is a key concept in Punjabi, as it can often be a confusing pronoun depending on context.)

[hi]di[/hi] - This is a possessive marker meaning "his" or "her"

[hi]badi[/hi] - means "big" or "large"

[hi]zimmedari[/hi] - means "responsibility"

[hi]hai[/hi] - means "is" and acts as a linking verb.

The sentence literally translates as "His big responsibility is". This is a standard Punjabi sentence structure and one of the easiest to learn.

The next word is plus. English: He added two and two.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦੋ ਅਤੇ ਦੋ ਜੋੜੇ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] means "he" or "she" and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਦੋ[/hi] - [hi]do[/hi] means "two".

[hi]ਅਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]ate[/hi] means "and".

[hi]ਦੋ[/hi] - [hi]do[/hi] means "two".

[hi]ਜੋੜੇ[/hi] - [hi]jore[/hi] means "added" or "joined".

The Punjabi sentence is in the past tense, as it describes an action that has already taken place.

English: He added two and two.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦੋ ਅਤੇ ਦੋ ਜੋੜੇ[/hi]

The next word is not. English: He is not a student.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - he/she/it (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]vidyarthi[/hi] - student (noun)

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]naheen[/hi] - not (negative particle)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense verb)

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Subject-Verb-Object is the usual order in Punjabi sentences.

Negative Particles: [hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] ([hi]naheen[/hi]) is the most common negative particle in Punjabi.

Tense: [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]hai[/hi]) is the present tense form of the verb "to be."

English: He is not a student.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is directly. English: He directly told me that he was leaving.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਸਿੱਧਾ ਕਿਹਾ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਜਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He/She/It (Subject Pronoun, third person singular)

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - To me (Object Pronoun, first person singular)

[hi]ਸਿੱਧਾ[/hi] - Directly (Adverb) - This is the key concept of this example. This is a good way to learn the word. You can also use it to describe a straight line or path.

[hi]ਕਿਹਾ[/hi] - Said/Told (Past Tense Verb)

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - That (Conjunction)

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (Subject Pronoun, third person singular)

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - Go (Verb, present tense)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - Is/Was (helping verb)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is/Are/Am (helping verb) - This is a very common word and you will see it in many sentences

English: He directly told me that he was leaving.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਸਿੱਧਾ ਕਿਹਾ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਜਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is aware. English: He is aware of his mistake.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੀ ਗਲਤੀ ਤੋਂ ਜਾਣੂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - he/she/it (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - [hi]aapni[/hi] - his/her/its (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਗਲਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]galti[/hi] - mistake (noun)

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] - from (postposition)

[hi]ਜਾਣੂ[/hi] - [hi]jaanoo[/hi] - aware (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (copula verb)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Pronouns: [hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] is a possessive pronoun, showing that the mistake belongs to "he".

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions like [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] to show relationships between nouns and other words, much like prepositions in English.

Copula Verb: The verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a copula verb, connecting the subject ([hi]ਉਹ[/hi]) with the adjective ([hi]ਜਾਣੂ[/hi]).

Translation: He is aware of his mistake.

The next word is pressure. English: He put pressure on me to go.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mere te jaan da zor daaya[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He/She/It - This is a pronoun that refers to the person who put pressure on the speaker.

[hi]ne[/hi] - has, have (indicating past tense) - This is an auxiliary verb that indicates the action took place in the past.

[hi]mere[/hi] - My - This is a possessive pronoun indicating ownership.

[hi]te[/hi] - on, upon, at, to - This is a preposition that indicates the location of the pressure.

[hi]jaan[/hi] - to go, to leave - This is the verb of the sentence, indicating the action of going.

[hi]da[/hi] - of, from - This is a postposition that connects "jaan" to "zor."

[hi]zor[/hi] - pressure, force - This is the noun that describes the pressure being applied.

[hi]daaya[/hi] - gave, put, applied - This is the past tense of the verb "den" which means "to give." In this case, it means to apply pressure.

Key concepts:

The use of the postposition [hi]da[/hi] in Punjabi is very important for understanding the meaning of the sentence. It shows the relationship between the noun and the verb.

This sentence is in the past tense, which is indicated by the use of the auxiliary verb [hi]ne[/hi].

Punjabi is an agglutinative language, which means that words are often created by adding prefixes and suffixes to a root word.

English: He put pressure on me to go.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mere te jaan da zor daaya[/hi]

The next word is power. English: The power of the people is the foundation of a democracy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ ਦੀ ਸ਼ਕਤੀ ਲੋਕਤੰਤਰ ਦੀ ਨੀਂਹ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the word for "people" and is in the genitive case, meaning it's modifying "power".

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is the possessive marker, indicating that the power belongs to the people.

[hi]ਸ਼ਕਤੀ[/hi] - This means "power".

[hi]ਲੋਕਤੰਤਰ[/hi] - This means "democracy".

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is again the possessive marker, indicating that the foundation belongs to the democracy.

[hi]ਨੀਂਹ[/hi] - This means "foundation".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "is".

Key Concepts:

Genitive Case: This case is used to show possession or ownership. In this sentence, "[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi]" is in the genitive case to show that the power belongs to the people.

Possessive Marker: The word "[hi]ਦੀ[/hi]" is used to indicate possession.

Translation: The people's power is the foundation of a democracy.

The next word is miss. English: She missed the bus.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬੱਸ ਛੁੱਟ ਗਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "she" or "he" (depending on context). This word is used for both singular and plural forms.

[hi]ਬੱਸ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "bus."

[hi]ਛੁੱਟ[/hi] - This is the past tense form of the verb "to miss," meaning "missed."

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - This is the past tense form of the verb "to go," which here signifies that the bus "went away" or "left."

Key concept: The Punjabi sentence uses a structure similar to "She bus missed," highlighting the bus as the subject of the sentence and its action of "missing."

English Translation: She missed the bus.

The next word is central. English: The central park is a hub of activity.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੇਂਦਰੀ[/hi] [hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] [hi]ਸਰਗਰਮੀ[/hi] [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਕੇਂਦਰ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੇਂਦਰੀ[/hi] [ken-dree] - Central

[hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] [park] - Park

[hi]ਸਰਗਰਮੀ[/hi] [sar-gar-mee] - Activity

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [da] - Of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਕੇਂਦਰ[/hi] [ken-dar] - Center

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hai] - Is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਕੇਂਦਰੀ[/hi] ([ken-dree]) is an adjective that describes something being in the center or central.

[hi]ਕੇਂਦਰ[/hi] ([ken-dar]) is a noun that means "center."

In this sentence, [hi]ਕੇਂਦਰੀ[/hi] and [hi]ਕੇਂਦਰ[/hi] are used to emphasize the location of activity.

English: The central park is a hub of activity.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੇਂਦਰੀ[/hi] [hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] [hi]ਸਰਗਰਮੀ[/hi] [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਕੇਂਦਰ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is factor. English: The teacher asked the students to factor the polynomial.

Punjabi: [hi]अधਿਆਪਕ ਨੇ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਤੋਂ ਬਹੁਪਦ ਦਾ ਗੁਣਨਖੰਡ ਕਰਨ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਹਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]अधਿਆਪਕ[/hi] - [hi]adhyapak[/hi] (teacher)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]ne[/hi] (has, did) - A postposition that shows the subject of the verb. (Similar to "by" in English but it marks the subject.

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]vidyarthiyan[/hi] (students) - The object of the verb

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] (from) - A postposition that indicates where something comes from.

[hi]ਬਹੁਪਦ[/hi] - [hi]bahupad[/hi] (polynomial) - The object of the verb

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] (of, belonging to) - This is a postposition used to show possession, similar to "of" in English.

[hi]ਗੁਣਨਖੰਡ[/hi] - [hi]gunankhand[/hi] (factor) - The object of the verb

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] - [hi]karan[/hi] (to do, to make) - The verb in the sentence

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] (to) - A postposition that indicates direction, similar to "to" in English.

[hi]ਕਿਹਾ।[/hi] - [hi]kiha[/hi] (said) - The past tense of the verb "kehna" (to say)

Key concept: The sentence structure in Punjabi is SOV (Subject Object Verb).

English: The teacher asked the students to factor the polynomial.

Punjabi: [hi]अधਿਆਪਕ ਨੇ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਤੋਂ ਬਹੁਪਦ ਦਾ ਗੁਣਨਖੰਡ ਕਰਨ ਨੂੰ ਕਿਹਾ।[/hi]

The next word is collect. English: He collected all the books.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸਾਰੀਆਂ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਇਕੱਠੀਆਂ ਕੀਤੀਆਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She/It (masculine singular, third person)

[hi]ਸਾਰੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]saariyan[/hi] - All (feminine plural)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]kitaaban[/hi] - Books (feminine plural)

[hi]ਇਕੱਠੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]ikaththian[/hi] - Collected (feminine plural, past participle)

[hi]ਕੀਤੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]kiitian[/hi] - Did (feminine plural, past tense)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, nouns and adjectives have gender. Here, "books" ([hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ[/hi]) are feminine, so the past participle "[hi]ਇਕੱਠੀਆਂ[/hi]" and verb "[hi]ਕੀਤੀਆਂ[/hi]" agree in gender and number.

Past Tense: Punjabi uses different verb endings for past tense, depending on the subject and gender. Here, the plural feminine ending "[hi]ਕੀਤੀਆਂ[/hi]" is used.

English: He collected all the books.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸਾਰੀਆਂ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਇਕੱਠੀਆਂ ਕੀਤੀਆਂ।[/hi]

The next word is whatever. English: Whatever.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜੋ ਵੀ ਹੋਵੇ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜੋ[/hi] - This means "what"

[hi]ਵੀ[/hi] - This means "ever"

[hi]ਹੋਵੇ[/hi] - This means "may be" or "happens"

The phrase [hi]ਜੋ ਵੀ ਹੋਵੇ[/hi] is used to express indifference or lack of concern. It's like saying "I don't care what happens".

English: Whatever.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜੋ ਵੀ ਹੋਵੇ[/hi]

The next word is university. English: He goes to the university.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]ooh[/hi] - he

[hi]ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ[/hi] - [hi]yuneevarsiti[/hi] - university

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]jaandaa[/hi] - goes (masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, verbs and adjectives change form depending on the gender of the noun they modify. In this sentence, [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] ([hi]jaandaa[/hi]) is the masculine singular form of the verb "to go" because [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] ([hi]ooh[/hi]) refers to a male.

Sentence Structure: Punjabi follows a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) sentence structure, similar to English.

English: He goes to the university.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is fight. English: He is fighting with his brother.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਭਰਾ ਨਾਲ ਲੜ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - his (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਭਰਾ[/hi] - brother

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - with

[hi]ਲੜ[/hi] - to fight (present continuous tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - is (present continuous tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present continuous tense, masculine singular, sentence ending)

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi has grammatical gender, so the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] and verb ending [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] are masculine.

Present Continuous Tense: The sentence uses the present continuous tense in Punjabi, which is formed by combining the verb stem with the present participle ending [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] for masculine singular subjects.

Word Order: Punjabi follows a Subject-Object-Verb word order.

English: He is fighting with his brother.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਭਰਾ ਨਾਲ ਲੜ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is welcome. English: Welcome!

Punjabi: [hi]ਆਪ ਦਾ ਸੁਆਗਤ ਹੈ![/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਆਪ[/hi] (aap) - You (formal, respectful)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] (da) - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਸੁਆਗਤ[/hi] (suagat) - Welcome

[hi]ਹੈ![/hi] (hai) - Is (present tense of the verb "to be")

The sentence is a formal way of welcoming someone in Punjabi, using the respectful form of "you" ([hi]ਆਪ[/hi]).

The next word is lot. English: There are a lot of books in the library.

Punjabi: [hi]Kitaabkhaane vich bahut saare kitaab haan[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Kitaabkhaane[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "library." This is a noun.

[hi]vich[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "in." This is a preposition.

[hi]bahut[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "a lot." This is an adverb.

[hi]saare[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "many." This is an adjective.

[hi]kitaab[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "books." This is a noun.

[hi]haan[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "are." This is a verb.

Key Concepts:

Word Order: In Punjabi, the word order is typically Subject-Object-Verb (SOV).

Prepositions: Punjabi prepositions are similar to English, but they can sometimes have slightly different meanings.

Translation: There are a lot of books in the library.

The next word is art. English: He is an artist.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਕਲਾਕਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - This is the masculine singular pronoun for "he".

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - This is the indefinite article "a" or "an".

[hi]ਕਲਾਕਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]kalaakar[/hi] - This is the word for "artist".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be".

This sentence uses the simple present tense to describe the person's profession. The sentence structure is subject-verb-object.

English: He is an artist.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਕਲਾਕਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is case. English: The case is heavy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੇਸ ਭਾਰੀ ਹੈ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੇਸ[/hi] - case

[hi]ਭਾਰੀ[/hi] - heavy

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (present tense, singular, masculine)

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਕੇਸ[/hi] is used to refer to a case, as in a container or a legal case.

The word [hi]ਭਾਰੀ[/hi] is an adjective meaning heavy.

The word [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the present tense, singular, masculine form of the verb "to be".

This is a simple sentence in Punjabi that demonstrates the basic structure of a subject-verb-object sentence in the language.

English: The case is heavy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੇਸ ਭਾਰੀ ਹੈ[/hi]

The next word is but. English: He is a good student, but he is lazy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਚੰਗਾ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹੈ, ਪਰ ਉਹ ਸੁਸਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - a/an (indefinite article)

[hi]ਚੰਗਾ[/hi] - good (adjective)

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - student (noun)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (present tense verb)

[hi]ਪਰ[/hi] - but (conjunction)

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - he/she (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਸੁਸਤ[/hi] - lazy (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense verb)

Key concepts:

Subject-verb agreement: The verb "is" agrees with the singular subject "he/she" in both clauses.

Conjunction: The conjunction "but" connects two contrasting clauses.

Adjectives: The adjectives "good" and "lazy" modify the nouns "student" and "he/she" respectively.

The next word is concert. English: He went to the concert.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੰਸਰਟ 'ਤੇ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਕੰਸਰਟ[/hi] - [hi]kansart[/hi] - Concert

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]'te[/hi] - On/At (used to indicate location)

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]gya[/hi] - Went (masculine singular past tense of [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]jaana[/hi] - to go)

Key Concept: This sentence demonstrates the use of the postposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] to indicate location, as well as the conjugation of the verb [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] in the past tense.

English: He went to the concert.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੰਸਰਟ 'ਤੇ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is convince. English: He convinced his friend to go to the movies.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne apne dost nu film dekhne jaan layi manaya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi] - He

[hi]apne[/hi] - his

[hi]dost[/hi] - friend

[hi]nu[/hi] - to, to the

[hi]film[/hi] - film

[hi]dekhne[/hi] - to see

[hi]jaan[/hi] - to go

[hi]layi[/hi] - for

[hi]manaya[/hi] - convinced

Key Concepts

[hi]nu[/hi] is a postposition used to show direction to someone.

[hi]layi[/hi] can mean for, or to get, it usually follows the verb that is being done for.

[hi]manaya[/hi] is a verb that means to convince or persuade.

English: He convinced his friend to go to the movies.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne apne dost nu film dekhne jaan layi manaya[/hi].

The next word is firm. English: The carpenter's hands are firm.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੱਕੜਹਾਰ ਦੇ ਹੱਥ ਪੱਕੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲੱਕੜਹਾਰ[/hi] - carpenter (This is a common word you will see frequently!)

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - possessive marker, indicating "of the"

[hi]ਹੱਥ[/hi] - hands

[hi]ਪੱਕੇ[/hi] - firm

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - are

The sentence uses the common Punjabi structure of subject-verb-object. The word [hi]ਪੱਕੇ[/hi] is the key word that indicates the firmness of the carpenter's hands. This sentence would be a good example to memorize for when talking about a skilled worker.

The next word is although. English: Although he is rich, he is not happy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਾਲਾਂਕਿ ਉਹ ਅਮੀਰ ਹੈ, ਪਰ ਉਹ ਖੁਸ਼ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹਾਲਾਂਕਿ[/hi] (halaanki) - Although, even though, despite the fact that (conjunction)

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (oh) - He/she/it (pronoun)

[hi]ਅਮੀਰ[/hi] (ameer) - Rich (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) - Is (verb, present tense, 3rd person singular)

[hi]ਪਰ[/hi] (par) - But, however (conjunction)

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (oh) - He/she/it (pronoun)

[hi]ਖੁਸ਼[/hi] (khush) - Happy (adjective)

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] (naheen) - Not (adverb)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai.) - Is (verb, present tense, 3rd person singular)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਹਾਲਾਂਕਿ[/hi] (halaanki) is a conjunction that introduces a clause that contrasts with the main clause.

[hi]ਪਰ[/hi] (par) is another conjunction used to connect contrasting clauses.

The sentence structure is typical of Punjabi, with the subject-verb-object order.

English: Although he is rich, he is not happy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਾਲਾਂਕਿ ਉਹ ਅਮੀਰ ਹੈ, ਪਰ ਉਹ ਖੁਸ਼ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is management. English: The management of this company is excellent.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਕੰਪਨੀ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਬੰਧ ਬਹੁਤ ਵਧੀਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਕੰਪਨੀ[/hi] - Company (noun)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਬੰਧ[/hi] - Management (noun)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Very (adverb)

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - Excellent (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particles: In Punjabi, possessive particles like [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] are used to indicate possession.

Adjectives: Adjectives like [hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] modify nouns (e.g., [hi]ਪ੍ਰਬੰਧ[/hi]) and describe their qualities.

Word Order: The typical word order in Punjabi sentences is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV). Here, the subject ([hi]ਪ੍ਰਬੰਧ[/hi]) comes before the object ([hi]ਕੰਪਨੀ[/hi]) and then the verb ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi]).

English: The management of this company is excellent.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਕੰਪਨੀ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਬੰਧ ਬਹੁਤ ਵਧੀਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is annual. English: The annual festival is a time for family and friends to gather.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਰ੍ਹਾਵਾਰ ਤਿਉਹਾਰ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਅਤੇ ਦੋਸਤਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਇਕੱਠੇ ਹੋਣ ਦਾ ਸਮਾਂ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਰ੍ਹਾਵਾਰ[/hi] - This word means "annual" and is a compound word composed of [hi]ਵਰ੍ਹਾ[/hi] (year) + [hi]ਵਾਰ[/hi] (times). It literally means "year times," or "yearly". The [hi]ਵਾਰ[/hi] ending is similar to the english "-ly" and often refers to frequency or regularity.

[hi]ਤਿਉਹਾਰ[/hi] - This means "festival" or "holiday."

[hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] - This means "family." It can refer to immediate family or the extended family.

[hi]ਅਤੇ[/hi] - This is the conjunction "and".

[hi]ਦੋਸਤਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the word "friend." The [hi]ਾਂ[/hi] ending pluralizes many nouns.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the post position "to." It often connects the subject to the action.

[hi]ਇਕੱਠੇ[/hi] - This means "together." It is an adjective here.

[hi]ਹੋਣ[/hi] - This is the verb "to be."

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is the possessive marker "of" or "'s".

[hi]ਸਮਾਂ[/hi] - This means "time."

This sentence is in the simple present tense, and the subject is [hi]ਤਿਉਹਾਰ[/hi] (festival).

English: The annual festival is a time for family and friends to gather.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਰ੍ਹਾਵਾਰ ਤਿਉਹਾਰ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਅਤੇ ਦੋਸਤਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਇਕੱਠੇ ਹੋਣ ਦਾ ਸਮਾਂ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is care. English: She cares for her children.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਬੱਚਿਆਂ ਦੀ ਦੇਖਭਾਲ ਕਰਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - she (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - [hi]aapne[/hi] - her (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਬੱਚਿਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]bachchian[/hi] - children (plural noun)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਦੇਖਭਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]dekbhaal[/hi] - care (noun)

[hi]ਕਰਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]kardi[/hi] - does (present tense verb, feminine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense auxiliary verb)

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: The verb [hi]ਕਰਦੀ[/hi] agrees with the feminine singular subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi].

Possessive Pronouns: [hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] is a possessive pronoun indicating that the children belong to the woman.

Possessive Particles: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a possessive particle used to connect the noun [hi]ਬੱਚਿਆਂ[/hi] with the noun [hi]ਦੇਖਭਾਲ[/hi].

English: She cares for her children.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਬੱਚਿਆਂ ਦੀ ਦੇਖਭਾਲ ਕਰਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is plant. English: The gardener plants the seeds.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਾਗ਼ਬਾਨ ਬੀਜ ਬੀਜਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਾਗ਼ਬਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]baagbaan[/hi] - gardener (masculine)

[hi]ਬੀਜ[/hi] - [hi]beej[/hi] - seeds

[hi]ਬੀਜਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]beejda hai[/hi] - plants (present tense, masculine singular)

Key concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - possessive marker (masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, singular)

Note:

The word [hi]ਬੀਜਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]beejda[/hi] is the verb "to plant" in the present tense and masculine singular form.

Punjabi has a grammatical gender system. Therefore, you must use the correct form of the verb and nouns depending on the gender.

English: The gardener plants the seeds.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਾਗ਼ਬਾਨ ਬੀਜ ਬੀਜਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is expert. English: He is an expert in Punjabi literature.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਾਹਿਤ ਦਾ ਮਾਹਿਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he". It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "Punjabi". In this context, it modifies the next word, "literature".

[hi]ਸਾਹਿਤ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "literature". It is the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi possessive marker, similar to "of" in English. It connects "literature" to "expert".

[hi]ਮਾਹਿਰ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "expert". It is the predicate of the sentence, describing the subject, "he".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is". It is the verb of the sentence, indicating the present tense.

This sentence showcases a common way to express expertise in Punjabi. The word [hi]ਮਾਹਿਰ[/hi] is used to indicate someone who has a deep understanding and knowledge of a particular subject. Notice how the possessive marker [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is used to show the connection between the subject and the area of expertise.

Key concept: The use of the possessive marker [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a crucial aspect of Punjabi grammar. It is used to show possession, relationship, and connection.

The next word is advance. English: He advanced in his studies.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਵਿੱਚ ਤਰੱਕੀ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - his/her/its (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ[/hi] - studies (noun)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in (preposition)

[hi]ਤਰੱਕੀ[/hi] - advancement (noun)

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi] - did (past tense verb)

This sentence highlights the use of the possessive pronoun [hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] and the noun [hi]ਤਰੱਕੀ[/hi] which is a key concept to understand advancement in Punjabi.

English: He advanced in his studies.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਵਿੱਚ ਤਰੱਕੀ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is possibly. English: He might possibly come to the party.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੋ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਪਾਰਟੀ 'ਤੇ ਆਵੇ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - "ho" - is the verb "to be" in the present tense, functioning as a helping verb in this sentence.

[hi]ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - "sakda hai" - means "may" or "might" and is used to express possibility.

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - "ki" - a conjunction that introduces a dependent clause, similar to "that" in English.

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - "uh" - pronoun meaning "he."

[hi]ਪਾਰਟੀ[/hi] - "party" - noun meaning "party."

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - "te" - preposition meaning "on" or "at."

[hi]ਆਵੇ[/hi] - "aave" - verb "to come" in the subjunctive mood, indicating possibility.

This sentence uses the subjunctive mood in Punjabi to convey the idea of possibility. The subjunctive mood is used to express a wish, a possibility, or a hypothetical situation. In this case, the subjunctive mood is used to convey the possibility that "he" might come to the party.

Translation: He might possibly come to the party.

The next word is slightly. English: She is slightly taller than me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੈਨੂੰ [hi]ਥੋੜ੍ਹਾ[/hi] [hi]ਲੰਮਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "she."

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "me" in the dative case. It means "to me" and is used here to show that the comparison is between her height and the speaker's height.

[hi]ਥੋੜ੍ਹਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "slightly." It is an adverb modifying the adjective [hi]ਲੰਮਾ[/hi].

[hi]ਲੰਮਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "tall." It is an adjective describing the height of the person referred to by [hi]ਉਹ[/hi].

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." It is a copula that links the subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] to the predicate [hi]ਥੋੜ੍ਹਾ ਲੰਮਾ[/hi].

Key Concepts:

Dative Case: The dative case is used in Punjabi to show the indirect object of a verb. It often indicates the person or thing to whom or for whom something is done.

Adverbs: Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. They tell us how, when, where, or to what extent something is done.

Copula: A copula is a verb that connects a subject to a predicate. In Punjabi, the copula [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is used to link the subject to a description of its state, quality, or identity.

English: She is slightly taller than me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੈਨੂੰ [hi]ਥੋੜ੍ਹਾ[/hi] [hi]ਲੰਮਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

The next word is adopt. English: They adopted a child.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਬੱਚਾ ਗੋਦ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - They (plural, masculine or feminine). This is a pronoun in the nominative case and is the subject of the verb.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is a grammatical particle that indicates the subject of the verb is in the nominative case and is performing the action. It is part of the present perfect tense.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - One (indefinite article).

[hi]ਬੱਚਾ[/hi] - Child (masculine). The word [hi]ਬੱਚਾ[/hi] can be used for both genders and it is the direct object of the verb.

[hi]ਗੋਦ[/hi] - This word means "adoption". It is used as a verb here in the past tense.

[hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to take" and is conjugated to agree with the subject in the present perfect tense. It is also the main verb of the sentence.

Key Concepts:

Verb Conjugation: The verb [hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] is conjugated to agree with the subject [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] in the present perfect tense. This conjugation is essential to understanding the sentence grammatically.

Direct Object: The word [hi]ਬੱਚਾ[/hi] is the direct object of the verb [hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi]. It is the thing that is being adopted.

English: They adopted a child.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਬੱਚਾ ਗੋਦ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is theory. English: The theory of relativity is very complex.

Punjabi: [hi]Rilativiti da sidhant bahut mushkil hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Rilativiti[/hi] is the Punjabi word for "relativity." It is derived from the English word.

[hi]da[/hi] is the possessive marker, meaning "of" or "belonging to."

[hi]sidhant[/hi] means "theory" or "principle."

[hi]bahut[/hi] means "very" or "extremely."

[hi]mushkil[/hi] means "difficult" or "complex."

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense verb "to be" in Punjabi.

This sentence uses a simple structure: Subject + Verb + Object. It demonstrates the use of the possessive marker and several common Punjabi words. The word [hi]sidhant[/hi] is important because it can mean "theory," "principle," or "idea" depending on the context.

The next word is claim. English: He claimed to be a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਹੋਣ ਦਾ ਦਾਅਵਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he" in the past tense.

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] - This means "doctor."

[hi]ਹੋਣ[/hi] - This means "to be". It is used with the postposition [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] to indicate possession or belonging.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is the postposition "of" or "belonging to." The combination of [hi]ਹੋਣ[/hi] and [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] together imply the idea of "being a" or "claiming to be".

[hi]ਦਾਅਵਾ[/hi] - This means "claim".

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do". Used in this context it means "made".

Remember, [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] can be tricky. It is similar to the English "of" but with a little more nuance, suggesting a connection or ownership. You will see it frequently used in Punjabi.

English: He claimed to be a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਹੋਣ ਦਾ ਦਾਅਵਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is everybody. English: Everybody is here.

Punjabi: [hi]Sabhi log yahaan hain[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Sabhi[/hi] means "all" or "everybody".

[hi]log[/hi] means "people"

[hi]yahaan[/hi] means "here"

[hi]hain[/hi] is the plural form of the verb "to be" (present tense).

It is important to remember that Punjabi uses the post-position [hi]hain[/hi] to denote the plural form of the verb "to be", while in English, we use the plural form of the verb "to be" (are).

The next word is difficulty. English: This work is very difficult.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kaam bahut mushkil hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

Eh [hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

kaam [hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - Work (noun)

bahut [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Very (adverb)

mushkil [hi]ਮੁਸ਼ਕਿਲ[/hi] - Difficult (adjective)

hai [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is (present tense of the verb 'to be')

Key Concepts:

Demonstrative pronouns indicate which person or thing is being referred to.

Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs.

Adjectives describe nouns.

The verb 'to be' in Punjabi is hai [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] in the present tense.

English: This work is very difficult.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kaam bahut mushkil hai.[/hi]

The next word is body. English: The body is the physical structure of a living being.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ਰੀਰ[/hi] ਜੀਵਤ ਜੀਵ ਦੀ ਭੌਤਿਕ ਬਣਤਰ ਹੁੰਦੀ ਹੈ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸ਼ਰੀਰ[/hi] [hi]shरीर[/hi] - body (noun)

[hi]ਜੀਵਤ[/hi] [hi]जीवत[/hi] - living (adjective)

[hi]ਜੀਵ[/hi] [hi]जीव[/hi] - being (noun)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] [hi]दी[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਭੌਤਿਕ[/hi] [hi]भौतिक[/hi] - physical (adjective)

[hi]ਬਣਤਰ[/hi] [hi]बनतर[/hi] - structure (noun)

[hi]ਹੁੰਦੀ[/hi] [hi]हुंदी[/hi] - is (verb)

Key concepts:

The sentence uses the possessive particle [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] to show possession, meaning "of" in English.

The verb [hi]ਹੁੰਦੀ[/hi] is in the present tense and indicates a state of being.

This sentence emphasizes the physical aspect of a living being, focusing on its structure.

English: The body is the physical structure of a living being.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ਰੀਰ[/hi] ਜੀਵਤ ਜੀਵ ਦੀ ਭੌਤਿਕ ਬਣਤਰ ਹੁੰਦੀ ਹੈ।

The next word is religious. English: He is a very religious man.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਧਾਰਮਿਕ ਆਦਮੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]ooh[/hi] - He

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਧਾਰਮਿਕ[/hi] - [hi]dharmik[/hi] - religious

[hi]ਆਦਮੀ[/hi] - [hi]aadmi[/hi] - man

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਧਾਰਮਿਕ[/hi] - [hi]dharmik[/hi] is used to describe someone who is devoted to their religion.

The structure of this sentence is subject-adjective-noun-verb. This is a typical sentence structure in Punjabi.

English: He is a very religious man.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਧਾਰਮਿਕ ਆਦਮੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is below. English: The bird is below the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]chidiya darakht de niche hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]chidiya[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "bird".

[hi]darakht[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "tree".

[hi]de[/hi] - This is the Punjabi possessive particle, used to show that something belongs to something else. In this case, it shows that the tree is the "owner" of the location "niche" (below).

[hi]niche[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "below".

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi present tense verb "to be".

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: This is a crucial concept in Punjabi grammar. It is used to indicate possession and can be tricky for English speakers to grasp. In this sentence, the particle [hi]de[/hi] is used to show that the location "below" is associated with the tree.

Word Order: Punjabi is a subject-object-verb (SOV) language, meaning the subject (bird) comes first, followed by the object (tree), and then the verb (is). This is different from English, which is subject-verb-object (SVO).

Translation: The bird is below the tree.

The next word is international. English: The international community is working together to combat climate change.

Punjabi: [hi]Antarrāshtriy samaaj vātaavaran parivartan nu rokan layi saath kamm kar rahe han.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Antarrāshtriy[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "international" and it refers to something involving multiple countries or nations.

[hi]samaaj[/hi] - This means "community" or "society" in Punjabi, referring to a group of people with shared interests.

[hi]vātaavaran[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "environment" or "atmosphere."

[hi]parivartan[/hi] - This word means "change" or "transformation" in Punjabi, and in this context, it refers to climate change.

[hi]rokan[/hi] - This verb means "to stop" or "to prevent."

[hi]layi[/hi] - This is a Punjabi preposition meaning "for" or "in order to."

[hi]saath[/hi] - This means "together" in Punjabi.

[hi]karm[/hi] - This verb means "to work."

[hi]rahe[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to be," indicating an ongoing action.

[hi]han[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "are" or "they are" and is used to denote plural subjects.

Key Concepts:

Use of the present continuous tense: This tense is used to describe an ongoing action, emphasizing that the international community is continuously working to address climate change.

Prepositions: The preposition [hi]layi[/hi] indicates the purpose of the work being done by the international community.

Plural subject: The use of the word [hi]han[/hi] indicates that the subject is plural - the international community as a whole is working together.

This sentence highlights the collaborative efforts of the international community in tackling climate change, an issue that affects the entire world.

The next word is keep. English: He keeps the book on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮੇਜ਼ 'ਤੇ ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book (feminine singular noun)

[hi]ਮੇਜ਼[/hi] - table (masculine singular noun)

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - on (postposition, used to indicate location)

[hi]ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - keeps (present tense, third person singular, masculine)

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions to indicate location, time, and other relationships.

Gender Agreement: Verbs and adjectives in Punjabi agree in gender and number with the noun they modify. In this sentence, the verb [hi]ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] is masculine singular because the noun [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] is feminine singular.

Word Order: Punjabi word order is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), which is different from English's Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) order.

English: He keeps the book on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮੇਜ਼ 'ਤੇ ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is limit. English: We must limit our spending.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਆਪਣਾ ਖ਼ਰਚਾ ਸੀਮਤ ਕਰਨਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the first person pronoun "us" or "we."

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun "our" or "our own."

[hi]ਖ਼ਰਚਾ[/hi] - This means "expense" or "spending."

[hi]ਸੀਮਤ[/hi] - This means "limited."

[hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] - This is the infinitive verb "to do."

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the modal verb "must" or "should."

This sentence uses the direct object form of the verb "to do" which is [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi]. This sentence also uses the modal verb [hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] which is used to express obligation or necessity.

English: We must limit our spending.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਆਪਣਾ ਖ਼ਰਚਾ ਸੀਮਤ ਕਰਨਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is allow. English: He allows me to go.

Punjabi: [hi]Ohnu mere jaane di khulaasa hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ohnu[/hi] is the dative case of the third person singular masculine pronoun. It is the indirect object of the verb and means "to him" or "to her." [hi]Ohnu[/hi] is the dative form of [hi]uh[/hi] (he/she/it).

[hi]mere[/hi] is the possessive form of the first person singular pronoun and means "my." It is used here in the possessive case.

[hi]jaane[/hi] is the infinitive form of the verb "to go."

[hi]di[/hi] is a postposition and indicates "of" or "from."

[hi]khulaasa[/hi] is the noun form of the verb "to allow" and means "permission" or "allowance." [hi]khulaasa[/hi] is the direct object of the verb [hi]hai[/hi] (is).

[hi]hai[/hi] is the third person singular present tense form of the verb "to be."

Key Concepts:

Dative case: The dative case is used to indicate the indirect object of a verb.

Possessive case: The possessive case is used to show possession.

Infinitive: The infinitive is the base form of a verb.

Postposition: A postposition is a word that follows the noun or pronoun it modifies.

Direct object: The direct object is the noun or pronoun that receives the action of the verb.

Third person singular present tense: The third person singular present tense is the form of a verb that is used to describe an action that is happening now.

English: He allows me to go.

Punjabi: [hi]Ohnu mere jaane di khulaasa hai[/hi].

The next word is pool. English: They went to the pool to swim.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਤੈਰਾਕੀ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਪੂਲ 'ਚ ਜਾਣਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ[/hi] - They

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - The past tense marker for the subject, which is plural, and is used to agree with the subject

[hi]ਤੈਰਾਕੀ[/hi] - Swimming

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] - To do, to make

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - For

[hi]ਪੂਲ[/hi] - Pool

[hi]'ਚ[/hi] - In

[hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] - To go

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] - A marker indicating that the action was intended.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - The past tense marker for the subject, which is plural, and is used to agree with the subject. When learning, you may want to think of it like "they did."

[hi]'ਚ[/hi] - This is a very common word, and is used to indicate "in."

English: They went to the pool to swim.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਤੈਰਾਕੀ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਪੂਲ 'ਚ ਜਾਣਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is free. English: He is free today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj oh khali aa[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] means "today." This is a very common word and one of the first words you should learn.

[hi]oh[/hi] means "he/she/it." It is a gender neutral pronoun in Punjabi.

[hi]khali[/hi] means "free." This word can also mean "empty" or "vacant" in other contexts.

[hi]aa[/hi] is a verb that means "is" or "am." You may think of this as the present tense conjugation of "to be" in English.

So, the sentence is literally translated as "Today he/she/it is free." You can use the same sentence structure to say someone else is free using different pronouns.

Key Concept: Punjabi is a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) language. This means that the subject comes first, then the verb, and then the object. English is also an SVO language. This is good news for English speakers because the sentence structure will be familiar to you.

The next word is finance. English: He is involved in the finance industry.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਵਿੱਤੀ ਉਦਯੋਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - he

[hi]ਵਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - financial

[hi]ਉਦਯੋਗ[/hi] - industry

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਸ਼ਾਮਲ[/hi] - involved

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a postposition that indicates location or inclusion. It is similar to "in" in English.

The sentence structure follows the Subject-Verb-Object order, which is common in Punjabi.

English: He is involved in the finance industry.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਵਿੱਤੀ ਉਦਯੋਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is huge. English: That is a huge tree.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh [hi] [hi]vadaa [hi] [hi]rukh [hi] hai.

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh [hi] is the Punjabi word for "this" or "that" - it is a demonstrative pronoun, used to point to something.

[hi]vadaa [hi] is the Punjabi word for "huge" - it is an adjective.

[hi]rukh [hi] is the Punjabi word for "tree" - it is a noun.

[hi]hai [hi] is the Punjabi word for "is" - it is a form of the verb "to be."

Key concepts:

[hi]Eh [hi] is a demonstrative pronoun, meaning it indicates which specific tree is being discussed.

[hi]vadaa [hi] modifies the noun [hi]rukh [hi] , describing its size.

The sentence structure is simple: demonstrative pronoun + adjective + noun + verb.

English: That is a huge tree.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh [hi] [hi]vadaa [hi] [hi]rukh [hi] hai.

The next word is load. English: The truck is loaded with goods.

Punjabi: [hi]ਟਰੱਕ ਸਾਮਾਨ ਨਾਲ ਲੱਦਾ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਟਰੱਕ[/hi] - Truck (masculine noun)

[hi]ਸਾਮਾਨ[/hi] - Goods (masculine noun)

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - With (preposition)

[hi]ਲੱਦਾ[/hi] - Loaded (past participle of verb [hi]ਲੱਦਣਾ[/hi] which means "to load")

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - Is (past participle of verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] which means "to be")

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is (present tense of verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] which means "to be")

Key Concepts:

Masculine nouns: In Punjabi, nouns are either masculine or feminine. This affects the agreement of adjectives, pronouns, and verbs. The masculine noun [hi]ਟਰੱਕ[/hi] is followed by the masculine past participle [hi]ਲੱਦਾ[/hi].

Past participle: The past participle is a verb form used to describe a completed action. [hi]ਲੱਦਾ[/hi] is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਲੱਦਣਾ[/hi] which means "to load".

Preposition: The preposition [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] connects the noun [hi]ਸਾਮਾਨ[/hi] (goods) to the verb [hi]ਲੱਦਾ[/hi] (loaded).

Translation:

The truck is loaded with goods.

[hi]ਟਰੱਕ ਸਾਮਾਨ ਨਾਲ ਲੱਦਾ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is matter. English: It doesn't matter what you do.

Punjabi: [hi]tusi ki karde ho, is da koi farq ni padda[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]tusi[/hi] - you (plural, polite, used when addressing more than one person)

[hi]ki[/hi] - what

[hi]karde[/hi] - do (present continuous, informal)

[hi]ho[/hi] - are (present continuous)

[hi]is[/hi] - this

[hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]koi[/hi] - any

[hi]farq[/hi] - difference

[hi]ni[/hi] - not

[hi]padda[/hi] - matters (past tense, used as present tense)

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses the present continuous tense ([hi]karde ho[/hi]) to indicate an ongoing action.

The word [hi]da[/hi] acts as a possessive marker, similar to "of" in English.

The sentence highlights the use of negative conjugation with the word [hi]ni[/hi] which signifies "not".

The Punjabi sentence uses the past tense [hi]padda[/hi] to express the present tense concept of "matters".

English: It doesn't matter what you do.

Punjabi: [hi]tusi ki karde ho, is da koi farq ni padda[/hi]

The next word is fashion. English: She is very fashionable.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਫੈਸ਼ਨੇਬਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "she".

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This word means "very".

[hi]ਫੈਸ਼ਨੇਬਲ[/hi] - This word is the Punjabi word for "fashionable".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is". Note that the Punjabi sentence ends with a period, just like English.

Key Concepts:

This sentence uses the adjective "fashionable" to describe the subject "she".

The word order in Punjabi is different from English. The subject ([hi]ਉਹ[/hi]) comes first, followed by the adjective ([hi]ਫੈਸ਼ਨੇਬਲ[/hi]) and then the verb ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi]).

This sentence uses the word [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] ("very") to emphasize the adjective.

English: She is very fashionable.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਫੈਸ਼ਨੇਬਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is cycle. English: The cycle of life continues.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜੀਵਨ ਦਾ ਚੱਕਰ ਜਾਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜੀਵਨ[/hi] [hi]jeevan[/hi] - life

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] - of

[hi]ਚੱਕਰ[/hi] [hi]chakkar[/hi] - cycle

[hi]ਜਾਰੀ[/hi] [hi]jaari[/hi] - continues

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a possessive particle, similar to "of" in English.

[hi]ਜਾਰੀ[/hi] indicates an action that is ongoing.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is the present tense conjugation of the verb "to be".

This sentence demonstrates the use of a simple grammatical structure with the subject ([hi]ਜੀਵਨ[/hi] - life) followed by the verb ([hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is) and the object ([hi]ਚੱਕਰ[/hi] - cycle). It also showcases the use of a possessive particle ([hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of) to indicate possession.

The next word is rule. English: The rule is that we should eat our food with our hands.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਨੂੰਨ ਇਹ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਅਸੀਂ ਆਪਣਾ ਖਾਣਾ ਹੱਥਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਖਾਣਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਾਨੂੰਨ[/hi] [hi]qanoon[/hi] - This word means "rule" or "law". It is an important word to learn.

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] [hi]eh[/hi] - This word means "this" or "that".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - This is a very important verb meaning "is" or "to be"

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] [hi]ki[/hi] - This means "that". It is used to introduce a clause.

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] [hi]aseen[/hi] - This means "we".

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] [hi]aapna[/hi] - This means "our" or "our own".

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] [hi]khana[/hi] - This means "food".

[hi]ਹੱਥਾਂ[/hi] [hi]hatthan[/hi] - This means "hands".

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] [hi]naal[/hi] - This means "with".

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] [hi]khana[/hi] - This means "to eat" - You will see this word a lot.

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ[/hi] [hi]chahida[/hi] - This means "should".

This sentence is an example of a declarative sentence with a complex structure. It uses several important Punjabi words and grammar concepts.

English: The rule is that we should eat our food with our hands.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਨੂੰਨ ਇਹ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਅਸੀਂ ਆਪਣਾ ਖਾਣਾ ਹੱਥਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਖਾਣਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is complete. English: The project is complete.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਮੁਕੰਮਲ ਹੋ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ[/hi] - project. This is the subject of the sentence, what is being talked about.

[hi]ਮੁਕੰਮਲ[/hi] - complete. This is the adjective describing the state of the project. It is important to understand that in Punjabi, adjectives often come after the noun.

[hi]ਹੋ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi] - is complete. This is the verb phrase. It is the past tense and a common verb phrase to use when describing that an action is finished.

Key Concepts:

Word Order: In Punjabi, the standard word order is Subject-Object-Verb.

Adjectives: In Punjabi, adjectives usually follow the noun they describe.

Verb Phrases: Punjabi uses verb phrases to express different tenses and aspects.

English: The project is complete.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਮੁਕੰਮਲ ਹੋ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is once. English: He once went to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਵਾਰ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun)

[hi]ਇੱਕ ਵਾਰ[/hi] - Once (adverb) - [hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] means "one" and [hi]ਵਾਰ[/hi] means "time"

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - Market (noun)

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - Went (past tense verb)

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - Was (past tense auxiliary verb)

This sentence uses the past perfect tense in Punjabi ([hi]ਗਿਆ ਸੀ[/hi]), which is formed by combining the past participle of the verb ([hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi]) with the auxiliary verb "to be" in the past tense ([hi]ਸੀ[/hi]).

This indicates that the action of going to the market happened before another event in the past. The past perfect tense is used to show the sequence of events in the past.

English: He once went to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਵਾਰ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is duty. English: It is our duty to help those in need.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਡਾ ਫਰਜ਼ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਅਸੀਂ ਜ਼ਰੂਰਤਮੰਦਾਂ ਦੀ ਮਦਦ ਕਰੀਏ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਡਾ[/hi] - Our

[hi]ਫਰਜ਼[/hi] - Duty

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - that

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We

[hi]ਜ਼ਰੂਰਤਮੰਦਾਂ[/hi] - Those in need

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of

[hi]ਮਦਦ[/hi] - Help

[hi]ਕਰੀਏ[/hi] - Do

Key concepts:

[hi]ਫਰਜ਼[/hi]: This is a common word for "duty" and is often used in a moral or ethical context.

[hi]ਜ਼ਰੂਰਤਮੰਦਾਂ[/hi]: This is a helpful word to remember as it literally means "those who are in need".

English: It is our duty to help those in need.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਡਾ ਫਰਜ਼ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਅਸੀਂ ਜ਼ਰੂਰਤਮੰਦਾਂ ਦੀ ਮਦਦ ਕਰੀਏ।[/hi]

The next word is short. English: The road is short.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੜਕ ਛੋਟੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੜਕ[/hi] - [hi]sadak[/hi] - road

[hi]ਛੋਟੀ[/hi] - [hi]chhoti[/hi] - short (feminine)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (third person singular, present tense)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives agree with the gender of the noun they modify. [hi]ਸੜਕ[/hi] (sadak) is feminine, so the adjective [hi]ਛੋਟੀ[/hi] (chhoti) must also be feminine.

English: The road is short.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੜਕ ਛੋਟੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is troop. English: The troop of soldiers marched into the battlefield.

Punjabi: [hi]fauj de sipāhī jang de maidān vich march karn lagg gaye[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]fauj[/hi] - army, troop

[hi]de[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]sipāhī[/hi] - soldiers

[hi]jang[/hi] - battle, war

[hi]de[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]maidān[/hi] - field, battlefield

[hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]march[/hi] - march

[hi]karn[/hi] - to do

[hi]lagg[/hi] - start

[hi]gaye[/hi] - went

Key Concepts:

Possessive Marker: The word [hi]de[/hi] is used twice in this sentence to indicate possession. It's like saying "of" in English.

Postposition: The word [hi]vich[/hi] is a postposition, meaning it comes after the noun it modifies. It's similar to the English preposition "in."

Translation: The army soldiers started to march into the battlefield.

The next word is gun. English: He has a gun.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸ ਕੋਲ ਇੱਕ ਬੰਦੂਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸ[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, "he/she/it". It's important to note that Punjabi doesn't have separate gender-specific pronouns for he and she.

[hi]ਕੋਲ[/hi] - This word means "near" or "with" and is used to indicate possession. It is often used like "have".

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This means "one" and is used to indicate the singular form of the noun "gun."

[hi]ਬੰਦੂਕ[/hi] - This is the word for "gun".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be."

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸ ਕੋਲ ਇੱਕ ਬੰਦੂਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

English: He has a gun.

The next word is topic. English: The topic of our discussion today is Punjabi literature.

[hi]ਅੱਜ ਸਾਡੇ ਵਿਚਾਰ-ਵਟਾਂਦਰੇ ਦਾ ਵਿਸ਼ਾ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਾਹਿਤ ਹੈ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - today

[hi]ਸਾਡੇ[/hi] - our

[hi]ਵਿਚਾਰ-ਵਟਾਂਦਰੇ[/hi] - discussion (literally exchange of thoughts)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of

[hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਾ[/hi] - topic

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - Punjabi

[hi]ਸਾਹਿਤ[/hi] - literature

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

Punjabi: Today our discussion topic is Punjabi literature.

The next word is college. English: He is going to college.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਾਲਜ ਜਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਕਾਲਜ[/hi] - This is the word for "college".

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - This is the verb "to go", in the present continuous tense.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is a suffix that indicates the present continuous tense, and is used with verbs that end in "а".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the auxiliary verb "is", which is used to form the present continuous tense.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi verbs are conjugated based on the subject, tense, and aspect.

The present continuous tense is formed by adding the suffix "-а" to the verb stem and then adding the auxiliary verb "ਹੈ".

This sentence shows how to use the present continuous tense in Punjabi, which is important for expressing ongoing actions. Memorize this sentence and you will be able to use it in your own conversations.

The next word is capacity. English: The hall has a capacity of 500 people.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਾਲ ਦੀ ਸਮਰੱਥਾ 500 ਲੋਕਾਂ ਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]haal[/hi] - hall

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਸਮਰੱਥਾ[/hi] - [hi]samrattha[/hi] - capacity

[hi]500[/hi] - [hi]500[/hi] - 500

[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]lokaan[/hi] - people (plural)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is (present tense, 3rd person singular)

Key Concept:

The Punjabi word [hi]ਸਮਰੱਥਾ[/hi] ([hi]samrattha[/hi]) is a key word for capacity, and it is used in various contexts related to size, volume, or potential.

Translation: The hall has a capacity of 500 people.

The next word is too. English: It's too hot today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj bahut garmi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - Today (This is a common word that you'll see often.)

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Too, very (This is another commonly used word meaning "very" or "too." It emphasizes the degree of the following adjective.)

[hi]garmi[/hi] - Heat (This is a noun.)

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (This is the present tense of the verb "to be" in Punjabi.)

Key Concept: The structure of this sentence is similar to English. You have the subject ([hi]garmi[/hi]), the verb ([hi]hai[/hi]), and the object. The word [hi]bahut[/hi] acts as an intensifier modifying the adjective [hi]garmi[/hi].

Translation: It's too hot today.

The next word is of. English: This is a book of poems.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਕਵਿਤਾਵਾਂ ਦੀ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਕਵਿਤਾਵਾਂ[/hi] - Poems (plural noun, feminine)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of (possessive particle, feminine singular)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book (feminine noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (copula verb)

Key Concepts:

The possessive particle [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] marks possession and is used for feminine singular nouns.

The copula verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is used to link the subject (book) with the predicate (of poems).

English: This is a book of poems.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਕਵਿਤਾਵਾਂ ਦੀ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is sure. Okay, I'm ready! Please provide the English word you would like me to translate into a Punjabi sentence. I will break down the sentence for you, highlighting key grammatical concepts and pronunciation tips so that you can easily translate it using espeak-ng.

The next word is consumer. English: The consumer bought a new phone.

Punjabi: [hi]ਖਪਤਕਾਰ ਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਨਵਾਂ ਫ਼ੋਨ ਖਰੀਦਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਖਪਤਕਾਰ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "consumer". The [hi]ਕਾਰ[/hi] part means "doer" so this literally means "one who consumes".

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi particle that marks the subject of a verb in the past tense.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "a" or "one".

[hi]ਨਵਾਂ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "new".

[hi]ਫ਼ੋਨ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "phone".

[hi]ਖਰੀਦਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to buy".

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi language has particles that show the subject of a verb, a concept that is absent in English. The word [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is the Punjabi particle that marks the subject of a verb in the past tense.

Punjabi uses suffixes to modify nouns, such as the suffix [hi]ਆ[/hi] to form the past tense of verbs.

The sentence follows the structure of Subject - Object - Verb, a common structure in Punjabi.

English: The consumer bought a new phone.

Punjabi: [hi]ਖਪਤਕਾਰ ਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਨਵਾਂ ਫ਼ੋਨ ਖਰੀਦਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is officer. English: The officer is standing at the door.

Punjabi: [hi]अਫ਼ਸਰ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਤੇ ਖੜਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]अफ਼ਸर[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "officer." This is the subject of the sentence, so it is in the nominative case.

[hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "door." It is in the locative case, indicating where the officer is.

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - This is a postposition that means "on" or "at." It is used to connect the word "door" to the rest of the sentence.

[hi]ਖੜਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "standing." This is the verb and is in the present tense.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi auxiliary verb meaning "is." It is used to complete the present tense of the verb.

Key Concept: Punjabi has grammatical cases, and the words change form depending on their function in a sentence. This is very different from English, which doesn't have grammatical cases.

English: The officer is standing at the door.

Punjabi: [hi]अफ਼ਸਰ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਤੇ ਖੜਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is function. English: The function of a car is to transport people.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਦਾ ਕੰਮ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਲਿਜਾਣਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]gaddi[/hi] - car

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - possessive particle, "of"

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - [hi]kamm[/hi] - function, work, job

[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]lokaan[/hi] - people

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - to

[hi]ਲਿਜਾਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]lijaana[/hi] - to transport

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

Possessive particle: The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] indicates possession, like "of" in English.

Function: The word [hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] refers to the function, purpose or job of something.

Direct object: [hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] is the direct object of the verb [hi]ਲਿਜਾਣਾ[/hi].

To: The word [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] indicates direction, similar to "to" in English.

Present tense: The sentence is in the present tense.

English: The function of a car is to transport people.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਦਾ ਕੰਮ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਲਿਜਾਣਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is available. English: I am available today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਅੱਜ ਉਪਲਬਧ ਹਾਂ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - I

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - today

[hi]ਉਪਲਬਧ[/hi] - available

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - am

The sentence is in the present tense. The word [hi]ਉਪਲਬਧ[/hi] is an adjective that describes the subject, "I".

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi language uses a different word order than English. The subject comes before the verb.

The word [hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] is a verb, but it is also used as an auxiliary verb. It is used to form the present tense of the verb.

English: I am available today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਅੱਜ ਉਪਲਬਧ ਹਾਂ[/hi].

The next word is promise. English: I promise to help you.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਤੁਹਾਡੀ ਮਦਦ ਕਰਨ ਦਾ [hi]ਵਾਅਦਾ[/hi] ਕਰਦਾ ਹਾਂ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - I

[hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੀ[/hi] - your

[hi]ਮਦਦ[/hi] - help

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] - to do

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of

[hi]ਵਾਅਦਾ[/hi] - promise

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - I do/make

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - I am

This sentence uses the word [hi]ਵਾਅਦਾ[/hi] which means promise.

It is a common word that is used frequently.

Remember that the verb [hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] means “to do” but is often used in Punjabi to form a future tense, much like English uses “to” before a verb to indicate a future tense.

Also, be aware of the word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi], which means “of.” It is often used after a noun to indicate possession, as in this example, [hi]ਵਾਅਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਦਾ[/hi], which means "the promise."

English: I promise to help you.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਤੁਹਾਡੀ ਮਦਦ ਕਰਨ ਦਾ [hi]ਵਾਅਦਾ[/hi] ਕਰਦਾ ਹਾਂ।

The next word is bag. English: The bag is full of books.

Punjabi: [hi]ਥੈਲਾ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਭਰਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਥੈਲਾ[/hi] (thayla) - This is the Punjabi word for "bag". It is in the nominative case, indicating that it is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ[/hi] (kitaaban) - This is the Punjabi word for "books" and is in the plural form. It is in the ablative case, indicating that it is the object of the preposition "with" (implicit in the sentence).

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] (nal) - This is the Punjabi preposition "with", which is implied in the English translation.

[hi]ਭਰਿਆ[/hi] (bharya) - This is the past participle of the verb "to fill" ([hi]ਭਰਨਾ[/hi]) and it is used in the perfect aspect, indicating a completed action. It is in the masculine singular form, agreeing with the masculine singular subject, "[hi]ਥੈਲਾ[/hi]".

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] (hoya) - This is the past participle of the verb "to be" ([hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi]) and it is used in the perfect aspect, indicating a completed action. It is in the masculine singular form, agreeing with the masculine singular subject, "[hi]ਥੈਲਾ[/hi]".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai) - This is the present tense of the verb "to be" ([hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi]) and is in the masculine singular form, agreeing with the masculine singular subject, "[hi]ਥੈਲਾ[/hi]". It indicates that the bag is currently full of books.

This sentence is in the perfect aspect, which indicates that the action of filling the bag with books is completed. The sentence also uses the present tense of the verb "to be", which indicates that the bag is currently full of books.

The sentence uses the ablative case for the object of the preposition "with". This is a common feature of Punjabi grammar. The sentence also uses the past participle of the verb "to fill", which is a common way to express completed actions in Punjabi.

The next word is appear. English: The sun appeared in the sky.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੂਰਜ ਅਸਮਾਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] - [hi]sooraj[/hi] (sun) - the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਅਸਮਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]asmaan[/hi] (sky) - the location where the sun appears.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] (in) - preposition indicating location within the sky.

[hi]ਦਿਖਾਈ ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]dikhai ditta[/hi] (appeared) - the past tense of the verb "to appear". The verb is conjugated in the past tense because the sun has already appeared.

This sentence demonstrates a simple subject-verb-object structure, a common sentence structure in Punjabi. It also introduces the concept of prepositions, which are words that show the relationship between a noun or pronoun and other words in the sentence.

The next word is head. English: He is the head of the family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਦਾ ਮੁਖੀਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] - family

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of the

[hi]ਮੁਖੀਆ[/hi] - head

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi]: This is the possessive particle, indicating "of the" in this sentence. It marks the family as belonging to the person.

[hi]ਮੁਖੀਆ[/hi]: This word specifically refers to the head of the family, the leader or the one who takes charge.

Translation: He is the head of the family.

The next word is region. English: This region is known for its beautiful landscapes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਖੇਤਰ ਆਪਣੇ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਨਜ਼ਾਰਿਆਂ ਲਈ ਜਾਣਿਆ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਖੇਤਰ[/hi] - Region

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - Its

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - Beautiful

[hi]ਨਜ਼ਾਰਿਆਂ[/hi] - Landscapes

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - For

[hi]ਜਾਣਿਆ[/hi] - Known

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - Is

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - (End marker indicating a sentence)

Key concepts:

[hi]ਖੇਤਰ[/hi] - This word is important because it directly translates to "region" and is used often in Punjabi.

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - This word is a possessive pronoun meaning "its" and is very useful for showing ownership or belonging.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਖੇਤਰ ਆਪਣੇ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਨਜ਼ਾਰਿਆਂ ਲਈ ਜਾਣਿਆ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

English: This region is known for its beautiful landscapes.

The next word is block. English: They blocked the road.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਸੜਕ ਬੰਦ ਕਰ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural pronoun for "they," indicating that more than one person blocked the road.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is the past tense marker for the subject "they" and indicates that the action of blocking happened in the past.

[hi]ਸੜਕ[/hi] - This means "road."

[hi]ਬੰਦ[/hi] - This means "closed" or "blocked."

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - This is the verb "to do" or "to make."

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to give," which in this context means "to make" or "to cause" the road to be blocked.

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Punjabi has a flexible word order, but generally, the subject (who did the action) comes first, followed by the verb (what they did), and then the object (what was affected).

Tense: Punjabi uses different suffixes to indicate past, present, and future tense.

Suffixes: The past tense marker [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is used when the subject is plural and the action happened in the past.

Translation: They blocked the road.

The next word is consequence. English: The consequence of not studying is failing the exam.

Punjabi: [hi]Padhai na karne da natija imtihan vich fail hona hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Padhai[/hi] - This is the noun "study" in Punjabi.

[hi]na[/hi] - This is the negative particle "not" in Punjabi.

[hi]karne[/hi] - This is the verb "to do" conjugated to be in the present participle form to create a present continuous action. Think of this like the English "-ing" form of verbs.

[hi]da[/hi] - This is the possessive particle that means "of" or "belonging to". So it's similar to the English 's in "the dog's tail".

[hi]natija[/hi] - This is the noun "consequence" or "result" in Punjabi.

[hi]imtihan[/hi] - This is the noun "exam" in Punjabi.

[hi]vich[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "in" or "inside" in Punjabi. It is used similarly to the English word "in".

[hi]fail[/hi] - This is the verb "to fail" in Punjabi, but conjugated in the infinitive form.

[hi]hona[/hi] - This is the verb "to be" in Punjabi, conjugated in the present tense.

Key Concepts:

Present Continuous: The verb [hi]karne[/hi] is used to convey a continuous action that is happening in the present. This is a useful grammatical concept to learn in Punjabi, because it helps you express ongoing actions.

Possessive Particles: The particle [hi]da[/hi] is a very common possessive particle in Punjabi. Learning how to use it is essential to understanding Punjabi grammar.

Infinitive Forms: The word [hi]fail[/hi] is used in its infinitive form. While it can be conjugated into other tenses, the infinitive form is used in Punjabi to express a general concept of an action.

English: The consequence of not studying is failing the exam.

Punjabi: [hi]Padhai na karne da natija imtihan vich fail hona hai.[/hi]

The next word is right. English: He is right.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]ooh[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "he."

[hi]ਸਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]sahi[/hi] - This means "right" or "correct."

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be."

Key concept: Punjabi word order is subject-verb-object (SVO) just like English. The sentence is built around the verb, "to be" and then the subject, "he" and finally the adjective "right."

The word "right" can be a tricky one because it has many meanings in English. This is one of the main ways that [hi]ਸਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]sahi[/hi] is used in Punjabi.

The next word is email. English: I sent an email to my friend.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਈਮੇਲ ਭੇਜਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "I" in Punjabi. It is used to indicate the person performing the action in the sentence.

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun "my" in Punjabi. It is used to show that the email belongs to the speaker.

[hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] - This is the noun "friend" in Punjabi. It refers to the person who the email is being sent to.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the preposition "to" in Punjabi. It is used to indicate the direction of the action (sending the email).

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the indefinite article "an" in Punjabi. It indicates that the email is one among many.

[hi]ਈਮੇਲ[/hi] - This is the noun "email" in Punjabi. It refers to the electronic message being sent.

[hi]ਭੇਜਿਆ।[/hi] - This is the past tense verb "sent" in Punjabi. It shows that the action of sending the email has already happened.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses a subject-object-verb word order, which is different from English.

Punjabi uses postpositions (words that come after the noun) instead of prepositions.

The verb conjugation changes depending on the tense and the subject of the sentence.

The next word is away. English: He went away.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੂਰ ਚਲਾ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi]: This is a third-person singular pronoun meaning "he".

[hi]ਦੂਰ[/hi]: This means "far away" or "distant".

[hi]ਚਲਾ[/hi]: The verb "to go" in the past tense.

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi]: The past tense marker, indicating the action has already happened.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses a word order structure similar to English.

Punjabi verbs have different forms depending on tense.

English: He went away.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੂਰ ਚਲਾ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is rise. English: The sun rises in the east.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੂਰਜ ਪੂਰਬ ਵੱਲੋਂ ਉੱਗਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] [hi]sūraj[/hi] - sun

[hi]ਪੂਰਬ[/hi] [hi]pūrab[/hi] - east

[hi]ਵੱਲੋਂ[/hi] [hi]vallōṁ[/hi] - from, towards

[hi]ਉੱਗਦਾ[/hi] [hi]uggda[/hi] - rises

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - is

This sentence demonstrates the use of the postposition [hi]ਵੱਲੋਂ[/hi] [hi]vallōṁ[/hi] which indicates direction. It is followed by the noun [hi]ਪੂਰਬ[/hi] [hi]pūrab[/hi] (east). The verb [hi]ਉੱਗਦਾ[/hi] [hi]uggda[/hi] (rises) is in the present tense and agrees with the subject [hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] [hi]sūraj[/hi] (sun).

Key Concept: The postposition [hi]ਵੱਲੋਂ[/hi] [hi]vallōṁ[/hi] is used to indicate direction and can be translated as "from," "towards," or "in the direction of." It is typically followed by a noun or a pronoun that specifies the direction.

English: The sun rises in the east.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੂਰਜ ਪੂਰਬ ਵੱਲੋਂ ਉੱਗਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is start. ## English: She starts her work at 8 AM.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ 8 ਵਜੇ ਆਪਣਾ ਕੰਮ ਸ਼ੁਰੂ ਕਰ ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]pronounced "oh-nay"[/hi] - She (subject, feminine singular)

[hi]8 ਵਜੇ[/hi] - [hi]pronounced "aathh vajay"[/hi] - at 8 o'clock (time)

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]pronounced "aa-pna"[/hi] - her (possessive adjective)

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - [hi]pronounced "kamm"[/hi] - work (noun)

[hi]ਸ਼ੁਰੂ[/hi] - [hi]pronounced "shuru"[/hi] - start (verb)

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - [hi]pronounced "kar"[/hi] - do (verb)

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]pronounced "ditta"[/hi] - gave/started (past tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]pronounced "nay"[/hi] is a suffix that is used to mark the subject in a sentence, specifically when the subject is performing an action.

[hi]ਵਜੇ[/hi] - [hi]pronounced "vajey"[/hi] is a suffix that is used to indicate time.

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]pronounced "aa-pna"[/hi] is a possessive adjective that is used to indicate ownership.

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - [hi]pronounced "kar"[/hi] is a common verb that can be used with many other verbs to form a compound verb.

English: She starts her work at 8 AM.

The next word is select. English: He selected the red apple.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਲਾਲ ਸੇਬ ਚੁਣਿਆ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He (masculine singular, subject pronoun)

[hi]ਲਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]laal[/hi] - red

[hi]ਸੇਬ[/hi] - [hi]seb[/hi] - apple

[hi]ਚੁਣਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]chunya[/hi] - selected (past tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi word [hi]ਚੁਣਿਆ[/hi] is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਚੁਣਨਾ[/hi] which means to select.

Notice that the gender of the subject ([hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi]) influences the gender of the verb ([hi]ਚੁਣਿਆ[/hi]).

English: He selected the red apple.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਲਾਲ ਸੇਬ ਚੁਣਿਆ[/hi]

The next word is ability. English: He has the ability to speak Punjabi fluently.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਬੋਲਣ ਦੀ ਸਮਰੱਥਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is a combination of the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he) and the dative marker [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] (to/for). It indicates that the following action is directed towards the person referred to as 'he.'

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - This word means 'Punjabi' and refers to the language.

[hi]ਬੋਲਣ[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb 'to speak' and refers to the action.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is a possessive marker indicating that the following noun (ability) belongs to the action 'speaking Punjabi.'

[hi]ਸਮਰੱਥਾ[/hi] - This word means 'ability' or 'capacity'.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb 'to be' and indicates that the statement is a fact.

This sentence demonstrates a typical structure of a Punjabi sentence: Subject - Object - Verb. The key concept to note is the use of the dative marker [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] to indicate that the ability to speak Punjabi is directed towards 'he.'

The next word is make. English: I make food every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਖਾਣਾ ਬਣਾਉਂਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - I (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - every

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] - day

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - food

[hi]ਬਣਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - make (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - am (present tense, first person singular, auxiliary verb)

Key Concepts:

The verb [hi]ਬਣਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] is conjugated to agree with the masculine singular subject [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi].

The word order is subject-verb-object, as in English.

[hi]ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] is a compound word meaning "every day."

English: I make food every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਖਾਣਾ ਬਣਾਉਂਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is than. English: He is taller than me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਰੇ ਨਾਲੋਂ ਲੰਬਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun, subject)

[hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]mere[/hi] - My (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਨਾਲੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]naalon[/hi] - Than (postposition)

[hi]ਲੰਬਾ[/hi] - [hi]lambaa[/hi] - Tall (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - Is (verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

Postposition: In Punjabi, "than" is expressed using the postposition [hi]ਨਾਲੋਂ[/hi] [hi]naalon[/hi]. It follows the noun or pronoun it modifies.

Word Order: Punjabi sentence structure is generally subject-verb-object (SVO) but can be flexible. Here, the adjective comes before the verb.

Translation: He is taller than me.

The next word is flower. English: The flower is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਫੁੱਲ ਸੋਹਣਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਫੁੱਲ[/hi] - [hi]phull[/hi] (flower) - The subject of the sentence, it is in the singular form.

[hi]ਸੋਹਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]sohna[/hi] (beautiful) - This is an adjective describing the flower. It is in the singular masculine form to agree with the singular masculine noun [hi]ਫੁੱਲ[/hi].

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] (is) - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be," indicating that the flower is currently beautiful.

Key Concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns have grammatical gender (masculine, feminine, or neuter). [hi]ਫੁੱਲ[/hi] is a masculine noun.

Agreement: Adjectives in Punjabi must agree in gender and number with the noun they modify. Here, [hi]ਸੋਹਣਾ[/hi] agrees with [hi]ਫੁੱਲ[/hi] in being masculine and singular.

Word order: Punjabi is a subject-verb-object (SVO) language, similar to English. The sentence structure follows the typical SVO order.

The next word is month. English: This month is very busy for me.

Punjabi: [hi]ഈ ਮਹੀਨਾ ਮੇਰੇ ਲਈ ਬਹੁਤ ਰੁਝਾਨ ਵਾਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ഈ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਮਹੀਨਾ[/hi] - month (noun)

[hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] - my (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for (preposition)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very (adverb)

[hi]ਰੁਝਾਨ ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] - busy (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (verb)

Key concepts:

Demonstrative pronouns: [hi]ഈ[/hi] is a demonstrative pronoun that refers to the month being discussed.

Possessive pronouns: [hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] indicates that the month is busy "for me".

Adjectives: [hi]ਰੁਝਾਨ ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] modifies the noun "month".

Prepositions: [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] shows the relationship between the month and the speaker.

Translation: This month is very busy for me.

The next word is way. English: He came this way.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇਸ ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ ਆਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - he/she/it

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - [hi]is[/hi] - this

[hi]ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]tarhan[/hi] - way, manner, like this

[hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]aaya[/hi] - came

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] is a common word used to express manner or way, similar to "like" in English.

The word order in Punjabi is typically Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), which is different from English's Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) order.

English: He came this way.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇਸ ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ ਆਇਆ।[/hi]

The next word is reality. English: Reality is often disappointing.

Punjabi: [hi]Haqeeqat aksar nirashajanak hoti hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Haqeeqat[/hi] - Reality (noun, feminine)

[hi]akasar[/hi] - Often (adverb)

[hi]nirashajanak[/hi] - Disappointing (adjective, feminine)

[hi]hoti hai[/hi] - Is (verb, present tense, third person singular, feminine)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives and verbs must agree in gender with the noun they modify. The noun "[hi]haqeeqat[/hi]" is feminine, so the adjective "[hi]nirashajanak[/hi]" and the verb "[hi]hoti hai[/hi]" are also feminine.

Word Order: The typical word order in Punjabi sentences is subject-object-verb (SOV). In this sentence, the subject is "[hi]haqeeqat[/hi]", the object is implied (disappointment), and the verb is "[hi]hoti hai[/hi]".

English: Reality is often disappointing.

Punjabi: [hi]Haqeeqat aksar nirashajanak hoti hai.[/hi]

The next word is society. English: Society is made up of many people.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਮਾਜ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰੇ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਦਾ ਬਣਿਆ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਮਾਜ[/hi] - [hi]samaaj[/hi] - society (noun)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - many, much (adverb)

[hi]ਸਾਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]saare[/hi] - all (adjective)

[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]lokaan[/hi] - people (noun, plural)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਬਣਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]bania[/hi] - made, formed (past participle)

[hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]hunda[/hi] - is (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is (present tense, feminine singular)

Key concepts:

The sentence uses the present tense to describe a general truth about society.

The word [hi]ਸਮਾਜ[/hi] is used as the subject of the sentence.

The word [hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] is used as the object of the sentence.

The sentence is constructed in a typical subject-verb-object structure.

English: Society is made up of many people.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਮਾਜ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰੇ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਦਾ ਬਣਿਆ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is sell. English: He sells books.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਵੇਚਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third-person singular masculine pronoun, meaning "he". It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the noun [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] meaning "book". It is the object of the verb.

[hi]ਵੇਚਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense, third-person singular masculine form of the verb [hi]ਵੇਚਣਾ[/hi] meaning "to sell".

Key concepts:

Subject-verb-object sentence structure is common in Punjabi.

Verb conjugations change based on person, number and tense.

Punjabi is a gendered language, meaning that nouns and pronouns are marked for gender.

English: He sells books.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਵੇਚਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is advantage. English: He has an advantage over his competitors.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਮੁਕਾਬਲੇਬਾਜ਼ਾਂ ਉੱਤੇ ਫ਼ਾਇਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi]: This translates to "him" or "to him." This is the indirect object of the verb.

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi]: This word means "his" or "his own" and modifies the noun "[hi]ਮੁਕਾਬਲੇਬਾਜ਼ਾਂ[/hi]".

[hi]ਮੁਕਾਬਲੇਬਾਜ਼ਾਂ[/hi]: This is the plural form of "[hi]ਮੁਕਾਬਲੇਬਾਜ਼[/hi]" meaning "competitor" or "rival".

[hi]ਉੱਤੇ[/hi]: This means "on" or "over" and indicates the advantage is being held over someone.

[hi]ਫ਼ਾਇਦਾ[/hi]: This is the word for "advantage" or "benefit". It is the direct object of the verb "has".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: This is the present tense verb "is". It connects the subject and the direct object.

Key concepts:

Indirect object: The person receiving the advantage, "[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi]".

Direct object: The advantage itself, "[hi]ਫ਼ਾਇਦਾ[/hi]".

Postposition: "[hi]ਉੱਤੇ[/hi]" functions as a postposition, indicating location and direction.

English: He has an advantage over his competitors.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਮੁਕਾਬਲੇਬਾਜ਼ਾਂ ਉੱਤੇ ਫ਼ਾਇਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is create. English: She creates beautiful paintings.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਤਸਵੀਰਾਂ ਬਣਾਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - She

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - beautiful

[hi]ਤਸਵੀਰਾਂ[/hi] - paintings

[hi]ਬਣਾਉਂਦੀ[/hi] - creates

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is.

The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb. The sentence is in the present tense, and the verb "creates" is conjugated for the third-person singular feminine, which is why we use [hi]ਬਣਾਉਂਦੀ[/hi]. The word [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is an auxiliary verb that indicates present tense.

Key Concepts

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a common auxiliary verb used to indicate present tense.

Punjabi word order is subject-object-verb, making it different from English.

[hi]ਬਣਾਉਂਦੀ[/hi] is a conjugation of the verb "to create," which is in the third person singular feminine.

English: She creates beautiful paintings.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਤਸਵੀਰਾਂ ਬਣਾਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is great. English: This is a great idea.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh ehda [hi]vadiya [hi]vichar hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh [hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ehda [hi] - of this (possessive pronoun)

[hi]vadiya [hi] - great (adjective)

[hi]vichar [hi] - idea (noun)

[hi]hai [hi] - is (verb)

Here, we have a simple sentence with a demonstrative pronoun followed by a possessive pronoun that modifies a noun. This indicates that the speaker is referring to a specific idea that was previously mentioned or implied. The adjective "vadiya" describes the idea. The verb "hai" means "is" and connects the subject ("ehda vichar") to the predicate ("vadiya").

The next word is risk. English: He took a risk by investing in that company.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne ohi company vich invest karke risk liya[/hi].

Breakdown:

- [hi]Usne[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun)

- [hi]ohi[/hi] - That (demonstrative pronoun)

- [hi]company[/hi] - Company (noun)

- [hi]vich[/hi] - in (preposition)

- [hi]invest[/hi] - to invest (verb)

- [hi]karke[/hi] - by doing (postposition)

- [hi]risk[/hi] - risk (noun)

- [hi]liya[/hi] - took (verb)

Key Concepts:

- [hi]vich[/hi] is a preposition that signifies location, similar to "in" in English.

- [hi]karke[/hi] is a postposition that indicates the means or way something is done.

English: He took a risk by investing in that company.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne ohi company vich invest karke risk liya[/hi].

The next word is moment. English: The moment is passing quickly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੌਕਾ ਤੇਜੀ ਨਾਲ ਲੰਘ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੌਕਾ[/hi] - [hi]mouka[/hi] - means "moment" or "opportunity" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਤੇਜੀ ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]tejī nāl[/hi] - means "quickly" or "at a fast pace."

[hi]ਲੰਘ[/hi] - [hi]langha[/hi] - means "pass" or "go by."

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]riha hai[/hi] - means "is" or "is going."

The sentence uses the present continuous tense in Punjabi, which is formed by using the present participle of the verb ([hi]ਲੰਘ ਰਿਹਾ[/hi]) followed by the auxiliary verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai).

This sentence is a great example of how Punjabi can express nuanced meaning with simple words and grammatical structures.

The next word is different. English: They are all different.

Punjabi: [hi]Oh saare alag-alag ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Oh[/hi] - These

[hi]saare[/hi] - all

[hi]alag-alag[/hi] - different

[hi]ne[/hi] - are

Key Concepts:

[hi]alag-alag[/hi] is an adjective meaning "different." It is often used to emphasize the distinct nature of things or people.

[hi]ne[/hi] is a verb ending that indicates the present tense.

The sentence uses the plural form of the noun because it refers to multiple things.

English: They are all different.

Punjabi: [hi]Oh saare alag-alag ne[/hi].

The next word is patient. English: The doctor is very patient with his patients.

Punjabi: ਡਾਕਟਰ ਆਪਣੇ ਮਰੀਜ਼ਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਬਹੁਤ [hi]ਧੀਰ[/hi] ਹੈ।

[hi]ḍākṭar āpane marižān nāl bahut dhir hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ḍākṭar[/hi] - doctor

[hi]āpane[/hi] - his

[hi]marižān[/hi] - patients

[hi]nāl[/hi] - with

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]dhir[/hi] - patient

Key Concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb.

The word [hi]nāl[/hi] is a postposition that indicates with. This is different than English which uses the preposition "with".

The word [hi]dhir[/hi] is an adjective and is used to describe the doctor.

English Translation: The doctor is very patient with his patients.

Punjabi Translation: ਡਾਕਟਰ ਆਪਣੇ ਮਰੀਜ਼ਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਬਹੁਤ [hi]ਧੀਰ[/hi] ਹੈ।

[hi]ḍākṭar āpane marižān nāl bahut dhir hai[/hi].

The next word is catch. English: He caught the ball.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਗੇਂਦ ਫੜੀ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine form of the pronoun "he." It acts as the subject of the verb "caught" in this sentence.

[hi]ਗੇਂਦ[/hi] - This means "ball." It acts as the direct object of the verb "caught."

[hi]ਫੜੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to catch" in the third person singular feminine form. The verb agrees in gender with the direct object "ball."

Important Concept: This sentence shows how the verb in Punjabi agrees with the direct object in gender. While English uses a single form for the past tense of "catch," Punjabi uses different forms depending on the gender of the object being caught.

Translation: He caught the ball.

The next word is rock. English: The rock is heavy.

Punjabi: [hi]pathar bhārī ā[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]pathar[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "rock". It's a noun.

[hi]bhārī[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "heavy". It's an adjective.

[hi]ā[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is" or "is a". This is a verb.

Key Concepts:

Word Order: In Punjabi, the adjective ([hi]bhārī[/hi]) usually comes after the noun ([hi]pathar[/hi]).

Gender: Notice how the adjective changes depending on the gender of the noun. In this case, [hi]pathar[/hi] (rock) is a masculine noun.

Simple Sentences: The structure of this sentence follows the typical pattern of a simple sentence: Subject + Verb + Object (or adjective in this case).

Translation: The rock is heavy.

The next word is war. English: The war was horrific.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜੰਗ ਭਿਆਨਕ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜੰਗ[/hi] (jang) - This is the word for "war". You can remember this word as it sounds similar to the English word "jungle" and war is often found in jungles.

[hi]ਭਿਆਨਕ[/hi] (bhianak) - This is the word for "horrific" and means very scary and terrible.

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] (si) - This is the past tense of the verb "to be".

English: The war was horrific.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜੰਗ ਭਿਆਨਕ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is wrong. English: This is the wrong answer.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh galat jawab hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]galat[/hi] - wrong (adjective)

[hi]jawab[/hi] - answer (noun)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

Demonstrative Pronoun: "Eh" (This) is a demonstrative pronoun that points to a specific thing or idea that is near the speaker.

Adjective: "galat" (wrong) is an adjective that describes the noun "jawab" (answer).

Noun: "jawab" (answer) is the subject of the sentence and refers to the incorrect response.

Verb: "hai" (is) is the verb in the present tense and connects the subject with the adjective.

This sentence demonstrates the simple present tense structure in Punjabi. You can use this sentence as a model for other similar sentences. For example:

[hi]Eh galat kitab hai[/hi] (This is the wrong book.)

[hi]Eh galat raah hai[/hi] (This is the wrong path.)

The next word is tonight. English: Tonight, we will eat dinner.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅੱਜ ਰਾਤ[/hi] ਅਸੀਂ ਰਾਤ ਦਾ ਖਾਣਾ ਖਾਵਾਂਗੇ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅੱਜ ਰਾਤ[/hi] - "tonight" - this phrase combines the words for "today" ([hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi]) and "night" ([hi]ਰਾਤ[/hi])

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - "we" - this is the subject pronoun in the sentence

[hi]ਰਾਤ ਦਾ ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - "dinner" - literally "food of the night"

[hi]ਖਾਵਾਂਗੇ[/hi] - "will eat" - this is the future tense of the verb "to eat" ([hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi])

Key concepts:

The Punjabi language uses postpositions instead of prepositions. The word for "of" is used after a noun, in this case [hi]ਰਾਤ ਦਾ[/hi] "of the night."

Punjabi verbs conjugate for person, number, and tense. In this case, the verb [hi]ਖਾਵਾਂਗੇ[/hi] is in the future tense.

English: Tonight, we will eat dinner.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅੱਜ ਰਾਤ[/hi] ਅਸੀਂ ਰਾਤ ਦਾ ਖਾਣਾ ਖਾਵਾਂਗੇ।

The next word is security. English: The security guard is on duty at the gate.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੇਟ 'ਤੇ ਸੁਰੱਖਿਆ ਗਾਰਡ ਡਿਊਟੀ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੇਟ[/hi] = gate

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] = on

[hi]ਸੁਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi] = security

[hi]ਗਾਰਡ[/hi] = guard

[hi]ਡਿਊਟੀ[/hi] = duty

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] = on

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] = is.

Key Concepts:

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is a postposition meaning "on" or "at." It is used to indicate location.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a verb meaning "is." It is used to describe a state of being.

English: The security guard is on duty at the gate.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੇਟ 'ਤੇ ਸੁਰੱਖਿਆ ਗਾਰਡ ਡਿਊਟੀ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is guide. English: He guides the students.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਸੇਧ ਦਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] - Students (plural)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - to (postposition)

[hi]ਸੇਧ[/hi] - guidance

[hi]ਦਿੰਦਾ[/hi] - gives (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense, auxiliary verb)

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions, such as [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] (to) instead of "to".

Gender and Number Agreement: Verbs in Punjabi agree with their subjects in gender and number. In this sentence, [hi]ਦਿੰਦਾ[/hi] is masculine singular to agree with [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he).

Auxiliary Verb: The verb [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] acts as an auxiliary verb, similar to "is" in English, to complete the present tense.

English: He guides the students.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਸੇਧ ਦਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is basic. English: This is the basic structure of the house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਘਰ ਦੀ ਮੂਲ ਢਾਂਚਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - House (noun)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਮੂਲ[/hi] - Basic (adjective)

[hi]ਢਾਂਚਾ[/hi] - Structure (noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (copula verb)

Key concepts:

Possessive particle: The possessive particle [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] indicates that the structure belongs to the house.

Copula verb: The copula verb [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] connects the subject ([hi]ਇਹ ਘਰ ਦੀ ਮੂਲ ਢਾਂਚਾ[/hi]) to the predicate ([hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]).

This sentence uses the Punjabi word [hi]ਮੂਲ[/hi] meaning "basic" to express the basic structure of the house.

The next word is culture. English: Our culture is rich and varied.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਡੀ ਸੱਭਿਆਚਾਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਅਮੀਰ ਔਰ ਵਿਭਿੰਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਡੀ[/hi] - means "our" (this is the possessive form of [hi]ਸਾਡਾ[/hi] meaning "our").

[hi]ਸੱਭਿਆਚਾਰ[/hi] - means "culture" (this is the Punjabi word for culture).

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - means "very" or "much".

[hi]ਅਮੀਰ[/hi] - means "rich" (often referring to wealth, but in this case, refers to richness of culture).

[hi]ਔਰ[/hi] - means "and".

[hi]ਵਿਭਿੰਨ[/hi] - means "varied" or "diverse".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - means "is". (the final "।" marks the end of the sentence).

Key Concept: Punjabi uses a similar sentence structure as English, with subject-verb-object.

The next word is generally. English: Generally, people like to eat spicy food.

Punjabi: [hi]Sadharan roop vich, log tez khana khana pasand karn de ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Sadharan roop vich[/hi] This translates to "generally" or "in general". [hi]Sadharan[/hi] means "general" and [hi]roop[/hi] means "form" or "manner". [hi]vich[/hi] is a postposition that means "in" or "within".

[hi]log[/hi] means "people"

[hi]tez[/hi] means "spicy" or "hot"

[hi]khana[/hi] means "food"

[hi]khana[/hi] means "to eat". Note the repetition here.

[hi]pasand[/hi] means "like" or "enjoy"

[hi]karna[/hi] means "to do". It is often used in conjunction with other verbs to form the present continuous tense.

[hi]de ne[/hi] is the Punjabi equivalent of "are". In this sentence, it means "they are".

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions.

Punjabi uses word repetition to convey the present continuous tense.

Punjabi uses a different word order than English.

English: Generally, people like to eat spicy food.

Punjabi: [hi]Sadharan roop vich, log tez khana khana pasand karn de ne[/hi].

The next word is season. English: The seasons change throughout the year.

Punjabi: [hi]Saal wich mausam badaldey rahende ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Saal[/hi] means "year" and is in the nominative case, meaning it is the subject of the verb.

[hi]wich[/hi] means "in" and it is a postposition meaning it comes after the noun it modifies. In this case it is modifying [hi]Saal[/hi].

[hi]mausam[/hi] means "season" and is the object of the verb. It is in the nominative case, since it is the thing that is changing.

[hi]badaldey[/hi] is the present continuous tense of the verb "to change"

[hi]rahende[/hi] means "remain" or "continue". In this case it indicates that the changing of the seasons is an ongoing process.

[hi]ne[/hi] is the plural marker, indicating that the seasons are plural.

The sentence [hi]Saal wich mausam badaldey rahende ne[/hi]. means "The seasons change throughout the year".

The next word is cent. English: He paid one hundred rupees for that book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਉਸ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਸੌ ਰੁਪਏ ਦਿੱਤੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine subject pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਉਸ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine object pronoun, meaning "that".

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - This is the noun "book".

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - This is the postposition "for".

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the number "one".

[hi]ਸੌ[/hi] - This is the number "hundred".

[hi]ਰੁਪਏ[/hi] - This is the noun "rupees".

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੇ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to give".

Key concept: In Punjabi, the postposition [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] is used to indicate the purpose or reason for something.

Translation: He paid one hundred rupees for that book.

The next word is quote. English: He quoted the famous lines from the play.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne natak de mashhoor sher [hi] [hi]kohne[/hi] [hi]dikhe[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (pronoun)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has (verb, auxiliary)

[hi]natak[/hi] - play (noun)

[hi]de[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]mashhoor[/hi] - famous (adjective)

[hi]sher[/hi] - lines (noun, plural)

[hi]kohne[/hi] - quoted (verb, past participle)

[hi]dikhe[/hi] - showed (verb, past tense)

English Translation: He quoted the famous lines from the play.

The next word is possibility. English: There is a possibility that he will come.

Punjabi: [hi]Usde aane di sambhavna hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usde[/hi] - This is the possessive form of the pronoun [hi]us[/hi] (he) meaning his.

[hi]aane[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb [hi]aana[/hi] (to come).

[hi]di[/hi] - This is the postposition indicating possession (of).

[hi]sambhavna[/hi] - This is the noun meaning possibility.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense conjugation of the verb [hi]hona[/hi] (to be).

English: There is a possibility that he will come.

Punjabi: [hi]Usde aane di sambhavna hai[/hi].

The next word is pair. English: The pair of shoes is very expensive.

Punjabi: [hi]जूਤੀਆਂ ਦੀ ਜੋੜੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਹਿੰਗੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]जूतीਆਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of [hi]जूਤਾ[/hi], which means "shoe". It is in the genitive case to show possession.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is the feminine singular form of the possessive particle "da". It shows possession.

[hi]ਜੋੜੀ[/hi] - This means "pair". It is in the nominative case.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This means "very". It is an adverb modifying "expensive".

[hi]ਮਹਿੰਗੀ[/hi] - This means "expensive". It is an adjective modifying "pair".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense singular form of the verb "to be".

The sentence literally means: "The shoes' pair is very expensive". However, in English, we say: "The pair of shoes is very expensive".

The next word is comfortable. English: He is comfortable in his new home.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਨਵੇਂ ਘਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਆਰਾਮਦਾਇਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He, this is the subject of the sentence. It is in the third person singular.

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - his, this is a possessive pronoun showing ownership of the new home.

[hi]ਨਵੇਂ[/hi] - new, this describes the home and is an adjective.

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - home, this is a noun and the object of the preposition [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi]

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in, this is a preposition which shows location.

[hi]ਆਰਾਮਦਾਇਕ[/hi] - comfortable, this is the adjective describing him (the subject).

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is, this is the copula verb which links the subject to the adjective.

Key concepts:

This sentence uses a copula verb to link the subject to the adjective.

The adjective [hi]ਆਰਾਮਦਾਇਕ[/hi] is a very important word to learn and is often used in everyday language.

The preposition [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is also very important and it is often used in the same way as the English word "in".

English: He is comfortable in his new home.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਨਵੇਂ ਘਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਆਰਾਮਦਾਇਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is particular. English: She has a particular fondness for Punjabi food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਖਾਣੇ ਦਾ ਖਾਸ ਚਾਅ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of the third person singular feminine pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (she), indicating the recipient of the fondness.

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਖਾਣੇ ਦਾ[/hi] - This is a possessive phrase, with [hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] (Punjabi food) being the noun and [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] (of) indicating possession.

[hi]ਖਾਸ ਚਾਅ[/hi] - This is the noun phrase meaning 'particular fondness'. [hi]ਖਾਸ[/hi] (particular) is an adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਚਾਅ[/hi] (fondness).

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense verb 'is' in the third person singular.

Key concepts:

Dative case

Possessive phrase

Adjective modifying a noun

English: She has a particular fondness for Punjabi food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਖਾਣੇ ਦਾ ਖਾਸ ਚਾਅ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is modern. English: This is a modern building.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh ek adhunik imaarat hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ek[/hi] - a (indefinite article)

[hi]adhunik[/hi] - modern (adjective)

[hi]imaarat[/hi] - building (noun)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense of the verb 'to be')

Key Concept: [hi]adhunik[/hi] is a common word used to describe something as modern in Punjabi, and [hi]imaarat[/hi] is a useful vocabulary word for building.

The next word is respond. Please provide an English word so I can create a Punjabi sentence, breakdown, and translation for you! I am eager to share my knowledge of the Punjabi language with you.

The next word is single. English: He is a single man.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਕੁਆਰਾ ਆਦਮੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - he/she/it (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - one/a/an (indefinite article)

[hi]ਕੁਆਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]kuwara[/hi] - single, unmarried (adjective)

[hi]ਆਦਮੀ[/hi] - [hi]aadaami[/hi] - man (noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is (present tense verb, 3rd person singular)

Key Concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb (SOV), which is different from the subject-verb-object (SVO) order in English.

[hi]ਕੁਆਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]kuwara[/hi] is a useful adjective to know for describing someone who is unmarried, it is the equivalent of the English "single" or "unmarried"

Translation: He is a single man.

The next word is access. English: We need to access the library's online database.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਦੇ ਔਨਲਾਈਨ ਡਾਟਾਬੇਸ ਤੱਕ ਪਹੁੰਚ ਕਰਨ ਦੀ ਲੋੜ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]saanoo[/hi] - to us, we

[hi]ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]laibreri[/hi] - library

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]ਔਨਲਾਈਨ[/hi] - [hi]online[/hi] - online

[hi]ਡਾਟਾਬੇਸ[/hi] - [hi]database[/hi] - database

[hi]ਤੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]tak[/hi] - up to, until

[hi]ਪਹੁੰਚ[/hi] - [hi]pahuanch[/hi] - access

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] - [hi]karan[/hi] - to do, to make

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]ਲੋੜ[/hi] - [hi]loor[/hi] - need

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is, exists

Key concepts:

The postposition [hi]ਤੱਕ[/hi] ([hi]tak[/hi]) is used to indicate up to or until a certain point.

The noun [hi]ਪਹੁੰਚ[/hi] ([hi]pahuanch[/hi]) is used to express access.

The verb [hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] ([hi]karan[/hi]) is used to indicate an action or process.

The noun [hi]ਲੋੜ[/hi] ([hi]loor[/hi]) is used to express need or necessity.

English: We need to access the library's online database.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਦੇ ਔਨਲਾਈਨ ਡਾਟਾਬੇਸ ਤੱਕ ਪਹੁੰਚ ਕਰਨ ਦੀ ਲੋੜ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is primary. English: The primary reason for this is the lack of funding.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਦਾ ਮੁੱਖ ਕਾਰਨ ਫੰਡਾਂ ਦੀ ਘਾਟ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (referring to the reason)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - Of

[hi]ਮੁੱਖ[/hi] - Primary

[hi]ਕਾਰਨ[/hi] - Reason

[hi]ਫੰਡਾਂ[/hi] - Funds

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of

[hi]ਘਾਟ[/hi] - Lack

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is

Key Concept: [hi]ਮੁੱਖ[/hi] translates to primary, and it's a very important word to know. It's used frequently in everyday conversation and can be used to emphasize the main reason or point.

The next word is measure. English: We measure the cloth with a tape measure.

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਕੱਪੜੇ ਨੂੰ ਟੇਪ ਨਾਲ ਮਾਪਦੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਕੱਪੜੇ ਨੂੰ ਟੇਪ ਨਾਲ ਮਾਪਦੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]asīṁ[/hi] - we

[hi]ਕੱਪੜੇ[/hi] - [hi]kapaṛe[/hi] - cloth

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nūṁ[/hi] - to, towards, at

[hi]ਟੇਪ[/hi] - [hi]ṭēp[/hi] - tape

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]nāl[/hi] - with

[hi]ਮਾਪਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]māpade[/hi] - measure (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹਾਂ।[/hi] - [hi]hāṁ.[/hi] - are (present tense)

Key concepts:

The word [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] ([hi]nūṁ[/hi]) is used to indicate the object being measured, in this case the cloth.

The word [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] ([hi]nāl[/hi]) means "with" and is used to indicate the tool used for measuring, which is the tape measure.

The verb [hi]ਮਾਪਦੇ[/hi] ([hi]māpade[/hi]) is in the present continuous tense, indicating an ongoing action.

This example highlights how Punjabi incorporates the tool used for the action, in this case the tape measure.

The next word is argument. English: They had a heated argument about the price of the car.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਕਾਰ ਦੀ ਕੀਮਤ ਬਾਰੇ ਗਰਮ ਬਹਿਸ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural pronoun "they" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is the particle that indicates a past tense action done by the subject, similar to "did" in English.

[hi]ਕਾਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "car".

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is the possessive marker for "of the", indicating possession of the car.

[hi]ਕੀਮਤ[/hi] - This is the word for "price".

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - This means "about" or "regarding".

[hi]ਗਰਮ[/hi] - This is the adjective "heated" or "intense" referring to the argument.

[hi]ਬਹਿਸ[/hi] - This is the word for "argument".

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do" in Punjabi.

Key Concept: In Punjabi, verbs are conjugated based on the subject and tense. This sentence uses the past tense conjugation of the verb "to do", which is "[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi]"

The next word is healthy. English: He is healthy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਿਹਤਮੰਦ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he".

[hi]ਸਿਹਤਮੰਦ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "healthy". It is an adjective describing the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is". It acts as the verb in the sentence.

Key Concept: The word order in Punjabi is Subject - Adjective - Verb, which differs from the typical Subject - Verb - Adjective order in English.

Translation: He is healthy.

The next word is profit. English: The shopkeeper made a profit from selling his goods.

Punjabi: [hi]ਦੁਕਾਨਦਾਰ ਨੇ ਆਪਣਾ ਸਮਾਨ ਵੇਚ ਕੇ ਮੁਨਾਫਾ ਕਮਾਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਦੁਕਾਨਦਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]dukaan daar[/hi] - shopkeeper

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]ne[/hi] - has/have (used in past tense after a subject)

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]aapna[/hi] - his/her/its/one's own

[hi]ਸਮਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]samaan[/hi] - goods

[hi]ਵੇਚ[/hi] - [hi]vech[/hi] - to sell (past tense)

[hi]ਕੇ[/hi] - [hi]ke[/hi] - by (used to show the way something is done)

[hi]ਮੁਨਾਫਾ[/hi] - [hi]munafa[/hi] - profit

[hi]ਕਮਾਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]kamaiya[/hi] - earned (past tense)

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: The subject, [hi]ਦੁਕਾਨਦਾਰ[/hi] (shopkeeper), is singular, so the verb [hi]ਕਮਾਇਆ[/hi] (earned) is also in the singular form.

Past Tense: The sentence is in the past tense, indicated by the verb [hi]ਕਮਾਇਆ[/hi] (earned) and the auxiliary verb [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] (has/have).

Postposition: The word [hi]ਕੇ[/hi] (by) is a postposition, which means it comes after the noun it modifies. It is used to show the way in which the action was done.

Remember: [hi]ਕੇ[/hi] (ke) is a very useful postposition that can be used in many different ways. It often translates to "by," "with," or "through."

English: The shopkeeper made a profit from selling his goods.

Punjabi: [hi]ਦੁਕਾਨਦਾਰ ਨੇ ਆਪਣਾ ਸਮਾਨ ਵੇਚ ਕੇ ਮੁਨਾਫਾ ਕਮਾਇਆ।[/hi]

The next word is fit. English: The shirt fits me perfectly.

Punjabi: [hi]Kurta mainu bilkul theek lagda hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Kurta[/hi] - shirt (this is the noun in the sentence)

[hi]mainu[/hi] - to me (this is the indirect object of the sentence, the person that the shirt fits)

[hi]bilkul[/hi] - perfectly (this is an adverb, modifying the verb)

[hi]theek[/hi] - fits (this is the verb, describing the action of the shirt fitting)

[hi]lagda hai[/hi] - (this is a grammatical ending that means "is", "appears", "seems", or "feels" depending on context)

Key Concept: In Punjabi, the verb "to fit" is often expressed by the word [hi]theek[/hi]. You can use this verb for clothing, shoes, or anything that fits your body.

English: The shirt fits me perfectly.

Punjabi: [hi]Kurta mainu bilkul theek lagda hai[/hi].

The next word is carry. English: He carries a heavy bag.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਭਾਰੀ ਬੈਗ ਚੁੱਕਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - a

[hi]ਭਾਰੀ[/hi] - heavy

[hi]ਬੈਗ[/hi] - bag

[hi]ਚੁੱਕਦਾ[/hi] - carries (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is. (This indicates present tense)

This sentence uses the present tense and masculine singular form of the verb "carry." Note that in Punjabi, the verb changes depending on the subject (he, she, it, they, etc.) and the tense.

Key Concept: The use of the verb [hi]ਚੁੱਕਦਾ[/hi] demonstrates the change in verbs based on tense and subject.

The next word is open. English: The door is open.

Punjabi: [hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਖੁੱਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ[/hi] - [hi]darvāzā[/hi] - This is the word for "door". It is a masculine noun.

[hi]ਖੁੱਲਾ[/hi] - [hi]khullā[/hi] - This is the word for "open". It is an adjective, and it modifies the noun "[hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ[/hi]"

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be". It is conjugated in the third person singular.

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi word order is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV)

The adjective usually comes before the noun it modifies.

The verb "to be" in Punjabi is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]hai[/hi]) and has many different conjugations depending on person, tense, and number.

English: The door is open.

Punjabi: [hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਖੁੱਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is budget. English: We must budget our money carefully.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਪੈਸੇ ਦਾ ਬਜਟ ਸਾਵਧਾਨੀ ਨਾਲ ਬਣਾਉਣਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - means "to us" (this is the dative case) and marks the indirect object of the verb.

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - means "our" and is possessive case of the pronoun. This is the object of the preposition [hi]ਦਾ[/hi].

[hi]ਪੈਸੇ[/hi] - means "money" (masculine). This is the object of the preposition [hi]ਦਾ[/hi].

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - means "of" (this is a possessive case marker)

[hi]ਬਜਟ[/hi] - means "budget" (masculine)

[hi]ਸਾਵਧਾਨੀ ਨਾਲ[/hi] - means "carefully". [hi]ਸਾਵਧਾਨੀ[/hi] means caution and [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] means "with".

[hi]ਬਣਾਉਣਾ[/hi] - means "to create" (this is an infinitive)

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - means "should" (a modal verb)

Key Concepts:

The dative case is used to indicate the recipient of the action.

The possessive case is used to indicate ownership.

The preposition [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is used to indicate possession, and is attached to the noun that is possessed.

English: We must budget our money carefully.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਪੈਸੇ ਦਾ ਬਜਟ ਸਾਵਧਾਨੀ ਨਾਲ ਬਣਾਉਣਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is sometimes. English: Sometimes I eat chapati.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਦੇ ਕਦੇ ਮੈਂ ਚਪਾਤੀ ਖਾਂਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਦੇ ਕਦੇ[/hi]: This phrase means "sometimes" in Punjabi. It is a combination of two words: [hi]ਕਦੇ[/hi] (kade) meaning "ever" or "sometimes" and [hi]ਕਦੇ[/hi] (kade) meaning "sometimes."

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "I."

[hi]ਚਪਾਤੀ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "chapati," a type of flatbread.

[hi]ਖਾਂਦਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi]: This is the present tense verb for "eat" in Punjabi, conjugated for the first person singular.

Key Concept: The phrase [hi]ਕਦੇ ਕਦੇ[/hi] is used to express an action that occurs occasionally, not regularly.

English Translation: Sometimes I eat chapati.

Punjabi Translation: [hi]ਕਦੇ ਕਦੇ ਮੈਂ ਚਪਾਤੀ ਖਾਂਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is connect. English: They connected the two wires.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਦੋ ਤਾਰਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਜੋੜਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ[/hi] - They (plural subject)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is a grammatical particle used to indicate the subject is performing an action.

[hi]ਦੋ[/hi] - Two

[hi]ਤਾਰਾਂ[/hi] - Wires (plural noun)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is a postposition indicating the object of the verb.

[hi]ਜੋੜਿਆ[/hi] - Connected (past tense verb)

Key Concepts:

Grammatical particles: [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is a crucial particle in Punjabi that signals the subject's action.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions, so [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] is placed after the noun it modifies.

Pluralization: Punjabi uses specific endings to indicate plural nouns, such as [hi]ਤਾਰਾਂ[/hi] (wires)

This sentence helps to show how Punjabi uses postpositions, grammatical particles, and plural markers.

The next word is investigation. English: The police are investigating the case.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ ਇਸ ਮਾਮਲੇ ਦੀ ਜਾਂਚ ਕਰ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ[/hi] - Police

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (refers to the case)

[hi]ਮਾਮਲੇ[/hi] - Case (Here, the masculine gender is used because [hi]ਮਾਮਲਾ[/hi] is a masculine word.)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of (possessive particle for the case)

[hi]ਜਾਂਚ[/hi] - Investigation

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - To do

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - Is (present continuous tense, feminine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is (present tense, singular)

Key Concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns are either masculine or feminine. The gender of a noun determines the form of the adjectives, pronouns, and verbs that modify it.

Tense: Punjabi uses a system of particles to express different tenses. Here, we see the present continuous tense ([hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi]) and the present tense ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi]).

Possessive Particle: The possessive particle [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] indicates that the case belongs to the police.

English: The police are investigating the case.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ ਇਸ ਮਾਮਲੇ ਦੀ ਜਾਂਚ ਕਰ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is arm. English: The arm is the part of the body that connects the hand to the shoulder.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੱਥ ਨੂੰ ਮੋਢੇ ਨਾਲ ਜੋੜਨ ਵਾਲਾ ਅੰਗ ਬਾਹੂ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹੱਥ[/hi] = [hi]hath[/hi] = hand

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] = [hi]nu[/hi] = to

[hi]ਮੋਢੇ[/hi] = [hi]modhe[/hi] = shoulder

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] = [hi]nal[/hi] = with

[hi]ਜੋੜਨ[/hi] = [hi]jorn[/hi] = to connect

[hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] = [hi]wala[/hi] = that which

[hi]ਅੰਗ[/hi] = [hi]ang[/hi] = limb/part of the body

[hi]ਬਾਹੂ[/hi] = [hi]bahu[/hi] = arm

[hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ[/hi] = [hi]hunda[/hi] = is/exists

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the Punjabi postposition [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] = [hi]nu[/hi] = to to indicate the direction of connection.

The use of the word [hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] = [hi]wala[/hi] = that which is an example of a Punjabi possessive particle used to identify the arm as the limb that connects the hand to the shoulder.

The verb [hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ[/hi] = [hi]hunda[/hi] = is/exists is the present tense form of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] = [hi]hona[/hi] = to be.

English: The arm is the part of the body that connects the hand to the shoulder.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੱਥ ਨੂੰ ਮੋਢੇ ਨਾਲ ਜੋੜਨ ਵਾਲਾ ਅੰਗ ਬਾਹੂ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is visit. English: I will visit my friend tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਨੂੰ ਮਿਲਣ ਜਾਵਾਂਗਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - [hi]main[/hi] - I

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] - [hi]kallah[/hi] - tomorrow

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - [hi]aapne[/hi] - my

[hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] - [hi]dost[/hi] - friend

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - to (marks the object of the verb)

[hi]ਮਿਲਣ[/hi] - [hi]milan[/hi] - to meet (infinitive)

[hi]ਜਾਵਾਂਗਾ।[/hi] - [hi]javanga[/hi] - I will go (future tense)

Key concept: In Punjabi, the future tense is marked by the suffix [hi]-anga[/hi] added to the verb stem.

English: I will visit my friend tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਨੂੰ ਮਿਲਣ ਜਾਵਾਂਗਾ।[/hi]

The next word is receive. English: He received a letter from his friend.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne apne dost ton ek pattar paya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi]: This is the third person singular masculine pronoun in the past tense, meaning "He."

[hi]apne[/hi]: This is the possessive pronoun meaning "his" or "her."

[hi]dost[/hi]: This is the word for "friend."

[hi]ton[/hi]: This is the postposition meaning "from."

[hi]ek[/hi]: This is the numeral "one."

[hi]patthar[/hi]: This is the word for "letter."

[hi]paya[/hi]: This is the past tense of the verb "to receive."

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. They follow the noun they modify.

Word Order: Punjabi follows a Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) word order.

Gender: Punjabi has grammatical gender. The pronoun [hi]Usne[/hi] is masculine.

Translation: He received a letter from his friend.

The next word is begin. English: The lesson will begin now.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੁਣ ਪਾਠ ਸ਼ੁਰੂ ਹੋਵੇਗਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹੁਣ[/hi] - hun - Now (This word is used to indicate that something is happening at the present time)

[hi]ਪਾਠ[/hi] - paath - Lesson (Refers to the subject matter being taught)

[hi]ਸ਼ੁਰੂ[/hi] - shuru - Begin (Indicates the start of an action or process)

[hi]ਹੋਵੇਗਾ।[/hi] - hovega - Will be (Future tense, indicating that the lesson will begin in the near future)

Key Concepts:

Tense: This sentence uses the future tense to indicate that the lesson is about to start.

Word Order: In Punjabi, the typical word order is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), which is different from English.

Grammar: The sentence uses the conjunction [hi]ਹੋਵੇਗਾ।[/hi] hovega to indicate future tense.

The next word is probably. English: He will probably come tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲ ਉਹ ਸ਼ਾਇਦ ਆਵੇਗਾ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਲ[/hi] (kal): This means "tomorrow" in Punjabi. It's a common word used to refer to the next day.

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (uh): This is a Punjabi pronoun meaning "he." It's a subject pronoun, meaning it takes the place of a noun in the sentence.

[hi]ਸ਼ਾਇਦ[/hi] (shayad): This word means "probably" or "maybe" in Punjabi. It's an adverb that modifies the verb, indicating that the action is likely but not certain.

[hi]ਆਵੇਗਾ[/hi] (aavega): This is the future tense of the verb "to come" in Punjabi. It indicates that the action will happen in the future. The ending "-ga" is a grammatical marker that denotes the third person singular masculine form of the future tense.

In this sentence, we have the subject pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (uh), followed by the adverb [hi]ਸ਼ਾਇਦ[/hi] (shayad) modifying the verb [hi]ਆਵੇਗਾ[/hi] (aavega). This tells us that the action of coming is likely to occur in the future. The word [hi]ਕਲ[/hi] (kal) indicates that the action will happen tomorrow.

Remember, [hi]ਸ਼ਾਇਦ[/hi] (shayad) is a very useful word to express uncertainty or possibility in Punjabi. It can be used in many different contexts.

English: He will probably come tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲ ਉਹ ਸ਼ਾਇਦ ਆਵੇਗਾ[/hi]

The next word is book. English: I am reading a book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਪੜ੍ਹ ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] = I

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] = book

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹ[/hi] = to read

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi] = present continuous tense, "am reading"

Key concepts:

This sentence uses the present continuous tense, which is formed by combining the present tense of the verb "to be" with the -ing form of the verb.

The Punjabi word for "book" is [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi], which is pronounced "kitaab".

English: I am reading a book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਪੜ੍ਹ ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is artist. English: He is a great artist.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਵਧੀਆ ਕਲਾਕਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He / She / It (pronoun for third person singular)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - a / an (indefinite article)

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - good / great / excellent (adjective)

[hi]ਕਲਾਕਾਰ[/hi] - artist (noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (verb, present tense, third person singular)

Key Concepts

Gender Neutrality: Punjabi uses the same pronoun ([hi]ਉਹ[/hi]) for both "he" and "she" when referring to a singular person.

Word Order: The basic word order in Punjabi is Subject-Verb-Object (SVO), which is similar to English.

Articles: Punjabi often uses indefinite articles ([hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi]) for singular nouns, especially in a general sense.

Adjective Placement: Adjectives typically come before the noun they modify, similar to English.

English: He is a great artist.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਵਧੀਆ ਕਲਾਕਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is interview. English: He interviewed the student for the newspaper.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ ਲਈ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਦਾ ਇੰਟਰਵਿਊ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is a third-person singular pronoun, meaning "he" or "she" in English.

[hi]ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "newspaper" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "for".

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - This is the word for "student" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is a possessive particle meaning "of" or "the".

[hi]ਇੰਟਰਵਿਊ[/hi] - This is the word for "interview" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to take".

Key Concepts: This sentence uses a complex structure with the past tense of the verb "to take" followed by the object "interview" of the verb and then the object of the preposition "for" which is "newspaper"

English Translation: He interviewed the student for the newspaper.

Punjabi Translation: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ ਲਈ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਦਾ ਇੰਟਰਵਿਊ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is notice. English: He noticed the beautiful sunrise.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਸੂਰਜ ਉਗਾਉਣ ਵਾਲਾ ਦੇਖਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - beautiful (adjective)

[hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] - sun (noun)

[hi]ਉਗਾਉਣ ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] - rising (adjective)

[hi]ਦੇਖਿਆ।[/hi] - noticed/saw (verb in past tense)

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) - This is the typical word order in Punjabi.

Adjectives: Adjectives in Punjabi typically come before the noun they describe.

Verbs: Punjabi verbs are conjugated based on tense and person (who is doing the action).

This sentence uses the word [hi]ਦੇਖਿਆ[/hi] (to see/notice), which is a common verb used in various contexts in Punjabi.

English: He noticed the beautiful sunrise.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਸੂਰਜ ਉਗਾਉਣ ਵਾਲਾ ਦੇਖਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is key. English: The key is in the drawer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੁੰਜੀ ਦਰਾਜ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੁੰਜੀ[/hi] (kunji) - key

[hi]ਦਰਾਜ[/hi] (daraj) - drawer

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (vich) - in

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai) - is

This sentence uses the simple present tense and the post-position [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (vich) which means "in" and is used to indicate location.

The sentence literally translates to "The key is in the drawer."

The next word is order. English: We ordered food at the restaurant.

Punjabi: ਅਸੀਂ ਰੈਸਟੋਰੈਂਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਖਾਣਾ [hi]ਮੰਗਵਾਇਆ[/hi]।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੰਗਵਾਇਆ[/hi] is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਮੰਗਾਉਣਾ[/hi], which means "to order" (in this case, to order food).

[hi]ਮੰਗਵਾਉਣਾ[/hi] is a causative verb, meaning that it indicates that someone else is doing the action (the restaurant is making the food).

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] means "in" or "at" and is used to indicate location.

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] means "food."

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] means "we".

[hi]ਰੈਸਟੋਰੈਂਟ[/hi] means "restaurant".

The sentence follows the standard subject-verb-object structure in Punjabi.

English: We ordered food at the restaurant.

Punjabi: ਅਸੀਂ ਰੈਸਟੋਰੈਂਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਖਾਣਾ [hi]ਮੰਗਵਾਇਆ[/hi]।

The next word is rain. English: It is raining.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਰਖ਼ਾ ਹੋ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਰਖ਼ਾ[/hi] ([hi]varakha[/hi]) - This is the word for "rain" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] ([hi]ho[/hi]) - This is the present tense of the verb "to be" in Punjabi. It is used to indicate that something is happening.

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] ([hi]rahi[/hi]) - This is the present participle of the verb "to be" in Punjabi. It is used to indicate that something is happening continuously.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]hai[/hi]) - This is the present tense of the verb "to be" in Punjabi. It is used to indicate that something exists or is true.

Key Concepts:

Present Tense: This sentence uses the present tense to indicate that the rain is happening right now.

Present Participle: The present participle [hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] ([hi]rahi[/hi]) indicates that the rain is continuous.

Sentence Structure: The sentence follows the subject-verb-object structure. The subject is implied (it), the verb is [hi]ਹੋ[/hi] ([hi]ho[/hi]) + [hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] ([hi]rahi[/hi]), and the object is [hi]ਵਰਖ਼ਾ[/hi] ([hi]varakha[/hi]).

Therefore, the entire sentence [hi]ਵਰਖ਼ਾ ਹੋ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi] ([hi]varakha ho rahi hai.[/hi]) translates to "It is raining."

The next word is technique. English: He uses a new technique to grow his crops.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਫ਼ਸਲਾਂ ਵਧਾਉਣ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਨਵੀਂ ਤਕਨੀਕ ਵਰਤਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਆਪਣੀਆਂ[/hi] - This is the possessive adjective form of [hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] (own), meaning "his".

[hi]ਫ਼ਸਲਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of [hi]ਫ਼ਸਲ[/hi] (crop), meaning "crops".

[hi]ਵਧਾਉਣ[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb [hi]ਵਧਾਉਣਾ[/hi] (to grow), meaning "to grow".

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - This is the preposition "for".

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the indefinite article "a".

[hi]ਨਵੀਂ[/hi] - This is the feminine singular form of the adjective [hi]ਨਵਾਂ[/hi] (new), meaning "new".

[hi]ਤਕਨੀਕ[/hi] - This is the noun "technique".

[hi]ਵਰਤਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense, third person singular form of the verb [hi]ਵਰਤਣਾ[/hi] (to use), meaning "uses".

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the possessive adjective [hi]ਆਪਣੀਆਂ[/hi] to show possession.

The verb [hi]ਵਰਤਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] is conjugated in the present tense, third person singular.

The infinitive form of the verb [hi]ਵਧਾਉਣਾ[/hi] is used to express purpose.

English: He uses a new technique to grow his crops.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਫ਼ਸਲਾਂ ਵਧਾਉਣ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਨਵੀਂ ਤਕਨੀਕ ਵਰਤਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is capital. English: The capital of Punjab is Chandigarh.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ ਦੀ ਰਾਜਧਾਨੀ ਚੰਡੀਗੜ੍ਹ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ[/hi] [hi]panjaab[/hi] - Punjab (the name of the state)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] [hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਰਾਜਧਾਨੀ[/hi] [hi]raajdhaani[/hi] - capital

[hi]ਚੰਡੀਗੜ੍ਹ[/hi] [hi]chandigarh[/hi] - Chandigarh (the name of the city)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] - is (present tense, singular)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Marker: The word [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] [hi]di[/hi] acts as a possessive marker, similar to "of" in English. It shows that Chandigarh belongs to Punjab.

Subject-Verb Agreement: The verb [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] agrees with the singular subject [hi]ਰਾਜਧਾਨੀ[/hi] [hi]raajdhaani[/hi] (capital).

Word Order: Punjabi word order is generally Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), but there are exceptions. In this sentence, the object [hi]ਚੰਡੀਗੜ੍ਹ[/hi] [hi]chandigarh[/hi] comes before the verb [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] to emphasize the location of the capital.

English: The capital of Punjab is Chandigarh.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ ਦੀ ਰਾਜਧਾਨੀ ਚੰਡੀਗੜ੍ਹ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is talk. English: He talks a lot.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਗੱਲਾਂ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This means "very" or "a lot" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਗੱਲਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the word "word" or "speech". It is used to express "talking" or "conversation".

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to do" in Punjabi. It is conjugated for the third-person singular masculine subject.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in Punjabi. It is used for the third-person singular masculine subject.

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: The verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] agrees with the subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] in terms of gender and number.

Plural Noun: The noun [hi]ਗੱਲਾਂ[/hi] is used to express the plural form of "words" or "speech".

Present Tense: The verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] is in the present tense, indicating that the action is happening right now.

English: He talks a lot.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਗੱਲਾਂ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is tour. English: We will tour the Golden Temple tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਸੋਨੇ ਵਾਲੇ ਮੰਦਰ ਦਾ ਦੌਰਾ ਕਰਨਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਲ[/hi] - This means "tomorrow."

You could remember it by thinking that it sounds like "call" but for "tomorrow."

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - This means "us" or "to us."

Think of "us" as "ਸਾਨੂੰ."

[hi]ਸੋਨੇ ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] - This is an adjective meaning "golden."

The word [hi]ਸੋਨਾ[/hi] means "gold," and [hi]ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] is a suffix meaning "having," "possessing," or "containing"

[hi]ਮੰਦਰ[/hi] - This means "temple."

Think of "Mandir" (Hindi) as a close cousin to [hi]ਮੰਦਰ[/hi].

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This means "of" or "the." It's a possessive marker.

Think of "da" as a "d" to denote it's possessive.

[hi]ਦੌਰਾ[/hi] - This means "tour" or "visit."

Think of "doora" as the Hindi version of this word (though not exactly the same).

[hi]ਕਰਨਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - This means "to do" or "have to do." It's a future tense.

Think of [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] as a basic verb, and then [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is added to make it future tense.

English: We will tour the Golden Temple tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਸੋਨੇ ਵਾਲੇ ਮੰਦਰ ਦਾ ਦੌਰਾ ਕਰਨਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is opposite. English: The opposite of good is bad.

Punjabi: [hi]Achaa[/hi] da [hi]ulṭaa[/hi] [hi]bura[/hi] hai.

Breakdown:

[hi]Achaa[/hi] means "good" - This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ulṭaa[/hi] means "opposite" - This is the adjective modifying the noun "good".

[hi]bura[/hi] means "bad" - This is the noun that "good" is opposite of, and it is the predicate of the sentence.

[hi]hai[/hi] means "is" - This is the copula that connects the subject to the predicate.

Key concepts:

The use of [hi]ulṭaa[/hi] to indicate the opposite of something.

The structure of the sentence: Subject + adjective + noun + copula.

English: The opposite of good is bad.

Punjabi: [hi]Achaa[/hi] da [hi]ulṭaa[/hi] [hi]bura[/hi] hai.

The next word is prison. English: He is in prison.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਜੇਲ੍ਹ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third-person singular pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਜੇਲ੍ਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "prison".

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "in".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "to be" in the third person singular, meaning "is".

The sentence structure is simple: subject + prepositional phrase + verb.

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions (e.g. [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] instead of "in").

The verb "to be" is often used in Punjabi to show location.

Translation: He is in prison.

The next word is delay. English: We will delay the meeting until next week.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਅਗਲੇ ਹਫ਼ਤੇ ਤੱਕ ਮੁਲਤਵੀ ਕਰਾਂਗੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ[/hi] - Meeting (object)

[hi]ਅਗਲੇ[/hi] - Next (adjective)

[hi]ਹਫ਼ਤੇ[/hi] - Week (object)

[hi]ਤੱਕ[/hi] - Until (preposition)

[hi]ਮੁਲਤਵੀ[/hi] - Delay (verb)

[hi]ਕਰਾਂਗੇ।[/hi] - Will do (future tense)

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: The verb [hi]ਕਰਾਂਗੇ[/hi] agrees with the plural subject [hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi].

Prepositional Phrase: [hi]ਅਗਲੇ ਹਫ਼ਤੇ ਤੱਕ[/hi] modifies the verb [hi]ਮੁਲਤਵੀ[/hi], indicating the time until which the meeting will be delayed.

Translation: We will delay the meeting until next week.

The next word is manufacture. English: They manufacture cars in this factory.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਫੈਕਟਰੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਾਰਾਂ ਬਣਾਈਆਂ ਜਾਂਦੀਆਂ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਫੈਕਟਰੀ[/hi] - factory

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਕਾਰਾਂ[/hi] - cars

[hi]ਬਣਾਈਆਂ[/hi] - made (passive voice)

[hi]ਜਾਂਦੀਆਂ[/hi] - go (plural, feminine, present continuous)

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - are (plural)

Key Concepts:

Passive Voice: The sentence is in passive voice, which emphasizes the action (making cars) rather than the doer.

Gender Agreement: The verb [hi]ਜਾਂਦੀਆਂ[/hi] agrees in gender with the noun [hi]ਕਾਰਾਂ[/hi], which is feminine.

Plural: The nouns [hi]ਕਾਰਾਂ[/hi] and the verb [hi]ਜਾਂਦੀਆਂ[/hi] are both in plural form.

English: They manufacture cars in this factory.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਫੈਕਟਰੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਾਰਾਂ ਬਣਾਈਆਂ ਜਾਂਦੀਆਂ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is baby. English: The baby is sleeping.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚਾ ਸੌਂ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚਾ[/hi] - [hi]baccha[/hi] - baby (masculine)

[hi]ਸੌਂ[/hi] - [hi]saũ[/hi] - sleep (verb stem)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]riha[/hi] - is (present continuous, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns have gender. Here, "baby" is masculine, so we use the masculine forms of the verbs.

Present Continuous Tense: The present continuous tense is formed using the verb stem + [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] / [hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] (masculine/feminine) + [hi]ਹੈ[/hi]

Word Order: The basic word order in Punjabi is Subject-Verb-Object.

English: The baby is sleeping.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚਾ ਸੌਂ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

The next word is would. English: He would go to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun for "he"

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This is the noun meaning "market"

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - This is the verb "to go" in the past tense, but it has an implied habit, something that used to happen.

[hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ[/hi] - This is the auxiliary verb "to be" in the past tense, giving the sentence the habit implied meaning.

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] - This is the past tense marker, meaning that this was something that happened before.

This sentence means that "He would go to the market" and means that the person went to the market regularly in the past. This use of the past tense and the auxiliary verb is important to remember to capture the habitual nature of the action.

The next word is separate. English: The two friends separated after their argument.

Punjabi: [hi]Do dost apne jhagde ton baad judaa ho gaye[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Do[/hi] - two

[hi]dost[/hi] - friends

[hi]apne[/hi] - their

[hi]jhagde[/hi] - argument

[hi]ton[/hi] - from, after

[hi]baad[/hi] - later

[hi]judaa[/hi] - separated

[hi]ho[/hi] - become

[hi]gayee[/hi] - past tense marker, they (masculine plural)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ton baad[/hi] - This phrase is common in Punjabi and means "after".

[hi]judaa[/hi] - This word can mean separate or different. It is often used in the context of relationships.

[hi]ho gaye[/hi] - This phrase is used to indicate that a change in state has occurred.

English: The two friends separated after their argument.

Punjabi: [hi]Do dost apne jhagde ton baad judaa ho gaye[/hi].

The next word is minute. English: The meeting lasted for only a minute.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਇੱਕ ਮਿੰਟ ਲਈ ਹੋਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ[/hi] - meeting

[hi]ਸਿਰਫ਼[/hi] - only

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - one

[hi]ਮਿੰਟ[/hi] - minute

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for

[hi]ਹੋਈ[/hi] - happened, took place. This is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] (to be, to happen)

In Punjabi, the sentence structure is slightly different from English. The word order is: Subject - Object - Verb.

[hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ[/hi] (subject) - [hi]ਇੱਕ ਮਿੰਟ[/hi] (object) - [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] (for) - [hi]ਹੋਈ[/hi] (verb)

Key Concepts:

Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) word order

Past tense of [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] is [hi]ਹੋਈ[/hi]

English: The meeting lasted for only a minute.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਇੱਕ ਮਿੰਟ ਲਈ ਹੋਈ।[/hi]

The next word is normal. English: This is normal.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਨਾਰਮਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਨਾਰਮਲ[/hi] - normal (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (verb, present tense)

Key Concept: The sentence uses the simple present tense "is" to describe the state of something being normal.

The next word is recommend. English: I recommend that you eat this delicious food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ ਸਿਫਾਰਿਸ਼ ਕਰਦਾ ਹਾਂ ਕਿ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਇਹ ਸੁਆਦੀ ਭੋਜਨ ਖਾਓ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - I

[hi]ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - you (formal)

[hi]ਸਿਫਾਰਿਸ਼[/hi] - recommendation

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - do (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - am

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - that

[hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ[/hi] - you

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - this

[hi]ਸੁਆਦੀ[/hi] - delicious

[hi]ਭੋਜਨ[/hi] - food

[hi]ਖਾਓ।[/hi] - eat (imperative plural)

Key concepts:

The use of [hi]ਕਿ[/hi] (that) is important to mark the beginning of a subordinate clause.

The sentence uses the formal form of 'you', [hi]ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ[/hi], which is more respectful.

The verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] is in the present tense and masculine singular because the subject is [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] (I).

The imperative form [hi]ਖਾਓ[/hi] is used to tell someone to do something.

English: I recommend that you eat this delicious food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ ਸਿਫਾਰਿਸ਼ ਕਰਦਾ ਹਾਂ ਕਿ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਇਹ ਸੁਆਦੀ ਭੋਜਨ ਖਾਓ।[/hi]

The next word is sentence. English: The sentence is a beautiful piece of art.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਾਕ ਇੱਕ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਕਲਾ ਦਾ ਟੁਕੜਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਾਕ[/hi]: This is the word for "sentence" in Punjabi. It is a noun.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi]: This means "one" and is used as a determiner to quantify the noun "sentence".

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi]: This means "beautiful" and is an adjective modifying the noun "sentence".

[hi]ਕਲਾ[/hi]: This means "art" and is a noun.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi]: This is the possessive particle, meaning "of", connecting "art" with "piece".

[hi]ਟੁਕੜਾ[/hi]: This means "piece" and is a noun.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi]: This means "is" and is the present tense copula verb.

Key Concepts:

Noun: [hi]ਵਾਕ[/hi], [hi]ਕਲਾ[/hi], [hi]ਟੁਕੜਾ[/hi]

Adjective: [hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi]

Determiners: [hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi]

Possessive Particle: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi]

Copula Verb: [hi]ਹੈ[/hi]

English: The sentence is a beautiful piece of art.

The next word is gain. English: She gained a lot of knowledge from her studies.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਤੋਂ ਬਹੁਤ ਗਿਆਨ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi]: This is the subject pronoun, meaning "she".

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi]: This is the possessive pronoun, meaning "her".

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ[/hi]: This is the noun, meaning "studies".

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi]: This is a postposition, meaning "from".

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi]: This is an adverb meaning "a lot".

[hi]ਗਿਆਨ[/hi]: This is the noun, meaning "knowledge".

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ[/hi]: This is the verb meaning "gained" or "obtained".

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi]: This is the past tense marker.

Key Concept: The use of postpositions like [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] in Punjabi to indicate the direction of the action. In this case, "from her studies".

English: She gained a lot of knowledge from her studies.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਤੋਂ ਬਹੁਤ ਗਿਆਨ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is park. English: The children are playing in the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਪਾਰਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi] [hi]bacche[/hi] - children (plural)

[hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] [hi]park[/hi] - park

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] [hi]vich[/hi] - in, within (indicates location)

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] [hi]khed[/hi] - playing (verb, present continuous tense)

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] [hi]rahe[/hi] - are (present continuous tense marker)

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] [hi]han[/hi] - are (plural subject agreement)

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions (words that follow the noun) to indicate location, such as [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] ([hi]vich[/hi]) for "in".

The present continuous tense in Punjabi is formed using the verb stem + [hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] ([hi]rahe[/hi]) for plural subjects.

The final particle [hi]ਹਨ[/hi] ([hi]han[/hi]) indicates that the subject is plural.

English: The children are playing in the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਪਾਰਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is relationship. English: He has a close relationship with his brother.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਭਰਾ ਨਾਲ ਬਹੁਤ ਪਿਆਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] = [hi]to him[/hi], dative case of the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he/she/it)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] = [hi]his[/hi], possessive adjective

[hi]ਭਰਾ[/hi] = [hi]brother[/hi]

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] = [hi]with[/hi], preposition

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] = [hi]very[/hi], adverb of degree

[hi]ਪਿਆਰ[/hi] = [hi]love[/hi]

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] = [hi]is[/hi], present tense of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] (to be)

Key concepts:

Dative case: The dative case is used to indicate the indirect object of a verb or preposition, the person or thing that receives the action of the verb.

Possessive adjective: A possessive adjective shows possession, or ownership. In this case, [hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] (his) shows that the brother is the one who is being loved.

Preposition: Prepositions show the relationship between a noun or pronoun and other words in the sentence. Here, [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] (with) shows the relationship between the pronoun [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] (him) and the noun [hi]ਭਰਾ[/hi] (brother).

Adverb of degree: An adverb of degree modifies a verb, adjective or another adverb, telling us to what extent something happens or is done. Here, [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] (very) modifies the noun [hi]ਪਿਆਰ[/hi] (love).

The next word is under. English: The cat is under the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਮੇਜ਼ ਦੇ ਹੇਠਾਂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] - This is the subject of the sentence and means "cat" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਮੇਜ਼[/hi] - This is the object of the preposition and means "table" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - This is a possessive particle, similar to "of" in English. It denotes that the table is being possessed or referenced by something else.

[hi]ਹੇਠਾਂ[/hi] - This is a preposition, meaning "under" in English. This preposition connects the subject, the cat, to the object, the table.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the verb in the sentence, meaning "is" in English. It denotes the state of being of the subject, the cat, being under the table.

This sentence is in the present tense, meaning that the cat is currently under the table.

Key concepts:

Prepositions are words that show the relationship between a noun or pronoun and other words in a sentence. They often indicate location, direction, or time.

Possessive particles in Punjabi denote ownership or possession, similar to the use of "of" in English.

English: The cat is under the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਮੇਜ਼ ਦੇ ਹੇਠਾਂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is mile. English: He walked a mile.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਮੀਲ ਤੁਰਿਆ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he" in the third person singular, but in the past tense. It literally means "he-by," where the "by" denotes past tense.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - The numeral "one" or "a".

[hi]ਮੀਲ[/hi] - The word "mile." It's also a noun in this case.

[hi]ਤੁਰਿਆ[/hi] - The verb "walked," which is past tense of "to walk".

Note: In Punjabi, the verb typically comes at the end of the sentence.

The next word is office. English: He works in the office.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦਫ਼ਤਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he".

[hi]ਦਫ਼ਤਰ[/hi] - This means "office". It is in the singular form and is a masculine noun.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This means "in". It is used to indicate location.

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - This means "work". It is a noun, and in this case it is used as a direct object.

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - This means "does", "works", or "performs". It is the present tense of the verb "ਕਰਨਾ" (to do), which is conjugated according to the subject, "he".

Key Concept: In Punjabi, unlike English, the noun usually comes before the preposition. So, instead of "in the office", it is "office in".

English: He works in the office.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦਫ਼ਤਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is as. English: As the sun sets, the sky turns red.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜਿਵੇਂ ਸੂਰਜ ਡੁੱਬਦਾ ਹੈ, ਅਸਮਾਨ ਲਾਲ ਹੋ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜਿਵੇਂ[/hi] - This word means "as" or "like" and acts as a conjunction, connecting the two clauses in the sentence.

[hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] - This word means "sun".

[hi]ਡੁੱਬਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - This means "sets" or "goes down". It is in the present continuous tense, indicating an ongoing action.

[hi]ਅਸਮਾਨ[/hi] - This means "sky".

[hi]ਲਾਲ[/hi] - This means "red".

[hi]ਹੋ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - This means "becomes" or "turns". It is in the present continuous tense, indicating an ongoing action.

Key concept: Punjabi uses the present continuous tense to express ongoing actions, even if they are happening once. So we see that in this sentence both the sun setting and the sky becoming red are ongoing.

This is a great sentence to learn because it uses the conjunction "[hi]ਜਿਵੇਂ[/hi]" and describes a common phenomenon.

The next word is perspective. English: From their perspective, the situation seemed hopeless.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਦੇ ਨਜ਼ਰੀਏ ਤੋਂ, ਇਹ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਨਿਰਾਸ਼ਾਜਨਕ ਲੱਗ ਰਹੀ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he/she/it) and means "they".

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - This is a possessive particle that means "of" or "belonging to".

[hi]ਨਜ਼ਰੀਏ[/hi] - This is the singular form of [hi]ਨਜ਼ਰੀਏ[/hi] (perspective), and refers to a viewpoint or way of looking at something.

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - This is a preposition that indicates direction or origin, and means "from".

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This is a demonstrative pronoun that means "this" or "that".

[hi]ਸਥਿਤੀ[/hi] - This word means "situation".

[hi]ਨਿਰਾਸ਼ਾਜਨਕ[/hi] - This adjective means "hopeless".

[hi]ਲੱਗ[/hi] - This verb means "to seem" or "to appear".

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - This is the past continuous tense marker, which indicates that the action was ongoing in the past.

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense marker, indicating that the action occurred in the past.

Key concepts:

Possessive particles ([hi]ਦੇ[/hi]) are used to show ownership or connection.

Prepositions ([hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi]) indicate direction, location, or time.

Demonstrative pronouns ([hi]ਇਹ[/hi]) point to specific things.

The past continuous tense ([hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi]) is used to describe an action that was ongoing in the past.

Translation: From their perspective, the situation seemed hopeless.

The next word is sound. English: The sound of the waterfall is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]jharne di awaz bahut sundar hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]jharne[/hi] - waterfall. The "e" at the end is the plural marker.

[hi]di[/hi] - of the, possessive marker

[hi]awaz[/hi] - sound. It is feminine in Punjabi, hence the feminine "di" before it.

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]sundar[/hi] - beautiful. This word is also feminine, so it is followed by the feminine "hai"

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Punjabi has gendered nouns. [hi]jharne[/hi] and [hi]awaz[/hi] are both feminine nouns and are therefore followed by the feminine possessive marker [hi]di[/hi].

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb "to be" and is used in conjunction with feminine nouns.

English: The sound of the waterfall is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]jharne di awaz bahut sundar hai[/hi].

The next word is necessary. English: It is necessary to study hard to succeed in life.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜਿੰਦਗੀ ਵਿਚ ਸਫਲ ਹੋਣ ਲਈ ਸਖਤ ਮਿਹਨਤ ਕਰਨੀ ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜਿੰਦਗੀ[/hi] - [hi]zindagi[/hi] - life

[hi]ਵਿਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]ਸਫਲ[/hi] - [hi]safal[/hi] - successful

[hi]ਹੋਣ[/hi] - [hi]hon[/hi] - to become/to be

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - [hi]lai[/hi] - for

[hi]ਸਖਤ[/hi] - [hi]sakht[/hi] - hard

[hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ[/hi] - [hi]mehnat[/hi] - effort/hard work

[hi]ਕਰਨੀ[/hi] - [hi]karni[/hi] - to do

[hi]ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]zaruri[/hi] - necessary

Key concepts:

[hi]ਜਿੰਦਗੀ[/hi] - [hi]zindagi[/hi] - is a common word in Punjabi and a good one to remember.

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - [hi]lai[/hi] - a postposition, meaning "for", commonly used in Punjabi.

[hi]ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]zaruri[/hi] - a commonly used adjective, meaning "necessary".

English: It is necessary to study hard to succeed in life.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜਿੰਦਗੀ ਵਿਚ ਸਫਲ ਹੋਣ ਲਈ ਸਖਤ ਮਿਹਨਤ ਕਰਨੀ ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is development. English: Development is necessary for the progress of society.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਕਾਸ ਸਮਾਜ ਦੀ ਤਰੱਕੀ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਕਾਸ[/hi] - Development, pronounced as "vi-kaas"

[hi]ਸਮਾਜ[/hi] - Society, pronounced as "samaaj"

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of, possessive marker, pronounced as "dee"

[hi]ਤਰੱਕੀ[/hi] - Progress, pronounced as "tarakki"

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - For, pronounced as "lai"

[hi]ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ[/hi] - Necessary, pronounced as "zarooree"

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is, present tense verb, pronounced as "hai"

This sentence is in the present tense and uses a simple subject-verb-object structure. The sentence emphasizes the importance of development for the progress of society.

Remember: The [hi] and [/hi] markers are for you to translate the sentence using espeak-ng. Don't forget to remove these markers before feeding the Punjabi text to espeak-ng.

The next word is environment. English: The environment is very important for us.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਾਤਾਵਰਣ ਸਾਡੇ ਲਈ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਾਤਾਵਰਣ[/hi] - [hi]vaataavaran[/hi] - environment

[hi]ਸਾਡੇ[/hi] - [hi]saade[/hi] - our

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - [hi]lai[/hi] - for

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] - [hi]mahattvapurna[/hi] - important

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਵਾਤਾਵਰਣ[/hi] is a noun, meaning environment.

[hi]ਸਾਡੇ[/hi] is a possessive pronoun, meaning our.

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] is a preposition, meaning for.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] is an adverb, meaning very.

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] is an adjective, meaning important.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a verb, meaning is.

The sentence is in the present tense and is a simple declarative sentence.

English: The environment is very important for us.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਾਤਾਵਰਣ ਸਾਡੇ ਲਈ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is cash. English: He has a lot of cash.

Punjabi: [hi]Usde kol bahut saara paisa hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usde[/hi] - His (possessive pronoun)

[hi]kol[/hi] - With (preposition)

[hi]bahut saara[/hi] - A lot of (quantifier)

[hi]paisa[/hi] - Cash, money (noun)

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Pronouns: Indicate ownership.

Prepositions: Show the relationship between nouns or pronouns and other words in the sentence.

Quantifiers: Express the amount or quantity of something.

Nouns: Words that name people, places, things, or ideas.

Verbs: Words that describe actions, states of being, or occurrences.

English: He has a lot of cash.

Punjabi: [hi]Usde kol bahut saara paisa hai[/hi].

The next word is health. English: Health is important for a happy life.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਿਹਤਮੰਦ ਜੀਵਨ ਖੁਸ਼ਹਾਲ ਜੀਵਨ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਿਹਤਮੰਦ[/hi] - This word means "healthy" and is the adjective form of [hi]ਸਿਹਤ[/hi] (health).

[hi]ਜੀਵਨ[/hi] - This word means "life".

[hi]ਖੁਸ਼ਹਾਲ[/hi] - This word means "happy" or "prosperous".

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - This word means "for".

[hi]ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ[/hi] - This word means "necessary" or "important".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" (hai).

The sentence structure is subject-verb-object. The subject is "[hi]ਸਿਹਤਮੰਦ ਜੀਵਨ[/hi]" (healthy life), the verb is "[hi]ਹੈ[/hi]" (is), and the object is "[hi]ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ[/hi]" (necessary).

Important concept:

The adjective [hi]ਸਿਹਤਮੰਦ[/hi] modifies the noun [hi]ਜੀਵਨ[/hi] and shows that it is healthy.

The phrase [hi]ਖੁਸ਼ਹਾਲ ਜੀਵਨ ਲਈ[/hi] tells us the purpose for which health is important.

English: Health is important for a happy life.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਿਹਤਮੰਦ ਜੀਵਨ ਖੁਸ਼ਹਾਲ ਜੀਵਨ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is pull. English: She pulled the door open.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਖਿੱਚ ਕੇ ਖੋਲ੍ਹਿਆ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is a combination of the third person singular feminine pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (she) and the postposition [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] (has, have). It acts as the subject marker indicating that "she" is the one performing the action.

[hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ[/hi] - This is the word for "door".

[hi]ਖਿੱਚ ਕੇ[/hi] - This is a compound word consisting of the verb [hi]ਖਿੱਚਣਾ[/hi] (to pull) with the postposition [hi]ਕੇ[/hi] (by, with). It expresses the manner of the action, signifying that the door was pulled to be opened.

[hi]ਖੋਲ੍ਹਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense form of the verb [hi]ਖੋਲ੍ਹਣਾ[/hi] (to open). It denotes the completion of the action of opening the door.

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] and [hi]ਕੇ[/hi] are postpositions, which are words that follow the noun or pronoun they modify, providing additional information about the subject, object, or action.

Compound Words: [hi]ਖਿੱਚ ਕੇ[/hi] is a compound word, formed by combining two words to create a new meaning.

English: She pulled the door open.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਖਿੱਚ ਕੇ ਖੋਲ੍ਹਿਆ[/hi]

The next word is refer. English: He referred to the book for the information.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne jaankaari lai kitab da hawala ditta[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi] - He (masculine)

[hi]jaankaari[/hi] - information

[hi]lai[/hi] - for

[hi]kitab[/hi] - book

[hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]hawala[/hi] - reference

[hi]ditta[/hi] - gave (past tense)

Key concepts:

The sentence is in the past tense.

[hi]da[/hi] is a possessive particle that indicates ownership.

[hi]hawala[/hi] is a common word that is used to refer to a reference, a source of information.

English: He referred to the book for the information.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne jaankaari lai kitab da hawala ditta[/hi].

The next word is mass. English: The mass of the book is very heavy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਵਜ਼ਨ ਬਹੁਤ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitab[/hi] - book (feminine)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive particle for feminine nouns)

[hi]ਵਜ਼ਨ[/hi] - [hi]vazan[/hi] - weight/mass

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]zyada[/hi] - much/heavy

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, singular, 3rd person)

Key concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is generally Subject-Object-Verb.

The possessive particle [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is used for feminine nouns.

The verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is used for singular subjects.

English: The mass of the book is very heavy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਵਜ਼ਨ ਬਹੁਤ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is why. English: Why are you sitting here?

Punjabi: [hi]Tu [hi] [hi]idhar[/hi] [hi]kion[/hi] [hi]baitha[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi]?

Breakdown:

[hi]Tu [hi] - You (informal)

[hi]idhar[/hi] - here

[hi]kion[/hi] - why (this is the word you requested)

[hi]baitha[/hi] - sitting (masculine singular form of the verb "to sit")

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, masculine singular)

Key concept: The Punjabi word for "why" is [hi]kion[/hi]. Remember that it comes before the verb, not after.

The next word is every. English: Every student has a book.

Punjabi: [hi]Har ek vidyarthi de kol kitab hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Har[/hi] means "every" and is used before singular nouns to indicate that the action applies to each one.

[hi]ek[/hi] means "one" and is often used with [hi]har[/hi] for emphasis.

[hi]vidyarthi[/hi] means "student" and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]de[/hi] is a possessive particle meaning "of" or "belonging to".

[hi]kol[/hi] means "with" or "near" and indicates possession.

[hi]kitab[/hi] means "book" and is the object of the sentence.

[hi]hai[/hi] means "is" and is the present tense of the verb "to be".

Key concept: [hi]Har[/hi] is used for emphasizing that something applies to every individual in a group. It is often used with [hi]ek[/hi] to emphasize every single one.

English: Every student has a book.

Punjabi: [hi]Har ek vidyarthi de kol kitab hai[/hi].

The next word is trouble. English: He's in trouble.

Punjabi: [hi]Us nu mushkil aa gayi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun meaning "he" or "him"

[hi]nu[/hi] - This is a postposition meaning "to" or "for" used with a person, as in "He gave the book to him."

[hi]mushkil[/hi] - This is a noun meaning "trouble" or "difficulty."

[hi]aa gayi[/hi] - This is a verb, meaning "to come" or "to arrive," often used to signify an arrival of a state or event. In this sentence, it is in the past tense (feminine singular form).

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense auxiliary verb "to be" (masculine singular form), used for the present continuous form of the verb.

Key concepts:

Postposition: Similar to prepositions, postpositions are used to show the relation between a noun and the rest of the sentence.

Gender: Punjabi has grammatical gender for nouns, verbs, and adjectives.

Key phrase:

[hi]Mushkil aa gayi hai[/hi] - This is a common phrase that means "to be in trouble".

Translation: He's in trouble.

The next word is prefer. English: I prefer to eat Punjabi food.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਖਾਣਾ [hi]khaanā[/hi] ਪਸੰਦ ਕਰਦਾ ਹਾਂ। [hi]maiṁ pañjābī khaanā khaanā pasand kardā hāṁ.[/hi]

Breakdown:

ਮੈਂ [hi]maiṁ[/hi]: I (masculine) - This is the subject pronoun for "I" in the masculine form.

ਪੰਜਾਬੀ [hi]pañjābī[/hi]: Punjabi - This is the adjective describing the noun "food"

ਖਾਣਾ [hi]khaanā[/hi]: food - This is the noun that is being modified by the adjective "Punjabi".

ਪਸੰਦ [hi]pasand[/hi]: like - This is the noun which means liking or preference.

ਕਰਦਾ [hi]kardā[/hi]: do/does - This is the verb, indicating present tense action in the masculine singular form. The subject of the verb is "I" (maiṁ).

ਹਾਂ [hi]hāṁ[/hi]: am - This is the auxiliary verb which helps with the present tense conjugation.

Key Concepts:

Gender in Punjabi: In Punjabi, nouns have grammatical gender (masculine, feminine, or neuter). This impacts the verb conjugation, pronouns, and adjectives.

Word Order: The typical word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV). However, there can be variations depending on the sentence structure.

Auxiliary Verbs: Punjabi uses auxiliary verbs (like "hāṁ") in verb conjugation, similar to English.

You can practice this sentence by changing the noun (food) to other things you might prefer like a color or drink, and then changing the gender of the subject (I) to practice feminine or plural forms.

The next word is settle. English: We settled in the village.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਪਿੰਡ 'ਚ ਵੱਸ ਗਏ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]asi[/hi] - we

[hi]ਪਿੰਡ[/hi] - [hi]pind[/hi] - village

[hi]'ਚ[/hi] - [hi]ch[/hi] - in (location)

[hi]ਵੱਸ[/hi] - [hi]vass[/hi] - to reside

[hi]ਗਏ।[/hi] - [hi]gae.[/hi] - past tense marker, means "went" or "settled" in this case

Key Concepts:

[hi]'ਚ[/hi] is a common postposition used to indicate location, similar to "in" or "at" in English.

[hi]ਵੱਸ[/hi] can be used to express the idea of settling down, establishing a residence.

The sentence uses the past tense, indicated by the ending [hi]ਗਏ।[/hi], which translates to "settled".

English: We settled in the village.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਪਿੰਡ 'ਚ ਵੱਸ ਗਏ।[/hi]

The next word is eye. English: He closed his eye.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਅੱਖ ਬੰਦ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi]: This is the third person singular masculine pronoun in the past tense, meaning "he" or "him."

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi]: This is a possessive pronoun, meaning "his" or "her" in this context.

[hi]ਅੱਖ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "eye."

[hi]ਬੰਦ[/hi]: This is the past tense of the verb "to close."

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]: This is the past tense of the verb "to do" and is used here as a helping verb to form the past tense of "to close."

Key concepts: The sentence uses a past tense conjugation of the verb "to close" and features the possessive pronoun "his." Remember this sentence helps illustrate how to use possessive pronouns in Punjabi.

English: He closed his eye.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਅੱਖ ਬੰਦ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is useful. English: This book is useful for learning Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਿੱਖਣ ਲਈ ਕੰਮ ਆਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - Book

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - Punjabi

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਣ[/hi] - Learning

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - work

[hi]ਆਉਂਦੀ[/hi] - comes (feminine singular present tense)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense)

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi word for "useful" is implied by the verb "[hi]ਆਉਂਦੀ[/hi]" which means "comes" or "is useful".

"[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi]" is an important word meaning "work" and is often used in the context of something being helpful or useful.

The verb "[hi]ਆਉਂਦੀ[/hi]" is in the feminine singular present tense because the noun "[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi]" (book) is feminine.

This sentence demonstrates a common Punjabi grammatical structure: subject (book), purpose (learning Punjabi), and verb (comes/is useful).

The next word is current. English: The current situation is not good.

Punjabi: [hi]Aj di halat thik nahi hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Aj[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "today" or "this day" and is used to refer to the current day.

[hi]di[/hi] - This is a possessive particle used to indicate that something belongs to something else, in this case, "today's" or "of today".

[hi]halat[/hi] - This means "situation" or "condition" and describes the present state of affairs.

[hi]thik[/hi] - This word means "good" or "okay".

[hi]nahi[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "not".

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi verb "to be" in the present tense.

Key concepts:

Possessive particles: [hi]di[/hi] indicates possession and is crucial to understanding the sentence's meaning.

Present tense: The verb "hai" is in the present tense and conveys that the situation is currently not good.

English: The current situation is not good.

Punjabi: [hi]Aj di halat thik nahi hai.[/hi]

The next word is fair. English: It is fair that everyone gets a chance to speak.

Punjabi: [hi]Sab nu bolan da mauka milna insaaf hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Sab[/hi] - Everyone

[hi]nu[/hi] - To (dative case marker)

[hi]bolan[/hi] - Speaking

[hi]da[/hi] - Of

[hi]mauka[/hi] - Chance

[hi]milna[/hi] - To get

[hi]insaaf[/hi] - Fairness, justice

Key Concepts:

[hi]da[/hi] is a postposition that indicates possession. Here, it is used to say 'of speaking'.

[hi]nu[/hi] is a dative case marker that shows the recipient of the action. Here, it shows that everyone is the recipient of the chance to speak.

[hi]milna[/hi] is a verb that means 'to get'.

This sentence is a simple statement about fairness. It highlights the importance of giving everyone a chance to express themselves.

The next word is mix. English: The chef mixes the spices.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਸੋਈਏ ਨੇ ਮਸਾਲੇ ਮਿਲਾ ਦਿੱਤੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰਸੋਈਏ[/hi] (rasooiye): This is the subject of the sentence, meaning "chef". It is in the singular and nominative case.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] (ne): This is a grammatical particle that marks the subject in Punjabi. It is used after the subject when the verb is in the past tense.

[hi]ਮਸਾਲੇ[/hi] (masale): This is the object of the sentence, meaning "spices". It is in the plural and accusative case.

[hi]ਮਿਲਾ[/hi] (mila): This is the verb meaning "mix". It is in the past tense, singular, and third-person form.

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੇ।[/hi] (ditte): This is a past participle of the verb "to give" and implies the action of "mixing" is complete.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi has a subject-verb-object word order, similar to English.

Verbs in Punjabi change depending on the tense, person, and number.

Punjabi uses post-positions (like [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] ) to mark grammatical functions like the subject.

English: The chef mixes the spices.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਸੋਈਏ ਨੇ ਮਸਾਲੇ ਮਿਲਾ ਦਿੱਤੇ।[/hi]

The next word is code. English: The code for the lock is written on the back of the key.

Punjabi: [hi]ਤਾਲੇ ਦਾ ਕੋਡ ਚਾਬੀ ਦੇ ਪਿਛਲੇ ਪਾਸੇ ਲਿਖਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਤਾਲੇ[/hi] [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - The lock's (possessive particle "da" is used to connect "tale" and "kod")

[hi]ਕੋਡ[/hi] - Code

[hi]ਚਾਬੀ[/hi] - Key

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - Of the (possessive particle "de" connects "chabi" and "pichle pase")

[hi]ਪਿਛਲੇ[/hi] - Back (the back of the key)

[hi]ਪਾਸੇ[/hi] - Side

[hi]ਲਿਖਿਆ[/hi] - Written (past tense of "likhna" - to write)

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - Is (past tense of "hona" - to be) - This is used to indicate a completed action.

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particles: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] and [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] are crucial for showing possession.

Past Tense: [hi]ਲਿਖਿਆ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] convey actions that have already happened.

Word Order: Punjabi has a flexible word order, but this sentence follows the common Subject-Verb-Object structure.

English: The code for the lock is written on the back of the key.

Punjabi: [hi]ਤਾਲੇ ਦਾ ਕੋਡ ਚਾਬੀ ਦੇ ਪਿਛਲੇ ਪਾਸੇ ਲਿਖਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is generate. English: He generates electricity.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਿਜਲੀ ਪੈਦਾ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਬਿਜਲੀ[/hi] - [hi]bijli[/hi] - Electricity

[hi]ਪੈਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]paida[/hi] - To generate (verb stem)

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]karda[/hi] - Does/makes (present tense verb ending for masculine singular subject)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - Is (present tense verb ending for masculine singular subject)

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses a simple subject-verb-object structure.

The verb "generate" is translated as "paida karna" in Punjabi, which literally means "to make birth".

The verb "karda hai" is used to show present tense and masculine singular subject.

Remember:

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] is used for masculine singular subjects. For feminine singular subjects, the ending is [hi]ਕਰਦੀ ਹੈ[/hi], and for plural subjects, it's [hi]ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ[/hi].

English: He generates electricity.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਿਜਲੀ ਪੈਦਾ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is neighbor. English: My neighbor is very kind.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ ਗੁਆਂਢੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]mera[/hi] - My (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਗੁਆਂਢੀ[/hi] - [hi]guaanDhi[/hi] - Neighbor

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - Very

[hi]ਦਿਆਲੂ[/hi] - [hi]diyalu[/hi] - Kind

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - Is (present tense, third person singular)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Pronoun: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] indicates possession, meaning "my."

Noun: [hi]ਗੁਆਂਢੀ[/hi] refers to the neighbor.

Adjective: [hi]ਦਿਆਲੂ[/hi] describes the neighbor as "kind."

Adverb: [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] modifies the adjective, indicating "very" kind.

Verb: [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the present tense verb "is."

English: My neighbor is very kind.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ ਗੁਆਂਢੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is happy. English: I am very happy today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਅੱਜ ਬਹੁਤ ਖੁਸ਼ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - [hi]main[/hi] - I

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - [hi]ajj[/hi] - today

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਖੁਸ਼[/hi] - [hi]khush[/hi] - happy

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]haan[/hi] - am

Key concepts:

The sentence uses the present tense, indicating a current state of being.

The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb.

The word [hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] is the present tense conjugation of the verb "to be."

The word [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] is an adverb that modifies the adjective [hi]ਖੁਸ਼[/hi].

Translation: I am very happy today.

The next word is therefore. English: Therefore, the students are going to the library.

Punjabi: [hi]Is li'i, vidhya'rthi laibreri jaa rahe ne.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This

[hi]li'i[/hi] - for, because of this

[hi]vidhya'rthi[/hi] - student (plural)

[hi]laibreri[/hi] - library

[hi]jaa[/hi] - go

[hi]rahe[/hi] - are (present continuous, masculine plural)

[hi]ne[/hi] - they (masculine plural, subject marker)

Key Concepts:

[hi]Is[/hi]: This is a demonstrative pronoun, referring to the previous statement or context.

[hi]li'i[/hi]: This is a conjunction that shows cause and effect, similar to "therefore" or "so".

[hi]ne[/hi]: This is a subject marker that helps determine the grammatical subject of the sentence. Here it tells us that the subject is plural and masculine.

[hi]rahe[/hi]: This is the present continuous tense, indicating that the action is ongoing.

English: Therefore, the students are going to the library.

Punjabi: [hi]Is li'i, vidhya'rthi laibreri jaa rahe ne.[/hi]

The next word is very. English: This is a very beautiful day.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh bahut sunder din hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]sundar[/hi] - beautiful

[hi]din[/hi] - day

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concept:

[hi]bahut[/hi] means "very". It is an adverb used to intensify the adjective [hi]sundar[/hi] (beautiful).

English: This is a very beautiful day.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh bahut sunder din hai[/hi].

The next word is area. English: The area of this field is very large.

Punjabi: [hi]Is khet da kshetra bahut bada hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This (Demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]khet[/hi] - Field (Noun)

[hi]da[/hi] - Of (Possessive particle)

[hi]kshetra[/hi] - Area (Noun)

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Very (Adverb)

[hi]bada[/hi] - Large (Adjective)

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (Verb)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: [hi]da[/hi] shows possession, similar to "of" in English.

Noun: [hi]khet[/hi] and [hi]kshetra[/hi] are both nouns, signifying things.

Adjective: [hi]bada[/hi] describes the noun [hi]kshetra[/hi].

Translation: This field's area is very large.

The next word is prove. English: He proved that he was right.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸਾਬਤ ਕੀਤਾ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਸਹੀ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is a combination of two words: [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he/she) and [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] (the postposition for the subject in the sentence).

[hi]ਸਾਬਤ[/hi] - This means "to prove". It's the past tense form.

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do" in Punjabi. In this sentence, it acts as a helping verb, akin to "did" in English.

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - This is a conjunction that introduces a subordinate clause, like "that" in English.

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is a pronoun that refers to the person who was proven to be right.

[hi]ਸਹੀ[/hi] - This means "correct" or "right".

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to be" in Punjabi.

This sentence is in the past tense and shows how the action of proving happened in the past. Notice the use of the postposition [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] to mark the subject, [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi], as performing the action. This is a key feature of Punjabi grammar.

English: He proved that he was right.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸਾਬਤ ਕੀਤਾ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਸਹੀ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is give. English: He gave me a book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]mainu[/hi] - to me

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - one/a

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitab[/hi] - book

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi] - [hi]ditti.[/hi] - gave (past tense)

Key concept: [hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] ([hi]ditti[/hi]) is the past tense of [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] ([hi]dena[/hi]) which means "to give." This ending is a common way to show past tense in Punjabi.

English: He gave me a book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is into. English: He went into the house.

Punjabi: ਉਹ ਘਰੇ [hi]gharay[/hi] ਵੜਿਆ [hi]vadiya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]gharay[/hi] means "into the house" or "inside the house." It is a postposition, meaning it comes after the noun it modifies. It's formed by combining the word for "house" [hi]ghar[/hi] with the postposition [hi]vay[/hi] which means "in" or "into."

[hi]vadiya[/hi] means "went" or "entered." It is the past tense of the verb [hi]vadian[/hi] which means "to go" or "to enter."

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions like "into" in English.

Word Order: The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb.

English: He went into the house.

Punjabi: ਉਹ ਘਰੇ [hi]gharay[/hi] ਵੜਿਆ [hi]vadiya[/hi].

The next word is indeed. English: He indeed went to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੱਚਮੁੱਚ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - he/she/it (pronoun)

[hi]ਸੱਚਮੁੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]sachmuch[/hi] - indeed, truly, really (adverb)

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]bazaar[/hi] - market (noun)

[hi]ਗਿਆ।[/hi] - [hi]gya[/hi] - went (verb, past tense)

Key concepts:

[hi]ਸੱਚਮੁੱਚ[/hi] - is used to emphasize truthfulness, similar to the English word "indeed".

[hi]ਗਿਆ।[/hi] - is a past tense verb, used to indicate an action that has already happened. It is similar to the English past tense verb "went".

English: He indeed went to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੱਚਮੁੱਚ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is release. English: The bird was released from its cage.

Punjabi: [hi]Chidiya nu usdi pinjre ton chhad ditya gaya[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Chidiya[/hi] - This is the word for "bird" in Punjabi. Note the feminine gender, since it is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]nu[/hi] - This is the dative case marker, which indicates that the bird is the recipient of the action. This is like "to" in English, but in Punjabi it is a separate word that always follows the noun.

[hi]usdi[/hi] - This is the possessive marker, and it means "her" or "its" in this case.

[hi]pinjre[/hi] - This is the word for "cage", also in the dative case. It will always end with [hi]re[/hi] when in the dative case.

[hi]ton[/hi] - This is the preposition "from" which follows the dative case word.

[hi]chhad[/hi] - This is the root word for "release" and is a verb. The past tense, which is used in this sentence, is [hi]chhad ditya[/hi]

[hi]gaya[/hi] - This is the past participle of the verb "to go", and indicates that the action of releasing was completed.

Key Concepts:

Case Markers: Punjabi has case markers that indicate the function of a noun in the sentence. The dative case marker [hi]nu[/hi] is important to learn because it is used very often in Punjabi.

Possessive Markers: Possessive markers, like [hi]usdi[/hi], tell you who owns or is related to the noun. You must use them correctly when translating possessive phrases.

Verb Conjugation: The Punjabi verb [hi]chhad ditya[/hi] is a compound verb and requires you to combine a past tense and a past participle. Learning this compound verb system will make your Punjabi translation more accurate.

English: The bird was released from its cage.

Punjabi: [hi]Chidiya nu usdi pinjre ton chhad ditya gaya[/hi]

The next word is late. English: He arrived late.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੇਰ ਨਾਲ ਪਹੁੰਚਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - he

[hi]ਦੇਰ[/hi] - [hi]der[/hi] - late

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]nal[/hi] - with (indicates accompaniment, in this case, arriving with the lateness)

[hi]ਪਹੁੰਚਿਆ।[/hi] - [hi]pahunchia[/hi] - arrived (past tense, masculine singular)

This sentence demonstrates the use of the postposition [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]nal[/hi] to indicate accompaniment. The word [hi]ਦੇਰ[/hi] - [hi]der[/hi] meaning late can be used as a noun and modified by the postposition [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]nal[/hi] to create a phrase meaning "with lateness" or "late." The verb [hi]ਪਹੁੰਚਿਆ।[/hi] - [hi]pahunchia[/hi] is in the past tense, masculine singular form, agreeing with the masculine singular subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi].

This sentence is a simple example of how to express the concept of lateness in Punjabi. It can be used in a variety of contexts to describe someone or something that arrived late.

The next word is battle. English: The two armies battled fiercely for control of the city.

Punjabi: [hi]Do [hi]faujaan [hi]shahar [hi]te [hi]qabza [hi]karne [hi]lye [hi]behad [hi]jor [hi]se [hi]ladde [hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Do [hi] (two)

[hi]faujaan [hi] (armies) - note plural ending

[hi]shahar [hi] (city)

[hi]te [hi] (on, upon) - preposition

[hi]qabza [hi] (control, hold)

[hi]karne [hi] (to do, to make) - infinitive

[hi]lye [hi] (for) - preposition

[hi]behad [hi] (very, extremely) - adverb

[hi]jor [hi] (force, effort) - used with [hi]se [hi]

[hi]se [hi] (with, by) - preposition used with [hi]jor [hi]

[hi]ladde [hi] (battled, fought) - past tense verb

Key concepts:

[hi]te [hi] is used to show location - on, upon

[hi]lye [hi] is used to show purpose - for

[hi]se [hi] is used with a noun that shows how something is done - with, by

[hi]karne [hi] is a common infinitive ending, and used here to show the purpose of the armies.

English: The two armies battled fiercely for control of the city.

Punjabi: [hi]Do [hi]faujaan [hi]shahar [hi]te [hi]qabza [hi]karne [hi]lye [hi]behad [hi]jor [hi]se [hi]ladde [hi].

The next word is son. English: He is the son of a farmer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਿਸਾਨ ਦਾ ਪੁੱਤਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He / She / It

[hi]ਕਿਸਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]kisan[/hi] - Farmer

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਪੁੱਤਰ[/hi] - [hi]puttar[/hi] - Son

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - Is

Key concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - possessive particle indicating possession, it is similar to “of” or “'s” in English.

[hi]ਪੁੱਤਰ[/hi] - means son, it is a common word used in everyday language.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is the verb "to be" in the present tense.

Translation: He is the son of a farmer.

The next word is class. English: The class is very interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲਾਸ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਲਾਸ[/hi] = [hi]klass[/hi] = class

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] = [hi]bahut[/hi] = very

[hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪ[/hi] = [hi]dilchasp[/hi] = interesting

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] = [hi]hai[/hi] = is

Key concept: The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb, which is the opposite of English.

English: The class is very interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲਾਸ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is absolutely. English: He absolutely loves this food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇਸ ਖਾਣੇ ਨੂੰ ਬਿਲਕੁਲ ਪਿਆਰ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun, modifying [hi]ਖਾਣੇ[/hi])

[hi]ਖਾਣੇ[/hi] - Food (noun, object of the verb)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - To (preposition, indicating direction of the verb)

[hi]ਬਿਲਕੁਲ[/hi] - Absolutely (adverb, modifying [hi]ਪਿਆਰ[/hi])

[hi]ਪਿਆਰ[/hi] - Love (verb, action of the sentence)

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - Does (verb, conjugated for present tense and third person singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (verb, conjugated for present tense and third person singular)

Key Concepts:

Direct Object: The object that receives the action of the verb (in this case, [hi]ਖਾਣੇ[/hi] - food)

Preposition: A word that shows the relationship between a noun or pronoun and another word in the sentence (in this case, [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - to)

Adverb: A word that modifies a verb, adjective, or another adverb (in this case, [hi]ਬਿਲਕੁਲ[/hi] - absolutely)

Conjugation: The change in the form of a verb to indicate tense, person, and number (in this case, the verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] is conjugated to indicate present tense and third person singular)

Remember: [hi]ਬਿਲਕੁਲ[/hi] is a very common word in Punjabi, and it can be used to express strong agreement or emphasis.

The next word is on. English: He is sitting on the chair.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੁਰਸੀ ਉੱਤੇ ਬੈਠਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the pronoun "he" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਕੁਰਸੀ[/hi] - This is the noun "chair" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਉੱਤੇ[/hi] - This is the preposition "on" in Punjabi. This is an important word to learn, as it is used to indicate location or position.

[hi]ਬੈਠਾ[/hi] - This is the verb "sitting" in Punjabi. This verb is conjugated to agree with the subject, "he."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the verb "is" in Punjabi. This verb is used to indicate present tense.

Key Concept: In Punjabi, prepositions are often placed after the noun they modify. In this case, "[hi]ਉੱਤੇ[/hi]" is placed after "[hi]ਕੁਰਸੀ[/hi]"

The next word is near. English: The park is near the school.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਾਗ਼ ਸਕੂਲ ਦੇ ਨੇੜੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਾਗ਼[/hi] - baag - park

[hi]ਸਕੂਲ[/hi] - school - school

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - de - of (possessive)

[hi]ਨੇੜੇ[/hi] - neṛe - near

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - hai - is

Key Concept: The Punjabi sentence uses the postposition [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] to indicate possession. In this case, the park is "near" the school. The structure is "X is near the Y" where X is the subject of the sentence and Y is the object of the sentence.

English: The park is near the school.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਾਗ਼ ਸਕੂਲ ਦੇ ਨੇੜੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is to. English: He went to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This means "market".

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to go". It's conjugated in the masculine singular form.

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions, which are words that follow the noun they modify, like "to" in "go to the market".

The verb "to go" takes different forms depending on the subject's gender and number.

Translation: He went to the market.

The next word is pattern. English: The dress has a beautiful pattern.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਪੜੇ ‘ਤੇ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਨਮੂਨਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਪੜੇ[/hi] (kapaṛe) - dress (masculine)

[hi]‘ਤੇ[/hi] (te) - on

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] (sundar) - beautiful

[hi]ਨਮੂਨਾ[/hi] (namoona) - pattern

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]‘ਤੇ[/hi] (te) is a postposition that indicates location.

[hi]ਨਮੂਨਾ[/hi] (namoona) can refer to a pattern in clothing, art, or even a design.

English: The dress has a beautiful pattern.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਪੜੇ ‘ਤੇ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਨਮੂਨਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is describe. English: The house is described as being very old.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਪੁਰਾਣਾ ਦੱਸਿਆ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "house." It is in the subject position of the sentence.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi]: This means "very" and modifies the adjective [hi]ਪੁਰਾਣਾ[/hi].

[hi]ਪੁਰਾਣਾ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "old" and describes the house.

[hi]ਦੱਸਿਆ[/hi]: This is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਦੱਸਣਾ[/hi], which means "to tell."

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi]: This is the present participle of the verb [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi], which means "to go" and is used here to form the passive voice, "is described."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: This is the Punjabi equivalent of "is."

Key concepts:

The passive voice is used in Punjabi using the present participle of the verb [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] and the past participle of the main verb. This is a very common construction in Punjabi. You can think of it as "being" + past participle.

You can see that the word order in the Punjabi sentence is different from the English sentence. This is typical of Punjabi grammar.

The next word is thank. English: Thank you.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ੁਕਰੀਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸ਼ੁਕਰੀਆ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "thank you." It is a polite expression of gratitude.

The word is used to express gratitude for something someone has done for you.

Key Concepts:

Politeness: In Punjabi, it is important to be polite when expressing gratitude.

Directness: This is a direct way of expressing thanks.

Context: This word is used in many different contexts, from formal to informal.

English: Thank you.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ੁਕਰੀਆ[/hi].

The next word is use. English: We use computers to communicate with each other.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਇੱਕ ਦੂਜੇ ਨਾਲ ਸੰਪਰਕ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਕੰਪਿਊਟਰ ਵਰਤਦੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We (subject, plural)

[hi]ਇੱਕ ਦੂਜੇ ਨਾਲ[/hi] - with each other (prepositional phrase)

[hi]ਸੰਪਰਕ ਕਰਨ[/hi] - to communicate (infinitive verb)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for (preposition)

[hi]ਕੰਪਿਊਟਰ[/hi] - computers (object)

[hi]ਵਰਤਦੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi] - use (verb, present tense, plural)

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions, like [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] instead of prepositions

The verb conjugation in Punjabi is based on subject-verb agreement

[hi]ਵਰਤਦੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi] uses the plural form of the verb to agree with [hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi]

English: We use computers to communicate with each other.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਇੱਕ ਦੂਜੇ ਨਾਲ ਸੰਪਰਕ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਕੰਪਿਊਟਰ ਵਰਤਦੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is remind. English: Please remind me to buy groceries tomorrow.

Punjabi: ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਦੁਕਾਨ ਤੋਂ ਸਮਾਨ ਖ਼ਰੀਦਣ ਦੀ ਯਾਦ ਦਿਵਾਓ। [hi]kirpaa karake mainoo kal dukaan ton samaan kharīdn di yaad divao.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]kirpaa[/hi] (please) is a polite word used when requesting something.

[hi]karake[/hi] (do) is used with the word [hi]kirpaa[/hi] to make the request more polite.

[hi]mainoo[/hi] (me) is the object pronoun for "me".

[hi]kal[/hi] (tomorrow) is a common word for the next day.

[hi]dukaan[/hi] (shop) is a place where people buy goods.

[hi]ton[/hi] (from) is a preposition used to indicate a place of origin.

[hi]samaan[/hi] (goods, stuff) is a general term used for things you buy at a shop.

[hi]kharīdn[/hi] (buy) is the verb to purchase something.

[hi]di[/hi] (of) is a preposition that means "belonging to".

[hi]yaad[/hi] (memory) refers to something that you remember.

[hi]divao[/hi] (give) is the imperative verb "give" which means "please give me".

This sentence uses the imperative form of the verb, which is used to give a command or request.

The Punjabi sentence literally translates to: "Please do give me the memory of buying goods from the shop tomorrow".

The next word is survive. English: He survived the difficult times.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲ ਸਮਿਆਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਜੀਵਨ ਬਚਾਇਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - He (in the past tense)

[hi]ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲ[/hi] - Difficult

[hi]ਸਮਿਆਂ[/hi] - Times (plural)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - In (location)

[hi]ਜੀਵਨ[/hi] - Life

[hi]ਬਚਾਇਆ[/hi] - Saved (past tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This preposition is used to indicate location and is similar to the English "in".

[hi]ਬਚਾਇਆ[/hi] - This verb can be used in both literal and figurative senses, in this case, it is being used to express surviving a difficult situation.

English: He survived the difficult times.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲ ਸਮਿਆਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਜੀਵਨ ਬਚਾਇਆ[/hi].

The next word is strength. English: He has a lot of strength.

Punjabi: [hi]Usde vich bahut takat hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usde[/hi]: This is a possessive pronoun meaning "his".

[hi]vich[/hi]: This is a postposition meaning "in" or "inside".

[hi]bahut[/hi]: This is an adjective meaning "a lot" or "many".

[hi]takat[/hi]: This is a noun meaning "strength" or "power".

[hi]hai[/hi]: This is the present tense verb "to be" (third person singular).

Key Concept: The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb, unlike English which is subject-verb-object. This sentence demonstrates this key concept.

Translation: He has a lot of strength.

The next word is military. English: The military is strong.

Punjabi: [hi]fauj [hi] [hi]takatwar [hi] hai.

Breakdown:

[hi]fauj [hi] is the Punjabi word for "military"

[hi]takatwar [hi] means "strong".

[hi]hai [hi] is the Punjabi word for "is".

This sentence uses the standard Punjabi sentence structure, subject-verb-object.

The word [hi]fauj [hi] (military) is the subject of the sentence.

The word [hi]takatwar [hi] (strong) is the adjective describing the subject.

The word [hi]hai [hi] (is) is the verb.

This is a very simple sentence that is easy to understand and remember.

The next word is determine. English: We must determine the best way to solve this problem.

Punjabi: [hi]āsīṁ nuṁ is samasya nuṁ hal karṇa dā sabh to vaddhiya tarika tay karṇa caahīdā hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]āsīṁ[/hi] - We (plural, inclusive)

[hi]nuṁ[/hi] - to us (dative case, the object of the verb)

[hi]is[/hi] - this

[hi]samasya[/hi] - problem

[hi]nuṁ[/hi] - of (possessive case, this problem's)

[hi]hal[/hi] - solution

[hi]karṇa[/hi] - to do, to make (infinitive verb)

[hi]dā[/hi] - of (possessive case, way's)

[hi]sabh[/hi] - all, every

[hi]to[/hi] - to (indicates comparison)

[hi]vaddhiya[/hi] - best

[hi]tarika[/hi] - way, method

[hi]tay[/hi] - with, by (adverbial particle)

[hi]karṇa[/hi] - to do, to make (infinitive verb)

[hi]caahīdā[/hi] - should, must, ought to (modal verb)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is, is present (copula verb)

Key Concepts:

Dative Case: The word [hi]nuṁ[/hi] is in the dative case, indicating that the problem is the indirect object of the verb [hi]karṇa[/hi] (to do, to make).

Possessive Case: The word [hi]nuṁ[/hi] is in the possessive case, indicating ownership or possession. In this case, it shows that the problem has a solution.

Modal Verbs: The modal verb [hi]caahīdā[/hi] adds a sense of obligation or necessity to the sentence.

Infinitive Verbs: The verb [hi]karṇa[/hi] is used in the infinitive form, which indicates a potential action or a purpose.

Translation: We should determine the best way to solve this problem.

The next word is really. English: This is really good.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh sachmuch vadiya hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This

[hi]sachmuch[/hi] - really

[hi]vadiya[/hi] - good

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

The word [hi]sachmuch[/hi] (really) is a very common and versatile word. It can be used to emphasize a statement, express surprise or agreement.

English: This is really good.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh sachmuch vadiya hai[/hi].

The next word is famous. English: He is a famous singer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ ਗਾਇਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]ooh[/hi] - he/she/it

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a/an

[hi]ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ[/hi] - [hi]mashoor[/hi] - famous

[hi]ਗਾਇਕ[/hi] - [hi]gaayik[/hi] - singer

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is/am/are

This sentence uses the simple present tense to describe a state of being. The word [hi]ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ[/hi] is a very common word used in Punjabi and you will hear it frequently.

English: He is a famous singer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ ਗਾਇਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is community. English: The community is celebrating the festival.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਮਾਜ ਤਿਉਹਾਰ ਮਨਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਮਾਜ[/hi] - [hi]samaj[/hi] - This means "community." It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਤਿਉਹਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]tiouhar[/hi] - This means "festival." It is the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਮਨਾ[/hi] - [hi]mana[/hi] - This means "to celebrate." It is the verb in the sentence.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]riha[/hi] - This is a part of the verb conjugation that means "is" and makes the sentence in the present continuous tense.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - This is the "is" part of the verb conjugation.

Key Concept: The Punjabi language is similar to English in that it has a subject-verb-object sentence structure. However, the verb structure is more complex in Punjabi than in English.

English: The community is celebrating the festival.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਮਾਜ ਤਿਉਹਾਰ ਮਨਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is student. English: The student is sitting in the classroom.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਕਲਾਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਬੈਠਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] [hi]vidyaarthee[/hi] - student. This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਕਲਾਸ[/hi] [hi]klaas[/hi] - classroom. This is the location where the student is sitting.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] [hi]vich[/hi] - in. This preposition indicates the location of the student.

[hi]ਬੈਠਾ[/hi] [hi]baittha[/hi] - sitting. This is the verb, indicating the action of the student.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] - is. This is the auxiliary verb, indicating the present tense.

Key Concepts:

Subject-verb agreement: The verb "[hi]ਬੈਠਾ[/hi]" is in the singular form to agree with the singular subject "[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi]".

Prepositions: The preposition "[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi]" is used to indicate the location of the student in the classroom.

Translation: The student is sitting in the classroom.

The next word is kitchen. English: The kitchen is a place for cooking.

Punjabi: [hi]Rasoi[/hi] [hi]pakwaan[/hi] [hi]kare[/hi] [hi]vaaste[/hi] [hi]jagah[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Rasoi[/hi] - kitchen

[hi]pakwaan[/hi] - cooking

[hi]kare[/hi] - does

[hi]vaaste[/hi] - for

[hi]jagah[/hi] - place

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]vaaste[/hi] is a common preposition that indicates purpose and translates roughly to "for"

[hi]kare[/hi] is the third-person singular present tense of the verb "to do"

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense of the verb "to be"

English: The kitchen is a place for cooking.

Punjabi: [hi]Rasoi[/hi] [hi]pakwaan[/hi] [hi]kare[/hi] [hi]vaaste[/hi] [hi]jagah[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

The next word is or. English: She is either at home or at work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਘਰ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ ਜਾਂ ਕੰਮ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] means "she"

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] means "home"

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] means "at"

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] means "is"

[hi]ਜਾਂ[/hi] means "or"

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] means "work"

This sentence uses the conjunction [hi]ਜਾਂ[/hi], which acts like "or" in English, to connect two possibilities. The word [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] means "at" and is used to indicate location. This structure is very similar to English where we use "at" to indicate location.

The next word is itself. English: The book itself is very interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ ‘ਚ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] means "book"

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ[/hi] means "itself"

[hi]‘ਚ[/hi] is a shortened form of [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi], meaning "in" or "within"

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] means "very"

[hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪ[/hi] means "interesting"

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is the present tense conjugation of "to be" in Punjabi, meaning "is"

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ[/hi] is a reflexive pronoun in Punjabi, meaning "itself" or "himself/herself".

[hi]‘ਚ[/hi] is a common postposition in Punjabi, meaning "in", "within", or "among".

English: The book itself is very interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ ‘ਚ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is crisis. English: There is a crisis in the country.

Punjabi: [hi]Desh vich sankaat aa gaya hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Desh[/hi] - country

[hi]vich[/hi] - in (this is a postposition, like "in" in English)

[hi]sankaat[/hi] - crisis

[hi]aa[/hi] - came, arrived (this is a past tense verb, and the "a" at the end signifies the third person singular form, as in "he/she/it came")

[hi]gaya[/hi] - went, became (this is a past tense verb, and the "a" at the end signifies the third person singular form, as in "he/she/it went")

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (this is the present tense of "to be")

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence follows the Subject-Verb-Object word order, just like English.

The word [hi]vich[/hi] is a postposition, which is similar to a preposition in English but follows the noun it modifies.

The Punjabi sentence uses the past tense of the verbs [hi]aa[/hi] and [hi]gaya[/hi] to indicate that the crisis has already happened.

The word [hi]hai[/hi] at the end of the sentence indicates the present tense.

English: There is a crisis in the country.

Punjabi: [hi]Desh vich sankaat aa gaya hai[/hi].

The next word is introduction. English: This is an introduction.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਇੱਕ ਪੇਸ਼ਕਾਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] means "this"

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] means "one" or "a"

[hi]ਪੇਸ਼ਕਾਰੀ[/hi] means "introduction"

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] means "is"

Key concept: [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a very common word that is used to express the "is" form of the verb "to be" in the present tense. It is similar to the word "is" in English.

This sentence uses the simple present tense to indicate a fact.

English: This is an introduction.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਇੱਕ ਪੇਸ਼ਕਾਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is aid. English: He aided his friend in need.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਦੀ ਮਦਦ ਕੀਤੀ ਜਦੋਂ ਉਹ ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - [hi]aapne[/hi] - his/her/its (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] - [hi]dost[/hi] - friend

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of the (feminine singular)

[hi]ਮਦਦ[/hi] - [hi]maddad[/hi] - help, aid

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]kiiti[/hi] - did (past tense)

[hi]ਜਦੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]jadon[/hi] - when

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - he/she/it

[hi]ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲ[/hi] - [hi]mushkil[/hi] - difficult, trouble

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] - [hi]si.[/hi] - was

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is the feminine singular form of the possessive marker "of the".

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] is the past tense of the verb "to do" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਜਦੋਂ[/hi] introduces a subordinate clause, which explains the context of the main clause.

English: He aided his friend in need.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਦੀ ਮਦਦ ਕੀਤੀ ਜਦੋਂ ਉਹ ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is unclear. English: This issue is unclear to me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਇਹ ਮੁੱਦਾ ਸਪੱਸ਼ਟ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - "to me" or "for me" (indirect object marker)

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - "this" (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਮੁੱਦਾ[/hi] - "issue" or "problem" (noun)

[hi]ਸਪੱਸ਼ਟ[/hi] - "clear" (adjective)

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - "not" (negative particle)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - "is" (copula, connects subject and adjective)

Key Concepts:

Demonstrative Pronouns: [hi]ਇਹ[/hi] (this) and [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (that) are used to point out a specific item or person.

Indirect Object Marker: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] is a marker that indicates the recipient of the action.

Negation: [hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] is used to negate the sentence.

English: This issue is unclear to me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਇਹ ਮੁੱਦਾ ਸਪੱਸ਼ਟ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ[/hi].

The next word is happen. English: This can happen to anyone.

Punjabi: ਇਹ ਕਿਸੇ ਵੀ ਵਿਅਕਤੀ ਨਾਲ ਹੋ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।

[hi]Eh kisee vee vyakti naal ho sakda hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This

[hi]kisee[/hi] - anyone

[hi]vee[/hi] - any (in this case, emphasizes that it can happen to anyone, no matter who they are)

[hi]vyakti[/hi] - person

[hi]naal[/hi] - with

[hi]ho[/hi] - to be (in this context, it means "can happen")

[hi]sakda[/hi] - can/able to/possible to

[hi]hai[/hi] - is/are (in this case, it means "happens")

Key Concepts:

[hi]naal[/hi] is a postposition that means "with" and is used to show that something happens to someone or something.

[hi]sakda hai[/hi] is a common phrase that means "can happen" or "is possible". It shows that something is likely to occur.

This is a simple sentence using the Punjabi word [hi]ho[/hi] which means "to be". The verb [hi]ho[/hi] is the core of the sentence and is combined with the auxiliary verb [hi]sakda[/hi] to mean "can happen". Remember this combination!

The next word is police. English: The police are investigating the case.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ ਮਾਮਲੇ ਦੀ ਜਾਂਚ ਕਰ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ[/hi] - Police

[hi]ਮਾਮਲੇ[/hi] - Case (this is the object of the verb)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of (this indicates possession, the case belongs to someone/something)

[hi]ਜਾਂਚ[/hi] - Investigation

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - To do

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - Is (this indicates present continuous tense - doing something right now)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is (this acts as an auxiliary verb to help form the present continuous tense)

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the present continuous tense to indicate an ongoing action (the investigation is happening now).

The use of the possessive marker [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] shows that the case belongs to the police.

The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb, which is different from English (subject-verb-object). This is an example of how the word order in Punjabi can be different from English.

English: The police are investigating the case.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ ਮਾਮਲੇ ਦੀ ਜਾਂਚ ਕਰ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is significant. English: This is a significant event in our history.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਸਾਡੇ ਇਤਿਹਾਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਇੱਕ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਘਟਨਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਸਾਡੇ[/hi] - Our

[hi]ਇਤਿਹਾਸ[/hi] - History

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - In

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - A

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] - Significant

[hi]ਘਟਨਾ[/hi] - Event

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is.

Key concept: This sentence uses a common Punjabi grammatical structure where the subject comes before the verb. The word [hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] (significant) is an adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਘਟਨਾ[/hi] (event). This type of sentence construction is very common in Punjabi, so learning it will help you understand a wide variety of sentences.

The next word is alone. English: He is alone.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇਕੱਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun for "he".

[hi]ਇਕੱਲਾ[/hi] - This word means "alone". It is an adjective modifying the subject "he".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

Key concept: This sentence is in the simple present tense and is a statement about the subject's current state.

The next word is hour. English: He came here an hour ago.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਘੰਟਾ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਇੱਥੇ ਆਇਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - One (numeral)

[hi]ਘੰਟਾ[/hi] - Hour (noun)

[hi]ਪਹਿਲਾਂ[/hi] - Ago (adverb of time)

[hi]ਇੱਥੇ[/hi] - Here (adverb of place)

[hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] - Came (verb, past tense)

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] - Was (auxiliary verb, used to form past perfect tense)

Key Concepts:

Past Perfect Tense: The past perfect tense is used to describe an action that happened before another action in the past. In this sentence, "he came here" happened before "an hour ago."

Adverbs of Time and Place: Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. Adverbs of time (like [hi]ਪਹਿਲਾਂ[/hi]) tell us when something happened, while adverbs of place (like [hi]ਇੱਥੇ[/hi]) tell us where something happened.

English Translation: He came here an hour ago.

The next word is author. English: The author of this book is very famous.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਲੇਖਕ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun, referring to the book mentioned previously)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book (feminine noun)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive particle, connects [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] to [hi]ਲੇਖਕ[/hi])

[hi]ਲੇਖਕ[/hi] - author (masculine noun)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very (adverb)

[hi]ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ[/hi] - famous (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense, third person singular, verb "to be")

Key concepts:

Gender agreement: In Punjabi, nouns have genders, and adjectives and possessive particles need to agree in gender with the nouns they modify.

Word order: In Punjabi, the noun usually comes before the adjective.

Verb placement: The verb comes at the end of the sentence.

English: The author of this book is very famous.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਲੇਖਕ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is explain. English: He explained the problem to me.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujhe samasya samjhayi[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (This refers to a male person who is not close to the speaker and is being talked about)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has, has done. The particle [hi]ne[/hi] is used for past tense and emphasizes the action of explaining.

[hi]mujhe[/hi] - to me, to me. The [hi]mujhe[/hi] indicates that the speaker is the recipient of the explanation.

[hi]samasya[/hi] - problem, matter, difficulty. It's the noun referring to the issue being explained.

[hi]samjhayi[/hi] - explained, made understandable. It is the past tense of the verb [hi]samjhana[/hi] which means to explain or make clear. It also indicates the way the action was done, by explaining.

This sentence is in the past tense and is a simple sentence. It follows the structure Subject + Object + Verb. The object is the person receiving the explanation, and the verb describes the action. The particle [hi]ne[/hi] is an important element of the Punjabi language which helps to understand the action and its tense. It is also important to note that the Punjabi language is flexible and the word order can change to emphasize different aspects of the sentence.

The next word is bus. English: The bus is coming.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਸ ਆ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਸ[/hi] - [hi]bas[/hi] (bus) is the subject of the sentence, and it is in the nominative case.

[hi]ਆ[/hi] - [hi]aa[/hi] (come) is the present participle of the verb.

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]rahi[/hi] (is) is the present continuous tense marker, indicating that the bus is coming now.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] (is) is the present tense marker, indicating that the bus is coming in the present moment.

The sentence is a simple declarative sentence. The word order is subject-verb-object.

English: The bus is coming.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਸ ਆ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ[/hi]

The next word is model. Please provide an English word for me to translate into a Punjabi sentence. I am ready to help you learn!

The next word is statement. English: She made a statement about her experience.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਤਜਰਬੇ ਬਾਰੇ ਇੱਕ ਬਿਆਨ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular feminine pronoun in the past tense, meaning "she."

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun, meaning "her."

[hi]ਤਜਰਬੇ[/hi] - This is the noun, meaning "experience."

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - This is the postposition, meaning "about."

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the indefinite article, meaning "a."

[hi]ਬਿਆਨ[/hi] - This is the noun, meaning "statement."

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi] - This is the past tense verb, meaning "gave."

Key Concepts:

Gender and Number: Punjabi nouns and pronouns are marked for gender and number. This sentence uses the feminine singular form of the pronoun ([hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi]) and the noun ([hi]ਤਜਰਬੇ[/hi]).

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions like English. In this sentence, the postposition [hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] is used to indicate the object of the statement.

Word Order: Punjabi word order is generally Subject-Object-Verb, similar to English.

Translation: She made a statement about her experience.

The next word is fun. English: It is fun to play cricket.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕ੍ਰਿਕਟ ਖੇਡਣਾ ਮਜ਼ੇਦਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕ੍ਰਿਕਟ[/hi] [hi]krikēt[/hi] - cricket

[hi]ਖੇਡਣਾ[/hi] [hi]khēḍnā[/hi] - to play (verb)

[hi]ਮਜ਼ੇਦਾਰ[/hi] [hi]mazedār[/hi] - fun, enjoyable

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - is

The sentence follows the basic structure of a Punjabi sentence: subject + verb + object. In this case, the subject is implied (it), the verb is [hi]ਖੇਡਣਾ[/hi], and the object is [hi]ਕ੍ਰਿਕਟ[/hi]. [hi]ਮਜ਼ੇਦਾਰ[/hi] is an adjective that describes the action of playing cricket.

Key concepts:

- The Punjabi language uses postpositions, like [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] [hi]nū[/hi] (to, for), [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] [hi]te[/hi] (on, at), and [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] [hi]vichch[/hi] (in, within), which are placed after the noun they modify.

- Punjabi sentences often end with a particle like [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]ne[/hi] (have, has), [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]dā[/hi] (of), or [hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] [hi]vālā[/hi] (one who has), which add grammatical information.

- Punjabi is an agglutinative language, meaning words are formed by adding suffixes and prefixes to a root word.

Remember, practice makes perfect!

The next word is people. English: People are coming to the party.

Punjabi: [hi]Log party te aa rahe ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Log[/hi] - This means "people".

[hi]party[/hi] - This means "party".

[hi]te[/hi] - This means "to" or "at".

[hi]aa rahe ne[/hi] - This is a verb phrase meaning "are coming" It is formed from:

[hi]aa[/hi] -  "to come"

[hi]rahe[/hi] - The present continuous tense marker

[hi]ne[/hi] - The plural marker.

Key Concepts:

[hi]Log[/hi] is a plural noun that is used to refer to people in general.

[hi]ne[/hi] is a plural marker that is added to verbs to indicate that the subject is plural.

[hi]te[/hi] is a preposition that indicates location.

English: People are coming to the party.

Punjabi: [hi]Log party te aa rahe ne[/hi].

The next word is scene. English: The scene was beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਦ੍ਰਿਸ਼ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਦ੍ਰਿਸ਼[/hi] (pronounced "drish") is the Punjabi word for "scene"

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] (pronounced "sundar") is the Punjabi word for "beautiful"

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] (pronounced "si") is the Punjabi word for "was"

This sentence is in the simple past tense, meaning that the scene was beautiful in the past. The word order of the sentence is Subject-Verb-Object. In Punjabi, the word order is similar to English. This is a common phrase in Punjabi and will be useful in everyday conversation.

The next word is cry. English: The baby is crying.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚਾ ਰੋ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚਾ[/hi] (bachcha) - baby, child. This is in the nominative case and is the subject of the sentence. We can tell it is a subject because it comes before the verb.

[hi]ਰੋ[/hi] (ro) - to cry. This is the present tense of the verb and is in the third person singular form.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] (riha) - this is the present continuous tense ending and it indicates that the baby is crying now.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) - this is the present tense of the verb 'to be' and is used here to indicate that the action is happening now.

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence is in the present continuous tense.

The verb 'to be' ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi]) is used to indicate that the action is happening now.

English: The baby is crying.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚਾ ਰੋ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is island. English: The island is surrounded by the ocean.

Punjabi: [hi]ਟਾਪੂ ਸਮੁੰਦਰ ਨਾਲ ਘਿਰਾ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਟਾਪੂ[/hi] (pronounced "taa-poo") is the Punjabi word for "island".

[hi]ਸਮੁੰਦਰ[/hi] (pronounced "su-mud-ar") means "ocean".

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] (pronounced "naal") indicates "with" or "by" in this context.

[hi]ਘਿਰਾ[/hi] (pronounced "ghi-ra") is the past participle of the verb "to surround".

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] (pronounced "ho-ya") is the past participle of the verb "to be".

The sentence is in the present tense, indicating that the island is currently surrounded by the ocean. This sentence is a great example of how Punjabi uses prepositions and participles to convey complex relationships and actions.

The next word is level. English: The level of difficulty of this exam is high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਇਮਤਿਹਾਨ ਦਾ ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲ ਪੱਧਰ ਉੱਚਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਇਮਤਿਹਾਨ[/hi] - Exam

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - Of

[hi]ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲ[/hi] - Difficult

[hi]ਪੱਧਰ[/hi] - Level

[hi]ਉੱਚਾ[/hi] - High

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is. The ending of the sentence in Punjabi.

Key concepts:

The Punjabi language is written from right to left.

The use of the word “da” is used to show possession, in this case, “of the exam”.

The word “hai” is a common ending used to indicate that a statement is in the present tense.

English: The level of difficulty of this exam is high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਇਮਤਿਹਾਨ ਦਾ ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲ ਪੱਧਰ ਉੱਚਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is can. English: He can play the guitar.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਗਿਟਾਰ ਵਜਾ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਗਿਟਾਰ[/hi] - Guitar

[hi]ਵਜਾ[/hi] - to play (verb)

[hi]ਸਕਦਾ[/hi] - can, able to

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is. The ending [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is the present tense.

Key Concept: The word [hi]ਸਕਦਾ[/hi] conveys the ability to do something.

Translation: He can play the guitar.

The next word is several. English: There are several books on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]मेज़ ਤੇ ਕਈ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]मेज़[/hi] - [hi]mez[/hi] - table

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]te[/hi] - on (this is a postposition, so it comes after the noun it modifies)

[hi]ਕਈ[/hi] - [hi]kai[/hi] - several, many

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]kitabāṁ[/hi] - books

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - [hi]han[/hi] - are

This sentence uses the postposition [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] ([hi]te[/hi]) to show location. The word [hi]ਕਈ[/hi] ([hi]kai[/hi]) means "several" or "many," and it is used before the noun it modifies, [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ[/hi] ([hi]kitabāṁ[/hi])

The next word is now. English: He is now going to school.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੁਣ ਉਹ ਸਕੂਲ ਜਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹੁਣ[/hi] = now, this word is an adverb of time in the Punjabi sentence.

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] = he, this is a third person singular pronoun.

[hi]ਸਕੂਲ[/hi] = school, this is the noun in the sentence.

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] = to go, this is the verb. We use the [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] ending to make it present continuous. This is very similar to English grammar.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] = is, this is a present tense auxiliary verb. It comes after the [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] and makes the sentence grammatically correct.

Key Concepts:

Use of the present continuous tense in Punjabi.

The use of [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] to indicate a continuous action in the present.

The position of the auxiliary verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi]

English: He is now going to school.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੁਣ ਉਹ ਸਕੂਲ ਜਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is just. English: He just arrived.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹੁਣੇ ਹੀ ਪਹੁੰਚਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]ooh[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਹੁਣੇ ਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]hunay hee[/hi] - just now, recently (adverb phrase)

[hi]ਪਹੁੰਚਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]pahucha[/hi] - arrived (past tense verb)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is/has/am (present tense verb, helping verb in this case)

Key Concepts:

The use of [hi]ਹੁਣੇ ਹੀ[/hi] ([hi]hunay hee[/hi]) to express the idea of "just" in Punjabi.

The present tense verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]hai[/hi]) functions as a helping verb to form the past tense with the past participle [hi]ਪਹੁੰਚਿਆ[/hi] ([hi]pahucha[/hi]).

English: He just arrived.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹੁਣੇ ਹੀ ਪਹੁੰਚਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is operate. English: The doctor operates on patients in the hospital.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ ਹਸਪਤਾਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਮਰੀਜ਼ਾਂ ‘ਤੇ ਆਪਰੇਸ਼ਨ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] - doctor

[hi]ਹਸਪਤਾਲ[/hi] - hospital

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਮਰੀਜ਼ਾਂ[/hi] - patients

[hi]‘ਤੇ[/hi] - on

[hi]ਆਪਰੇਸ਼ਨ[/hi] - operation

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - does

Key concepts:

This sentence uses the verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] This is the present tense, third person singular, masculine form of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] (to do).

The word [hi]‘ਤੇ[/hi] is an important preposition in Punjabi, indicating that the operation is being performed on the patients.

The [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] and [hi]‘ਤੇ[/hi] prepositions are often confusing, but [hi]‘ਤੇ[/hi] is used when something is performed on something, like an operation or a procedure. [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] is used when something is given to someone, like a gift or a message.

English: The doctor operates on patients in the hospital.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ ਹਸਪਤਾਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਮਰੀਜ਼ਾਂ ‘ਤੇ ਆਪਰੇਸ਼ਨ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is crime. English: He committed a crime.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਅਪਰਾਧ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] means "he" or "she" and is the subject of the sentence. It is the third-person singular pronoun in the nominative case.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] means "one" or "a" and acts as a determiner.

[hi]ਅਪਰਾਧ[/hi] - [hi]apradh[/hi] means "crime" and is the object of the verb.

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi] - [hi]kita[/hi] is the past tense of the verb "to do" and is conjugated to agree with the third-person singular subject.

Key Concepts:

Third-person singular subject: The subject of the sentence is "he" or "she." This means that the verb must be conjugated in the third-person singular form.

Direct Object: The object of the verb is the "crime" that was committed. This tells us what the subject did.

Past Tense: The verb "to do" is in the past tense, which indicates that the action took place in the past.

This sentence is an example of a simple declarative sentence in Punjabi. It states a fact about someone committing a crime.

The next word is chief. English: The chief is responsible for the entire team's success.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੁਖੀ ਸਾਰੀ ਟੀਮ ਦੀ ਸਫਲਤਾ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੁਖੀ[/hi] (mukhi) - chief (this word signifies a leader, head, or chief)

[hi]ਸਾਰੀ[/hi] (saari) - entire

[hi]ਟੀਮ[/hi] (team) - team (this is a loanword from English)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (di) - of (this is a possessive marker)

[hi]ਸਫਲਤਾ[/hi] (safalta) - success

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] (lai) - for

[hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ[/hi] (zimmedvaar) - responsible

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai) - is

Key concepts:

[hi]ਮੁਖੀ[/hi] is used to refer to a leader, head, or chief, not just a leader of a team.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a possessive marker that shows ownership or belonging.

English: The chief is responsible for the entire team's success.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੁਖੀ ਸਾਰੀ ਟੀਮ ਦੀ ਸਫਲਤਾ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is do. English: I do my homework.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਆਪਣਾ ਹੋਮਵਰਕ ਕਰਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - [hi]main[/hi] - I, me (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]aapna[/hi] - my, mine (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਹੋਮਵਰਕ[/hi] - [hi]homevarka[/hi] - homework (noun)

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]karda[/hi] - do (present tense verb)

[hi]ਹਾਂ।[/hi] - [hi]haan[/hi] - am, is, are (present tense verb)

Key concepts:

Subject-verb agreement: The verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] (karda) agrees with the subject [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] (main), which is singular.

Possessive pronoun: The possessive pronoun [hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] (aapna) shows ownership of the homework.

Present tense: The sentence is in the present tense, indicating an action that happens regularly.

English: I do my homework.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਆਪਣਾ ਹੋਮਵਰਕ ਕਰਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is guy. English: He is a good guy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਵਧੀਆ ਮੁੰਡਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] means "he" - This is the subject of the sentence and is in the third person singular masculine form.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] means "a" - This is an indefinite article used before singular countable nouns.

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] means "good" - This is an adjective describing the noun "guy."

[hi]ਮੁੰਡਾ[/hi] means "guy" - This is the noun that is being described.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] means "is" - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" and is used to connect the subject and the predicate of the sentence.

Therefore, the sentence means "He is a good guy" or "He is a nice guy."

The next word is taxi. English: He took a taxi to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾਣ ਲਈ ਟੈਕਸੀ ਲੈ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]bazaar[/hi] - Market

[hi]ਜਾਣ[/hi] - [hi]jaan[/hi] - to go

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - [hi]layi[/hi] - for

[hi]ਟੈਕਸੀ[/hi] - [hi]taxi[/hi] - taxi

[hi]ਲੈ[/hi] - [hi]lay[/hi] - take

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]gya[/hi] - went

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] ([hi]layi[/hi]) - This is a very important postposition (similar to a preposition) used to show the purpose of an action. It means 'for'.

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] ([hi]gya[/hi]) - This is a past tense ending attached to the verb [hi]ਲੈ[/hi] ([hi]lay[/hi]) meaning 'take'.

English: He took a taxi to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾਣ ਲਈ ਟੈਕਸੀ ਲੈ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is suit. English: He wears a suit to work every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੋਰ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਕੰਮ ਤੇ ਸੂਟ ਪਾ ਕੇ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ [/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹੋਰ [/hi] - [hi]hor[/hi] - means "he"

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - [hi]har[/hi] - means "every"

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]roz[/hi] - means "day"

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - [hi]kamm[/hi] - means "work"

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]te[/hi] - means "to" or "at"

[hi]ਸੂਟ[/hi] - [hi]suit[/hi] - means "suit"

[hi]ਪਾ[/hi] - [hi]pa[/hi] - means "to wear"

[hi]ਕੇ[/hi] - [hi]ke[/hi] - indicates that the action of wearing the suit is complete and he is now on his way to work.

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]jaanda[/hi] - means "goes"

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਕੇ[/hi] - This particle is an important concept in Punjabi grammar, as it is used to indicate the completion of an action before moving on to another action.

English: He wears a suit to work every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੋਰ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਕੰਮ ਤੇ ਸੂਟ ਪਾ ਕੇ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ [/hi].

The next word is bedroom. English: The bedroom is small.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਮਰਾ ਛੋਟਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਮਰਾ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "bedroom" and it is pronounced "kamra". It is a noun, so it functions as the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਛੋਟਾ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "small" and it is pronounced "chhotaa". It is an adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਕਮਰਾ[/hi].

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "is" and it is pronounced "hai". It is the present tense form of the verb "to be" and it is used to link the subject and the adjective.

The sentence is a simple declarative sentence stating the size of the bedroom. The subject is [hi]ਕਮਰਾ[/hi] (bedroom) and the predicate is [hi]ਛੋਟਾ ਹੈ[/hi] (is small).

The next word is down. English: The cat jumped down from the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਦਰੱਖਤ ਤੋਂ ਹੇਠਾਂ ਛਾਲ ਮਾਰ ਗਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] (billi) - Cat, this is a feminine noun.

[hi]ਦਰੱਖਤ[/hi] (darakht) - Tree, a masculine noun.

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] (ton) - From, a postposition used to show origin.

[hi]ਹੇਠਾਂ[/hi] (hethan) - Down, an adverb.

[hi]ਛਾਲ[/hi] (chhal) - Jump, a feminine noun.

[hi]ਮਾਰ[/hi] (maar) - To hit, a verb.

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] (gai) - Went, a past tense verb (third person singular feminine).

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have gender (masculine or feminine). The gender of a noun affects the form of adjectives, pronouns, and verbs that modify it.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions, which are similar to prepositions in English, to show the relationship between words.

Word Order: Punjabi word order is often flexible, but generally follows the structure Subject-Object-Verb (SOV).

English: The cat jumped down from the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਦਰੱਖਤ ਤੋਂ ਹੇਠਾਂ ਛਾਲ ਮਾਰ ਗਈ।[/hi]

The next word is program. English: The program is interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਗਰਾਮ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਗਰਾਮ[/hi] (program) is the subject of the sentence. It is a masculine noun.

[hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪ[/hi] (interesting) is an adjective that describes the program.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is) is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in the singular, third person.

This sentence uses the basic structure of a simple sentence in Punjabi: subject + adjective + verb.

The next word is develop. English: The farmer is developing his land.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਸਾਨ ਆਪਣੀ ਜ਼ਮੀਨ ਵਿਕਸਿਤ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਸਾਨ[/hi] - This is the word for "farmer" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun "his/her/its". It indicates that the land belongs to the farmer.

[hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ[/hi] - This word means "land" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਵਿਕਸਿਤ[/hi] - This is the past participle of the verb "to develop". It tells us that the farmer is currently in the process of developing the land.

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - This is the verb "to do", but it's used as an auxiliary verb here. It helps to form the present continuous tense.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense marker, indicating that the action of developing is ongoing.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "to be", used here to complete the sentence.

Key Concepts

This sentence uses the present continuous tense, which is formed by using the present tense of the verb "to be" (in this case, "ਹੈ") followed by the present participle of the main verb (in this case, "ਵਿਕਸਿਤ").

The sentence also uses a possessive pronoun ("ਆਪਣੀ") to indicate that the land belongs to the farmer.

The sentence uses the word "[hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ[/hi]" to refer to land.

English: The farmer is developing his land.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਸਾਨ ਆਪਣੀ ਜ਼ਮੀਨ ਵਿਕਸਿਤ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is couple. English: They are a lovely couple.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਸੋਹਣਾ ਜੋੜਾ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - They (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - one (indefinite article)

[hi]ਸੋਹਣਾ[/hi] - beautiful (adjective)

[hi]ਜੋੜਾ[/hi] - couple (noun)

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - are (present tense verb, plural)

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses the same word order as the English sentence, subject-verb-object.

The use of the indefinite article [hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] is similar to the English article "a."

The adjective [hi]ਸੋਹਣਾ[/hi] comes before the noun [hi]ਜੋੜਾ[/hi], just like in English.

English: They are a lovely couple.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਸੋਹਣਾ ਜੋੜਾ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is everyone. English: Everyone is happy today.

Punjabi: [hi]Sabaaj aaaj khush haan[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Sabaaj[/hi] is the Punjabi word for "everyone". It is plural, so it is used when referring to a group of people.

[hi]aaaj[/hi] is the Punjabi word for "today".

[hi]khush[/hi] is the Punjabi word for "happy".

[hi]haan[/hi] is the Punjabi verb "to be" in the present tense.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi does not use articles (a, an, the) so "everyone" is simply [hi]Sabaaj[/hi].

In Punjabi, the verb "to be" is often implied, so it is only used in the present tense.

Punjabi word order is different from English. In English we say "Everyone is happy", but in Punjabi we say "[hi]Sabaaj khush haan[/hi]".

English: Everyone is happy today.

Punjabi: [hi]Sabaaj aaaj khush haan[/hi].

The next word is week. English: This week, we will discuss the importance of learning the Punjabi language.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਹਫ਼ਤੇ, ਅਸੀਂ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਸਿੱਖਣ ਦੇ ਮਹੱਤਵ 'ਤੇ ਚਰਚਾ ਕਰਾਂਗੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - this

[hi]ਹਫ਼ਤੇ[/hi] - week

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - we

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - Punjabi

[hi]ਭਾਸ਼ਾ[/hi] - language

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਣ[/hi] - learning

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - of

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵ[/hi] - importance

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - on

[hi]ਚਰਚਾ[/hi] - discussion

[hi]ਕਰਾਂਗੇ[/hi] - will do

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਹਫ਼ਤੇ[/hi] is a noun, and it is used in the nominative case in this sentence.

The word [hi]ਸਿੱਖਣ[/hi] is a gerund.

The phrase [hi]ਦੇ ਮਹੱਤਵ 'ਤੇ[/hi] literally translates to "on the importance of." It is used to describe what the discussion will be about.

The verb [hi]ਕਰਾਂਗੇ[/hi] is in the future tense, indicating that the discussion will happen in the future.

Translation:

English: This week, we will discuss the importance of learning the Punjabi language.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਹਫ਼ਤੇ, ਅਸੀਂ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਸਿੱਖਣ ਦੇ ਮਹੱਤਵ 'ਤੇ ਚਰਚਾ ਕਰਾਂਗੇ।[/hi]

The next word is coffee. English: I drink coffee every morning.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਹਰ ਸਵੇਰੇ ਕੌਫੀ ਪੀਂਦਾ ਹਾਂ।

[hi]mai har savaire kaufi pinda haan[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]mai[/hi] - I

[hi]har[/hi] - every

[hi]savaire[/hi] - morning

[hi]kaufi[/hi] - coffee

[hi]pinda[/hi] - drink (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]haan[/hi] - am (present tense, masculine singular)

This sentence uses the present tense and shows the frequency of drinking coffee. The verb [hi]pinda[/hi] changes depending on the subject and tense, so keep that in mind when learning new verbs!

English: I drink coffee every morning.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਹਰ ਸਵੇਰੇ ਕੌਫੀ ਪੀਂਦਾ ਹਾਂ।

[hi]mai har savaire kaufi pinda haan[/hi].

The next word is option. English: He has the option to go or stay.

Punjabi: [hi]Us nu jaan da ya rehnda da [hi] [hi]viklap[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] = He/She/It - This is the third person singular pronoun, which is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]nu[/hi] = To/For - This is the dative marker, indicating the recipient of the action.

[hi]jaan[/hi] = To go - This is the infinitive form of the verb 'to go'.

[hi]da[/hi] = Of - This is a possessive marker.

[hi]ya[/hi] = Or - This is a conjunction that joins two alternatives.

[hi]rehnda[/hi] = Staying - This is the present continuous form of the verb 'to stay'.

[hi]da[/hi] = Of - This is a possessive marker.

[hi]viklap[/hi] = Option - This is the noun that indicates the choice available.

[hi]hai[/hi] = Is - This is the present tense of the verb 'to be'.

This sentence shows the usage of the dative marker, possessive markers, and the infinitive form of verbs. It also shows how the conjunction 'or' is used in Punjabi.

The next word is subject. English: The subject of the lecture was interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੈਕਚਰ ਦਾ ਵਿਸ਼ਾ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲੈਕਚਰ[/hi] - lecture

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਾ[/hi] - subject

[hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪ[/hi] - interesting

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - was

Key concept: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a possessive particle used to show possession, much like 'of' in English. The word order is also important: subject (lecture) + possessive particle (da) + object (subject) + adjective (interesting) + verb (was). The word order in Punjabi is more flexible than English, but the verb typically comes at the end of the sentence.

English: The subject of the lecture was interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੈਕਚਰ ਦਾ ਵਿਸ਼ਾ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is new. English: This is a new car.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh gadi nuvi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi]: This. This is a demonstrative pronoun.

[hi]gadi[/hi]: Car. This is a common noun.

[hi]nuvi[/hi]: New. This is an adjective.

[hi]hai[/hi]: Is. This is the present tense of the verb "to be".

Key concepts:

Demonstrative pronouns show which specific noun is being referred to.

Adjectives describe nouns.

In this sentence, the subject is [hi]gadi[/hi] (car) and the verb is [hi]hai[/hi] (is). The adjective [hi]nuvi[/hi] (new) modifies the subject.

English: This is a new car.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh gadi nuvi hai[/hi].

The next word is show. English: The teacher showed us the new textbook.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਨੇ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਨਵੀਂ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਿਖਾਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ[/hi] (adhyapak) - teacher

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] (ne) - has, did (indicates past tense, often used with verbs)

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] (saanu) - to us, for us

[hi]ਨਵੀਂ[/hi] (naveen) - new

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] (kitab) - book

[hi]ਦਿਖਾਈ[/hi] (dikh-aa-ee) - showed (past tense, indicates action was completed)

Key Concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is typically subject-object-verb, unlike English.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is a particle that marks the subject in the past tense.

[hi]ਨਵੀਂ[/hi] is a feminine adjective modifying [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] (book).

English: The teacher showed us the new textbook.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਨੇ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਨਵੀਂ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਿਖਾਈ।[/hi]

The next word is match. English: The red ball matches the blue ball.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲਾਲ ਗੇਂਦ ਨੀਲੀ ਗੇਂਦ ਨਾਲ ਮੇਲ ਖਾਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]laal[/hi] - red

[hi]ਗੇਂਦ[/hi] - [hi]gend[/hi] - ball

[hi]ਨੀਲੀ[/hi] - [hi]neeli[/hi] - blue

[hi]ਗੇਂਦ[/hi] - [hi]gend[/hi] - ball

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]naal[/hi] - with

[hi]ਮੇਲ[/hi] - [hi]mel[/hi] - match

[hi]ਖਾਂਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]khaandi[/hi] - (verb ending)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense)

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence structure is Subject - Object - Verb (SOV), unlike English's Subject - Verb - Object (SVO).

The word [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] (naal) indicates "with". It is often used to show association.

The verb ending [hi]ਖਾਂਦੀ[/hi] (khaandi) is the feminine form of the verb [hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] (khaana), meaning "to eat". In this case, the word [hi]ਖਾਂਦੀ[/hi] indicates "matches", as it implies that the red ball is "eating" the blue ball (in a metaphorical sense) by matching it.

English: The red ball matches the blue ball.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲਾਲ ਗੇਂਦ ਨੀਲੀ ਗੇਂਦ ਨਾਲ ਮੇਲ ਖਾਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is club. English: She is a member of the chess club.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸ਼ਤਰੰਜ ਕਲੱਬ ਦੀ ਮੈਂਬਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - She (Subject pronoun)

[hi]ਸ਼ਤਰੰਜ[/hi] - Chess (Noun)

[hi]ਕਲੱਬ[/hi] - Club (Noun)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of the (possessive marker)

[hi]ਮੈਂਬਰ[/hi] - member (Noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (Verb)

Key concept: The sentence uses the possessive marker [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] to indicate belonging. This is a very common and important grammatical concept to master.

English: She is a member of the chess club.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸ਼ਤਰੰਜ ਕਲੱਬ ਦੀ ਮੈਂਬਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is intend. English: I intend to go to the market today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਅੱਜ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾਣ ਦਾ ਇਰਾਦਾ ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - I

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - today

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - market

[hi]ਜਾਣ[/hi] - to go (infinitive form)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਇਰਾਦਾ[/hi] - intention

[hi]ਰੱਖਦਾ[/hi] - keep, have (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - I (affirmative particle)

Key Concepts:

Possessive particle: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is used to show possession, similar to the English "of."

Infinitive form: [hi]ਜਾਣ[/hi] is the infinitive form of the verb "to go."

Present tense: [hi]ਰੱਖਦਾ[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb "to keep," conjugated for the masculine singular subject.

Affirmative particle: [hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] is used to affirm the sentence.

Translation: I intend to go to the market today.

The next word is waste. English: We shouldn't waste food.

Punjabi: [hi]Aapnu khaana barbad nahin karna chahida[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Aapnu[/hi] - This is the possessive form of "you", meaning "your" in English.

[hi]khaana[/hi] - This is the noun for "food" in Punjabi.

[hi]barbad[/hi] - This is the adjective meaning "wasted" in English.

[hi]nahin[/hi] - This is the negative particle in Punjabi, meaning "not".

[hi]karna[/hi] - This is the verb meaning "to do" in English.

[hi]chahida[/hi] - This is the adjective meaning "should" in English.

Key Concept: The sentence uses the verb "to do" in the imperative form, "karna," which implies a command or suggestion.

English: We shouldn't waste food.

Punjabi: [hi]Aapnu khaana barbad nahin karna chahida[/hi].

The next word is driver. English: The driver is driving the car.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਰਾਈਵਰ ਗੱਡੀ ਚਲਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡਰਾਈਵਰ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "driver". It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "car". It is the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਚਲਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi verb for "driving". It is in the present continuous tense, indicating that the action is happening now.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is". This helps complete the present continuous verb.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is". This is the final part of the sentence that finishes the verb.

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb-Object: The sentence follows the basic structure of subject-verb-object.

Present Continuous Tense: The verb "driving" is in the present continuous tense, indicated by the combination of the verb stem and the auxiliary verb "is".

Gender Agreement: The verb "driving" is conjugated to agree with the gender of the subject, which is masculine.

Translation: The driver is driving the car.

The next word is winter. English: The winter is very cold.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਰਦੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਠੰਡੀ ਹੁੰਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਰਦੀ[/hi] (sardee) - winter

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] (bahut) - very

[hi]ਠੰਡੀ[/hi] (thandi) - cold

[hi]ਹੁੰਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi] (hundee hai) - is (feminine singular)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives and verbs agree in gender with the noun they modify. Here, [hi]ਠੰਡੀ[/hi] (thandi) is feminine because it modifies the feminine noun [hi]ਸਰਦੀ[/hi] (sardee).

Verb Conjugation: The verb "to be" ([hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ[/hi] / [hi]ਹੁੰਦੀ[/hi] / [hi]ਹੁੰਦੇ[/hi]) changes form depending on the gender and number of the subject. Here, the verb is [hi]ਹੁੰਦੀ ਹੈ[/hi] (hundee hai) because the subject, [hi]ਸਰਦੀ[/hi] (sardee), is feminine singular.

English Translation: The winter is very cold.

Punjabi Translation: [hi]ਸਰਦੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਠੰਡੀ ਹੁੰਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is enjoy. English: We enjoyed the movie.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਫਿਲਮ ਦਾ ਆਨੰਦ ਮਾਣਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]asain[/hi] - we

[hi]ਫਿਲਮ[/hi] - [hi]film[/hi] - movie

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਆਨੰਦ[/hi] - [hi]aanand[/hi] - enjoyment, pleasure

[hi]ਮਾਣਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]maania[/hi] - enjoyed (past tense)

Key concepts:

The sentence uses the simple past tense in Punjabi, with the verb [hi]ਮਾਣਿਆ[/hi] ([hi]maania[/hi]) indicating the action of enjoying in the past.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] ([hi]da[/hi]) is a possessive marker used to show that the enjoyment is specific to the movie.

English: We enjoyed the movie.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਫਿਲਮ ਦਾ ਆਨੰਦ ਮਾਣਿਆ[/hi].

The next word is news. English: The news is good today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj di khabar vadiya hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - This word means "today" in Punjabi. It is a common word used often.

[hi]di[/hi] - This is the possessive marker for "of." So, [hi]Ajj di[/hi] means "of today."

[hi]khabar[/hi] - This means "news." This is an important word to know when learning Punjabi.

[hi]vadiya[/hi] - This means "good." This is another commonly used word in Punjabi.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be." It means "is." This is another important verb to know for Punjabi.

Memorization Tips:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] is a common Punjabi word meaning "today."

[hi]di[/hi] is the possessive marker for "of" used with singular nouns.

[hi]khabar[/hi] means "news."

[hi]vadiya[/hi] means "good."

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense of "to be," meaning "is."

English: The news is good today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj di khabar vadiya hai.[/hi]

The next word is instead. English: He went to the market instead of going to the school.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਕੂਲ ਜਾਣ ਦੀ ਬਜਾਇ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]He[/hi]

[hi]ਸਕੂਲ[/hi] - [hi]school[/hi]

[hi]ਜਾਣ[/hi] - [hi]to go[/hi]

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]of[/hi]

[hi]ਬਜਾਇ[/hi] - [hi]instead[/hi]

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]market[/hi]

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]went[/hi]

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਬਜਾਇ[/hi] means "instead of" and is used to express an alternative action.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a postposition that means "of" and is used to show possession or relation.

English: He went to the market instead of going to the school.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਕੂਲ ਜਾਣ ਦੀ ਬਜਾਇ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is human. English: The human is responsible for their own actions.

Punjabi: [hi]ਆਦਮੀ ਆਪਣੇ ਕੰਮਾਂ ਦਾ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਆਦਮੀ[/hi] [hi]aadmi[/hi] - This word literally means "man," but in this context it translates as "human."

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] [hi]aapne[/hi] - This is a possessive pronoun, meaning "one's own" or "their own."

[hi]ਕੰਮਾਂ[/hi] [hi]kamaan[/hi] - This is the plural form of [hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] [hi]kamm[/hi], meaning "work" or "actions."

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] - This is a possessive particle, like "of" in English.

[hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ[/hi] [hi]zimmevaar[/hi] - This means "responsible" or "accountable."

[hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hunda hai[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be," meaning "is."

Key Concept: The sentence uses the concept of responsibility and emphasizes that humans are accountable for their actions. It highlights the idea that individuals are not passive observers in life, but rather active participants who shape their own destiny through their choices and actions.

English: The human is responsible for their own actions.

Punjabi: [hi]ਆਦਮੀ ਆਪਣੇ ਕੰਮਾਂ ਦਾ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is discuss. English: We discussed the importance of language.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਦੀ ਮਹੱਤਤਾ ਬਾਰੇ ਵਿਚਾਰ ਵਟਾਂਦਰਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We (subject pronoun, plural)

[hi]ਭਾਸ਼ਾ[/hi] - Language (noun)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਤਾ[/hi] - Importance (noun)

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - About (preposition)

[hi]ਵਿਚਾਰ[/hi] - Thoughts (noun, plural)

[hi]ਵਟਾਂਦਰਾ[/hi] - Exchange (noun)

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - Did (verb, past tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to indicate possession, just like 'of' in English.

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] means 'about'. This is an important preposition that helps create context.

[hi]ਵਟਾਂਦਰਾ[/hi] is a useful noun that can be used to express an exchange of ideas, opinions, or information.

English: We discussed the importance of language.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਦੀ ਮਹੱਤਤਾ ਬਾਰੇ ਵਿਚਾਰ ਵਟਾਂਦਰਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is computer. English: She uses the computer for her work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਕੰਮ ਲਈ ਕੰਪਿਊਟਰ ਵਰਤਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - She (pronoun, subject)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - her (possessive pronoun, modifies [hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi])

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - work (noun, object of the preposition [hi]ਲਈ[/hi])

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for (preposition, connects [hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] to [hi]ਕੰਪਿਊਟਰ[/hi])

[hi]ਕੰਪਿਊਟਰ[/hi] - computer (noun, object of the verb [hi]ਵਰਤਦੀ ਹੈ[/hi])

[hi]ਵਰਤਦੀ ਹੈ[/hi] - uses (verb, present tense, 3rd person singular feminine)

Key concepts:

Gender agreement: In Punjabi, verbs and adjectives must agree with the gender of the subject. Here, the subject is [hi]ਉਹ[/hi], which is feminine, so the verb is [hi]ਵਰਤਦੀ ਹੈ[/hi] (feminine form).

Object of a preposition: The noun [hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] is the object of the preposition [hi]ਲਈ[/hi]. This means that [hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] is the thing that the preposition is referring to.

Object of a verb: The noun [hi]ਕੰਪਿਊਟਰ[/hi] is the object of the verb [hi]ਵਰਤਦੀ ਹੈ[/hi]. This means that [hi]ਕੰਪਿਊਟਰ[/hi] is the thing that the verb is acting upon.

English: She uses the computer for her work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਕੰਮ ਲਈ ਕੰਪਿਊਟਰ ਵਰਤਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is tree. English: The tree is tall.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰੁੱਖ ਉੱਚਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰੁੱਖ[/hi] - [hi]rukkh[/hi] means "tree" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਉੱਚਾ[/hi] - [hi]uchcha[/hi] means "tall" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] means "is" in Punjabi.

[hi] ਹੈ।[/hi] - The ending [hi]hai.[/hi] indicates that the sentence is a statement.

Key concept: Punjabi uses word order similar to English in this sentence. The subject ("tree") comes first, followed by the adjective ("tall"), and finally the verb ("is"). This structure is consistent with the basic sentence structure in both languages.

Note: Punjabi uses a different writing script than English, and the pronunciation is also different. However, the basic meaning and sentence structure are similar.

The next word is judge. English: The judge made a fair decision.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜੱਜ ਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਨਿਆਂਈ ਫ਼ੈਸਲਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜੱਜ[/hi] - judge (this is the subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - has (this is the particle that connects the subject to the verb in Punjabi)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - one

[hi]ਨਿਆਂਈ[/hi] - fair/just

[hi]ਫ਼ੈਸਲਾ[/hi] - decision

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - did/made (this is the verb of the sentence)

The sentence structure in Punjabi is similar to English, but the word order can vary slightly. Here, the verb is at the end of the sentence. It is common to see Punjabi verbs at the end of the sentence, and this helps with understanding the flow of the sentence.

Key concepts:

The use of particles like [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is common in Punjabi and helps connect the subject and verb.

Punjabi uses a postpositional system, which means that prepositions are placed after the noun they modify, instead of before.

English: The judge made a fair decision.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜੱਜ ਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਨਿਆਂਈ ਫ਼ੈਸਲਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is dinner. English: We had dinner at 7 pm.

Punjabi: [hi]Aasां ne shaam nu saat bajje khana khaaya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Aasां[/hi] (We) is the subject of the sentence and is in the plural form.

[hi]ne[/hi] (have/has) is the auxiliary verb in Punjabi and is used to denote past tense.

[hi]shaam[/hi] (evening) is the time of day when dinner is eaten.

[hi]nu[/hi] (at) is a preposition that signifies the time at which something happens.

[hi]saat[/hi] (seven) is the specific time at which dinner was eaten.

[hi]bajje[/hi] (o'clock) is used to specify the time.

[hi]khana[/hi] (food) is the object of the sentence.

[hi]khaaya[/hi] (ate) is the past tense verb, meaning "ate."

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Punjabi sentences follow a subject-object-verb (SOV) structure.

Auxiliary Verbs: Punjabi uses auxiliary verbs like [hi]ne[/hi] to denote tense.

Prepositions: Prepositions like [hi]nu[/hi] show the relationship between words in the sentence.

English: We had dinner at 7 pm.

Punjabi: [hi]Aasां ne shaam nu saat bajje khana khaaya[/hi].

The next word is same. English: We are all the same.

Punjabi: [hi]āsī sāre ekō hi hāṁ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]āsī[/hi] - we (plural)

[hi]sāre[/hi] - all

[hi]ekō[/hi] - one

[hi]hi[/hi] - this/that (used for emphasis)

[hi]hāṁ[/hi] - are (present tense of "to be")

Key Concepts:

[hi]ekō hi[/hi] is a common phrase meaning "the same"

The use of [hi]hi[/hi] emphasizes that we are indeed "the same"

English: We are all the same.

Punjabi: [hi]āsī sāre ekō hi hāṁ[/hi].

The next word is network. English: The internet has become a powerful network for connecting people across the world.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇੰਟਰਨੈੱਟ ਦੁਨੀਆ ਭਰ ਦੇ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਜੋੜਨ ਵਾਲਾ ਇੱਕ ਸ਼ਕਤੀਸ਼ਾਲੀ ਨੈੱਟਵਰਕ ਬਣ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇੰਟਰਨੈੱਟ[/hi] - internet

[hi]ਦੁਨੀਆ[/hi] - world

[hi]ਭਰ[/hi] - across, throughout

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - of

[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] - people

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - to, towards

[hi]ਜੋੜਨ[/hi] - connecting

[hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] - one who, the one that

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - a

[hi]ਸ਼ਕਤੀਸ਼ਾਲੀ[/hi] - powerful

[hi]ਨੈੱਟਵਰਕ[/hi] - network

[hi]ਬਣ[/hi] - become

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - has, has become

Key Concepts:

Compound Sentence: This sentence combines two clauses: "[hi]ਇੰਟਰਨੈੱਟ ਦੁਨੀਆ ਭਰ ਦੇ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਜੋੜਨ ਵਾਲਾ ਇੱਕ ਸ਼ਕਤੀਸ਼ਾਲੀ ਨੈੱਟਵਰਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]" (the internet is a powerful network connecting people across the world) and "[hi]ਇਹ ਬਣ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]" (it has become).

Noun Phrase: The first clause is a noun phrase with a complex structure, emphasizing the characteristics of the internet.

Postposition: The word [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] functions as a postposition indicating direction or recipient, similar to "to" or "towards" in English.

Participle: The word [hi]ਜੋੜਨ[/hi] is a participle acting as an adjective, describing the action of connecting.

Note: [hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] is a past participle indicating completion of the action of becoming.

The next word is none. English: There is no one here.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੋਈ ਵੀ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੋਈ[/hi] (koi) - "any" or "someone" (in this case, it means "no one")

[hi]ਵੀ[/hi] (vi) - emphasizes the negation ("not even one")

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] (nahi) - "not"

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) - "is"

This sentence uses the emphatic negation "ਕੋਈ ਵੀ ਨਹੀਂ" to express the absence of anyone. This construction is common in Punjabi to emphasize the lack of something.

The next word is cover. English: The blanket covers the bed.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੰਬਲ ਬਿਸਤਰੇ ਨੂੰ ਢੱਕਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੰਬਲ[/hi] - blanket

[hi]ਬਿਸਤਰੇ[/hi] - bed (the ending [hi]ੇ[/hi] marks the object case)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - to, towards (indicates the direction of the action)

[hi]ਢੱਕਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - covers (the ending [hi]ਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] indicates present tense and masculine singular subject)

Key concept: The verb "covers" is in the present tense and agrees with the masculine singular subject "blanket".

English: The blanket covers the bed.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੰਬਲ ਬਿਸਤਰੇ ਨੂੰ ਢੱਕਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

The next word is essential. English: This is essential for learning Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਿੱਖਣ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - Punjabi (noun)

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਣ[/hi] - to learn (verb, infinitive form)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for (preposition)

[hi]ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ[/hi] - essential (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi]: This preposition is used to indicate purpose or reason.

[hi]ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ[/hi]: This adjective can be used to describe something that is important or necessary.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in Punjabi. It is used to make statements about the present.

The next word is trial. English: The trial was conducted in the courtroom.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੋਰਟ ਰੂਮ ਵਿੱਚ ਮੁਕੱਦਮਾ ਚਲਾਇਆ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੋਰਟ[/hi] - [hi]court[/hi] - This word refers to the place where legal proceedings happen.

[hi]ਰੂਮ[/hi] - [hi]room[/hi] - This word describes a space within a building.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]in[/hi] - This preposition shows location.

[hi]ਮੁਕੱਦਮਾ[/hi] - [hi]trial[/hi] - This word refers to a legal process to determine guilt or innocence.

[hi]ਚਲਾਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]conducted[/hi] - This verb describes the action of carrying out the trial.

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]was[/hi] - This is the past tense marker in Punjabi, indicating that the action happened in the past.

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Punjabi sentence structure is subject-verb-object.

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives and verbs agree with the gender of the noun they modify. [hi]ਮੁਕੱਦਮਾ[/hi] is masculine, so the verb [hi]ਚਲਾਇਆ[/hi] agrees with it.

English: The trial was conducted in the courtroom.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੋਰਟ ਰੂਮ ਵਿੱਚ ਮੁਕੱਦਮਾ ਚਲਾਇਆ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is complex. English: This situation is very complex.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh haalat bahut jhukat wali hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (singular, masculine)

[hi]haalat[/hi] - situation

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]jhukat wali[/hi] - complex (literally "having bends," implying difficulty in understanding)

Key concept: [hi]jhukat wali[/hi] is a common Punjabi way to express "complex" or "complicated." It emphasizes the intricate nature of something, like a maze or a tangled web.

This is a very complex situation. - [hi]Eh haalat bahut jhukat wali hai.[/hi]

The next word is specific. English: The professor gave a specific example.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਫ਼ੈਸਰ ਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਖਾਸ ਉਦਾਹਰਣ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਫ਼ੈਸਰ[/hi] [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] [hi]ਖਾਸ[/hi] [hi]ਉਦਾਹਰਣ[/hi] [hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਫ਼ੈਸਰ[/hi] (Professor) is the subject of the sentence

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] (has) is the verb particle

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] (one) is a quantifier

[hi]ਖਾਸ[/hi] (specific) is an adjective that modifies [hi]ਉਦਾਹਰਣ[/hi] (example)

[hi]ਉਦਾਹਰਣ[/hi] (example) is the direct object of the verb [hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] (gave)

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] (gave) is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] (to give)

English: The professor gave a specific example.

The next word is reduce. English: We should reduce the amount of sugar we consume.

Punjabi: [hi]Asin nu shakkar di matra kamm karni chahidi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Asin[/hi] - We (plural subject)

[hi]nu[/hi] - to us (dative case)

[hi]shakkar[/hi] - sugar

[hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]matra[/hi] - amount

[hi]kamm[/hi] - reduce

[hi]karni[/hi] - to do (infinitive form of verb)

[hi]chahidi[/hi] - should (modal verb)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is/are (present tense of verb "to be")

Key Concepts:

Dative Case: The dative case is used to indicate the indirect object of a verb. In this case, "[hi]nu[/hi]" indicates that the action of reducing sugar is being done "to us".

Possessive Particle: The possessive particle "[hi]di[/hi]" is used to indicate possession. In this case, "[hi]shakkar di matra[/hi]" means "the amount of sugar".

Infinitive Form: The infinitive form of a verb is the base form of the verb, often preceded by "to". In this case, "[hi]karni[/hi]" is the infinitive form of the verb "to do".

Modal Verb: A modal verb is a type of verb that modifies another verb. In this case, "[hi]chahidi[/hi]" is a modal verb that expresses obligation or necessity.

Present Tense: The present tense is used to describe actions that are happening now. In this case, "[hi]hai[/hi]" is the present tense of the verb "to be".

English: We should reduce the amount of sugar we consume.

Punjabi: [hi]Asin nu shakkar di matra kamm karni chahidi hai[/hi].

The next word is average. English: The average student is hard-working.

Punjabi: [hi]औਸਤ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਮਿਹਨਤੀ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]औसਤ[/hi] (average) - This is the Punjabi word for average.

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] (student) - This is the Punjabi word for student.

[hi]ਮਿਹਨਤੀ[/hi] (hard-working) - This is the Punjabi word for hard-working.

[hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] (is) - This is the Punjabi word for 'is' in the present tense for the masculine singular noun.

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have gender, and the gender of a noun influences the verb used with it. In this case, the noun [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] (student) is masculine singular, so the verb [hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] (is) is used.

Word Order: The basic word order in Punjabi is Subject-Verb-Object, which is similar to English.

Tense: The verb [hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] (is) is in the present tense, indicating that the student is hard-working at the time of speaking.

English: The average student is hard-working.

Punjabi: [hi]औਸਤ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਮਿਹਨਤੀ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is article. English: The article was about the importance of education.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਲੇਖ ਸਿੱਖਿਆ ਦੇ ਮਹੱਤਵ ਬਾਰੇ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਲੇਖ[/hi] - Article (noun)

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਿਆ[/hi] - Education (noun)

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - Of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵ[/hi] - Importance (noun)

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - About (preposition)

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - Was (past tense of "to be")

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the postposition [hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] to indicate "about". This is a common way to express "about" in Punjabi.

The sentence also uses the possessive marker [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] to show that the importance is "of" education.

The sentence uses the past tense form [hi]ਸੀ[/hi] of the verb "to be" to indicate that the article was about something in the past.

English: The article was about the importance of education.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਲੇਖ ਸਿੱਖਿਆ ਦੇ ਮਹੱਤਵ ਬਾਰੇ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is age. English: He is 25 years old.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ 25 ਸਾਲਾਂ ਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he". It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]25[/hi] - [hi]25[/hi] - This is the number 25.

[hi]ਸਾਲਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]saalaan[/hi] - This is the plural form of [hi]ਸਾਲ[/hi] (saal) which means "year". Since we are talking about "years", the plural form is used.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - This is a possessive marker that translates to "of".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" which means "is".

Key concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This word is crucial in Punjabi, as it connects nouns and adjectives to indicate possession or relationship.

Plural forms - Punjabi has specific endings for plurals.

English: He is 25 years old.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ 25 ਸਾਲਾਂ ਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is link. English: The book is linked to the article.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਲੇਖ ਨਾਲ ਜੁੜੀ ਹੋਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book

[hi]ਲੇਖ[/hi] - article

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - with (this is a postposition, similar to a preposition but follows the noun)

[hi]ਜੁੜੀ[/hi] - linked

[hi]ਹੋਈ[/hi] - is

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - (this is a grammatical particle that indicates the sentence is declarative)

This sentence is in the present tense. The word [hi]ਜੁੜੀ[/hi] is a feminine past participle which is used as an adjective to modify [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi].

Key Concepts

Postpositions

Past Participles

English Translation: The book is linked to the article.

The next word is try. English: He tried to help.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮਦਦ ਕਰਨ ਦੀ ਕੋਸ਼ਿਸ਼ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is a pronoun referring to "he." It is in the nominative case, indicating that it is the subject of the verb.

[hi]ਮਦਦ[/hi] - This means "help." It is the object of the verb "ਕਰਨ."

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb "to do." It is used here with the postposition [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] to create the infinitive "to do." This signifies an attempt or effort.

[hi]ਕੋਸ਼ਿਸ਼[/hi] - This word means "attempt" or "effort." It is the object of the verb "ਕੀਤੀ."

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do." It is in the third person singular, indicating that the action was performed by "he."

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi language uses postpositions to indicate grammatical relationships, such as the object of a verb.

The infinitive form of the verb in Punjabi is formed using the postposition [hi]ਦੀ[/hi].

The verb "ਕਰਨ" is a common verb in Punjabi, meaning "to do" or "to make."

Translation: He tried to help.

The next word is address. English: This is my address.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh mera pata hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]mera[/hi] - my (possessive adjective)

[hi]pata[/hi] - address (noun)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense verb "to be")

Key Concepts:

Punjabi sentence structure is subject-verb-object (SVO)

Possessive adjectives precede the noun they modify

[hi]Eh[/hi] is used for singular and plural forms, similar to "this" and "these" in English

English: This is my address.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh mera pata hai[/hi].

The next word is candidate. English: The candidate is very qualified for the job.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਉਮੀਦਵਾਰ ਨੌਕਰੀ ਲਈ ਬਹੁਤ ਯੋਗ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਉਮੀਦਵਾਰ[/hi] - candidate (noun)

[hi]ਨੌਕਰੀ[/hi] - job (noun)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for (postposition)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very (adverb)

[hi]ਯੋਗ[/hi] - qualified (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (copula verb)

Key concepts:

Demonstrative pronouns point to specific things, in this case, the candidate.

Postpositions like [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] show the relationship between the noun ([hi]ਉਮੀਦਵਾਰ[/hi]) and the job.

The adjective [hi]ਯੋਗ[/hi] describes the candidate's qualifications.

English: The candidate is very qualified for the job.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਉਮੀਦਵਾਰ ਨੌਕਰੀ ਲਈ ਬਹੁਤ ਯੋਗ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is dry. English: The weather is dry today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅੱਜ ਮੌਸਮ ਸੁੱਕਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - [hi]ajj[/hi] - today

[hi]ਮੌਸਮ[/hi] - [hi]mausam[/hi] - weather

[hi]ਸੁੱਕਾ[/hi] - [hi]sukha[/hi] - dry

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

Gender agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives like [hi]ਸੁੱਕਾ[/hi] agree with the noun they modify in gender. Since [hi]ਮੌਸਮ[/hi] is masculine, we use the masculine form of [hi]ਸੁੱਕਾ[/hi].

Word order: The basic word order in Punjabi is Subject-Verb-Object (SVO).

Sentence ending: Punjabi sentences typically end with a particle like [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] or [hi]ਨਹੀਂ।[/hi]

English: The weather is dry today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅੱਜ ਮੌਸਮ ਸੁੱਕਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is break. English: The children broke the window.

Punjabi: ਬੱਚਿਆਂ ਨੇ ਖਿੜਕੀ [hi]ਤੋੜ[/hi] ਦਿੱਤੀ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚਿਆਂ[/hi] [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]ਖਿੜਕੀ[/hi] [hi]ਤੋੜ[/hi] [hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi].

[hi]ਬੱਚਿਆਂ[/hi] - children (plural)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - have (past tense marker)

[hi]ਖਿੜਕੀ[/hi] - window

[hi]ਤੋੜ[/hi] - break (past tense verb)

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - given (past tense - used with transitive verbs; indicating action was done to something)

In Punjabi, the past tense for verbs can be tricky, as the ending of the word changes depending on whether it's transitive or intransitive. Transitive verbs are verbs that take a direct object (something receiving the action of the verb), like "break the window" (here, window is the direct object). Intransitive verbs are verbs that do not take a direct object.

Key Concept: The word [hi]ਤੋੜ[/hi] (to break) changes depending on the context of the sentence, especially the presence of a direct object.

The next word is reaction. English: What was your reaction to the news?

Punjabi: ਖ਼ਬਰਾਂ ਤੇ ਤੁਹਾਡੀ ਕੀ ਪ੍ਰਤੀਕਿਰਿਆ ਸੀ?

[hi]Khabarān te tuhāḍī kī pratīkirīā sī?[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Khabarān[/hi] means "news." It is in the plural form.

[hi]te[/hi] means "on" or "to." It connects the news to the reaction.

[hi]tuhāḍī[/hi] means "your" and modifies [hi]pratīkirīā[/hi], reaction.

[hi]kī[/hi] means "what" and asks for the reaction.

[hi]pratīkirīā[/hi] means "reaction." This is the main noun of the sentence.

[hi]sī[/hi] means "was" and is the verb, making it a past tense statement.

The sentence literally means "On the news, your what reaction was?" However, we understand this to mean "What was your reaction to the news?"

The next word is last. English: He was the last one to leave.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਖ਼ਰੀ ਵਾਲਾ ਸੀ ਜੋ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਆਖ਼ਰੀ[/hi] - Last

[hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] - One, this is used to indicate something that is the last of its kind

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - Was

[hi]ਜੋ[/hi] - Who/That

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - Went

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਆਖ਼ਰੀ[/hi] means "last" and it is often followed by [hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] to denote the last one of a set or group.

The word [hi]ਜੋ[/hi] acts as a relative pronoun, connecting the clause about the person who left with the clause about who was the last.

English: He was the last one to leave.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਖ਼ਰੀ ਵਾਲਾ ਸੀ ਜੋ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is legal. English: It is legal to vote in India.

Punjabi: [hi]Bharat vich vote paun lagal hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Bharat[/hi] - India

[hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]vote[/hi] - vote

[hi]paun[/hi] - to get

[hi]lagal[/hi] - legal, permissible

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]vich[/hi] - This postposition indicates location and is similar to "in" or "within."

[hi]paun[/hi] - This verb means "to get" or "to receive".

[hi]lagal[/hi] - This adjective is used to describe something that is legal, permissible, or allowed.

English: It is legal to vote in India.

Punjabi: [hi]Bharat vich vote paun lagal hai.[/hi]

The next word is bill. English: The bill for the meal was very high.

Punjabi: [hi]khaane da bill bahut zyada si[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]khaane[/hi] - means "meal" or "food" and is the object of the sentence

[hi]da[/hi] - is a possessive particle, meaning "of" or "belonging to" - here it connects [hi]khaane[/hi] to [hi]bill[/hi]

[hi]bill[/hi] - is the subject of the sentence, meaning "bill"

[hi]bahut[/hi] - means "very" or "a lot" and modifies [hi]zyada[/hi]

[hi]zyada[/hi] - means "high" or "expensive" and describes the bill

[hi]si[/hi] - is the past tense of the verb "to be" - in this sentence it is the copula and connects the subject and predicate

This sentence is in the past tense and expresses the fact that the bill was high.

The next word is launch. English: The rocket was launched into space.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰੌਕਟ ਨੂੰ ਸਪੇਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਲਾਂਚ ਕੀਤਾ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰੌਕਟ[/hi] - Rocket

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - To (marks the indirect object)

[hi]ਸਪੇਸ[/hi] - Space

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - In (marks the location)

[hi]ਲਾਂਚ[/hi] - Launched

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - Was done (past tense of [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] - to do)

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - Went (past tense of [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] - to go)

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - Was

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the past tense.

The verb [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] is used to indicate that the action of launching was completed.

The word [hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] indicates the movement of the rocket into space.

English: The rocket was launched into space.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰੌਕਟ ਨੂੰ ਸਪੇਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਲਾਂਚ ਕੀਤਾ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is clearly. English: He clearly understands the instructions.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਪੱਸ਼ਟ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਹਦਾਇਤਾਂ ਸਮਝਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (Subject Pronoun)

[hi]ਸਪੱਸ਼ਟ[/hi] - Clear (Adjective)

[hi]ਤੌਰ[/hi] - Way, manner (Noun)

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - On, upon (Postposition)

[hi]ਹਦਾਇਤਾਂ[/hi] - Instructions (Noun, plural)

[hi]ਸਮਝਦਾ[/hi] - Understands (Verb, present tense, 3rd person singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (Verb, present tense, 3rd person singular)

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਸਪੱਸ਼ਟ[/hi] is used to emphasize clarity.

The postposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is used to connect [hi]ਸਪੱਸ਼ਟ[/hi] with [hi]ਤੌਰ[/hi] to form a phrase "in a clear way".

This sentence demonstrates how to use an adjective in Punjabi to modify a noun phrase.

English: He clearly understands the instructions.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਪੱਸ਼ਟ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਹਦਾਇਤਾਂ ਸਮਝਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is anyway. English: Anyway, I have to go now.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵੈਸੇ, ਮੈਨੂੰ ਹੁਣ ਜਾਣਾ ਪਏਗਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵੈਸੇ[/hi]: This word means "anyway" or "by the way" and is used to transition to a new topic or to indicate that something is not relevant to the current conversation. It is a very common word in Punjabi.

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi]: This is the object form of the first person singular pronoun "I". It is followed by a verb in the passive voice.

[hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi]: This is the infinitive form of the verb "to go". Here it is used in the future tense.

[hi]ਪਏਗਾ[/hi]: This is a modal verb meaning "will have to" or "must". It is used to express necessity or obligation.

Key concepts:

Transitional words: [hi]ਵੈਸੇ[/hi] is a transitional word that is used to change the topic of conversation.

Passive voice: The verb "ਜਾਣਾ" is used in the passive voice because the subject (I) is the one being acted upon.

Modal verb: The modal verb [hi]ਪਏਗਾ[/hi] is used to express the necessity of going.

The next word is sign. English: He signed the document.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne daftar te hattha putt keta[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (pronoun)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has (particle)

[hi]daftar[/hi] - document (noun)

[hi]te[/hi] - on (postposition)

[hi]hattha[/hi] - hand (noun)

[hi]putt[/hi] - placed (verb)

[hi]keta[/hi] - did (auxiliary verb)

This sentence uses a postposition, which is a word that comes after the noun it modifies, much like a preposition in English. The verb is conjugated for past tense and the auxiliary verb provides further context about the action being completed.

Translation: He signed the document.

The next word is system. English: The system is good.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਿਸਟਮ ਵਧੀਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਿਸਟਮ[/hi] - System

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - Good

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is

This sentence follows the basic structure of a subject-verb-object sentence.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਸਿਸਟਮ[/hi] is a noun and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a verb and the verb 'to be' in Punjabi. It is conjugated based on gender and number, in this case, the masculine singular form.

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] is an adjective, modifying the noun [hi]ਸਿਸਟਮ[/hi].

English: The system is good.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਿਸਟਮ ਵਧੀਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is experience. English: He has a lot of experience in teaching.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu padhaune da bahut tajurba hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usnu[/hi] is the third person singular pronoun meaning "him" or "he."

[hi]padhaune[/hi] is the infinitive form of the verb "to teach."

[hi]da[/hi] is the possessive marker meaning "of" or "his."

[hi]bahut[/hi] means "a lot" or "much."

[hi]tajurba[/hi] is a noun meaning "experience."

[hi]hai[/hi] is the third person singular present tense of the verb "to be."

Key Concepts:

Possessive Markers: The word [hi]da[/hi] shows possession, indicating that the experience belongs to the person.

Infinitive form: The word [hi]padhaune[/hi] is the infinitive form of the verb and it describes the type of experience he has.

Word Order: The sentence follows the typical Subject-Verb-Object word order in Punjabi, even though it might seem different from the English sentence.

English: He has a lot of experience in teaching.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu padhaune da bahut tajurba hai[/hi].

The next word is serious. English: He is a serious student.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਗੰਭੀਰ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]ooh[/hi] - He/She/It. This is a pronoun.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a/an/one. This is a quantifier.

[hi]ਗੰਭੀਰ[/hi] - [hi]gambheer[/hi] - Serious. This is an adjective.

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]vidyaarthee[/hi] - student. This is a noun.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is. This is the present tense of the verb "to be."

Key Concepts:

Punjabi word order is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), meaning the subject comes first, then the object, and then the verb.

The Punjabi word for "is" is [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi], which is the present tense of the verb "to be."

The adjective [hi]ਗੰਭੀਰ[/hi] is used to describe the noun [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi].

The article [hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] is used to indicate that there is one student.

English: He is a serious student.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਗੰਭੀਰ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is sister. English: My sister is a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰੀ ਭੈਣ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰੀ[/hi] - This is the possessive form of "[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi]" (I) and means "my". It is used to show ownership.

[hi]ਭੈਣ[/hi] - This word means "sister" and is used to refer to a female sibling.

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] - This word means "doctor". It refers to a medical professional.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be", indicating that the sister is a doctor at this time.

Key Concept: Punjabi uses postpositions (words that come after the noun) instead of prepositions to show relationships between words, like "of" and "to". The word [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to indicate possession, as in "[hi]ਮੇਰੀ ਭੈਣ[/hi]" meaning "my sister".

English: My sister is a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰੀ ਭੈਣ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is highly. English: He is a highly respected scholar.

Punjabi: [hi]Oh [hi] [hi]bahut [hi] [hi]izzatwali [hi] [hi]vidvaan [hi] [hi]aa [hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Oh [hi] - This is an interjection that means "He" and is used to show respect, similar to saying "He is."

[hi]bahut [hi] - means "very" or "highly."

[hi]izzatwali [hi] - means "respected" - Note how the ending of "izzat" changes to "izzatwali" to form the adjective.

[hi]vidvaan [hi] - means "scholar".

[hi]aa [hi] - means "is."

This sentence uses the structure of "Subject + Adjective + Noun + Verb" which is common in Punjabi. The sentence structure and word order are very similar to English! This makes learning Punjabi easier. You will see this sentence structure repeated often, so pay attention to it.

English: He is a highly respected scholar.

Punjabi: [hi]Oh [hi] [hi]bahut [hi] [hi]izzatwali [hi] [hi]vidvaan [hi] [hi]aa [hi].

The next word is potential. English: The potential of this technology is immense.

Punjabi: [hi]Is technology da potential bahut bada hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This

[hi]technology[/hi] - Technology

[hi]da[/hi] - Possessive particle, similar to "of"

[hi]potential[/hi] - Potential

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Very

[hi]bada[/hi] - Big, great

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]da[/hi] is used to show possession.

[hi]bahut[/hi] is used to emphasize a quality.

Punjabi sentence structure follows a Subject-Verb-Object order.

The next word is contact. English: I contacted my friend yesterday.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਨਾਲ ਸੰਪਰਕ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - means "I" - it is the subject of the sentence

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] - means "yesterday" - it is an adverb of time, indicating when the action took place

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - means "my/our/his/her" - this is a possessive pronoun indicating ownership of the friend

[hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] - means "friend" - it is the object of the sentence, the one being contacted

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - means "with" - it indicates the person being contacted

[hi]ਸੰਪਰਕ[/hi] - means "contact" - it is the verb in the sentence, the action being performed

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - means "did" - this is the past tense of the verb

In Punjabi, the word order is often different from English. The verb "did" comes at the end of the sentence, while the object of the sentence, "friend" is in the middle. This is common in many South Asian languages.

Key Concepts:

The use of the possessive pronoun [hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] to indicate ownership of the friend.

The use of the preposition [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] to indicate the person being contacted.

The use of the past tense of the verb [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] to indicate that the action happened in the past.

Remember:

The word order in Punjabi is different from English.

The use of [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] with the verb [hi]ਸੰਪਰਕ[/hi] means "contact" with someone.

The next word is exactly. English: He did exactly what I asked.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ठੀਕ ਉਹੀ ਕੀਤਾ ਜੋ ਮੈਂ ਕਿਹਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] (usne) - He/She (masculine singular subject pronoun)

[hi]ਠੀਕ[/hi] (theek) - exactly, precisely

[hi]ਉਹੀ[/hi] (uhee) - the same, that very

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] (kita) - did, performed (past tense of [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] - to do)

[hi]ਜੋ[/hi] (jo) - that which, what (relative pronoun)

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] (main) - I (first person singular pronoun)

[hi]ਕਿਹਾ[/hi] (kiha) - said (past tense of [hi]ਕਹਿਣਾ[/hi] - to say)

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] (si) - was (past tense of [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - to be)

Key concept: The use of the relative pronoun [hi]ਜੋ[/hi] (jo) connects the two clauses, indicating that the action performed (doing what was asked) is the same as what was said.

The next word is associate. English: The professor is associated with the university.

Punjabi: [hi]Professor sahib [hi] [hi]university [hi] [hi]nal [hi] [hi]juda [hi] [hi]hai [hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Professor sahib [hi] - This means "Professor sir" and is a respectful way to refer to a professor.

[hi]university [hi] - This means "university".

[hi]nal [hi] - This means "with" and is used to show association.

[hi]juda [hi] - This means "associated".

[hi]hai [hi] - This means "is".

Key Concept: The Punjabi sentence uses the postposition [hi]nal [hi] to show association between the professor and the university.

English: The professor is associated with the university.

Punjabi: [hi]Professor sahib [hi] [hi]university [hi] [hi]nal [hi] [hi]juda [hi] [hi]hai [hi].

The next word is drug. English: The doctor prescribed a drug for the patient.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ ਨੇ ਮਰੀਜ਼ ਲਈ ਦਵਾਈ ਲਿਖੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] - doctor (masculine)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - a grammatical marker that indicates the subject is performing the action.

[hi]ਮਰੀਜ਼[/hi] - patient (masculine)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for

[hi]ਦਵਾਈ[/hi] - drug, medicine

[hi]ਲਿਖੀ।[/hi] - wrote (feminine past tense)

Key Concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns are either masculine or feminine. This determines the form of the verb. Here, the doctor is masculine and the drug is feminine.

Word order: Punjabi follows a Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) word order, unlike English which uses Subject-Verb-Object (SVO).

Particles: Punjabi uses grammatical particles like [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] to indicate who performed an action.

English: The doctor prescribed a drug for the patient.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ ਨੇ ਮਰੀਜ਼ ਲਈ ਦਵਾਈ ਲਿਖੀ।[/hi]

The next word is kill. English: He killed the lion.

Punjabi: [hi]us ne sher nu maar ditta[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]us[/hi] - He, him (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has, have, by (post-position indicating the doer of the action)

[hi]sher[/hi] - lion

[hi]nu[/hi] - to, for (object marker)

[hi]maar[/hi] - to kill (verb stem)

[hi]ditta[/hi] - gave (past tense of the verb [hi]denna[/hi], "to give")

The verb [hi]maar ditta[/hi] is a common Punjabi construction used to express past tense. The verb [hi]denna[/hi] is often used in this way to denote a completed action.

This sentence is a simple declarative sentence in Punjabi, with a subject (he) and a verb (killed). The object (the lion) is marked by the post-position [hi]nu[/hi].

Key concepts:

Pronouns: [hi]us[/hi] is a masculine singular pronoun, used to refer to a male person.

Post-positions: [hi]ne[/hi] and [hi]nu[/hi] are post-positions, which are similar to prepositions in English. They indicate the relationship between a noun and another word in the sentence.

Verb forms: [hi]maar ditta[/hi] is a past tense verb form, which is formed by combining the verb stem with the past tense marker [hi]ditta[/hi].

English: He killed the lion.

Punjabi: [hi]us ne sher nu maar ditta[/hi]

The next word is watch. English: He is watching television.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਟੈਲੀਵਿਜ਼ਨ ਵੇਖ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਟੈਲੀਵਿਜ਼ਨ[/hi] - Television (object)

[hi]ਵੇਖ[/hi] - To watch (verb root)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - Is/Am/Are (present continuous tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is/Am/Are (present continuous tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

Verb conjugation: The verb "watch" changes based on the subject and tense. Here, "watching" is conjugated as " [hi]ਵੇਖ ਰਿਹਾ[/hi]" to match the masculine singular subject "he."

Word order: Punjabi sentences generally follow the Subject-Verb-Object word order, just like English.

English: He is watching television.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਟੈਲੀਵਿਜ਼ਨ ਵੇਖ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is still. English: He is still sleeping.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅਜੇ ਵੀ ਸੌਂ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]ooh[/hi] (He/She/It - singular)

[hi]ਅਜੇ[/hi] - [hi]ajay[/hi] (Still, yet)

[hi]ਵੀ[/hi] - [hi]vee[/hi] (Also, too, even)

[hi]ਸੌਂ[/hi] - [hi]saun[/hi] (To sleep, in the present continuous tense)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]riha[/hi] (He is)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] (Is, a grammatical particle to denote that it is a present tense sentence)

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਵੀ[/hi] (vee) is often used to express that something is still happening.

The present continuous tense is formed by using the verb ending in [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] (riha) for the masculine singular.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai) is a very important grammatical particle that is used to mark sentences that are in the present tense.

Punjabi uses postpositions ([hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] (nuun), [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] (ton), [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] (tay), [hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] (val) etc.) for prepositions.

English: He is still sleeping.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅਜੇ ਵੀ ਸੌਂ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is charge. English: He charged the phone.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਫੋਨ ਚਾਰਜ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਫੋਨ[/hi] - [hi]fon[/hi] - Phone

[hi]ਚਾਰਜ[/hi] - [hi]chaarj[/hi] - Charge

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]kita[/hi] - did

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਚਾਰਜ[/hi] - [hi]chaarj[/hi] can be used as a noun or verb.

The verb [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]kita[/hi] is used to indicate that an action has been completed.

Note: You can say [hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]uhne[/hi] instead of [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] if you want to use a slightly more informal tone.

English: He charged the phone.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਫੋਨ ਚਾਰਜ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is meet. English: I met my friend at the market.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਨੂੰ ਮਿਲਿਆ।

[hi]mai bazaar vich apne dost nu miliya[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]mai[/hi] - I (subject pronoun)

[hi]bazaar[/hi] - market (object)

[hi]vich[/hi] - in (postposition)

[hi]apne[/hi] - my (possessive pronoun)

[hi]dost[/hi] - friend (object)

[hi]nu[/hi] - to (object marker)

[hi]miliya[/hi] - met (past tense verb)

Key concepts:

Postpositions: [hi]vich[/hi] is a postposition meaning "in" or "within". Postpositions are like prepositions, but they come after the noun they modify.

Object markers: [hi]nu[/hi] is an object marker, used to mark the direct object of a verb.

The next word is warm. English: The weather is warm today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj da mausam garam hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - Today - This is the word for "today" in Punjabi. It is used for any day, not just the current day, but the one in discussion.

[hi]da[/hi] - A possessive particle. This connects the noun "mausam" to "Ajj" and essentially means "of".

[hi]mausam[/hi] - weather - This word means "weather". It can also mean "season"

[hi]garam[/hi] - warm/hot - This word means "warm" or "hot". Note, it's also used to describe spicy food.

[hi]hai[/hi] - is - This is the Punjabi present tense form of the verb "to be"

Important grammatical concept:

The Punjabi sentence follows a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) word order, similar to English.

English: The weather is warm today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj da mausam garam hai[/hi].

The next word is note. English: I took note of what you said.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਤੁਹਾਡੀ ਗੱਲ ਦਾ ਨੋਟਸ ਲੈ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - [hi]main[/hi] - I

[hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]tuhaadi[/hi] - your

[hi]ਗੱਲ[/hi] - [hi]gal[/hi] - talk, word, speech

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]ਨੋਟਸ[/hi] - [hi]notes[/hi] - notes

[hi]ਲੈ[/hi] - [hi]lai[/hi] - to take

[hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]liya[/hi] - took

Key Concepts:

Possessive: [hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੀ[/hi] ([hi]tuhaadi[/hi]) shows possession. It indicates that the speech belongs to you.

Case Marking: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] ([hi]da[/hi]) is a marker for the genitive case, which shows possession.

Verb conjugation: [hi]ਲੈ[/hi] ([hi]lai[/hi]) is the infinitive form of the verb "to take". The past tense of the verb is [hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] ([hi]liya[/hi])

Word order: The sentence follows the basic subject-verb-object structure.

Translation: I took note of what you said.

The next word is plane. English: The plane is flying high in the sky.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਾਵਾ ਜਹਾਜ਼ ਅਸਮਾਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਉੱਚੀ ਉਡਾਰੀ ਭਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹਾਵਾ ਜਹਾਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]havaa jahaaz[/hi] - airplane

[hi]ਅਸਮਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]asmaan[/hi] - sky

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]ਉੱਚੀ[/hi] - [hi]oochhi[/hi] - high

[hi]ਉਡਾਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]udaari[/hi] - flight

[hi]ਭਰ[/hi] - [hi]bhar[/hi] - to fill

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]rihaa hai.[/hi] - is doing

Key Concepts:

Word Order: In Punjabi, the subject ([hi]ਹਾਵਾ ਜਹਾਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]havaa jahaaz[/hi]) usually comes before the verb ([hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]rihaa hai.[/hi]).

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions like [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] (in) instead of prepositions like "in" in English. These postpositions follow the noun.

Gender Agreement: The adjective [hi]ਉੱਚੀ[/hi] - [hi]oochhi[/hi] (high) agrees in gender with the noun [hi]ਉਡਾਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]udaari[/hi] (flight).

Translation: The airplane is flying high in the sky.

The next word is critical. English: The professor gave a critical analysis of the poem.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਫੈਸਰ ਨੇ ਕਵਿਤਾ ਦਾ ਨਿਰਣਾਤਮਕ ਵਿਸ਼ਲੇਸ਼ਣ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਫੈਸਰ[/hi] - Professor (the subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is a particle used to mark the subject of a verb in Punjabi, similar to "has" or "have" in English.

[hi]ਕਵਿਤਾ[/hi] - Poem (the object of the verb)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is a possessive particle, meaning "of" or "the". It connects "poem" to the following word.

[hi]ਨਿਰਣਾਤਮਕ[/hi] - Critical (adjective describing the analysis)

[hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਲੇਸ਼ਣ[/hi] - Analysis (the action of the verb)

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi] - Did (the past tense of the verb "to do")

Key Concepts:

The use of particles like [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] and [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is crucial in Punjabi grammar to understand the relationships between words in a sentence.

[hi]ਨਿਰਣਾਤਮਕ[/hi] is a word that directly translates to "critical" and highlights the importance of understanding the meaning of words in their context.

English: The professor gave a critical analysis of the poem.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਫੈਸਰ ਨੇ ਕਵਿਤਾ ਦਾ ਨਿਰਣਾਤਮਕ ਵਿਸ਼ਲੇਸ਼ਣ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is goal. English: His goal is to become a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਦਾ ਟੀਚਾ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਬਣਨਾ ਹੈ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਦਾ[/hi] - his (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਟੀਚਾ[/hi] - goal (noun)

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] - doctor (noun)

[hi]ਬਣਨਾ[/hi] - to become (verb)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense, singular)

This sentence follows a common Punjabi structure for expressing a goal. Note that [hi]ਬਣਨਾ[/hi] is a verb that means "to become," so the goal is the thing that one "becomes."

English: His goal is to become a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਦਾ ਟੀਚਾ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਬਣਨਾ ਹੈ। [/hi]

The next word is camera. English: She took a picture with her camera.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne apne kamera nal tasveer li[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - "She" (subject pronoun)

[hi]ne[/hi] - "has" (past tense marker, used after the subject in simple past sentences)

[hi]apne[/hi] - "her" (possessive pronoun)

[hi]kamera[/hi] - "camera" (noun)

[hi]nal[/hi] - "with" (preposition)

[hi]tasveer[/hi] - "picture" (noun)

[hi]li[/hi] - "took" (past tense verb)

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Punjabi word order is generally subject-verb-object.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions.

Past Tense: The past tense marker [hi]ne[/hi] is used after the subject.

Translation: She took a picture with her camera.

The next word is girl. English: She is a girl.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਕੁੜੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - "She"

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - "a"

[hi]ਕੁੜੀ[/hi] - "girl"

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - "is"

Key Concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) like English, making it easier to understand.

The word [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is the present tense conjugation of the verb "to be".

English: She is a girl.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਕੁੜੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is regulation. English: The government regulations are very strict.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਰਕਾਰ ਦੇ ਨਿਯਮ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਖ਼ਤ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਰਕਾਰ[/hi] - government

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਨਿਯਮ[/hi] - rules/regulations

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very

[hi]ਸਖ਼ਤ[/hi] - strict

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - are (plural)

Key concept: The sentence uses the possessive marker "[hi]ਦੇ[/hi]" to show that the regulations belong to the government. The verb "[hi]ਹਨ[/hi]" is in the plural form because the regulations are multiple.

English: The government regulations are very strict.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਰਕਾਰ ਦੇ ਨਿਯਮ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਖ਼ਤ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is surprise. English: He was surprised to see her.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਵੇਖ ਕੇ ਹੈਰਾਨੀ ਹੋਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]usnu[/hi] - him/her

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]usnu[/hi] - him/her

[hi]ਵੇਖ[/hi] - [hi]vekh[/hi] - to see

[hi]ਕੇ[/hi] - [hi]ke[/hi] - by

[hi]ਹੈਰਾਨੀ[/hi] - [hi]hairani[/hi] - surprise

[hi]ਹੋਈ[/hi] - [hi]hoi[/hi] - was

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the postposition [hi]ਕੇ[/hi] ([hi]ke[/hi]) to indicate that the surprise was caused by seeing her.

[hi]ਹੈਰਾਨੀ[/hi] ([hi]hairani[/hi]) is a noun, meaning surprise.

[hi]ਹੋਈ[/hi] ([hi]hoi[/hi]) is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] ([hi]hona[/hi]), meaning "to be."

English: He was surprised to see her.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਵੇਖ ਕੇ ਹੈਰਾਨੀ ਹੋਈ।[/hi]

The next word is file. English: The file is on the desk.

Punjabi: [hi]ਫਾਈਲ ਡੈਸਕ ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਫਾਈਲ[/hi] - file

[hi]ਡੈਸਕ[/hi] - desk

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - on, upon

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is

This sentence uses the postposition [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] to indicate location. It is similar to the English "on". In Punjabi, the postposition comes after the noun, unlike in English.

Key concepts:

- Postpositions in Punjabi: Postpositions are words that follow a noun and indicate its relation to another word in the sentence.

- Word order: Punjabi word order is generally Subject-Object-Verb (SOV)

Memorization tip: Think of the file as resting "on" the desk, just like [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] indicates.

The next word is ship. English: The ship sailed across the ocean.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜਹਾਜ਼ ਸਮੁੰਦਰ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਲੰਘਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜਹਾਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]jahaaz[/hi] - ship

[hi]ਸਮੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]samundar[/hi] - ocean

[hi]ਵਿੱਚੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]vichon[/hi] - from within, through

[hi]ਲੰਘਿਆ।[/hi] - [hi]langhiya.[/hi] - (past tense) sailed, passed

This sentence uses the past tense of the verb [hi]ਲੰਘਿਆ।[/hi] which means "sailed" or "passed". The word [hi]ਵਿੱਚੋਂ[/hi] is an important preposition to know. It means "from within" or "through" and is used to indicate movement. Also, keep in mind that [hi]ਸਮੁੰਦਰ[/hi] can also refer to a river or other large body of water. This is a very common word in Punjabi so try to remember it!

The next word is leader. English: The leader is motivating the team.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੀਡਰ ਟੀਮ ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰੇਰਿਤ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲੀਡਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "leader" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਟੀਮ[/hi] - This is the word for "team" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is a preposition that means "to" or "for." In this sentence, it indicates that the leader is motivating the team.

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੇਰਿਤ[/hi] - This word means "motivated." It is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਪ੍ਰੇਰਿਤ ਕਰਨਾ[/hi], which means "to motivate."

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - This is the verb "to do" or "to make." It is being used in the present continuous tense, indicating an ongoing action.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is a suffix that means "is" or "is doing." It is attached to the verb [hi]ਕਰ[/hi] to form the present continuous tense.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi equivalent of "is." It is used to connect the subject (the leader) and the predicate (motivating the team).

Key concepts:

Nouns: [hi]ਲੀਡਰ[/hi] and [hi]ਟੀਮ[/hi] are nouns.

Preposition: [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] is a preposition.

Verb: [hi]ਕਰ[/hi] is a verb.

Past participle: [hi]ਪ੍ਰੇਰਿਤ[/hi] is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਪ੍ਰੇਰਿਤ ਕਰਨਾ[/hi].

Present continuous tense: [hi]ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] is the present continuous tense of the verb [hi]ਕਰ[/hi].

English: The leader is motivating the team.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੀਡਰ ਟੀਮ ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰੇਰਿਤ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is struggle. English: He struggled to get up in the morning.

Punjabi: [hi]Ohnu subah utthne wich mushkil hoyi[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ohnu[/hi] = To him/her/it (pronoun, object form of [hi]oh[/hi])

[hi]subah[/hi] = morning

[hi]utthne[/hi] = to get up (from sleep)

[hi]wich[/hi] = in, within

[hi]mushkil[/hi] = difficulty, struggle

[hi]hoyi[/hi] = was (past tense of [hi]hona[/hi] to be)

Key concept: The word [hi]wich[/hi] is often used in Punjabi to describe the "in" or "within" a particular place or time.

English: He struggled to get up in the morning.

Punjabi: [hi]Ohnu subah utthne wich mushkil hoyi[/hi].

The next word is schedule. English: We have a busy schedule today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅੱਜ ਸਾਡਾ ਇੱਕ ਰੁਝੇਵਾਂ ਭਰਿਆ ਸਮਾਂ-ਸਾਰਣੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - Today

[hi]ਸਾਡਾ[/hi] - Our

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - A/One

[hi]ਰੁਝੇਵਾਂ[/hi] - Busy, occupied, full

[hi]ਭਰਿਆ[/hi] - Filled (past participle of [hi]ਭਰਨਾ[/hi] - to fill)

[hi]ਸਮਾਂ-ਸਾਰਣੀ[/hi] - Schedule, timetable, agenda

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is

This sentence is in the present tense and uses the verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (to be) to indicate that the schedule is busy. The word [hi]ਸਮਾਂ-ਸਾਰਣੀ[/hi] is a compound noun that literally means "time-table." This demonstrates the use of a compound noun to express a complex concept.

English: We have a busy schedule today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅੱਜ ਸਾਡਾ ਇੱਕ ਰੁਝੇਵਾਂ ਭਰਿਆ ਸਮਾਂ-ਸਾਰਣੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is physical. English: He is physically strong.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਰੀਰਕ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਸਰੀਰਕ[/hi] - Physical

[hi]ਤੌਰ[/hi] - Way, manner

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - On

[hi]ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ[/hi] - Strong

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is

Key Concept: This sentence uses the [hi]ਤੌਰ[/hi] (way, manner) to show a way in which the subject is strong. This structure is very common in Punjabi and can be used with many different adjectives and adverbs.

English: He is physically strong.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਰੀਰਕ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is objective. English: The objective of the class is to learn the Punjabi language.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲਾਸ ਦਾ ਟੀਚਾ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਸਿੱਖਣਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਲਾਸ[/hi] - [hi]class[/hi]

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - possessive particle, "of the"

[hi]ਟੀਚਾ[/hi] - [hi]objective[/hi]

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - [hi]Punjabi[/hi]

[hi]ਭਾਸ਼ਾ[/hi] - [hi]language[/hi]

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]to learn[/hi]

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]is[/hi]

Key Concepts:

The sentence structure in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), which is different from English's Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) structure.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is used to show possession, similar to the English word "of".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is a common ending for sentences in Punjabi, indicating the present tense.

Translation: The objective of the class is to learn the Punjabi language.

The next word is heavy. English: The box is very heavy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡੱਬਾ ਬਹੁਤ ਭਾਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡੱਬਾ[/hi] (dabba): This word means "box".

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] (bahut): This means "very".

[hi]ਭਾਰੀ[/hi] (bhaari): This means "heavy".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai): This is the present tense of the verb "to be". It is the singular form.

This sentence uses the adjective [hi]ਭਾਰੀ[/hi] (bhaari) to describe the noun [hi]ਡੱਬਾ[/hi] (dabba). This is a common way to describe things in Punjabi.

The next word is condition. English: The condition of the car is poor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਦੀ ਹਾਲਤ ਖਰਾਬ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] [hi]gaddi[/hi] - car

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] [hi]di[/hi] - of the (possessive marker, used for feminine nouns like [hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi])

[hi]ਹਾਲਤ[/hi] [hi]haalat[/hi] - condition

[hi]ਖਰਾਬ[/hi] [hi]kharaab[/hi] - bad / poor

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

The use of the possessive marker [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] to show ownership, connecting [hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] (car) and [hi]ਹਾਲਤ[/hi] (condition).

The word order in Punjabi is typically Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), as seen in this sentence.

English: The condition of the car is poor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਦੀ ਹਾਲਤ ਖਰਾਬ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is few. English: There are a few students in the class today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj klass vich thode te students hain[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi]: Today (This is a common word that gets used in many situations)

[hi]klass[/hi]: Class (the English word class is easily transliterated in Punjabi)

[hi]vich[/hi]: in (preposition, used to show location, this word is very useful, it can also be used to mean "among" for example: [hi]mera naam te list vich hai[/hi] - My name is on the list)

[hi]thode[/hi]: few (This is an important word, it means a small number, you can also use it as an adjective, example: [hi]thode paise[/hi] - a little money)

[hi]te[/hi]: some (This is the Punjabi word for some, you can use it in different contexts, for example: [hi]te log[/hi] - some people)

[hi]students[/hi]: students (The English word for students is used in Punjabi, the pronunciation may vary slightly)

[hi]hain[/hi]: are (The verb "to be" in the present tense, this is a very important word in Punjabi grammar, it is used in many different situations)

Key concepts:

[hi]vich[/hi]: The preposition "in" is very important in Punjabi, it is used to show location.

[hi]te[/hi]: The word "some" is very important in Punjabi, it is used to indicate an indefinite number.

[hi]hain[/hi]: The verb "to be" is very important in Punjabi grammar, it is used in many different situations.

English: There are a few students in the class today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj klass vich thode te students hain[/hi].

The next word is check. English: He checked the newspaper.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ ਚੈੱਕ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] = He/She/It (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ[/hi] = Newspaper

[hi]ਚੈੱਕ[/hi] = Checked

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] = did

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence is in the past tense.

The object of the verb ([hi]ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ[/hi]) comes before the verb ([hi]ਚੈੱਕ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi]).

The masculine singular pronoun ([hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi]) precedes the verb.

English: He checked the newspaper.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ ਚੈੱਕ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi].

The next word is income. English: He has a good income.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਦੀ ਆਮਦਨੀ ਚੰਗੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਦੀ[/hi] - This is the possessive form of the pronoun "he" and it means "his".

[hi]ਆਮਦਨੀ[/hi] - This means "income".

[hi]ਚੰਗੀ[/hi] - This means "good".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

This sentence is in the present tense and it means that "he has a good income". The sentence structure is a simple subject-verb-object sentence. This sentence is a good example of how to use the possessive form of pronouns in Punjabi. It also shows how to use the present tense form of the verb "to be".

English: He has a good income.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਦੀ ਆਮਦਨੀ ਚੰਗੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is sorry. English: I am sorry.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਮਾਫ਼ ਕਰ ਦਿਓ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the object pronoun for "me" and is used with the verb [hi]ਮਾਫ਼ ਕਰ ਦਿਓ[/hi] to show that the speaker is asking for forgiveness.

[hi]ਮਾਫ਼[/hi] - This is the verb meaning "to forgive."

[hi]ਕਰ ਦਿਓ[/hi] - This is the imperative form of the verb "to do," meaning "please do." It adds politeness to the request for forgiveness.

This sentence is a common way to apologize in Punjabi. It is important to note that the word order is different than in English. In Punjabi, the object pronoun comes before the verb.

The next word is repeat. English: Please repeat that.

Punjabi: ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਉਹ ਗੱਲ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਕਹੋ। [hi]kirpaa karake ohh gall dobaara kaho.[/hi]

Breakdown:

ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ [hi]kirpaa karake[/hi]: This phrase means "please" and is a polite way to ask someone to do something. It is often used at the beginning of requests.

ਉਹ [hi]ohh[/hi]: This means "that" and refers to something that has already been mentioned.

ਗੱਲ [hi]gall[/hi]: This means "thing" or "matter" in the context of a statement or conversation.

ਦੁਬਾਰਾ [hi]dobaara[/hi]: This means "again" or "once more".

ਕਹੋ [hi]kaho[/hi]: This is the imperative form of the verb "to say" and means "say". It is used to make a request or command.

Therefore, the full sentence means "Please say that again."

The next word is net. English: The net is strong.

Punjabi: [hi]Jāl mazbūt hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Jāl[/hi] - This is the word for "net" in Punjabi. It's a common word and easy to remember.

[hi]mazbūt[/hi] - This means "strong." It's a useful word to learn because it can be applied to many things, not just nets.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." It's a very common word that you will see and hear often. It is the present tense of the verb "to be".

This sentence uses the simple present tense, which is a basic tense in Punjabi. The structure is simple: Subject + Verb + Object.

You can use this sentence as a base to learn other things related to nets or strength. For example, you could say:

[hi]Jāl kamzōr hai[/hi]. (The net is weak.)

[hi]Jāl kisi ne tor diya[/hi]. (Someone broke the net.)

[hi]Jāl bahut khūbsūrat hai[/hi]. (The net is very beautiful.)

By practicing these phrases, you can learn more about the Punjabi language and culture.

The next word is yourself. English: I am myself.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਆਪਣਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] (main) - This is the Punjabi word for "I".

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] (apna) - This means "myself" or "my own". It is used to emphasize that something is directly related to the speaker.

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] (haan) - This is the Punjabi word for "am".

Key concepts:

Subject-verb agreement: Punjabi, like English, follows subject-verb agreement rules. Since the subject is "I" (singular), the verb "am" is also in singular form.

Personal pronouns: Punjabi uses different forms of personal pronouns based on gender and the level of formality. In this case, "main" is used for the first person singular (I).

Possessive adjectives: The possessive adjective [hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] (apna) is used to indicate ownership or possession, similar to "my" in English.

English: I am myself.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਆਪਣਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi].

The next word is conclusion. English: We reached the conclusion that the project was a success.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਇਹ ਨਤੀਜਾ ਕੱਢਿਆ ਕਿ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਸਫਲ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - this

[hi]ਨਤੀਜਾ[/hi] - conclusion

[hi]ਕੱਢਿਆ[/hi] - reached (past tense)

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - that

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ[/hi] - project

[hi]ਸਫਲ[/hi] - successful

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] - was

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨਤੀਜਾ[/hi] - means "conclusion" or "result."

[hi]ਕੱਢਿਆ[/hi] is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਕੱਢਣਾ[/hi], which means "to reach" or "to draw."

[hi]ਸਫਲ[/hi] is an adjective meaning "successful."

Remember: [hi]ਨਤੀਜਾ[/hi] is a key word for the concept of conclusion in Punjabi.

The next word is policy. English: The government has a strict policy on immigration.

Punjabi: ਸਰਕਾਰ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਵਾਸ 'ਤੇ ਸਖ਼ਤ ਨੀਤੀ ਹੈ। [hi]sarkaar da parvaas 'te sakht niti hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਰਕਾਰ[/hi] [hi]sarkaar[/hi] - Government. Note the [hi]ਸ[/hi] [hi]s[/hi] sound at the beginning is very similar to the [hi]ਸ਼[/hi] [hi]sh[/hi] sound in English.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] - Of, belonging to (possessive marker)

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਵਾਸ[/hi] [hi]parvaas[/hi] - Immigration

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] [hi]'te[/hi] - On, upon. It is important to know that Punjabi has a lot of combinations of letters that are pronounced the same (such as the combination of [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] [hi]te[/hi] and [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] [hi]te[/hi] ). The written form of these words is important to remember as you will find it in many words.

[hi]ਸਖ਼ਤ[/hi] [hi]sakht[/hi] - Strict. Note the [hi]ਖ[/hi] [hi]kh[/hi] is not a hard K sound but rather a sound like the hard "K" in "Bach".

[hi]ਨੀਤੀ[/hi] [hi]niti[/hi] - Policy

This is a relatively simple sentence but it illustrates many key concepts of the Punjabi language, such as the use of possessive markers, prepositions and the gender and number agreement.

English: The government has a strict policy on immigration.

Punjabi: ਸਰਕਾਰ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਵਾਸ 'ਤੇ ਸਖ਼ਤ ਨੀਤੀ ਹੈ। [hi]sarkaar da parvaas 'te sakht niti hai.[/hi]

The next word is score. English: He scored a century in the cricket match.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne kriket de khel vich sau ran banae[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi]: This is the third person singular pronoun in the masculine gender, meaning "he".

[hi]kriket de[/hi]: This is a possessive phrase meaning "of cricket".

[hi]khel[/hi]: This means "game".

[hi]vich[/hi]: This is a postposition meaning "in".

[hi]sau[/hi]: This means "hundred".

[hi]ran[/hi]: This means "runs" (in cricket).

[hi]banae[/hi]: This is the past tense of the verb "to make" and is used here to mean "scored".

This sentence shows how Punjabi uses postpositions (like [hi]vich[/hi]) to show relationships between words, and how the verb conjugation changes depending on the subject and tense.

The next word is request. English: He requested a glass of water.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਗਲਾਸ ਪਾਣੀ ਮੰਗਿਆ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - (usne) - He/She

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - (ikk) - one

[hi]ਗਲਾਸ[/hi] - (glass) - glass

[hi]ਪਾਣੀ[/hi] - (paani) - water

[hi]ਮੰਗਿਆ[/hi] - (mangya) - requested

The word [hi]ਮੰਗਿਆ[/hi] is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਮੰਗਣਾ[/hi] - (mangna) which means to request. This sentence uses the direct object structure, where the object of the verb [hi]ਮੰਗਿਆ[/hi] - (mangya) is [hi]ਇੱਕ ਗਲਾਸ ਪਾਣੀ[/hi] (ikk glass paani).

The next word is introduce. English: "Let me introduce you to my friend."

Punjabi: "[hi]Main tuhanu apne dost nal milvauna chahunda han[/hi]."

Breakdown:

[hi]Main[/hi] - I

[hi]tuhanu[/hi] - you (plural/formal)

[hi]apne[/hi] - my (possessive)

[hi]dost[/hi] - friend

[hi]nal[/hi] - with

[hi]milvauna[/hi] - to introduce (verb)

[hi]chahunda[/hi] - want (present tense)

[hi]han[/hi] - I (present tense - I am)

Key Concepts:

Formal Punjabi: "Tuhanu" is the formal form of "you" in Punjabi, making this sentence more polite and respectful.

Possessive Markers: [hi]apne[/hi] is the Punjabi word for "my," showing that the friend belongs to the speaker.

Present Tense: The Punjabi verb [hi]chahunda[/hi] (want) is in the present tense.

Word Order: Punjabi word order is different from English. The subject ([hi]Main[/hi]) comes first, followed by the object ([hi]tuhanu[/hi]), then the verb ([hi]milvauna[/hi]).

English: "Let me introduce you to my friend."

Punjabi: "[hi]Main tuhanu apne dost nal milvauna chahunda han[/hi]."

The next word is avoid. English: We should avoid eating junk food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਜੰਕ ਫੂਡ ਖਾਣ ਤੋਂ ਪਰਹੇਜ਼ ਕਰਨਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We (Subject)

[hi]ਜੰਕ ਫੂਡ[/hi] - Junk food (Object)

[hi]ਖਾਣ[/hi] - To eat (Verb)

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - From (Preposition)

[hi]ਪਰਹੇਜ਼[/hi] - Avoidance (Noun)

[hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] - To do (Verb)

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - Should (Modal Verb)

This sentence uses the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] which is a common auxiliary verb in Punjabi. It is used to express obligation, necessity or desirability. The word [hi]ਪਰਹੇਜ਼[/hi] is used to express the act of avoiding something.

The next word is handle. English: She can handle this situation.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇਸ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਨੂੰ ਸੰਭਾਲ ਸਕਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "she".

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This is the demonstrative pronoun "this".

[hi]ਸਥਿਤੀ[/hi] - This is the noun "situation".

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the postposition "to", indicating the object of the verb.

[hi]ਸੰਭਾਲ[/hi] - This is the verb "handle", meaning to manage or control.

[hi]ਸਕਦੀ[/hi] - This is the auxiliary verb "can", indicating ability.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense copula verb "is", used to connect the subject to the predicate.

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Like prepositions in English, postpositions follow the noun or pronoun they modify. In this case, "[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi]" indicates the object of the verb.

Auxiliary verbs: "Can" is an auxiliary verb that helps express ability. In Punjabi, the auxiliary verb appears at the end of the verb phrase: " [hi]ਸਕਦੀ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]"

English: She can handle this situation.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇਸ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਨੂੰ ਸੰਭਾਲ ਸਕਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is operation. English: The operation was successful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਆਪਰੇਸ਼ਨ ਸਫਲ ਰਿਹਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਆਪਰੇਸ਼ਨ[/hi] [hi]operation[/hi] - This is the English word adopted into Punjabi. Note that the spelling is similar to English.

[hi]ਸਫਲ[/hi] [hi]successful[/hi] - This is a common Punjabi word. Note that it is related to the English word "success."

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] [hi]was[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to be." It is used to indicate that the operation was successful in the past.

[hi]।[/hi] [hi].[/hi] - This is the Punjabi punctuation mark for the end of a sentence.

Key Concepts:

Loanwords: [hi]ਆਪਰੇਸ਼ਨ[/hi] is an example of a loanword, a word adopted from another language.

Verb Tense: [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] shows the past tense, which is crucial for understanding the time frame of the action.

This sentence is a good example of how Punjabi can be relatively easy to understand, even for English speakers, due to the adoption of many English words and the use of similar grammatical structures.

The next word is murder. English: He was accused of murder.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ ਕਤਲ ਦੇ ਦੋਸ਼ ਵਿੱਚ ਗ੍ਰਿਫਤਾਰ ਕੀਤਾ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the object pronoun "him" and indicates the person being accused.

[hi]ਕਤਲ[/hi] - This means "murder" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਦੇ ਦੋਸ਼ ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This translates to "for the crime of" or "on the charge of."

[hi]ਗ੍ਰਿਫਤਾਰ ਕੀਤਾ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi] - This literally means "was arrested" and signifies the action taken against the accused person.

Key Concepts:

Object Pronoun: The object pronoun ([hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi]) is used when the person or thing is the receiver of the action.

Direct Object: The word [hi]ਕਤਲ[/hi] (murder) is the direct object of the verb "arrested."

Passive Voice: The sentence uses the passive voice, which means the action is being done to the subject rather than by the subject. This emphasizes the act of arrest and the charges, rather than who made the arrest.

Remember, the passive voice is often used in legal contexts to focus on the crime itself rather than the specific person performing the action.

English: He was accused of murder.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ ਕਤਲ ਦੇ ਦੋਸ਼ ਵਿੱਚ ਗ੍ਰਿਫਤਾਰ ਕੀਤਾ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is enter. English: He entered the room.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਮਰੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਦਾਖਲ ਹੋਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] means "he"

[hi]ਕਮਰੇ[/hi] means "room"

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] means "in" or "inside"

[hi]ਦਾਖਲ[/hi] means "to enter"

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] is the past tense of the verb "to be" and is used to indicate that the action of entering happened in the past.

Key concept: The word order in Punjabi is typically Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), which is different from English (SVO). So in this sentence, the subject "he" comes first, followed by the object "room", and finally the verb "entered".

English: He entered the room.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਮਰੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਦਾਖਲ ਹੋਇਆ।[/hi]

The next word is emerge. English: The sun emerged from behind the clouds.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੂਰਜ ਬੱਦਲਾਂ ਦੇ ਪਿੱਛੇ ਤੋਂ ਨਿਕਲਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] - [hi]sooraj[/hi] - sun

[hi]ਬੱਦਲਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]badalaan[/hi] - clouds (plural)

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਪਿੱਛੇ[/hi] - [hi]pichche[/hi] - behind

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] - from

[hi]ਨਿਕਲਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]nikaliya[/hi] - emerged (past tense, masculine singular)

Key concepts:

Postposition: [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] is a postposition, which is a word that comes after the noun it modifies. In this case, it indicates the direction of movement.

Gender Agreement: The verb [hi]ਨਿਕਲਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]nikaliya[/hi] agrees in gender with the noun [hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] - [hi]sooraj[/hi] (masculine).

Past Tense: [hi]ਨਿਕਲਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]nikaliya[/hi] is the past tense form of the verb [hi]ਨਿਕਲਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]nikalna[/hi] (to emerge).

Translation: The sun emerged from behind the clouds.

The next word is get. English: I got a new book today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਅੱਜ ਨਵੀਂ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮਿਲੀ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] ([hi]mainnu[/hi]) - To me, the dative case marker [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] ([hi]nu[/hi]) combines with the personal pronoun [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] ([hi]main[/hi]).

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] ([hi]ajj[/hi]) - Today

[hi]ਨਵੀਂ[/hi] ([hi]navi[/hi]) - New.

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] ([hi]kitab[/hi]) - Book.

[hi]ਮਿਲੀ[/hi] ([hi]mili[/hi]) - Got, past tense of the verb [hi]ਮਿਲਣਾ[/hi] ([hi]milna[/hi]) - to get.

English: I got a new book today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਅੱਜ ਨਵੀਂ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮਿਲੀ[/hi].

The next word is manage. English: He manages the business.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਵਪਾਰ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਬੰਧ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun for "he".

[hi]ਵਪਾਰ[/hi] - This means "business".

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is the possessive marker for "of the". So, it is "business of the".

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਬੰਧ[/hi] - This word means "management" or "arrangement".

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "to do" and is conjugated for the third person singular masculine, "he does".

The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb, just as in English. The possessive marker "da" comes after the noun it modifies. This sentence demonstrates a simple structure that is typical of Punjabi.

English: He manages the business.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਵਪਾਰ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਬੰਧ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is total. English: The total cost of the books is fifty rupees.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਦੀ ਕੁੱਲ ਕੀਮਤ ਪੰਜਾਹ ਰੁਪਏ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] which means "book."

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is the possessive marker indicating "of the books."

[hi]ਕੁੱਲ[/hi] - This means "total."

[hi]ਕੀਮਤ[/hi] - This means "price."

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਹ[/hi] - This means "fifty."

[hi]ਰੁਪਏ[/hi] - This is the plural form of [hi]ਰੁਪਿਆ[/hi] which means "rupee."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in Punjabi.

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses post-positions instead of prepositions. Here, [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to show possession instead of "of."

Punjabi uses a different word order than English. In this sentence, the subject comes after the verb.

Punjabi verbs are often at the end of the sentence.

Punjabi often uses plural forms of nouns when referring to a group of items.

English: The total cost of the books is fifty rupees.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਦੀ ਕੁੱਲ ਕੀਮਤ ਪੰਜਾਹ ਰੁਪਏ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is corporate. English: This is a corporate office.

Punjabi: [hi]Ee [hi]ek [hi]ka[hi]rpo[hi]re[hi]t [hi]a[hi]f[hi]s [hi]ae[hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ee [hi] - This is (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ek [hi] - a (indefinite article)

[hi]ka[hi]rpo[hi]re[hi]t [hi] - corporate (adjective)

[hi]a[hi]f[hi]s [hi] - office (noun)

[hi]ae[hi] - is (copula verb, present tense)

This sentence uses a demonstrative pronoun, an indefinite article, and a noun. The copula verb connects the subject and predicate.

Key concept: [hi]ka[hi]rpo[hi]re[hi]t [hi] - 'corporate' is borrowed from English and used in Punjabi with minimal modifications to spelling.

The next word is bed. English: I am lying on the bed.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਬਿਸਤਰੇ 'ਤੇ ਲੇਟਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - [hi]main[/hi] - I

[hi]ਬਿਸਤਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]bistaray[/hi] - bed (masculine, singular)

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]te[/hi] - on (postposition)

[hi]ਲੇਟਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]laityaa[/hi] - lying (past participle, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]hoyaa[/hi] - being (past participle, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]haan[/hi] - am (present tense, first person singular)

Key concepts:

The sentence is in the present continuous tense, which is formed with the past participle of the verb (in this case, [hi]ਲੇਟਿਆ[/hi]) followed by the verb [hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi].

The word [hi]ਬਿਸਤਰੇ[/hi] is masculine singular, which is why it takes the masculine singular past participle forms of [hi]ਲੇਟਿਆ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi].

The postposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is used to indicate location, and is placed after the noun [hi]ਬਿਸਤਰੇ[/hi].

English: I am lying on the bed.

The next word is violence. English: Violence is never the answer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਿੰਸਾ ਕਦੇ ਵੀ ਹੱਲ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੁੰਦੀ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹਿੰਸਾ[/hi] [hi]hinsa[/hi] - violence

[hi]ਕਦੇ ਵੀ[/hi] [hi]kade vi[/hi] - never

[hi]ਹੱਲ[/hi] [hi]hall[/hi] - solution

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] [hi]nahi[/hi] - not

[hi]ਹੁੰਦੀ[/hi] [hi]hunndi[/hi] - is

This sentence uses the present tense in Punjabi. "Hunndi" is a conjugated form of the verb "hona" which means to be. It is used to denote an action that is habitually true or something that happens regularly.

English: Violence is never the answer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਿੰਸਾ ਕਦੇ ਵੀ ਹੱਲ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੁੰਦੀ[/hi]

The next word is somebody. English: Somebody is waiting for you.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੋਈ[/hi] [hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੇ[/hi] [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] [hi]ਇੰਤਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] [hi]ਕਰ[/hi] [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੋਈ[/hi] [hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੇ[/hi] [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] [hi]ਇੰਤਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] [hi]ਕਰ[/hi] [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

[hi]ਕੋਈ[/hi]  - This is the subject of the sentence and means "somebody" or "someone".

[hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੇ[/hi] - This is a possessive pronoun, meaning "your".

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "for".

[hi]ਇੰਤਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This is a noun meaning "wait".

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - This is the verb meaning "to do", "to make", or "to perform".

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is a present continuous verb ending, meaning "is doing" or "is making".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is an auxiliary verb, helping to complete the tense of the sentence. It means "is" or "is being".

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਕੋਈ[/hi] - This is a common word used to express an unspecified person.

[hi]ਇੰਤਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This noun is commonly used to describe the act of waiting for something.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This verb ending is useful for expressing ongoing actions.

English: Somebody is waiting for you.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੋਈ[/hi] [hi]ਤੁਹਾਡੇ[/hi] [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] [hi]ਇੰਤਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] [hi]ਕਰ[/hi] [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

The next word is exchange. English: We exchanged gifts.

Punjabi: [hi]Aasां ne tohfaan da adaan-pradaan kiita[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Aasां[/hi]: This is the plural form of the pronoun "we" and is used for both masculine and feminine genders. Remember that [hi]aasां[/hi] is very useful to know.

[hi]ne[/hi]: This means "have" and is used for the past tense of verbs in Punjabi. In this case, we are indicating an action was already completed.

[hi]tohfaan[/hi]: This means "gifts" and is a plural noun.

[hi]da[/hi]: This is a possessive particle used to connect "gifts" to the action of exchanging. In this case, [hi]da[/hi] is acting as a possessive marker, like "of" in English.

[hi]adaan-pradaan[/hi]: This literally means "giving and taking" and is used to describe the action of exchanging.

[hi]kiita[/hi]: This is the past tense form of the verb "to do" and signifies an action that is already completed.

Key concept: Punjabi uses a specific grammatical structure for expressing actions that have already happened. In this case, the subject ([hi]Aasां[/hi]) is followed by the particle [hi]ne[/hi] and then the past tense form of the verb ([hi]kiita[/hi]).

Remember: [hi]ne[/hi] is used with the past tense of verbs to indicate that the action has already been completed.

The next word is private. English: The book is for private reading only.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਨਿੱਜੀ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਲਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] [hi]kitab[/hi] - book (feminine)

[hi]ਸਿਰਫ਼[/hi] [hi]sirf[/hi] - only

[hi]ਨਿੱਜੀ[/hi] [hi]nijjī[/hi] - private

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ[/hi] [hi]paṛh'ā'ī[/hi] - reading (feminine)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] [hi]la'ī[/hi] - for

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns have gender. [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] [hi]kitab[/hi] (book) and [hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ[/hi] [hi]paṛh'ā'ī[/hi] (reading) are feminine nouns. This affects the choice of verb and other grammatical elements.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions (words that come after the noun) like [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] [hi]la'ī[/hi] (for) instead of prepositions (words that come before the noun) like "for" in English.

Word Order: The basic word order in Punjabi sentences is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), similar to Hindi and Urdu. However, the sentence above has the object ([hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] [hi]kitab[/hi] - book) at the beginning for emphasis.

English: The book is for private reading only.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਨਿੱਜੀ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਲਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is connection. English: We have a strong connection.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਡਾ ਇੱਕ ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ ਸੰਬੰਧ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਡਾ[/hi] - Our (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - One, a

[hi]ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ[/hi] - Strong

[hi]ਸੰਬੰਧ[/hi] - Connection, relationship

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is (present tense, 3rd person singular)

The sentence structure is subject-verb-object. The subject is [hi]ਸਾਡਾ[/hi] (our), the verb is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is), and the object is [hi]ਇੱਕ ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ ਸੰਬੰਧ[/hi] (a strong connection).

Key concepts:

The word [hi]ਸੰਬੰਧ[/hi] can be used to talk about a variety of relationships, including family, friends, and colleagues.

The word [hi]ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ[/hi] is a very common word in Punjabi and can be used to describe anything that is strong or sturdy.

You can also use the phrase [hi]ਸੰਬੰਧ ਬਣਾਉਣਾ[/hi] (to build a relationship) to talk about forming a connection with someone.

The next word is throughout. English: He worked throughout the day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਾਰਾ ਦਿਨ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦਾ ਰਿਹਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਸਾਰਾ[/hi] - whole/entire (adjective modifying [hi]ਦਿਨ[/hi])

[hi]ਦਿਨ[/hi] - day (noun)

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - work (noun)

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - doing/working (present continuous tense, masculine singular form)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - was (past continuous tense, masculine singular form)

Key Concept: The verb [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] in Punjabi is a past continuous tense marker. It means "was" or "kept" and is often used with the present continuous tense form of the verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi]. This combination creates the past continuous tense, indicating an action that continued for a period of time in the past.

English: He worked throughout the day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਾਰਾ ਦਿਨ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦਾ ਰਿਹਾ।[/hi]

The next word is ignore. Okay, I understand. I will wait for your next English word and provide a Punjabi sentence with a breakdown, using the [hi] and [/hi] markers for Punjabi words.

The next word is leave. English: He left the house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਘਰੋਂ ਚਲਿਆ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is a third person singular pronoun meaning "he".

[hi]ਘਰੋਂ[/hi] - This is a postposition, meaning "from the house". It is formed by combining the word [hi]ਘਰ[/hi] (house) with the postposition [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] (from), using the elision rule.

[hi]ਚਲਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] (to go), but it is used in a specific context to mean "to leave".

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] (to go), indicating that the action of leaving is completed.

Key concept: In Punjabi, the verb conjugations and the use of particles like [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] (from) are essential to express the nuances of movement and location.

English: He left the house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਘਰੋਂ ਚਲਿਆ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is advertise. English: They advertised their new product on television.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੇ ਟੈਲੀਵਿਜ਼ਨ 'ਤੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਨਵੇਂ ਉਤਪਾਦ ਦਾ ਇਸ਼ਤਿਹਾਰ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - They

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - have (past tense marker)

[hi]ਟੈਲੀਵਿਜ਼ਨ[/hi] - television

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - on

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - their

[hi]ਨਵੇਂ[/hi] - new

[hi]ਉਤਪਾਦ[/hi] - product

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਇਸ਼ਤਿਹਾਰ[/hi] - advertisement

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi] - gave

Key concepts:

This sentence uses the past tense in Punjabi, indicated by the word [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] which follows the subject.

The word [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is a postposition in Punjabi meaning "on", which is used with the noun [hi]ਟੈਲੀਵਿਜ਼ਨ[/hi] to form a prepositional phrase.

The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a possessive marker which connects the noun [hi]ਉਤਪਾਦ[/hi] (product) to the pronoun [hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] (their).

English: They advertised their new product on television.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੇ ਟੈਲੀਵਿਜ਼ਨ 'ਤੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਨਵੇਂ ਉਤਪਾਦ ਦਾ ਇਸ਼ਤਿਹਾਰ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is crowd. English: The crowd was very large.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ ਦੀ ਭੀੜ ਬਹੁਤ ਵੱਡੀ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]lokaan[/hi] - this is the plural form of [hi]ਲੋਕ[/hi] [hi]lok[/hi] which means "people". It is used here to indicate the group of people in the crowd.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - this is the feminine possessive particle in Punjabi. It connects the word [hi]ਭੀੜ[/hi] [hi]bheed[/hi] (crowd) with the word [hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] [hi]lokaan[/hi] (people) and indicates that the crowd belongs to the people.

[hi]ਭੀੜ[/hi] - [hi]bheed[/hi] - this means "crowd". It is a noun in the sentence.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - this means "very". It is an adverb in the sentence modifying the adjective [hi]ਵੱਡੀ[/hi] [hi]vaddi[/hi].

[hi]ਵੱਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]vaddi[/hi] - this means "big/large". It is an adjective in the sentence describing the crowd.

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] - [hi]si[/hi] - this means "was" and marks the past tense of the sentence.

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] [hi]di[/hi] helps to show possession or belonging.

Plural Form: [hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] [hi]lokaan[/hi] - this shows that there are multiple people in the crowd.

Adjective: [hi]ਵੱਡੀ[/hi] [hi]vaddi[/hi] describes the size of the crowd.

Adverb: [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] [hi]bahut[/hi] modifies the adjective [hi]ਵੱਡੀ[/hi] [hi]vaddi[/hi]

Past Tense: [hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] [hi]si[/hi] indicates that the action happened in the past.

English: The crowd was very large.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ ਦੀ ਭੀੜ ਬਹੁਤ ਵੱਡੀ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is foot. English: He stepped on my foot.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੇਰੇ ਪੈਰ ਤੇ ਕਦਮ ਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is a third person singular pronoun, meaning "he," and it is in the nominative case.

[hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] - This is a possessive adjective, meaning "my."

[hi]ਪੈਰ[/hi] - This is a noun, meaning "foot."

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - This is a postposition, meaning "on" or "upon."

[hi]ਕਦਮ[/hi] - This is a noun, meaning "step" or "foot."

[hi]ਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi] - This is a past tense verb, meaning "placed" or "kept."

English: He stepped on my foot.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੇਰੇ ਪੈਰ ਤੇ ਕਦਮ ਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi].

The next word is by. English: He came by car.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਗੱਡੀ ਦੁਆਰਾ ਆਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun)

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] - Car (noun)

[hi]ਦੁਆਰਾ[/hi] - By (preposition)

[hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] - Came (verb)

Key concepts:

The preposition [hi]ਦੁਆਰਾ[/hi] means "by" and is used to indicate the means of transportation.

The verb [hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] is conjugated in the past tense, indicating that the action happened in the past.

The next word is arrangement. English: The arrangement of the books on the shelf is very beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਦੀ ਸ਼ੈਲਫ਼ ਤੇ ਵਿਵਸਥਾ ਬਹੁਤ ਸੋਹਣੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]kitabaaN[/hi] - books (plural) - Note the use of the plural marker [hi]aaN[/hi] in [hi]kitabaaN[/hi]

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of - the possessive marker

[hi]ਸ਼ੈਲਫ਼[/hi] - [hi]shailaph[/hi] - shelf

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]te[/hi] - on

[hi]ਵਿਵਸਥਾ[/hi] - [hi]vivastHaa[/hi] - arrangement

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਸੋਹਣੀ[/hi] - [hi]sohni[/hi] - beautiful - Note the use of the feminine ending [hi]i[/hi] since [hi]vivastHaa[/hi] is a feminine word

English: The arrangement of the books on the shelf is very beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਦੀ ਸ਼ੈਲਫ਼ ਤੇ ਵਿਵਸਥਾ ਬਹੁਤ ਸੋਹਣੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is dollar. English: The cost of this book is five dollars.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦੀ ਕੀਮਤ ਪੰਜ ਡਾਲਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - [hi]is[/hi] - This

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitaab[/hi] - book

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of

[hi]ਕੀਮਤ[/hi] - [hi]keemat[/hi] - price/cost

[hi]ਪੰਜ[/hi] - [hi]panj[/hi] - five

[hi]ਡਾਲਰ[/hi] - [hi]dollar[/hi] - dollar

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Punjabi word order is generally Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) but in this sentence, it's slightly different. In this sentence, the object ([hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book), is presented first, then the possessor/object ([hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of) and then the subject ([hi]ਕੀਮਤ[/hi] - price).

Gender Agreement: Notice how [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (di) changes to match the gender of the noun [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] (kitaab - book), a feminine word.

Possessive Marker: The word [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (di) functions as a possessive marker, indicating that the price belongs to the book.

Noun-Adjective Agreement: Notice how [hi]ਪੰਜ[/hi] (panj) is the adjective and [hi]ਡਾਲਰ[/hi] (dollar) is the noun. They agree in gender because [hi]ਡਾਲਰ[/hi] (dollar) is a masculine word. This is a very common occurrence in Punjabi.

Translation: The price of this book is five dollars.

The next word is suddenly. English: He suddenly remembered his appointment.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅਚਾਨਕ ਆਪਣੀ ਮੁਲਾਕਾਤ ਯਾਦ ਕਰ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun)

[hi]ਅਚਾਨਕ[/hi] - Suddenly (adverb) - This is a very important word in Punjabi, and is used to show that something happened unexpectedly.

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - His/Her/Its (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਮੁਲਾਕਾਤ[/hi] - Appointment/Meeting (noun)

[hi]ਯਾਦ[/hi] - Remember (verb) - This is a tricky verb in Punjabi, as it can also mean "memory".

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - Do/Make (verb) - This is a helping verb that is often used with other verbs to make them more expressive.

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - Went/Did/Done (past tense marker)

Remember: The word order in Punjabi is often different than English. Also, Punjabi is a more flexible language, and there are often many ways to say the same thing.

English: He suddenly remembered his appointment.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅਚਾਨਕ ਆਪਣੀ ਮੁਲਾਕਾਤ ਯਾਦ ਕਰ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is mostly. English: Most of the students are in the library.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜਿਆਦਾਤਰ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜਿਆਦਾਤਰ[/hi] - This word means "mostly" or "the majority". It is an adverb and modifies the noun phrase that follows.

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - This word means "students" and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ[/hi] - This word means "library" and is the object of the preposition "[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi]" (in).

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This word means "in" and is a preposition that connects the noun phrase "[hi]ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ[/hi]" (library) to the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - This is the verb "to be" in the present tense and indicates that the students are in the library.

English: Most of the students are in the library.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜਿਆਦਾਤਰ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is live. English: We live in a beautiful world.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਇੱਕ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਦੁਨੀਆ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਹਿੰਦੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - "We" - This is the subject pronoun in the sentence, indicating the plural first person.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - "a/one" - This is a quantifier, indicating a singular entity.

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - "beautiful" - This is an adjective describing the noun "world."

[hi]ਦੁਨੀਆ[/hi] - "world" - This is the noun that is the object of the preposition "in."

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - "in" - This is a preposition that shows the location of the subject.

[hi]ਰਹਿੰਦੇ[/hi] - "live" - This is the verb in the sentence, conjugated in the present tense. It indicates an ongoing action.

[hi]ਹਾਂ।[/hi] - "are" - This is an auxiliary verb used to form the present tense.

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: The verb "rehende" is conjugated to match the plural subject "aaseen."

Preposition: The preposition "vich" shows the location of the subject, "we," in the "world."

Adjective: The adjective "sundar" modifies the noun "duniya" to describe its quality.

The next word is cook. English: She cooks food for the family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਲਈ ਖਾਣਾ ਪਕਾਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - She/He. This is a pronoun, which acts as the subject of the sentence. It is in the third person singular, meaning it refers to a single person who is not the speaker or the person being spoken to.

[hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]parivaar[/hi] - Family. This is a noun and the object of the preposition [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] [hi]lai[/hi] (for).

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - [hi]lai[/hi] - For. This is a preposition that shows the purpose or benefit of the action. It connects the noun [hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] [hi]parivaar[/hi] to the verb [hi]ਪਕਾਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]pakaunti hai.[/hi]

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]khaana[/hi] - Food. This is a noun and the object of the verb [hi]ਪਕਾਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]pakaunti hai.[/hi]

[hi]ਪਕਾਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]pakaunti hai.[/hi] - Cooks. This is a verb in the present tense. The ending [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] indicates that the subject is female, the verb is in the present tense, and that the action is happening now.

Important Tip: Punjabi verbs change based on the gender of the subject. The ending [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] is used for female subjects in the present tense. Remember this.

English: She cooks food for the family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਲਈ ਖਾਣਾ ਪਕਾਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is country. English: He is from a different country.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੂਜੇ ਦੇਸ਼ ਤੋਂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਦੂਜੇ[/hi] - Other/Different (adjective, modifying [hi]ਦੇਸ਼[/hi])

[hi]ਦੇਸ਼[/hi] - Country (noun, object of the preposition [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi])

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - From (preposition, indicating origin)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (verb, present tense, singular)

Key Concepts:

Prepositions: [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] (from) indicates origin or source.

Adjectives: [hi]ਦੂਜੇ[/hi] (other, different) modifies the noun [hi]ਦੇਸ਼[/hi] (country).

Pronouns: [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he/she/it) is used to refer to the subject of the sentence.

English: He is from a different country.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੂਜੇ ਦੇਸ਼ ਤੋਂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is challenge. English: He challenged her to a race.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਦੌੜ ਲਈ ਚੁਣੌਤੀ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he" in Punjabi. It is in the nominative case.

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the object pronoun "her" in Punjabi. It is in the accusative case.

[hi]ਦੌੜ[/hi] - This is the word for "race" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - This is a postposition meaning "for." It is used to show the purpose of the race.

[hi]ਚੁਣੌਤੀ[/hi] - This is the word for "challenge" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi] - This is the past tense verb "gave" in Punjabi. It is conjugated in the third person singular. It agrees with the subject "he."

Key Concepts:

Punjabi verbs are often conjugated for person, number, and tense.

Punjabi postpositions are used to show relationships between words, like English prepositions.

Punjabi is a subject-verb-object (SVO) language, just like English.

English: He challenged her to a race.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਦੌੜ ਲਈ ਚੁਣੌਤੀ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is solve. English: He solved the math problem.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਗਣਿਤ ਦਾ ਸਮੱਸਿਆ ਹੱਲ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is a combination of the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he) and the past tense marker [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] which marks the subject as masculine.

[hi]ਗਣਿਤ[/hi] - means mathematics.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - is the possessive marker and can be understood as "of" in this case.

[hi]ਸਮੱਸਿਆ[/hi] - means problem.

[hi]ਹੱਲ[/hi] - means to solve or solution.

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - is the past tense form of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] (to do).

Key Concepts:

Punjabi is a gendered language. This is apparent in the use of [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] for masculine subjects and [hi]ਨੀ[/hi] for feminine subjects in the past tense.

Punjabi uses postpositions, not prepositions like English, to show relationships between words. For example, the word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a postposition and is used to indicate possession.

English: He solved the math problem.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਗਣਿਤ ਦਾ ਸਮੱਸਿਆ ਹੱਲ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is effective. English: This medicine is very effective.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh dashtī bahut asar daar hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This

[hi]dashtī[/hi] - medicine

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]asar daar[/hi] - effective

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concept: The word [hi]asar daar[/hi] is an adjective describing the quality of the medicine. It literally means "effect giving" and implies that the medicine is potent and will produce the desired results.

English: This medicine is very effective.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh dashtī bahut asar daar hai[/hi].

The next word is treat. English: He treats his mother with respect.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੀ ਮਾਤਾ ਨਾਲ ਸਤਿਕਾਰ ਨਾਲ ਪੇਸ਼ ਆਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - his

[hi]ਮਾਤਾ[/hi] - mother

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - with

[hi]ਸਤਿਕਾਰ[/hi] - respect

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - with

[hi]ਪੇਸ਼[/hi] - treat

[hi]ਆਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - he comes, he behaves

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] is a versatile preposition used to indicate accompaniment, connection, or manner. It can be translated as "with", "to", or "by" depending on the context.

[hi]ਪੇਸ਼ ਆਉਂਦਾ[/hi] is a common expression in Punjabi meaning "to treat someone".

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] is a possessive pronoun meaning "his/her/their" and is used when referring to something belonging to the subject of the sentence.

English: He treats his mother with respect.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੀ ਮਾਤਾ ਨਾਲ ਸਤਿਕਾਰ ਨਾਲ ਪੇਸ਼ ਆਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is attention. English: Please pay attention.

Punjabi: [hi] ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਧਿਆਨ ਦਿਓ [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi] ਕਿਰਪਾ [/hi] (kirpaa) = please, respectfully requesting something

[hi] ਕਰਕੇ [/hi] (karke) = a suffix for requests and commands, "please do"

[hi] ਧਿਆਨ [/hi] (dhyaan) = attention, focus

[hi] ਦਿਓ [/hi] (dio) = give, provide, the imperative form of the verb "dena" (to give)

Key Concept: The use of "[hi] ਕਿਰਪਾ [/hi]" (kirpaa) emphasizes politeness in a request.

English: Please pay attention.

Punjabi: [hi] ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਧਿਆਨ ਦਿਓ [/hi]

The next word is escape. English: He escaped from the burning building.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੜ ਰਹੇ ਇਮਾਰਤ ਤੋਂ ਬਚ ਨਿਕਲਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the pronoun "he" in Punjabi. It is the subject of the sentence. Notice that "he" is not explicitly stated in English, but is implied.

[hi]ਸੜ ਰਹੇ[/hi] - This is the present participle of the verb "to burn," meaning "burning." This is the modifier describing the building.

[hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi] - This is the noun "building" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - This is the preposition "from" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਬਚ[/hi] - This is the verb "to escape" in Punjabi. Notice the word is in the past tense, so we are looking at an action that has already happened.

[hi]ਨਿਕਲਿਆ।[/hi] - This is the past tense form of the verb "to come out," which is used to imply escaping in this context.

Key Concepts:

The use of the present participle [hi]ਸੜ ਰਹੇ[/hi] to modify the noun [hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi] is a key concept in Punjabi grammar. This is a common way to describe an object or person in Punjabi, and it is similar to using a present participle in English.

The word [hi]ਨਿਕਲਿਆ[/hi] is used to imply escaping from a dangerous situation. This is a more common way of expressing the concept of escaping in Punjabi than the verb [hi]ਬਚ[/hi].

English: He escaped from the burning building.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੜ ਰਹੇ ਇਮਾਰਤ ਤੋਂ ਬਚ ਨਿਕਲਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is size. English: The size of this room is quite big.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਕਮਰੇ ਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ ਕਾਫ਼ੀ ਵੱਡਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਕਮਰੇ[/hi] - room (noun)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਆਕਾਰ[/hi] - size (noun)

[hi]ਕਾਫ਼ੀ[/hi] - quite (adverb)

[hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] - big (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (copula verb)

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses a postpositional structure, meaning the noun ("room") comes before the postposition ("of"). This is a common feature in Punjabi grammar.

The adjective "big" modifies the noun "size," indicating that the room is quite large.

English: The size of this room is quite big.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਕਮਰੇ ਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ ਕਾਫ਼ੀ ਵੱਡਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is direction. English: The bus driver gave us directions to the temple.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਸ ਵਾਲੇ ਨੇ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਮੰਦਰ ਜਾਣ ਦਾ ਰਾਹ ਦੱਸਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਸ ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] - bus driver. This is a compound word where [hi]ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] is a suffix meaning "one who" or "the one who." So the entire phrase translates to "the one who drives the bus."

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - has a complex function, but here it is used to indicate the subject, "the bus driver", performed the action.

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - us, the indirect object, the recipient of the direction.

[hi]ਮੰਦਰ[/hi] - temple, the destination.

[hi]ਜਾਣ[/hi] - to go, an infinitive form used to describe the purpose of the directions.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - means "of" and modifies the noun [hi]ਰਾਹ[/hi].

[hi]ਰਾਹ[/hi] - way or direction, the direct object of the verb.

[hi]ਦੱਸਿਆ[/hi] - past tense of [hi]ਦੱਸਣਾ[/hi] - to tell, to give directions.

Key concepts:

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is a versatile particle in Punjabi. It is used to indicate that the subject is performing the action of the verb.

Punjabi frequently uses compound words, combining two or more words to create a new meaning. This is why [hi]ਬੱਸ ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] is a single word in Punjabi, though it comprises two English words.

Punjabi verbs have a rich system of tenses and moods, which allows for expressing subtle nuances of time and action. [hi]ਦੱਸਿਆ[/hi] is the past tense of [hi]ਦੱਸਣਾ[/hi], and this helps convey the completed nature of the action.

English: The bus driver gave us directions to the temple.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਸ ਵਾਲੇ ਨੇ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਮੰਦਰ ਜਾਣ ਦਾ ਰਾਹ ਦੱਸਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is shape. English: The shape of the object is round.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਸਤੂ ਦਾ ਆਕਾਰ ਗੋਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਸਤੂ[/hi] - [hi]vastoo[/hi] - object

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - possessive marker, "of"

[hi]ਆਕਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]aakar[/hi] - shape

[hi]ਗੋਲ[/hi] - [hi]gol[/hi] - round

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Possessive Marker: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - used to show possession. It is placed between the noun and the possessed object.

Word Order: The sentence follows the Subject-Verb-Object structure, which is common in Punjabi.

Memorization Tip:

Remember that the word for "shape" in Punjabi is [hi]ਆਕਾਰ[/hi] ([hi]aakar[/hi]). This word is often used when describing the form or outline of an object.

The next word is record. English: He recorded the song.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਗੀਤ ਰਿਕਾਰਡ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She/It (masculine, singular)

[hi]ਗੀਤ[/hi] - [hi]geet[/hi] - song

[hi]ਰਿਕਾਰਡ[/hi] - [hi]rikaard[/hi] - record (verb)

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]kita[/hi] - did (past tense of [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] [hi]karnaa[/hi] - to do)

Key concepts:

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] is the past tense marker of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] which means "to do".

This sentence uses the past tense of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] to indicate that the action of recording the song is completed.

English: He recorded the song.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਗੀਤ ਰਿਕਾਰਡ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is target. English: They are targeting the young audience.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਨੌਜਵਾਨ ਦਰਸ਼ਕਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਨਿਸ਼ਾਨਾ ਬਣਾਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ[/hi] - they (plural, masculine/feminine) - subject

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - have (used with past tense) - helping verb

[hi]ਨੌਜਵਾਨ[/hi] - young

[hi]ਦਰਸ਼ਕਾਂ[/hi] - audience (plural) - object

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - to (dative case marker)

[hi]ਨਿਸ਼ਾਨਾ[/hi] - target

[hi]ਬਣਾਇਆ[/hi] - made (past tense) - main verb

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is. - helping verb

Key Concepts:

Punjabi is a subject-verb-object (SVO) language

Dative case marker [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] is used to indicate the indirect object.

Use of [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is needed for past tense actions

English: They are targeting the young audience.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਨੌਜਵਾਨ ਦਰਸ਼ਕਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਨਿਸ਼ਾਨਾ ਬਣਾਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is hold. English: She holds the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਫੜਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - She

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - Book

[hi]ਫੜਦੀ[/hi] - Holds (feminine singular present tense of verb [hi]ਫੜਨਾ[/hi] - to hold)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (present tense of verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - to be)

Key concepts:

The Punjabi verb for "to hold" is [hi]ਫੜਨਾ[/hi] and it conjugates like other Punjabi verbs.

The feminine singular present tense of [hi]ਫੜਨਾ[/hi] is [hi]ਫੜਦੀ[/hi]

The Punjabi word order for subject-verb-object is used.

English: She holds the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਫੜਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is teacher. English: The teacher is teaching the students.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਪੜ੍ਹਾ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ[/hi] - [hi]adhyapak[/hi] - teacher

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]vidyarthiyan[/hi] - students (plural)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - to, towards, for

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]padha[/hi] - teach (past tense)

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - [hi]rahe[/hi] - are (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]han[/hi] - are (present tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - This word is used to indicate the direction of an action. In this sentence, it shows that the teaching is directed towards the students.

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - This is part of the present continuous tense, which is used to describe actions that are ongoing.

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be," which is used to indicate that the teacher is present and teaching.

English Translation: The teacher is teaching the students.

The next word is up. English: He got up early.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਵੇਰੇ ਜਲਦੀ ਉੱਠਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (pronoun)

[hi]ਸਵੇਰੇ[/hi] - In the morning (adverbial phrase)

[hi]ਜਲਦੀ[/hi] - Early (adverb)

[hi]ਉੱਠਿਆ।[/hi] - Got up (verb)

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses a subject-verb-object word order, similar to English.

Adverbs modify verbs, describing how, when, where, or to what extent an action is performed.

Adverbial phrases often specify time.

[hi]ਉੱਠਿਆ[/hi] is the past tense of [hi]ਉੱਠਣਾ[/hi] (to get up).

This sentence demonstrates a simple past tense structure in Punjabi, emphasizing the action of getting up early in the morning.

The next word is currently. English: He is currently working.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੋਰ ਵੀ [hi]hor vi[/hi] [hi]ਕੰਮ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]kam kar riha hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹੋਰ ਵੀ [hi]hor vi[/hi] means "currently," it is the combination of the word "more" [hi]ਹੋਰ [hi]hor[/hi] and the word "this" [hi]ਵੀ [hi]vi[/hi].

[hi]ਕੰਮ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ। [hi]kam kar riha hai.[/hi] is a present continuous verb phrase, meaning "is working."

[hi]ਕੰਮ [hi]kam[/hi] means "work."

[hi]ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ। [hi]kar riha hai.[/hi] means "is doing."

[hi]ਹੈ [hi]hai[/hi] is a verb, a form of "to be" and is used to show that something exists or is in a particular state.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ [hi]riha[/hi] indicates the continuous aspect of the verb.

Remember that the word order in Punjabi is slightly different than English. In the above sentence, the verb "is doing" ([hi]ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ। [hi]kar riha hai.[/hi]) comes before the object "work" ([hi]ਕੰਮ [hi]kam[/hi]).

This sentence demonstrates that the continuous aspect of verbs in Punjabi is similar to how it is used in English, by adding [hi]ਰਿਹਾ [hi]riha[/hi] to the verb. This is a great example of how English and Punjabi verbs work in a similar way.

The next word is yet. English: He hasn't arrived yet.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅਜੇ ਨਹੀਂ ਆਇਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (pronoun, subject)

[hi]ਅਜੇ[/hi] - Yet (adverb, indicating a point in time, emphasizes that something hasn't happened yet)

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - Not (adverb, negates the action)

[hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] - Arrived (past tense verb, indicates the action of arriving)

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses a specific word for "yet" - [hi]ਅਜੇ[/hi] - to emphasize that something hasn't happened up to a particular point in time.

Punjabi sentence structure often follows a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) pattern, similar to English.

English: He hasn't arrived yet.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅਜੇ ਨਹੀਂ ਆਇਆ[/hi].

The next word is image. English: The image is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]tasveera[/hi] [hi]sunder[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]tasveera[/hi] (feminine singular noun) = image

[hi]sunder[/hi] (adjective) = beautiful

[hi]hai[/hi] (verb) = is

This sentence is in the present tense, meaning it is a statement about something that is currently happening. The word [hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb "to be" (in this case, "is"). The subject of the sentence is [hi]tasveera[/hi]. The word order in Punjabi is typically Subject-Object-Verb.

Key concepts:

Gender is an important grammatical concept in Punjabi, and it affects the choice of words and their endings. Nouns and adjectives have grammatical gender (masculine, feminine, or neuter). The adjective [hi]sunder[/hi] is an adjective that is used for feminine nouns (like [hi]tasveera[/hi] which is feminine).

This sentence also illustrates the concept of subject-verb agreement. In Punjabi, verbs change to agree with the subject in gender and number (singular or plural). Since the subject ([hi]tasveera[/hi]) is singular and feminine, the verb [hi]hai[/hi] is also singular feminine.

English: The image is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]tasveera[/hi] [hi]sunder[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

The next word is owner. English: The owner of the house is very kind.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਦਾ ਮਾਲਕ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] [ghar] - house (this is a common noun)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [da] - possessive marker (means "of" or "belonging to" and is used with a noun before it)

[hi]ਮਾਲਕ[/hi] [maalak] - owner (this is a noun)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] [bahut] - very (this is an intensifier)

[hi]ਦਿਆਲੂ[/hi] [dayaloo] - kind (this is an adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hai] - is (this is the verb "to be" in the present tense)

Key Concepts

Possessive marker: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is used to show possession (who owns something)

Word order: Punjabi is a subject-verb-object (SVO) language, which means the subject (owner) comes before the verb (is) and then the object (kind).

English Translation: The owner of the house is very kind.

Punjabi Translation: [hi]ਘਰ ਦਾ ਮਾਲਕ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is suspect. English: The police suspect that he is the thief.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ ਸ਼ੱਕ ਕਰਦੀ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਚੋਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ[/hi] - police (feminine noun)

[hi]ਸ਼ੱਕ[/hi] - suspect (verb)

[hi]ਕਰਦੀ[/hi] - does (third person singular feminine form of verb 'ਕਰਨਾ', to do)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (third person singular present tense of verb 'ਹੋਣਾ', to be)

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - that

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - he

[hi]ਚੋਰ[/hi] - thief (masculine noun)

Key Concepts:

The use of the feminine form of the verb "ਕਰਦੀ" because the noun "ਪੁਲਿਸ" is feminine.

The use of the present tense of the verb "ਹੋਣਾ" to express a state of being.

The word "ਕਿ" introduces a subordinate clause.

English: The police suspect that he is the thief.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ ਸ਼ੱਕ ਕਰਦੀ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਚੋਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is degree. English: He earned a degree in engineering.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰਿੰਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਡਿਗਰੀ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He/She/It (masculine, singular, third person pronoun) + [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - past tense marker for the subject.

[hi]ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰਿੰਗ[/hi] - Engineering.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - In

[hi]ਡਿਗਰੀ[/hi] - Degree

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ[/hi] - obtained, achieved, acquired.

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - past tense of the verb "to do" (here, it indicates the completion of the action).

This sentence uses the past tense, indicating that the person already earned their degree. The word [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is crucial for forming the past tense in Punjabi, and it is usually used with masculine subjects. [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is used to indicate "in" or "within" a field of study.

Remember that in Punjabi, the order of words is flexible. You could also say: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਡਿਗਰੀ ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰਿੰਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

English: He earned a degree in engineering.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰਿੰਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਡਿਗਰੀ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is beach. English: We went to the beach yesterday.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਸਮੁੰਦਰ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਗਏ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] [hi]asīṁ[/hi] - We (plural subject)

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] [hi]kaḷḷh[/hi] - yesterday (time adverb)

[hi]ਸਮੁੰਦਰ[/hi] [hi]samundar[/hi] - sea/ocean

[hi]ਕਿਨਾਰੇ[/hi] [hi]kinārē[/hi] - shore, beach, edge

[hi]ਗਏ[/hi] [hi]gae[/hi] - went (past tense of [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] [hi]jāṇā[/hi] - to go)

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] [hi]sī[/hi] - were (past tense of [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] [hi]hoṇā[/hi] - to be)

Key Concept: Punjabi uses postpositions (like [hi]ਕਿਨਾਰੇ[/hi] [hi]kinārē[/hi]) instead of prepositions (like "on" or "to" in English) to show the relationship between a noun and another word in a sentence.

Translation: We went to the beach yesterday.

The next word is appeal. English: The court's decision can be appealed.

Punjabi: [hi]adar‍t‍ da faisla appeal kiya jaa sakda hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]adar‍t‍[/hi] (court) is the subject of the sentence, which is a noun in the singular form.

[hi]da[/hi] (of, belonging to) is a possessive particle connecting the court to the decision.

[hi]faisla[/hi] (decision) is the noun object of the verb, also singular.

[hi]appeal[/hi] (appeal) is the verb in the passive voice, indicating that the decision can be appealed.

[hi]kiya[/hi] (done, can be done) is the past participle of the verb, used to form the passive voice.

[hi]jaa[/hi] (go) is the infinitive of the verb "to go," used here in the future tense.

[hi]sakda[/hi] (can, able to) is a modal verb indicating possibility.

[hi]hai[/hi] (is) is the present tense of the verb "to be," serving as a linking verb.

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: [hi]da[/hi] is used to show possession, similar to "of" in English.

Passive Voice: The verb "appeal" is in the passive voice, indicating that the decision is the object of the action.

Modal Verb: The modal verb [hi]sakda[/hi] is used to express possibility.

English: The court's decision can be appealed.

Punjabi: [hi]adar‍t‍ da faisla appeal kiya jaa sakda hai[/hi].

The next word is economy. English: The economy of India is growing rapidly.

Punjabi: [hi]Bharat di arthvyavastha tez gati naal vadh rahi hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Bharat[/hi] - This is the word for India. It is a proper noun and is used to refer to the country.

[hi]di[/hi] - This is the possessive particle in Punjabi, meaning "of".

[hi]arthvyavastha[/hi] - This word means "economy". It is a noun.

[hi]tez[/hi] - This means "fast" or "rapid". It is an adjective.

[hi]gati[/hi] - This means "speed" or "pace". It is a noun.

[hi]naal[/hi] - This is a preposition that means "with" or "by".

[hi]vadh[/hi] - This means "increase" or "grow". It is a verb.

[hi]rahi[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense marker. It means "is/are" + verb + "ing".

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the auxiliary verb "is" in Punjabi. It indicates the present tense.

Key Concepts:

Possessive particle: [hi]di[/hi] indicates that the economy belongs to India.

Adjective and noun: [hi]tez gati[/hi] describes the speed of the economic growth.

Present continuous tense: The sentence uses the present continuous tense to indicate that the economy is currently growing rapidly.

English: The economy of India is growing rapidly.

Punjabi: [hi]Bharat di arthvyavastha tez gati naal vadh rahi hai.[/hi]

The next word is extra. English: He has an extra book.

Punjabi: [hi]Usde kol ek [hi]zāyatī[/hi] kitaab hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Usde[/hi] - This is the possessive form of the third-person singular pronoun "he", meaning "his".

[hi]kol[/hi] - This means "with" or "near".

[hi]ek[/hi] - This means "one" or "a".

[hi]zāyatī[/hi] - This is an adjective meaning "extra" or "additional".

[hi]kitaab[/hi] - This is a noun meaning "book".

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in the third-person singular.

Translation: He has an extra book.

The next word is send. English: He sent a letter to his friend.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਚਿੱਠੀ ਭੇਜੀ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine past tense pronoun "he" (or "she" in some contexts).

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun "his" (or "her" in some contexts), indicating possession of the [hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] "friend".

[hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] - This is the word for "friend".

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the preposition "to".

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the indefinite article "a" or "an".

[hi]ਚਿੱਠੀ[/hi] - This is the word for "letter".

[hi]ਭੇਜੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to send".

The sentence is in the past tense and describes a completed action. The verb is conjugated to agree with the third person singular masculine subject.

Key concept: The Punjabi language uses postpositions instead of prepositions, so "to" is expressed as [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] and comes after the noun it modifies.

English: He sent a letter to his friend.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਚਿੱਠੀ ਭੇਜੀ[/hi].

The next word is worker. English: The worker is working hard.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਮਾ [hi] [hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ [hi] [hi]ਕਰ [hi] [hi]ਰਿਹਾ [hi] ਹੈ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਾਮਾ [hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "worker." Note the ending [hi]a[hi] at the end of the word which marks it as masculine.

[hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ [hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "hard work." It is a noun. You can memorize this by thinking of the English word "minute," and that "minute" is an "i" before the "t" which is also in the word [hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ [hi]

[hi]ਕਰ [hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "doing" or "working." It is the verb in this sentence. You can memorize this by remembering the "k" at the beginning like the English word "key," and the "r" at the end like the English word "roar."

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ [hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." This is the present continuous verb. This word is difficult as it is not the "is" that you might be used to in English. Think of the "r" at the beginning as rhyming with "run."

[hi]ਹੈ [hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." This word is a simple verb. It is the final verb in this sentence.

English: The worker is working hard.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਮਾ [hi] [hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ [hi] [hi]ਕਰ [hi] [hi]ਰਿਹਾ [hi] ਹੈ।

The next word is institution. English: The university is a renowned institution of higher learning.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਵਵਿਦਿਆਲਿਆ ਉੱਚ ਸਿੱਖਿਆ ਦਾ ਇੱਕ ਪ੍ਰਸਿੱਧ ਸੰਸਥਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਵਵਿਦਿਆਲਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]vishvavidyalaya[/hi] - university

[hi]ਉੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]ucc[/hi] - higher

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]sikkhya[/hi] - education, learning

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a/an

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਸਿੱਧ[/hi] - [hi]prasiddha[/hi] - renowned, famous

[hi]ਸੰਸਥਾ[/hi] - [hi]sanstha[/hi] - institution

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense)

Key Concepts:

This sentence uses a common Punjabi grammatical structure: subject + verb + object.

It also demonstrates the use of possessive markers ([hi]ਦਾ[/hi]) and articles ([hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi]).

This sentence uses the present tense verb "is" which is [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] in Punjabi.

English: The university is a renowned institution of higher learning.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਵਵਿਦਿਆਲਿਆ ਉੱਚ ਸਿੱਖਿਆ ਦਾ ਇੱਕ ਪ੍ਰਸਿੱਧ ਸੰਸਥਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is pretty. English: The flower is very pretty.

Punjabi: [hi]ਫੁੱਲ ਬਹੁਤ ਸੋਹਣਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਫੁੱਲ[/hi] - [hi]phull[/hi] - flower (masculine noun)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very (adverb)

[hi]ਸੋਹਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]sohna[/hi] - pretty (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense verb)

Key Concepts:

The adjective [hi]ਸੋਹਣਾ[/hi] ([hi]sohna[/hi]) agrees in gender with the noun [hi]ਫੁੱਲ[/hi] ([hi]phull[/hi]), which is masculine.

The word order is Subject-Adverb-Adjective-Verb (S-Adv-Adj-V).

English: The flower is very pretty.

Punjabi: [hi]ਫੁੱਲ ਬਹੁਤ ਸੋਹਣਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

The next word is nature. English: The beauty of nature is breathtaking.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੁਦਰਤ ਦੀ ਸੁੰਦਰਤਾ ਦਿਲ ਨੂੰ ਮੋਹ ਲੈਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੁਦਰਤ[/hi] [hi]kudrat[/hi] - Nature

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] [hi]di[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰਤਾ[/hi] [hi]sundarta[/hi] - Beauty

[hi]ਦਿਲ[/hi] [hi]dil[/hi] - Heart

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] [hi]nu[/hi] - To (indirect object marker)

[hi]ਮੋਹ[/hi] [hi]moh[/hi] - Enchant, captivate

[hi]ਲੈਂਦੀ[/hi] [hi]laindī[/hi] - Takes (present tense, feminine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] - Is (present tense, singular)

Key concepts:

Possessive particle: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] [hi]di[/hi] indicates possession, similar to 'of' in English.

Indirect object marker: [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] [hi]nu[/hi] marks the indirect object, similar to 'to' in English.

Present tense: [hi]ਲੈਂਦੀ[/hi] [hi]laindī[/hi] and [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] denote present tense actions.

Feminine singular: [hi]ਲੈਂਦੀ[/hi] [hi]laindī[/hi] is the feminine singular form of the verb.

The next word is taste. English: The food tastes delicious.

Punjabi: [hi]khaana [hi] [hi]swad[hi] [hi]wala[hi] [hi]hai[hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]khaana[hi] - This is the word for "food" in Punjabi.

[hi]swad[hi] - This word means "taste".

[hi]wala[hi] - This is a suffix meaning "having" or "possessing". So, [hi]swad[hi] [hi]wala[hi] means "having taste", or delicious.

[hi]hai[hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

This sentence uses the simple present tense and is a simple declarative sentence.

Key Concepts:

Word order: Punjabi is a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) language.

Suffixes: Suffixes are commonly used in Punjabi to modify the meaning of words.

Present tense: The present tense in Punjabi is formed using the verb "to be" ([hi]hai[hi]) followed by the noun or adjective.

English: The food tastes delicious.

Punjabi: [hi]khaana [hi] [hi]swad[hi] [hi]wala[hi] [hi]hai[hi].

The next word is the. English: The book is on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮੇਜ਼ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitab[/hi] (book)

[hi]ਮੇਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]mezz[/hi] (table)

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]'te[/hi] (on)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] (is)

Key Concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is typically Subject-Object-Verb (SOV).

The postposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is used to indicate location.

English: The book is on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮੇਜ਼ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is extent. English: The river's extent is vast.

Punjabi: [hi]Nahr da fasila bahut bada hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Nahr[/hi] - river

[hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]fasila[/hi] - extent, distance

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]bada[/hi] - big, large

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]da[/hi] is a common possessive particle used after a noun to indicate possession or belonging.

[hi]fasila[/hi] is a word that signifies both "distance" and "extent." The context clarifies which meaning is intended.

English: The river's extent is vast.

Punjabi: [hi]Nahr da fasila bahut bada hai.[/hi]

The next word is swim. English: He swims in the river.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਨਦੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਤੈਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he". It is a pronoun and the subject of the sentence. Remember: the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] is used for both he and she in Punjabi.

[hi]ਨਦੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "river". It is a noun. Remember: [hi]ਨਦੀ[/hi] (river) is feminine in Punjabi and [hi]ਨਦੀ[/hi] will take the feminine marker [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (in)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "in". This is a postposition in Punjabi. It's used to show location. Remember: [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] follows the noun that it modifies.

[hi]ਤੈਰਦਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "swims". It is a verb and the predicate of the sentence. It is in the present tense. Remember: in Punjabi verbs conjugate, the ending changes to reflect the person and tense of the verb.

English: He swims in the river.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਨਦੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਤੈਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is historical. English: This historical event is very famous.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh itihaasik ghatna bahut mashhoor hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]itihaasik[/hi] - historical

[hi]ghatna[/hi] - event

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]mashhoor[/hi] - famous

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]itihaasik[/hi] is an adjective that describes the event as being related to history.

[hi]ghatna[/hi] is a common noun that refers to any significant occurrence.

[hi]mashhoor[/hi] is a common adjective used to describe something that is well-known or popular.

Memorization Tip: The word [hi]itihaasik[/hi] sounds similar to the English word "historic." You can also remember that [hi]ghatna[/hi] is similar to the English word "event."

The next word is wood. English: The table is made of wood.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਜ ਲੱਕੜੀ ਦੀ ਬਣੀ ਹੋਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਜ[/hi] - [hi]mej[/hi] (table) - This is the subject of the sentence. It is a noun.

[hi]ਲੱਕੜੀ[/hi] - [hi]lakkadi[/hi] (wood) - This is the material the table is made of. It is a noun.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] (of) - This is a possessive particle that shows ownership. It indicates that the table belongs to or is made from wood.

[hi]ਬਣੀ[/hi] - [hi]bani[/hi] (made) - This is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਬਣਨਾ[/hi] (to be made) and indicates that the table was constructed.

[hi]ਹੋਈ[/hi] - [hi]hoi[/hi] (is) - This is a form of the verb "to be" and is used to connect the subject with the past participle.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - This is a sentence ending particle indicating that the sentence is in the present tense.

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (di) is a key concept in Punjabi, indicating ownership or belonging.

Past Participle: [hi]ਬਣੀ[/hi] (bani) is used to describe a state or action that has already occurred.

Sentence Ending Particle: [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai) marks the end of the sentence.

English: The table is made of wood.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਜ ਲੱਕੜੀ ਦੀ ਬਣੀ ਹੋਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is indicate. English: She indicated that she was going to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਇਸ਼ਾਰਾ ਕੀਤਾ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is the feminine singular form of the third person pronoun "he/she/it" in the past tense. It means "she" and is used for actions that have already happened.

[hi]ਇਸ਼ਾਰਾ[/hi] - This is the noun "indication" or "gesture." It is used to signify that someone is communicating something nonverbally.

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do." The past tense is often used to show an action has been completed.

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - This is the conjunction "that" used to introduce a clause.

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the feminine singular form of the third person pronoun "he/she/it." It means "she" and is used for actions that have already happened.

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This is the noun "market."

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to go."

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to be." It indicates an action is happening now.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be." It means "is" and is used to describe the state of being.

Key Concepts:

Past Tense

Present Continuous Tense

Conjunctions

Pronoun forms

English: She indicated that she was going to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਇਸ਼ਾਰਾ ਕੀਤਾ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is industry. English: The industry is thriving in Punjab.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ ਵਿੱਚ ਉਦਯੋਗ ਫੁੱਲ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ[/hi] - This is the word for Punjab, the state in India. It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is a preposition that means 'in'. It connects the state of Punjab to the next part of the sentence.

[hi]ਉਦਯੋਗ[/hi] - This word means 'industry'. It is the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਫੁੱਲ[/hi] - This word means 'to flourish', 'to thrive' - it is the verb and the action of the sentence.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb 'to be' in Punjabi. It is used to show that the action is ongoing.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for 'is' which is used to show that the statement is in the present tense. It is the auxiliary verb in this sentence, indicating the present tense.

Key concepts:

Punjabi word order: The subject comes before the object in Punjabi.

The Punjabi word [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a key preposition that connects the subject and the object.

The present continuous tense is formed by adding [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] to the verb stem in Punjabi.

English: The industry is thriving in Punjab.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ ਵਿੱਚ ਉਦਯੋਗ ਫੁੱਲ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is shock. English: He was shocked to see the accident.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnū dekh ke [hi] [hi]hādsā[/hi] [hi]dekh ke [hi] [hi]lajjā[/hi] [hi]āyi[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usnū[/hi] - This is the object pronoun "him" and signifies the person who was shocked.

[hi]dekh ke [hi] - This is a phrase that means "on seeing" or "upon seeing."

[hi]hādsā[/hi] - This is the noun "accident."

[hi]dekh ke [hi] - This is again the phrase "on seeing" or "upon seeing." This repetition emphasizes the act of seeing the accident.

[hi]lajjā[/hi] - This is the noun "shock."

[hi]āyi[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to come," which in this context means "he was shocked."

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: The use of the postposition [hi]ke [hi] after the verb "to see" ([hi]dekh[/hi]) creates the phrase "on seeing."

Word Order: Punjabi follows a Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) word order, which means the object comes before the verb.

Tense: The verb "[hi]āyi[/hi]" (to come) is used in the past tense, indicating that the shock occurred in the past.

Translation: He was shocked on seeing the accident.

The next word is you. English: You are a student.

Punjabi: [hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ ਇੱਕ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹੋ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ[/hi] = [hi]tusīn[/hi] = you (plural/formal)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] = [hi]ikk[/hi] = one, a

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] = [hi]vidyārthī[/hi] = student

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] = [hi]ho[/hi] = are

This sentence uses the formal form of "you" ([hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ[/hi]) which is used to show respect. It also uses the present tense of the verb "to be" ([hi]ਹੋ[/hi]).

Key Concepts:

Formal vs. Informal: Punjabi has two forms of "you" - formal ([hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ[/hi]) and informal ([hi]ਤੂੰ[/hi]). The formal form is used to show respect to someone older or of higher social status.

Present Tense: The present tense in Punjabi is formed by adding the appropriate ending to the verb stem. In this case, the ending for the present tense of the verb "to be" ([hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi]) is [hi]ਹੋ[/hi].

Translation:

You are a student.

[hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ ਇੱਕ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹੋ।[/hi]

The next word is company. English: The company is successful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੰਪਨੀ ਕਾਮਯਾਬ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੰਪਨੀ[/hi] - [hi]kampani[/hi] (company) is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਕਾਮਯਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kaamyab[/hi] (successful) is an adjective describing the company.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] (is) is the verb, indicating the present tense.

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: The subject ([hi]ਕੰਪਨੀ[/hi]) is singular, so the verb ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi]) is also singular.

Word Order: The word order in Punjabi is similar to English, Subject-Verb-Adjective.

English: The company is successful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੰਪਨੀ ਕਾਮਯਾਬ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is seat. English: Please take a seat.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਬੈਠ ਜਾਓ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਰਪਾ[/hi] = [hi]kirpa[/hi] means "please" or "kindly"

[hi]ਕਰਕੇ[/hi] = [hi]karke[/hi] is a polite imperative particle

[hi]ਬੈਠ[/hi] = [hi]baith[/hi] means "sit"

[hi]ਜਾਓ[/hi] = [hi]jao[/hi] means "go"

The word order in Punjabi sentences can be flexible. Here, the [hi]jao[/hi] word at the end adds emphasis and a sense of politeness. This sentence is a polite command, requesting someone to sit down.

English: Please take a seat.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਬੈਠ ਜਾਓ[/hi]

The next word is approach. English: He approached the door cautiously.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਵੱਲ ਸਾਵਧਾਨੀ ਨਾਲ ਵਧਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]uhne[/hi] - He (masculine singular, subject pronoun)

[hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ[/hi] - [hi]darvaaje[/hi] - door (masculine singular)

[hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] - [hi]vall[/hi] - towards (postposition)

[hi]ਸਾਵਧਾਨੀ[/hi] - [hi]savdhaani[/hi] - caution (feminine singular)

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]naal[/hi] - with (postposition)

[hi]ਵਧਿਆ।[/hi] - [hi]vadhya.[/hi] - approached, moved (verb, past tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions like [hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] ([hi]vall[/hi]) instead of prepositions like "to" or "towards" in English.

Gender Agreement: Punjabi has grammatical gender for nouns and adjectives, requiring agreement between the subject and verb.

Word Order: Punjabi sentence structure is typically subject-object-verb (SOV) whereas English is subject-verb-object (SVO).

English: He approached the door cautiously.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਵੱਲ ਸਾਵਧਾਨੀ ਨਾਲ ਵਧਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is freedom. English: Freedom is essential for everyone.

Punjabi: [hi]Aazaadi sabh nu zaruri hai[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Aazaadi[/hi] - freedom

[hi]sabh[/hi] - everyone

[hi]nu[/hi] - to

[hi]zaruri[/hi] - essential

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concept: This sentence uses the postposition [hi]nu[/hi] to indicate that the freedom is for someone.

English: Freedom is essential for everyone.

Punjabi: [hi]Aazaadi sabh nu zaruri hai[/hi]

The next word is strike. English: The workers went on strike.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਮੇ ਹੜਤਾਲ ਤੇ ਚਲੇ ਗਏ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਾਮੇ[/hi] - [hi]kaame[/hi] - workers (plural) - This word is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਹੜਤਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]haṛṭāl[/hi] - strike - This word is the object of the sentence. It describes the action that the workers took.

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]te[/hi] - on - This preposition connects the workers to the strike.

[hi]ਚਲੇ[/hi] - [hi]cale[/hi] - went - This verb indicates the action of the workers.

[hi]ਗਏ[/hi] - [hi]gae[/hi] - gone - This verb completes the action of the workers going on strike.

Key Concepts:

Subject-verb agreement: The subject ([hi]ਕਾਮੇ[/hi]) is plural, so the verb ([hi]ਚਲੇ ਗਏ[/hi]) is also plural.

Prepositions: [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] (on) is used to indicate the location of the strike.

Direct object: The workers went "on strike," making [hi]ਹੜਤਾਲ[/hi] the direct object.

English: The workers went on strike.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਮੇ ਹੜਤਾਲ ਤੇ ਚਲੇ ਗਏ।[/hi]

The next word is nurse. English: The nurse is taking care of the patient.

Punjabi: [hi]ਨਰਸ ਮਰੀਜ਼ ਦੀ ਦੇਖਭਾਲ ਕਰ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਨਰਸ[/hi] - [hi]nars[/hi] - means "nurse" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਮਰੀਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]mriːz[/hi] - means "patient" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]diː[/hi] - means "of the" or "the" and is a possessive marker. It indicates that the patient belongs to someone or something.

[hi]ਦੇਖਭਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]deːkbhaːl[/hi] - means "care" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - [hi]kar[/hi] - means "to do" or "to make."

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]raːhiː[/hi] - means "is" and is a present continuous tense marker. It indicates that the action is ongoing. The final [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is left off as it is understood in the context of the sentence.

Key Concepts:

Possessive markers: The possessive marker [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to show possession.

Present continuous tense: The present continuous tense is formed using the verb [hi]ਕਰ[/hi] followed by the present participle of the main verb, in this case, [hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi].

Word order: In Punjabi, the word order is generally subject-verb-object.

The next word is it. English: It is hot today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj garmi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "today." It is a common word and easy to remember.

[hi]garmi[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "heat" or "hotness." It is a common word and easy to remember.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." This is a common word, often used as a helping verb in Punjabi.

This sentence uses a very common structure in Punjabi: Subject + Verb + Object. In this case, the subject is [hi]garmi[/hi] ("heat"), the verb is [hi]hai[/hi] ("is") and the object is [hi]Ajj[/hi] ("today").

This is a great example of a simple Punjabi sentence that can be used in everyday conversation. It is also a good example of how the Punjabi language is structured and how words are combined to form sentences.

The next word is nobody. English: Nobody is here.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੋਈ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੋਈ[/hi] = "koi" - means "anyone" or "someone" in Punjabi, but it is used to mean "nobody" in this context, as it is negated by [hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] ("naheen") meaning "not."

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] = "naheen" - means "not" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] = "hai" - means "is" or "are" in Punjabi, used here in the present tense.

This is a common Punjabi sentence structure where a negative word [hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] negates the existence of a noun or pronoun, in this case, [hi]ਕੋਈ[/hi]

Translation: Nobody is here.

The next word is pain. English: The pain is unbearable.

Punjabi: [hi]Dard sah ni ho riha[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Dard[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "pain."

[hi]sah[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "bear" or "endure."

[hi]ni[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "not."

[hi]ho[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is" or "being."

[hi]riha[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "being" or "existing." The verb is conjugated to indicate present continuous tense.

The sentence [hi]Dard sah ni ho riha[/hi] translates to "The pain is unbearable." The word order is slightly different from English, but the meaning is the same.

The next word is hear. English: I can hear the birds singing.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਪੰਛੀਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਗਾਉਂਦੇ ਸੁਣ ਸਕਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - [hi]main[/hi] - I, me

[hi]ਪੰਛੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]panchhiyan[/hi] - birds (plural)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - (object marker) - to, for

[hi]ਗਾਉਂਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]gaun-de[/hi] - singing (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਸੁਣ[/hi] - [hi]sun[/hi] - hear

[hi]ਸਕਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]sakda[/hi] - can, able to

[hi]ਹਾਂ।[/hi] - [hi]haan.[/hi] - (affirmative) yes

Key Concepts:

Object Marker: The word [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] ([hi]nu[/hi]) is used to mark the object of the verb. In this sentence, the birds are the object of the verb "hear."

Present Continuous Tense: The verb "singing" is in the present continuous tense, which is formed by adding the suffix [hi]-de[/hi] to the verb stem [hi]ਗਾਉਂ[/hi] ([hi]gaun[/hi]).

Auxiliary Verb: [hi]ਸਕਦਾ[/hi] ([hi]sakda[/hi]) is an auxiliary verb that indicates ability. It is used with the main verb [hi]ਸੁਣ[/hi] ([hi]sun[/hi]) to express the ability to hear.

English: I can hear the birds singing.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਪੰਛੀਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਗਾਉਂਦੇ ਸੁਣ ਸਕਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is even. English: Even he is not able to do this.

Punjabi: [hi]ਓਹ ਵੀ ਇਹ ਨਹੀਂ ਕਰ ਸਕਦਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਓਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he".

[hi]ਵੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "also" or "even".

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "this".

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "not".

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - This is the verb "to do" in the present tense.

[hi]ਸਕਦਾ[/hi] - This is the suffix that makes the verb "to do" into "can do" or "is able to do".

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਵੀ[/hi] is a very important word in Punjabi that can be used to indicate "also" or "even". It is often used in conjunction with other words to emphasize a particular point.

The suffix [hi]ਸਕਦਾ[/hi] is used to make verbs into the "can do" or "is able to do" form.

English: Even he is not able to do this.

Punjabi: [hi]ਓਹ ਵੀ ਇਹ ਨਹੀਂ ਕਰ ਸਕਦਾ।[/hi]

The next word is hand. English: He gave me his hand.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਆਪਣਾ ਹੱਥ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine past tense of the verb [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] (to give). It means "he gave".

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] (I). It means "to me". It is used here because the verb [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] is a transitive verb, which means it requires a direct object (in this case, the hand), and an indirect object (to whom). It is important to remember that the dative case in Punjabi is not marked with a preposition like "to" in English.

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun "his". It is used here because the hand belongs to the person who is giving it.

[hi]ਹੱਥ[/hi] - This is the noun "hand".

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] (to give). It means "gave". The final [hi]।[/hi] is the end of sentence marker.

Key Concepts:

Dative Case: The dative case is used to show the indirect object of a verb. In Punjabi, the dative case is not marked with a preposition.

Possessive Pronouns: Possessive pronouns indicate ownership.

Transitive Verbs: Transitive verbs require a direct object and an indirect object.

Translation:

English: He gave me his hand.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਆਪਣਾ ਹੱਥ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is daughter. English: She is my daughter.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਰੀ ਧੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - she/he/it. It is the singular form of the third person pronoun, functioning as the subject of the sentence. This is very similar to the English "she/he/it."

[hi]ਮੇਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]meri[/hi] - my. This is a possessive adjective that modifies the noun [hi]ਧੀ[/hi]. Remember this as the possessive form of "me" is "meri" in Punjabi. It is important to note that Punjabi does not distinguish between "my" and "mine".

[hi]ਧੀ[/hi] - [hi]dhi[/hi] - daughter. This is the noun in the sentence, and it is the object of the possessive adjective "meri". Think of this as the "daughter" that is "mine".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is. This is the present tense form of the verb "to be," indicating that the daughter is "my" daughter.

This sentence demonstrates a simple subject-verb-object structure. This sentence is also in the present tense, using the verb "hai" for "is" in the sentence. It's good to remember that in Punjabi, the verb comes at the end of the sentence.

Translation: She is my daughter.

The next word is fire. English: The fire is burning brightly.

Punjabi: [hi]Aag shaan naal jaldi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Aag[/hi] - fire

[hi]shaan[/hi] - brightly, with splendor

[hi]naal[/hi] - with

[hi]jaldi[/hi] - burning

Key concepts:

[hi]naal[/hi] is a common preposition meaning "with" or "by."

[hi]jaldi[/hi] is a verb meaning "to burn."

Translation: The fire is burning brightly.

The next word is cut. English: He cut the bread with a knife.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਚਾਕੂ ਨਾਲ ਰੋਟੀ ਕੱਟੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun, meaning "he." It is used as the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਚਾਕੂ ਨਾਲ[/hi] - This phrase means "with a knife," The word [hi]ਚਾਕੂ[/hi] means "knife." [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] is a postposition, similar to "with" in English, and is used to indicate the instrument or means of action.

[hi]ਰੋਟੀ[/hi] - This is the word for "bread."

[hi]ਕੱਟੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਕੱਟਣਾ[/hi], which means "to cut." It is in the feminine singular form to agree with the subject "bread".

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: Punjabi verbs and adjectives agree in gender and number with their nouns. Notice how the verb [hi]ਕੱਟੀ[/hi] is in the feminine singular form to agree with the noun [hi]ਰੋਟੀ[/hi] ("bread").

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions like "with" or "in" to indicate location or means.

Translation: He cut the bread with a knife.

The next word is appropriate. English: This dress is appropriate for the occasion.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਕਪੜਾ ਮੌਕੇ ਲਈ ਢੁਕਵਾਂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun, singular)

[hi]ਕਪੜਾ[/hi] - Dress (masculine noun)

[hi]ਮੌਕੇ[/hi] - Occasion (masculine noun, in the dative case, indicating the purpose of the dress)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - For (postposition, indicating purpose)

[hi]ਢੁਕਵਾਂ[/hi] - Appropriate (adjective, agreeing with the masculine singular noun [hi]ਕਪੜਾ[/hi])

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (present tense verb, singular, agreeing with the masculine singular noun [hi]ਕਪੜਾ[/hi])

Key Concepts:

Gender and Number Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives and verbs agree in gender and number with the noun they modify.

Dative Case: The dative case is used to indicate the recipient of an action or the purpose of something. The postposition [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] often marks the dative case.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. Postpositions come after the noun they modify.

Translation: This dress is appropriate for the occasion.

The next word is after. English: He came after the rain stopped.

Punjabi: [hi]Us varsha rukne ton bad aya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (masculine pronoun)

[hi]varsha[/hi] - rain

[hi]rukne[/hi] - stopping (verb in the past tense)

[hi]ton[/hi] - from

[hi]bad[/hi] - after

[hi]aya[/hi] - came

Key concepts:

The post-position [hi]ton[/hi] (from) is used to show the starting point of an action.

[hi]Bad[/hi] is used to indicate something happening after something else.

This sentence uses the simple past tense in Punjabi.

English: He came after the rain stopped.

Punjabi: [hi]Us varsha rukne ton bad aya[/hi].

The next word is previous. English: He went to the previous place.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਿਛਲੀ ਥਾਂ ਤੇ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he" or "she" (the pronoun "he" is used in this sentence because the previous sentence likely set up the context, but this can be changed to [hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] if the context calls for "she")

[hi]ਪਿਛਲੀ[/hi] - This word means "previous" or "last" and it is in the feminine form since it modifies the word [hi]ਥਾਂ[/hi] which is feminine in Punjabi.

[hi]ਥਾਂ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "place" or "spot".

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi equivalent of the English word "to" and it is often used when indicating direction.

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to go".

This sentence literally translates as "He to the previous place went." This is an example of a common sentence structure in Punjabi where the verb is placed at the end of the sentence.

Key concept: Remember that Punjabi has different grammatical gender for nouns and adjectives must agree in gender with the noun they modify.

The next word is text. English: The text is long.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲਿਖਤ ਲੰਮੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲਿਖਤ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "text", it is a feminine noun.

[hi]ਲੰਮੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "long", it is a feminine adjective.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is", it is the third-person singular present tense of the verb "to be".

This is a simple sentence in Punjabi. The subject, the text, is [hi]ਲਿਖਤ[/hi] which is feminine so the adjective [hi]ਲੰਮੀ[/hi] agrees in gender. The verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] agrees with the subject in gender and number.

The next word is tool. English: He is a tool.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਔਜ਼ਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - A/An (indefinite article)

[hi]ਔਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]auzaar[/hi] - Tool

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - Is (present tense, third person singular, verb "to be")

This sentence is grammatically simple.

In Punjabi, the word order is generally Subject-Verb-Object. So the sentence literally translates to:

He a tool is.

The [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] verb conjugates based on the subject's gender, and this conjugation can change the ending of the word. The word order of the sentence can change depending on what you want to emphasize.

English: He is a tool.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਔਜ਼ਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is raise. English: The farmer will raise his crops.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਸਾਨ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਫ਼ਸਲਾਂ ਉਗਾਵੇਗਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਸਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]kisan[/hi] - farmer - this is the subject of the sentence

[hi]ਆਪਣੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]aapniyan[/hi] - his - possessive pronoun, this is connected to the object of the verb

[hi]ਫ਼ਸਲਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]faslan[/hi] - crops - the direct object of the verb

[hi]ਉਗਾਵੇਗਾ[/hi] - [hi]ugaavega[/hi] - will raise, will grow - the future tense of the verb

[hi]।[/hi] - this is the end of sentence punctuation

This sentence uses the future tense in Punjabi to indicate an action that will occur in the future. You can see that the verb conjugation in Punjabi changes based on the tense you are using. In this case, the future tense is marked by the ending [hi]ੇਗਾ[/hi] which is added to the verb stem [hi]ਉਗਾ[/hi].

English: The farmer will raise his crops.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਸਾਨ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਫ਼ਸਲਾਂ ਉਗਾਵੇਗਾ।[/hi]

The next word is structure. English: The building's structure is very strong.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ ਦੀ ਸੰਰਚਨਾ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi]: [hi]imarát[/hi] - building

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi]: [hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਸੰਰਚਨਾ[/hi]: [hi]sanrachnā[/hi] - structure

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi]: [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ[/hi]: [hi]mazbūt[/hi] - strong

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: [hi]hai.[/hi] - is (present tense, singular)

Key concepts:

Possessive particle: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to indicate possession, similar to "of" in English.

Word order: Punjabi follows a Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) word order.

This sentence highlights the use of the possessive particle [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] to connect the noun [hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi] (building) with the noun [hi]ਸੰਰਚਨਾ[/hi] (structure). The verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is at the end of the sentence, which is typical of Punjabi grammar.

The next word is chair. English: He sat on the chair.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੁਰਸੀ 'ਤੇ ਬੈਠਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਕੁਰਸੀ[/hi] - chair (noun)

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - on (postposition)

[hi]ਬੈਠਾ[/hi] - sat (verb, past tense, masculine singular)

Key concepts:

Postpositions in Punjabi are similar to prepositions in English. They show the relationship between a noun and another word in the sentence.

The verb [hi]ਬੈਠਾ[/hi] is conjugated to agree with the masculine singular subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi].

English: He sat on the chair.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੁਰਸੀ 'ਤੇ ਬੈਠਾ।[/hi]

The next word is nothing. English: There is nothing here.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇੱਥੇ ਕੁਝ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇੱਥੇ[/hi] - [hi]itthe[/hi] - This is a demonstrative pronoun meaning "here".

[hi]ਕੁਝ[/hi] - [hi]kuj[/hi] - This means "something" or "anything".

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]nahin[/hi] - This is the negative particle "not".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense verb meaning "is" or "exists". It is used with the subject "it" or "there", which is implicit in this sentence.

This sentence literally translates as "Here, nothing is."

The sentence highlights the following key concepts:

Demonstrative Pronoun - [hi]ਇੱਥੇ[/hi] - This is a word that points to a specific location or thing, in this case, "here."

Negative Particle - [hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - This word is used to make a sentence negative.

Present Tense Verb - [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is a verb that describes an action or state happening now.

Implicit Subject - The subject of the verb "is" is implied to be "there". It is not explicitly mentioned but understood.

The next word is pleasure. English: It gives me pleasure to meet you.

Punjabi: [hi]Tuhānu mel ke mainu khushi hoi[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Tuhānu[/hi] = you (formal)

[hi]mel[/hi] = to meet

[hi]ke[/hi] = that

[hi]mainu[/hi] = me

[hi]khushi[/hi] = pleasure

[hi]hoi[/hi] = was/became

Key concept:

The word [hi]khushi[/hi] refers to an internal feeling of happiness or joy.

English: It gives me pleasure to meet you.

Punjabi: [hi]Tuhānu mel ke mainu khushi hoi[/hi].

The next word is lead. English: The leader leads the people.

Punjabi: [hi]ਨੇਤਾ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਦੀ ਅਗਵਾਈ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਨੇਤਾ[/hi] - leader

[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] - people

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਅਗਵਾਈ[/hi] - leadership

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - leads (present tense, masculine singular)

This sentence demonstrates the use of the possessive marker [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] which is often used to indicate belonging or possession. The verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] is in the present tense and is used for masculine singular subjects.

The next word is lift. English: The weightlifter lifted the heavy barbell.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਜ਼ਨ ਚੁੱਕਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਨੇ ਭਾਰੀ ਬਾਰਬੈਲ ਚੁੱਕਿਆ[/hi] [hi]vazan chukkan walay ne bhaari barbell chukkia[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਜ਼ਨ ਚੁੱਕਣ ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] [hi]vazan chukkan walay[/hi]: This is a compound noun meaning "weightlifter". It's a combination of "[hi]ਵਜ਼ਨ[/hi]" [hi]vazan[/hi] (weight) and "[hi]ਚੁੱਕਣ[/hi]" [hi]chukkan[/hi] (lifting) and "[hi]ਵਾਲੇ[/hi]" [hi]walay[/hi] (the one who does).

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]ne[/hi]: This is the post-position that denotes the subject of a verb in Punjabi.

[hi]ਭਾਰੀ[/hi] [hi]bhaari[/hi]: This means "heavy" and is an adjective modifying the noun "[hi]ਬਾਰਬੈਲ[/hi]" [hi]barbell[/hi].

[hi]ਬਾਰਬੈਲ[/hi] [hi]barbell[/hi]: This is a borrowed word directly from English.

[hi]ਚੁੱਕਿਆ[/hi] [hi]chukkia[/hi]: This is the past tense of the verb "[hi]ਚੁੱਕਣਾ[/hi]" [hi]chukkana[/hi] (to lift). The "a" at the end of the verb is added for past tense.

Key concept: This sentence demonstrates the use of a compound noun, the post-position "[hi]ਨੇ[/hi]" [hi]ne[/hi] to mark the subject, and the past tense of the verb "[hi]ਚੁੱਕਣਾ[/hi]" [hi]chukkana[/hi] (to lift). It also shows how English words can be directly borrowed into Punjabi.

The next word is dog. English: The dog is barking.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੁੱਤਾ ਭੌਂਕ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੁੱਤਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "dog".

[hi]ਭੌਂਕ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "bark".

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense marker.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi equivalent of "is".

Key concepts:

This sentence uses the present continuous tense which is formed by using the verb [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] after the verb stem.

English: The dog is barking.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੁੱਤਾ ਭੌਂਕ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is spot. English: He spotted the bird in the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦਰੱਖਤ 'ਤੇ ਪੰਛੀ ਨੂੰ ਦੇਖਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - This is the third-person singular masculine pronoun in the nominative case, meaning "he".

[hi]ਦਰੱਖਤ[/hi] - [hi]darakht[/hi] - This is the word for "tree".

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]'te[/hi] - This is the postposition for "on".

[hi]ਪੰਛੀ[/hi] - [hi]panchhi[/hi] - This is the word for "bird".

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - This is the object marker, indicating the bird is the object of the verb.

[hi]ਦੇਖਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]dekhya[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to see", meaning "saw" or "spotted".

Key Concepts:

This sentence demonstrates the use of the nominative case pronoun ([hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi]) and the object marker ([hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi]).

The postposition ([hi]'ਤੇ[/hi]) is used to indicate location.

Translation: He saw the bird on the tree.

The next word is together. English: We are all together.

Punjabi: [hi]Aasां saare saath hain[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Aasां[/hi] - We (plural, inclusive, meaning including the speaker)

[hi]saare[/hi] - all

[hi]saath[/hi] - together

Key Concepts:

[hi]saath[/hi] is a versatile word that can also mean "with" or "along with."

The sentence uses the plural form of the pronoun to emphasize the collective nature of being together.

The sentence structure is straightforward: subject (we) + verb (are) + adverb (together).

Translation: We are all together.

The next word is play. English: They are playing in the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਾਰਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - they (masculine plural)

[hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] - [hi]paark[/hi] - park

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - [hi]khed[/hi] - play (verb)

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - [hi]rahe[/hi] - are (present continuous tense, masculine plural)

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]han[/hi] - are (present tense, masculine plural)

Key concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have gender. In this case, [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] is masculine.

Plural: The word [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] is plural, which is why we use the plural form of the verb [hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] which is [hi]ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ[/hi].

Tenses: Punjabi verbs conjugate. In this case, the verb [hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] is conjugated in the present continuous tense to show an ongoing action.

English: They are playing in the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਾਰਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is arrange. English: Please arrange the books on the shelf.

Punjabi: ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਸ਼ੈਲਫ਼ 'ਤੇ ਲਗਾ ਦਿਓ। [hi]kirpa karke kitaaban nuu shelf 'te lagaa diyo.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]kirpa[/hi] means "please". It is a polite request.

[hi]karke[/hi] is the polite form of the verb "to do". This word is used to make a request more polite.

[hi]kitaaban[/hi] is the plural form of [hi]kitaab[/hi] which means "book".

[hi]nuu[/hi] means "to" or "on". The [hi]nuu[/hi] is used as a preposition, in the Punjabi sentence it shows the direction of the books to the shelf.

[hi]shelf[/hi] is the English word "shelf" used in Punjabi.

[hi]te[/hi] means "on". This word indicates the location of the books.

[hi]lagaa[/hi] means "to put" or "to arrange". It indicates the action of placing the books on the shelf.

[hi]diyo[/hi] is the polite form of the verb "to give". It is used to make a request more polite.

English: Please arrange the books on the shelf.

Punjabi: ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਸ਼ੈਲਫ਼ 'ਤੇ ਲਗਾ ਦਿਓ। [hi]kirpa karke kitaaban nuu shelf 'te lagaa diyo.[/hi]

The next word is independent. English: He is an independent person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਆਜ਼ਾਦ ਵਿਅਕਤੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "he" or "she". It is a pronoun.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi]: This means "one" or "a". It is a determiner.

[hi]ਆਜ਼ਾਦ[/hi]: This means "independent", and is an adjective.

[hi]ਵਿਅਕਤੀ[/hi]: This means "person". It is a noun.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: This is the Punjabi verb "is" or "to be" in the present tense.

This sentence uses the standard Punjabi word order. Subject (he), Determiner (one), Adjective (independent), Noun (person) and then the verb (is). The punctuation is the same as in English.

English: He is an independent person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਆਜ਼ਾਦ ਵਿਅਕਤੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is sleep. English: He sleeps soundly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਘੱਟਾ ਸੌਂਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਘੱਟਾ[/hi] - Soundly (deeply)

[hi]ਸੌਂਦਾ[/hi] - sleeps (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (present tense, singular)

Important Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, verbs and adjectives agree with the gender of the noun they modify. Here, the verb [hi]ਸੌਂਦਾ[/hi] is in the masculine singular form because [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] refers to a male.

Present Tense: [hi]ਸੌਂਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] is in the present tense, indicating that the action of sleeping is happening now.

Direct Translation: The Punjabi sentence translates directly to "He sleeps soundly," with no need for additional context or explanation.

English: He sleeps soundly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਘੱਟਾ ਸੌਂਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

The next word is define. English: He defined the meaning of the word.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸ਼ਬਦ ਦਾ ਅਰਥ ਪਰਿਭਾਸ਼ਿਤ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਸ਼ਬਦ[/hi] - [hi]shabad[/hi] - word

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of the

[hi]ਅਰਥ[/hi] - [hi]arth[/hi] - meaning

[hi]ਪਰਿਭਾਸ਼ਿਤ[/hi] - [hi]paribhashit[/hi] - defined

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi] - [hi]kita[/hi] - did.

Key Concepts:

The sentence is in the past tense, using the past tense marker [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]kita[/hi].

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] is a possessive particle that translates to "of the".

[hi]ਪਰਿਭਾਸ਼ਿਤ[/hi] - [hi]paribhashit[/hi] is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਪਰਿਭਾਸ਼ਿਤ ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] - [hi]paribhashit karna[/hi], which means "to define".

English: He defined the meaning of the word.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸ਼ਬਦ ਦਾ ਅਰਥ ਪਰਿਭਾਸ਼ਿਤ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is cool. English: It's a cool day today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj da din thanda hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - Today

[hi]da[/hi] - This (possessive particle)

[hi]din[/hi] - Day

[hi]thanda[/hi] - Cool

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is

Key concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb, which is different from English.

The possessive particle [hi]da[/hi] is used to show possession.

[hi]hai[/hi] is a verb that means "is".

English: It's a cool day today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj da din thanda hai.[/hi]

The next word is marry. English: He wants to marry her.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਵਿਆਹ ਕਰਨਾ ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - "He" or "She" (pronounced as "oh" in English). It is a pronoun, used to refer to a person whose gender is clear from the context. It's a very common word and you'll use it a lot!

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] - "Her" (pronounced as "usnu" in English). This is also a pronoun, indicating the person being married to. It is in the accusative case, which means it is the object of the verb.

[hi]ਵਿਆਹ[/hi] - "Marriage" (pronounced as "viyah" in English). This is a noun and is a key word to remember for the concept of marriage.

[hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] - "To do" (pronounced as "karnaa" in English). It is an infinitive verb and, when combined with [hi]ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi], it means "want to." This combination is very important in Punjabi.

[hi]ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - "He wants to" (pronounced as "chaahunda hai" in English). This combination is the present tense of the verb "to want." The ending [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is important and is how you know it's the present tense.

Key Concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is often different than English.

Punjabi has a variety of grammatical cases that indicate the function of a word in a sentence. This is unlike English, but it is important for understanding the grammar.

Many verbs in Punjabi are made up of multiple parts. For example, the phrase [hi]ਕਰਨਾ ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] is a combination of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] "to do" and the verb [hi]ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] "he wants."

English: He wants to marry her.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਵਿਆਹ ਕਰਨਾ ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is acquire. English: He acquired a new car.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਨਵੀਂ ਗੱਡੀ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - he (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a (indefinite article)

[hi]ਨਵੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]naveen[/hi] - new (adjective)

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]gaddi[/hi] - car (noun)

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]praapt keeti[/hi] - acquired (verb, past tense)

Key concepts:

The sentence is in the past tense, indicating that the acquisition of the car happened in the past.

The verb [hi]ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]praapt keeti[/hi] is a compound verb formed by combining the verb [hi]ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ[/hi] - [hi]praapt[/hi] (to acquire) with the past tense marker [hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]keeti[/hi].

English: He acquired a new car.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਨਵੀਂ ਗੱਡੀ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is encourage. English: He encouraged me to study hard.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujhe mehnat naal padhai karne lai praerit kiya[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He, This is the subject of the sentence and is in the third person singular.

[hi]ne[/hi] - has - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]hona[/hi] (to be) and is used to indicate that the action happened in the past.

[hi]mujhe[/hi] - me, This is the object of the verb and is in the first person singular.

[hi]mehnat[/hi] - hard, This is an adverb that describes the manner in which the action was performed.

[hi]naal[/hi] - with, This is a preposition that indicates the means by which the action was performed.

[hi]padhai[/hi] - study, This is the noun that is the object of the verb.

[hi]karne[/hi] - to do, This is the infinitive form of the verb [hi]karna[/hi] (to do).

[hi]lai[/hi] - for, This is a preposition that indicates the purpose of the action.

[hi]praerit[/hi] - encouraged, This is the past participle of the verb [hi]praerit karna[/hi] (to encourage).

[hi]kiya[/hi] - did, This is the past tense of the verb [hi]karna[/hi] (to do).

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses a past tense construction to describe an action that happened in the past.

The sentence also uses an infinitive form of the verb [hi]karna[/hi] (to do) to indicate the purpose of the action.

The sentence uses a prepositional phrase to indicate the means by which the action was performed.

English: He encouraged me to study hard.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujhe mehnat naal padhai karne lai praerit kiya[/hi]

The next word is nor. English: He did not go to school today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅੱਜ ਸਕੂਲ ਨਹੀਂ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he". This is the subject of the sentence, indicating who did not go to school.

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "today". This is a temporal adverb indicating when the action happened.

[hi]ਸਕੂਲ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "school". It is the object of the preposition [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] which means "to".

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "not". This is a negative particle which negates the verb.

[hi]ਗਿਆ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "went". This is the past tense of the verb indicating the action that happened.

This sentence uses a negative construction, using [hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] to negate the verb. The word order follows the typical subject-verb-object structure of Punjabi.

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb-Object structure in Punjabi

Negation in Punjabi using [hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi]

Temporal adverbs

English: He did not go to school today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅੱਜ ਸਕੂਲ ਨਹੀਂ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is further. English: We walked further into the forest.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਜੰਗਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੋਰ ਅੱਗੇ ਚੱਲੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] means "we" (subject of the sentence).

[hi]ਜੰਗਲ[/hi] means "forest" (object of the preposition).

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] means "in" or "into" (preposition).

[hi]ਹੋਰ[/hi] means "further" or "more" (adverb).

[hi]ਅੱਗੇ[/hi] means "ahead" or "forward" (adverb).

[hi]ਚੱਲੇ।[/hi] means "walked" (verb in the past tense).

Key Concepts:

The sentence structure follows the Subject-Verb-Object pattern.

[hi]ਹੋਰ[/hi] is used to indicate moving further in a direction.

The word [hi]ਚੱਲੇ[/hi] is the past tense form of the verb [hi]ਚੱਲਣਾ[/hi] (to walk).

English: We walked further into the forest.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਜੰਗਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੋਰ ਅੱਗੇ ਚੱਲੇ।[/hi]

The next word is identify. English: They identified the thief.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੇ ਚੋਰ ਦੀ ਪਛਾਣ ਕੀਤੀ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - They

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - (This is a grammatical particle marking the subject as performing the action).

[hi]ਚੋਰ[/hi] - thief

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਪਛਾਣ[/hi] - identification (noun)

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - did (past tense of the verb "ਕਰਨਾ" (to do))

Key concept: The Punjabi word [hi]ਪਛਾਣ[/hi] (pachan) is a very important word. It basically means "to recognize" or "to identify." This word is quite versatile and can be used in many contexts.

The next word is street. English: The street is crowded with people.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗਲੀ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਭਰੀ ਹੋਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗਲੀ[/hi] - This is the word for "street". It is a feminine noun.

[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of "people" in Punjabi. The ending "ਾਂ" ( [hi]ਾਂ[/hi] ) is the plural marker.

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - This means "with". It is used to show that the street is crowded with people.

[hi]ਭਰੀ[/hi] - This is the feminine past participle of the verb "to be filled". It means "filled" in this sentence.

[hi]ਹੋਈ[/hi] - This is the feminine past participle of the verb "to be". It is used to form the past tense of the sentence.

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have gender. In this case, [hi]ਗਲੀ[/hi] is a feminine noun and so the verb has to agree with it in gender.

Plural: The plural form of [hi]ਲੋਕ[/hi] is [hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi].

Past Participle: The words [hi]ਭਰੀ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੋਈ[/hi] are past participles that are used to form the past tense of the verb.

English: The street is crowded with people.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗਲੀ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਭਰੀ ਹੋਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is spring. English: Spring is a beautiful time of year.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਸੰਤ ਦਾ ਮੌਸਮ ਬਹੁਤ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਸੰਤ[/hi] - [hi]basant[/hi] - Spring (this is the word for the season)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive marker, like 's in English)

[hi]ਮੌਸਮ[/hi] - [hi]mausam[/hi] - season/weather/time of year

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very/much

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]sundar[/hi] - beautiful

[hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hunda hai.[/hi] - It is (present tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

This sentence uses the present tense in Punjabi.

It demonstrates the use of possessive markers ([hi]ਦਾ[/hi]) to show ownership.

The word [hi]ਮੌਸਮ[/hi] is a masculine noun, so the verb [hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] is conjugated accordingly.

Memorization Tip: Think of the word [hi]ਬਸੰਤ[/hi] as the Punjabi word for spring, and remember that [hi]ਮੌਸਮ[/hi] means "season." You can use the sentence structure to create other sentences about different seasons, for example: "[hi]ਗਰਮੀ ਦਾ ਮੌਸਮ ਬਹੁਤ ਗਰਮ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]" (Summer is very hot.)

The next word is information. English: The professor gave us a lot of information about Punjabi literature.

Punjabi: [hi]Professor ne aasnu Punjabi sahitya de bare nu bahut sara jankari dita[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Professor[/hi]: This is the word for "professor" in Punjabi.

[hi]ne[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "has" or "have" and is used with the subject "professor."

[hi]aasnu[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "us" and is used as the indirect object of the verb "dita" (gave).

[hi]Punjabi[/hi]: This is the word for "Punjabi" in Punjabi.

[hi]sahitya[/hi]: This is the word for "literature" in Punjabi.

[hi]de[/hi]: This word functions as a postposition and means "of" or "about."

[hi]bare[/hi]: This is the word for "about" or "regarding."

[hi]nu[/hi]: This word functions as a postposition and means "to."

[hi]bahut[/hi]: This is the word for "a lot" or "much."

[hi]sara[/hi]: This is a word for "all" or "much" and is used with "bahut" for emphasis.

[hi]jankari[/hi]: This is the word for "information."

[hi]dita[/hi]: This is the past tense of the verb "den" (to give).

Key Concepts:

The sentence is in the past tense, using the verb "dita."

The postposition "nu" (to) is used with "jankari" (information) to indicate that the information was given to "us" (aasnu).

The sentence uses the postposition "de" (of) with "sahitya" (literature) to indicate that the information is about Punjabi literature.

This example demonstrates a common way to express "about" in Punjabi, using the phrase "bare nu" (about).

English: The professor gave us a lot of information about Punjabi literature.

Punjabi: [hi]Professor ne aasnu Punjabi sahitya de bare nu bahut sara jankari dita[/hi].

The next word is truth. English: The truth is always important.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੱਚਾਈ ਹਮੇਸ਼ਾ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੁੰਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੱਚਾਈ[/hi] - [hi]sachchai[/hi] - truth

[hi]ਹਮੇਸ਼ਾ[/hi] - [hi]hamesha[/hi] - always

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] - [hi]mahatavpurn[/hi] - important

[hi]ਹੁੰਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hundī hai.[/hi] - is, the "hai" in this case is the present tense of the verb "to be"

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses a postpositional system meaning that the adjective follows the noun, as in the case of [hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] (important) coming after [hi]ਸੱਚਾਈ[/hi] (truth).

The Punjabi sentence uses the present tense of the verb "to be," which is [hi]ਹੁੰਦੀ ਹੈ[/hi]. The "[hi]ਹੈ[/hi]" is the present tense form of "to be" and "[hi]ਹੁੰਦੀ[/hi]" is the feminine form, since "truth" in Punjabi is feminine.

English: The truth is always important.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੱਚਾਈ ਹਮੇਸ਼ਾ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੁੰਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is dance. English: She dances beautifully.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੋਹਣਾ ਨੱਚਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - "She", the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਸੋਹਣਾ[/hi] - "beautifully" (adverb), modifying the verb. This is a key concept to remember. In Punjabi, adverbs often come before the verb.

[hi]ਨੱਚਦੀ[/hi] - "dances", the verb describing the action. It's in the present tense.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - "is", the auxiliary verb, used to connect the subject and the main verb in the present tense.

English: She dances beautifully.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੋਹਣਾ ਨੱਚਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is whether. English: He asked whether she was coming to the party.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪੁੱਛਿਆ ਕਿ ਕੀ ਉਹ ਪਾਰਟੀ 'ਤੇ ਆ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He/She (subject)

[hi]ਪੁੱਛਿਆ[/hi] - asked (verb)

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - that (conjunction)

[hi]ਕੀ[/hi] - whether (conjunction)

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - she (subject)

[hi]ਪਾਰਟੀ[/hi] - party (object)

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - at (postposition)

[hi]ਆ[/hi] - come (verb)

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - is (verb, present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਕੀ[/hi] is used to express doubt or uncertainty, similar to "whether" in English.

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is a postposition that indicates location, similar to "at" or "on" in English.

[hi]ਆ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ[/hi] is the present continuous tense of the verb "to come." This indicates an action that is happening now.

Translation:

He asked whether she was coming to the party.

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪੁੱਛਿਆ ਕਿ ਕੀ ਉਹ ਪਾਰਟੀ 'ਤੇ ਆ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is transfer. English: He transferred the money to his account.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪੈਸੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਖਾਤੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਟ੍ਰਾਂਸਫ਼ਰ ਕੀਤੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun, meaning "he". It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਪੈਸੇ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the noun [hi]ਪੈਸਾ[/hi], which means "money". It is the direct object of the sentence.

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun meaning "his" or "her" (depending on context). It modifies the noun [hi]ਖਾਤੇ[/hi].

[hi]ਖਾਤੇ[/hi] - This is the noun meaning "account". It is the object of the preposition [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi]

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is the preposition meaning "in" or "into". It is used to indicate the location of the money.

[hi]ਟ੍ਰਾਂਸਫ਼ਰ ਕੀਤੇ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਟ੍ਰਾਂਸਫ਼ਰ ਕਰਨਾ[/hi], meaning "to transfer".

Key Concepts

The sentence is in the past tense.

The sentence uses the direct object [hi]ਪੈਸੇ[/hi] and the object of the preposition [hi]ਖਾਤੇ[/hi] to show where the money went.

The possessive pronoun [hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] is used to show that the account belongs to the person transferring the money.

English: He transferred the money to his account.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪੈਸੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਖਾਤੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਟ੍ਰਾਂਸਫ਼ਰ ਕੀਤੇ।[/hi]

The next word is wish. English: I wish I could speak Punjabi fluently.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹਾਂ ਕਿ ਮੈਂ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਬੋਲ ਸਕਾਂ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun, meaning "I".

[hi]ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi] - This is the verb "to wish" in the present tense. It is used to express a desire.

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - This is a conjunction that introduces a dependent clause. It can be translated as "that".

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun, meaning "I".

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - This is the noun "Punjabi language". Remember, in Punjabi, the language is always singular.

[hi]ਬੋਲ[/hi] - This is the verb "to speak".

[hi]ਸਕਾਂ[/hi] - This is the present tense of the modal verb "to be able to". It is used to express ability.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi is a subject-verb-object language.

The present tense of the verb "to wish" is [hi]ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi].

The modal verb "to be able to" is used to express ability.

English: I wish I could speak Punjabi fluently.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹਾਂ ਕਿ ਮੈਂ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਬੋਲ ਸਕਾਂ[/hi].

The next word is offer. English: He offered me a cup of tea.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mainu chah di katori offer keeti[/hi].

Breakdown:

Us ne [hi]Us ne[/hi] - This is the subject of the sentence. It means "He" or "She" in Punjabi.

mainu [hi]mainu[/hi] - This is the indirect object of the sentence. It means "to me."

chah di katori [hi]chah di katori[/hi] - This is the direct object of the sentence. It means "a cup of tea."

offer keeti [hi]offer keeti[/hi] - This is the verb of the sentence, meaning "offered." It is in the past tense.

This sentence uses the Punjabi verb [hi]offer keeti[/hi], which is the past tense of the verb [hi]offer karna[/hi], meaning "to offer." It's important to note that the Punjabi verb [hi]offer keeti[/hi] is in the feminine form because the object of the verb (the cup of tea) is feminine.

Key Concepts:

Indirect Object: The person or thing that receives the direct object.

Direct Object: The person or thing that is acted upon by the verb.

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, verbs and adjectives must agree in gender with the noun they modify.

So this sentence would be pronounced as:

[hi]Us ne mainu chah di katori offer keeti[/hi].

English: He offered me a cup of tea.

The next word is lose. English: He lost his book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਗੁਆ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She (masculine singular)

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - [hi]aapni[/hi] - his/her

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitaab[/hi] - book

[hi]ਗੁਆ[/hi] - [hi]gvaa[/hi] - to lose

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]ditti[/hi] - past tense of [hi]denaa[/hi] - to give. Used to indicate something is lost.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਗੁਆ[/hi] - [hi]gvaa[/hi] - The verb for "lose" often uses the verb "to give" with a past tense.

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]ditti[/hi] - This is the feminine past tense form. The masculine form is [hi]ditta[/hi].

English: He lost his book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਗੁਆ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is enough. English: We have enough food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਡੇ ਕੋਲ ਕਾਫ਼ੀ ਖਾਣਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਡੇ[/hi] - Means 'our' or 'we have' and is the possessive form of 'we'. It's a pronoun.

[hi]ਕੋਲ[/hi] - Means 'near' or 'with' in this context. It acts as a preposition showing possession.

[hi]ਕਾਫ਼ੀ[/hi] - Means 'enough'. It's an adjective modifying the noun 'food'.

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - Means 'food'. It's a noun, the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - The verb, meaning 'is'. It is in the present tense, singular form, and shows the state of the food.

English: We have enough food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਡੇ ਕੋਲ ਕਾਫ਼ੀ ਖਾਣਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is hair. English: My hair is long.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰੇ ਵਾਲ ਲੰਬੇ ਨੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun, meaning "my." It modifies the next word, [hi]ਵਾਲ[/hi].

[hi]ਵਾਲ[/hi] - This is the noun, meaning "hair."

[hi]ਲੰਬੇ[/hi] - This is the adjective, meaning "long." It modifies the noun [hi]ਵਾਲ[/hi].

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is the auxiliary verb, meaning "are." It is used to form the present tense of the verb "to be."

Key concept: Punjabi sentence structure is usually Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) or Verb-Subject-Object (VSO).

English: My hair is long.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰੇ ਵਾਲ ਲੰਬੇ ਨੇ।[/hi]

The next word is earth. English: The earth is our home.

Punjabi: [hi]ਧਰਤੀ ਸਾਡਾ ਘਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਧਰਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]dharti[/hi] means "earth" or "land." It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਸਾਡਾ[/hi] - [hi]saada[/hi] means "our" and is a possessive adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਘਰ[/hi]

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - [hi]ghar[/hi] means "home" and is the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense conjugation of the verb "to be" in Punjabi.

This sentence uses the basic subject-verb-object structure common to many languages. It is a simple but important statement about the relationship between humans and the earth.

The next word is business. English: He is in the business of selling clothes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੱਪੜੇ ਵੇਚਣ ਦੇ ਕਾਰੋਬਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - he

[hi]ਕੱਪੜੇ[/hi] - [hi]kapparay[/hi] - clothes

[hi]ਵੇਚਣ[/hi] - [hi]vechan[/hi] - selling

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]day[/hi] - of

[hi]ਕਾਰੋਬਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]karobar[/hi] - business

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is.

Key Concepts:

The structure of this sentence is Subject-Verb-Object.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a preposition that indicates location.

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] is a postposition that indicates possession or belonging.

[hi]ਕਾਰੋਬਾਰ[/hi] is a noun that refers to a business.

[hi]ਵੇਚਣ[/hi] is a verb in the present participle form.

English: He is in the business of selling clothes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੱਪੜੇ ਵੇਚਣ ਦੇ ਕਾਰੋਬਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is point. English: The teacher pointed to the student.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਨੇ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਵੱਲ ਇਸ਼ਾਰਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ[/hi] - [hi]adhyapak[/hi] - teacher (masculine)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]ne[/hi] - marker of the subject, signifies the subject performed the action. (can be translated as 'has')

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]vidyarthi[/hi] - student (masculine)

[hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] - [hi]vall[/hi] - towards

[hi]ਇਸ਼ਾਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]ishara[/hi] - point (gesture)

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]kita[/hi] - did

The sentence literally means "the teacher has towards the student point did". It's a typical structure in Punjabi, where the subject is followed by the action. Notice that the object "student" comes after the preposition "towards", instead of before it like in English.

Key concepts: The use of [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] to mark the subject performing the action is a crucial aspect of Punjabi grammar. It helps determine the subject in a sentence and allows for a more flexible word order compared to English.

The next word is radio. English: The radio is playing a song.

Punjabi: [hi]Redio gaana vaja raha hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Redio[/hi] - Radio (this is a loanword from English)

[hi]gaana[/hi] - Song

[hi]vaja[/hi] - Playing (verb, present continuous tense, third person singular)

[hi]raha[/hi] - Is (part of the present continuous tense)

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (part of the present continuous tense)

Key concepts:

Loanwords: [hi]Redio[/hi] is an example of a loanword, a word borrowed from another language. Many English words have been adopted into Punjabi.

Present continuous tense: The sentence uses the present continuous tense, which is used to describe actions happening at the moment of speaking.

Word order: Punjabi generally follows a Subject-Verb-Object word order, similar to English.

English: The radio is playing a song.

Punjabi: [hi]Redio gaana vaja raha hai[/hi].

The next word is route. English: The bus will take a different route today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਸ ਅੱਜ ਵੱਖਰਾ ਰੂਟ ਲਵੇਗੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਸ[/hi] - [hi]bas[/hi] - bus (feminine noun)

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - [hi]ajj[/hi] - today

[hi]ਵੱਖਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]vakhra[/hi] - different

[hi]ਰੂਟ[/hi] - [hi]root[/hi] - route (masculine noun)

[hi]ਲਵੇਗੀ[/hi] - [hi]lavegi[/hi] - will take (feminine third person singular future tense of verb "lena")

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: The noun [hi]ਬੱਸ[/hi] (bus) is feminine, so the verb [hi]ਲਵੇਗੀ[/hi] (will take) also needs to be feminine.

Word Order: Punjabi follows a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) word order, similar to English.

Future Tense: The future tense is formed by adding the suffix [hi]ਗੀ[/hi] (-gi) to the verb stem.

English: The bus will take a different route today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਸ ਅੱਜ ਵੱਖਰਾ ਰੂਟ ਲਵੇਗੀ।[/hi]

The next word is resource. English: The students have a resource center to help them with their studies.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਕੋਲ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਵਿੱਚ ਮਦਦ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਸਰੋਤ ਕੇਂਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the word for "student" ([hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi]).

[hi]ਕੋਲ[/hi] - This means "with" or "at hand." This is a very common word in Punjabi!

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ[/hi] - This means "studies"

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "in" or "within"

[hi]ਮਦਦ[/hi] - This means "help"

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] - This is the infinitive verb form of "to do" and can be used to mean "to help" in this case

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "for."

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the definite article "a"

[hi]ਸਰੋਤ[/hi] - This means "resource."

[hi]ਕੇਂਦਰ[/hi] - This means "center."

Key Concepts:

The sentence is in the present tense.

The use of the preposition "[hi]ਕੋਲ[/hi]" emphasizes the accessibility of the resource center.

The sentence uses a variety of grammatical structures, including the use of the infinitive verb form and prepositions.

English: The students have a resource center to help them with their studies.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਕੋਲ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਵਿੱਚ ਮਦਦ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਸਰੋਤ ਕੇਂਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is flat. English: The table is flat.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਜ ਸਮਤਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਜ[/hi] - [hi]mej[/hi] - table

[hi]ਸਮਤਲ[/hi] - [hi]samtal[/hi] - flat.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, 3rd person singular, indicative mood of the verb "to be")

Key Concepts:

Punjabi is a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) language, just like English.

This sentence is a simple declarative sentence.

In this sentence, the word [hi]ਸਮਤਲ[/hi] is an adjective describing the noun [hi]ਮੇਜ[/hi].

The word [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a copula, a word that connects the subject and the predicate (the part of the sentence that contains the verb).

English: The table is flat.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਜ ਸਮਤਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is powerful. English: He is a powerful man.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਸ਼ਕਤੀਸ਼ਾਲੀ ਆਦਮੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "he". This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "a". This word is used with singular nouns. It is an indefinite article, meaning it does not specify which particular man is being referenced.

[hi]ਸ਼ਕਤੀਸ਼ਾਲੀ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "powerful". It is an adjective describing the noun [hi]ਆਦਮੀ[/hi].

[hi]ਆਦਮੀ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "man". It is the noun that the adjective [hi]ਸ਼ਕਤੀਸ਼ਾਲੀ[/hi] modifies.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "is". It is the verb that connects the subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] to the predicate "[hi]ਸ਼ਕਤੀਸ਼ਾਲੀ ਆਦਮੀ[/hi]".

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: The verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] agrees with the subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] in number and person. Since the subject is singular and third person, the verb is also singular and third person.

Word Order: The word order in Punjabi is typically Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), but in this sentence the adjective comes before the noun. This is a common occurrence in Punjabi, where adjectives often precede the noun they modify.

The next word is let. English: Let me go.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਜਾਣ ਦਿਓ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] means "me" in the dative case, indicating the recipient of the action. This is similar to the English "to me."

[hi]ਜਾਣ[/hi] means "to go" in the infinitive form.

[hi]ਦਿਓ[/hi] is the imperative form of the verb "to give" and is used to express a command.

So the sentence literally means "give me to go". This is a common construction in Punjabi.

The next word is any. English: He doesn't have any money.

Punjabi: [hi]Usde kol koi paisa nahin hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usde[/hi] - "His", possessive pronoun. The "de" ending indicates possession, and "us" is the masculine form of "he".

[hi]kol[/hi] - "with" or "near" in this context, indicating possession.

[hi]koi[/hi] - "any", indefinite pronoun.

[hi]paisa[/hi] - "money"

[hi]nahin[/hi] - "not", negation particle.

[hi]hai[/hi] - "is", the present tense of "to be".

This sentence is in the present tense, and is a negative statement. The use of the indefinite pronoun [hi]koi[/hi] indicates that the subject does not have any money at all.

The next word is sing. English: She sings beautifully.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਗਾਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "she". It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]sundar[/hi] - This word means "beautiful" and modifies the verb "to sing"

[hi]ਗਾਉਂਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]gaundi[/hi] - This word is the present tense form of the verb "to sing" in Punjabi. The ending "di" indicates the feminine gender of the subject, "she".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - This is a grammatical particle which shows that the sentence is in the present tense.

Key Concepts:

The use of the feminine singular gender marker "di" on the verb.

The use of "hai" to show present tense.

English: She sings beautifully.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਗਾਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is church. English: He went to church.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਗਿਰਜਾਘਰ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he".

[hi]ਗਿਰਜਾਘਰ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "church".

[hi]ਗਿਆ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "went". It is in the past tense.

Key Concepts:

The sentence follows the basic subject-verb-object structure.

The verb "went" is in the past tense, indicating that the action happened in the past.

The word order in Punjabi can sometimes be different from English, but in this case, it is very similar.

Translation: He went to church.

The next word is growth. English: The tree's growth is slow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰੁੱਖ ਦੀ ਵਾਧਾ ਹੌਲੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰੁੱਖ[/hi] - This is the word for 'tree'.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is the possessive marker, similar to 'of' in English.

[hi]ਵਾਧਾ[/hi] - This means 'growth' or 'increase'.

[hi]ਹੌਲੀ[/hi] - This word signifies 'slow'.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the third person singular form of the verb 'to be'. It means 'is'.

The sentence is in the present tense and uses the third person singular form of the verb 'to be' because 'tree' is a singular noun. The sentence also illustrates the use of the possessive marker, which is used to show that the growth belongs to the tree.

English: The tree's growth is slow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰੁੱਖ ਦੀ ਵਾਧਾ ਹੌਲੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is list. English: The list of books is on the table.

Punjabi: ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਦੀ ਸੂਚੀ ਮੇਜ਼ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ। [hi]kitaaban di soochi mez 'te hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]kitaaban[/hi] - This is the plural form of the word for "book", which is [hi]kitaab[/hi].

[hi]di[/hi] - This is the possessive particle, indicating that the list belongs to the books.

[hi]soochi[/hi] - This is the word for "list."

[hi]mez[/hi] - This is the word for "table."

[hi]'te[/hi] - This is the postposition indicating "on," and it is attached to the noun [hi]mez[/hi].

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the verb "to be" in the present tense.

The sentence uses the postposition [hi]'te[/hi] to indicate location. It also highlights the use of the possessive particle [hi]di[/hi], which is essential for expressing possession in Punjabi.

Remember, Punjabi is an agglutinative language, meaning that words are formed by adding suffixes and prefixes to a root word. This sentence demonstrates how multiple elements are combined to create a complex meaning.

The next word is common. English: This is a common occurrence.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh ek saaman [hi] hoi [hi] hai. [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (pronoun)

[hi]ek[/hi] - one (indefinite article)

[hi]saaman [hi] - common (adjective)

[hi]hoi [hi] - happening (verb)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (verb)

Key Concepts:

[hi]saaman [hi] is a common adjective, often used to describe something that occurs frequently or is typical.

English: This is a common occurrence.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh ek saaman [hi] hoi [hi] hai. [/hi]

The next word is work. English: He works in the fields.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਖੇਤਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (oh) - "he" (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਖੇਤਾਂ[/hi] (khetaan) - "fields" (plural noun, object of the preposition [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi])

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (vich) - "in" (preposition, connects [hi]ਖੇਤਾਂ[/hi] to the verb [hi]ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi])

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] (kamm) - "work" (noun, object of the verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi])

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] (karda hai) - "does" (verb, present tense, masculine singular, indicates action)

Key concepts:

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (vich) is a very common preposition meaning "in" or "within" and is frequently used with locations.

The structure of the sentence follows the Subject-Verb-Object pattern, a common structure in Punjabi.

The verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] (karda hai) is a versatile verb that can be used to indicate many actions, making it a valuable word to learn.

English: He works in the fields.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਖੇਤਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is lesson. English: Today's lesson is about the Punjabi alphabet.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj da [hi] [hi]paath[/hi] [hi]panjabi[/hi] [hi]varnamala[/hi] [hi]bare[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - Today (This is a very common word in Punjabi so you'll need to know it)

[hi]da[/hi] - possessive particle; means "of" or "belonging to" (Think of it as similar to the English 's)

[hi]paath[/hi] - lesson.

[hi]panjabi[/hi] - Punjabi

[hi]varnamala[/hi] - alphabet

[hi]bare[/hi] - about

[hi]hai[/hi] - is. (Think of this as similar to "is" in English)

Key Concepts:

Punjabi words are read from left to right (like English)

Possessive particles are used to show ownership

The use of "is" in Punjabi can change depending on the context and grammar of the sentence.

The sentence structure is simple and common in Punjabi: subject (Ajj da paath) + verb (hai) + object (panjabi varnamala bare).

English: Today's lesson is about the Punjabi alphabet.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj da [hi] [hi]paath[/hi] [hi]panjabi[/hi] [hi]varnamala[/hi] [hi]bare[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

The next word is along. English: He walked along the road.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੜਕ ਦੇ ਨਾਲ-ਨਾਲ ਚੱਲਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਸੜਕ[/hi] - This is the noun "road".

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive particle, meaning "of".

[hi]ਨਾਲ-ਨਾਲ[/hi] - This is the preposition "along" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਚੱਲਿਆ।[/hi] - This is the verb "walked" in the past tense.

Key Concept: The preposition "along" in Punjabi is expressed using the phrase [hi]ਨਾਲ-ਨਾਲ[/hi].

The next word is card. English: He gave me a card.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujhe ek kaard ditta[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (masculine singular)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has (particle marking the subject)

[hi]mujhe[/hi] - to me

[hi]ek[/hi] - one

[hi]kaard[/hi] - card

[hi]ditta[/hi] - gave (masculine past tense)

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses the particle [hi]ne[/hi] to mark the subject of the verb. This is a common feature of Punjabi grammar.

Punjabi verbs change their form based on the gender of the subject and the tense of the verb. In this example, the verb [hi]ditta[/hi] is in the masculine past tense because the subject is [hi]us[/hi] (he).

English: He gave me a card.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujhe ek kaard ditta[/hi].

The next word is project. English: The students are working on a project about the history of Punjab.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਪੰਜਾਬ ਦੇ ਇਤਿਹਾਸ ਬਾਰੇ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ 'ਤੇ ਕੰਮ ਕਰ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]vidyaarthee[/hi] - student (plural)

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]panjaab[/hi] - Punjab

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]ਇਤਿਹਾਸ[/hi] - [hi]itihaas[/hi] - history

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]baare[/hi] - about

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ[/hi] - [hi]praujekt[/hi] - project

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]'te[/hi] - on

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - [hi]kamm[/hi] - work

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - [hi]kar[/hi] - do, make

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - [hi]rahe[/hi] - are (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]han[/hi] - are (plural)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: The word [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] is plural and masculine. Therefore, the verb [hi]ਕਰ[/hi] takes the masculine plural form [hi]ਕਰ ਰਹੇ[/hi].

Postposition: The postposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is used to indicate location, similar to "on" in English.

Translation: The students are working on a project about the history of Punjab.

The next word is apply. English: He applied for the job.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਨੌਕਰੀ ਲਈ ਅਰਜ਼ੀ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun in the past tense, meaning "he".

[hi]ਨੌਕਰੀ[/hi] - This means "job".

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "for".

[hi]ਅਰਜ਼ੀ[/hi] - This means "application".

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to give", meaning "he gave". The verb agrees with the subject "he" in gender and number.

Key Concept: The sentence uses the past tense of the verb "to give" with the noun "application" to express the action of applying. This is a common way to express the concept of "applying" in Punjabi.

English: He applied for the job.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਨੌਕਰੀ ਲਈ ਅਰਜ਼ੀ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is anybody. English: Anybody can learn Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੋਈ ਵੀ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਿੱਖ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੋਈ ਵੀ[/hi] - This phrase means "anybody" or "anyone." It's important to remember that [hi]ਕੋਈ[/hi] means "someone" or "anyone," but [hi]ਕੋਈ ਵੀ[/hi] emphasizes "any."

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "Punjabi" (the language).

[hi]ਸਿੱਖ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the verb phrase meaning "can learn."

Key concepts:

[hi]ਵੀ[/hi] - This is the particle that adds emphasis to the word "any" in the phrase [hi]ਕੋਈ ਵੀ[/hi].

[hi]ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - This is a common verb phrase in Punjabi that denotes ability.

To remember:

You can use this structure to create many different sentences. For example: [hi]ਕੋਈ ਵੀ ਸੰਗੀਤ ਸੁਣ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] (Anybody can listen to music.)

Translation using espeak-ng:

You can use espeak-ng -w output.wav "[hi]ਕੋਈ ਵੀ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਿੱਖ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]" to create a sound file with the translation of the Punjabi sentence.

The next word is certainly. Please provide an English word! I'm ready to craft a Punjabi sentence for you.

The next word is most. English: Most people like to eat mangoes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾਤਰ[/hi] ਲੋਕਾਂ ਨੂੰ [hi]ਆਮ[/hi] ਖਾਣੇ ਨੂੰ ਪਸੰਦ ਹੈ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾਤਰ[/hi] (most) - This is an adverb that means "most" or "the majority". It is used to indicate a large quantity or number.

[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] (people) - This is the plural form of the word [hi]ਲੋਕ[/hi] (person) and is used as the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] (to) - This is a postposition that indicates the direction of an action or the recipient of something. Here, it indicates that the people are the recipients of the action of liking mangoes.

[hi]ਆਮ[/hi] (mango) - This is the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਖਾਣੇ[/hi] (eating) - This is the infinitive form of the verb [hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] (to eat).

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] (to) - This is another postposition, indicating that the mangoes are the object of the liking.

[hi]ਪਸੰਦ[/hi] (like) - This is the verb of the sentence.

Key Concepts:

Adverbs: Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. They tell us how, when, where, or to what extent something happens.

Postpositions: Postpositions are words that follow a noun or pronoun and indicate their relationship to other words in the sentence. They are similar to prepositions in English, but they come after the noun or pronoun instead of before.

Infinitives: Infinitives are the base form of a verb, usually preceded by "to". They can function as nouns, adjectives, or adverbs.

English: Most people like to eat mangoes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾਤਰ[/hi] ਲੋਕਾਂ ਨੂੰ [hi]ਆਮ[/hi] ਖਾਣੇ ਨੂੰ ਪਸੰਦ ਹੈ।

The next word is morning. English: Good morning.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੁਭਾ ਸਵੇਰਾ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੁਭਾ[/hi] means "good" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਸਵੇਰਾ[/hi] means "morning" in Punjabi.

This is a simple and common way to greet someone in the morning in Punjabi.

English: Good morning.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੁਭਾ ਸਵੇਰਾ[/hi]

The next word is material. English: The material of this shirt is very soft.

Punjabi: [hi]Is kamiz da maal bahut naram hai[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This

[hi]kamiz[/hi] - Shirt

[hi]da[/hi] - Of (possessive marker)

[hi]maal[/hi] - Material

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Very

[hi]narm[/hi] - Soft

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is

Key Concepts:

Possessive marker: The [hi]da[/hi] in the sentence is a possessive marker, indicating that the material belongs to the shirt.

Adjective: [hi]narm[/hi] is an adjective describing the quality of the material.

Word order: The word order in Punjabi is generally Subject-Verb-Object, but it can vary depending on the context. In this sentence, the object ([hi]maal[/hi]) comes before the verb ([hi]hai[/hi]).

English: The material of this shirt is very soft.

Punjabi: [hi]Is kamiz da maal bahut naram hai[/hi]

The next word is locate. English: I located the book in the library.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਲੱਭੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - I

[hi]ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ[/hi] - library

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book

[hi]ਲੱਭੀ।[/hi] - located (past tense, feminine singular)

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses the feminine singular form of the verb "[hi]ਲੱਭੀ।[/hi]" because "[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi]" (book) is a feminine noun.

The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb.

English: I located the book in the library.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਲੱਭੀ।[/hi]

The next word is quickly. English: He quickly ran to the store.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੁਕਾਨ ਤੇ ਛੇਤੀ ਦੌੜਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (Subject pronoun)

[hi]ਦੁਕਾਨ[/hi] - Store (Noun)

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - To (Preposition)

[hi]ਛੇਤੀ[/hi] - Quickly (Adverb)

[hi]ਦੌੜਿਆ।[/hi] - Ran (Past tense verb)

This sentence is in the simple past tense, which is used to describe a completed action in the past. The word [hi]ਛੇਤੀ[/hi] is an adverb that modifies the verb [hi]ਦੌੜਿਆ[/hi].

Remember: [hi]ਛੇਤੀ[/hi] is a common word for "quickly" in Punjabi. It's often used in everyday conversation. You can use this sentence as a starting point to create your own sentences with [hi]ਛੇਤੀ[/hi].

The next word is father. English: My father is a kind man.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ ਪਿਤਾ ਇੱਕ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਆਦਮੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]mera[/hi] - My (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਪਿਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]pita[/hi] - father

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a (indefinite article)

[hi]ਦਿਆਲੂ[/hi] - [hi]dayaloo[/hi] - kind

[hi]ਆਦਮੀ[/hi] - [hi]aadmi[/hi] - man

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is (present tense, singular, masculine)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Pronoun: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] shows possession.

Masculine Singular Subject: The subject [hi]ਪਿਤਾ[/hi] (father) is masculine and singular. This is why the verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is) is also singular and masculine.

English: My father is a kind man.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ ਪਿਤਾ ਇੱਕ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਆਦਮੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is player. English: The player is very skilled.

Punjabi: [hi]Khidari bahut hunarmand hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Khidari[/hi] - Player. This word is derived from the Persian word "Khidmat", meaning "service" or "work". In Punjabi, "Khidari" refers to a person who performs a specific task, especially in sports.

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Very. This is a common Punjabi adverb used to emphasize a quality or quantity.

[hi]hunarmand[/hi] - Skilled. This word literally translates to "having skill" or "talented". It combines the words "hunar" (skill) and "mand" (possessing).

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is. This is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

Key concepts:

Gender agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives must agree in gender with the noun they modify. "Khidari" is masculine, so the adjective "hunarmand" must also be masculine.

Word order: The word order in Punjabi sentences is typically Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), but can be flexible depending on emphasis.

The next word is population. English: The population of Punjab is very large.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ ਦੀ ਆਬਾਦੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਵੱਡੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ[/hi] - Punjab

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of (feminine)

[hi]ਆਬਾਦੀ[/hi] - population

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very

[hi]ਵੱਡੀ[/hi] - large (feminine)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense, singular, feminine)

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi word for "population" is [hi]ਆਬਾਦੀ[/hi].

Punjabi has grammatical gender for nouns, and [hi]ਆਬਾਦੀ[/hi] is feminine, so we use feminine forms of [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (of) and [hi]ਵੱਡੀ[/hi] (large)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is the present tense verb "to be" in the singular feminine form, as the noun "population" ([hi]ਆਬਾਦੀ[/hi]) is feminine.

Translation: The population of Punjab is very large.

The next word is photo. English: He took a photo of the beautiful scenery.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਨਜ਼ਾਰੇ ਦੀ ਫੋਟੋ ਲਈ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - Beautiful

[hi]ਨਜ਼ਾਰੇ[/hi] - Scenery

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of, possessive marker

[hi]ਫੋਟੋ[/hi] - Photo

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - Took

Key Concept: The sentence structure is subject-verb-object. The subject is "he" and the verb is "took," and the object is "photo" of "scenery." The word [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a possessive marker which signifies that the "photo" belongs to the "scenery."

English: He took a photo of the beautiful scenery.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਨਜ਼ਾਰੇ ਦੀ ਫੋਟੋ ਲਈ[/hi]

The next word is always. English: He always does his homework.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਮੇਸ਼ਾ ਆਪਣਾ ਹੋਮਵਰਕ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It. This pronoun can be used for all three genders, but the context will tell you which one is meant.

[hi]ਹਮੇਸ਼ਾ[/hi] - [hi]hameśā[/hi] - Always. This word is used to indicate that an action happens repeatedly and without exception.

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]āpaṇā[/hi] - His/Her/Its. This is a possessive pronoun, meaning that it shows ownership.

[hi]ਹੋਮਵਰਕ[/hi] - [hi]homvarka[/hi] - Homework. This is a loanword from English.

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]kardā[/hi] - Does (masculine singular). This is the present tense of the verb "to do".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - Is (masculine singular). This is a copula, a verb that connects the subject to the predicate.

Key Concepts:

The use of gender in pronouns.

The present tense of verbs.

The use of possessive pronouns.

English: He always does his homework.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਮੇਸ਼ਾ ਆਪਣਾ ਹੋਮਵਰਕ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is conversation. English: They are having a conversation.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਗੱਲਾਂ ਕਰ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third person plural pronoun, meaning "they".

[hi]ਗੱਲਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the word for "conversation," "talk," or "story."

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - This is the verb "to do" or "to make."

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense marker, indicating an ongoing action.

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - This is the present tense marker for the third person plural.

Key Concepts:

Pronoun usage: [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] is used to refer to the subject of the sentence, "they."

Plural forms: [hi]ਗੱਲਾਂ[/hi] is the plural form of the noun, emphasizing multiple conversations.

Present continuous tense: The combination of [hi]ਕਰ[/hi] and [hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] forms the present continuous tense, showing the ongoing nature of the conversation.

Translation: They are having a conversation.

The next word is year. English: This year is going to be very good.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਸਾਲ ਬਹੁਤ ਵਧੀਆ ਜਾਣ ਵਾਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਸਾਲ[/hi] - Year (noun)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Very (adverb)

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - Good (adjective)

[hi]ਜਾਣ ਵਾਲਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - is going to be (future tense verb)

This sentence uses the future tense verb, [hi]ਜਾਣ ਵਾਲਾ ਹੈ[/hi], to express that something will happen in the future. The word [hi]ਸਾਲ[/hi] is singular, so we use the singular form of the verb, [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

Key concepts:

Demonstrative Pronouns

Future Tense

Singular/Plural agreement

The next word is investment. English: He made a good investment in the stock market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸ਼ੇਅਰ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਇੱਕ ਚੰਗਾ ਨਿਵੇਸ਼ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਸ਼ੇਅਰ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This is the noun phrase "stock market". [hi]ਸ਼ੇਅਰ[/hi] means "shares" and [hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] means "market".

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is a postposition meaning "in".

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the indefinite article "a".

[hi]ਚੰਗਾ[/hi] - This is the adjective "good".

[hi]ਨਿਵੇਸ਼[/hi] - This is the noun "investment".

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense verb "made". It is conjugated in the third person singular.

Key concept: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. The postposition [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is equivalent to the English preposition "in".

English: He made a good investment in the stock market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸ਼ੇਅਰ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਇੱਕ ਚੰਗਾ ਨਿਵੇਸ਼ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is additional. English: The teacher gave additional homework.

Punjabi: [hi]astarā[/hi] ne [hi]vadhu[/hi] [hi]kam[/hi] dita.

Breakdown:

[hi]astarā[/hi] (teacher)

[hi]ne[/hi] (has) - This is a postposition that indicates possession.

[hi]vadhu[/hi] (extra) - This word is used to indicate something additional.

[hi]kam[/hi] (work/homework)

[hi]dita[/hi] (gave) - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]dena[/hi] (to give).

Key Concepts

[hi]vadhu[/hi] (extra) is a great word to know for anything additional.

English: The teacher gave additional homework.

Punjabi: [hi]astarā[/hi] ne [hi]vadhu[/hi] [hi]kam[/hi] dita.

The next word is front. English: The front of the house is painted red.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਦਾ ਅੱਗੇ ਵਾਲਾ ਪਾਸਾ ਲਾਲ ਰੰਗ ਨਾਲ ਰੰਗਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - [hi]ghar[/hi] (house)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] (possessive particle, "of")

[hi]ਅੱਗੇ[/hi] - [hi]agge[/hi] (front, in front of)

[hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] - [hi]wala[/hi] (suffix indicating something related to, "one that is")

[hi]ਪਾਸਾ[/hi] - [hi]paasa[/hi] (side)

[hi]ਲਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]laal[/hi] (red)

[hi]ਰੰਗ[/hi] - [hi]rang[/hi] (color)

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]naal[/hi] (with)

[hi]ਰੰਗਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]rangya[/hi] (painted)

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]hoya[/hi] (past participle, "is")

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] (is)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a possessive particle that indicates ownership. It is similar to the English word "of."

Suffixes: The suffix [hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] is used to indicate something related to or "one that is."

Past Participle: The word [hi]ਰੰਗਿਆ[/hi] is a past participle, which means it is used to describe a completed action.

Remember, you can use this breakdown to help you remember the meaning of the words in the sentence. You can also practice saying the words out loud to help you improve your pronunciation.

The next word is listen. English: Please listen to me.

Punjabi: [hi] ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਮੇਰੀ ਗੱਲ ਸੁਣੋ [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi] ਕਿਰਪਾ [/hi] - means "please" or "kindly" in Punjabi. It is a polite request and is often used to soften a command or request.

[hi] ਕਰਕੇ [/hi] - This is a grammatical particle that adds emphasis and politeness to the request.

[hi] ਮੇਰੀ [/hi] - means "my" and modifies the word "speech" or "talk" which is implied in the sentence.

[hi] ਗੱਲ [/hi] - means "talk" or "speech".

[hi] ਸੁਣੋ [/hi] - means "listen" and is the imperative form of the verb "to listen".

Key Concepts:

Politeness: Punjabi language uses many ways to express politeness, including words like "[hi] ਕਿਰਪਾ [/hi]" and grammatical particles like "[hi] ਕਰਕੇ [/hi]".

Implied Meaning: Sometimes the full meaning of a sentence is not explicitly stated but is implied. For example, the word "speech" is not explicitly stated but is implied in the phrase "listen to my talk".

Imperative Form: The imperative form of a verb is used to give a command or make a request. In this sentence, "[hi] ਸੁਣੋ [/hi]" is the imperative form of the verb "to listen".

The next word is must. English: You must study hard.

Punjabi: ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ [hi]tuhannu[/hi] ਮਿਹਨਤ [hi]mihnat[/hi] ਨਾਲ [hi]nal[/hi] ਪੜ੍ਹਨਾ [hi]padhna[/hi] ਚਾਹੀਦਾ [hi]chahida[/hi] ਹੈ [hi]hai[/hi]।

Breakdown:

[hi]tuhannu[/hi] - You (formal, singular, used to address someone with respect)

[hi]mihnat[/hi] - hard work, effort

[hi]nal[/hi] - with (used to indicate the means or way something is done)

[hi]padhna[/hi] - to study (infinitive form)

[hi]chahida[/hi] - should, must, ought to

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, third person singular)

This sentence is in the imperative mood, meaning it expresses a command or obligation. It uses the word [hi]chahida[/hi] to indicate that studying hard is a necessity or requirement. The word [hi]nal[/hi] is used to connect the subject (you) with the action (studying).

The next word is song. English: He sings a beautiful song.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਗੀਤ ਗਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It (masculine, singular)

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]sundar[/hi] - Beautiful

[hi]ਗੀਤ[/hi] - [hi]geet[/hi] - Song

[hi]ਗਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]gaunda[/hi] - Sings (present tense, masculine, singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - Is (present tense, masculine, singular)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives and verbs agree in gender with the noun they modify. In this case, "beautiful" and "sings" are both masculine singular to match the masculine singular noun "he".

Present Tense: The present tense in Punjabi is formed by adding the appropriate ending to the verb stem. In this case, the present tense ending for "to sing" is "-nda" for masculine singular.

Word Order: The typical word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb (SOV). This sentence follows that pattern.

English: He sings a beautiful song.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਗੀਤ ਗਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is direct. English: He directly told me that I should leave.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujhe seedha keh ditta ke main chale jaan[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He/She/It, used as a pronoun for a third person in this case.

[hi]ne[/hi] - This is a postposition, similar to the English preposition "by". It shows that the action of the verb is done by someone/something.

[hi]mujhe[/hi] - Me, object pronoun. The person whom the action is directed towards.

[hi]seedha[/hi] - Directly, an adverb that modifies the verb "keh ditta".

[hi]keh ditta[/hi] - Past tense verb, "to say", which means he directly told.

[hi]ke[/hi] - That, a conjunction that introduces the clause.

[hi]main[/hi] - I, the subject of the verb "chale jaan"

[hi]chale jaan[/hi] - The verb that means to go or leave.

Key concepts: The postposition "[hi]ne[/hi]" and the use of the direct object pronoun "[hi]mujhe[/hi]" together show that the action is done directly to the subject, and the adverb "[hi]seedha[/hi]" reinforces this meaning.

English: He directly told me that I should leave.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujhe seedha keh ditta ke main chale jaan[/hi].

The next word is though. English: Though he was tired, he still finished the work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਾਲਾਂਕਿ ਉਹ ਥੱਕਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਸੀ, ਪਰ ਫਿਰ ਵੀ ਉਸਨੇ ਕੰਮ ਪੂਰਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹਾਲਾਂਕਿ[/hi] (halaanki) - Though, although

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (oh) - He

[hi]ਥੱਕਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਸੀ[/hi] (thakkia hoya si) - Was tired (literally: was tired become)

[hi]ਪਰ[/hi] (par) - But

[hi]ਫਿਰ ਵੀ[/hi] (phir vi) - Still

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] (usne) - He

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] (kamm) - Work

[hi]ਪੂਰਾ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] (poora kita) - Finished (literally: complete did)

This sentence demonstrates the use of the conjunction [hi]ਹਾਲਾਂਕਿ[/hi] (halaanki) which introduces a contrasting clause. The sentence also uses the word [hi]ਫਿਰ ਵੀ[/hi] (phir vi), which emphasizes that despite the first clause, the second clause is still true.

Key Concepts:

Conjunctions: [hi]ਹਾਲਾਂਕਿ[/hi] (halaanki) is a conjunction that introduces a contrasting clause.

Adverbial Phrases: [hi]ਫਿਰ ਵੀ[/hi] (phir vi) is an adverbial phrase that modifies the verb [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] (kita) and emphasizes the fact that the action was still performed despite the first clause.

Past Tense: The verb [hi]ਸੀ[/hi] (si) and the verb [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] (kita) are both in the past tense, indicating that the actions occurred in the past.

The next word is tomorrow. English: Tomorrow is a holiday.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਛੁੱਟੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] - This means "tomorrow" in Punjabi. It is in the accusative case, meaning it is the object of the verb "is".

[hi]ਛੁੱਟੀ[/hi] - This means "holiday" in Punjabi. It is in the nominative case, meaning it is the subject of the verb "is".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This means "is" in Punjabi. It is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

This sentence is in the simple present tense. It is a declarative sentence, meaning it is stating a fact.

You can remember [hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] because it sounds like the English word "collar".

English: Tomorrow is a holiday.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਛੁੱਟੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is toward. English: She walked toward the library.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਵੱਲ ਤੁਰ ਗਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - She (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ[/hi] - Library (object)

[hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] - Toward (direction)

[hi]ਤੁਰ[/hi] - Walk (verb)

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - Went (past tense of go)

Key concept: [hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] is a postposition that indicates direction. It is used after a noun or pronoun to indicate the direction towards which something is moving or facing. In this sentence, it indicates that she was walking towards the library.

English: She walked toward the library.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਵੱਲ ਤੁਰ ਗਈ।[/hi]

The next word is afford. English: We cannot afford to buy a new car.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਨਵੀਂ ਕਾਰ ਖ਼ਰੀਦਣ ਦਾ ਖ਼ਰਚਾ ਨਹੀਂ ਉਠਾ ਸਕਦੇ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We

[hi]ਨਵੀਂ[/hi] - new

[hi]ਕਾਰ[/hi] - car

[hi]ਖ਼ਰੀਦਣ[/hi] - to buy

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]ਖ਼ਰਚਾ[/hi] - expense, cost

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - not

[hi]ਉਠਾ[/hi] - to bear, to lift

[hi]ਸਕਦੇ[/hi] - can (plural)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is used to show possession.

[hi]ਖ਼ਰਚਾ ਉਠਾਉਣਾ[/hi] is a common expression in Punjabi, meaning "to afford".

English: We cannot afford to buy a new car.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਨਵੀਂ ਕਾਰ ਖ਼ਰੀਦਣ ਦਾ ਖ਼ਰਚਾ ਨਹੀਂ ਉਠਾ ਸਕਦੇ[/hi].

The next word is agreement. English: We agreed to meet tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਮਿਲਣ ਲਈ ਸਹਿਮਤ ਹੋ ਗਏ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] - Tomorrow

[hi]ਮਿਲਣ[/hi] - To meet

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - For

[hi]ਸਹਿਮਤ[/hi] - Agreed

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - To be

[hi]ਗਏ।[/hi] - Past tense marker

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਸਹਿਮਤ[/hi] is a key word for agreement.

The sentence structure is similar to English. The subject ([hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi]) comes first, followed by the verb ([hi]ਸਹਿਮਤ ਹੋ ਗਏ[/hi]).

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] is a common word used to indicate purpose. It means "for" in English.

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] is a common word for "tomorrow" and is a useful word to learn. It is very similar to the English word "kal".

English: We agreed to meet tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਮਿਲਣ ਲਈ ਸਹਿਮਤ ਹੋ ਗਏ।[/hi]

The next word is mind. English: My mind is very strong.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ ਦਿਮਾਗ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] - "mera" - My (possessive pronoun)

[hi]दिमाग[/hi] - "dimag" - Mind (noun)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - "bahut" - Very (adverb)

[hi]ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ[/hi] - "mazboot" - Strong (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - "hai" - Is (verb, present tense)

This sentence is in the present tense and uses the simple present tense. It describes a state of being. The word "mind" is translated with the word "dimag." "Dimag" is commonly used for "mind" and "brain."

The next word is extend. English: He extended his hand in greeting.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne apna hath salaam karne lai vadiaya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ne[/hi] - This is the post-position indicating "by" or "with". It attaches to the subject of the sentence.

[hi]apna[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun meaning "his".

[hi]hath[/hi] - This means "hand".

[hi]salaam[/hi] - This is the noun form of greeting.

[hi]karne[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb "to do" or "to make". In this sentence, it is used as a gerund, meaning "doing".

[hi]lai[/hi] - This is a post-position meaning "for".

[hi]vadiaya[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "vadana", meaning "to extend" or "to stretch out".

Key Concepts:

Post-positions: Punjabi uses post-positions instead of prepositions. These are words that come after the noun they modify, like [hi]ne[/hi] or [hi]lai[/hi].

Infinitives and Gerunds: In Punjabi, infinitives and gerunds are both formed with the suffix [hi]-ne[/hi].

English Translation: He extended his hand in greeting.

The next word is beyond. English: This journey goes beyond the mountains.

Punjabi: [hi]ee safar parvaton to par [hi] [hi]aage jaanda hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ee[/hi] - this

[hi]safar[/hi] - journey

[hi]parvaton[/hi] - mountains (plural)

[hi]to[/hi] - from/than

[hi]par[/hi] - on/over (used here to mean beyond)

[hi]aage[/hi] - beyond

[hi]jaanda hai[/hi] - goes (present tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

The use of the word [hi]par[/hi] in this sentence is a good example of how Punjabi uses prepositions in a nuanced way. It can be translated as "on," "over," "beyond," or even "upon" depending on the context.

The verb [hi]jaanda hai[/hi] is in the present tense and refers to a journey that is ongoing.

English: This journey goes beyond the mountains.

Punjabi: [hi]ee safar parvaton to par [hi] [hi]aage jaanda hai[/hi].

The next word is social. English: He is a social butterfly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਸਮਾਜਿਕ ਤਿਤਲੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - a/an/one

[hi]ਸਮਾਜਿਕ[/hi] - social

[hi]ਤਿਤਲੀ[/hi] - butterfly

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

The [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is the present tense for "is" in Punjabi.

The word [hi]ਤਿਤਲੀ[/hi] literally translates to "butterfly" but can also be used metaphorically to refer to someone who is very social.

This sentence uses the noun [hi]ਸਮਾਜਿਕ[/hi] as an adjective.

English: He is a social butterfly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਸਮਾਜਿਕ ਤਿਤਲੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is also. English: He also plays the guitar.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਵੀ ਗਿਟਾਰ ਵਜਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun)

[hi]ਵੀ[/hi] - also/too (adverb)

[hi]ਗਿਟਾਰ[/hi] - guitar (noun)

[hi]ਵਜਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - plays (verb)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (copula)

Key concepts:

The word [hi]ਵੀ[/hi] is placed before the verb to indicate "also".

The word [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is used at the end of the sentence to indicate the present tense.

Remember that in Punjabi, the word order is generally Subject-Object-Verb.

The next word is help. English: He helped me with my homework.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੇਰੀ ਹੋਮਵਰਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਮਦਦ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He/She/It (third person singular, masculine, past tense). The [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] at the end is a marker of the subject being masculine and in the past tense.

[hi]ਮੇਰੀ[/hi] - My (possessive adjective, feminine singular). The [hi]ੀ[/hi] at the end is a marker for feminine singular. Since [hi]ਹੋਮਵਰਕ[/hi] is feminine, the possessive adjective is also feminine.

[hi]ਹੋਮਵਰਕ[/hi] - Homework (feminine noun).

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - In (preposition)

[hi]ਮਦਦ[/hi] - Help (feminine noun)

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - Did (verb, past tense, feminine singular). The [hi]ੀ[/hi] at the end is a marker for feminine singular past tense.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions like English. The [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is an example.

Punjabi uses gendered grammar. The verb conjugation will change to reflect the gender of the subject and the object. For example, if the sentence was "She helped me" then [hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] would be changed to [hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] because the subject "She" is feminine.

Punjabi also uses different word order than English. For example, the object of the verb ([hi]ਹੋਮਵਰਕ[/hi]) comes before the verb ([hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi]).

Always remember to include [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] at the end of the subject if it is in the past tense and masculine.

English: He helped me with my homework.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੇਰੀ ਹੋਮਵਰਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਮਦਦ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is lady. English: The lady is very beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਔਰਤ ਬਹੁਤ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - [hi]eh[/hi] - this, singular, feminine

[hi]ਔਰਤ[/hi] - [hi]aurat[/hi] - woman, lady

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]sundar[/hi] - beautiful

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, singular, feminine)

Key Concepts:

Gender agreement: [hi]ਇਹ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] are both feminine, as is [hi]ਔਰਤ[/hi]

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] is an intensifier, making the adjective stronger

English: The lady is very beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਔਰਤ ਬਹੁਤ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is ensure. English: Please ensure that you complete your assignment on time.

Punjabi: [hi] ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਯਕੀਨੀ ਬਣਾਓ ਕਿ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਸਮੇਂ ਸਿਰ ਆਪਣਾ ਕੰਮ ਪੂਰਾ ਕਰੋ । [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ[/hi] - This is a polite way to request something, similar to "please."

[hi]ਯਕੀਨੀ[/hi] - Means "certain" or "sure"

[hi]ਬਣਾਓ[/hi] - The imperative form of the verb "to make," meaning "make sure."

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - A conjunction meaning "that"

[hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ[/hi] - The pronoun "you"

[hi]ਸਮੇਂ ਸਿਰ[/hi] - Means "on time"

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - The possessive pronoun "your"

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - The noun "work"

[hi]ਪੂਰਾ[/hi] - The adjective "complete"

[hi]ਕਰੋ[/hi] - The imperative form of the verb "to do," meaning "do."

Important Note: Notice the use of the imperative form of the verbs. This is a key concept in Punjabi grammar, as it is used to give commands and requests.

English: Please ensure that you complete your assignment on time.

Punjabi: [hi] ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਯਕੀਨੀ ਬਣਾਓ ਕਿ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਸਮੇਂ ਸਿਰ ਆਪਣਾ ਕੰਮ ਪੂਰਾ ਕਰੋ । [/hi]

The next word is become. English: He wants to become a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਬਣਨਾ ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he". It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "doctor". It is the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਬਣਨਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "to become". It is the infinitive verb. It is used here as a noun because it is preceded by a preposition.

[hi]ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "wants". It is the main verb of the sentence. It is in the present tense and in the masculine singular form.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is". It is used as a copula. It is in the present tense and masculine singular form.

Important Concepts:

The verb "become" is not a direct translation of the Punjabi word [hi]ਬਣਨਾ[/hi]. The Punjabi word [hi]ਬਣਨਾ[/hi] is a more flexible verb than "become". It can be used to mean "to make", "to create" as well as "to become".

English: He wants to become a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਬਣਨਾ ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is afraid. English: He is afraid of dogs.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੁੱਤਿਆਂ ਤੋਂ ਡਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (pronoun)

[hi]ਕੁੱਤਿਆਂ[/hi] - dogs (plural noun)

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - from (preposition)

[hi]ਡਰਦਾ[/hi] - afraid (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (verb)

Key Concept: The Punjabi sentence uses the postposition [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] to express "from" or "of," which is different from English prepositions.

Translation: He is afraid of dogs.

The next word is sample. English: The sample is good.

Punjabi: [hi]ਨਾਮੂਨਾ ਵਧੀਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਨਾਮੂਨਾ[/hi] - sample (This is a common word in both Hindi and Punjabi.)

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - good (This word is also common in both Hindi and Punjabi.)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (This is a very common verb that indicates the present tense.)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨਾਮੂਨਾ[/hi] is an example of a noun in Punjabi.

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] is an example of an adjective in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is an example of a verb in Punjabi.

Important Note: You can remember this sentence by connecting the words to a common English phrase: "The sample is good." You can also use this sentence to practice your pronunciation of Punjabi words and get familiar with the grammar.

The next word is half. English: He ate half of the roti.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne roti da adha hissa khaaya[/hi].

Breakdown:

Us [hi]Us[/hi] - He (masculine, singular)

ne [hi]ne[/hi] - This is a grammatical particle that marks the subject of a sentence and indicates that the subject is performing the action.

roti [hi]roti[/hi] - bread (flatbread)

da [hi]da[/hi] - This is a possessive particle indicating "of the"

adha [hi]adha[/hi] - half
hissa [hi]hissa[/hi] - part
khaaya [hi]khaaya[/hi] - ate (past tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: [hi]da[/hi] is a key concept in Punjabi grammar, showing possession.

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, verbs and adjectives agree in gender with the noun they describe. In this example, the verb [hi]khaaya[/hi] agrees in gender with the masculine subject [hi]Us[/hi].

Postposition: In Punjabi, the preposition "of" is often expressed as a postposition like [hi]da[/hi].

English: He ate half of the roti.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne roti da adha hissa khaaya[/hi].

The next word is bomb. English: The bomb exploded in the city center.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਦੇ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਬੰਬ ਫਟ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi] [shihar] - city

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] [de] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਵਿਚਕਾਰ[/hi] [vichkaar] - center

[hi]ਬੰਬ[/hi] [bomb] - bomb

[hi]ਫਟ[/hi] [phat] - exploded

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] [gya] - past tense marker (it)

Key concepts:

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] is a possessive particle, similar to 'of' in English.

[hi]ਵਿਚਕਾਰ[/hi] is a postposition meaning 'in the middle of', 'in the center of'.

[hi]ਫਟ ਗਿਆ[/hi] is a past tense conjugation of the verb 'to explode'.

English: The bomb exploded in the city center.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਦੇ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਬੰਬ ਫਟ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is shoot. English: He shot the ball into the basket.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne ganda nu basket vich shoot kita[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi] - He (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ganda[/hi] - ball (masculine noun)

[hi]nu[/hi] - (object marker)

[hi]basket[/hi] - basket (masculine noun)

[hi]vich[/hi] - in (preposition)

[hi]shoot[/hi] - shot (verb - past tense)

[hi]kita[/hi] - did (past tense helper verb)

Key Concepts:

Object marker: [hi]nu[/hi] is used to mark the direct object of the verb. It is similar to the English preposition "to" in this case.

Preposition: [hi]vich[/hi] indicates location and translates to "in" in English.

Past Tense: [hi]shoot[/hi] is the past tense of the verb [hi]shootna[/hi] (to shoot).

Past Tense Helper Verb: [hi]kita[/hi] is used to mark the past tense of the verb in Punjabi.

Remember: [hi]ganda[/hi] is a masculine noun, so the object marker is [hi]nu[/hi]. If it was a feminine noun, the object marker would be [hi]nu[/hi].

Translation: He shot the ball into the basket.

The next word is early. English: The birds were singing early in the morning.

Punjabi: [hi]Chidiyan subah nu savere ga rahiyan si[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Chidiyan[/hi] (Birds) - This is the subject of the sentence, plural form of [hi]chidi[/hi] (bird). It is in the nominative case.

[hi]subah[/hi] (morning) - This is a noun that acts as an adverb modifying the verb "singing".

[hi]nu[/hi] (in/at) - This is a postposition that shows a location. It is followed by the noun [hi]subah[/hi].

[hi]savere[/hi] (early) - This is an adverb that modifies the verb "singing".

[hi]ga[/hi] (sing) - This is the verb in the sentence. It is in the past continuous tense.

[hi]rahiyan[/hi] (were) - This is the helping verb that is part of the past continuous tense. It is the plural form of the verb "to be" which is [hi]raha[/hi] in the singular.

[hi]si[/hi] (were) - This is the helping verb that is part of the past continuous tense.

[hi]si[/hi] - This signifies the past continuous tense, a key concept in Punjabi grammar.

English: The birds were singing early in the morning.

The next word is refuse. English: He refused to eat the food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਖਾਣ ਤੋਂ ਇਨਕਾਰ ਕਰ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਖਾਣ[/hi] - [hi]khaan[/hi] - to eat (infinitive form)

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] - from (postposition)

[hi]ਇਨਕਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]inkaar[/hi] - refusal (noun)

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - [hi]kar[/hi] - to do (verb stem)

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi] - [hi]ditta.[/hi] - gave (past tense)

Key concept: The use of the postposition [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] in this sentence is important to understand the concept of refusing something.

English: He refused to eat the food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਖਾਣ ਤੋਂ ਇਨਕਾਰ ਕਰ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is look. English: He is looking at the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਵੱਲ ਦੇਖ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book (object)

[hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] - towards (preposition, indicates direction)

[hi]ਦੇਖ[/hi] - to look (verb stem)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - is (present continuous tense marker, added to verb stem)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense marker)

The sentence structure follows the typical Subject-Verb-Object pattern. The present continuous tense is used to emphasize that the action of looking is ongoing.

The next word is figure. English: He figured out the answer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਜਵਾਬ ਲੱਭ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third-person singular pronoun "he" in the dative case, used to indicate the subject performing the action. This is similar to using "he" with "by" in English.

[hi]ਜਵਾਬ[/hi] - This means "answer".

[hi]ਲੱਭ[/hi] - This is the verb "to find" in the past tense, meaning "found". It is used with a suffix "-ਲਿਆ" to indicate that the action was successfully completed.

[hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] - This is a suffix added to verbs, indicating that an action has been successfully completed. This is similar to English "-ed" in the past tense.

This sentence is in the simple past tense and indicates that the subject successfully completed the action of finding the answer.

English: He figured out the answer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਜਵਾਬ ਲੱਭ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is party. English: We had a great party last night.

Punjabi: [hi]kal raati nu aapne ek bahut vadiya party ki ti[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]kal[/hi] - yesterday

[hi]raati[/hi] - night

[hi]nu[/hi] - postposition, means "at", "on", or "in", similar to "in" in English, this is used to indicate time

[hi]aapne[/hi] - you, informal plural, in this case it refers to "we", used with verbs of action like "have" or "did"

[hi]ek[/hi] - one, indefinite article, similar to "a" in English

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very, adverb

[hi]vadiya[/hi] - good, adjective

[hi]party[/hi] - party, noun

[hi]ki[/hi] - did, past tense of verb "karna" (to do)

Key Concepts:

Postposition: [hi]nu[/hi] is a postposition, which means it comes after the noun it modifies, similar to how prepositions come before the noun in English.

Informal Plural: [hi]aapne[/hi] is the informal plural form of "you", it's commonly used when speaking to multiple people, or when referring to a group including oneself, like in this case, where it means "we".

English: We had a great party last night.

Punjabi: [hi]kal raati nu aapne ek bahut vadiya party ki ti[/hi]

The next word is sea. English: The sea is vast and deep.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਮੁੰਦਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਵੱਡਾ ਅਤੇ ਡੂੰਘਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਮੁੰਦਰ[/hi] [hi]samundar[/hi] - sea

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] [hi]vada[/hi] - big, large

[hi]ਅਤੇ[/hi] [hi]ate[/hi] - and

[hi]ਡੂੰਘਾ[/hi] [hi]dunga[/hi] - deep

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਸਮੁੰਦਰ[/hi] [hi]samundar[/hi] is a masculine noun and the verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] agrees with it in gender.

The sentence is in the present tense, which is indicated by the verb ending [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

English: The sea is vast and deep.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਮੁੰਦਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਵੱਡਾ ਅਤੇ ਡੂੰਘਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is scientist. English: The scientist is working in the lab.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਗਿਆਨੀ ਲੈਬ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਮ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਗਿਆਨੀ[/hi] - [hi]vigyaani[/hi] - scientist (masculine)

[hi]ਲੈਬ[/hi] - [hi]lab[/hi] - lab (short for laboratory)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in (indicates location)

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - [hi]kamm[/hi] - work

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - [hi]kar[/hi] - do/make (present tense, 3rd person singular)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]riha[/hi] - is (present continuous, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, 3rd person singular)

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have genders (masculine, feminine, neuter). The scientist in this sentence is masculine, so the verb [hi]ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] ([hi]kar riha[/hi]) is also masculine.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. The word [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] ([hi]vich[/hi]) is a postposition that means "in." It comes after the noun [hi]ਲੈਬ[/hi] ([hi]lab[/hi]).

Present Continuous: Punjabi has a present continuous tense formed by using the verb [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] ([hi]riha[/hi]) (masculine singular) or [hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] ([hi]rahi[/hi]) (feminine singular) after the main verb.

English: The scientist is working in the lab.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਗਿਆਨੀ ਲੈਬ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਮ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is straight. English: The road is straight.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੜਕ ਸਿੱਧੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੜਕ[/hi] [hi]sadak[/hi] - road

[hi]ਸਿੱਧੀ[/hi] [hi]sidhi[/hi] - straight

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - is

This sentence demonstrates the use of the [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] verb, which is used for the present tense of the verb "to be." It's an important verb for constructing basic sentences in Punjabi.

The next word is district. English: He lives in the district of Ludhiana.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਲੁਧਿਆਣੇ ਦੇ ਜ਼ਿਲ੍ਹੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਹਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਲੁਧਿਆਣੇ[/hi] - This is the name of the city, Ludhiana.

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive marker, meaning "of".

[hi]ਜ਼ਿਲ੍ਹੇ[/hi] - This is the word for "district".

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is the preposition meaning "in".

[hi]ਰਹਿੰਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to live".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the ending particle of the sentence, indicating that it is a statement.

Key Concepts:

Possessive marker: The [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] marker indicates possession in Punjabi. The use of the [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] marker follows the pattern of: [name of object] [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] [item possessed]. So in the sentence, "[hi]ਲੁਧਿਆਣੇ[/hi]" is the name of the object (city) and [hi]ਜ਼ਿਲ੍ਹੇ[/hi] is the item possessed (district).

Prepositional Phrases: The sentence uses the prepositional phrase "[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] [hi]ਜ਼ਿਲ੍ਹੇ[/hi]". In Punjabi, the prepositional phrase follows the pattern of: [preposition] [object of the preposition].

Present Continuous Tense: The verb [hi]ਰਹਿੰਦਾ[/hi] is in the present continuous tense. The present continuous tense in Punjabi is formed by adding the suffix [hi]-ਦਾ[/hi] to the verb.

Translation: He lives in the district of Ludhiana.

The next word is feel. English: I feel happy today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਅੱਜ ਖੁਸ਼ੀ ਮਹਿਸੂਸ ਹੋ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - to me (dative case, object of the verb)

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - today

[hi]ਖੁਸ਼ੀ[/hi] - happiness

[hi]ਮਹਿਸੂਸ[/hi] - to feel (verb, present participle, means "being felt")

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - to be (present participle)

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - present participle of "to be", showing ongoing action, feminine singular, agreeing with the subject

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (third person, singular, present tense of verb "to be")

Key Concept: Punjabi verbs can show ongoing action (continuous aspect) by using a present participle. The present participle of "to be" is used along with another verb (in this case "feel") to show the action as continuous. The present participle of "to be" (in this case [hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi]) must agree with the subject in gender and number.

English Translation: I feel happy today.

Punjabi Translation: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਅੱਜ ਖੁਸ਼ੀ ਮਹਿਸੂਸ ਹੋ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is picture. English: The picture is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]Tasveera sohni aa[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Tasveera[/hi] - Picture

[hi]sohni[/hi] - Beautiful

[hi]aa[/hi] - Is

Key Concepts:

[hi]Tasveera[/hi] is the singular form of the word "picture."

[hi]sohni[/hi] is an adjective that describes the picture.

[hi]aa[/hi] is a present tense form of the verb "to be."

English: The picture is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]Tasveera sohni aa[/hi].

The next word is TRUE. English: It is true that he is a good person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਸੱਚ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਵਧੀਆ ਇਨਸਾਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਸੱਚ[/hi] - True (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is (present tense of the verb "to be")

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - That (conjunction)

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (pronoun)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - A/An (indefinite article)

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - Good (adjective)

[hi]ਇਨਸਾਨ[/hi] - Person (noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is. (present tense of the verb "to be")

Key concepts:

The sentence uses the present tense, indicating that the truth of the statement is ongoing.

The conjunction "that" ([hi]ਕਿ[/hi]) is used to introduce the subordinate clause that clarifies the truth.

The sentence demonstrates the use of adjectives, pronouns, and articles in Punjabi.

English: It is true that he is a good person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਸੱਚ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਵਧੀਆ ਇਨਸਾਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is myself. English: I am myself.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਆਪ ਹਾਂ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] (main) means "I" in Punjabi. It is the subject of the sentence, signifying the speaker.

[hi]ਆਪ[/hi] (aap) means "myself" or "self" in Punjabi. Here, it functions as the predicate, indicating the speaker's identity.

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] (haan) is the present tense verb "am" in Punjabi. It completes the sentence, connecting the subject and predicate.

Key concepts:

Personal Pronouns: [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] (main) is a personal pronoun representing the speaker.

Reflexive Pronouns: [hi]ਆਪ[/hi] (aap) is a reflexive pronoun, referring back to the subject (the speaker).

Verb Conjugation: [hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] (haan) is the conjugated form of the verb "to be" in the present tense, indicating the speaker's current state.

English: I am myself.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਆਪ ਹਾਂ[/hi]

The next word is destroy. English: The building was destroyed by the fire.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ ਅੱਗ ਨਾਲ ਤਬਾਹ ਹੋ ਗਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi] - [hi]imaarat[/hi] (building) - This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਅੱਗ[/hi] - [hi]agg[/hi] (fire) - This is the agent that caused the destruction.

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]naal[/hi] (with, by) - This preposition indicates the instrument of destruction.

[hi]ਤਬਾਹ[/hi] - [hi]tabaah[/hi] (destroyed) - This is the past participle of the verb "to destroy."

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - [hi]ho[/hi] (became, was) - This is an auxiliary verb that helps form the past tense.

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - [hi]gai[/hi] - This is a past tense marker.

Key concepts:

Subject-verb agreement: The subject "building" is singular, so the verb "was destroyed" is also singular.

Prepositional phrase: The prepositional phrase "[hi]ਅੱਗ ਨਾਲ[/hi]" indicates the instrument of the destruction.

Past participle: The past participle "[hi]ਤਬਾਹ[/hi]" is used to form the passive voice.

English: The building was destroyed by the fire.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ ਅੱਗ ਨਾਲ ਤਬਾਹ ਹੋ ਗਈ।[/hi]

The next word is improvement. English: He wants to see improvement in his writing.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu apne likhai vich sudhaar dekhna chahida hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usnu[/hi] - This is the third-person singular pronoun in Punjabi, meaning "he." It's like saying "he" in English.

[hi]apne[/hi] - This is a possessive adjective, meaning "his." It is used with nouns to show ownership.

[hi]likhai[/hi] - This means "writing" and is the object of the verb.

[hi]vich[/hi] - This preposition means "in." It shows where the improvement is desired.

[hi]sudhaar[/hi] - This is the noun that refers to "improvement."

[hi]dekhna[/hi] - This is the verb "to see." In this context, it means "to want to see" or "to desire to see."

[hi]chahida hai[/hi] - This is the verb phrase "to want" in Punjabi. It shows the desire for improvement.

Key Concepts:

Possessive adjectives: [hi]apne[/hi] is an important example of a possessive adjective in Punjabi. It shows that the improvement is related to "his" writing.

Prepositions: The preposition [hi]vich[/hi] is key to understanding the location of the improvement.

Verb phrases: The verb phrase [hi]chahida hai[/hi] is important for conveying the speaker's desire.

English: He wants to see improvement in his writing.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu apne likhai vich sudhaar dekhna chahida hai[/hi].

The next word is and. English: She is beautiful and kind.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]oh[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun for "she"

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]sundar[/hi] - This means "beautiful"

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "is"

[hi]ਅਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]ate[/hi] - This means "and"

[hi]ਦਿਆਲੂ[/hi] - [hi]dayalu[/hi] - This means "kind"

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "is"

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses a subject-verb-object word order.

The verb "to be" in Punjabi is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] for the singular, [hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]han[/hi] for the plural.

English: She is beautiful and kind.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ ਅਤੇ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is fully. English: He fully understands the lesson.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਾਠ ਪੂਰੀ ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ ਸਮਝਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਪਾਠ[/hi] - Lesson (masculine noun)

[hi]ਪੂਰੀ[/hi] - Fully, completely (adjective, feminine singular)

[hi]ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - Way, manner (feminine noun)

[hi]ਸਮਝਦਾ[/hi] - Understands (verb, present tense, 3rd person singular masculine)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (copula, present tense)

The sentence uses the feminine form of [hi]ਪੂਰੀ[/hi] because it is modifying the feminine noun [hi]ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi]. The use of [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] at the end of the sentence indicates that the subject is masculine.

Key concepts:

The use of the copula [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] to connect the subject and the predicate.

The use of the adjective [hi]ਪੂਰੀ[/hi] to modify the noun [hi]ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi].

The use of the masculine singular verb form [hi]ਸਮਝਦਾ[/hi] because the subject is masculine.

English: He fully understands the lesson.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਾਠ ਪੂਰੀ ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ ਸਮਝਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is expensive. English: This car is very expensive.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh gadi bahut mehngi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This

[hi]gadi[/hi] - car

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]mehngi[/hi] - expensive

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]Eh[/hi] is a demonstrative pronoun. It is used to point to a specific car that is being talked about.

[hi]Gaadi[/hi] is a feminine noun and takes a feminine adjective in Punjabi [hi]mehngi[/hi].

[hi]Mehngi[/hi] is the feminine form of the adjective [hi]mehnga[/hi] which means expensive.

English: This car is very expensive.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh gadi bahut mehngi hai[/hi].

The next word is should. English: We should go home.

Punjabi: [hi]Aasां nu ghar jaana chahida hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Aasां[/hi] is the plural form of the first-person pronoun "we," which can be literally translated as "us".

[hi]nu[/hi] is the post-position indicating direction and can be translated as "to."

[hi]ghar[/hi] means "home."

[hi]jaana[/hi] is the verb meaning "to go."

[hi]chahida[/hi] is the modal auxiliary verb meaning "should."

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense auxiliary verb that indicates the present tense and in this sentence helps to convey the "should" aspect.

This sentence uses the modal auxiliary verb [hi]chahida[/hi] to indicate obligation. The sentence structure is [Subject] + [post-position] + [Object] + [verb] + [modal auxiliary verb] + [present tense auxiliary verb]. It is important to note that Punjabi, unlike English, doesn't always have a strict subject-verb-object order.

The next word is vehicle. English: He drives a new vehicle.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਨਵਾਂ ਵਾਹਨ ਚਲਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਨਵਾਂ[/hi] - new (adjective)

[hi]ਵਾਹਨ[/hi] - vehicle (noun)

[hi]ਚਲਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - drives (verb in present tense)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (present tense auxiliary verb)

Key concepts:

The sentence is in the present tense.

The noun [hi]ਵਾਹਨ[/hi] is modified by the adjective [hi]ਨਵਾਂ[/hi].

The verb [hi]ਚਲਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] is conjugated for the third person singular.

English: He drives a new vehicle.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਨਵਾਂ ਵਾਹਨ ਚਲਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is call. English: He called me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਫ਼ੋਨ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine form of the verb "to do" in the past tense. It means "he" or "she".

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - This means "me".

[hi]ਫ਼ੋਨ[/hi] - This means "call".

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do". In this case, it means "called".

The sentence translates to: He called me.

The next word is quiet. English: Please be quiet.

Punjabi: [hi]Kripya chup reh[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Kripya[/hi] means "please" in Punjabi. It's a polite way to make a request.

[hi]chup[/hi] means "quiet" This is a common word for silencing something, like a person or a sound.

[hi]reh[/hi] means "stay" It implies that the quietness should continue.

Key concepts:

This is a very common phrase used to ask someone to be quiet.

The word order in Punjabi is similar to English, so it is easy to understand the meaning of the sentence.

The use of [hi]Kripya[/hi] makes the request polite.

Translation: Please be quiet.

The next word is agency. English: The travel agency is on Main Street.

Punjabi: [hi]ਯਾਤਰਾ ਏਜੰਸੀ ਮੇਨ ਸਟ੍ਰੀਟ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਯਾਤਰਾ[/hi] [yaatra] - travel

[hi]ਏਜੰਸੀ[/hi] [ejansī] - agency

[hi]ਮੇਨ ਸਟ੍ਰੀਟ[/hi] [mein striit] - Main Street

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] [te] - on (location)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hai] - is

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi word for "agency" is [hi]ਏਜੰਸੀ[/hi] [ejansī].

You can use the preposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] [te] to indicate location, similar to "on" in English.

English: The travel agency is on Main Street.

Punjabi: [hi]ਯਾਤਰਾ ਏਜੰਸੀ ਮੇਨ ਸਟ੍ਰੀਟ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is politics. English: Politics is a part of everyday life.

Punjabi: [hi]Rajneeti roz-marra di zindagi da hissa hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Rajneeti[/hi] - politics

[hi]roz-marra[/hi] - everyday

[hi]di[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]zindagi[/hi] - life

[hi]da[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]hissa[/hi] - part

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

[hi]di[/hi] and [hi]da[/hi] are possessive particles, similar to "of" in English

[hi]roz-marra[/hi] is a compound word, literally meaning "daily-daily"

This sentence showcases the use of possessive particles and compound words in Punjabi. It's a simple sentence structure that's easy to understand and remember.

The next word is close. English: The door is close to the window.

Punjabi: [hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਖਿੜਕੀ ਦੇ ਨੇੜੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ[/hi] - [hi]darvaaza[/hi] - door (masculine)

[hi]ਖਿੜਕੀ[/hi] - [hi]khirki[/hi] - window (feminine)

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] - of (possessive case marker for feminine nouns)

[hi]ਨੇੜੇ[/hi] - [hi]neṛe[/hi] - near, close to

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, third person singular)

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have gender, which affects the use of possessive markers and verb conjugation. In this sentence, [hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ[/hi] is masculine and [hi]ਖਿੜਕੀ[/hi] is feminine.

Possessive Case: The possessive case marker [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] is used to show possession of the feminine noun [hi]ਖਿੜਕੀ[/hi].

Word Order: Punjabi generally follows a Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) word order, as seen in this sentence.

Translation: The door is near the window.

The next word is weapon. English: He used a weapon to defend himself.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣਾ ਬਚਾਅ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਹਥਿਆਰ ਵਰਤਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is a combination of the third person singular pronoun "[hi]ਉਹ[/hi]" (he) and the past tense marker "[hi]ਨੇ[/hi]". It means "he" in the past tense.

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun meaning "his" or "his own".

[hi]ਬਚਾਅ[/hi] - This is the noun meaning "defense".

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb "to do".

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "for".

[hi]ਹਥਿਆਰ[/hi] - This is the noun meaning "weapon".

[hi]ਵਰਤਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "[hi]ਵਰਤਣਾ[/hi]" meaning "to use".

Key concepts:

Possessive pronouns: [hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] is a key concept to master in Punjabi. It shows that something belongs to the subject of the sentence.

Infinitive form: The infinitive form of verbs like "[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi]" is very common in Punjabi. It indicates the purpose or reason for an action.

Past tense markers: Punjabi verbs change depending on the tense. You will see a lot of past tense markers like "[hi]ਨੇ[/hi]".

English: He used a weapon to defend himself.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣਾ ਬਚਾਅ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਹਥਿਆਰ ਵਰਤਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is traditional. English: This is a traditional Punjabi dish.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh ek parampraagat Punjabi vajan hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This

[hi]ek[/hi] - a

[hi]parampraagat[/hi] - traditional

[hi]Punjabi[/hi] - Punjabi

[hi]vajan[/hi] - dish

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]parampraagat[/hi]: This is an important word to know when discussing Punjabi culture and traditions. It is a very common word in Punjabi.

English: This is a traditional Punjabi dish.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh ek parampraagat Punjabi vajan hai.[/hi]

The next word is purchase. English: I purchased a new book.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਇੱਕ ਨਵੀਂ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਖ਼ਰੀਦੀ ਹੈ। [hi]main ikk navi kitab kharidi hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

ਮੈਂ [hi]main[/hi] - I (Subject Pronoun)

ਇੱਕ [hi]ikk[/hi] - a/one (Indefinite Article)

ਨਵੀਂ [hi]navi[/hi] - new (Adjective)

ਕਿਤਾਬ [hi]kitab[/hi] - book (Noun)

ਖ਼ਰੀਦੀ [hi]kharidi[/hi] - purchased (Past Tense Verb)

ਹੈ [hi]hai[/hi] - is (Auxiliary Verb)

Key Concept:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives agree with the noun in gender. "ਕਿਤਾਬ [hi]kitab[/hi]" is feminine, so the adjective "ਨਵੀਂ [hi]navi[/hi]" must also be feminine.

Past Tense: The past tense of verbs in Punjabi is formed by adding a suffix to the verb stem. In this case, "ਖ਼ਰੀਦ [hi]kharid[/hi]" (to purchase) becomes "ਖ਼ਰੀਦੀ [hi]kharidi[/hi]".

English: I purchased a new book.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਇੱਕ ਨਵੀਂ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਖ਼ਰੀਦੀ ਹੈ। [hi]main ikk navi kitab kharidi hai.[/hi]

The next word is thus. English: Thus, the students learned the new words.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ, ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਨੇ ਨਵੇਂ ਸ਼ਬਦ ਸਿੱਖੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - Way, manner

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] - Students (plural)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - Have (past tense, subject is plural)

[hi]ਨਵੇਂ[/hi] - New

[hi]ਸ਼ਬਦ[/hi] - Words

[hi]ਸਿੱਖੇ[/hi] - Learned

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਇਸ[/hi] is used to introduce the consequence or result of a previous statement.

The word [hi]ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] is a versatile word that can be used to express how, why, or in what way something happens.

The particle [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] marks the past tense of verbs and is used with plural subjects.

Translation using espeak-ng:

```
espeak-ng "ਇਸ ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ, ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਨੇ ਨਵੇਂ ਸ਼ਬਦ ਸਿੱਖੇ।"

```

The next word is extremely. English: He is extremely tired.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਥੱਕਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Very, extremely (adverb)

[hi]ਥੱਕਿਆ[/hi] - Tired (adjective)

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - Being, state of being (past participle of [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - to be)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is (present tense of [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - to be)

Key concepts:

Adverbs of degree: [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] is an adverb that modifies the adjective [hi]ਥੱਕਿਆ[/hi], indicating the degree of tiredness.

Past participle: [hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] is a past participle used to describe the state of being tired.

Present tense: [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is used to indicate the present state of being tired.

English: He is extremely tired.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਥੱਕਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is mother. English: My mother is a very kind person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰੀ ਮਾਂ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਹੈ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰੀ [/hi] - [hi]meri[/hi] means "my" and is the possessive form of the word [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] which means "I."

[hi]ਮਾਂ [/hi] - [hi]maa[/hi] means "mother" and is an important word to know as it is used frequently.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ [/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] means "very" and is a common intensifier used in Punjabi.

[hi]ਦਿਆਲੂ [/hi] - [hi]dayaloo[/hi] means "kind" and is a positive adjective that can be used to describe people.

[hi]ਹੈ। [/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] is a verb that means "is" and is used to indicate the present tense. It is an important verb to learn as it is used in many different contexts.

This sentence is a simple declarative sentence that uses the present tense. It is a good example of how to use the possessive form of the word [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] as well as the adjective [hi]ਦਿਆਲੂ[/hi].

English: My mother is a very kind person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰੀ ਮਾਂ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਹੈ। [/hi]

The next word is path. English: The path leads to the village.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਾਹ ਪਿੰਡ ਨੂੰ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰਾਹ[/hi] - path, road. The word [hi]ਰਾਹ[/hi] is a masculine noun.

[hi]ਪਿੰਡ[/hi] - village. The word [hi]ਪਿੰਡ[/hi] is a masculine noun.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - to. This is a postposition, which means it is placed after the noun it modifies. In this case, it is modifying the noun [hi]ਪਿੰਡ[/hi], so it means "to the village."

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - goes, leads. This is a present tense verb.

Important grammatical concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have gender. In this sentence, both [hi]ਰਾਹ[/hi] and [hi]ਪਿੰਡ[/hi] are masculine. This means they will be used with masculine verb forms and pronouns.

Postpositions: Postpositions are words that are placed after the noun they modify. In this sentence, the postposition [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] is used to show direction, like "to" or "towards".

Verb Conjugation: Punjabi verbs are conjugated based on tense, person, and number. The verb in this sentence is [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi], which means "goes" or "leads". The ending [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is the third person singular present tense ending, indicating that the subject is singular and the action is happening in the present.

English: The path leads to the village.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਾਹ ਪਿੰਡ ਨੂੰ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is wave. English: The wave crashed against the shore.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲਹਿਰ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਤੇ ਟੁੱਟ ਗਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲਹਿਰ[/hi] - [hi]lahr[/hi] - wave

[hi]ਕਿਨਾਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]kinare[/hi] - shore

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]te[/hi] - on

[hi]ਟੁੱਟ[/hi] - [hi]tut[/hi] - break

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - [hi]gai[/hi] - went/past tense

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] is a postposition that is similar to the English "on."

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] is a past tense verb ending.

Direct Translation: Wave on shore broke went.

The next word is stand. English: He stands by the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਰੁੱਖ ਦੇ ਕੋਲ ਖੜ੍ਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "he." This is a subject pronoun, like "he," "she," or "it" in English.

[hi]ਰੁੱਖ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "tree." This is a noun, which is a person, place, or thing.

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "of." It is a preposition which shows the relationship between two words. This would be like "the cat of the house" or "the house of the cat."

[hi]ਕੋਲ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "near" or "by." This is another preposition which shows the relationship between two words. For example, "The man is near the house" or "The book is by the table."

[hi]ਖੜ੍ਹਾ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "standing." This is a verb, which is an action word. The verb tells us what the subject is doing.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "is." It's a conjugation of the verb "to be." It connects the subject and predicate of the sentence. Like "he is standing" or "the man is tall." Note that Punjabi uses a final particle like "ਹੈ।" or "ਨੇ।" to make the sentence complete.

Key concepts:

Subject pronouns are words that take the place of a noun.

Prepositions show the relationship between words in a sentence.

Verbs tell us what the subject is doing.

English: He stands by the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਰੁੱਖ ਦੇ ਕੋਲ ਖੜ੍ਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is no. English: I don't have any.

Punjabi: ਮੇਰੇ ਕੋਲ ਕੁਝ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ।

[hi]mere kol kuchh nahin hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]mere[/hi] - my. This word is a possessive pronoun, and changes based on gender. It is used to show who owns the item, in this case, "I".

[hi]kol[/hi] - at, with, near. This word indicates possession.

[hi]kuchh[/hi] - something, anything. This word is used to denote a lack of something. It's important to note that it is gender neutral.

[hi]nahin[/hi] - not. This is a negative particle, often used in conjunction with other words to negate a statement.

[hi]hai[/hi] - is, am, are. This is a form of the verb "to be", which changes based on the subject and tense.

In this example, [hi]hai[/hi] is conjugated to agree with the subject [hi]mere[/hi], which is singular and in the third person.

Key Concept: The sentence is in the present tense and the negative form.

The next word is night. English: The night is dark and cold.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਾਤ ਹਨੇਰਾ ਔਰ ਠੰਡਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰਾਤ[/hi] - [hi]raat[/hi] - night (feminine)

[hi]ਹਨੇਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]hanera[/hi] - dark (masculine)

[hi]ਔਰ[/hi] - [hi]aur[/hi] - and

[hi]ਠੰਡਾ[/hi] - [hi]thandaa[/hi] - cold (masculine)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, third person singular)

Key Concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns have gender. Here, "night" ([hi]ਰਾਤ[/hi]) is feminine, and "dark" ([hi]ਹਨੇਰਾ[/hi]) is masculine. This affects the adjective ([hi]ਠੰਡਾ[/hi]) used to describe them.

Agreement: The adjective ([hi]ਠੰਡਾ[/hi]) agrees in gender with the noun it modifies. Since "night" is feminine, the adjective is masculine, as it is describing the night.

Word order: The basic word order in Punjabi is Subject-Verb-Object (SVO), similar to English.

Translation: The night is dark and cold.

The next word is city. English: The city is very large.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਵੱਡਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi] - [hi]shahar[/hi] - city (masculine)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] - [hi]vadḍā[/hi] - large (masculine)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, third person singular)

Key concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have grammatical gender (masculine or feminine). [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi] is masculine.

Adjectives: Punjabi adjectives agree with the nouns they modify in gender and number. [hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] (large) is masculine singular to agree with [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi].

Word order: Punjabi is a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) language, similar to English.

English: The city is very large.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਵੱਡਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is presence. English: His presence was felt in the room.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਮਰੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਉਸਦੀ ਹਾਜ਼ਰੀ ਮਹਿਸੂਸ ਕੀਤੀ ਗਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਮਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]kamre[/hi] - room (masculine singular)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in, within (postposition)

[hi]ਉਸਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]usdi[/hi] - his, her (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਹਾਜ਼ਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]haajri[/hi] - presence

[hi]ਮਹਿਸੂਸ[/hi] - [hi]mehsus[/hi] - felt (past participle)

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]kiiti[/hi] - done (past tense of [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] - [hi]karna[/hi] - to do)

[hi]ਗਈ।[/hi] - [hi]gai.[/hi] - went (past tense of [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]jana[/hi] - to go)

Key Concepts:

Punjabi is an agglutinative language, meaning words are formed by adding suffixes and prefixes to a base word. This is evident in the construction of [hi]ਮਹਿਸੂਸ ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]mehsus kiiti[/hi] (felt done)

The postposition [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] is used to indicate location and follows the noun it modifies ([hi]ਕਮਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]kamre[/hi] - room)

The sentence structure is subject-verb-object (SVO) like English.

The use of the past participle [hi]ਮਹਿਸੂਸ[/hi] - [hi]mehsus[/hi] (felt) with the past tense verb [hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]kiiti[/hi] (done) is a common way to express a passive voice in Punjabi.

English: His presence was felt in the room.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਮਰੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਉਸਦੀ ਹਾਜ਼ਰੀ ਮਹਿਸੂਸ ਕੀਤੀ ਗਈ।[/hi]

The next word is scheme. English: The artist's scheme to win the competition was clever.

Punjabi: [hi]Kalaakār nu jittan de lai jo yojna banaayi si o bahut chalaak si[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Kalaakār[/hi] - Artist (masculine)

[hi]nu[/hi] - To (dative case marker)

[hi]jittan[/hi] - To win (verb in infinitive form)

[hi]de lai[/hi] - For (purpose marker)

[hi]jo[/hi] - Which (relative pronoun)

[hi]yojna[/hi] - Scheme, plan

[hi]banaayi si[/hi] - Made (past tense, perfect aspect)

[hi]o[/hi] - It (pronoun referring to the scheme)

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Very

[hi]chalaak[/hi] - Clever

Key Concepts:

Dative Case: The marker [hi]nu[/hi] indicates the indirect object (the artist) of the verb "jittan" (to win).

Infinitive: The verb [hi]jittan[/hi] is in the infinitive form, which is used to express the purpose of the scheme.

Past Perfect: The verb [hi]banaayi si[/hi] is in the past perfect tense, indicating that the scheme was made before the event (the competition) took place.

Translation: The artist's scheme to win the competition was very clever.

The next word is response. Please provide an English word so I can create a Punjabi sentence with a breakdown of its grammar and meaning. I am excited to share my knowledge of the Punjabi language with you!

The next word is corner. English: The corner of the building is broken.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ ਦਾ ਕੋਨਾ ਟੁੱਟਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi] - [hi]imarāt[/hi] - building

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]dā[/hi] - possessive particle, "of the"

[hi]ਕੋਨਾ[/hi] - [hi]konā[/hi] - corner

[hi]ਟੁੱਟਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]tuṭṭiā[/hi] - broken

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]hoiyā[/hi] - past participle of [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - "to be"

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, nouns have grammatical genders. [hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi] (building) is feminine, so the possessive particle [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] ("of the") is used.

Past Participle: [hi]ਟੁੱਟਿਆ[/hi] ("broken") is a past participle, which is used to form a perfect tense.

English: The corner of the building is broken.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ ਦਾ ਕੋਨਾ ਟੁੱਟਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is council. English: The city council will meet next week.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਦੀ ਕੌਂਸਲ ਅਗਲੇ ਹਫ਼ਤੇ ਮਿਲੇਗੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi] - [hi]shahar[/hi] - city

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of the

[hi]ਕੌਂਸਲ[/hi] - [hi]kaunsal[/hi] - council

[hi]ਅਗਲੇ[/hi] - [hi]agle[/hi] - next

[hi]ਹਫ਼ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]hafte[/hi] - week

[hi]ਮਿਲੇਗੀ[/hi] - [hi]milegi[/hi] - will meet

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a possessive particle, similar to "of" in English.

[hi]ਮਿਲੇਗੀ[/hi] is a future tense verb, indicating that the meeting will happen in the future.

Translation: The city council will meet next week.

The next word is much. English: It is much too hot today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj bahut garmi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - today

[hi]bahut[/hi] - much, very (this is a common intensifier that can be used with many adjectives and adverbs)

[hi]garmi[/hi] - heat

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concept: The use of [hi]bahut[/hi] as an intensifier is common in Punjabi and is a great way to add emphasis to your sentences.

The next word is through. English: He went through the door.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਲੰਘਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ[/hi] - door (masculine singular noun)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚੋਂ[/hi] - through (preposition, indicating movement from inside to outside)

[hi]ਲੰਘਿਆ।[/hi] - went (past tense of verb "ਲੰਘਣਾ", to go through)

The sentence follows the standard subject-verb-object structure of Punjabi, with the preposition "ਵਿੱਚੋਂ" specifying the path of movement. The verb "ਲੰਘਣਾ" is conjugated in the past tense, indicating a completed action.

English: He went through the door.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ੇ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਲੰਘਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is such. English: She is such a kind person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਇੰਨੀ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਔਰਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - she/he

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a/one

[hi]ਇੰਨੀ[/hi] - [hi]inni[/hi] - such

[hi]ਦਿਆਲੂ[/hi] - [hi]dayaloo[/hi] - kind

[hi]ਔਰਤ[/hi] - [hi]aurat[/hi] - woman/female

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is/am/are

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਇੰਨੀ[/hi] is used to emphasize the quality of "kindness" in the sentence.

[hi]ਔਰਤ[/hi] is a feminine noun, hence the use of [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (she) for the subject.

English: She is such a kind person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਇੰਨੀ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਔਰਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is component. English: The engine is a vital component of the car.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਦਾ ਇੰਜਣ ਇੱਕ ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ ਹਿੱਸਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] [gaddi] - Car (subject)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [da] - possessive particle, indicates 'of the car'

[hi]ਇੰਜਣ[/hi] [injṇ] - Engine (object)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] [ikk] - One, a

[hi]ਜ਼ਰੂਰੀ[/hi] [zaruri] - Vital, essential, necessary

[hi]ਹਿੱਸਾ[/hi] [hissa] - Part, component

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hai] - Is (copula verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [da] is used to show possession. It comes directly after the noun that is possessed.

Subject-Verb-Object: This sentence follows a common word order in Punjabi, which is Subject-Verb-Object.

Copula Verb: The verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hai] is a 'copula' verb that links the subject to the predicate (the rest of the sentence). It is similar to the verb 'to be' in English. It changes forms based on gender, number, and tense. In this case, it is in the singular, present tense, and masculine form.

The next word is line. English: The line is long.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲਾਈਨ ਲੰਬੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲਾਈਨ[/hi] (line) - This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਲੰਬੀ[/hi] (long) - This is the adjective describing the line.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is) - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" (which is usually omitted in English) and connects the subject to the adjective.

The sentence is in the simple present tense, which means it describes a state that is true at the moment of speaking.

Remember, the Punjabi word order is subject-adjective-verb.

The next word is speed. English: The train's speed is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਦੀ ਰਫ਼ਤਾਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]gaddi[/hi] - train. This is a common word for any kind of vehicle, but often refers to train.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of, belonging to. It's a possessive particle.

[hi]ਰਫ਼ਤਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]raftaar[/hi] - speed, pace, velocity. The word [hi]raftaar[/hi] is from Persian and is used commonly in Punjabi. Think of speed as a synonym for [hi]raftaar[/hi].

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very, extremely. This is an intensifier. It modifies the next word.

[hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]zyaada[/hi] - more, excessive, too much, a lot. It is another intensifier like [hi]bahut[/hi].

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is, exists. This is the verb "to be" in the present tense.

The sentence is a simple declarative sentence stating a fact.

English: The train's speed is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਦੀ ਰਫ਼ਤਾਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is occur. English: This often occurs in the winter.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਅਕਸਰ ਸਰਦੀਆਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਅਕਸਰ[/hi] - often

[hi]ਸਰਦੀਆਂ[/hi] - winter

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ[/hi] - occurs (present tense)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense)

Key concepts:

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a postposition that indicates location and is used after the noun it modifies.

The verb [hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ[/hi] is in the present tense and indicates an action that happens repeatedly or regularly.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is a present tense verb used with the noun [hi]ਇਹ[/hi] to indicate that something exists.

Literal Translation: This often in-winter occurs is.

The next word is somewhere. English: He lives somewhere in Punjab.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪੰਜਾਬ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਤੇ ਰਹਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ[/hi] - Punjab

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਕਿਤੇ[/hi] - somewhere

[hi]ਰਹਿੰਦਾ[/hi] - lives (masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is.

Key concepts:

[hi]ਕਿਤੇ[/hi] is used to indicate an unspecified location.

The [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (in) is used to indicate that someone lives within a region.

This is a simple sentence that combines a subject, verb, and a prepositional phrase to indicate location.

The next word is circumstance. English: The circumstances are such that we must leave.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਾਲਾਤ[/hi] ਇਸ ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ ਦੇ ਹਨ ਕਿ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਜਾਣਾ ਪਵੇਗਾ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹਾਲਾਤ[/hi] [hi]halaat[/hi] - This is the word for "circumstances". It is a plural noun.

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] [hi]is[/hi] - This means "these" and is a demonstrative adjective.

[hi]ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] [hi]tarhan[/hi] - This is the word for "way" or "manner" and is a noun.

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] [hi]de[/hi] - This is a possessive marker used here to mean "of" or "belonging to."

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] [hi]han[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be" for plural subjects.

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] [hi]ki[/hi] - This is a conjunction meaning "that".

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] [hi]saanu[/hi] - This means "to us" and is the dative case of the pronoun "we".

[hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] [hi]jana[/hi] - This is the infinitive verb "to go".

[hi]ਪਵੇਗਾ[/hi] [hi]pavega[/hi] - This is the future tense of the verb "to have to" and is used to express necessity.

Key concepts:

The use of the conjunction "[hi]ਕਿ[/hi]" [hi]ki[/hi] to introduce a dependent clause.

The use of the possessive marker "[hi]ਦੇ[/hi]" [hi]de[/hi] to show possession.

The use of the future tense to express necessity.

English: The circumstances are such that we must leave.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਾਲਾਤ[/hi] ਇਸ ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ ਦੇ ਹਨ ਕਿ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਜਾਣਾ ਪਵੇਗਾ।

The next word is certain. English: He is certain about his future.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਭਵਿੱਖ ਬਾਰੇ ਯਕੀਨੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - his/her/its (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਭਵਿੱਖ[/hi] - future

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - about

[hi]ਯਕੀਨੀ[/hi] - certain

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Pronouns: [hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] is used to show possession of the future.

Prepositional Phrase: [hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] introduces a prepositional phrase describing the topic of certainty.

Present Tense: [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] indicates that the state of being certain is happening now.

Translation: He is certain about his future.

The next word is clock. English: The clock is ticking.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘੜੀ ਵੱਜ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਘੜੀ[/hi] (ghari) - clock

[hi]ਵੱਜ[/hi] (wajj) - to ring/tick (verb)

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] (rahi) - is (present continuous tense marker)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai) - is (present tense marker)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਵੱਜ[/hi] is a common verb used for clocks and time.

The present continuous tense is formed by adding [hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] to the verb stem.

The sentence structure is similar to English: subject (clock) + verb (ticking) + auxiliary verb (is).

Translation: The clock is ticking.

The next word is full. English: The cup is full of water.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਪ ਪਾਣੀ ਨਾਲ ਭਰਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੱਪ[/hi] - [hi]kapp[/hi] - "cup" (masculine noun)

[hi]ਪਾਣੀ[/hi] - [hi]paani[/hi] - "water" (masculine noun)

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]nal[/hi] - "with" (this indicates what the cup is full of)

[hi]ਭਰਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]bharya[/hi] - "filled" (past participle of the verb [hi]ਭਰਨਾ[/hi] - [hi]bharna[/hi] - "to fill").

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]hoya[/hi] - "is" (past participle of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]hona[/hi] - "to be").

Key concept: This sentence uses the past participle of both verbs ([hi]ਭਰਨਾ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi]) to indicate a state of being. The word order is important. The cup is the subject, followed by the object of the preposition "with" (water), then the participle of "fill" and lastly the participle of "be."

English: The cup is full of water.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਪ ਪਾਣੀ ਨਾਲ ਭਰਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is among. English: The children are playing among the trees.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਦਰੱਖਤਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi] - [hi]bachche[/hi] - children (plural)

[hi]ਦਰੱਖਤਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]darakhtan[/hi] - trees (plural, in the locative case indicating "among" the trees)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in (used to indicate location, in this case, "among")

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - [hi]khed[/hi] - play (present continuous tense, indicating an ongoing action)

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - [hi]rahe[/hi] - are (present continuous tense marker)

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]han[/hi] - are (plural verb)

Key Concepts:

Locative Case: [hi]ਦਰੱਖਤਾਂ[/hi] is in the locative case, which indicates location, similar to "among" the trees.

Present Continuous Tense: [hi]ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ[/hi] is in the present continuous tense, indicating an ongoing action, similar to "are playing."

Remember, [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a useful preposition to indicate location, and [hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] is a key part of the present continuous tense in Punjabi.

English: The children are playing among the trees.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਦਰੱਖਤਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is able. English: He is able to speak Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਬੋਲ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third-person singular pronoun for "he."

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - This is the noun for "Punjabi."

[hi]ਬੋਲ[/hi] - This is the verb "to speak."

[hi]ਸਕਦਾ[/hi] - This is the "ability" suffix that is added to the verb [hi]ਬੋਲ[/hi] to make it "able to speak."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense conjugation of the verb "to be" for the third-person singular, meaning "is."

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the verb "to be" with the ability suffix to express ability.

The verb "to speak" is conjugated with the ability suffix, [hi]ਸਕਦਾ[/hi].

Important Note: The sentence structure in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), meaning the subject comes first, then the object, and then the verb.

The next word is exist. English: The book exists.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] means "book". This is a noun.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] means "is". This is the present tense of the verb "to be" and indicates existence.

Key concept:

The verb "to be" in Punjabi is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) and it takes a different form depending on the noun's gender and number. Here we used the singular form.

English: The book exists.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is family. English: My family is very supportive.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਹਾਇਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] - means "my" and is the possessive form of the first-person singular pronoun, [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi].

[hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] - means "family" and is a noun.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - means "very" and is an adverb.

[hi]ਸਹਾਇਕ[/hi] - means "supportive" and is an adjective.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - means "is" and is the present tense of the verb "to be."

Key Concepts:

Possessive Pronouns [hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] indicates that the family belongs to the speaker.

Nouns [hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] is the subject of the sentence.

Adjectives [hi]ਸਹਾਇਕ[/hi] modifies the noun, describing the type of family.

Adverbs [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] modifies the adjective [hi]ਸਹਾਇਕ[/hi] by intensifying its meaning.

Verbs [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the main verb of the sentence.

Remember: [hi]ਸਹਾਇਕ[/hi] is a useful word in Punjabi, similar to the English "helpful" or "supportive."

The next word is focus. English: The student needs to focus on their studies.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੀ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ 'ਤੇ ਧਿਆਨ ਕੇਂਦਰਿਤ ਕਰਨ ਦੀ ਲੋੜ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]vidyaarthi[/hi] - student

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - to, for (in this case, it indicates the subject of the verb)

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - [hi]aapni[/hi] - their (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ[/hi] - [hi]padhai[/hi] - studies

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]'te[/hi] - on, upon

[hi]ਧਿਆਨ[/hi] - [hi]dhyaan[/hi] - attention, focus

[hi]ਕੇਂਦਰਿਤ[/hi] - [hi]kendrit[/hi] - centered, focused

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] - [hi]karan[/hi] - to do, to make

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਲੋੜ[/hi] - [hi]loor[/hi] - need, requirement

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

The sentence uses the postposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] ([hi]'te[/hi]) to indicate the object of the verb [hi]ਕੇਂਦਰਿਤ[/hi] ([hi]kendrit[/hi]).

The possessive pronoun [hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] ([hi]aapni[/hi]) is used to emphasize that the student is focusing on their own studies.

The verb [hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] ([hi]karan[/hi]) is used in the infinitive form, [hi]ਕਰਨ ਦੀ[/hi] ([hi]karan di[/hi]), which indicates the need or necessity of focusing on the studies.

Remember: [hi]ਕੇਂਦਰਿਤ ਕਰਨ[/hi] ([hi]kendrit karan[/hi]) is a common expression in Punjabi that means "to focus on." The postposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] ([hi]'te[/hi]) is also used with many other verbs to indicate the object of the action.

The next word is choice. English: He has the choice to go or stay.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ ਜਾਣ ਜਾਂ ਰਹਿਣ ਦਾ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] = [hi]usnu[/hi] = to him/her

[hi]ਜਾਣ[/hi] = [hi]jaan[/hi] = to go

[hi]ਜਾਂ[/hi] = [hi]jaan[/hi] = or

[hi]ਰਹਿਣ[/hi] = [hi]rehn[/hi] = to stay

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] = [hi]da[/hi] = of

[hi]ਵਿਕਲਪ[/hi] = [hi]vikalp[/hi] = choice

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] = [hi]hai[/hi] = is

Key concepts:

The Punjabi language uses a postpositional structure, meaning prepositions come after the noun. For example, we say [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] [hi]ਵਿਕਲਪ[/hi] ([hi]usnu[/hi] [hi]vikalp[/hi]) instead of [hi]ਵਿਕਲਪ[/hi] [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] ([hi]vikalp[/hi] [hi]usnu[/hi]).

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] is used to indicate possession, similar to "of" in English.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense of the verb "to be."

English: He has the choice to go or stay.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ ਜਾਣ ਜਾਂ ਰਹਿਣ ਦਾ ਵਿਕਲਪ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is run. English: He is running.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੌੜ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] means "he"

[hi]ਦੌੜ[/hi] - [hi]daur[/hi] means "run"

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]riha[/hi] means "is" (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] is the verb "to be" in the present tense

[hi]।[/hi] - [hi].[/hi] is the period or full stop

The sentence uses the present continuous tense, which indicates an action that is ongoing at the moment of speaking.

The next word is either. English: You can either go or stay.

Punjabi: [hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ ਜਾਂ ਤਾਂ ਜਾ ਸਕਦੇ ਹੋ ਜਾਂ ਰਹਿ ਸਕਦੇ ਹੋ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ[/hi] - You (plural) - this is the subject of the sentence

[hi]ਜਾਂ ਤਾਂ[/hi] - Either - This is a conjunction which connects two phrases

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - go - This is the first verb in the sentence

[hi]ਸਕਦੇ ਹੋ[/hi] - can - This is the auxiliary verb that adds possibility to the verb

[hi]ਜਾਂ[/hi] - or - This is a conjunction which connects two phrases

[hi]ਰਹਿ[/hi] - stay - This is the second verb in the sentence

[hi]ਸਕਦੇ ਹੋ।[/hi] - can - This is the auxiliary verb that adds possibility to the verb

Key concepts:

[hi]ਜਾਂ ਤਾਂ[/hi] - Either - This is a common conjunction used to express a choice between two options.

[hi]ਸਕਦੇ ਹੋ[/hi] - can - This is a common auxiliary verb used to express possibility or ability.

Translation: You can either go or stay.

The next word is hurt. English: I hurt my knee.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਆਪਣਾ ਘੁੱਟਾ ਦੁਖਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - means "to me", this is the object of the verb "hurt"

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - means "my", used to show possession of the knee

[hi]ਘੁੱਟਾ[/hi] - means "knee"

[hi]ਦੁਖਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - means "hurts", this is the verb "hurt" conjugated in the present tense, This is also a very important concept in Punjabi grammar: It is the present continuous tense, and it is formed by adding the suffix [hi]ਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] to the root of the verb.

English: I hurt my knee.

The next word is window. English: The window is open.

Punjabi: [hi]ਖਿੜਕੀ ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਖਿੜਕੀ[/hi] - khidki - means window

[hi]ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹੀ[/hi] - khulhi - means open

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - hai - means is

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions (words that come after the noun) to express grammatical relations, like the English preposition "of". Here, [hi]ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹੀ[/hi] functions as a postposition indicating the state of the window.

Punjabi uses the copula [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] to connect the subject ([hi]ਖਿੜਕੀ[/hi]) with the predicate ([hi]ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹੀ[/hi]) in this sentence.

English: The window is open.

Punjabi: [hi]ਖਿੜਕੀ ਖੁੱਲ੍ਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is pick. English: He picked up the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਚੁੱਕੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun in the past tense, meaning "he" or "him."

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - This is the word for "book" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਚੁੱਕੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense form of the verb "to pick up" in Punjabi. It is used when the subject is masculine.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses different verb conjugations for different genders.

The past tense in Punjabi is often indicated by adding a suffix to the verb stem.

English: He picked up the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਚੁੱਕੀ।[/hi]

The next word is next. English: The next chapter is very interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]Agla adhyay bahut dilchasp hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Agla[/hi] means "next". It is an adjective and it modifies the noun "[hi]adhyay[/hi]".

[hi]adhyay[/hi] means "chapter".

[hi]bahut[/hi] means "very". It is an adverb that modifies the adjective "[hi]dilchasp[/hi]".

[hi]dilchasp[/hi] means "interesting". It is an adjective that describes the noun "[hi]adhyay[/hi]".

[hi]hai[/hi] means "is". It is a verb that conjugates with the subject "[hi]adhyay[/hi]".

Key Concept: Remember that in Punjabi, adjectives usually come before the noun they modify.

English: The next chapter is very interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]Agla adhyay bahut dilchasp hai.[/hi]

The next word is construction. English: The construction of the new bridge is expected to be finished by next year.

Punjabi: [hi]Nayi पुल਼ di [hi]nirman[hi] agle saal tak khatam hone di umeed hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Nayi [hi] - new

[hi]pul਼ [hi] - bridge (note the use of the visarga [hi] ̣ [hi] at the end)

[hi]di [hi] - of

[hi]nirman[hi] - construction

[hi]agle [hi] - next

[hi]saal [hi] - year

[hi]tak [hi] - until

[hi]khatam [hi] - finished

[hi]hone [hi] - to be

[hi]di [hi] - of

[hi]umeed [hi] - hope/expectation

[hi]hai [hi] - is

Key concepts:

The sentence uses the postposition [hi]di [hi] to indicate possession.

The noun [hi]nirman[hi] is used in the nominative case, signifying the subject of the sentence.

The phrase [hi]agle saal tak [hi] indicates the time frame until which the construction will be finished.

The sentence follows the common Punjabi structure of subject-verb-object.

The next word is hang. English: The laundry is hanging on the line.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਪੜੇ ਲਾਈਨ 'ਤੇ ਲਟਕ ਰਹੇ ਨੇ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੱਪੜੇ[/hi]: This word means "clothes" or "laundry" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਲਾਈਨ[/hi]: This word means "line" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi]: This word means "on" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਲਟਕ[/hi]: This is the verb "to hang" in Punjabi, in the present continuous tense.

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi]: This is the present continuous tense marker, meaning "are" or "is."

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi]: This is the plural marker, used since "clothes" is plural.

Important concepts:

Punjabi verbs, like "hang", have several forms depending on the tense. This sentence uses the present continuous tense.

Punjabi word order is subject-verb-object, so the clothes (subject) are hanging (verb) on the line (object).

Punjabi uses different markers for singular and plural, like "ne" at the end of the sentence.

English: The laundry is hanging on the line.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਪੜੇ ਲਾਈਨ 'ਤੇ ਲਟਕ ਰਹੇ ਨੇ[/hi].

The next word is easy. English: This task is easy.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kaam aasaan hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This

[hi]kaam[/hi] - task/work

[hi]aasaan[/hi] - easy

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

This sentence uses the simple present tense. It uses the subject-verb-object sentence structure. The word [hi]aasaan[/hi] is an adjective describing the noun [hi]kaam[/hi].

English: This task is easy.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kaam aasaan hai.[/hi]

The next word is actually. English: He actually went to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੁਣ ਤਾਂ ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹੁਣ[/hi] - This is the key word meaning "actually" or "in fact."

[hi]ਤਾਂ[/hi] - This is a conjunction that means "then" or "so." It emphasizes the unexpected nature of the action.

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This means "he".

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This means "market."

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to go."

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] - This is a post-position that adds emphasis and indicates that the action is completed.

The sentence conveys the idea that the person went to the market, which might be unexpected or surprising. The use of [hi]ਹੁਣ[/hi] adds a touch of surprise or emphasis to the statement.

English: He actually went to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੁਣ ਤਾਂ ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is mouth. English: The mouth is the opening through which we eat and speak.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੂੰਹ[/hi] ਖਾਣ ਅਤੇ ਬੋਲਣ ਵਾਲਾ ਹੈ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੂੰਹ[/hi] [hi]mū̃h[/hi] - mouth. This is the most common word for mouth in Punjabi.

[hi]ਖਾਣ[/hi] [hi]khāṇ[/hi] - to eat. This is the infinitive form of the verb.

[hi]ਅਤੇ[/hi] [hi]ate[/hi] - and. This is a conjunction that joins the two verbs.

[hi]ਬੋਲਣ[/hi] [hi]bolṇ[/hi] - to speak. This is the infinitive form of the verb.

[hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] [hi]vālā[/hi] - This is a suffix that means "one who does" or "one who has". It is attached to the noun [hi]ਮੂੰਹ[/hi] to indicate that the mouth is the one who does the actions of eating and speaking.

This sentence uses the simple present tense to describe the function of the mouth. The sentence structure is Subject + Verb + Object.

English: The mouth is the opening through which we eat and speak.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੂੰਹ[/hi] ਖਾਣ ਅਤੇ ਬੋਲਣ ਵਾਲਾ ਹੈ।

The next word is date. English: Today's date is the 25th of January.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj di tareekh 25 janvari hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - This means "today". It's a very common word.

[hi]di[/hi] - This is a possessive marker, and means "of" or "belonging to". So, it shows that the [hi]tareekh[/hi] belongs to [hi]ajj[/hi].

[hi]tareekh[/hi] - This word means "date."

[hi]25[/hi] - The number twenty-five.

[hi]janvari[/hi] - This word means "January." Make sure to practice the spelling.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This means "is." It's the present tense of the verb "to be."

Key Concepts:

This sentence illustrates the use of the possessive marker [hi]di[/hi] to show ownership.

It's also an example of a simple sentence in Punjabi, with a subject ([hi]tareekh[/hi]), a verb ([hi]hai[/hi]), and an object ([hi]25 janvari[/hi]).

Remember: The order of words in Punjabi sentences can be a little different than in English, but you'll get used to it with practice.

The next word is rest. English: He rests at home.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਘਰੇ ਆਰਾਮ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ਘਰੇ[/hi] - at home (a common variation of [hi]ਘਰ[/hi] meaning home, used when speaking about being at home)

[hi]ਆਰਾਮ[/hi] - rest

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - does (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (present tense, singular)

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses the verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] ("does") with the noun [hi]ਆਰਾਮ[/hi] ("rest") to express the action of resting.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a common auxiliary verb used in Punjabi to form present tense statements.

Translation: He rests at home.

The next word is representative. English: The representative spoke on behalf of the group.

Punjabi: [hi]ਨੁਮਾਇੰਦਾ ਨੇ ਸਮੂਹ ਦੀ ਤਰਫ਼ੋਂ ਗੱਲ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਨੁਮਾਇੰਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]numainda[/hi] - representative

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]ne[/hi] - has, have (used to indicate past action by the subject)

[hi]ਸਮੂਹ[/hi] - [hi]samuh[/hi] - group

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਤਰਫ਼ੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]tarfon[/hi] - on behalf of

[hi]ਗੱਲ[/hi] - [hi]gall[/hi] - talk, speech

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi] - [hi]kiti.[/hi] - did, performed (past tense)

Key concept: This sentence uses the structure "Subject + Verb + Object" and also includes a prepositional phrase ("on behalf of the group"). It also utilizes the postposition [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] to indicate past action by the subject.

The next word is domestic. English: The cat is domestic.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਘਰੇਲੂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] [hi]billi[/hi] - This is the word for 'cat' in Punjabi.

[hi]ਘਰੇਲੂ[/hi] [hi]gharayloo[/hi] - This word means 'domestic' in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb 'to be' in Punjabi.

Key concept: The Punjabi sentence uses the word [hi]ਘਰੇਲੂ[/hi] [hi]gharayloo[/hi] to convey the meaning of 'domestic' when referring to a cat.

Translation: The cat is domestic.

The next word is increase. English: The price of gas has increased.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੈਟਰੋਲ ਦੀ ਕੀਮਤ ਵੱਧ ਗਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪੈਟਰੋਲ[/hi] - Petrol (the word is borrowed from English, but pronounced with a Punjabi accent, and common usage)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of (possessive case marker)

[hi]ਕੀਮਤ[/hi] - price

[hi]ਵੱਧ[/hi] - increase (adjective, meaning "more")

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - went (past tense of verb, "to go")

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (present tense of verb "to be")

This sentence demonstrates the use of the past tense of verbs in Punjabi, which are formed by adding a suffix to the verb stem. The suffix used here is [hi]ਗਈ[/hi], which indicates that the action of increasing happened in the past. The sentence also shows the use of the possessive case marker [hi]ਦੀ[/hi], which is used to indicate that the price belongs to petrol.

Key concepts:

Possessive Case Marker: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to indicate possession, similar to 'of' in English.

Past Tense: Past tense verbs in Punjabi are formed by adding a suffix.

Subject-Verb Agreement: The verb [hi]ਗਈ[/hi] is in the singular form, agreeing with the singular subject [hi]ਕੀਮਤ[/hi].

English: The price of gas has increased.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੈਟਰੋਲ ਦੀ ਕੀਮਤ ਵੱਧ ਗਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is mean. English: The meaning of this word is not clear to me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਸ਼ਬਦ ਦਾ ਮਤਲਬ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਸਮਝ ਨਹੀਂ ਆਇਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਸ਼ਬਦ[/hi] - word

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਮਤਲਬ[/hi] - meaning

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - to me

[hi]ਸਮਝ[/hi] - understanding

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - not

[hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] - came (past tense)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Marker: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] indicates possession. Here, it shows the word's meaning.

Past Tense: The verb [hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] is in the past tense, signifying that the understanding did not come (or happen) in the present moment.

Translation: The meaning of this word is not clear to me.

The next word is ball. English: The children are playing ball.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਗੇਂਦ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi] - [hi]bacche[/hi] - Children (plural, masculine). This is a common word for "children" in Punjabi. It's a useful word to know as it's used frequently in daily life.

[hi]ਗੇਂਦ[/hi] - [hi]gend[/hi] - Ball. This is a common word for "ball" in Punjabi. You can use it for any type of ball.

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - [hi]khed[/hi] - Play. This is a common word for "play" in Punjabi. It can be used for any type of play, whether it's sports, games, or just playing around.

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - [hi]rahe[/hi] - Are. This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to be" in Punjabi. It indicates that the action is ongoing.

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]han[/hi] - Are. This is the present tense of the verb "to be" in Punjabi. It indicates that the action is happening now.

Important Note: In this sentence, the verb "to be" is used in the present continuous tense. This is because the action of playing is ongoing. It's important to understand that Punjabi uses different verb tenses in different contexts.

English: The children are playing ball.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਗੇਂਦ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is protect. English: We should protect the environment.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਵਾਤਾਵਰਣ ਦੀ ਰੱਖਿਆ ਕਰਨੀ ਚਾਹੀਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] = [hi]saanu[/hi] - to us, we

[hi]ਵਾਤਾਵਰਣ[/hi] = [hi]vaataavaran[/hi] - environment

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] = [hi]di[/hi] - of the

[hi]ਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi] = [hi]rakhiya[/hi] - protection

[hi]ਕਰਨੀ[/hi] = [hi]karni[/hi] - to do

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦੀ[/hi] = [hi]chaahidi[/hi] - should

Key Concept: The word order in Punjabi can be different than English. Here, the word [hi]chaahidi[/hi] is at the end, whereas in English, "should" is in the beginning.

English: We should protect the environment.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਵਾਤਾਵਰਣ ਦੀ ਰੱਖਿਆ ਕਰਨੀ ਚਾਹੀਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is face. English: He saw her face.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਉਸਦਾ ਚਿਹਰਾ ਦੇਖਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the masculine singular form of the third person pronoun "he" in the past tense.

[hi]ਉਸਦਾ[/hi] - This is the masculine singular possessive pronoun meaning "his/her."

[hi]ਚਿਹਰਾ[/hi] - This is the noun for "face."

[hi]ਦੇਖਿਆ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to see."

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is an example of a pronominal clitic, which is a word that is attached to another word, in this case the verb [hi]ਦੇਖਿਆ।[/hi] It indicates that the subject of the sentence is he.

[hi]ਉਸਦਾ[/hi] - This is a possessive pronoun. It indicates that the face belongs to the person referred to by the pronoun [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi].

English: He saw her face.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਉਸਦਾ ਚਿਹਰਾ ਦੇਖਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is grow. English: The tree is growing tall.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰੁੱਖ ਉੱਚਾ ਵੱਧ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

- [hi]ਰੁੱਖ[/hi] (ruk[h]) - tree

- [hi]ਉੱਚਾ[/hi] (uccha) - tall

- [hi]ਵੱਧ[/hi] (vadh) - increase/grow

- [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] (riha) - is (present continuous tense)

- [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai) - is (present tense)

Key Concept:

- The verb [hi]ਵੱਧ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] (vadh riha hai) is in the present continuous tense, indicating an ongoing action.

Translation: The tree is growing tall.

The next word is almost. English: He almost fell.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਲਗਭਗ ਡਿੱਗ ਪਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਲਗਭਗ[/hi] - [hi]lagbhag[/hi] - almost

[hi]ਡਿੱਗ[/hi] - [hi]digg[/hi] - to fall (verb)

[hi]ਪਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]pia[/hi] - fell (past tense)

This sentence uses the past tense of the verb "to fall". Remember that [hi]ਲਗਭਗ[/hi] - [hi]lagbhag[/hi] can be used with many verbs in Punjabi to indicate "almost".

English: He almost fell.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਲਗਭਗ ਡਿੱਗ ਪਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is supply. English: The shop supplies all the necessary groceries.

Punjabi: [hi]Dukan saare zaruri kiranaa [hi] [hi]de deti aa[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Dukan[/hi] = Shop

[hi]saare[/hi] = all

[hi]zaruri[/hi] = necessary

[hi]kiranaa[/hi] = groceries

[hi]de[/hi] = gives

[hi]deti[/hi] = gives (feminine form of verb)

[hi]aa[/hi] = is

Key concept: The Punjabi verb [hi]de[/hi] is used with the third person singular, meaning "he/she/it gives." We see the feminine form [hi]deti[/hi] here because [hi]dukan[/hi] is feminine in Punjabi.

English: The shop supplies all the necessary groceries.

The next word is discover. English: He discovered a new species of bird.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne ek nayi jaat di chidiya khoj li[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us ne[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he" in the past tense. In Punjabi, the subject pronoun is often dropped, but in this case, it is necessary for clarity.

[hi]ek nayi jaat di[/hi] - This is the object "a new species of"

[hi]chidiya[/hi] - This is the object "bird"

[hi]khoj li[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to discover" in Punjabi. The verb is conjugated to agree with the subject pronoun, "he".

Key Concepts:

Pronouns: The subject pronoun "he" is used in this sentence.

Past Tense: The verb "to discover" is in the past tense in Punjabi.

Nouns: The nouns "species," "bird," and "he" are used in this sentence.

Object: The object of the sentence is "a new species of bird."

Word Order: In this sentence, the word order is Subject-Verb-Object.

English: He discovered a new species of bird.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne ek nayi jaat di chidiya khoj li[/hi].

The next word is trend. English: The current trend is towards online shopping.

Punjabi: [hi]Is waqt da trend online shopping vech hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This, it, that (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]waqt[/hi] - time, moment

[hi]da[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]trend[/hi] - trend (borrowed word)

[hi]online[/hi] - online (borrowed word)

[hi]shopping[/hi] - shopping (borrowed word)

[hi]vech[/hi] - in, inside, among

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

[hi]da[/hi] is a post-position that means "of" or "belonging to".

[hi]vech[/hi] is a postposition that means "in" or "among". It is used with nouns that represent locations.

Note: The word [hi]trend[/hi] is a borrowed word from English. Punjabi is a very rich language with its own unique words for many concepts, but in this case, the borrowed word is more common.

The next word is broad. English: The river is broad.

Punjabi: [hi]Nahr waḍḍi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Nahr[/hi] - This is the word for "river."

[hi]waḍḍi[/hi] - This means "broad" or "wide." It is the feminine form of the adjective, and agrees with the feminine noun "[hi]nahr[/hi]".

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" for the third person singular (feminine).

English: The river is broad.

The next word is often. English: He often goes to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅਕਸਰ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It. This is a pronoun and the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਅਕਸਰ[/hi] - [hi]akasar[/hi] - Often. This is an adverb of frequency. Adverbs of frequency generally come before the verb.

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]bazaar[/hi] - Market. This is a noun.

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]jaanda[/hi] - Goes. This is a verb. It is the present continuous tense, and it is used for an action that is happening now.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - Is. This is the present tense of the verb "to be". It's used here because the sentence is in the present continuous tense.

This sentence is a great example of how to use adverbs of frequency in Punjabi. It is a simple sentence that demonstrates a common grammatical structure in the language.

English: He often goes to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅਕਸਰ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is knowledge. English: He has a lot of knowledge about Punjabi literature.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਾਹਿਤ ਬਾਰੇ ਬਹੁਤ ਗਿਆਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - To him/her (dative case, marks the recipient of the knowledge)

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - Punjabi (adjective modifying [hi]ਸਾਹਿਤ[/hi])

[hi]ਸਾਹਿਤ[/hi] - literature (the object of the knowledge)

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - about (preposition showing the subject of the knowledge)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - a lot (quantifier modifying [hi]ਗਿਆਨ[/hi])

[hi]ਗਿਆਨ[/hi] - knowledge (the subject of the sentence, what is being possessed)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense, indicating possession)

Key Concepts:

Dative case: Used to mark the recipient of an action or the object of a preposition. Here, [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] marks the recipient of the knowledge.

Adjectives: Modify nouns and provide more information. Here, [hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] modifies [hi]ਸਾਹਿਤ[/hi].

Prepositions: Show the relationship between words in a sentence. Here, [hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] shows the subject of the knowledge.

Quantifiers: Tell us how much or how many of something. Here, [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] indicates a large amount of knowledge.

English: He has a lot of knowledge about Punjabi literature.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਾਹਿਤ ਬਾਰੇ ਬਹੁਤ ਗਿਆਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is earn. English: He earns a lot of money.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਪੈਸਾ ਕਮਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he". It's the same for both masculine and feminine. In this context, "he" will refer to the person doing the action.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This means "a lot" or "very much". It's used to describe the quantity of something. In this case, it refers to the amount of money earned.

[hi]ਪੈਸਾ[/hi] - This means "money". It's an uncountable noun, so the singular form is used even if referring to a large amount.

[hi]ਕਮਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense verb form of "to earn". It's used for actions that are happening right now or habitually.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "to be" in the third person singular. It is the ending for a sentence in Punjabi and can be translated as "is" or "is being" or just "is".

The sentence is in the simple present tense, which is used to describe actions that happen regularly or are true in general.

English: He earns a lot of money.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਪੈਸਾ ਕਮਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is pop. English: The popcorn popped in the hot oil.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗਰਮ ਤੇਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਮੱਕੀ ਦੇ ਦਾਣੇ ਫੁੱਟ ਗਏ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗਰਮ[/hi] - This is the word for "hot" and is an adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਤੇਲ[/hi] (oil).

[hi]ਤੇਲ[/hi] - This is the word for "oil."

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is a preposition indicating location, similar to "in."

[hi]ਮੱਕੀ[/hi] - This is the word for "corn."

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - This is a possessive marker, meaning "of."

[hi]ਦਾਣੇ[/hi] - This is the word for "kernels" or "grains."

[hi]ਫੁੱਟ[/hi] - This is the verb meaning "to pop." It is used in the past tense [hi]ਫੁੱਟ ਗਏ[/hi]

[hi]ਗਏ[/hi] - This is a past tense marker that attaches to the verb [hi]ਫੁੱਟ[/hi]

Memorization:

Think of the hot oil as a "fire" [hi]ਆਗ[/hi] and the kernels of corn like tiny little "bombs" that [hi]ਫੁੱਟ[/hi]

The next word is ticket. English: I bought a ticket for the movie.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਫਿਲਮ ਵਾਸਤੇ ਟਿਕਟ ਖਰੀਦੀ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - I

[hi]ਫਿਲਮ[/hi] - movie

[hi]ਵਾਸਤੇ[/hi] - for

[hi]ਟਿਕਟ[/hi] - ticket

[hi]ਖਰੀਦੀ[/hi] - bought

This sentence is in the simple past tense and uses the verb [hi]ਖਰੀਦੀ[/hi], which is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਖਰੀਦਣਾ[/hi] (to buy). The word [hi]ਵਾਸਤੇ[/hi] is a postposition that indicates the purpose of the action, similar to "for" in English.

Key concepts:

Past tense verbs

Postpositions

English: I bought a ticket for the movie.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਫਿਲਮ ਵਾਸਤੇ ਟਿਕਟ ਖਰੀਦੀ[/hi].

The next word is theater. English: He is a famous theater actor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ ਥੀਏਟਰ ਅਦਾਕਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - A/An (indefinite article)

[hi]ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ[/hi] - Famous (adjective describing the actor)

[hi]ਥੀਏਟਰ[/hi] - Theater (noun, the place where he acts)

[hi]ਅਦਾਕਾਰ[/hi] - Actor (noun, describing his profession)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense verb to be)

Key Concepts:

The sentence is in the simple present tense and uses the verb "to be" to describe the actor's profession.

The order of words in Punjabi can vary, but the subject usually comes before the verb.

This sentence shows how Punjabi can be very straightforward and uses similar word order as English to express similar meaning.

The next word is belief. English: The belief in God is strong in this community.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਸਮਾਜ ਵਿੱਚ ਪਰਮਾਤਮਾ ਉੱਤੇ ਬਹੁਤ ਵਿਸ਼ਵਾਸ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਸਮਾਜ[/hi] - Community (noun)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - In (postposition)

[hi]ਪਰਮਾਤਮਾ[/hi] - God (noun)

[hi]ਉੱਤੇ[/hi] - On/upon (postposition)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Very, much (adverb)

[hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਵਾਸ[/hi] - Belief, faith (noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (verb)

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. These are words that follow the noun they modify.

Word Order: Punjabi has a flexible word order, but generally follows a Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) structure.

Case Markers: Punjabi uses case markers (like [hi]ਉੱਤੇ[/hi] in this sentence) to indicate the grammatical function of nouns in a sentence.

Translation: This community has a lot of faith in God.

The next word is middle. English: He sat in the middle of the room.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਮਰੇ ਦੇ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਬੈਠਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਕਮਰੇ[/hi] - Room (masculine noun in the singular, genitive case)

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - Of the (possessive particle)

[hi]ਵਿਚਕਾਰ[/hi] - Middle (masculine noun in the singular, locative case)

[hi]ਬੈਠਾ[/hi] - Sitting (past participle of the verb [hi]ਬੈਠਣਾ[/hi])

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] - Was (copula, past tense)

Key Concepts:

Gender and Number: Punjabi nouns have grammatical gender (masculine, feminine, neuter) and number (singular, plural). This affects the agreement of articles, adjectives, and verbs.

Case: Punjabi nouns have different forms depending on their grammatical function in a sentence. This is called case. In the sentence above, [hi]ਕਮਰੇ[/hi] is in the genitive case because it is showing possession. [hi]ਵਿਚਕਾਰ[/hi] is in the locative case because it is showing location.

Post-position: Punjabi uses post-positions instead of prepositions to show relationships between words. In this sentence, [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] indicates the genitive case and [hi]ਵਿਚਕਾਰ[/hi] indicates the locative case.

Participle: The past participle of a verb can be used to form a passive voice or a past tense. In this sentence, [hi]ਬੈਠਾ[/hi] is the past participle of [hi]ਬੈਠਣਾ[/hi] and is used to show that the action is complete.

Remember that the Punjabi sentence is in the past tense. You can change it to the present tense by replacing [hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] with [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is monitor. English: The doctor is monitoring the patient's health closely.

Punjabi: ਡਾਕਟਰ ਮਰੀਜ ਦੀ ਸਿਹਤ ਤੇ ਨਜ਼ਰ ਰੱਖ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ। [hi]ḍākṭar marīja dī sihat te naẓar rakẖ rahā hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ḍākṭar[/hi] - Doctor

[hi]marīja[/hi] - Patient

[hi]dī[/hi] - of the

[hi]sihat[/hi] - health

[hi]te[/hi] - on/upon

[hi]naẓar[/hi] - sight, look, attention

[hi]rakẖ[/hi] - keep, hold

[hi]rahā[/hi] - is (present continuous tense)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]te[/hi] is a preposition that indicates the object of focus.

[hi]rakẖ rahā hai[/hi] is a common way to express the continuous present tense in Punjabi.

This sentence illustrates the use of the verb [hi]rakẖ rahā hai[/hi] to express ongoing observation or monitoring.

The next word is speaker. English: The speaker gave a powerful speech.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੋਲਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਸ਼ਕਤੀਸ਼ਾਲੀ ਭਾਸ਼ਣ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੋਲਣ ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] - This means "the speaker." The word [hi]ਬੋਲਣ ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] is a noun and means "the one who speaks". The suffix " [hi]ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] " in Punjabi denotes the person doing the action.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is a postposition that signifies the subject of the sentence. It is similar to the English word "by" or "with" in this context.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This means "one" or "a". It's an indefinite article, like the English "a" or "an."

[hi]ਸ਼ਕਤੀਸ਼ਾਲੀ[/hi] - This means "powerful" or "strong." It's an adjective describing the speech.

[hi]ਭਾਸ਼ਣ[/hi] - This means "speech" or "address."

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] - This means "gave" or "delivered." It's the past tense of the verb [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] which means "to give."

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions, which come after the noun, instead of prepositions. [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is a postposition.

Suffixes: Suffixes like [hi]ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] are frequently used in Punjabi to create nouns or adjectives by adding meaning to existing words.

Word Order: Punjabi is a flexible language, but the basic word order is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV).

English: The speaker gave a powerful speech.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੋਲਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਸ਼ਕਤੀਸ਼ਾਲੀ ਭਾਸ਼ਣ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is future. English: The future is uncertain.

Punjabi: [hi]ਭਵਿੱਖ ਅਨਿਸ਼ਚਿਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਭਵਿੱਖ[/hi] [hi]bhavvikh[/hi] - future

[hi]ਅਨਿਸ਼ਚਿਤ[/hi] [hi]anishchit[/hi] - uncertain

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] - is.

Key concepts:

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] is a very common ending for Punjabi sentences. It indicates the present tense "is" and is very similar to the English "is". The "." indicates the end of the sentence.

Memorization tip:

Think of the word "[hi]ਭਵਿੱਖ[/hi]" as being similar to the English "future" with the "bh" sound. "[hi]ਅਨਿਸ਼ਚਿਤ[/hi]" is close to "uncertain", so it can be easier to remember.

Translation: The future is uncertain.

The next word is story. English: She told a story about her childhood.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne apne bachpan di kahani sunayi[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi] - She (pronoun)

[hi]apne[/hi] - her (possessive pronoun)

[hi]bachpan[/hi] - childhood (noun)

[hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]kahani[/hi] - story (noun)

[hi]sunayi[/hi] - told (past tense of verb [hi]sunana[/hi] - to tell)

Key concepts:

Possessive pronouns: [hi]apne[/hi] is used to indicate possession, similar to "her" in English.

Possessive particle: [hi]di[/hi] is used to show possession, similar to "of" in English.

Past tense: [hi]sunayi[/hi] is the past tense of the verb [hi]sunana[/hi] (to tell).

Translation: She told a story about her childhood.

The next word is before. English: He came before I did.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਰੇ ਆਉਣ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਆ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] - My (possessive)

[hi]ਆਉਣ[/hi] - Coming (gerund)

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - From (marks the starting point of a time period)

[hi]ਪਹਿਲਾਂ[/hi] - Before

[hi]ਆ ਗਿਆ[/hi] - Came (past tense)

This sentence demonstrates the use of the gerund [hi]ਆਉਣ[/hi] to describe the action of coming. The word [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] is crucial for expressing a time period, in this case, "before my coming". The word order is important for clarity and fluency. This sentence uses the Punjabi word [hi]ਪਹਿਲਾਂ[/hi] which is commonly used to express the idea of "before".

Key Concepts

Gerunds

Use of [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] to describe a starting point

Importance of word order in Punjabi

English: He came before I did.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਰੇ ਆਉਣ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਆ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is national. English: This is a national park.

Punjabi: [hi]Ee [hi]ek [hi]rashtriya [hi]udhyaan [hi]hai. [hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Ee [hi] - This

[hi]ek [hi] - a (singular indefinite article)

[hi]rashtriya [hi] - national (adjective)

[hi]udhyaan [hi] - park (noun)

[hi]hai [hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Gender: [hi]udhyaan [hi] is a masculine noun.

Word order: The adjective [hi]rashtriya [hi] precedes the noun it modifies, [hi]udhyaan [hi]

Sentence structure: This sentence follows the basic subject-verb-object structure, but the subject [hi]Ee [hi] is implied.

English: This is a national park.

Punjabi: [hi]Ee [hi]ek [hi]rashtriya [hi]udhyaan [hi]hai. [hi]

The next word is clean. English: The house is very clean.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਫ਼ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - [hi]ghar[/hi] (house)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] (very)

[hi]ਸਾਫ਼[/hi] - [hi]saaf[/hi] (clean)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] (is)

Key Concepts:

Word order: Subject-Adjective-Verb. The subject ([hi]ਘਰ[/hi]) comes first, followed by the adjective ([hi]ਸਾਫ਼[/hi]) and then the verb ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi]).

Adjectives: Adjectives like [hi]ਸਾਫ਼[/hi] are placed directly before the noun they modify.

Sentence ending: Punjabi sentences often end with a soft stop sound. The [hi]।[/hi] at the end of the sentence signifies this.

English: The house is very clean.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਫ਼ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is around. English: The children are playing around the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਰੁੱਖ ਦੇ ਆਲੇ ਦੁਆਲੇ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi] - [hi]bachche[/hi] - children (plural)

[hi]ਰੁੱਖ[/hi] - [hi]rukh[/hi] - tree

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਆਲੇ[/hi] - [hi]aale[/hi] - around (this is a postposition, meaning it comes after the noun it modifies)

[hi]ਦੁਆਲੇ[/hi] - [hi]duale[/hi] - around (this is also a postposition and is used in conjunction with [hi]aale[/hi] to emphasize the concept of being around)

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - [hi]khed[/hi] - play (this is a verb in the present continuous tense)

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - [hi]rehe[/hi] - are (present continuous tense marker)

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - [hi]han.[/hi] - are (plural marker)

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions (words that come after the noun they modify) instead of prepositions (words that come before the noun they modify) like in English.

Present Continuous Tense: This tense is used to describe actions happening now. In Punjabi, it is formed by using the verb stem followed by the marker [hi]rehe[/hi] for singular and [hi]rehi[/hi] for plural.

Plural Marker: The word [hi]han[/hi] is used to mark the plural form of verbs.

English: The children are playing around the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਰੁੱਖ ਦੇ ਆਲੇ ਦੁਆਲੇ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is recognize. English: I recognize her from the party.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਪਾਰਟੀ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਚਾਣਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - [hi]main[/hi] - I

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]usnu[/hi] - her

[hi]ਪਾਰਟੀ[/hi] - [hi]party[/hi] - party

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] - from

[hi]ਪਹਿਚਾਣਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]pehchannda[/hi] - recognize (masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

The verb [hi]ਪਹਿਚਾਣਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]pehchannda[/hi] is in the present tense and is conjugated to agree with the masculine singular subject [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - [hi]main[/hi] .

The postposition [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] indicates "from".

English: I recognize her from the party.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਪਾਰਟੀ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਚਾਣਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is double. English: He ate double the amount of food.

Punjabi: ਉਸਨੇ ਦੁੱਗਣਾ ਖਾਣਾ ਖਾਧਾ।

[hi]Usne dugna khana khadha.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi]: He (masculine subject pronoun)

[hi]dugna[/hi]: double, twice (an adjective in this case, modifying the noun [hi]khana[/hi])

[hi]khana[/hi]: food (masculine noun)

[hi]khadha[/hi]: ate (past tense of the verb [hi]khana[/hi] - to eat)

Key Concepts:

Word order: The Punjabi sentence is structured differently from the English one. The subject ([hi]Usne[/hi]) comes first, followed by the object ([hi]khana[/hi]) and then the verb ([hi]khadha[/hi]). This is common in Punjabi, where the subject precedes the verb.

[hi]dugna[/hi]: This word can be used as an adjective to indicate something doubled in amount, or as an adverb to indicate something done twice. In this example, it acts as an adjective modifying the noun [hi]khana[/hi].

Memorization Tip:

Think of the word [hi]dugna[/hi] as being similar to the English word "double," and remember the common word order: subject, object, verb.

The next word is against. English: He is against the plan.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਯੋਜਨਾ ਦੇ ਵਿਰੁੱਧ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun)

[hi]ਯੋਜਨਾ[/hi] - [hi]yojana[/hi] - Plan (noun)

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] - Of/Possessive marker

[hi]ਵਿਰੁੱਧ[/hi] - [hi]virudh[/hi] - Against (preposition)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - Is (verb)

Key concepts:

[hi]ਵਿਰੁੱਧ[/hi] - This is a very common preposition meaning "against." It can be used in many situations.

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive marker that shows ownership. It is used with nouns and often translates to "of."

Remember that the word order in Punjabi can be different from English, but the meaning is still conveyed. In this case, the preposition [hi]ਵਿਰੁੱਧ[/hi] is placed after the noun [hi]ਯੋਜਨਾ[/hi].

The next word is location. English: The location of the university is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ ਦੀ ਥਾਂ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ[/hi] - university

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਥਾਂ[/hi] - location, place

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - beautiful

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (present tense, singular)

Key Concept: The word order in Punjabi is slightly different from English. In this sentence, the location comes before the subject (university).

English: The location of the university is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ ਦੀ ਥਾਂ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is demand. English: The customers are demanding a refund.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗਾਹਕ ਵਾਪਸੀ ਦੀ ਮੰਗ ਕਰ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗਾਹਕ[/hi] [gahk] - Customers (plural)

[hi]ਵਾਪਸੀ[/hi] [vaapasi] - Refund

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] [di] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਮੰਗ[/hi] [mang] - Demand

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] [kar] - Do

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] [rahe] - Are (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] [han] - Are (plural)

Key concepts:

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a possessive particle indicating that the refund belongs to the customers.

[hi]ਕਰ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ[/hi] is a present continuous tense construction indicating that the action of demanding is ongoing.

[hi]ਮੰਗ[/hi] is a noun that can also be used as a verb in Punjabi, meaning to demand or request.

Translation: The customers are demanding a refund.

The next word is forget. English: He forgot his book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਭੁੱਲ ਗਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine subject pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - This is a possessive pronoun meaning "his/her/its". It is used to indicate that the book belongs to the person referred to by the pronoun [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi].

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - This is the noun "book".

[hi]ਭੁੱਲ ਗਈ[/hi] - This is the past tense verb "forgot". It is formed using the past tense marker [hi]ਗਈ[/hi] combined with the verb stem [hi]ਭੁੱਲ[/hi].

Key concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns and pronouns are often marked for gender. Here, [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] is masculine and [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] is feminine.

Possessive Pronouns: Punjabi possessive pronouns are used differently than in English. They typically precede the noun they modify.

English: He forgot his book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਭੁੱਲ ਗਈ।[/hi]

The next word is stop. English: Stop!

Punjabi: [hi]ਰੁਕ ਜਾ![/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰੁਕ[/hi] = "stop"

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] = "go" It is used to make a command stronger and more forceful.

Therefore, [hi]ਰੁਕ ਜਾ![/hi] means "stop going" which is translated as "Stop!"

The next word is train. English: The train is arriving at the station.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਸਟੇਸ਼ਨ 'ਤੇ ਪਹੁੰਚ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]gaddi[/hi] - This is the word for "train". It is a common word in Punjabi.

[hi]ਸਟੇਸ਼ਨ[/hi] - [hi]station[/hi] - This is the word for "station". It is borrowed from English.

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]'te[/hi] - This is a postposition meaning "on" or "at". It is used to show location.

[hi]ਪਹੁੰਚ[/hi] - [hi]pahuanch[/hi] - This is the verb "to arrive".

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]rahi[/hi] - This is a present continuous tense marker, meaning "is" or "are" in English.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - This is the ending for the sentence. It marks the end of the sentence and signifies that the statement is a fact.

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions, which come after the noun, to show location and other relationships.

Present Continuous Tense: This tense is used to describe an action that is ongoing at the moment of speaking.

Memorization Tips:

Remember the word for train, [hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] ([hi]gaddi[/hi]), and station, [hi]ਸਟੇਸ਼ਨ[/hi] ([hi]station[/hi]).

Practice using the postposition, [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] ([hi]'te[/hi]), to show location.

Pay attention to the present continuous tense marker, [hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] ([hi]rahi[/hi]).

Translation:

The train is arriving at the station.

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਸਟੇਸ਼ਨ 'ਤੇ ਪਹੁੰਚ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is excite. English: The movie excited me.

Punjabi: ਫ਼ਿਲਮ ਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ [hi]ਉਤਸ਼ਾਹਿਤ[/hi] ਕੀਤਾ।

[hi]ਫ਼ਿਲਮ[/hi] [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] [hi]ਉਤਸ਼ਾਹਿਤ[/hi] [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi]।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਫ਼ਿਲਮ[/hi]: This is the word for "movie" in Punjabi. It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi]: This is the past tense marker for the subject "ਫ਼ਿਲਮ." It indicates that the movie did something in the past.

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi]: This is the object of the sentence, meaning it is the thing that was acted upon. It translates to "me."

[hi]ਉਤਸ਼ਾਹਿਤ[/hi]: This is the past participle of the verb "to excite." It describes the state of being excited.

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi]: This is the past tense of the verb "to do." It completes the action of the sentence.

Key Concepts:

Past Tense: The use of the past tense marker "[hi]ਨੇ[/hi]" is essential for indicating that the movie excited the speaker in the past.

Object Pronoun: The use of the object pronoun "[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi]" is important to clarify that the movie excited the speaker, not someone else.

Translation: The movie excited me.

The next word is center. English: The center of the city is busy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਦਾ ਕੇਂਦਰ ਰੁੱਝਾ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi] - [hi]shahar[/hi] - city

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]ਕੇਂਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]kendar[/hi] - center

[hi]ਰੁੱਝਾ[/hi] - [hi]rujha[/hi] - busy, occupied

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]hoya[/hi] - is, is being

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is, exists

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a possessive particle that shows belonging or possession.

The word order in Punjabi is different from English. The subject usually comes after the verb in Punjabi.

The sentence uses the present tense, which is indicated by the verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]hai[/hi]).

English: The center of the city is busy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਦਾ ਕੇਂਦਰ ਰੁੱਝਾ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is local. English: The local market is bustling with people.

Punjabi: [hi]Is lokāl bāzār vich lokan di bheed hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This/That (Demonstrative Pronoun)

[hi]lokāl[/hi] - Local (adjective)

[hi]bāzār[/hi] - Market (noun)

[hi]vich[/hi] - In (postposition)

[hi]lokan[/hi] - People (noun)

[hi]di[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]bheed[/hi] - Crowd (noun)

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (verb - present tense, singular)

Key concepts:

Demonstrative Pronoun: The use of [hi]Is[/hi] to refer to a specific market.

Postposition: The use of [hi]vich[/hi] (in) to show location.

Possessive particle: The use of [hi]di[/hi] (of) to show ownership of the crowd by the people.

English: The local market is bustling with people.

Punjabi: [hi]Is lokāl bāzār vich lokan di bheed hai.[/hi]

The next word is control. English: He has no control over his temper.

Punjabi: [hi]Us nu apne gusse te koi kaboo nahin hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He, him (masculine singular)

[hi]nu[/hi] - to (dative marker, indicating the object of the verb)

[hi]apne[/hi] - his, her, its (possessive pronoun)

[hi]gusse[/hi] - anger, temper

[hi]te[/hi] - on, over (postposition)

[hi]koi[/hi] - any, some

[hi]kaboo[/hi] - control, power, mastery

[hi]nahin[/hi] - not, no

[hi]hai[/hi] - is, exists (present tense, singular)

This sentence is in the simple present tense, indicating a habitual action or a state of being. The sentence structure is simple: subject + verb + object. The key concept is the use of the postposition [hi]te[/hi] to indicate "over" in the context of control.

English: He has no control over his temper.

Punjabi: [hi]Us nu apne gusse te koi kaboo nahin hai[/hi].

The next word is light. English: The light is bright.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰੋਸ਼ਨੀ ਚਮਕਦਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰੋਸ਼ਨੀ[/hi] ([hi]roshani[/hi]): This is the Punjabi word for "light". Remember that "light" can also mean "not heavy", but here it refers to the illumination.

[hi]ਚਮਕਦਾਰ[/hi] ([hi]chamkdaar[/hi]): This word means "bright" or "shining".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]hai[/hi]): This is the Punjabi equivalent of the English "is". It is the third person singular present tense form of the verb "to be".

This is a simple sentence in Punjabi using the subject-verb-complement structure. Remember that in Punjabi, words can be placed in different orders, but this is the most common structure.

The next word is bind. English: The rope is used to bind the packages.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਾਸੀ ਨਾਲ ਬੰਡਲ ਬੰਨ੍ਹੇ ਜਾਂਦੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰਾਸੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "rope." It is a feminine noun.

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - This means "with," and is used to show the instrument with which the action is performed.

[hi]ਬੰਡਲ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "packages." It is a masculine noun.

[hi]ਬੰਨ੍ਹੇ[/hi] - This is the past participle of the verb "to bind," and shows that the action is completed. It is in the masculine plural form, as it agrees with the plural noun "packages."

[hi]ਜਾਂਦੇ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to go" and conveys the idea that the action of binding is happening. It is in the masculine plural form to match with "packages."

Key concept: The sentence uses the past participle of the verb "to bind" and the present continuous tense of the verb "to go" to convey the action happening in the present, as in the English sentence.

English: The rope is used to bind the packages.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਾਸੀ ਨਾਲ ਬੰਡਲ ਬੰਨ੍ਹੇ ਜਾਂਦੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is film. English: We watched a film last night.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਰਾਤ ਇੱਕ ਫ਼ਿਲਮ ਦੇਖੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]asīn[/hi] - We (subject)

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] - [hi]kallah[/hi] - Yesterday (adverb)

[hi]ਰਾਤ[/hi] - [hi]rāt[/hi] - Night (adverb)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - One (determiner)

[hi]ਫ਼ਿਲਮ[/hi] - [hi]philm[/hi] - Film (object)

[hi]ਦੇਖੀ।[/hi] - [hi]dekhi[/hi] - Watched (past tense verb)

Key Concepts:

The verb [hi]ਦੇਖੀ[/hi] is in the past tense, indicating an action that took place in the past.

The sentence uses the simple past tense, which is a common tense used to describe past actions.

The word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb, which is different from English's Subject-Verb-Object order.

English: We watched a film last night.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਰਾਤ ਇੱਕ ਫ਼ਿਲਮ ਦੇਖੀ।[/hi]

The next word is yeah. English: He said, "Yeah".

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਕਿਹਾ, "ਹਾਂ"[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]uhne[/hi] - He/She/It (in the past tense)

[hi]ਕਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]kiha[/hi] - said (past tense)

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]haan[/hi] - Yes

Key Concepts:

The [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]ne[/hi] suffix indicates a past tense subject.

Punjabi can use the same word to convey "he", "she", "it", and "they".

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] [hi]haan[/hi] is used for Yes.

Punjabi uses a comma and quotation marks like English.

English: He said, "Yeah".

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਕਿਹਾ, "ਹਾਂ"[/hi].

The next word is surface. English: The surface of the water is calm.

Punjabi: [hi]Paani di saafdi shaant hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Paani[/hi] - water

[hi]di[/hi] - This is a possessive particle, similar to 'of' in English. It is used to indicate that the 'saafdi' (surface) belongs to 'paani' (water)

[hi]saafdi[/hi] - surface

[hi]shaant[/hi] - calm

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: [hi]di[/hi] is a common possessive particle in Punjabi. It is used to indicate possession and is often followed by a noun.

Word Order: Punjabi uses a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) word order.

Translation: The surface of the water is calm.

The next word is dark. English: The sky is dark.

Punjabi: [hi]Aasmaan andhera hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Aasmaan[/hi] means "sky". It's a noun.

[hi]andhera[/hi] means "dark". It's an adjective.

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb "to be". It means "is".

Key Concept: Adjectives in Punjabi often come after the noun they modify.

Translation: The sky is dark.

The next word is space. English: There is a lot of space in this room.

Punjabi: [hi]Is kamre vich bahut jagah hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This

[hi]kamre[/hi] - Room

[hi]vich[/hi] - In

[hi]bahut[/hi] - A lot

[hi]jagah[/hi] - Space

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is

Key concepts:

[hi]vich[/hi]: This is a common postposition in Punjabi that is used to indicate location, similar to "in" in English.

[hi]jagah[/hi]: This word can refer to both physical space and abstract space.

Memorization Tip: Imagine a big, empty room. You can say, "[hi]Is kamre vich bahut jagah hai[/hi]" to describe the space in the room.

The next word is cold. English: It is very cold today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj bahut thand hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - Today (this is an adverb of time, denoting when the action is taking place)

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Very (an adverb of degree modifying the adjective [hi]thand[/hi])

[hi]thand[/hi] - Cold (this is the adjective that describes the weather)

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (this is the present tense of the verb "to be")

Key Concept: This sentence demonstrates the use of adjectives and adverbs to describe the weather. The Punjabi sentence is structured in a way that is similar to English, with the subject (it) being understood and the verb (is) coming before the adjective (cold).

Translation: It is very cold today.

The next word is danger. English: The dog is in danger.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੁੱਤਾ ਖ਼ਤਰੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੁੱਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]kutta[/hi] - dog

[hi]ਖ਼ਤਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]khatre[/hi] - danger. The [hi]ੇ[/hi] ending makes it the locative case, "in danger", "in the danger".

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in, within

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is.

Key Concepts:

Locative case: The locative case indicates location. In Punjabi, this is often indicated by adding [hi]ੇ[/hi] to the end of the word.

The word order in Punjabi is generally subject-object-verb (SOV).

The sentence follows the basic structure of "Subject + Verb + Object". In this case, the object is the locative case of [hi]ਖ਼ਤਰੇ[/hi], "in danger".

English: The dog is in danger.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੁੱਤਾ ਖ਼ਤਰੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is turn. English: The wheel turns.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪਹੀਆ ਮੁੜਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪਹੀਆ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "wheel." It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਮੁੜਦਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "turns." It is the present continuous tense of the verb "to turn."

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." It is an auxiliary verb that helps the verb "turn" be conjugated.

In essence, the sentence is saying, "The wheel is turning." This phrase is a good way to practice the verb "to turn" in Punjabi, as it is a very common verb to use.

The next word is twice. English: He came twice.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੋ ਵਾਰ ਆਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he".

[hi]ਦੋ[/hi] - This means "two".

[hi]ਵਾਰ[/hi] - This means "times".

[hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to come".

The sentence structure is simple, Subject + Verb + Adverbial phrase. The adverbial phrase "twice" is being represented by "two times" in the Punjabi translation. Remember the Punjabi word for "times" is [hi]ਵਾਰ[/hi], so try to remember it in relation to the English word "time."

English: He came twice.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੋ ਵਾਰ ਆਇਆ।[/hi]

The next word is weight. English: The weight of the bag is 5 kilograms.

Punjabi: [hi]ਥੈਲੇ ਦਾ ਵਜ਼ਨ 5 ਕਿਲੋਗ੍ਰਾਮ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਥੈਲੇ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "bag." It is in the genitive case, indicating possession.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "of." It connects the bag to its weight.

[hi]ਵਜ਼ਨ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "weight."

[hi]5[/hi] - This is the number "5" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਕਿਲੋਗ੍ਰਾਮ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "kilogram."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." It is the present tense form of the verb "to be."

Key Concepts:

Genitive case: This case is used to show possession. In this sentence, "[hi]ਥੈਲੇ[/hi]" is in the genitive case, indicating that the weight belongs to the bag.

Present tense: The verb "to be" in Punjabi is conjugated differently for each tense. In this sentence, "[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]" is the present tense form of the verb, indicating that the weight is currently 5 kilograms.

English: The weight of the bag is 5 kilograms.

Punjabi: [hi]ਥੈਲੇ ਦਾ ਵਜ਼ਨ 5 ਕਿਲੋਗ੍ਰਾਮ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is attract. English: The bright colors attract the children.

Punjabi: [hi]ਚਮਕਦਾਰ ਰੰਗ ਬੱਚਿਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਆਕਰਸ਼ਿਤ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਚਮਕਦਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]chamkdaar[/hi] - means "bright" or "shining" and describes the colors. It's an adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਰੰਗ[/hi].

[hi]ਰੰਗ[/hi] - [hi]rang[/hi] - means "colors" and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਬੱਚਿਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]bachchian[/hi] - means "children" and is the object of the verb.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - is a postposition that marks the object of the verb [hi]ਆਕਰਸ਼ਿਤ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ[/hi].

[hi]ਆਕਰਸ਼ਿਤ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]aakarshit karde han[/hi] - means "attract" and is the verb in the present continuous tense. The verb [hi]ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ[/hi] indicates that the action is ongoing and applies to multiple subjects.

Key Concepts:

Adjectives: [hi]ਚਮਕਦਾਰ[/hi] modifies the noun [hi]ਰੰਗ[/hi] to describe their quality.

Subject-Verb Agreement: The plural subject [hi]ਰੰਗ[/hi] is matched with the plural verb [hi]ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ[/hi].

Postpositions: [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] is used to mark the object of the verb, like a preposition in English.

English: The bright colors attract the children.

Punjabi: [hi]ਚਮਕਦਾਰ ਰੰਗ ਬੱਚਿਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਆਕਰਸ਼ਿਤ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is lunch. English: We had lunch at noon.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਦੁਪਹਿਰੇ ਖਾਣਾ ਖਾਧਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]asīṁ[/hi] - We (subject)

[hi]ਦੁਪਹਿਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]dupahire[/hi] - at noon (time adverb)

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]khāṇā[/hi] - lunch (object)

[hi]ਖਾਧਾ[/hi] - [hi]khādhā[/hi] - ate (past tense verb)

Key concepts:

Word order: Subject-Time Adverb-Object-Verb (This is a common word order in Punjabi)

Gender agreement: The verb [hi]ਖਾਧਾ[/hi] agrees with the subject [hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi], which is plural.

Tense: The past tense is indicated by the verb ending [hi]ਆ[/hi] - [hi]ā[/hi] in [hi]ਖਾਧਾ[/hi].

Remember, this is just one way to say it. There are other ways to express this thought in Punjabi!

The next word is quarter. English: He gave me a quarter of the cake.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujhe kekh da chauthai hissa ditta[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ne[/hi] - Postposition denoting the agent of an action

[hi]mujhe[/hi] - To me (dative case of the pronoun "main", I)

[hi]kekh[/hi] - Cake

[hi]da[/hi] - Possessive marker, indicating "of the cake"

[hi]chauthai[/hi] - Quarter (literally, "fourth")

[hi]hissa[/hi] - Portion, share

[hi]ditta[/hi] - Gave (past tense of the verb "dena", to give)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: "Us" is masculine, so the verb "ditta" also agrees in gender.

Possessive Marker: "da" indicates possession, similar to the English "of"

Dative Case: "mujhe" marks the indirect object of the verb "ditta", indicating the recipient of the action.

Translation: He gave me a quarter of the cake.

The next word is off. English: He turned off the lights.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਬੱਤੀਆਂ ਬੰਦ ਕਰ ਦਿੱਤੀਆਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She

[hi]ਬੱਤੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]battiyan[/hi] - Lights (plural)

[hi]ਬੰਦ[/hi] - [hi]band[/hi] - Off

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - [hi]kar[/hi] - Do (verb)

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]dittiyan[/hi] - Past tense of "do", (feminine plural form)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: Punjabi verbs and adjectives change their endings based on the gender of the subject. In this case, the subject is "he," which is masculine, and the verb "[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀਆਂ[/hi]" is the feminine plural form.

Word Order: Punjabi word order is slightly different from English. In this sentence, the subject precedes the verb, then the object.

English: He turned off the lights.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਬੱਤੀਆਂ ਬੰਦ ਕਰ ਦਿੱਤੀਆਂ।[/hi]

The next word is strategy. English: They made a strategy to win the game.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੇ ਖੇਡ ਜਿੱਤਣ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਰਣਨੀਤੀ ਬਣਾਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - They

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - have (used to show they did something)

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - game

[hi]ਜਿੱਤਣ[/hi] - to win (the verb here)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for (meaning "in order to")

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - one

[hi]ਰਣਨੀਤੀ[/hi] - strategy

[hi]ਬਣਾਈ।[/hi] - made

Key Concepts

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is used with the subject to indicate that they did something.

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] is often used to denote purpose

The verb "to win" is [hi]ਜਿੱਤਣ[/hi] and has a "to" at the beginning

[hi]ਬਣਾਈ[/hi] means made.

English: They made a strategy to win the game.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੇ ਖੇਡ ਜਿੱਤਣ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਰਣਨੀਤੀ ਬਣਾਈ।[/hi]

The next word is divide. English: The teacher divided the students into four groups.

Punjabi: [hi]अध्याਪਕ ਨੇ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਚਾਰ ਸਮੂਹਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਵੰਡਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]अध्यापਕ[/hi] - teacher

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - has (used with a subject and verb to indicate the subject performed the action)

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] - students (plural)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - to/for (used with the indirect object)

[hi]ਚਾਰ[/hi] - four

[hi]ਸਮੂਹਾਂ[/hi] - groups (plural)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in/within

[hi]ਵੰਡਿਆ।[/hi] - divided (past tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - this particle is used with a subject and verb to indicate that the subject performed the action. It is similar to the English "has".

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - this particle is used to indicate the indirect object of a verb. It is similar to the English "to" or "for".

Punjabi words often have different forms depending on their grammatical role in the sentence (e.g., singular vs. plural). For example, [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] is singular for "student", but [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] is plural.

English: The teacher divided the students into four groups.

Punjabi: [hi]अध्यापਕ ਨੇ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਨੂੰ ਚਾਰ ਸਮੂਹਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਵੰਡਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is whole. English: The whole family went to the park.

Punjabi: [hi]Sara parivar park gaye[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Sara[/hi] = [hi]ਸਾਰਾ[/hi] means "whole" or "entire".

[hi]parivar[/hi] = [hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] means family.

[hi]gayi[/hi] = [hi]ਗਈ[/hi] means "went". It is the past tense of the verb [hi]jana[/hi] = [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi], which means "to go".

This sentence uses the simple past tense.

The Punjabi word order is Subject-Verb-Object.

English: The whole family went to the park.

Punjabi: [hi]Sara parivar park gaye[/hi].

The next word is source. English: The source of the river is in the mountains.

Punjabi: [hi]ਨਦੀ ਦਾ ਸਰੋਤ ਪਹਾੜਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਨਦੀ[/hi] [hi]nadi[/hi] - river

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਸਰੋਤ[/hi] [hi]sarot[/hi] - source, origin

[hi]ਪਹਾੜਾਂ[/hi] [hi]pahaṛāṁ[/hi] - mountains (plural)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] [hi]vich[/hi] - in, within

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] - is (present tense)

Key concept: The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a possessive marker that indicates that the river's source is being discussed. This is similar to the English "of" in this context. The word [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] indicates location and is used for things inside something else. It is similar to the English "in" or "within."

English: The source of the river is in the mountains.

Punjabi: [hi]ਨਦੀ ਦਾ ਸਰੋਤ ਪਹਾੜਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is seem. English: It seems like it will rain today.

Punjabi: [hi]Aj varhsha hon da jaapda hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Aj[/hi] - Today (This is a common word, so you should memorize it!)

[hi]varhsha[/hi] - Rain

[hi]hon[/hi] - To happen (The infinitive form)

[hi]da[/hi] - The particle "da" denotes possession, so "hon da" here means "of happening" or "to happen"

[hi]jaapda[/hi] - Seems (This is the present tense, masculine singular form of the verb "jaapna", which means "to seem")

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (This is the present tense, singular form of the verb "hona" which means "to be")

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi language uses postpositions instead of prepositions. This means that the word that modifies a noun comes after the noun (for example, "hon da" which means "of happening").

Punjabi verbs are conjugated to reflect the subject, tense, and number. This means that the verb will change depending on who is doing the action, when the action is happening, and how many people are involved.

English: It seems like it will rain today.

Punjabi: [hi]Aj varhsha hon da jaapda hai[/hi].

The next word is kid. English: The child is playing in the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚਾ ਪਾਰਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਖੇਡ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚਾ[/hi] - [hi]bachcha[/hi] - means "child"

[hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] - [hi]park[/hi] - means "park"

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - means "in"

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - [hi]khed[/hi] - means "play"

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]riha hai[/hi] - means "is playing" (present continuous tense)

Key concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is generally Subject-Object-Verb (SOV)

The use of the present continuous tense is formed with the verb "to be" (hai) and the present participle of the main verb (khed).

Remember, in Punjabi, the ending of the word can change depending on its grammatical function in the sentence. For example, [hi]ਬੱਚਾ[/hi] changes to [hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi] if it is in the plural form.

The next word is glad. English: I am glad to see you.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ ਵੇਖ ਕੇ ਖੁਸ਼ੀ ਹੋਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - "Mainu" (to me) - This is the dative case of the pronoun "main" (I).

[hi]ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - "Tuhanu" (to you) - This is the dative case of the pronoun "tusi" (you) in the formal plural form.

[hi]ਵੇਖ[/hi] - "Vekh" (to see) - This is the present tense of the verb "vekhna" (to see). In Punjabi, verbs often use a "-na" ending for the infinitive form of the verb.

[hi]ਕੇ[/hi] - "Ke" - This is the postposition marking the object of the verb. It's like the English "by" in this sentence.

[hi]ਖੁਸ਼ੀ[/hi] - "Khushi" (happiness)

[hi]ਹੋਈ।[/hi] - "Hoi" (became) - This is the past tense of the verb "hona" (to become). It is used to indicate a state of being.

Important Note: In Punjabi, word order can sometimes change the meaning of a sentence. The sentence structure here is "I (dative) you (dative) see by happiness became"

English: I am glad to see you.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ ਵੇਖ ਕੇ ਖੁਸ਼ੀ ਹੋਈ।[/hi]

The next word is campaign. English: The political party is running a campaign to get more votes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਾਜਨੀਤਿਕ ਪਾਰਟੀ ਵੋਟਾਂ ਵਧਾਉਣ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਮੁਹਿੰਮ ਚਲਾ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰਾਜਨੀਤਿਕ[/hi] [hi]ਪਾਰਟੀ[/hi] - political party (literally translates to "political party")

[hi]ਵੋਟਾਂ[/hi] - votes (plural of [hi]ਵੋਟ[/hi])

[hi]ਵਧਾਉਣ[/hi] - to increase

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - one, a

[hi]ਮੁਹਿੰਮ[/hi] - campaign

[hi]ਚਲਾ[/hi] - to run (in the sense of an activity)

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - is, is doing (grammatical ending that shows present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (grammatical ending that shows the present tense)

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਮੁਹਿੰਮ[/hi] is a key term to understand in this sentence. It is a direct translation of the English word "campaign".

The sentence uses the present continuous tense. The grammatical ending [hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] is added to the verb [hi]ਚਲਾ[/hi] to show the action of running the campaign is ongoing.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਾਜਨੀਤਿਕ ਪਾਰਟੀ ਵੋਟਾਂ ਵਧਾਉਣ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਮੁਹਿੰਮ ਚਲਾ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

English: The political party is running a campaign to get more votes.

The next word is complain. English: He complained to the teacher about the homework.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਨੂੰ ਹੋਮਵਰਕ ਬਾਰੇ ਸ਼ਿਕਾਇਤ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine subject pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ[/hi] - This word means "teacher".

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case marker, indicating that the teacher is the indirect object of the verb.

[hi]ਹੋਮਵਰਕ[/hi] - This word is the English loanword "homework", adopted into the Punjabi language.

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - This preposition means "about".

[hi]ਸ਼ਿਕਾਇਤ[/hi] - This is the noun "complaint".

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do", conjugated in the third person singular masculine.

Key Concepts:

Dative case marker: This is a crucial element in Punjabi grammar, indicating the indirect object of a verb. In this case, the teacher is receiving the complaint, so we use the dative case marker "[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi]".

Loanwords: Punjabi often adopts words from other languages, particularly English, which is useful for modern concepts.

English: He complained to the teacher about the homework.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਨੂੰ ਹੋਮਵਰਕ ਬਾਰੇ ਸ਼ਿਕਾਇਤ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is memory. English: He has a good memory.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਵਧੀਆ ਯਾਦ ਰੱਖਣ ਦੀ ਸਮਰੱਥਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the object pronoun "him" in the dative case. It means "to him".

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - This means "good".

[hi]ਯਾਦ[/hi] - This means "memory" or "remembering" in the sense of a person's ability to recall things.

[hi]ਰੱਖਣ[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb "to keep". It is used here as a noun, meaning "keeping".

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is a possessive marker meaning "of".

[hi]ਸਮਰੱਥਾ[/hi] - This means "capacity" or "ability".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be".

Key Concepts:

- Dative Case: The dative case is used to indicate the indirect object of a verb. In this case, the indirect object is "him" because the memory is being kept for him.

- Infinitive as Noun: The infinitive form of the verb "to keep" is used here as a noun. This is common in Punjabi and many other languages.

- Possessive Marker: The possessive marker [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] shows that the "capacity" belongs to the "keeping".

This sentence is a great way to learn about the dative case and using the infinitive form of a verb as a noun. It is also a good example of how Punjabi uses possessive markers.

The next word is reveal. English: The truth will be revealed.

Punjabi: [hi]sachchai prakaashit hovaygi[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]sachchai[/hi]: Truth. This is a feminine noun, so it takes the feminine singular form of the adjective (which is not explicitly stated).

[hi]prakaashit[/hi]: Revealed. This is a past participle and is functioning as an adjective here.

[hi]hovaygi[/hi]: Will be. This is the future tense of the verb "to be" (in the feminine singular form, because the subject is feminine).

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives agree in gender and number with the nouns they modify. Here, the adjective [hi]prakaashit[/hi] is feminine singular to agree with [hi]sachchai[/hi].

Past Participles as Adjectives: Past participles can be used as adjectives to describe nouns, similar to English.

Future Tense: Punjabi uses a special future tense marker, which is attached to the verb. Here, the future tense marker is [hi]gi[/hi].

Translation: The truth will be revealed.

The next word is result. English: The result of the exam was good.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪਰਖ਼ ਦਾ ਨਤੀਜਾ ਵਧੀਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪਰਖ਼[/hi] - [hi]parakh[/hi] - means exam or test

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - means of, belonging to, or associated with (possessive marker)

[hi]ਨਤੀਜਾ[/hi] - [hi]natija[/hi] - means result

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - [hi]vadhiya[/hi] - means good

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - [hi]si[/hi] - means was (past tense of the verb "to be")

Key concepts:

Possessive Marker: The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a possessive marker indicating that the result belongs to the exam.

Past Tense: The word [hi]ਸੀ[/hi] marks the sentence as being in the past tense.

English: The result of the exam was good.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪਰਖ਼ ਦਾ ਨਤੀਜਾ ਵਧੀਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is fine. English: It is a fine day.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj wadiya din hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - Today (This is a common word in Punjabi and is often used in daily conversation. You will encounter it frequently.)

[hi]wadiya[/hi] - Fine or good. (This word is quite versatile and can be used to describe many things like food, weather, or even someone's mood.)

[hi]din[/hi] - Day (This is another frequently used word in Punjabi and is essential for describing time.)

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in Punjabi.)

Key concepts:

Word order: In Punjabi, the subject (in this case, the day) usually comes after the verb (is) and the adjective (fine).

Gender agreement: The adjective [hi]wadiya[/hi] agrees in gender with the noun [hi]din[/hi] (day), which is masculine.

This sentence is a simple and useful example of how to describe the weather in Punjabi. It is a good starting point for learning how to express yourself about the day.

The next word is cell. English: The cell phone is in my pocket.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੋਬਾਈਲ ਫੋਨ ਮੇਰੇ ਜੇਬ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੋਬਾਈਲ ਫੋਨ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for cell phone. It literally translates to "mobile phone."

[hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "my."

[hi]ਜੇਬ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "pocket."

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "in."

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is."

This sentence uses the simple present tense and follows the structure of "subject + verb + object."

The subject is "mobile phone," the verb is "is," and the object is "in my pocket."

The sentence highlights how Punjabi has its own words for everyday objects like "cell phone."

English: The cell phone is in my pocket.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੋਬਾਈਲ ਫੋਨ ਮੇਰੇ ਜੇਬ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is ought. English: We ought to eat before we leave.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਜਾਣ ਤੋਂ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਖਾਣਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]saanoo[/hi] - This is the dative form of the pronoun [hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] ([hi]aseen[/hi]) which means "we". This form is used to show who is the recipient of the action of the verb. In this sentence, "we" are the recipients of the action "ought to eat".

[hi]ਜਾਣ[/hi] - [hi]jaan[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] ([hi]jaana[/hi]) which means "to go". It's important to note that the infinitive form of verbs in Punjabi often functions as a noun, and in this case, it acts as the object of the preposition [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] ([hi]ton[/hi]).

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] - This is the preposition "from", used here to indicate the point of departure.

[hi]ਪਹਿਲਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]pehlaan[/hi] - This word means "before". It's used to indicate the order of events.

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]khaana[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb [hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] ([hi]khaana[/hi]) which means "to eat". In this sentence, it acts as the object of the verb [hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]chaahida hai[/hi]).

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]chaahida hai[/hi] - This is a modal verb meaning "ought to" or "should". It is used to express obligation or necessity. This verb is conjugated in the present tense and is always used with the third person singular subject [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]hai[/hi]).

Key Concepts:

Dative Case: The dative case is used to show the recipient of the action of the verb. In Punjabi, the dative case is often marked by the ending -[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] ([hi]noo[/hi]) or -[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] ([hi]ne[/hi]).

Infinitive Form: The infinitive form of verbs in Punjabi often functions as a noun. It is used to express the action of the verb without specifying the subject or tense.

Modal Verbs: Modal verbs are auxiliary verbs that modify the meaning of the main verb. They express concepts such as possibility, obligation, permission, and ability.

Memorization Tips:

Practice using the modal verb [hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]chaahida hai[/hi]) in different sentences.

Create flash cards with the infinitive forms of verbs and their English translations.

Use the Punjabi sentence you created to create a dialogue or short story.

The next word is only. English: He only eats vegetables.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਿਰਫ਼ ਸਬਜ਼ੀਆਂ ਹੀ ਖਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the pronoun "he" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਸਿਰਫ਼[/hi] - This means "only" in Punjabi. It emphasizes that the action is limited to the specified object.

[hi]ਸਬਜ਼ੀਆਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the word for "vegetable" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹੀ[/hi] - This is a particle that reinforces the meaning of "only".

[hi]ਖਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to eat" in Punjabi. It is conjugated in the masculine singular form to agree with the subject "he".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in Punjabi. It is used to indicate that the statement is true in the present moment.

Key Concepts:

Pronouns: [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] is a pronoun, which replaces a noun.

Adverbs: [hi]ਸਿਰਫ਼[/hi] modifies the verb "to eat" by specifying the extent of the action.

Particle: [hi]ਹੀ[/hi] is a particle used to emphasize the meaning of "only".

Verb Conjugation: The verb "[hi]ਖਾਂਦਾ[/hi]" is conjugated in the present tense, masculine singular form to agree with the subject "he".

Present Tense: The verbs "[hi]ਖਾਂਦਾ[/hi]" and "[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]" are both in the present tense, indicating that the actions are happening now.

The next word is education. English: Education is the key to a better future.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਿੱਖਿਆ ਇੱਕ ਚੰਗੇ ਭਵਿੱਖ ਦੀ ਚਾਬੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]sikhiya[/hi] - education, learning

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a, one

[hi]ਚੰਗੇ[/hi] - [hi]change[/hi] - good

[hi]ਭਵਿੱਖ[/hi] - [hi]bhavish[/hi] - future

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]ਚਾਬੀ[/hi] - [hi]chabi[/hi] - key

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to show possession in Punjabi. It is similar to using "of" or "'s" in English.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is used to indicate present tense. It is similar to using "is" or "am" in English.

Translation: Education is the key to a better future.

The next word is volume. English: The volume of the music is too loud.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੰਗੀਤ ਦੀ ਆਵਾਜ਼ ਬਹੁਤ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੰਗੀਤ[/hi] [hi]sangeet[/hi] - music. This word is often used when referring to the melody or sounds of musical instruments.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] [hi]di[/hi] - of. This is the feminine form of the possessive particle. It is used here to connect the music to its volume.

[hi]ਆਵਾਜ਼[/hi] [hi]avaaz[/hi] - sound or voice. You can use this word to refer to the human voice or sounds from instruments.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] [hi]bahut[/hi] - very, extremely. This word is often used to emphasize the degree or extent of something.

[hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ[/hi] [hi]zyada[/hi] - much, too much. This is used to indicate something is more than what is desired.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] - is, it is. This is the present tense of the verb "to be".

Remember: the [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] [hi]di[/hi] is a feminine possessive particle and it is used because [hi]ਆਵਾਜ਼[/hi] [hi]avaaz[/hi] (sound) is a feminine noun.

The next word is energy. English: The children have a lot of energy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚਿਆਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰੀ ਊਰਜਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚਿਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]bachchyaan[/hi] - children (plural)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in, inside (This is a postposition, which means it comes after the noun it modifies, and it is used to indicate location.)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very, a lot

[hi]ਸਾਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]saari[/hi] - all, whole (This is the feminine singular form of the word "saara," which means "all" or "whole" and is used with feminine nouns.

[hi]ਊਰਜਾ[/hi] - [hi]oorja[/hi] - energy (This is a noun, which is the name of a person, place, or thing.)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (This is the present tense of the verb "hona," which means "to be." It is used to indicate the state of being.)

Important grammatical concepts:

Punjabi is a subject-verb-object (SVO) language, meaning the subject of the sentence comes first, followed by the verb, and then the object.

Punjabi uses postpositions, which are similar to prepositions in English, but they come after the noun they modify.

Punjabi uses different forms of nouns and adjectives to indicate gender and number.

Remember this sentence to learn the word [hi]ਊਰਜਾ[/hi] ([hi]oorja[/hi]) for energy and also to learn the word [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] ([hi]vich[/hi]) to indicate location!

The next word is want. English: I want to eat.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਖਾਣਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - means "to me" or "I" in this context, subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - means "food" or "to eat". This is the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - means "want" or "need". It is a modal verb, which means it modifies the verb [hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] to show the speaker's desire.

A modal verb requires a verb to follow it, in this case [hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi].

English: I want to eat.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਖਾਣਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is many. English: There are many books in the library.

Punjabi: [hi]Kitaab khaane vich bahut saare kitaaban hain.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Kitaab khaane[/hi] - This is a compound word meaning "library." [hi]Kitaab[/hi] means "book" and [hi]khaana[/hi] means "house" or "place."

[hi]vich[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "in" or "inside."

[hi]bahut saare[/hi] - This is a phrase meaning "many" or "a lot of."

[hi]kitaaban[/hi] - This is the plural form of [hi]kitaab[/hi] meaning "books."

[hi]hain[/hi] - This is the plural form of the verb "to be" in the present tense.

This sentence uses the simple present tense and demonstrates how to use plural forms of nouns in Punjabi.

English: There are many books in the library.

Punjabi: [hi]Kitaab khaane vich bahut saare kitaaban hain.[/hi]

The next word is be. English: He is being.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹੈ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he". This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is" or "being" in the present tense. It's used here to show that the subject is in a state of being.

Key Concept: The word [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a very versatile verb in Punjabi, it can be used for "is" or "being". It can also be used to show that something exists, or to indicate possession.

English: He is being.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹੈ[/hi]

The next word is however. English: He wanted to go to the market, however, he was too tired.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu bazar jaana chahida si, parantu, usnu bahut thakan lag rahi si[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usnu[/hi] - He (dative case, indicating the recipient of the action)

[hi]bazar[/hi] - market

[hi]jaana[/hi] - to go

[hi]chahida si[/hi] - wanted (past tense, indicating a desire)

[hi]parantu[/hi] - however (conjunction introducing a contrasting idea)

[hi]usnu[/hi] - he (dative case, indicating the recipient of the action)

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]thakan[/hi] - tiredness

[hi]lag rahi si[/hi] - was feeling (present continuous tense, indicating a state of being)

Key Concepts:

Dative Case: [hi]Usnu[/hi] is in the dative case, indicating the recipient of the action. In English, this would be indicated by the use of the preposition "to" or "for."

Past Tense: [hi]chahida si[/hi] is in the past tense, indicating that the desire was in the past.

Conjunction: [hi]parantu[/hi] is a conjunction that introduces a contrasting idea. This is similar to the English "however" or "but."

Present Continuous Tense: [hi]lag rahi si[/hi] is in the present continuous tense, indicating a state of being or action that is ongoing at the time of speaking.

English: He wanted to go to the market, however, he was too tired.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu bazar jaana chahida si, parantu, usnu bahut thakan lag rahi si[/hi].

The next word is draw. English: He draws a beautiful picture.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਤਸਵੀਰ ਬਣਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]oh[/hi] - He (subject)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - A (indefinite article)

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]sundar[/hi] - Beautiful (adjective)

[hi]ਤਸਵੀਰ[/hi] - [hi]tasveer[/hi] - Picture (noun)

[hi]ਬਣਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]banaaonda[/hi] - Draws (verb, present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is/does (auxiliary verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

The sentence is in the present continuous tense, which is used to describe actions that are happening now.

The word [hi]ਬਣਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] is the present continuous form of the verb [hi]ਬਣਾਉਣਾ[/hi] (to draw).

The sentence uses the auxiliary verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi], which is required in Punjabi to form present tense verbs.

English: He draws a beautiful picture.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਤਸਵੀਰ ਬਣਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ। [/hi]

The next word is money. English: He has a lot of money.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਦੇ ਕੋਲ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰਾ ਪੈਸਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਦੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive form of [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he/she/it). It means "his/her/its".

[hi]ਕੋਲ[/hi] - This means "near" or "with". It is used to indicate possession.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This means "very" or "a lot". It is an intensifier.

[hi]ਸਾਰਾ[/hi] - This means "all" or "whole". It is used to emphasize the quantity.

[hi]ਪੈਸਾ[/hi] - This means "money".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" for the third person singular (he/she/it).

Key concepts:

Possessive forms in Punjabi use the preposition [hi]ਕੋਲ[/hi] to indicate ownership.

Intensifiers like [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] are commonly used in Punjabi to emphasize quantity or degree.

Translation: He has a lot of money.

The next word is engineer. English: He is an engineer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he" (pronoun)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "one" or "a" (indefinite article). We use this to indicate a single instance of something.

[hi]ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "engineer" (noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is" (verb - present tense). It is the verb that connects the subject "he" to the object "engineer." The dot at the end signifies the end of the sentence.

This sentence uses simple grammatical structures.

It is also good to note that "engineer" is a loanword, and we do not have an inherent Punjabi word for it.

You may also see the phrase "[hi]ਇੱਕ ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰ[/hi]" abbreviated to "[hi]ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰ[/hi]". This is perfectly acceptable in spoken language, especially if the context makes the meaning clear.

Key Concepts:

Loanword: A word adopted from another language.

Indefinite Article: A word like "a" or "an" which refers to one non-specific instance of something.

Subject-Verb-Object Structure: The basic sentence structure in Punjabi. This means the subject ("he") comes first, then the verb ("is") and then the object ("engineer").

Translation (using espeak-ng):

English: He is an engineer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is price. English: The price of this book is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]Is kitab di kimat bahut zyada hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This, demonstrative pronoun, referring to the book.

[hi]kitab[/hi] - Book, noun.

[hi]di[/hi] - Of, possessive marker, indicating possession.

[hi]kimat[/hi] - Price, noun.

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Very, adverb of degree, intensifies the adjective.

[hi]zyada[/hi] - High, adjective, describing the price.

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is, present tense verb, singular third person.

Key Concepts:

Possessive Marker: The word [hi]di[/hi] is a possessive marker, indicating that the price belongs to the book. This is similar to the English "of" in the phrase "the price of the book."

Adjective: The adjective [hi]zyada[/hi] describes the price as being "high."

Third Person Singular: The verb [hi]hai[/hi] is in the third person singular, meaning it is referring to a single thing (the price).

English: The price of this book is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]Is kitab di kimat bahut zyada hai.[/hi]

The next word is detail. English: He explained the details of the plan.

Punjabi: ਉਸਨੇ ਯੋਜਨਾ ਦੇ ਵੇਰਵੇ ਦੱਸੇ। [hi]usne yojana de verve dasse.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]usne[/hi] - He/She/It (masculine, singular) - This is the subject pronoun. In Punjabi, we generally avoid using the pronoun "he" unless it's essential to clarify the gender.

[hi]yojana[/hi] - Plan - This is the direct object of the sentence.

[hi]de[/hi] - Of - This is a postposition, like the English preposition "of".

[hi]verve[/hi] - Details - This is the direct object of the preposition.

[hi]dasse[/hi] - Explained - This is the verb in the past tense.

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions.

The subject pronoun is often omitted in Punjabi when the context is clear.

Punjabi word order is usually Subject-Object-Verb (SOV).

The next word is hard. English: This work is hard.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kaam mushkil hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]kaam[/hi] - Work (noun)

[hi]mushkil[/hi] - Hard (adjective)

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]mushkil[/hi] is a common word for "hard" in Punjabi and can be used for both physical and mental tasks.

[hi]hai[/hi] is the most common form of the verb "to be" in present tense.

English: This work is hard.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kaam mushkil hai[/hi].

The next word is role. English: He plays the role of a teacher.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਦਾ ਕਿਰਦਾਰ ਨਿਭਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a/one

[hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ[/hi] - [hi]adhyapak[/hi] - teacher

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of/possessive marker

[hi]ਕਿਰਦਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]kirdaar[/hi] - role/character

[hi]ਨਿਭਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]nibhaunda[/hi] - plays (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is (present tense)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: Punjabi uses gender agreement, which means that the adjective ([hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a/one) and the verb ([hi]ਨਿਭਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]nibhaunda[/hi] - plays) need to agree with the gender of the noun ([hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ[/hi] - [hi]adhyapak[/hi] - teacher).

Possessive Marker: The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of/possessive marker marks possession.

Present Continuous Tense: The verb [hi]ਨਿਭਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]nibhaunda[/hi] - plays is in the present continuous tense.

English: He plays the role of a teacher.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਦਾ ਕਿਰਦਾਰ ਨਿਭਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is manager. English: The manager is responsible for the employees.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੇਜਰ ਕਰਮਚਾਰੀਆਂ ਦੀ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰੀ ਲੈਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੇਜਰ[/hi] - manager

[hi]ਕਰਮਚਾਰੀਆਂ[/hi] - employees (plural)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰੀ[/hi] - responsibility

[hi]ਲੈਂਦਾ[/hi] - takes (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (present tense, singular)

Key Concepts:

Gendered Verbs: In Punjabi, verbs change based on the gender of the subject. In this case, [hi]ਲੈਂਦਾ[/hi] is the masculine form of the verb "to take."

Possessive Markers: The possessive marker [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] indicates that the responsibility belongs to the employees.

Word Order: Punjabi follows a Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) word order.

English: The manager is responsible for the employees.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੇਜਰ ਕਰਮਚਾਰੀਆਂ ਦੀ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰੀ ਲੈਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is mention. English: He mentioned that he had a meeting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦੱਸਿਆ ਕਿ ਉਸਦੀ ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] = [hi]usne[/hi] = He (subject pronoun) + [hi]ne[/hi] = has (past tense marker for third person singular, used to show action)

[hi]ਦੱਸਿਆ[/hi] = [hi]dassia[/hi] = mentioned (past tense of the verb [hi]ਦੱਸਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]dassna[/hi] - to tell)

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] = [hi]ki[/hi] = that (conjunction, used to introduce a subordinate clause)

[hi]ਉਸਦੀ[/hi] = [hi]usdi[/hi] = his/her (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ[/hi] = [hi]meeting[/hi] = meeting (noun)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] = [hi]hai[/hi] = is (present tense of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]hona[/hi] - to be)

Key Concepts:

This sentence demonstrates the use of the past tense marker [hi]ne[/hi] with the subject pronoun [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi].

The verb [hi]ਦੱਸਿਆ[/hi] is in the past tense and used to convey the action of mentioning.

The subordinate clause introduced by [hi]ਕਿ[/hi] provides further information about what was mentioned.

English: He mentioned that he had a meeting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦੱਸਿਆ ਕਿ ਉਸਦੀ ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is jump. English: He jumped over the fence.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਖੇਤ ਦੀ ਵਾੜ ਤੋਂ ਛਾਲ ਮਾਰੀ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is a contraction of [hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] which means "he" in the past tense. It is used for masculine subjects.

[hi]ਖੇਤ[/hi] - This means "field" and is a common word.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This means "of" or "the" and it is the possessive particle that goes before a noun. This word is very important in Punjabi and can be tricky, but it's essential to master it.

[hi]ਵਾੜ[/hi] - This means "fence" and is a useful word to know.

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - This means "from" and is a postposition that is used after a noun or pronoun.

[hi]ਛਾਲ[/hi] - This means "jump" or "leap".

[hi]ਮਾਰੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਮਾਰਨਾ[/hi], which means "to hit" or "to do" (like "I did a jump"). It's a very common verb.

In Punjabi, the order of the words in a sentence is very flexible. This sentence can also be written as:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਛਾਲ ਮਾਰੀ ਖੇਤ ਦੀ ਵਾੜ ਤੋਂ[/hi]

This means the same thing, but the order of the words is different.

Here's a mnemonic to help you remember the word [hi]ਵਾੜ[/hi]: Imagine a Warehouse with a All Red Door.

The next word is stone. English: The stone is heavy.

Punjabi: [hi]Pather [hi] [hi]bhāri [hi] [hi]hai [hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Pather [hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "stone." It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]bhāri [hi] - This word means "heavy." It is an adjective describing the stone.

[hi]hai [hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." It is the verb of the sentence, connecting the subject and the adjective.

Key Concepts:

Word Order: In Punjabi, the typical word order is Subject-Adjective-Verb.

Gender Agreement: Punjabi adjectives agree in gender with the noun they modify. Since "stone" is masculine in Punjabi, the adjective "heavy" also takes the masculine form.

Translation: The stone is heavy.

The next word is department. English: He works in the English department.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅੰਗਰੇਜ਼ੀ ਵਿਭਾਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਅੰਗਰੇਜ਼ੀ[/hi] - English

[hi]ਵਿਭਾਗ[/hi] - department

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - work

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - does

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is.

Key concepts:

[hi]ਵਿਭਾਗ[/hi] is an important word meaning "department". It is commonly used in universities.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a postposition meaning "in". It follows the noun it modifies.

The sentence follows the Subject-Verb-Object structure.

English: He works in the English department.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅੰਗਰੇਜ਼ੀ ਵਿਭਾਗ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is medium. English: The book is of medium size.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮੱਧਮ ਆਕਾਰ ਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitab[/hi] - book

[hi]ਮੱਧਮ[/hi] - [hi]madham[/hi] - medium

[hi]ਆਕਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]aakar[/hi] - size

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of the, possessive

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Possessive marker: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - indicates possession of the size by the book

Noun: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitab[/hi] - the subject of the sentence

Adjective: [hi]ਮੱਧਮ[/hi] - [hi]madham[/hi] - modifies the noun [hi]ਆਕਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]aakar[/hi] - size

Verb: [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - the main verb, indicating state of being.

English: The book is of medium size.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮੱਧਮ ਆਕਾਰ ਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is admit. English: He admits that he made a mistake.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne maan layā ke us ne galti kar dīti[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us ne[/hi] - "He" (subject pronoun) + [hi]ne[/hi] (past tense marker). This is a common way to form the past tense in Punjabi.

[hi]maan layā[/hi] - "admitted" (verb). The verb is in the past tense.

[hi]ke[/hi] - "that" (conjunction).

[hi]us ne[/hi] - "he" (subject pronoun) + [hi]ne[/hi] (past tense marker).

[hi]galti kar dīti[/hi] - "made a mistake" (verb). The verb is in the past tense.

Key concepts:

Past Tense: Punjabi uses a variety of markers to indicate the past tense, including [hi]ne[/hi] and [hi]layā[/hi].

Subject-Verb Agreement: The subject and verb must agree in number and gender in Punjabi, as they do in English.

Conjunctions: Punjabi uses conjunctions like [hi]ke[/hi] ("that") to connect clauses and phrases.

Translation: He admits that he made a mistake.

The next word is race. English: The race is about to begin.

Punjabi: [hi]ਦੌੜ ਸ਼ੁਰੂ ਹੋਣ ਵਾਲੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਦੌੜ[/hi] [hi]dauṛ[/hi] - race (noun)

[hi]ਸ਼ੁਰੂ[/hi] [hi]shuru[/hi] - to begin, to start (verb)

[hi]ਹੋਣ[/hi] [hi]hon[/hi] - to be, to become (verb)

[hi]ਵਾਲੀ[/hi] [hi]wali[/hi] - ending, about to, going to (suffix)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - is (verb)

Key Concept:

The Punjabi sentence uses the past participle [hi]ਹੋਣ[/hi] [hi]hon[/hi] (to be, to become) in the form [hi]ਵਾਲੀ[/hi] [hi]wali[/hi] to indicate that the action is about to happen. This is similar to the English phrase "going to."

English: The race is about to begin.

Punjabi: [hi]ਦੌੜ ਸ਼ੁਰੂ ਹੋਣ ਵਾਲੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is relax. English: Relax, everything will be okay.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੈਠੋ, ਸਭ ਠੀਕ ਹੋ ਜਾਵੇਗਾ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੈਠੋ[/hi] - This is the imperative form of the verb [hi]ਬੈਠਣਾ[/hi] which means "to sit" or "to relax". In this context, it is being used as an imperative command meaning "Relax".

[hi]ਸਭ[/hi] - means "everything".

[hi]ਠੀਕ[/hi] - means "okay".

[hi]ਹੋ ਜਾਵੇਗਾ[/hi] - is the future tense of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] which means "to be" or "to become" and in this case, it means "will be".

English: Relax, everything will be okay.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੈਠੋ, ਸਭ ਠੀਕ ਹੋ ਜਾਵੇਗਾ[/hi].

The next word is demonstrate. English: The teacher demonstrated the proper way to write the Punjabi alphabet.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਨੇ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਵਰਣਮਾਲਾ ਲਿਖਣ ਦਾ ਸਹੀ ਤਰੀਕਾ ਦਿਖਾਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ[/hi] (adhyapak) - teacher

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] (ne) - a grammatical particle indicating the subject of the sentence is performing the action. It is like "by" or "through" in English.

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] (panjabi) - Punjabi

[hi]ਵਰਣਮਾਲਾ[/hi] (varnamala) - alphabet

[hi]ਲਿਖਣ[/hi] (likhan) - to write

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] (da) - of/belonging to

[hi]ਸਹੀ[/hi] (sahi) - correct

[hi]ਤਰੀਕਾ[/hi] (tarika) - way/method

[hi]ਦਿਖਾਇਆ।[/hi] (dikhaya) - demonstrated (past tense)

Key concept: The word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV). For example, the sentence structure is "Teacher (subject) demonstrated (verb) the way to write the Punjabi alphabet (object)."

The next word is desire. English: I desire to eat mangoes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ [hi] आम [hi] ਖਾਣ ਦੀ [hi] ਇੱਛਾ [hi] ਹੈ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ [hi]: to me

[hi]ਆਮ [hi]: mango(s)

[hi]ਖਾਣ ਦੀ [hi]: of eating

[hi]ਇੱਛਾ [hi]: desire

[hi]ਹੈ। [hi]: is.

English: I desire to eat mangoes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ [hi] आम [hi] ਖਾਣ ਦੀ [hi] ਇੱਛਾ [hi] ਹੈ।

The next word is wait. English: Wait a minute.

Punjabi: [hi]ਥੋੜ੍ਹਾ ਜਿਹਾ ਰੁਕੋ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਥੋੜ੍ਹਾ[/hi] means 'a little'

[hi]ਜਿਹਾ[/hi] is a suffix meaning 'like', so [hi]ਥੋੜ੍ਹਾ ਜਿਹਾ[/hi] means 'a little bit'

[hi]ਰੁਕੋ[/hi] means 'wait' or 'stop'

So [hi]ਥੋੜ੍ਹਾ ਜਿਹਾ ਰੁਕੋ[/hi] means 'wait a minute'

English: Wait a minute.

The next word is hospital. English: He went to the hospital.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਸਪਤਾਲ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It - Pronoun

[hi]ਹਸਪਤਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]haspatal[/hi] - Hospital - Noun

[hi]ਗਿਆ।[/hi] - [hi]gya[/hi] - Went - Verb (past tense)

Key Concepts:

This sentence is in the past tense, indicating that the action of going to the hospital has already occurred.

The word order in Punjabi is generally subject-object-verb (SOV), which is different from English (SVO).

English: He went to the hospital.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਸਪਤਾਲ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is favor. English: He did me a favor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੇਰਾ ਇੱਕ ਇਹਸਾਨ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She/It (referring to a male)

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]mera[/hi] - My (used with masculine nouns)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - one

[hi]ਇਹਸਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]ihsaan[/hi] - favor

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]kita[/hi] - did (past tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] (one) is used before singular nouns in Punjabi.

The word order for sentences in Punjabi is subject-object-verb (SOV)

This sentence uses the past tense of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] (to do), which is [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi].

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] is the third person singular pronoun in the past tense.

English: He did me a favor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੇਰਾ ਇੱਕ ਇਹਸਾਨ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi].

The next word is while. English: While I was eating, my friend called.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਖਾਣਾ ਖਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਸੀ, ਉਦੋਂ ਮੇਰਾ ਦੋਸਤ ਫ਼ੋਨ ਕਰ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - I

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - food

[hi]ਖਾ[/hi] - to eat

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - was

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - was

[hi]ਉਦੋਂ[/hi] - while, then, at that time

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] - my

[hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] - friend

[hi]ਫ਼ੋਨ[/hi] - phone

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - to do

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - went

Key Concepts:

Present Continuous Tense: The sentence uses the present continuous tense in Punjabi, [hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਸੀ[/hi], to indicate an action that was ongoing in the past.

While: The word [hi]ਉਦੋਂ[/hi] can be used to express "while" in Punjabi.

Past Tense: The verb [hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] indicates an action completed in the past.

Key Point: Notice how the structure of the Punjabi sentence is different from the English sentence. In Punjabi, the verb comes after the subject. Also, note the use of [hi]ਸੀ[/hi], which is a common auxiliary verb in Punjabi.

English: While I was eating, my friend called.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਖਾਣਾ ਖਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਸੀ, ਉਦੋਂ ਮੇਰਾ ਦੋਸਤ ਫ਼ੋਨ ਕਰ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is behavior. English: The child's behavior is very bad.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਦਾ ਵਿਵਹਾਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਾੜਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi] [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਵਿਵਹਾਰ[/hi] [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] [hi]ਮਾੜਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

[hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi] - child (masculine, singular)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - possessive particle "of the" - it's a possessive marker that connects "child" to "behavior".

[hi]ਵਿਵਹਾਰ[/hi] - behavior

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very

[hi]ਮਾੜਾ[/hi] - bad

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense, 3rd person singular)

Key concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns have grammatical gender. "Child" is masculine, so we use the masculine possessive marker [hi]ਦਾ[/hi].

Possessive Marker: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a crucial possessive marker. It indicates possession and connects the noun "child" to the noun "behavior".

Word Order: The basic word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV). In this sentence, the subject is "child", the object is "behavior", and the verb is "is".

Translation: The child's behavior is very bad.

The next word is recently. English: He recently visited his family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਹਾਲ ਹੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਆਪਣੇ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਦਾ ਦੌਰਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine subject pronoun, "he" in the past tense. It's similar to saying "He did".

[hi]ਹਾਲ[/hi] - This means "recently" or "lately".

[hi]ਹੀ[/hi] - This is used to emphasize "recently" and is similar to saying "just".

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This signifies "in" or "within" and indicates a timeframe.

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - This means "his" or "her" and is possessive.

[hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] - This means "family".

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is the masculine singular possessive particle for "of" - in this case, "of his family".

[hi]ਦੌਰਾ[/hi] - This means "visit".

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do" or "to make" and signifies the action of visiting.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਹਾਲ ਹੀ ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a common phrase for "recently".

This sentence uses the past tense of the verb [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] to indicate that the action of visiting happened in the past.

English: He recently visited his family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਹਾਲ ਹੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਆਪਣੇ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਦਾ ਦੌਰਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is shall. English: We shall go to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]Aasां bazaar jaaange[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Aasां[/hi] - We (plural, subject pronoun)

[hi]bazaar[/hi] - market (noun)

[hi]jaaange[/hi] - shall go (future tense, verb)

Key Concepts:

The future tense is formed by adding the suffix [hi]ange[/hi] to the verb stem.

[hi]Aasां[/hi] is the plural form of the first-person pronoun.

English: We shall go to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]Aasां bazaar jaaange[/hi].

The next word is they. English: They are going to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun for "they" in Punjabi. It is a gender-neutral pronoun.

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This means "market." The word [hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] is used for both a physical market and a metaphorical market like a stock market.

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - This is the verb "to go" in its present continuous form. It is used to express an action happening now.

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - This is the auxiliary verb that adds the present continuous tense to the verb [hi]ਜਾ[/hi].

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the auxiliary verb "to be." It indicates that the subject is plural.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses a combination of verb and auxiliary verb for the present continuous tense. This is similar to the English "is/are/am + verb + -ing" format.

Pronoun use in Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] is used for both masculine and feminine plurals, unlike English, where separate pronouns are used ("they" vs "them").

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] is a common word and can be used in various contexts.

English Translation: They are going to the market.

Punjabi Translation: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is bird. English: The bird is flying in the sky.

Punjabi: [hi]Chidiya aasmaan vich uddi jaa rahi hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Chidiya[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "bird."

[hi]aasmaan[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "sky."

[hi]vich[/hi] - This is the Punjabi preposition "in," indicating location.

[hi]uddi[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to fly."

[hi]jaa[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense marker, indicating ongoing action.

[hi]rahi[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense marker, indicating ongoing action.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense marker for "is."

Key Concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns are often gendered. The word for "bird" ([hi]chidiya[/hi]) is feminine.

Tense: Punjabi has a complex system of tenses, and this sentence uses both the past tense ([hi]uddi[/hi]) and the present continuous tense ([hi]jaa rahi[/hi]).

Prepositions: Punjabi uses prepositions to indicate location. Here, "[hi]vich[/hi]" indicates "in."

English: The bird is flying in the sky.

The next word is food. English: The food is delicious.

Punjabi: [hi]Khāna swādlidar hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Khāna[/hi] - This word means "food." It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]swādlidar[/hi] - This word means "delicious." It is the adjective describing the food.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This word means "is" and is the verb.

The word order in Punjabi is Subject - Adjective - Verb.

The sentence structure is very simple in Punjabi. It's a great starting point for understanding basic Punjabi grammar.

Key Concept: Punjabi, like English, uses a subject-verb-object sentence structure, however, the word order is subject-adjective-verb.

English: The food is delicious.

Punjabi: [hi]Khāna swādlidar hai[/hi].

The next word is proceed. English: Let's proceed with the lesson.

Punjabi: [hi]Aage chalde haan[/hi] paഠh [hi]de[/hi] nu.

Breakdown:

[hi]Aage[/hi] means "ahead" or "forward". It's being used here to mean continuing on.

[hi]chalde[/hi] is the present continuous tense of the verb [hi]chalna[/hi] which means "to walk" or "to move". This word is used in this sentence in the sense of continuing something.

[hi]haan[/hi] is the first person plural pronoun meaning "we".

[hi]paഠh[/hi] means "to read" or "to study".

[hi]de[/hi] is the present participle of the verb [hi]dena[/hi] meaning "to give" and is being used here to mean "to continue" or "to do". The 'de' at the end is added as part of the grammar to combine it with the verb [hi]paഠh[/hi].

Translation: Let's continue with the study.

The next word is perhaps. English: Perhaps it will rain tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]Shayad kal barish hovi[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Shayad[/hi] means "perhaps" or "maybe". It's a common word used to express uncertainty.

[hi]kal[/hi] means "tomorrow". It's a simple word for the day after today.

[hi]barish[/hi] means "rain". It's a basic word for precipitation.

[hi]hovi[/hi] is the future tense of the verb "to be" which means "will be".

Key concepts:

Future Tense: [hi]hovi[/hi] is the future tense of the verb "to be" and indicates that the action will happen in the future.

Uncertainty: The word [hi]Shayad[/hi] implies that the speaker is not certain about the rain.

Word Order: In Punjabi, the order of words in a sentence can differ from English. In this case, the word order is "[hi]Shayad[/hi] [hi]kal[/hi] [hi]barish[/hi] [hi]hovi[/hi]", which can be translated as "Perhaps tomorrow rain will be".

Remember, this is just one way to say "perhaps it will rain tomorrow" in Punjabi. There are other ways to express this concept depending on the context and desired level of formality.

The next word is add. English: He added sugar to his tea.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਚਾਹ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ੱਕਰ ਪਾਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She (masculine) - this is a pronoun in the third person singular, and it indicates the subject of the sentence

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - [hi]aapni[/hi] - his/her (masculine) - this is a possessive pronoun in the third person singular and is modifying the noun [hi]ਚਾਹ[/hi]

[hi]ਚਾਹ[/hi] - [hi]chaah[/hi] - tea - this is the object of the preposition [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi]

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in - this is a preposition that indicates the location of the sugar

[hi]ਸ਼ੱਕਰ[/hi] - [hi]shakkar[/hi] - sugar - the object of the verb

[hi]ਪਾਈ[/hi] - [hi]paai[/hi] - added - past tense of the verb [hi]ਪਾਉਣਾ[/hi] which means to add, to put, to pour.

Key Concepts:

Possessive pronouns are used to indicate ownership, or belonging.

Prepositions indicate the relationship between a noun or pronoun and another word in the sentence, in this case, where the sugar is located.

The verb is in the past tense because the action of adding the sugar happened in the past.

English: He added sugar to his tea.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਚਾਹ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ੱਕਰ ਪਾਈ।[/hi]

The next word is arrive. English: They will arrive tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]Oh [hi] kal [hi] aaunge [hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Oh [hi] is a subject pronoun, meaning "they".

[hi]kal [hi] is an adverb, meaning "tomorrow".

[hi]aaunge [hi] is a verb, meaning "will arrive".

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses the future tense, marked by the verb ending "-nge".

Punjabi word order is typically Subject-Object-Verb, but can vary depending on the context.

English: They will arrive tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]Oh [hi] kal [hi] aaunge [hi].

The next word is concern. English: I am concerned about my son's health.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਪੁੱਤਰ ਦੀ ਸਿਹਤ ਬਾਰੇ ਚਿੰਤਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]mainnu[/hi] - to me, (dative case of [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - [hi]main[/hi] - I )

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - [hi]aapne[/hi] - my (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਪੁੱਤਰ[/hi] - [hi]puttar[/hi] - son

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਸਿਹਤ[/hi] - [hi]sehat[/hi] - health

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]bare[/hi] - about (postposition)

[hi]ਚਿੰਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]chinta[/hi] - concern (feminine noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, 3rd person singular of verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]hona[/hi] - to be)

Key concepts:

Dative case: The dative case is used to indicate the indirect object of a verb. In this case, [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] ([hi]mainnu[/hi]) indicates that the concern is directed towards the speaker.

Possessive pronoun: [hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] ([hi]aapne[/hi]) indicates that the son is the speaker's own son.

Postposition: [hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] ([hi]bare[/hi]) is a postposition, which means it follows the noun it modifies. It indicates the subject of the concern, which is the son's health.

Feminine noun: [hi]ਚਿੰਤਾ[/hi] ([hi]chinta[/hi]) is a feminine noun, which is why the possessive particle [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] ([hi]di[/hi]) is used.

English: I am concerned about my son's health.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਪੁੱਤਰ ਦੀ ਸਿਹਤ ਬਾਰੇ ਚਿੰਤਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is hardly. English: He hardly ever comes to class.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਲਾਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਸ਼ਾਇਦ ਹੀ ਕਦੇ ਆਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਕਲਾਸ[/hi] - Class

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਸ਼ਾਇਦ[/hi] - maybe, perhaps (implies low probability)

[hi]ਹੀ[/hi] - only, just (emphasizes rarity)

[hi]ਕਦੇ[/hi] - ever

[hi]ਆਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - comes (present tense, masculine singular)

Key concepts:

The use of [hi]ਸ਼ਾਇਦ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੀ[/hi] together conveys the rarity of the action.

The word [hi]ਕਦੇ[/hi] further emphasizes that the action is infrequent.

Remember: This sentence uses the masculine singular form of the verb [hi]ਆਉਂਦਾ[/hi]. If the subject was feminine, the verb would be [hi]ਆਉਂਦੀ[/hi].

The next word is voice. English: The voice of the singer is very sweet.

Punjabi: [hi]Gaayak di aawaaz bahut mithi hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Gaayak[/hi] - This is the noun, "singer" in Punjabi. Note that it is masculine, so we use the masculine form of the possessive adjective [hi]di[/hi].

[hi]aawaaz[/hi] - This is the noun, "voice" in Punjabi.

[hi]bahut[/hi] - This is the adverb, "very" in Punjabi.

[hi]mithi[/hi] - This is the adjective "sweet" in Punjabi.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the verb, "is" in Punjabi.

Key concepts:

Gender agreement in Punjabi: The adjective [hi]mithi[/hi] must agree in gender with the noun [hi]aawaaz[/hi] which is feminine.

Word order: The basic word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb.

English: The voice of the singer is very sweet.

Punjabi: [hi]Gaayak di aawaaz bahut mithi hai.[/hi]

The next word is soon. English: He will come soon.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਜਲਦੀ ਆਵੇਗਾ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ਜਲਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]jaldi[/hi] - soon, quickly

[hi]ਆਵੇਗਾ[/hi] - [hi]aavega[/hi] - will come (future tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

Gender in Punjabi: In Punjabi, nouns and pronouns have genders. [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] is the masculine singular pronoun for "he".

Future Tense: The future tense in Punjabi is formed by adding the suffix [hi]ਗਾ[/hi] (ga) to the verb stem. In this case, the verb stem is [hi]ਆਵ[/hi] (aav) which means "to come". Therefore, the future tense conjugation for "he will come" is [hi]ਆਵੇਗਾ[/hi] (aavega).

English: He will come soon.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਜਲਦੀ ਆਵੇਗਾ[/hi].

The next word is professional. English: He is a professional teacher.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਪੇਸ਼ੇਵਰ ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he."

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the indefinite article "a."

[hi]ਪੇਸ਼ੇਵਰ[/hi] - This is the adjective "professional."

[hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ[/hi] - This is the noun "teacher."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "is."

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: The verb "is" agrees with the singular subject "he."

Word Order: Punjabi sentence structure generally follows the Subject-Verb-Object pattern.

Adjective Placement: Adjectives typically come before the noun they modify in Punjabi.

English: He is a professional teacher.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਪੇਸ਼ੇਵਰ ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is male. English: He is a male.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਮਰਦ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he."

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "a" or "one."

[hi]ਮਰਦ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "male" or "man."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." Note that it is used as a singular present tense verb for "to be" in Punjabi. The punctuation at the end of the sentence is similar to English and marks the end of a statement.

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the Punjabi word for "he" and "is" which is a very common and important phrase to learn.

The Punjabi language does not have articles like "a" and "an" but instead uses the number one to signify that this is one man.

This example also demonstrates that Punjabi uses similar punctuation to English.

English: He is a male.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਮਰਦ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is blue. English: The sky is blue.

Punjabi: [hi]ਆਕਾਸ਼ ਨੀਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਆਕਾਸ਼[/hi] - [hi]ākāś[/hi] - sky.

[hi]ਨੀਲਾ[/hi] - [hi]nīlā[/hi] - blue.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is.

This sentence uses the simple present tense, which is used to describe things that are always true. The word order is subject-adjective-verb, which is the typical order for Punjabi sentences.

English: The sky is blue.

Punjabi: [hi]ਆਕਾਸ਼ ਨੀਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is page. English: The book has 200 pages.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਵਿਚ ਦੋ ਸੌ ਪੰਨੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book

[hi]ਵਿਚ[/hi] - in (this is the preposition "in" when used with a place)

[hi]ਦੋ[/hi] - two

[hi]ਸੌ[/hi] - hundred

[hi]ਪੰਨੇ[/hi] - pages

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - are

In Punjabi, the word order of a sentence is generally Subject-Object-Verb (SOV). So the sentence structure is:

Subject: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] (book)

Object: [hi]ਪੰਨੇ[/hi] (pages)

Verb: [hi]ਹਨ[/hi] (are)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਵਿਚ[/hi] is a very important preposition meaning "in" and is used with a place, a container, a space. For example, [hi]ਘਰ ਵਿਚ[/hi] (in the house).

[hi]ਸੌ[/hi] is a number word, it means "hundred."

[hi]ਪੰਨੇ[/hi] is the plural form of [hi]ਪੰਨਾ[/hi] which means "page."

English: The book has 200 pages.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਵਿਚ ਦੋ ਸੌ ਪੰਨੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is remember. English: Remember to study hard.

Punjabi: [hi]Yaad rakho ke mehnat karo[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Yaad rakho[/hi] - This is the imperative form of the verb "to remember" in Punjabi. It translates to "Remember" in English.

[hi]ke[/hi] - This is a conjunction that means "that" in English.

[hi]mehnat karo[/hi] - This is the imperative form of the verb "to work hard" in English. It translates to "study hard" in English.

Key concepts:

Imperative verbs are used to give commands or instructions.

Conjunctions connect words, phrases, or clauses.

English: Remember to study hard.

Punjabi: [hi]Yaad rakho ke mehnat karo[/hi].

The next word is century. English: This century has seen tremendous growth in technology.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਸਦੀ ਨੇ ਤਕਨਾਲੋਜੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਹੁਤ ਵਾਧਾ ਦੇਖਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਸਦੀ[/hi] - Century

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - has (marks the subject as the doer of the action)

[hi]ਤਕਨਾਲੋਜੀ[/hi] - Technology

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very

[hi]ਵਾਧਾ[/hi] - growth

[hi]ਦੇਖਿਆ[/hi] - seen

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is a particle that indicates that the subject is the one performing the action.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a postposition indicating location or inclusion.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] is an intensifier used to emphasize the degree of growth.

Remember: [hi]ਸਦੀ[/hi] is pronounced as "sudi" and [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] as "vich".

The next word is variety. English: There is a variety of food available at the market.

Punjabi: [hi]Baazaar vich khane di bohut vaidaata hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Baazaar[/hi] - This means "market" in Punjabi. It's a common word you'll encounter frequently.

[hi]vich[/hi] - This means "in" or "inside". It's used to denote location.

[hi]khane[/hi] - This means "food". It's an essential word for talking about meals.

[hi]di[/hi] - This is a possessive particle, similar to "of" in English. It's often used to show ownership.

[hi]bohut[/hi] - This means "a lot" or "much" and is used to emphasize quantity.

[hi]vaidaata[/hi] - This means "variety" in Punjabi. It's a good word to use when describing different options.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is" or "are". It's a common verb used in various tenses.

Remember: Punjabi uses a different word order than English. The direct translation of "There is a variety of food available at the market" would be more like "Market in food a lot variety is". But, the Punjabi sentence [hi]Baazaar vich khane di bohut vaidaata hai[/hi] is perfectly grammatical and conveys the same meaning.

English: There is a variety of food available at the market.

Punjabi: [hi]Baazaar vich khane di bohut vaidaata hai[/hi].

The next word is gold. English: The gold ring is very beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੋਨੇ ਦੀ ਮੁੰਦਰੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੋਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]sone[/hi] - gold

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]ਮੁੰਦਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]mundri[/hi] - ring

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]sundar[/hi] - beautiful

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Di is a possessive particle used to show ownership. It's similar to "of" in English.

Hai is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in Punjabi.

Translation: The gold ring is very beautiful.

The next word is north. English: The sun rises in the north.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੂਰਜ ਉੱਤਰ ਵੱਲੋਂ ਨਿਕਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] - [hi]sooraj[/hi] - sun

[hi]ਉੱਤਰ[/hi] - [hi]uttar[/hi] - north

[hi]ਵੱਲੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]vallon[/hi] - from (indicates direction)

[hi]ਨਿਕਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]nikalda hai[/hi] - rises

Key Concepts:

Direction: [hi]ਵੱਲੋਂ[/hi] is used to indicate direction.

Verb Conjugation: [hi]ਨਿਕਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] is the present continuous form of the verb [hi]ਨਿਕਲਣਾ[/hi] (to rise) and is conjugated for the third person singular masculine.

English: The sun rises in the north.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੂਰਜ ਉੱਤਰ ਵੱਲੋਂ ਨਿਕਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is series. English: The series is very interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੀਰੀਅਲ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੀਰੀਅਲ[/hi] = series (the word is derived from the English word "serial")

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] = very

[hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪ[/hi] = interesting

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] = is

Key concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV)

The word [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a copula verb, similar to the English "is" or "are," and links the subject to the predicate.

The word [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] is an adverb that modifies the adjective [hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪ[/hi].

English: The series is very interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੀਰੀਅਲ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is relative. English: She is my relative.

Punjabi: [hi]Ūh meri rishtedaar hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Ūh[/hi] - She

[hi]meri[/hi] - my

[hi]rishtedaar[/hi] - relative

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

The word [hi]rishtedaar[/hi] is a noun and means relative.

The word [hi]hai[/hi] is a verb and means is.

[hi]Ūh[/hi] is a pronoun that means she.

[hi]meri[/hi] is a possessive adjective that means my.

The sentence is in the present tense and uses the simple present verb [hi]hai[/hi].

English: She is my relative.

Punjabi: [hi]Ūh meri rishtedaar hai.[/hi]

The next word is union. English: The union of India and Pakistan was a historical event.

[hi]ਭਾਰਤ ਤੇ ਪਾਕਿਸਤਾਨ ਦਾ ਏਕਤਾ ਇੱਕ ਇਤਿਹਾਸਿਕ ਘਟਨਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਭਾਰਤ[/hi] - India

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - and (conjunction)

[hi]ਪਾਕਿਸਤਾਨ[/hi] - Pakistan

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive particle, marks the genitive case)

[hi]ਏਕਤਾ[/hi] - union, unity (noun)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - a, one (indefinite article)

[hi]ਇਤਿਹਾਸਿਕ[/hi] - historical (adjective)

[hi]ਘਟਨਾ[/hi] - event (noun)

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] - was (verb, past tense)

Key Concepts:

The sentence is in the past tense, indicating that the event occurred in the past.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is used to show possession, similar to "of" in English.

The word order in Punjabi is generally Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), which is different from English's Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) order.

The next word is how. English: How do you do this?

Punjabi: [hi]Tusi eho kive karde ho?[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Tusi[/hi] means "you" (plural or formal singular)

[hi]eho[/hi] means "this"

[hi]kive[/hi] means "how"

[hi]karde ho[/hi] means "do" (present continuous tense)

Key concept: The sentence uses the word [hi]kive[/hi] to ask a question about the way in which something is done. The verb [hi]karde ho[/hi] is in the present continuous tense, indicating an ongoing action.

The next word is industrial. English: The industrial revolution brought many changes to the world.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਦਯੋਗਿਕ ਕ੍ਰਾਂਤੀ ਨੇ ਦੁਨੀਆ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰੇ ਬਦਲਾਅ ਲਿਆਂਦੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਦਯੋਗਿਕ[/hi] - Udhyogik - This is the Punjabi word for "industrial". You can remember this word because it sounds like "industry".

[hi]ਕ੍ਰਾਂਤੀ[/hi] - Kranti - This means "revolution". You might remember this word as being similar to "crisis".

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - Ne - This indicates the subject of the sentence, which is "the industrial revolution". In this case, it is similar to the English "has".

[hi]ਦੁਨੀਆ[/hi] - Duniya - This word is easy to remember, as it sounds almost exactly like the English word "world".

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - Vich - This means "in".

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Bahut - This word means "many" or "a lot".

[hi]ਸਾਰੇ[/hi] - Saare - This means "all".

[hi]ਬਦਲਾਅ[/hi] - Badlaa - This word means "changes".

[hi]ਲਿਆਂਦੇ।[/hi] - Lyaande - This is the past tense of the verb "to bring".

English: The industrial revolution brought many changes to the world.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਦਯੋਗਿਕ ਕ੍ਰਾਂਤੀ ਨੇ ਦੁਨੀਆ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰੇ ਬਦਲਾਅ ਲਿਆਂਦੇ।[/hi]

The next word is state. English: He stated his opinion clearly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਰਾਏ ਸਪੱਸ਼ਟ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਦੱਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - his (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਰਾਏ[/hi] - opinion (noun)

[hi]ਸਪੱਸ਼ਟ[/hi] - clear (adjective)

[hi]ਤੌਰ[/hi] - way (noun)

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - on/in (postposition)

[hi]ਦੱਸੀ।[/hi] - stated (past tense verb)

Key Concepts

Possessive pronoun: [hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] is used to indicate possession.

Postposition: [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is used to indicate location or manner.

Past tense verb: [hi]ਦੱਸੀ।[/hi] is the past tense form of the verb [hi]ਦੱਸਣਾ[/hi] (to say/to state).

English: He stated his opinion clearly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਰਾਏ ਸਪੱਸ਼ਟ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਦੱਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is ago. English: He went to the market two hours ago.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੋਰ ਦੋ ਘੰਟੇ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹੋਰ[/hi] - "more" or "further" - This is used to indicate a time that is further in the past

[hi]ਦੋ[/hi] - "two" - The number 2

[hi]ਘੰਟੇ[/hi] - "hours" - Plural form of "hour"

[hi]ਪਹਿਲਾਂ[/hi] - "before" or "ago" - Indicates that something happened in the past

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - "he" - Subject pronoun

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - "market" - Place where people buy things

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - "went" - Past tense of the verb "to go"

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - "was" - This is the past tense of the verb "to be" used in conjunction with the verb "to go" to create a past perfect tense in Punjabi.

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses the word [hi]ਪਹਿਲਾਂ[/hi] to indicate a period of time ago.

Punjabi uses a structure with the past tense of "to go" ([hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi]) and the past tense of "to be" ([hi]ਸੀ[/hi]) to create a past perfect tense.

Translation: He went to the market two hours ago.

The next word is restaurant. English: We are going to the restaurant.

Punjabi: [hi] ਅਸੀਂ ਰੈਸਟੋਰੈਂਟ ਜਾ ਰਹੇ ਹਾਂ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - we (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਰੈਸਟੋਰੈਂਟ[/hi] - restaurant (noun)

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - go (verb)

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - are (present continuous tense marker)

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - are (present continuous tense marker)

Key concepts:

The verb [hi]ਜਾ[/hi] is used with the present continuous tense marker [hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] to form the present continuous tense.

The present continuous tense is used to describe an action that is happening now.

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] is added to the end of the sentence to agree with the subject pronoun [hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi].

English: We are going to the restaurant.

Punjabi: [hi] ਅਸੀਂ ਰੈਸਟੋਰੈਂਟ ਜਾ ਰਹੇ ਹਾਂ। [/hi]

The next word is dear. English: "Dear friend, I hope this letter finds you well."

Punjabi: "[hi]ਪਿਆਰੇ ਦੋਸਤ, ਮੈਨੂੰ ਉਮੀਦ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਇਹ ਪੱਤਰ ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ ਚੰਗਾ ਲੱਗੇਗਾ।[/hi]"

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪਿਆਰੇ[/hi] means "dear" in Punjabi and is used as a term of endearment, often used to address a close friend or loved one. It is often used as an adjective to describe someone or something beloved.

[hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] means "friend" and is a common word used to address someone you are close to or have a friendly relationship with.

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] means "to me" and is the dative case of the pronoun [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi], which means "I"

[hi]ਉਮੀਦ[/hi] means "hope" and it can be used in a sentence to express a desire or expectation that something will happen.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] means "is" and is the present tense form of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] which means "to be".

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] means "that" and is a conjunction used to introduce a clause.

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] means "this" and is a demonstrative pronoun that refers to something close to the speaker.

[hi]ਪੱਤਰ[/hi] means "letter" and refers to a written message that is sent to someone.

[hi]ਤੁਹਾਨੂੰ[/hi] means "to you" and is the dative case of the pronoun [hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ[/hi] which means "you."

[hi]ਚੰਗਾ[/hi] means "good" and refers to something that is positive or pleasant.

[hi]ਲੱਗੇਗਾ[/hi] means "will seem" and is the future tense form of the verb [hi]ਲੱਗਣਾ[/hi] which means "to seem."

Remember, the Punjabi language is a very flexible language, and there are many different ways to say the same thing.

The next word is audience. English: The audience is large.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼੍ਰੋਤਾ[/hi] [hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸ਼੍ਰੋਤਾ[/hi] [hi]vadḍā[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi]

[hi]ਸ਼੍ਰੋਤਾ[/hi] [hi]śrotā[/hi] -  "audience" (singular, masculine)

[hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] [hi]vadḍā[/hi] - "large" (masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - "is"  (present tense, third person singular, masculine)

This sentence utilizes the masculine singular form of the adjective "large" because the noun "audience" is singular and masculine. The verb "is" is in the present tense, third-person singular, and masculine to agree with the masculine singular noun "audience."

The next word is build. English: He built a house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਘਰ ਬਣਾਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is a combination of the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he) and the particle [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] which is a grammatical marker that shows the subject performed the action.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the word for "one" or "a"

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "house"

[hi]ਬਣਾਇਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਬਣਾਉਣਾ[/hi] which means "to build" or "to make"

Key concepts:

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is a particle that marks the subject of a sentence when it is performing an action.

[hi]ਬਣਾਉਣਾ[/hi] is an important verb that means "to build" or "to make".

English: He built a house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਘਰ ਬਣਾਇਆ।[/hi]

The next word is sort. English: The teacher sorted the papers by grade.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਨੇ ਕਾਗ਼ਜ਼ਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਗ੍ਰੇਡ ਮੁਤਾਬਕ ਸੋਰਟ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ[/hi] = teacher

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] = has (past tense marker)

[hi]ਕਾਗ਼ਜ਼ਾਂ[/hi] = papers

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] = to (object marker)

[hi]ਗ੍ਰੇਡ[/hi] = grade

[hi]ਮੁਤਾਬਕ[/hi] = according to

[hi]ਸੋਰਟ[/hi] = sort (past tense)

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] = did

This sentence uses the past tense of the verb "to sort". In Punjabi, the past tense is formed by adding the suffix [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] to the verb. This sentence also uses the object marker [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] to show that the papers are the object of the verb "sorted". The word [hi]ਮੁਤਾਬਕ[/hi] is used to indicate that the papers were sorted according to the grade.

English: The teacher sorted the papers by grade.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਧਿਆਪਕ ਨੇ ਕਾਗ਼ਜ਼ਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਗ੍ਰੇਡ ਮੁਤਾਬਕ ਸੋਰਟ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is house. English: The house is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] (ghar) - This is the word for house. It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] (sundar) - This means "beautiful". It is the adjective describing the house.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) - This is the present tense of the verb "to be." In Punjabi, the verb "to be" comes after the noun or pronoun it modifies.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi word order is different from English. The subject comes first, followed by the adjective, and then the verb. This is a very important concept to understand for any language learner.

The verb "to be" is used to link a subject and a predicate. In this sentence, it connects the house to the description of it being beautiful.

English: The house is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is beautiful. English: This is a beautiful day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਇੱਕ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਦਿਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This, This is a demonstrative pronoun, referring to the day.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - a, This is an indefinite article.

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - beautiful, This is an adjective describing the day.

[hi]ਦਿਨ[/hi] - day.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is. This is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

Remember, [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is a very common ending in Punjabi sentences. It is the equivalent of "is" or "am" in English.

English: This is a beautiful day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਇੱਕ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਦਿਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is drop. English: He dropped the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਸੁੱਟ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book (noun, object of the verb)

[hi]ਸੁੱਟ[/hi] - to drop/throw (verb, past tense)

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - gave/dropped (past tense of the verb [hi] ਦੇਣਾ [/hi] (to give) used as a helper verb)

This sentence illustrates the use of a helper verb to convey the past tense. In this case, the helper verb [hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] works with the verb [hi]ਸੁੱਟ[/hi] to express that the dropping action happened in the past.

English: He dropped the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਸੁੱਟ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is review. English: He reviewed the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਸਮੀਖਿਆ ਕੀਤੀ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book (object of the verb)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਸਮੀਖਿਆ[/hi] - review (noun)

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - did (past tense of the verb "to do")

The sentence follows the basic Subject-Verb-Object structure common in Punjabi. This sentence is in the past tense, indicating that the action of reviewing the book has already happened. [hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] is the past tense form of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] ("to do").

The next word is lawyer. English: The lawyer is arguing the case in court.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਕੀਲ ਅਦਾਲਤ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੇਸ ਦੀ ਦਲੀਲ ਦੇ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਕੀਲ[/hi] - [hi]vakīl[/hi] - lawyer

[hi]ਅਦਾਲਤ[/hi] - [hi]adālat[/hi] - court

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]ਕੇਸ[/hi] - [hi]kes[/hi] - case

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]dī[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਦਲੀਲ[/hi] - [hi]dalīl[/hi] - argument

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]rihā[/hi] - is giving (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Postposition: [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (vich) is a postposition meaning "in" or "within". It follows the noun [hi]ਅਦਾਲਤ[/hi] (adālat).

Possessive Particles: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (dī) and [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] (de) indicate possession. [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (dī) is used for feminine nouns, and [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] (de) is used for masculine nouns. For example, [hi]ਕੇਸ ਦੀ ਦਲੀਲ[/hi] (kes dī dalīl) means "the argument of the case".

Present Continuous Tense: [hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] (rihā hai) is the present continuous tense in Punjabi. It means "is giving" or "is arguing" in this case.

Translation: The lawyer is arguing the case in court.

The next word is home. English: This is my home.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh mera ghar hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This, demonstrative pronoun

[hi]mera[/hi] - my, possessive pronoun

[hi]ghar[/hi] - home, noun

[hi]hai[/hi] - is, present tense of verb "to be"

This is a very basic sentence structure in Punjabi. You can use this as a template for other simple sentences. Just replace the noun ([hi]ghar[/hi]) with any other noun.

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses a word order similar to English.

[hi]hai[/hi] is the most common verb in Punjabi, like the English "is" or "am".

English: This is my home.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh mera ghar hai.[/hi]

The next word is busy. English: I am very busy today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਅੱਜ ਬਹੁਤ ਰੁੱਝਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - [hi]main[/hi] - I

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - [hi]ajj[/hi] - today

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਰੁੱਝਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]rujjhiya[/hi] - busy (masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]hoya[/hi] - being, in the state of (past participle)

[hi]ਹਾਂ।[/hi] - [hi]haan.[/hi] - am (masculine singular)

The sentence structure is very simple.

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] (I) is the subject.

[hi]ਰੁੱਝਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹਾਂ[/hi] (am busy) is the predicate.

The word [hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] (today) acts as an adverbial modifier of time.

The word [hi]ਰੁੱਝਿਆ[/hi] (busy) is a masculine singular adjective. Since it is modifying the masculine singular noun [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] (I), it is also in the masculine singular form.

The word [hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] (being, in the state of) is a past participle, and it creates a present perfect tense. The present perfect tense in Punjabi is formed by using the past participle (like [hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi]) of the verb and then adding the appropriate form of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] (to be).

In this sentence, the past participle of the verb [hi]ਰੁੱਝਣਾ[/hi] (to be busy) is [hi]ਰੁੱਝਿਆ[/hi]. The present perfect tense of the verb [hi]ਰੁੱਝਣਾ[/hi] (to be busy) in the masculine singular is [hi]ਰੁੱਝਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹਾਂ[/hi].

This sentence demonstrates how the present perfect tense is used in Punjabi. It also shows the importance of matching grammatical gender and number between words in a sentence.

English: I am very busy today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਅੱਜ ਬਹੁਤ ਰੁੱਝਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is dead. English: He is dead.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮਰ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he". It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਮਰ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "die"

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to go" This is added to the verb "die" to form the past tense of the verb

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." In English, we would say "He died." The "is" at the end of the sentence denotes that the action (death) occurred in the past and continues to be true.

Key Concept: Punjabi uses the verb "to go" to denote past tense.

English: He is dead.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮਰ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is post. English: He posted the letter.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne chitthi daak diye[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi]: This is the third person singular masculine pronoun in the nominative case, meaning "he".

[hi]chitthi[/hi]: This is the feminine noun for "letter".

[hi]daak[/hi]: This is the noun for "post" or "mail". It is used as a verb in this sentence.

[hi]diye[/hi]: This is the past tense of the verb "to give" in the third person singular masculine form.

This sentence is in the simple past tense and uses the direct object structure. The object, "letter", is directly affected by the verb "to post". The word for "post" is used as a verb in this sentence. This is a common way to express the action of posting something.

Key concepts:

Pronoun usage: The pronoun [hi]Usne[/hi] is essential in identifying the subject of the sentence.

Direct object structure: The sentence uses the direct object structure, with the object, [hi]chitthi[/hi] (letter) directly affected by the verb.

Verb usage: The noun [hi]daak[/hi] is used as a verb to express the action of posting.

Translation using espeak-ng:

"Usne chitthi daak diye."

The next word is regular. English: He goes to the park regularly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਰੋਜ਼ਾਨਾ ਪਾਰਕ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] means "he"

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼ਾਨਾ[/hi] means "regularly, daily, everyday." It is the focus of the sentence.

[hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] means "park"

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] means "goes" - this is a verb in the present tense. It is the grammatical core of the sentence and is conjugated to agree with the subject "he."

Key concept: Punjabi uses the postposition [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] after verbs of motion, which means "to" in English. So, in this sentence, [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] is conjugated to agree with "he" and the postposition [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] is implied and not stated.

Translation: He goes to the park regularly.

The next word is success. English: He achieved success in his studies.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਵਿੱਚ ਸਫ਼ਲਤਾ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] means "he" in the past tense and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - [hi]aapni[/hi] means "his" or "her" and refers to the subject's studies.

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ[/hi] - [hi]padhai[/hi] means "studies"

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] means "in" and indicates the location of the success.

[hi]ਸਫ਼ਲਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]safalta[/hi] means "success"

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ[/hi] - [hi]praapt[/hi] means "achieved" or "obtained"

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi] - [hi]kiti[/hi] is the past tense form of the verb "to do" or "to make" and is used to complete the sentence.

Key concept:

This sentence demonstrates the use of the past tense in Punjabi, as well as the use of possessive pronouns ([hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi]).

English: He achieved success in his studies.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਵਿੱਚ ਸਫ਼ਲਤਾ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is law. English: The law is very important for a just society.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਨੂੰਨ ਇੱਕ ਨਿਆਂਈ ਸਮਾਜ ਲਈ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਾਨੂੰਨ[/hi]: [hi]qanoon[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "law." It is a masculine noun and is pronounced [qəˈnuːn].

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi]: [hi]ikk[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "a." It is a definite article and is pronounced [ɪk].

[hi]ਨਿਆਂਈ[/hi]: [hi]nyaayee[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "just." It is an adjective and is pronounced [nɪˈɑːɪ].

[hi]ਸਮਾਜ[/hi]: [hi]samaaj[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "society." It is a masculine noun and is pronounced [səˈmɑːdʒ].

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi]: [hi]lai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "for." It is a preposition and is pronounced [lɛː].

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi]: [hi]bahut[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "very." It is an adverb and is pronounced [bəˈhʊt].

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi]: [hi]mahatvapurna[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "important." It is an adjective and is pronounced [mʌˈhət.və.pʊɾ.nə].

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: [hi]hai.[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." It is a verb and is pronounced [hɛː].

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence follows the subject-verb-object (SVO) word order, which is the same as in English.

The word order in Punjabi is relatively flexible, but the basic structure is SVO.

Punjabi uses a lot of postpositions, which are similar to prepositions in English. For example, the word [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] ([hi]lai[/hi]) is a postposition that means "for."

Punjabi has a rich system of grammatical genders, which can be tricky for English speakers to learn. However, it is important to note that the gender of a noun will affect the form of the adjective or verb that modifies it.

The next word is burn. English: The fire is burning.

Punjabi: [hi]Aag jal rahi hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Aag[/hi] - This is the word for "fire" in Punjabi. It is a feminine noun.

[hi]jal[/hi] - This is the present participle of the verb "to burn."

[hi]rahi[/hi] - This is the feminine singular form of the present continuous verb "to be." It indicates that the fire is actively burning.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the masculine singular form of the present continuous verb "to be." It serves as a helping verb in this sentence.

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the present continuous tense, which indicates an action happening right now.

Punjabi has gendered nouns and verbs, so the verb forms change depending on the gender of the subject.

The sentence structure is similar to English, with the subject ([hi]Aag[/hi]) followed by the verb ([hi]jal rahi hai[/hi]).

Translation: The fire is burning.

The next word is sport. English: He loves to play sports.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਖੇਡਾਂ ਖੇਡਣਾ ਬਹੁਤ ਪਸੰਦ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he) and means "to him." Remember, the dative case is used to show the indirect object of a verb.

[hi]ਖੇਡਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural of [hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] (game/sport). It means "sports"

[hi]ਖੇਡਣਾ[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb "to play." Note that [hi]ਖੇਡਣਾ[/hi] is a verb that describes an action.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This means "very much" or "a lot"

[hi]ਪਸੰਦ[/hi] - This is an adjective that means "liked" or "favorite."

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be." Here it is used to express a state of being, meaning "he is" or "he has".

This sentence demonstrates how to use the dative case with the verb "to like" in Punjabi. This is a very useful grammatical concept to know because it helps to show who or what something is done for. The sentence also demonstrates how the Punjabi language uses the present tense form of the verb "to be" in a way that is similar to English.

The next word is purpose. English: The purpose of this book is to teach Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਮਕਸਦ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਿਖਾਉਣਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book (noun)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਮਕਸਦ[/hi] - purpose (noun)

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - Punjabi (adjective/noun)

[hi]ਸਿਖਾਉਣਾ[/hi] - to teach (verb)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (copula verb)

Key Concepts:

The use of the possessive marker [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] to show ownership.

The use of the copula verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] to link the subject ([hi]ਮਕਸਦ[/hi]) and the predicate ([hi]ਸਿਖਾਉਣਾ[/hi]).

The placement of the subject, [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi], before the verb.

The next word is store. English: The store is closed.

Punjabi: [hi]Dukan band hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Dukan[/hi] - Store

[hi]band[/hi] - closed

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

This sentence uses the present tense and a simple structure: Subject (store) + Verb (is) + Adjective (closed). This is a common sentence structure in Punjabi.

English: The store is closed.

Punjabi: [hi]Dukan band hai[/hi].

The next word is committee. English: The committee decided to postpone the meeting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਮੇਟੀ ਨੇ ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਮੁਲਤਵੀ ਕਰਨ ਦਾ ਫੈਸਲਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਮੇਟੀ[/hi] [hi]kamēṭī[/hi] - committee

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]nē[/hi] - has (used in conjunction with a subject in the plural form)

[hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ[/hi] [hi]mīṭiṁg[/hi] - meeting

[hi]ਮੁਲਤਵੀ[/hi] [hi]mulatavī[/hi] - to postpone

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] [hi]karan[/hi] - to do

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]dā[/hi] - of (used to denote possession or association)

[hi]ਫੈਸਲਾ[/hi] [hi]faisalā[/hi] - decision

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] [hi]kītā[/hi] - did

Key Concepts:

The use of the word [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]nē[/hi] after a subject in the plural form like [hi]ਕਮੇਟੀ[/hi] [hi]kamēṭī[/hi] indicates that the subject is performing the action.

The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]dā[/hi] is used to indicate possession or association and is often used after nouns.

English: The committee decided to postpone the meeting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਮੇਟੀ ਨੇ ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਮੁਲਤਵੀ ਕਰਨ ਦਾ ਫੈਸਲਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is world. English: This is the world.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh duniya hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun, singular)

[hi]duniya[/hi] - world

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (verb to be, present tense)

This sentence uses the demonstrative pronoun [hi]Eh[/hi] which, like the English word 'this', points to a specific thing. Here, it points to the world. The word [hi]duniya[/hi] means 'world'. And the verb [hi]hai[/hi] is used to describe the state of being 'is'. So, the complete sentence means "This is the world".

Key Concepts:

Demonstrative Pronouns in Punjabi: [hi]Eh[/hi] is one of the demonstrative pronouns in Punjabi, which are used to point to specific things.

Verb to be: The Punjabi verb to be is [hi]hai[/hi] which can mean 'is' or 'am' or 'are', depending on the context and the subject.

The next word is provide. English: They provide us with food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਖਾਣਾ ਮੁਹਈਆ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third-person plural pronoun, meaning "they" in English.

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the first-person plural pronoun, meaning "us" in English.

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - This is the noun, "food" in English.

[hi]ਮੁਹਈਆ[/hi] - This is a word meaning "provide" or "make available."

[hi]ਕਰਦੇ[/hi] - This is the present tense verb, "do" or "make."

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - This is the plural form of the third-person present tense "to be" verb.

The word order in this sentence is subject-object-verb, which is the most common order in Punjabi. In the case of the word [hi]ਮੁਹਈਆ[/hi], it can be used in different grammatical contexts and functions as a noun or an adjective.

Remember, Punjabi is an agglutinative language. This means that words are formed by adding prefixes and suffixes to a root. So you can build a lot of words from one root. In this case, the word [hi]ਮੁਹਈਆ[/hi] can be used in various contexts to describe the act of providing or making something available.

Translation: They provide us with food.

The next word is football. English: He plays football.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਫੁੱਟਬਾਲ ਖੇਡਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਫੁੱਟਬਾਲ[/hi] - This is the word for "football".

[hi]ਖੇਡਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense verb for "plays". It is in the third person singular form, agreeing with the subject "he".

Key concepts:

Gender agreement: In Punjabi, verbs and adjectives agree in gender with the noun they modify. Here, the verb "[hi]ਖੇਡਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]" is in the masculine singular form, agreeing with the masculine subject "[hi]ਉਹ[/hi]".

Word order: Punjabi follows a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) word order, which is the same as English.

Translation: He plays football.

The next word is item. English: The item is on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]Ceez mejz 'te hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ceez[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "item".

[hi]mejz[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "table".

[hi]'te[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "on" or "upon". It is a postposition that attaches to the preceding noun, in this case, "[hi]mejz[/hi]" (table).

[hi]hai[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "is" or "is present". This is the verb in the sentence.

Important points:

Punjabi word order is often Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), which is different from English (Subject-Verb-Object).

In this sentence, we see the SOV word order with [hi]Ceez[/hi] (item) as the subject, [hi]mejz[/hi] (table) as the object, and [hi]hai[/hi] (is) as the verb.

The postposition "[hi]'te[/hi]" (on) follows the noun [hi]mejz[/hi] (table) and indicates the location of the item.

Remember:

"[hi]'te[/hi]" is an important postposition to learn. It indicates location and is used after the noun it modifies.

The next word is deliver. English: He will deliver the package tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਪੈਕੇਜ ਡਿਲੀਵਰ ਕਰੇਗਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (pronounced "oh") means "he" in Punjabi. This is a pronoun, which takes the place of a noun. Here, it refers to the person who will deliver the package.

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] (pronounced "kal") means "tomorrow" in Punjabi. This is an adverb, which modifies a verb. Here, it modifies the verb "deliver".

[hi]ਪੈਕੇਜ[/hi] (pronounced "package") is the Punjabi word for "package." This is the direct object of the verb "deliver."

[hi]ਡਿਲੀਵਰ[/hi] (pronounced "deliver") is the Punjabi word for "deliver." This is a verb that means to "carry something to a certain location."

[hi]ਕਰੇਗਾ[/hi] (pronounced "karega") is the future tense of the verb "to do." It means "will do" or "will deliver" in this case. This is the verb that carries the action of the sentence.

Key Concepts:

Gender agreement: Punjabi verbs and pronouns often have different forms depending on the gender of the subject. In this sentence, the verb [hi]ਕਰੇਗਾ[/hi] is in the masculine singular form because the subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] is masculine.

Future tense: Punjabi uses a different verb ending to indicate future tense. Here, the verb [hi]ਕਰੇਗਾ[/hi] uses the suffix [hi]ਗਾ[/hi] to show that the action will happen in the future.

Translation: He will deliver the package tomorrow.

[hi]ਉਹ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਪੈਕੇਜ ਡਿਲੀਵਰ ਕਰੇਗਾ।[/hi]

The next word is due. English: The assignment is due next week.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੋਮਵਰਕ ਅਗਲੇ ਹਫ਼ਤੇ ਦੇਣਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹੋਮਵਰਕ[/hi] - homework

[hi]ਅਗਲੇ[/hi] - next

[hi]ਹਫ਼ਤੇ[/hi] - week

[hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] - to give (in this case, to turn in)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is. This is the Punjabi equivalent of 'is' and signifies that the statement is in the present tense.

The sentence is in the present tense, as the speaker is stating a fact about the homework being due.

Remember, the [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is the key to understanding that the homework is due next week. It is also a good word to start learning, as it comes up in most statements in the present tense.

The next word is boat. English: The boat is floating on the water.

Punjabi: [hi]Naav paani te tar rahi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Naav[/hi] - This is the word for "boat" in Punjabi. It's a common word and easy to remember.

[hi]paani[/hi] - This is the word for "water" in Punjabi. It's also very common and easy to remember.

[hi]te[/hi] - This is the word for "on" or "upon" in Punjabi. It's a common preposition.

[hi]tar rahi hai[/hi] - This is a verb phrase meaning "is floating".

Key Concept: Punjabi verbs often have a root word (like "tar" for float) and then add suffixes to indicate tense and person.

Translation: The boat is floating on the water.

The next word is contrast. English: The new car contrasts sharply with the old one.

Punjabi: [hi]Nayi gaṛī purani gaṛī nal vaddī virodh kardi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Nayi gaṛī[/hi] - New car

[hi]Nayi[/hi] - new

[hi]gaṛī[/hi] - car

[hi]purani gaṛī[/hi] - Old car

[hi]purani[/hi] - old

[hi]gaṛī[/hi] - car

[hi]nal[/hi] - with (this word is commonly used to denote comparisons and can be translated to "with", "than" or "against" depending on the context)

[hi]vaddī[/hi] - greatly

[hi]virodh kardi hai[/hi] - contrasts

[hi]virodh[/hi] - contrast, opposition, difference

[hi]kardi hai[/hi] - does, makes (the verb "to do" conjugated in the present tense in the feminine form as the subject is [hi]gaṛī[/hi] which is feminine in Punjabi)

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]virodh[/hi] is crucial to understanding the concept of contrast in Punjabi. It implies a strong difference or opposition between two things.

The use of [hi]nal[/hi] highlights the comparison being made between the two cars.

The verb [hi]kardi hai[/hi] is a common verb in Punjabi and indicates an action being performed.

Translation: The new car contrasts sharply with the old one.

The next word is warn. English: He warned me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਚੇਤਾਵਨੀ ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - "He" - This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - "Me" - This is the indirect object of the verb.

[hi]ਚੇਤਾਵਨੀ[/hi] - "Warning" - This is the direct object of the verb.

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - "Gave" - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi], meaning "to give."

Key concept: The verb [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] can be used with the word [hi]ਚੇਤਾਵਨੀ[/hi] to mean "to warn" in Punjabi.

English: He warned me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਚੇਤਾਵਨੀ ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi]

The next word is special. English: This is a special occasion.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh [hi] [hi]vishesh[hi] [hi]mauka[hi] [hi]hai[hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[hi] - This (pronoun)

[hi]vishesh[hi] - special (adjective) - Remember that the adjective [hi]vishesh[hi] comes before the noun, this is a key characteristic of the Punjabi language.

[hi]mauka[hi] - occasion (noun)

[hi]hai[hi] - is (verb) - The Punjabi equivalent of the English "is" is [hi]hai[hi]

Important: Punjabi language has its own unique sentence structure and word order. It can be quite different from English. It is important to learn these differences to understand the language effectively.

The next word is today. English: Today is a beautiful day.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj sunder din hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "today" and is used at the beginning of the sentence.

[hi]Sunder[/hi] - This means "beautiful" and describes the day.

[hi]din[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "day".

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is".

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence structure is similar to English, subject (today), adjective (beautiful) , noun (day) , verb (is).

The word order is important in Punjabi.

English: Today is a beautiful day.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj sunder din hai[/hi].

The next word is everything. English: Everything is fine.

Punjabi: [hi]Sab kuchh theek hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Sab[/hi] means "everything" or "all". It is a general term used for all things.

[hi]kuchh[/hi] means "something", but when used with "sab" it emphasizes completeness and means "everything".

[hi]theek[/hi] means "fine" or "okay".

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense of the verb "to be".

Key Concept: The Punjabi sentence uses a similar structure to the English sentence with the subject ("everything") coming before the verb ("is") and then the predicate ("fine").

This sentence is a great way to learn the basics of Punjabi grammar and vocabulary. You can use it to practice your pronunciation and fluency.

The next word is car. English: The car is red.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਲਾਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] (pronounced: [gadd-dee]) - This is the word for "car". It's a noun.

[hi]ਲਾਲ[/hi] (pronounced: [laal]) - This means "red". It's an adjective describing the car.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (pronounced: [hai]) - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be". This indicates that the car is currently red.

Key Concepts:

Word Order: In Punjabi, the subject (the car) comes before the adjective (red) and then the verb (is). This is different from the English word order, where the adjective comes before the noun.

Gender Agreement: Punjabi has grammatical gender. In this case, the noun "[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi]" is feminine, which is why the adjective "[hi]ਲਾਲ[/hi]" also takes on a feminine form.

Translation: The car is red.

The next word is unless. English: He won’t go unless his mother goes too.

Punjabi: [hi]Usdi maa naal na jaave te uss nu na jaana[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usdi[/hi] - His (possessive pronoun).

[hi]maa[/hi] - Mother

[hi]naal[/hi] - With

[hi]na jaave[/hi] - Will not go (future tense)

[hi]te[/hi] - And (conjunction)

[hi]uss[/hi] - He

[hi]nu[/hi] - To (this is an oblique object marker, meaning it’s not the direct object of the verb but used to indicate indirect relationship)

[hi]na jaana[/hi] - Will not go (future tense)

Note that the word “unless” is understood within the construction of the sentence. There is no direct translation of the word. “Unless” is implied in the conditional construction. [hi]Naal[/hi] is often used in Punjabi to express the idea of “with” or “along with” and is often used with people.

English: He won’t go unless his mother goes too.

Punjabi: [hi]Usdi maa naal na jaave te uss nu na jaana[/hi].

The next word is agent. English: The agent is working hard.

Punjabi: [hi]ਏਜੰਟ ਸਖ਼ਤ ਮਿਹਨਤ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਏਜੰਟ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "agent." The pronunciation is similar to the English word, "agent."

[hi]ਸਖ਼ਤ[/hi] - This word means "hard."

[hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ[/hi] - This means "work" in Punjabi. You can also translate this as "labor" or "effort."

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - This means "do."

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to be." It is the present continuous tense for "he" or "she."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." It marks the end of a sentence.

Important points:

In Punjabi, the word order is very similar to English, so you can often translate sentences directly from English to Punjabi.

Punjabi grammar is very similar to Hindi grammar.

Translation: The agent is working hard.

The next word is touch. English: He touched the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਨੂੰ ਛੋਹਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun in the past tense, meaning "he" or "him." It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - This means "book" and is the direct object of the sentence.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the direct object marker in Punjabi.

[hi]ਛੋਹਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to touch" or "to feel." The ending "[hi]ਆ[/hi]" makes the verb past tense in Punjabi. The verb is conjugated to agree with the subject in gender and number.

Important Note: Punjabi is a subject-object-verb (SOV) language, so the subject always comes first, then the object, then the verb. Also, in Punjabi, you will often see the direct object marker [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] after the direct object.

English Translation: He touched the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਨੂੰ ਛੋਹਿਆ[/hi].

The next word is in. English: He is in the house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਘਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It - This is a pronoun that refers to the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - House - This is a noun that refers to the place where the subject is located.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - In - This is a preposition that indicates location.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is - This is a verb that indicates the state of being.

Key Concepts:

Gender in Punjabi: Punjabi uses gendered pronouns. [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] is the pronoun for both he and she.

Prepositions: Prepositions like [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (in) are crucial for conveying location and direction.

Translation: He is in the house.

The next word is room. English: This is a large room.

Punjabi: [hi]Eਹ ਇੱਕ ਵੱਡਾ ਕਮਰਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eਹ[/hi] - This is the demonstrative pronoun for "this" in Punjabi. It is used to point out a specific room. It's important to remember that the gender of the subject determines the form of the demonstrative pronoun.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "one" or "a" which acts as an indefinite article. It signifies that the room is singular.

[hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "big" or "large" and acts as an adjective modifying the noun "room."

[hi]ਕਮਰਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "room."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is". It is the present tense of the verb "to be."

Key Concepts:

The sentence follows the Subject-Verb-Object word order which is common in Punjabi.

Demonstrative pronouns like [hi]Eਹ[/hi] are important to learn as they help to clarify the specific thing being referred to.

The use of indefinite articles like [hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] is crucial in Punjabi to indicate whether something is singular or plural.

Translation: This is a large room.

The next word is mine. English: This is my book.

Punjabi: [hi]ee mera kitaab hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ee[/hi] - This is a demonstrative pronoun, indicating something close to the speaker.

[hi]mera[/hi] - This is a possessive pronoun, meaning "my".

[hi]kitaab[/hi] - This is a noun, meaning "book".

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is a present tense verb, meaning "is".

Key concept: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. For example, the English preposition "of" is used with the possessive pronoun "my". In Punjabi, the possessive pronoun "mera" is used as a postposition, following the noun "kitaab".

English: This is my book.

Punjabi: [hi]ee mera kitaab hai[/hi].

The next word is parent. English: My parents are kind.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰੇ ਮਾਪੇ ਦਿਆਲ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] - means "my" (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਮਾਪੇ[/hi] - means "parents" (plural noun)

[hi]ਦਿਆਲ[/hi] - means "kind" (adjective)

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - means "are" (present tense verb, plural form)

Key Concepts:

Possessive pronoun: [hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] shows possession (belonging to the speaker).

Plural noun: [hi]ਮਾਪੇ[/hi] refers to more than one person.

Adjective: [hi]ਦਿਆਲ[/hi] describes the noun [hi]ਮਾਪੇ[/hi].

Present tense verb: [hi]ਹਨ[/hi] indicates an action happening now.

English: My parents are kind.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰੇ ਮਾਪੇ ਦਿਆਲ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is chance. English: There's a chance that he will win the game.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu khed jitne da mauka hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Usnu[/hi]: This is the dative case of the pronoun [hi]uh[/hi] (he/she/it). It translates to "him/her/it."

[hi]khed[/hi]: This is the word for "game" and is in the nominative case.

[hi]jitne[/hi]: This is the infinitive of the verb [hi]jitna[/hi] (to win).

[hi]da[/hi]: This is a possessive particle that indicates possession. In this case, it means "of" or "his".

[hi]mauka[/hi]: This is the word for "chance" or "opportunity."

[hi]hai[/hi]: This is the present tense form of the verb [hi]hona[/hi] (to be).

Key concepts:

Dative case in Punjabi is used to indicate the indirect object of a verb.

The possessive particle [hi]da[/hi] is often used to show possession,

The infinitive form of a verb is often used to indicate purpose or intention.

This sentence demonstrates the use of the dative case, the possessive particle, and the infinitive form of a verb.

The next word is interest. English: I have a great interest in learning the Punjabi language.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਸਿੱਖਣ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਲਚਸਪੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi]: This is the dative case of the first-person pronoun "I". It is used to show that the action of the verb is directed towards "me" or "my" (i.e., "to me").

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi]: This is an adjective meaning "Punjabi". Here, it modifies the noun [hi]ਭਾਸ਼ਾ[/hi].

[hi]ਭਾਸ਼ਾ[/hi]: This is the noun meaning "language".

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਣ[/hi]: This is the infinitive form of the verb "to learn".

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi]: This preposition means "in" or "within". It connects the noun [hi]ਭਾਸ਼ਾ[/hi] with the verb [hi]ਸਿੱਖਣ[/hi] to indicate that the learning is happening "in" or "within" the Punjabi language.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi]: This is an adverb meaning "very" or "a lot". It modifies the noun [hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪੀ[/hi].

[hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪੀ[/hi]: This is the noun meaning "interest".

Key Concepts:

Dative Case: The dative case is used to indicate the indirect object of a verb. In this sentence, the indirect object is "me" (i.e., the action of "learning" is directed towards me).

Infinitive Form: The infinitive form of a verb is its basic form without any tense or subject. In this sentence, the infinitive is "to learn" (i.e., [hi]ਸਿੱਖਣ[/hi]).

Preposition: Prepositions connect nouns or pronouns to other words in a sentence, often indicating location, time, or direction. In this sentence, the preposition [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] shows that the action of "learning" is happening "in" or "within" the Punjabi language.

Adverb: Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs, often providing information about time, manner, or degree. In this sentence, the adverb [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] emphasizes the intensity of the "interest".

The next word is evening. English: It's evening.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ਾਮ ਹੋ ਗਈ ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸ਼ਾਮ[/hi] - evening

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - to be (third person singular)

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - gone (feminine singular, past tense)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (third person singular, present tense)

The sentence literally means "Evening has gone" which is a way of saying "It's evening".

Key concept: The verb "to be" (here represented by [hi]ਹੋ[/hi] ) is often implied in English but in Punjabi, it is explicit.

The next word is across. English: He walked across the street.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੜਕ ਪਾਰ ਹੋ ਕੇ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun)

[hi]ਸੜਕ[/hi] - Street (noun)

[hi]ਪਾਰ[/hi] - Across (preposition)

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - To be (verb)

[hi]ਕੇ[/hi] - By, through (postposition)

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - Went (verb)

The sentence uses the postposition [hi]ਕੇ[/hi] after the preposition [hi]ਪਾਰ[/hi] to indicate the direction of movement. This is a common pattern in Punjabi when using prepositions with verbs of motion.

The next word is amount. English: The amount of money I have is not enough to buy a new car.

Punjabi: [hi]Meraa paisee daa [hi]maa[hi]traa [hi]ek naee gaari khareedee laee kaafi nai hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Meraa [hi] - My (Possessive pronoun - "Meraa" is the masculine form of "my" and is used when referring to something belonging to a male)

[hi]paisee [hi] - money (Noun - Plural form of "paisa")

[hi]daa [hi] - of (Possessive particle - indicates possession)

[hi]maa[hi]traa [hi] - amount (Noun - refers to the quantity of something)

[hi]ek [hi] - a (Indefinite article)

[hi]naee [hi] - new (Adjective - describes the car as being new)

[hi]gaari [hi] - car (Noun)

[hi]khareedee [hi] - to buy (Verb - Past tense)

[hi]laee [hi] - for (Preposition - Indicates purpose)

[hi]kaafi [hi] - enough (Adjective)

[hi]nai [hi] - not (Adverb)

[hi]hai [hi] - is (Verb - Present tense)

Key concepts:

[hi]maa[hi]traa [hi] is a common word for "amount" in Punjabi.

[hi]kaafi [hi] is an important word for understanding sufficiency.

The sentence uses the past tense verb [hi]khareedee [hi] to indicate that the speaker wants to buy a car in the future.

Word for word:

My

Money

Of

Amount

A

New

Car

To buy

For

Enough

Not

Is

Translation:

My amount of money is not enough to buy a new car.

The next word is farm. English: He works on a farm.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਖੇਤੀਬਾੜੀ 'ਤੇ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਖੇਤੀਬਾੜੀ[/hi] - Farming/Agriculture

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - On (postposition)

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - Work (noun)

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - Does/Works (verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is a postposition used to indicate location or attachment.

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] is a verb conjugation for the present tense.

Note: Punjabi grammar is quite flexible, and there may be other ways to say this sentence. This is just one common example.

The next word is similar. English: The two stories are similar.

Punjabi: [hi]Do vi kahaaniyan mildiyan ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Do[/hi] means "two"

[hi]vi[/hi] means "also" or "too"

[hi]kahaaniyan[/hi] means "stories"

[hi]mildiyan[/hi] means "similar" or "resemble"

[hi]ne[/hi] is the Punjabi equivalent of the English "are" and signifies the plural form.

Key Concept: The sentence structure uses the "subject + verb + object" format, similar to English. This is helpful for understanding the basic sentence structure of Punjabi.

English: The two stories are similar.

Punjabi: [hi]Do vi kahaaniyan mildiyan ne[/hi].

The next word is have. English: I have a book.

Punjabi: ਮੇਰੇ ਕੋਲ ਇੱਕ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਹੈ।

[hi]mere kol ik kitaab hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]mere[/hi] - means "my" and is the possessive form of the pronoun "I"

[hi]kol[/hi] - means "with/beside" and is the Punjabi word for the preposition "have/with"

[hi]ik[/hi] - means "one" and is the Punjabi word for the number "one"

[hi]kitaab[/hi] - means "book"

[hi]hai[/hi] - means "is" and is the Punjabi word for the present tense form of the verb "to be"

Key Concepts:

Punjabi word order is Subject-Object-Verb

Punjabi is an agglutinative language, so words are formed by adding suffixes and prefixes to a root word.

There are distinct gender distinctions in Punjabi grammar. Here, "[hi]kitaab[/hi]" is feminine and the noun requires the feminine form of the verb "[hi]hai[/hi]" (in English, "is").

English: I have a book.

Punjabi: [hi]mere kol ik kitaab hai[/hi].

The next word is leg. English: He has a long leg.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਦਾ ਲੰਮਾ ਪੈਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਦਾ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun "his". It shows that the leg belongs to the person being talked about.

[hi]ਲੰਮਾ[/hi] - This means "long". It describes the length of the leg.

[hi]ਪੈਰ[/hi] - This means "leg". It is the noun that is being described by "long".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "is". It connects the subject and the description.

The sentence uses simple present tense and describes the physical attribute of a person.

English: He has a long leg.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਦਾ ਲੰਮਾ ਪੈਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is cause. English: The heavy rain caused the river to overflow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵੱਡੀ ਵਰਖਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਦਰਿਆ ਵਿਚ ਪਾਣੀ ਵੱਧ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵੱਡੀ[/hi] [vaddi] - This means "big" or "heavy". It is used to describe the rain.

[hi]ਵਰਖਾ[/hi] [varkha] - This is the word for "rain".

[hi]ਕਰਕੇ[/hi] [karke] - This is a conjunction that indicates the cause of the action. It can be roughly translated as "because of" or "due to".

[hi]ਦਰਿਆ[/hi] [darya] - This means "river".

[hi]ਵਿਚ[/hi] [vich] - This is the preposition "in".

[hi]ਪਾਣੀ[/hi] [paani] - This means "water".

[hi]ਵੱਧ[/hi] [vadh] - This means "increased".

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] [gya] - This is the past tense of the verb "to go".

Key concepts:

[hi]ਕਰਕੇ[/hi] [karke] is an important conjunction that is used to indicate the cause of an action. It is used frequently in Punjabi.

[hi]ਵਿਚ[/hi] [vich] is a versatile preposition that can be used in many contexts, including indicating location, time, or inclusion.

English: The heavy rain caused the river to overflow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵੱਡੀ ਵਰਖਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਦਰਿਆ ਵਿਚ ਪਾਣੀ ਵੱਧ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is bank. English: The bank is closed today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj bank band hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] means "today" and is used to indicate the current day.

[hi]bank[/hi] is the English word for "bank" and is commonly used in Punjabi, although there are native Punjabi words as well.

[hi]band[/hi] means "closed" and is used to indicate that something is not open for business.

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb "to be" and is used to indicate that the bank is closed.

Key concept: The word order in Punjabi is typically subject-object-verb, so the subject ([hi]bank[/hi]) comes before the verb ([hi]hai[/hi]).

English: The bank is closed today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj bank band hai[/hi].

The next word is contribute. English: He contributed a lot to the society.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸਮਾਜ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਹੁਤ ਯੋਗਦਾਨ ਪਾਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun in the past tense, meaning "he".

[hi]ਸਮਾਜ[/hi] - This means "society"

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is a postposition that means "in" or "within"

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This means "a lot" or "very"

[hi]ਯੋਗਦਾਨ[/hi] - This means "contribution"

[hi]ਪਾਇਆ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to give" or "to contribute"

Key concepts:

The Punjabi language uses postpositions instead of prepositions, such as [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] instead of "in".

The use of the third person singular masculine pronoun [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] is crucial for understanding the sentence's subject.

The word order in Punjabi is different from English. The subject comes before the verb, and the object comes after the verb.

The past tense ending [hi]ਆ[/hi] is used with many verbs.

English: He contributed a lot to the society.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸਮਾਜ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਹੁਤ ਯੋਗਦਾਨ ਪਾਇਆ।[/hi]

The next word is movement. English: The movement of the car was fast.

Punjabi: [hi]Gaड़ी di harakat tez si[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Gaड़ी[/hi] - Car (feminine noun)

[hi]di[/hi] - Of (possessive marker for feminine noun)

[hi]harakat[/hi] - Movement (feminine noun)

[hi]tez[/hi] - Fast (adjective)

[hi]si[/hi] - Was (past tense of "to be" for feminine noun)

Key Concepts:

Gender in Punjabi: Nouns have gender (masculine or feminine), which affects the use of articles and possessive markers. [hi]Gaड़ी[/hi] is feminine, so we use the feminine possessive marker [hi]di[/hi] and the feminine past tense of "to be" ([hi]si[/hi]).

Word Order: Punjabi is an SVO (Subject-Verb-Object) language, similar to English.

Translation: The movement of the car was fast.

The next word is magazine. English: I read a magazine every week.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਹਰ ਹਫ਼ਤੇ ਇੱਕ ਮੈਗਜ਼ੀਨ ਪੜ੍ਹਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi]: This is the subject pronoun "I" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi]: This means "every" and is used to indicate frequency.

[hi]ਹਫ਼ਤੇ[/hi]: This means "week."

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi]: This means "one" and is used to indicate the quantity of magazines being read.

[hi]ਮੈਗਜ਼ੀਨ[/hi]: This is the word for "magazine."

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]: This is the present tense verb "read" in Punjabi.

Key concepts:

Word order: The Punjabi sentence follows a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) word order, similar to English.

Gender agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives and verbs must agree in gender with the noun they modify. Here, the verb "ਪੜ੍ਹਦਾ ਹਾਂ" is in the masculine singular form because "ਮੈਂ" is a masculine singular pronoun.

Frequency words: Punjabi uses a variety of words and phrases to express frequency.

Translation:

English: I read a magazine every week.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਹਰ ਹਫ਼ਤੇ ਇੱਕ ਮੈਗਜ਼ੀਨ ਪੜ੍ਹਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is career. English: She has a successful career as a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਦੇ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਸਫਲ ਕਰੀਅਰ ਰੱਖਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - She/He (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] - Doctor (noun)

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਤੌਰ[/hi] - Form (noun)

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - On (postposition, indicates location or function)

[hi]ਸਫਲ[/hi] - Successful (adjective)

[hi]ਕਰੀਅਰ[/hi] - Career (noun)

[hi]ਰੱਖਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi] - Keeps/Possesses (verb in the present tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] is a very important particle that signifies possession or relation. In this case, it shows that the career is "of" the doctor.

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] functions as a postposition, similar to "on" or "in" in English, indicating a position or role. Here, it shows the role of the doctor.

Translation: She has a successful career as a doctor.

The next word is error. English: There is an error in this calculation.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਹਿਸਾਬ ਵਿੱਚ ਗ਼ਲਤੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਹਿਸਾਬ[/hi] - Calculation

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - In

[hi]ਗ਼ਲਤੀ[/hi] - Error

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is

The sentence follows the basic structure of a subject-verb-object sentence. The subject is [hi]ਗ਼ਲਤੀ[/hi] (error), the verb is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is), and the object is [hi]ਇਸ ਹਿਸਾਬ ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (in this calculation). This sentence is a simple declarative sentence in Punjabi. [hi]ਗ਼ਲਤੀ[/hi] is a feminine noun, so the verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is used. This is an example of how gender agreement works in Punjabi grammar.

The next word is back. English: He went back to his house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਘਰ ਵਾਪਸ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - his/her/its (possessive adjective)

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - house (noun)

[hi]ਵਾਪਸ[/hi] - back (adverb)

[hi]ਗਿਆ।[/hi] - went (verb)

The sentence uses the [hi]ਵਾਪਸ[/hi] word in the adverbial form, meaning that it modifies the verb [hi]ਗਿਆ।[/hi]. This is a common way to express the idea of going back in Punjabi.

The verb [hi]ਗਿਆ।[/hi] is in the past tense, indicating that the action happened in the past.

The next word is advice. English: He gave me some advice.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujhe kuchh salaah diti[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He/She/It (third person singular)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has, have, had (past tense marker)

[hi]mujhe[/hi] - me (object pronoun)

[hi]kuchh[/hi] - some

[hi]salaah[/hi] - advice

[hi]diti[/hi] - gave (past tense of [hi]dena[/hi] - to give)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ne[/hi] is the past tense marker. In Punjabi, the past tense is formed by adding [hi]ne[/hi] to the verb stem.

[hi]mujhe[/hi] is the object pronoun. It is used when the noun is the recipient of the action of the verb.

English: He gave me some advice.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujhe kuchh salaah diti[/hi].

The next word is board. English: The children are playing on the board.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਬੋਰਡ 'ਤੇ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi] - [hi]bacche[/hi] (children) - this is the subject of the sentence, plural.

[hi]ਬੋਰਡ[/hi] - [hi]board[/hi] (board) - This is the object of the sentence.

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]te[/hi] (on) - This is the preposition showing location

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - [hi]khed[/hi] (play) - This is the verb in the present continuous tense

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - [hi]rahe[/hi] - This is a helping verb part of the present continuous tense

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]han[/hi] (are) - This is the plural copula (linking verb)

Key Concepts:

Present Continuous Tense: This tense is used to describe actions happening right now. It is formed using the present tense of the verb "to be" (in this case, [hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]han[/hi]) plus the present participle of the main verb (in this case, [hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - [hi]khed[/hi]).

Preposition of Location: The preposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]te[/hi] indicates the location of the children, "on the board".

English: The children are playing on the board.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਬੋਰਡ 'ਤੇ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is newspaper. English: I read the newspaper every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ ਪੜ੍ਹਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - I

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - every

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] - day (literally "rose")

[hi]ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ[/hi] - newspaper

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਦਾ[/hi] - read (masculine singular present tense)

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - am

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions, like [hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] (day) and [hi]ਹਰ[/hi] (every), instead of prepositions.

The verb [hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਦਾ[/hi] conjugates for gender and number.

English: I read the newspaper every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ ਪੜ੍ਹਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is all. English: Everyone is here.

Punjabi: [hi]Sabh kujh hāzir hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Sabh[/hi] - all/everyone

[hi]kujh[/hi] - this/that/something/everything (it can be used in the place of any noun)

[hi]hāzir[/hi] - present

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (masculine singular form of the verb 'to be')

Key concept: [hi]Sabh[/hi] is used to refer to a group of people, but it can also be used to refer to things, like all the furniture in a room. The use of [hi]kujh[/hi] instead of a noun is a common and useful Punjabi grammar concept, that can be used to create very concise sentences. The use of the masculine singular verb [hi]hai[/hi] is necessary because the subject is plural but the noun it's replacing, [hi]kujh[/hi], is treated grammatically as singular.

Note: The subject [hi]Sabh kujh[/hi] is considered masculine in Punjabi because [hi]kujh[/hi] is considered masculine.

The next word is bit. English: He took a bite of the apple.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸੇਬ ਦਾ ਇੱਕ ਟੁਕੜਾ ਖਾਧਾ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She/It (masculine singular pronoun in the nominative case)

[hi]ਸੇਬ[/hi] - [hi]seb[/hi] - Apple

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - Of (possessive particle, indicating possession)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - One

[hi]ਟੁਕੜਾ[/hi] - [hi]tukṛā[/hi] - Bite (literally a piece)

[hi]ਖਾਧਾ[/hi] - [hi]khādhā[/hi] - Ate (past tense of [hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]khānā[/hi] - to eat)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] is a possessive particle that shows possession. It's equivalent to "of" in English.

Gender Agreement: The verb [hi]ਖਾਧਾ[/hi] - [hi]khādhā[/hi] agrees in gender with the subject [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi], which is masculine.

Remember: This is a simple example and Punjabi grammar is rich and complex. The way we express "bit" can vary depending on the context.

English: He took a bite of the apple.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸੇਬ ਦਾ ਇੱਕ ਟੁਕੜਾ ਖਾਧਾ[/hi].

The next word is rather. English: He would rather eat at home than go out.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਹਰ ਜਾਣ ਨਾਲੋਂ ਘਰੇ ਖਾਣਾ ਪਸੰਦ ਕਰੇਗਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - he

[hi]ਬਾਹਰ[/hi] - outside

[hi]ਜਾਣ[/hi] - going

[hi]ਨਾਲੋਂ[/hi] - rather than

[hi]ਘਰੇ[/hi] - at home

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - eating

[hi]ਪਸੰਦ[/hi] - liking

[hi]ਕਰੇਗਾ।[/hi] - will

Key concepts:

[hi]ਨਾਲੋਂ[/hi] is a common Punjabi word that signifies "rather than," allowing you to express a preference.

[hi]ਘਰੇ[/hi] is a casual and common way to say "at home" in Punjabi.

English: He would rather eat at home than go out.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਹਰ ਜਾਣ ਨਾਲੋਂ ਘਰੇ ਖਾਣਾ ਪਸੰਦ ਕਰੇਗਾ।[/hi]

The next word is die. English: He died yesterday.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਉਹ ਮਰ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] (Kallh) - Yesterday

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (Oh) - He

[hi]ਮਰ[/hi] (Mar) - To die

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] (Gya) - Past tense marker (went)

This sentence uses a simple past tense structure. The past tense of the verb [hi]ਮਰ[/hi] (Mar) - to die, is [hi]ਮਰ ਗਿਆ[/hi] (Mar Gya), meaning "died". The word [hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] (Gya) functions as a past tense marker and helps indicate that the action occurred in the past.

Key concept: Punjabi verbs are conjugated to indicate tense. The conjugation of the verb [hi]ਮਰ[/hi] (Mar) into [hi]ਮਰ ਗਿਆ[/hi] (Mar Gya) indicates that the action of dying took place in the past.

English: He died yesterday.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਉਹ ਮਰ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is letter. English: She wrote a letter to her brother.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਭਰਾ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਚਿੱਠੀ ਲਿਖੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - She (feminine subject pronoun, past tense marker)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - her own (possessive pronoun, emphasizing the letter is from her)

[hi]ਭਰਾ[/hi] - brother (masculine noun)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - to (preposition)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - one (indefinite article)

[hi]ਚਿੱਠੀ[/hi] - letter (feminine noun)

[hi]ਲਿਖੀ।[/hi] - wrote (past tense verb)

Key concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have gender, so the correct pronoun and verb forms must be used. In this case, the letter and the sister are feminine, so the feminine forms of the pronouns and verb are used.

Possessive Pronouns: Punjabi uses possessive pronouns in a different way than English. In this sentence, the possessive pronoun [hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] emphasizes that the letter is from the sister.

Past Tense: Punjabi uses different endings for verbs in the past tense, in this sentence [hi]ਲਿਖੀ।[/hi] is the past tense of the verb "to write".

English: She wrote a letter to her brother.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਭਰਾ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਚਿੱਠੀ ਲਿਖੀ।[/hi]

The next word is studio. English: He is working in a studio.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਟੂਡੀਓ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਮ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he".

[hi]ਸਟੂਡੀਓ[/hi] - This is the noun "studio" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is the preposition "in" and is used to show location.

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - This is the noun "work".

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - This is the verb "do" or "make" in the present tense, and in this sentence, means "working".

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is a grammatical suffix that changes the verb to the present continuous tense and means "is".

The Punjabi sentence is in the present continuous tense, meaning the action is happening now. It can be translated literally as "He is doing work in the studio".

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions.

Punjabi verbs have grammatical suffixes which change their tense.

The word order in Punjabi is different from English, typically Subject-Object-Verb.

English: He is working in a studio.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਟੂਡੀਓ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੰਮ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is slow. English: He walks slowly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹੌਲੀ ਹੌਲੀ ਚੱਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਹੌਲੀ ਹੌਲੀ[/hi] - slowly (literally, "slow slow") KEY CONCEPT: This is a common way to express the adverb in Punjabi, by repeating the adjective.

[hi]ਚੱਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - walks. This is the present tense of the verb "to walk" in Punjabi.

English: He walks slowly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹੌਲੀ ਹੌਲੀ ਚੱਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is doubt. English: I have doubts about his honesty.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਉਸਦੀ ਇਮਾਨਦਾਰੀ ਤੇ ਸ਼ੱਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - To me

[hi]ਉਸਦੀ[/hi] - His

[hi]ਇਮਾਨਦਾਰੀ[/hi] - Honesty

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - On

[hi]ਸ਼ੱਕ[/hi] - Doubt

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is

This sentence uses the word [hi]ਸ਼ੱਕ[/hi] (shakk) to express doubt. It also uses the postposition [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] (te) to indicate that the doubt is directed towards his honesty. The sentence structure is straightforward, using a simple subject-verb-object construction.

English: I have doubts about his honesty.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਉਸਦੀ ਇਮਾਨਦਾਰੀ ਤੇ ਸ਼ੱਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is director. English: The director is responsible for the film's success.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਾਇਰੈਕਟਰ ਫ਼ਿਲਮ ਦੀ ਸਫ਼ਲਤਾ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡਾਇਰੈਕਟਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "director". It's a direct borrowing from the English word.

[hi]ਫ਼ਿਲਮ[/hi] - This is the word for "film"

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is the possessive marker, equivalent to "of" or "the" in this case, making it "the film's".

[hi]ਸਫ਼ਲਤਾ[/hi] - This is the word for "success"

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "for"

[hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "responsible". It means the director has the obligation to make the film successful.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the verb "is" in present tense.

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, nouns have genders (masculine, feminine, or neuter) and adjectives, verbs, and pronouns must agree with them. In this case, [hi]ਡਾਇਰੈਕਟਰ[/hi] is masculine, so the verb is [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi].

Possessive Markers: Punjabi uses the possessive marker "[hi]ਦੀ[/hi]" (and other variations for different genders) to show ownership.

Translation: [hi]ਡਾਇਰੈਕਟਰ ਫ਼ਿਲਮ ਦੀ ਸਫ਼ਲਤਾ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi] - The director is responsible for the film's success.

The next word is market. English: The market is crowded with people.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਭਰਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This word means "market" and it is in the nominative case.

[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] - This word means "people" and is in the instrumental case. This case is used to show how something happens or by whom something is done.

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - This word means "with" and is used to connect the word [hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] with the previous word, [hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi].

[hi]ਭਰਿਆ[/hi] - This word means "filled" and is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਭਰਨਾ[/hi] meaning "to fill".

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - This is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] meaning "to be" and indicates that the market is in a state of being filled.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be". It is used here to indicate that the market is currently filled with people.

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the present tense.

The sentence uses a past participle form of the verb [hi]ਭਰਨਾ[/hi] to indicate a state of being filled.

The instrumental case is used to show the agent of the action.

English: The market is crowded with people.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਭਰਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is meal. English: We had a hearty meal.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਇੱਕ ਪੂਰਾ ਖਾਣਾ ਖਾਧਾ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - we

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - one

[hi]ਪੂਰਾ[/hi] - full/hearty

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - meal

[hi]ਖਾਧਾ[/hi] - (past tense of) eat

This sentence uses the past tense of the verb [hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] "to eat", which is [hi]ਖਾਧਾ[/hi].

Key concept: The word [hi]ਪੂਰਾ[/hi] means "full" or "complete". Here, it signifies a complete and satisfying meal.

English: We had a hearty meal.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਇੱਕ ਪੂਰਾ ਖਾਣਾ ਖਾਧਾ[/hi].

The next word is safe. English: The house is safe.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਸੁਰੱਖਿਅਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - [hi]ghar[/hi] - house

[hi]ਸੁਰੱਖਿਅਤ[/hi] - [hi]surakkhit[/hi] - safe

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi word for "is" is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]hai[/hi]) and it is used with singular subjects.

The word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), so the subject ([hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - [hi]ghar[/hi] - house) comes first, then the object ([hi]ਸੁਰੱਖਿਅਤ[/hi] - [hi]surakkhit[/hi] - safe), and finally the verb ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is).

English: The house is safe.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਸੁਰੱਖਿਅਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is act. English: She acted like she didn't know him.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਇੰਜ ਕਰਕੇ ਦਿਖਾਇਆ ਜਿਵੇਂ ਉਹਨੂੰ ਉਹ ਨਾ ਪਤਾ ਹੋਵੇ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - She (feminine singular)

[hi]ਇੰਜ[/hi] - like this, in this way (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਕਰਕੇ[/hi] - doing, acting (gerund, used to describe the action)

[hi]ਦਿਖਾਇਆ[/hi] - showed, acted (past tense of the verb 'dikhauna')

[hi]ਜਿਵੇਂ[/hi] - as if, like

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - him, her (object pronoun)

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - he, she (pronoun)

[hi]ਨਾ[/hi] - not (negative particle)

[hi]ਪਤਾ[/hi] - knowledge (noun)

[hi]ਹੋਵੇ[/hi] - be (present tense of 'hona', indicating possibility)

Key Concepts:

This sentence uses a common Punjabi construction with [hi]ਜਿਵੇਂ[/hi] ("like") to express a comparison or how someone is behaving.

[hi]ਕਰਕੇ[/hi] is a useful gerund that can be used to describe actions and intentions in a sentence.

Pay close attention to the use of pronouns: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] (she) and [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] (him/her).

Translation: She acted like she didn't know him.

The next word is stress. English: He is feeling a lot of stress.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਤਣਾਅ ਮਹਿਸੂਸ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - a lot

[hi]ਤਣਾਅ[/hi] - stress.

[hi]ਮਹਿਸੂਸ[/hi] - feeling.

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - to do.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - is.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is a sentence ender, like a period. It is the formal way to end a sentence in Punjabi.

English: He is feeling a lot of stress.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਤਣਾਅ ਮਹਿਸੂਸ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is percentage. English: The students scored a high percentage on the test.

Punjabi: ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਨੇ ਟੈਸਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਉੱਚ ਪ੍ਰਤੀਸ਼ਤ ਪ੍ਰਾਪਤ ਕੀਤੀ। [hi]vidyaarthiyaan ne test vich uchch pratishat praapt kiiti.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]vidyaarthiyaan[/hi] - Students (plural, masculine)

[hi]ne[/hi] - This is the particle used to connect the subject and the verb in the sentence. It acts as a connector.

[hi]test[/hi] - Test

[hi]vich[/hi] - In, inside

[hi]uchch[/hi] - High

[hi]pratishat[/hi] - Percentage

[hi]praapt[/hi] - Obtained

[hi]kiiti[/hi] - Did (past tense, third person, plural)

Key Concept: The Punjabi sentence uses a simple present tense structure. The use of the word [hi]vich[/hi] (in/inside) emphasizes that the test was the context for the high percentage.

The next word is court. English: The court decided in favor of the defendant.

Punjabi: [hi]Adalat ne muqaddame nu defendant de haq mein faisla diya.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Adalat[/hi] - This word means "court" in Punjabi. It is used to refer to a judicial body that hears and decides cases.

[hi]ne[/hi] - This is a postposition that marks the subject of the sentence. It is similar to the English "by."

[hi]muqaddame[/hi] - This word means "case" or "lawsuit." It refers to the legal proceedings in question.

[hi]nu[/hi] - This is a postposition that marks the object of the verb. It is similar to the English "to" or "for."

[hi]defendant[/hi] - This is the English word for the person or entity accused of a crime or wrongdoing in a legal case. In Punjabi, it is simply spelled as [hi]defendant[/hi].

[hi]de[/hi] - This postposition indicates possession or belonging. It is similar to the English "of" or "to" when used with a possessive sense.

[hi]haq[/hi] - This word means "right" or "justice." It is used here to indicate the defendant's favorable outcome.

[hi]mein[/hi] - This postposition indicates location or inclusion. It is similar to the English "in" or "with."

[hi]faisla[/hi] - This word means "decision" or "ruling." It refers to the judgment made by the court.

[hi]diya[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to give." It indicates that the court has delivered its verdict.

Key concepts:

Postpositions in Punjabi - Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. This is a common feature of South Asian languages.

Sentence structure - The sentence structure in Punjabi is generally subject-object-verb (SOV) which is the opposite of English (SVO).

English: The court decided in favor of the defendant.

Punjabi: [hi]Adalat ne muqaddame nu defendant de haq mein faisla diya.[/hi]

The next word is strong. English: The man is strong.

Punjabi: [hi]ਆਦਮੀ ਵੱਡਾ ਤਾਕਤਵਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਆਦਮੀ[/hi] - [hi]aadmi[/hi] - means "man".

[hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] - [hi]vadḍā[/hi] - means "big" or "large" but in this context it means "very" or "extremely". It is used to emphasize the strength of the man.

[hi]ਤਾਕਤਵਰ[/hi] - [hi]takatavar[/hi] - means "strong".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is the present tense form of the verb "to be" and means "is".

Key Concept: In Punjabi, adjectives often follow the noun they modify. This is different from English where adjectives usually come before the noun.

Translation: The man is very strong.

The next word is pay. English: He paid the rent.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਰਾਇਆ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She/It (third person singular) - This is a pronoun that indicates the subject of the sentence is a male, female, or an object, and it is performing the action. This is in the third person singular which means it is "he", "she", or "it". This is the subject of the verb and is in the nominative case. It is an example of a third person singular subject pronoun.

[hi]ਕਿਰਾਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]kiraya[/hi] - Rent - This is a noun. It is a direct object of the verb and is in the accusative case.

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi] - [hi]ditta[/hi] - Paid - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]dena[/hi] - to give/to pay. This is a past tense form of the verb, meaning the action of paying has already taken place.

This sentence is in the simple past tense which indicates that the action of paying took place in the past.

The next word is move. English: He moves quickly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਤੇਜ਼ੀ ਨਾਲ ਚਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - "He" - This is a pronoun referring to a male subject.

[hi]ਤੇਜ਼ੀ[/hi] - "Speed" - This noun is a key concept in this sentence. It signifies the way he moves.

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - "With" - This preposition indicates how he moves.

[hi]ਚਲਦਾ[/hi] - "Moves" - This is the present tense verb, showing the action of the subject.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - "Is" - This is the auxiliary verb, marking the present tense.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਤੇਜ਼ੀ[/hi] - The speed at which something moves.

[hi]ਚਲਦਾ[/hi] - The present tense verb for the action of moving.

Remember: The sentence structure of Punjabi is Subject-Verb-Object, like in English.

The next word is speak. English: She speaks Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਬੋਲਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "she".

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - This is the word for "Punjabi" (the language). It can also mean "Punjabi person". You can identify if it refers to the language or a person by the context of the sentence.

[hi]ਬੋਲਦੀ[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to speak". In Punjabi, verbs change based on who is doing the action and when the action is happening. The ending "-ਦੀ" is used to indicate that a female subject is performing the action in the present tense.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is a helping verb that indicates the sentence is in the present tense.

Key Concept: In Punjabi, verbs change based on gender and tense. For example, the verb for "speak" is different for a male subject, a female subject, and depending on the tense (past, present, future).

The next word is promote. English: We should promote the Punjabi language.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰਮੋਟ ਕਰਨਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]asi[/hi] - We (subject)

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - [hi]panjabi[/hi] - Punjabi (adjective)

[hi]ਭਾਸ਼ਾ[/hi] - [hi]bhasha[/hi] - Language (object)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - To (preposition)

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਮੋਟ[/hi] - [hi]promote[/hi] - Promote (verb)

[hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] - [hi]karna[/hi] - To do (verb)

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]chahida[/hi] - Should (modal verb)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - Is (verb)

Key Concepts:

Direct Object: The object of the verb "promote" is the Punjabi language.

Modal Verb: The modal verb "chahida" emphasizes obligation or necessity.

Word Order: The sentence follows the typical Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) structure common in Punjabi.

English: We should promote the Punjabi language.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰਮੋਟ ਕਰਨਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is woman. English: The woman is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਔਰਤ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਔਰਤ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "woman." It is in the nominative case, which means it is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "beautiful." It is an adjective that modifies the noun "woman."

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." It is the present tense form of the verb "to be."

The sentence structure is simple: subject + adjective + verb.

This is a common and easy sentence to remember!

The next word is popular. English: The new movie is very popular.

Punjabi: [hi]ਨਵੀਂ ਫ਼ਿਲਮ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਨਵੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]navee[/hi] (feminine singular) - new

[hi]ਫ਼ਿਲਮ[/hi] - [hi]film[/hi] (feminine singular) - movie

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ[/hi] - [hi]mashhoor[/hi] (feminine singular) - popular

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] (present tense, 3rd person singular) - is

Key Concept: In Punjabi, adjectives agree in gender and number with the noun they modify. Therefore, [hi]ਨਵੀਂ[/hi] and [hi]ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ[/hi] are feminine singular to agree with [hi]ਫ਼ਿਲਮ[/hi].

English: The new movie is very popular.

Punjabi: [hi]ਨਵੀਂ ਫ਼ਿਲਮ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is table. English: He is sitting at the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਜ਼ ਤੇ ਬੈਠਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - means "he" and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਮੇਜ਼[/hi] - means "table".

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - means "on" or "at" and connects the subject to the location.

[hi]ਬੈਠਾ[/hi] - means "sitting" and is the verb in the sentence, showing the action of the subject.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is the present tense verb "is" and indicates that the action is happening now.

Key Concepts:

Word order: Punjabi follows a Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) word order, which is different from English's Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) order.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions (words that come after a noun) to indicate relationships like location. For example, the word [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] functions as a postposition in this sentence.

English: He is sitting at the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਜ਼ ਤੇ ਬੈਠਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is something. English: Something is in the box.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡੱਬੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੁਝ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡੱਬੇ[/hi] - [hi]ḍabbē[/hi] - dative case of [hi]ਡੱਬਾ[/hi] - [hi]ḍabbā[/hi] - box

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vicch[/hi] - in, inside

[hi]ਕੁਝ[/hi] - [hi]kujh[/hi] - something

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concept:

The word [hi]ਕੁਝ[/hi] - [hi]kujh[/hi] can be used to refer to an unspecified thing or quantity. It is often used in situations where the speaker does not know or does not want to specify what they are referring to.

English: Something is in the box.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡੱਬੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਕੁਝ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is defense. English: The soldiers bravely defended their country.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਿਪਾਹੀਆਂ ਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੇਸ਼ ਦੀ ਬਹਾਦਰੀ ਨਾਲ ਰੱਖਿਆ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਿਪਾਹੀਆਂ[/hi]: This is the plural form of [hi]ਸਿਪਾਹੀ[/hi] which means "soldier". Note the pluralization of "soldier" is done by adding [hi]ਆਂ[/hi] at the end.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi]: This is the "by" particle and is required in Punjabi for the subject to do something. For example, "I eat" would be [hi]ਮੈਂ ਖਾਂਦਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi] (I by eat am).

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi]: This is the possessive "our" or "their", the context provides the correct meaning.

[hi]ਦੇਸ਼[/hi]: Means "country".

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi]: This is the possessive marker for "country" which is feminine in Punjabi. The possessive marker for masculine words would be [hi]ਦਾ[/hi].

[hi]ਬਹਾਦਰੀ[/hi]: This means "bravery" or "courage".

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi]: This means "with".

[hi]ਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi]: This means "protection" or "defense".

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi]: This is the past tense of the verb "to do".

Key Concepts:

Possessive Markers: These are required in Punjabi to show possession. [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] (masculine), [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (feminine), and [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] (plural).

Pluralization: In this case, the plural for [hi]ਸਿਪਾਹੀ[/hi] (soldier) is [hi]ਸਿਪਾਹੀਆਂ[/hi]. There are many ways to pluralize words in Punjabi.

Particles: These are words that add grammatical meaning, for example, [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] (by) and [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] (with).

Translation:

The soldiers by their country's bravery protection did.

The next word is find. English: He found a beautiful book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਪਾਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine subject pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the indefinite article, meaning "a".

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - This is the adjective meaning "beautiful".

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - This is the noun meaning "book".

[hi]ਪਾਈ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to find". This verb is conjugated based on gender and number and the ending reflects the subject "he".

Key concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: In Punjabi, the verb must agree with the subject in gender and number. The ending of the verb [hi]ਪਾਈ।[/hi] is specific to a singular masculine subject.

Word Order: Punjabi is an SVO language (Subject-Verb-Object) just like English.

English: He found a beautiful book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਪਾਈ।[/hi]

The next word is design. English: The designer designed a beautiful building.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ ਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਇਮਾਰਤ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "designer" and it is in the nominative case, meaning it is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is the postposition that marks the subject of a transitive verb in Punjabi.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the word for "a" or "one".

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - This is the adjective meaning "beautiful".

[hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi] - This is the word for "building".

[hi]ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to design".

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi] - This is the past tense marker for the verb "to do" and indicates that the action was completed in the past.

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. In this sentence, "[hi]ਨੇ[/hi]" marks the subject of the verb.

Nominative Case: The subject of the sentence is in the nominative case. In this sentence, "[hi]ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ[/hi]" is the subject.

Transitive Verbs: Transitive verbs require a direct object. In this sentence, "[hi]ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਕੀਤੀ[/hi]" is a transitive verb and the direct object is "[hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi]".

English: The designer designed a beautiful building.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨਰ ਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਇਮਾਰਤ ਡਿਜ਼ਾਈਨ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is content. English: The content of the book is very interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitab[/hi] - book

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive marker, indicating the book's content)

[hi]ਸਮੱਗਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]sammgarī[/hi] - content

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪ[/hi] - [hi]dilchasap[/hi] - interesting

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, singular)

Key concepts:

Possessive marker: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] shows that the content belongs to the book.

Noun: [hi]ਸਮੱਗਰੀ[/hi] is the noun, the subject of the sentence.

Adjective: [hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪ[/hi] describes the noun, indicating its quality.

Verb: [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the verb, indicating the state of being interesting.

English: The content of the book is very interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਸਮੱਗਰੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is skill. English: He has many skills.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰੇ ਹੁਨਰ ਆਉਂਦੇ ਨੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he/she/it) meaning "to him/her/it." It indicates the recipient of the action.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰੇ[/hi] - This means "many" or "a lot of."

[hi]ਹੁਨਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "skill" or "talent."

[hi]ਆਉਂਦੇ ਨੇ।[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to come" in the plural form. This is a common way to say "to know how to do something" in Punjabi. The [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] at the end is a grammatical particle indicating that the subject of the sentence is plural.

Therefore, the whole sentence means "He has many skills."

The next word is mountain. English: The mountain is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪਹਾੜ ਬਹੁਤ ਉੱਚਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪਹਾੜ[/hi] - [hi]pahaṛ[/hi] - mountain. This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very. This is an adverb modifying the adjective [hi]ਉੱਚਾ[/hi].

[hi]ਉੱਚਾ[/hi] - [hi]uccha[/hi] - high. This is an adjective describing the mountain.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is. This is the verb in the sentence, indicating the state of being of the mountain.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi sentence structure is similar to English, with subject-verb-object order.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]hai[/hi]) is a very common verb in Punjabi, used for "is", "am", "are" and "being".

Adjectives follow the noun they describe in Punjabi.

English: The mountain is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪਹਾੜ ਬਹੁਤ ਉੱਚਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is consideration. English: He showed consideration for her feelings.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne usde vicharon da dhyan rakhke[/hi]

Breakdown:

- [hi]Us ne[/hi] - "He" (subject pronoun) + "has" (present tense marker)

- [hi]usde[/hi] - "her" (possessive pronoun, singular feminine)

- [hi]vicharon[/hi] - "feelings" (plural noun, masculine)

- [hi]da[/hi] - "of" (possessive particle, masculine)

- [hi]dhyan[/hi] - "consideration" (noun, masculine)

- [hi]rakhke[/hi] - "kept" (past participle, denoting action in the past)

Key Concepts:

- Possessive Pronouns: [hi]usde[/hi] is a possessive pronoun, which indicates possession (belonging to someone).

- Possessive Particle: [hi]da[/hi] is a possessive particle, which connects a noun with its possessor.

- Past Participle: [hi]rakhke[/hi] is a past participle, indicating a completed action.

English: He showed consideration for her feelings.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne usde vicharon da dhyan rakhke[/hi]

The next word is normally. English: He normally goes to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੋਰ ਸਮੇਂ ਉਹ ਮੰਡੀ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹੋਰ[/hi] - [hi]hor[/hi] - This word means "other" or "more" in this context, and when used with [hi]ਸਮੇਂ[/hi] - [hi]samain[/hi] - "time," it indicates a general, habitual, or usual occurrence. It's like saying "most of the time" or "on most occasions."

[hi]ਸਮੇਂ[/hi] - [hi]samain[/hi] - This is the plural form of [hi]ਸਮਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]samaan[/hi] - "time".

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]oh[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "he" or "she" and it refers to the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਮੰਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]mandi[/hi] - This means "market" and refers to the place where the subject goes.

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]jaanda[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to go," indicating that the action happens regularly.

This sentence follows a common Punjabi sentence structure with the subject ([hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]oh[/hi] - "he"), followed by the adverbial phrase ([hi]ਹੋਰ ਸਮੇਂ[/hi] - [hi]hor samain[/hi] - "normally"), and then the verb ([hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]jaanda[/hi] - "goes") and object ([hi]ਮੰਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]mandi[/hi] - "market").

Remember, the usage of [hi]ਹੋਰ ਸਮੇਂ[/hi] - [hi]hor samain[/hi] - "normally" is an important aspect of expressing habitual actions in Punjabi.

The next word is evidence. English: The evidence proves that he is guilty.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਬੂਤ ਇਹ ਦਿਖਾਉਂਦੇ ਹਨ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਦੋਸ਼ੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਬੂਤ[/hi] [hi]sabut[/hi] - evidence. This word is derived from the Arabic word [hi]ṣubūt[/hi] which means "proof" or "evidence".

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] [hi]eh[/hi] - this/these

[hi]ਦਿਖਾਉਂਦੇ[/hi] [hi]dikhaunde[/hi] - show/indicate/prove (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] [hi]han[/hi] - are (plural form)

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] [hi]ki[/hi] - that

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] [hi]oh[/hi] - he

[hi]ਦੋਸ਼ੀ[/hi] [hi]doshi[/hi] - guilty

Key concept: The Punjabi sentence uses the present continuous tense [hi]ਦਿਖਾਉਂਦੇ[/hi] [hi]dikhaunde[/hi] to emphasize the ongoing nature of the evidence proving his guilt.

Translation: The evidence shows that he is guilty.

The next word is shop. English: I went to the shop.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਦੁਕਾਨ 'ਤੇ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - [hi]main[/hi] - I (subject)

[hi]ਦੁਕਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]dukaan[/hi] - shop (object)

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]'te[/hi] - on (preposition)

[hi]ਗਿਆ।[/hi] - [hi]gya[/hi] - went (verb) - past tense

Key Concepts:

The word order is subject - prepositional phrase - verb.

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is used to indicate location with the noun [hi]ਦੁਕਾਨ[/hi] (shop).

English: I went to the shop.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਦੁਕਾਨ 'ਤੇ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is throw. English: He threw the ball.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਗੇਂਦ ਸੁੱਟੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - he/she/it (masculine singular) - subject pronoun.

[hi]ਗੇਂਦ[/hi] - [hi]gend[/hi] - ball - direct object.

[hi]ਸੁੱਟੀ[/hi] - [hi]sutti[/hi] - threw - past tense verb (feminine singular to agree with the direct object [hi]ਗੇਂਦ[/hi]).

Key Concept: In Punjabi, verbs often agree in gender and number with the object they are acting upon.

English: He threw the ball.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਗੇਂਦ ਸੁੱਟੀ।[/hi]

The next word is gift. English: He gave me a gift.

Punjabi: [hi] ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਤੋਹਫ਼ਾ ਦਿੱਤਾ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun in the past tense, meaning "he" or "him" in the past tense. It is used here as the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of the first person singular pronoun, meaning "to me" or "for me". It is used here as the indirect object of the sentence.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the indefinite article for singular nouns, meaning "a" or "one". It is used here to indicate that there is one gift.

[hi]ਤੋਹਫ਼ਾ[/hi] - This is the noun for "gift". It is used here as the direct object of the sentence.

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to give" in the masculine singular form. It is the main verb of the sentence.

Key concept: The word [hi]ਤੋਹਫ਼ਾ[/hi] is used for a gift, especially one given on a special occasion. The word [hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] is the past tense of the verb "to give" and it is used with masculine singular nouns and the word [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] is in the dative case and means "to me".

English: He gave me a gift.

Punjabi: [hi] ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਤੋਹਫ਼ਾ ਦਿੱਤਾ। [/hi]

The next word is belong. English: He belongs to this village.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇਸ ਪਿੰਡ ਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] means "he" (pronoun)

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] means "this" (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਪਿੰਡ[/hi] means "village" (noun)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] means "of" or "belonging to" (possessive particle)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] means "is" (verb)

This sentence uses a possessive structure to show that someone belongs to a particular place. It demonstrates how possessive particles work in Punjabi to express ownership.

The next word is except. English: I like all fruits except for bananas.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਸਾਰੇ ਫਲ ਪਸੰਦ ਨੇ, ਕੇਲੇ ਤੋਂ ਬਿਨਾ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - means "to me" or "I". Note the "n" at the end which signals the dative case - indicating the indirect object.

[hi]ਸਾਰੇ[/hi] - means "all"

[hi]ਫਲ[/hi] - means "fruits". Note the plural marker "e" at the end.

[hi]ਪਸੰਦ[/hi] - means "like" or "favorite".

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - is a grammatical marker that indicates the present tense.

[hi]ਕੇਲੇ[/hi] - means "bananas" (singular "kela"). Note the plural "e" at the end.

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - means "from" or "except for"

[hi]ਬਿਨਾ[/hi] - means "without"

It is common in Punjabi to place the "exception" after the thing it modifies (here, fruits).

English: I like all fruits except for bananas.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਸਾਰੇ ਫਲ ਪਸੰਦ ਨੇ, ਕੇਲੇ ਤੋਂ ਬਿਨਾ[/hi].

The next word is familiar. English: I am familiar with the city of Amritsar.

Punjabi: ਮੈਨੂੰ ਅੰਮ੍ਰਿਤਸਰ ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਨਾਲ [hi]vaaprati[/hi] ਹੈ।

Breakdown:

[hi]vaaprati[/hi] is the Punjabi word for familiar. It is a feminine adjective and agrees with the feminine noun [hi]shahar[/hi] (city) in the sentence.

The sentence is in the present tense and uses the verb [hi]hai[/hi] (is) to indicate that the speaker is familiar with the city of Amritsar.

The use of [hi]nal[/hi] (with) is common in Punjabi when indicating association or connection.

Key concepts:

Gender agreement in Punjabi adjectives.

Use of the verb [hi]hai[/hi] for "is" in the present tense.

Preposition [hi]nal[/hi] (with) to indicate connection.

English: I am familiar with the city of Amritsar.

Punjabi: ਮੈਨੂੰ ਅੰਮ੍ਰਿਤਸਰ ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਨਾਲ [hi]vaaprati[/hi] ਹੈ।

The next word is read. English: He read the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਪੜ੍ਹੀ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun in the dative case, meaning "he" or "him." It's used to show who performed the action.

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - This is the noun "book."

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to read." It's in the feminine singular form because it agrees with the feminine noun "[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi]".

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, verbs and adjectives agree in gender with the noun they modify. The verb "[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹੀ[/hi]" is feminine because the noun "[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi]" is feminine.

Dative Case: The dative case is used to show the indirect object of a verb, or the person or thing to whom or for whom something is done. Here, "[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi]" is in the dative case, indicating the person who read the book.

English Translation: He read the book.

Punjabi Translation: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਪੜ੍ਹੀ[/hi].

The next word is unfortunately. English: Unfortunately, the train was late.

Punjabi: [hi]Badkismatī nāal, gāṛī derī nāal āī[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Badkismatī[/hi] (bad-kis-mat-ee) - This word means "unfortunately". It is formed by combining the words [hi]bad[/hi] (bad) and [hi]kismat[/hi] (fate, fortune). The suffix [hi]ī[/hi] makes it an adjective.

[hi]nāal[/hi] (naal) - This word means "with" and indicates a relationship or accompaniment.

[hi]gāṛī[/hi] (ga-ri) - This word means "train".

[hi]derī[/hi] (de-ri) - This word means "late".

[hi]āī[/hi] (a-ee) - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]ānā[/hi] (to come).

Key concept: The use of [hi]nāal[/hi] (with) helps to show the connection between the unfortunate event and the train being late. The sentence structure is similar to English, making it easier to understand.

English: Unfortunately, the train was late.

Punjabi: [hi]Badkismatī nāal, gāṛī derī nāal āī[/hi].

The next word is from. English: He came from London.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਲੰਡਨ ਤੋਂ ਆਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun)

[hi]ਲੰਡਨ[/hi] - London (proper noun)

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - from (postposition)

[hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] - came (verb, past participle)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (verb, present tense)

Key concept: The postposition [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] is used to indicate the origin or starting point of something.

English: He came from London.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਲੰਡਨ ਤੋਂ ਆਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is difference. English: There is a big difference between a car and a bicycle.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਤੇ ਸਾਈਕਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਹੁਤ ਫ਼ਰਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] = [hi]gaddi[/hi] = car.

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] = [hi]te[/hi] = and, between. This is the postposition for showing the relationship between two nouns.

[hi]ਸਾਈਕਲ[/hi] = [hi]saaykal[/hi] = bicycle.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] = [hi]vich[/hi] = in, between, within. This is the postposition that shows where something is located.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] = [hi]bahut[/hi] = very, much.

[hi]ਫ਼ਰਕ[/hi] = [hi]farak[/hi] = difference.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] = [hi]hai[/hi] = is/are.

Key concept: The Punjabi sentence uses postpositions to show the relationship between the nouns. This is different from English, where we use prepositions.

The next word is perform. English: She performs the dance beautifully.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਨੱਚਦੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਸੋਹਣੀ ਲੱਗਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - she (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਨੱਚਦੀ[/hi] - dancing (present continuous tense of the verb "to dance")

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very

[hi]ਸੋਹਣੀ[/hi] - beautiful (adjective)

[hi]ਲੱਗਦੀ[/hi] - seems/appears (present continuous tense of the verb "to seem")

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (present tense of the verb "to be")

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨੱਚਦੀ[/hi] is in the present continuous tense which implies an ongoing action.

[hi]ਲੱਗਦੀ[/hi] conveys the impression of beauty rather than simply stating it.

English: She performs the dance beautifully.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਨੱਚਦੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਸੋਹਣੀ ਲੱਗਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is long. English: The road is long.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੜਕ ਲੰਬੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੜਕ[/hi] - [hi]sadak[/hi] - This is the word for "road".

[hi]ਲੰਬੀ[/hi] - [hi]lambī[/hi] - This means "long" and is the feminine form of the adjective.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be".

Key concepts:

The word [hi]ਸੜਕ[/hi] is in the nominative case, meaning it is the subject of the sentence.

The word [hi]ਲੰਬੀ[/hi] is in the nominative case, agreeing in gender with the subject.

The verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is in the present tense and agrees in number and gender with the subject.

This sentence demonstrates the use of feminine adjectives and present tense verbs in Punjabi. The sentence structure is simple and follows a subject-verb-object pattern, which is common in Punjabi.

The next word is guest. English: The guest arrived at the house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮਹਿਮਾਨ ਘਰ ਪਹੁੰਚਿਆ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮਹਿਮਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]mehamaan[/hi] - (noun) guest

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - [hi]ghar[/hi] - (noun) house

[hi]ਪਹੁੰਚਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]pahucha[/hi] - (verb) arrived, reached

This sentence uses the simple past tense in Punjabi, with the verb [hi]ਪਹੁੰਚਿਆ[/hi] (pahucha) being conjugated in the singular masculine form to agree with the singular masculine noun [hi]ਮਹਿਮਾਨ[/hi] (mehamaan).

Key concept: This sentence demonstrates how to use a simple past tense verb in Punjabi to describe a past event.

The next word is track. English: We tracked the movement of the birds.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਪੰਛੀਆਂ ਦੀ ਹਰਕਤ ਦਾ ਪਤਾ ਲਾਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]asīṁ[/hi] - We (subject)

[hi]ਪੰਛੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]panchhiāṁ[/hi] - Birds (object)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]dī[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਹਰਕਤ[/hi] - [hi]harkat[/hi] - movement (object)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]dā[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਪਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]patā[/hi] - track (verb)

[hi]ਲਾਇਆ।[/hi] - [hi]lāyā.[/hi] - (past tense)

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the verb [hi]ਪਤਾ ਲਾਇਆ[/hi], which translates to "track" in English.

The word [hi]ਹਰਕਤ[/hi] is a noun that refers to movement.

The use of the possessive particles [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] and [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is important for showing ownership or connection between the birds and their movement.

English: We tracked the movement of the birds.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਪੰਛੀਆਂ ਦੀ ਹਰਕਤ ਦਾ ਪਤਾ ਲਾਇਆ।[/hi]

The next word is argue. English: He argued with his brother about the car.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਭਰਾ ਨਾਲ ਕਾਰ ਬਾਰੇ ਬਹਿਸ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine past tense pronoun "he" in Punjabi. It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive adjective "his" in Punjabi, modifying the noun "brother."

[hi]ਭਰਾ[/hi] - This is the noun "brother" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - This is the preposition "with" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਕਾਰ[/hi] - This is the noun "car" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - This is the preposition "about" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਬਹਿਸ[/hi] - This is the noun "argument" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do" in Punjabi. Here, it means "argued."

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence follows the Subject-Verb-Object structure.

The word order is similar to English.

The Punjabi word for "argue" is [hi]ਬਹਿਸ[/hi].

English: He argued with his brother about the car.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਭਰਾ ਨਾਲ ਕਾਰ ਬਾਰੇ ਬਹਿਸ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is influence. English: The teacher's influence on the students is profound.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੁਨਸ਼ੀ ਦਾ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਤੇ ਬਹੁਤ ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੁਨਸ਼ੀ[/hi] - This word is a formal term for "teacher" or "instructor." It is a common word used in schools.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is a possessive marker, meaning "of" or "belonging to." Here, it indicates that the influence belongs to the teacher.

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi], which means "student."

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "on" or "upon."

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This word means "very" or "a lot." It modifies the noun [hi]ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵ[/hi].

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵ[/hi] - This word means "influence" or "impact."

Key concept: This sentence uses the possessive marker [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] to show the teacher's influence on the students. Also, the word [hi]ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵ[/hi] is an important word to learn when discussing influence in Punjabi.

English: The teacher's influence on the students is profound.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੁਨਸ਼ੀ ਦਾ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਤੇ ਬਹੁਤ ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is achieve. English: We must achieve our goals.

Punjabi: [hi]Asin apne lakshya praapt karne chahide aan[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Asin[/hi] - We (subject, plural)

[hi]apne[/hi] - Our (possessive pronoun)

[hi]lakshya[/hi] - Goals (noun, plural)

[hi]praapt[/hi] - Achieve (verb, past participle)

[hi]karne[/hi] - To do (infinitive)

[hi]chahide[/hi] - Must, should (modal verb)

[hi]aan[/hi] - We (subject, plural)

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: The verb [hi]chahide[/hi] agrees with the plural subject [hi]Asin[/hi].

Infinitive: The infinitive [hi]karne[/hi] is used to express the purpose of achieving the goals.

Modal Verb: The modal verb [hi]chahide[/hi] indicates obligation or necessity.

Translation: We must achieve our goals.

The next word is vote. English: They voted for the new candidate.

Punjabi: ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੇ ਨਵੇਂ ਉਮੀਦਵਾਰ ਨੂੰ ਵੋਟ ਪਾਈ। [hi]unhaan ne nave ummidvaar nu vote paayi[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]unhaan[/hi] - they, this is the plural form of the third person pronoun.

[hi]ne[/hi] - this is the postposition that marks the subject of the sentence.

[hi]nave[/hi] - new

[hi]ummidvaar[/hi] - candidate

[hi]nu[/hi] - to, this is the dative case marker, showing the direction of the action.

[hi]vote[/hi] - vote

[hi]paayi[/hi] - past tense of the verb "to cast"

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence structure is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV).

The postposition [hi]ne[/hi] marks the subject, similar to English 'they' in this case.

The dative case marker [hi]nu[/hi] indicates the direction of the action.

[hi]paayi[/hi] is the past tense of the verb "to cast," indicating that the voting action has already taken place.

The next word is man. English: The man is walking.

Punjabi: [hi]ਆਦਮੀ ਤੁਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਆਦਮੀ[/hi] - [hi]aadamī[/hi] means "man"

[hi]ਤੁਰ[/hi] - [hi]tur[/hi] means "to walk"

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]rihā hai.[/hi] means "is" (present continuous tense).

Key Concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns have grammatical gender. [hi]ਆਦਮੀ[/hi] (aadamī) is masculine.

Verb Conjugation: The verb [hi]ਤੁਰ[/hi] (tur) changes form to indicate tense and subject. Here, it is conjugated in the present continuous tense, indicating an ongoing action.

English: The man is walking.

Punjabi: [hi]ਆਦਮੀ ਤੁਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is value. English: The value of education is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਿੱਖਿਆ ਦਾ ਮੁੱਲ ਬਹੁਤ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਿਆ[/hi] - education

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਮੁੱਲ[/hi] - value

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very

[hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ[/hi] - much/high

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is.

The sentence structure is simple: subject + object + verb.

Key Concept: The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is an important possessive particle used to indicate ownership or association. In this case, it shows that the value belongs to education.

The next word is set. English: He set the book on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮੇਜ਼ 'ਤੇ ਰੱਖ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun, meaning "he" or "him".

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - This is the word for "book."

[hi]ਮੇਜ਼[/hi] - This is the word for "table."

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - This is the postposition for "on".

[hi]ਰੱਖ[/hi] - This is the verb "to place" or "to put."

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense, third person singular feminine form of the verb "to give". The reason it is feminine is because the direct object, "[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi]" is feminine. Think of it as "she gave"

Key Concept: Note the use of the postposition, [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi], to indicate location. It is important to learn these postpositions as they are often used instead of prepositions. They follow the noun they modify.

English: He set the book on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮੇਜ਼ 'ਤੇ ਰੱਖ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is inform. English: Please inform me about the upcoming event.

Punjabi: ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਆਉਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਇਵੈਂਟ ਬਾਰੇ ਦੱਸੋ। [hi]kirpaa karake mainoo aaoon vaale event baare daso.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]kirpaa[/hi] - means "please" or "kindly," a polite request.

[hi]karake[/hi] - a polite ending to a request, like "please" in English.

[hi]mainoo[/hi] - means "me" or "to me" - the indirect object, receiving the information.

[hi]aaoon[/hi] - means "coming," describing the event in the future.

[hi]vaale[/hi] - means "coming" or "upcoming," again describing the event in the future.

[hi]event[/hi] - means "event" - the topic of the information.

[hi]baare[/hi] - means "about" or "concerning," indicating the subject of the information.

[hi]daso[/hi] - means "tell" or "inform," the action verb of the sentence.

This sentence follows the structure of a polite request, using the word "please" and ending with the word "please" in Punjabi. It also uses the indirect object "me" and a verb for informing, "tell" or "inform." This sentence can help you understand how to politely ask for information in Punjabi.

The next word is spread. English: The news of the wedding spread quickly throughout the village.

Punjabi: [hi]Gaon wich shaadi di khabar tezi naal phail gayi[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Gaon[/hi] - [hi]gaon[/hi] means "village" in Punjabi. It's the subject of the sentence.

[hi]vich[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] means "in" or "within" and is used to indicate location.

[hi]shaadi[/hi] - [hi]shaadi[/hi] means "wedding."

[hi]di[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] is the possessive marker, similar to "of" in English.

[hi]khabar[/hi] - [hi]khabar[/hi] means "news."

[hi]tezi[/hi] - [hi]tezi[/hi] means "speed" or "swiftness."

[hi]naal[/hi] - [hi]naal[/hi] is a preposition meaning "with."

[hi]phail[/hi] - [hi]phail[/hi] is the verb "spread" in the past tense.

[hi]gayi[/hi] - [hi]gayi[/hi] is a grammatical ending that indicates past tense and feminine singular.

Key Concept: The sentence demonstrates the use of the Punjabi preposition [hi]vich[/hi], which is similar to "in" or "within" in English. It also showcases how Punjabi uses the possessive marker [hi]di[/hi] to indicate possession.

English: The news of the wedding spread quickly throughout the village.

Punjabi: [hi]Gaon wich shaadi di khabar tezi naal phail gayi[/hi].

The next word is young. English: The young boy is playing in the park.

Punjabi: [hi]Chotta munda park vich khedda khedda hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Chotta[/hi] - means "small" or "young" and is used here to describe a young boy. It's an adjective modifying the noun [hi]munda[/hi].

[hi]munda[/hi] - means "boy" and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]park[/hi] - means "park" and is a noun functioning as an object of the preposition [hi]vich[/hi].

[hi]vich[/hi] - means "in" and is a preposition that connects [hi]park[/hi] to the verb [hi]khedda khedda[/hi].

[hi]khedda khedda[/hi] - is the verb in the sentence, which means "playing". The repetition of [hi]khedda[/hi] emphasizes the action of playing. The verb is in the present continuous tense, indicating an ongoing action.

[hi]hai[/hi] - means "is" and is a copula that connects the subject [hi]munda[/hi] to the predicate [hi]khedda khedda[/hi].

Key concepts:

Adjectives: [hi]Chotta[/hi] describes the noun [hi]munda[/hi]

Nouns: [hi]munda[/hi] and [hi]park[/hi]

Preposition: [hi]vich[/hi] shows the relationship between the [hi]munda[/hi] and the [hi]park[/hi]

Verb: [hi]khedda khedda[/hi]

Copula: [hi]hai[/hi]

Remember: [hi]munda[/hi] can also mean "person" or "man" depending on the context.

English: The young boy is playing in the park.

Punjabi: [hi]Chotta munda park vich khedda khedda hai.[/hi]

The next word is effect. English: The medicine had a positive effect on the patient.

Punjabi: [hi]Dassi daa [hi]davai [hi]nuu [hi]mriḍh [hi]te [hi]achchha [hi]asara [hi]payaa [hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Dassi [hi] - The patient

[hi]daa [hi] - 's (possessive marker)

[hi]davai [hi] - medicine

[hi]nuu [hi] - to (dative marker)

[hi]mriḍh [hi] - health

[hi]te [hi] - on, upon

[hi]achchha [hi] - good

[hi]asara [hi] - effect

[hi]payaa [hi] - was found/obtained

Key concepts:

[hi]nuu [hi] and [hi]te [hi] are important prepositions that indicate direction and location in Punjabi.

[hi]asara [hi] is a useful word to learn for discussing effects, both positive and negative.

English: The medicine had a positive effect on the patient.

Punjabi: [hi]Dassi daa [hi]davai [hi]nuu [hi]mriḍh [hi]te [hi]achchha [hi]asara [hi]payaa [hi].

The next word is feed. English: The baby needs to be fed.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਨੂੰ ਖੁਆਉਣ ਦੀ ਲੋੜ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi]: This is the subject of the sentence, meaning "baby".

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi]: This is the dative marker, showing that the baby is the recipient of the action.

[hi]ਖੁਆਉਣ[/hi]: This is the infinitive form of the verb "to feed". The infinitive form is used here to indicate the need for the action.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi]: This is the genitive case marker, showing that the need belongs to the feeding.

[hi]ਲੋੜ[/hi]: This means "need".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: This is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

Key Concepts:

This sentence uses the infinitive form of the verb to express the need for an action.

The dative marker ([hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi]) is used to indicate the recipient of the action.

English: The baby needs to be fed.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਨੂੰ ਖੁਆਉਣ ਦੀ ਲੋੜ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is imagine. English: Imagine a beautiful garden.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲਪਨਾ ਕਰੋ ਕਿ ਇੱਕ ਸੋਹਣਾ ਬਾਗ਼ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਲਪਨਾ[/hi] (kalpana) - This means "imagination" in Punjabi. It's the noun form of the verb [hi]ਕਲਪਨਾ ਕਰੋ[/hi] (kalpana karo).

[hi]ਕਰੋ[/hi] (karo) - This is the imperative form of the verb "to do," used to give a command.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] (ikk) - This means "one" or "a" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਸੋਹਣਾ[/hi] (sohna) - This means "beautiful" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਬਾਗ਼[/hi] (bagh) - This means "garden" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be," meaning "is" or "there is."

This sentence is a simple imperative sentence. It tells the listener to imagine a beautiful garden.

English: Imagine a beautiful garden.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲਪਨਾ ਕਰੋ ਕਿ ਇੱਕ ਸੋਹਣਾ ਬਾਗ਼ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is vary. English: The weather in Punjab varies greatly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ ਵਿੱਚ ਮੌਸਮ ਬਹੁਤ ਵੱਖਰਾ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ[/hi] - Punjab, a proper noun that refers to the Punjab region

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in, preposition indicating location

[hi]ਮੌਸਮ[/hi] - weather, a noun referring to atmospheric conditions

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very, an adverb intensifying the adjective

[hi]ਵੱਖਰਾ[/hi] - different, an adjective modifying weather

[hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - is, a verb in the present tense

This sentence utilizes a simple sentence structure: subject (weather) + verb (is) + adjective phrase (very different) + prepositional phrase (in Punjab). The word [hi]ਵੱਖਰਾ[/hi] "different" is important as it connects to the word "vary" and is the core meaning of the sentence.

The next word is important. English: This is an important task.

Punjabi: [hi]Ee eh [hi] [hi]zaroori[/hi] [hi]kaam[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ee eh [hi]: This is - This phrase is used to highlight the importance of the task.

[hi]zaroori[/hi]: important - This word is a key concept, denoting significance.

[hi]kaam[/hi]: task - This word denotes the activity in question.

[hi]hai[/hi]: is - This is the verb that connects the subject and the predicate.

Key Concepts:

[hi]zaroori[/hi]: This word is very important to know and use in Punjabi. It is a versatile word and can be used in many situations.

[hi]kaam[/hi]: This word is also important to know as it denotes any kind of task or activity.

Memorization Tip: Think of the English word "important" and associate it with the Punjabi word [hi]zaroori[/hi]. This will help you remember the word and its usage.

The next word is finish. English: He finished his work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣਾ ਕੰਮ ਮੁਕਾ ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun in the third person singular, meaning "he". It is the masculine form.

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - This is a possessive adjective meaning "his".

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - This is the noun meaning "work".

[hi]ਮੁਕਾ ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb meaning "to finish".

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses a direct object.

The verb "to finish" is conjugated in the past tense, which is the key to knowing that the action has already happened.

English: He finished his work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣਾ ਕੰਮ ਮੁਕਾ ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi].

The next word is ground. English: The ground is wet.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ ਗਿੱਲੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ[/hi] - [hi]zameen[/hi] - ground

[hi]ਗਿੱਲੀ[/hi] - [hi]gilli[/hi] - wet

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

The word order in Punjabi is typically subject-object-verb, unlike English which is subject-verb-object.

In the sentence, the subject is [hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ[/hi] (ground), the object is [hi]ਗਿੱਲੀ[/hi] (wet), and the verb is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is).

This sentence is a simple present tense sentence, indicating a state of being.

Memorization tip: Think of [hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ[/hi] (ground) like the earth or land beneath your feet.

English: The ground is wet.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ ਗਿੱਲੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is status. English: What is your current status?

Punjabi: [hi]Tuhadaa haal kya hai?[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Tuhadaa[/hi] - Your (polite form, used when addressing someone respectfully)

[hi]haal[/hi] - Status, condition, well-being

[hi]kya[/hi] - What (used in questions)

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is

This sentence uses the polite form of "you," [hi]Tuhadaa[/hi], which is used to show respect for the person being addressed. The word [hi]haal[/hi] is a key concept, as it refers to one's overall status or well-being. The question word [hi]kya[/hi] is used to ask for information about the status.

This sentence is a common way to ask about someone's well-being in Punjabi, similar to "How are you?" in English.

The next word is screen. English: The screen of my phone is broken.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰੇ ਫੋਨ ਦੀ ਸਕਰੀਨ ਟੁੱਟ ਗਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]mere[/hi] means "my" and is a possessive pronoun.

[hi]ਫੋਨ[/hi] - [hi]fon[/hi] means "phone."

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] means "of" and acts as a possessive marker, attaching the phone to the screen.

[hi]ਸਕਰੀਨ[/hi] - [hi]skreen[/hi] means "screen."

[hi]ਟੁੱਟ[/hi] - [hi]tut[/hi] means "to break" and is in the past tense (it broke).

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - [hi]gai[/hi] is the past tense marker, indicating that the breaking happened in the past.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] means "is" and connects the past action of breaking with the present state of the screen (it is broken).

Key Concepts:

Possessive Pronouns: [hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] indicates ownership of the phone.

Possessive Marker: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] connects the phone to the screen.

Past Tense: [hi]ਟੁੱਟ ਗਈ[/hi] describes an action that occurred in the past.

Present Tense: [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] indicates the current state of the screen (broken).

The next word is tax. English: He has to pay taxes.

Punjabi: [hi]Us nu tax adawa karna parde aa[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "he" or "him."

[hi]nu[/hi] - This is a postposition meaning "to" or "for." In this case, it indicates the person to whom the taxes are owed.

[hi]tax[/hi] - This is the English word "tax" borrowed into Punjabi.

[hi]adawa[/hi] - This is the verb "to pay" in the present tense.

[hi]karna[/hi] - This is the verb "to do" functioning as an auxiliary verb here, meaning "must" or "have to."

[hi]parde[/hi] - This is the third person singular present tense form of the verb "to fall," which in this context means "must" or "have to."

[hi]aa[/hi] - This is a particle indicating the present tense.

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses the third person singular pronoun [hi]Us[/hi] to refer to the subject of the sentence.

The postposition [hi]nu[/hi] indicates the recipient of the taxes.

The verbs [hi]adawa[/hi] and [hi]karna[/hi] together express the obligation to pay taxes.

The particle [hi]aa[/hi] at the end of the sentence indicates the present tense.

Translation: He has to pay taxes.

The next word is remove. English: The cat removed the toy from the box.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਨੇ ਖਿਡੌਣਾ ਬਕਸੇ ਤੋਂ ਕੱਢਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] - (billi) - This is the noun for "cat". A feminine noun.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - (ne) - This is the postposition that marks the subject of the verb. It is used after the subject in a sentence and denotes the subject. It is the masculine singular form.

[hi]ਖਿਡੌਣਾ[/hi] - (khidona) - This is the noun for "toy". It is a masculine noun.

[hi]ਬਕਸੇ[/hi] - (bakse) - This is the noun for "box". It is a masculine noun.

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - (ton) - This is the postposition used to indicate "from" or "out of". It is used after the object of the verb.

[hi]ਕੱਢਿਆ।[/hi] - (kadhya) - This is the past tense form of the verb "to remove" or "to take out". It is in the masculine singular form.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi is a subject-object-verb (SOV) language, meaning the subject of the sentence comes first, then the object, and lastly the verb.

Punjabi uses postpositions to indicate grammatical relationships, such as the subject and the object of a verb.

Verbs in Punjabi are conjugated according to gender and number.

Translation:

The cat removed the toy from the box.

[hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਨੇ ਖਿਡੌਣਾ ਬਕਸੇ ਤੋਂ ਕੱਢਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is old. English: That is an old book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kitab bohut purani hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] is a demonstrative pronoun meaning "this" or "that."

[hi]kitab[/hi] means "book."

[hi]bohut[/hi] means "very" or "a lot."

[hi]purani[/hi] is the feminine form of the adjective [hi]purana[/hi] which means "old."

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense of the verb "to be."

This sentence demonstrates the use of the feminine form of the adjective to agree with the feminine gender of the noun [hi]kitab[/hi].

This sentence is a great way to learn a very common adjective in Punjabi. You can also use [hi]purani[/hi] to describe other things like a building, a car, or a piece of furniture.

English: That is an old book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kitab bohut purani hai[/hi].

The next word is character. English: She is a character.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਕਿਰਦਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - She

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a/one

[hi]ਕਿਰਦਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]kirdaar[/hi] - character (Think of the word "character" in the sense of personality)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is/am/are

Key concepts:

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - This word, meaning "a/one," is used before singular nouns to indicate indefiniteness, similar to the English "a" or "an."

English: She is a character.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਕਿਰਦਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is border. English: The border between India and Pakistan is heavily guarded.

Punjabi: [hi]Bharat te Pakistan di hadd bahut hi rakhwali wali hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Bharat[/hi] - India

[hi]te[/hi] - and (conjunction)

[hi]Pakistan[/hi] - Pakistan

[hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]hadd[/hi] - border

[hi]bahut hi[/hi] - very

[hi]rakhwali[/hi] - guarded

[hi]wali[/hi] - one who is (suffix)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (verb)

Key concepts:

Possessive particles: [hi]di[/hi] shows possession, like "of" in English. This is a common particle in Punjabi and is used frequently.

Suffixes: [hi]wali[/hi] is a suffix that means "one who is". It is used to create adjectives, such as "guarded" in this sentence.

English: The border between India and Pakistan is heavily guarded.

Punjabi: [hi]Bharat te Pakistan di hadd bahut hi rakhwali wali hai.[/hi]

The next word is fan. English: He is a fan of Punjabi music.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸੰਗੀਤ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ੰਸਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - he

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - Punjabi

[hi]ਸੰਗੀਤ[/hi] - music

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ੰਸਕ[/hi] - fan

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is.

Key concept: The word [hi]ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ੰਸਕ[/hi] is a noun meaning "fan" or "admirer".

English: He is a fan of Punjabi music.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸੰਗੀਤ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਸ਼ੰਸਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is impossible. English: This is impossible.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh aasambhav hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

- [hi]Eh[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun). It can refer to something near or far but in this sentence is pointing at the statement "impossible."

- [hi]aasambhav[/hi] - impossible (adjective)

- [hi]hai[/hi] - is (verb)

This sentence uses the simple present tense of "to be." It is important to remember that the Punjabi language often uses a different structure than English. For example, the word order of subject-verb-object in English is often reversed in Punjabi.

The next word is examine. English: Let's examine this closely.

Punjabi: [hi]Aas nu gaur naal dekh laiye[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Aas[/hi] - This, this one

[hi]nu[/hi] - To

[hi]gaur[/hi] - Closely, carefully

[hi]naal[/hi] - With

[hi]dekh[/hi] - Look, examine

[hi]laiye[/hi] - Let's

Key Concept:

The word [hi]naal[/hi] means "with" and it is used here to emphasize the way the action is being performed.

Translation: Let's examine this closely.

The next word is worry. English: Don't worry, everything will be alright.

Punjabi: [hi]ਫ਼ਿਕਰ ਨਾ ਕਰੋ, ਸਭ ਠੀਕ ਹੋ ਜਾਵੇਗਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਫ਼ਿਕਰ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "worry".

[hi]ਨਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "not".

[hi]ਕਰੋ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "do". It is in the imperative form, which means it is a command.

[hi]ਸਭ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "everything".

[hi]ਠੀਕ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "alright".

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "be".

[hi]ਜਾਵੇਗਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "will be".

This sentence is a common expression in Punjabi, used to reassure someone who is worried.

English: Don't worry, everything will be alright.

Punjabi: [hi]ਫ਼ਿਕਰ ਨਾ ਕਰੋ, ਸਭ ਠੀਕ ਹੋ ਜਾਵੇਗਾ।[/hi]

The next word is travel. English: We travel to many places.

Punjabi: [hi]Assi kai jagah te safar karde haan.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Assi[/hi] - We (subject pronoun, plural)

[hi]kai[/hi] - many (indefinite pronoun)

[hi]jagah[/hi] - place (noun, singular)

[hi]te[/hi] - to (postposition)

[hi]safar[/hi] - travel (noun)

[hi]karde[/hi] - do (verb, present tense, plural)

[hi]haan[/hi] - are (auxiliary verb, present tense, plural)

Key concepts:

Punjabi is a subject-verb-object (SVO) language, meaning the subject of the sentence comes before the verb.

Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions.

Punjabi verbs have different endings depending on the subject and tense.

English: We travel to many places.

Punjabi: [hi]Assi kai jagah te safar karde haan.[/hi]

The next word is colleague. English: My colleague is a very kind person.

Punjabi: ਮੇਰਾ [hi]ਸਾਥੀ[/hi] ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਵਿਅਕਤੀ ਹੈ। [hi]mera saathi bahut diyalu vyakti hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] [hi]mera[/hi] means "my" and is the possessive adjective for the pronoun "I." It is in the nominative case, meaning it acts as the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਸਾਥੀ[/hi] [hi]saathi[/hi] means "colleague" or "companion." It is in the nominative case and acts as the object of the verb "is."

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] [hi]bahut[/hi] means "very." It is an adverb modifying the adjective "kind."

[hi]ਦਿਆਲੂ[/hi] [hi]diyalu[/hi] means "kind." It is an adjective modifying the noun "person."

[hi]ਵਿਅਕਤੀ[/hi] [hi]vyakti[/hi] means "person." It is in the nominative case and acts as the subject complement of the verb "is."

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] means "is" and is the present tense of the verb "to be."

Key concepts:

This sentence uses the present tense of the verb "to be." The verb "to be" is a very important verb in Punjabi, as it is used to express a state of being, location, or identity.

The sentence also uses the possessive adjective "my," which indicates ownership. The possessive adjectives in Punjabi change depending on the gender and number of the noun they modify.

The word order in this sentence is subject-verb-object complement. This is a common word order in Punjabi.

The next word is conclude. English: We concluded the meeting at 5:00 PM.

Punjabi: ਅਸੀਂ ਮੀਟਿੰਗ [hi]ਸ਼ਾਮ[/hi] 5:00 ਵਜੇ [hi]ਖ਼ਤਮ[/hi] ਕੀਤੀ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸ਼ਾਮ[/hi] [hi]shaam[/hi] - evening, this is a time marker.

[hi]ਖ਼ਤਮ[/hi] [hi]khatam[/hi] - conclude, end, this is a verb.

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] [hi]kiiti[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do" and shows that the action of concluding happened in the past.

Key Concepts:

- This sentence is written in the simple past tense.

- The verb "to do" ([hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi]) is often used in Punjabi to express actions, much like in English.

English: We concluded the meeting at 5:00 PM.

Punjabi: ਅਸੀਂ ਮੀਟਿੰਗ [hi]ਸ਼ਾਮ[/hi] 5:00 ਵਜੇ [hi]ਖ਼ਤਮ[/hi] ਕੀਤੀ।

The next word is plan. English: He plans to go to the market tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu kal bazaar jaan da plan hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usnu[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun "he". It is used to indicate the person to whom something happens. The dative case is very important in Punjabi. It is always used when a verb requires an indirect object.

[hi]kal[/hi] - This word means "tomorrow". It is a common Punjabi word.

[hi]bazaar[/hi] - This word means "market". It is very useful for everyday conversations and is used widely.

[hi]jaan[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb "to go". In Punjabi, the infinitive form is often used when describing an action in the future.

[hi]da[/hi] - This is a postposition that means "of". It is used to show possession or association. In this sentence it is used to show that the plan belongs to him. In Punjabi, the word for "of" is often placed after the noun.

[hi]plan[/hi] - This word means "plan".

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be". It is used to show that the plan exists.

Translation: He plans to go to the market tomorrow.

The next word is search. English: He searched for his lost phone.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪਣਾ ਗੁਆਚਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਫੋਨ ਲੱਭਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi]: This is the third person singular masculine subject pronoun in the past tense, meaning "he".

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi]: This is a possessive pronoun meaning "his" or "his own".

[hi]ਗੁਆਚਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ[/hi]: This is a past participle adjective meaning "lost". The word [hi]ਗੁਆਚਿਆ[/hi] means "lost" and [hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] is the past participle of the verb "to be" which makes the whole phrase "lost".

[hi]ਫੋਨ[/hi]: This is the noun "phone".

[hi]ਲੱਭਿਆ।[/hi]: This is the past tense of the verb "to find". It's important to note that in Punjabi the verb comes at the end of the sentence.

Key Concepts:

The past participle adjective [hi]ਗੁਆਚਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] is used to describe the phone.

The verb comes at the end of the sentence in Punjabi.

The sentence uses a past tense conjugation which helps to show that the action of searching occurred in the past.

English: He searched for his lost phone.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪਣਾ ਗੁਆਚਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਫੋਨ ਲੱਭਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is brain. English: The human brain is the most complex organ in the body.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮਨੁੱਖੀ ਦਿਮਾਗ਼ ਸਰੀਰ ਦਾ ਸਭ ਤੋਂ ਗੁੰਝਲਦਾਰ ਅੰਗ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮਨੁੱਖੀ[/hi] [hi]manukhi[/hi] - human (adjective) - literally "of a human" - Key Concept: This is the adjective form of [hi]ਮਨੁੱਖ[/hi] [hi]manukh[/hi] which is the noun meaning human.

[hi]ਦਿਮਾਗ਼[/hi] [hi]dimaag[/hi] - brain - Key Concept: This is a word that is often used in Punjabi to refer to the brain.

[hi]ਸਰੀਰ[/hi] [hi]sariir[/hi] - body - Key Concept: This word refers to the physical body, not just the head.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] - of - Key Concept: This is a possessive particle. It is used to indicate that something belongs to something else.

[hi]ਸਭ[/hi] [hi]sabh[/hi] - all

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] [hi]ton[/hi] - than, from

[hi]ਗੁੰਝਲਦਾਰ[/hi] [hi]gunjhaldaar[/hi] - complex, complicated - Key Concept: This is the adjective form of [hi]ਗੁੰਝਲ[/hi] [hi]gunjhal[/hi] which means "knot" or "tangle". This word is often used to describe something that is difficult to understand or solve.

[hi]ਅੰਗ[/hi] [hi]ang[/hi] - organ (body part)

English: The human brain is the most complex organ in the body.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮਨੁੱਖੀ ਦਿਮਾਗ਼ ਸਰੀਰ ਦਾ ਸਭ ਤੋਂ ਗੁੰਝਲਦਾਰ ਅੰਗ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is accident. English: The car had an accident.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਦਾ ਹਾਦਸਾ ਹੋ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] (gaddi) means "car"

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] (da) is a possessive particle, indicating that the accident belongs to the car

[hi]ਹਾਦਸਾ[/hi] (haadsa) means "accident"

[hi]ਹੋ ਗਿਆ[/hi] (ho gaya) is a past tense verb phrase meaning "happened" or "occurred"

Key concept: The sentence uses the possessive particle [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] to connect the car to the accident, emphasizing that the accident happened to the car.

The next word is compare. English: He compared the two cars.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne do gaadiyaan da tulna ki ti[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi] - He (masculine singular, third person)

[hi]do[/hi] - two

[hi]gaadiyaan[/hi] - cars (plural)

[hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]tulna[/hi] - comparison (noun)

[hi]ki[/hi] - did (past tense)

[hi]ti[/hi] - it (feminine singular, third person)

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]tulna[/hi] is a noun in this sentence, and the verb is implied.

The Punjabi language uses a possessive marker [hi]da[/hi] in this sentence, which is similar to the English "of."

This sentence uses the past tense form of the verb [hi]ki[/hi] (to do).

English: He compared the two cars.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne do gaadiyaan da tulna ki ti[/hi].

The next word is first. English: He came first in the race.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੌੜ ਵਿੱਚ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਆਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] means "he"

[hi]ਦੌੜ[/hi] - [hi]daur[/hi] means "race"

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] means "in"

[hi]ਪਹਿਲਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]pehlaan[/hi] means "first"

[hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]aaya[/hi] means "came"

Key Concepts:

Word order: The subject ([hi]ਉਹ[/hi]) comes before the verb ([hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi]).

Prepositions: The preposition [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is used to indicate location.

Adjectives: The adjective [hi]ਪਹਿਲਾਂ[/hi] modifies the noun [hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] to describe the manner in which the action was performed.

English: He came first in the race.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੌੜ ਵਿੱਚ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਆਇਆ।[/hi]

The next word is editor. English: The editor of this newspaper is very experienced.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ ਦਾ ਐਡੀਟਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਤਜਰਬੇਕਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ[/hi] - Newspaper

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - Of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਐਡੀਟਰ[/hi] - Editor

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Very

[hi]ਤਜਰਬੇਕਾਰ[/hi] - Experienced

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a possessive marker, indicating that the editor belongs to the newspaper.

[hi]ਤਜਰਬੇਕਾਰ[/hi] is an adjective describing the editor.

This sentence demonstrates the use of a possessive marker and an adjective in Punjabi. The sentence structure is simple and follows a subject-verb-object pattern.

The next word is suppose. English: Let's suppose that he is telling the truth.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੰਨ ਲਓ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਸੱਚ ਬੋਲ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੰਨ[/hi] means "to accept" or "to assume."

[hi]ਲਓ[/hi] is the imperative form of the verb "to take." It is used here to indicate the conditional aspect, "let's take it as true."

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] is the conjunction "that" and introduces the subordinate clause.

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] is the pronoun "he."

[hi]ਸੱਚ[/hi] is the noun "truth."

[hi]ਬੋਲ[/hi] is the verb "to speak."

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] is the present continuous tense of the verb "to be" indicating ongoing action.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is the present tense of the verb "to be" in the singular form, making the sentence complete and indicating that he is indeed speaking the truth.

This sentence demonstrates how the conditional aspect is conveyed in Punjabi by using the imperative form of a verb like [hi]ਲਓ[/hi] and a conjunction like [hi]ਕਿ[/hi].

The next word is air. English: The air is fresh today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj hawa taazi hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi]: Today (This is a common word and easy to remember as it's similar to "aj" in Hindi)

[hi]hawa[/hi]: Air (This is a very common word and sounds similar to "hava" in Hindi)

[hi]taazi[/hi]: Fresh (This is a common word and similar to "taaza" in Hindi)

[hi]hai[/hi]: Is (This is a common word and similar to "hai" in Hindi)

Key Concept: The Punjabi sentence uses the structure of subject-verb-adjective. "Hawa" is the subject, "hai" is the verb, and "taazi" is the adjective modifying "hawa".

Translation: The air is fresh today.

The next word is decline. English: He declined the offer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪੇਸ਼ਕਸ਼ ਨੂੰ ਠੁਕਰਾ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - he/she/it

[hi]ਪੇਸ਼ਕਸ਼[/hi] - [hi]peshkesh[/hi] - offer

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - to, for (in this case, it is used to connect the object [hi]peshkesh[/hi] to the verb [hi]thukra[/hi])

[hi]ਠੁਕਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]thukra[/hi] - to refuse, to decline

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi] - [hi]ditta.[/hi] - past tense of [hi]dena[/hi] - to give

Key Concepts

This sentence is in the past tense.

The word [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] ([hi]nu[/hi]) is a grammatical particle that acts as a preposition and links the object to the verb.

In Punjabi, the verb usually comes after the object, as seen in this example.

The structure of the sentence follows the pattern: Subject + Object + Verb + Post-position

Translation: He declined the offer.

The next word is labor. English: The laborers are working hard.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮਜ਼ਦੂਰ ਸਖ਼ਤ ਮਿਹਨਤ ਕਰ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮਜ਼ਦੂਰ[/hi] [hi]ਸਖ਼ਤ[/hi] [hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ[/hi] [hi]ਕਰ[/hi] [hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] [hi]ਹਨ।[/hi]

[hi]ਮਜ਼ਦੂਰ[/hi] (mazdoor) - laborer (plural)

[hi]ਸਖ਼ਤ[/hi] (sakht) - hard

[hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ[/hi] (mehnat) - labor, hard work

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] (kar) - doing (present tense)

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] (rahe) - are (plural present continuous)

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] (han) - are (plural)

Key concepts:

The sentence uses the present continuous tense, which is used to express an action that is happening now.

The word [hi]ਮਜ਼ਦੂਰ[/hi] is plural, meaning it refers to more than one laborer.

The sentence emphasizes the intensity of the work, using the word [hi]ਸਖ਼ਤ[/hi] (hard).

Translation: The laborers are working hard.

The next word is already. English: He has already eaten.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਹੀ ਖਾ ਚੁੱਕਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਪਹਿਲਾਂ[/hi] - Already (adverb)

[hi]ਹੀ[/hi] - Emphasis particle, reinforces the meaning of "already"

[hi]ਖਾ[/hi] - To eat (verb root)

[hi]ਚੁੱਕਿਆ[/hi] - Past participle of "to eat" - emphasizes the action is completed

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (present tense, third person singular)

Key concepts:

[hi]ਪਹਿਲਾਂ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੀ[/hi] work together to convey the meaning of "already".

[hi]ਚੁੱਕਿਆ[/hi] is a past participle, which is used to indicate a completed action.

English: He has already eaten.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਹਿਲਾਂ ਹੀ ਖਾ ਚੁੱਕਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is initial. English: The initial chapter of the book was very interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਪਹਿਲਾ ਅਧਿਆਇ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - This word means "book" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is the possessive particle in Punjabi, similar to "of" or "'s" in English.

[hi]ਪਹਿਲਾ[/hi] - This word means "first" or "initial".

[hi]ਅਧਿਆਇ[/hi] - This word means "chapter".

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This means "very" or "extremely".

[hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪ[/hi] - This means "interesting".

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense marker in Punjabi, indicating that the action happened in the past.

Key Concepts:

The use of the possessive particle [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] to show ownership.

The word [hi]ਪਹਿਲਾ[/hi] is a key word to understand the concept of "initial".

The past tense marker [hi]ਸੀ[/hi] is used to indicate that the action took place in the past.

English: The initial chapter of the book was very interesting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਪਹਿਲਾ ਅਧਿਆਇ ਬਹੁਤ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is army. English: The army is strong.

Punjabi: [hi]ਫੌਜ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਫੌਜ[/hi] - [hi]fauj[/hi] - army.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ[/hi] - [hi]mazboot[/hi] - strong

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is. The period at the end of the sentence acts as a grammatical marker.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਫੌਜ[/hi] is a noun and the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is a verb and acts as the predicate.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] is an adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ[/hi].

Remember: A sentence in Punjabi typically ends with a [hi]।[/hi].

The next word is recall. English: He recalled the story of his childhood.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne apne bachpan di kahani yaad kari[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi] - He/She/It (masculine singular subject pronoun). Key concept is gender agreement

[hi]apne[/hi] - His/Her/Its (possessive pronoun, masculine singular). Key concept is gender agreement

[hi]bachpan[/hi] - Childhood

[hi]di[/hi] - Of/belonging to (possessive marker, feminine singular). Key concept is gender agreement

[hi]kahani[/hi] - Story (feminine singular)

[hi]yaad[/hi] - Remember, recall (verb, past tense)

[hi]kari[/hi] - Did/made (past tense of the verb [hi]karna[/hi] - to do/make). Key concept is tense.

English: He recalled the story of his childhood.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne apne bachpan di kahani yaad kari[/hi].

The next word is cross. English: The bird crossed the street.

Punjabi: [hi]Chidiya sadak nu paar kih gayi.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Chidiya[/hi] - Bird (feminine)

[hi]sadak[/hi] - Street (feminine)

[hi]nu[/hi] - To (marks direction, used with verbs of motion)

[hi]paar[/hi] - Across

[hi]kih[/hi] - Did (past tense marker for verbs)

[hi]gayi[/hi] - Went (past tense of [hi]jana[/hi] - to go, feminine)

Key concepts:

The Punjabi language uses gender agreement. The bird and street are both feminine, so the past tense marker ([hi]kih[/hi]) and the past tense of [hi]jana[/hi] ([hi]gayi[/hi]) are also feminine.

The [hi]nu[/hi] particle is used before nouns when referring to a destination.

Translation: The bird crossed the street.

The next word is sense. English: He has a good sense of humor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਵਧੀਆ [hi]ਹਾਸੇ [hi]ਦਾ [hi]ਸਮਝ [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ [hi]: to him/her

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ [hi]: good

[hi]ਹਾਸੇ [hi]: humor

[hi]ਦਾ [hi]: of

[hi]ਸਮਝ [hi]: sense

[hi]ਹੈ [hi]: is

Key concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ [hi] is a possessive particle, similar to “of” in English.

[hi]ਸਮਝ [hi] is a noun that refers to understanding or perception.

English: He has a good sense of humor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਵਧੀਆ [hi]ਹਾਸੇ [hi]ਦਾ [hi]ਸਮਝ [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is engage. English: The students engaged in a lively debate about the importance of preserving Punjabi culture.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਨੇ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸੱਭਿਆਚਾਰ ਨੂੰ ਸੰਭਾਲਣ ਦੇ ਮਹੱਤਵ ਬਾਰੇ ਜੋਸ਼ੀਲੀ ਬਹਿਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਹਿੱਸਾ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] (vidyaarthiyaan) - Students (plural)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] (ne) - have, indicates a past action, is used to connect the subject with the verb

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] (panjabi) - Punjabi

[hi]ਸੱਭਿਆਚਾਰ[/hi] (sabhyaachar) - culture

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] (nu) - to, indicates direction

[hi]ਸੰਭਾਲਣ[/hi] (sanbhaalan) - to preserve, to maintain

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] (de) - of, belongs to

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵ[/hi] (mahattav) - importance

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] (baare) - about, concerning

[hi]ਜੋਸ਼ੀਲੀ[/hi] (joshili) - lively, spirited

[hi]ਬਹਿਸ[/hi] (bahis) - debate

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (vich) - in, inside

[hi]ਹਿੱਸਾ[/hi] (hissa) - part, share

[hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] (lya) - took, past tense of the verb "ਲੈਣਾ" (laina) which means to take

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] (ne) is a marker that indicates a past action and is used when the subject is plural.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] (nu) is used to indicate direction, similar to the English "to".

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] (de) is used to show possession or belonging.

English: The students engaged in a lively debate about the importance of preserving Punjabi culture.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਨੇ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸੱਭਿਆਚਾਰ ਨੂੰ ਸੰਭਾਲਣ ਦੇ ਮਹੱਤਵ ਬਾਰੇ ਜੋਸ਼ੀਲੀ ਬਹਿਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਹਿੱਸਾ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is apparently. English: Apparently, he is a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜਾਪਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] ਕਿ ਉਹ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਹੈ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜਾਪਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]japda hai[/hi] means "appears to be" or "apparently". It is in the present tense.

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] [hi]ki[/hi] is a conjunction, meaning "that".

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] [hi]oh[/hi] means "he"

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] [hi]daktar[/hi] means "doctor".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] is the verb "to be" in the present tense.

English: Apparently, he is a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜਾਪਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] ਕਿ ਉਹ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਹੈ।

The next word is research. English: He did research on the history of the Sikh religion.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne Sikh dharam di history te research kiti[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - he/him/she/her - This is the subject of the sentence. Note: this word can be used for all of these pronouns.

[hi]ne[/hi] - This is a postposition that indicates the subject of the action. The use of this postposition is dependent on the verb and subject of the sentence.

[hi]Sikh dharam di[/hi] - This is the object of the sentence. It is literally "of the Sikh religion," but since it is followed by a noun that is the topic of the research, it functions as an adjective that modifies "history."

[hi]history[/hi] - This is the noun that is being researched.

[hi]te[/hi] - This postposition is used to indicate that an action is done on something. In this instance, research is being done on the history of the Sikh religion.

[hi]research[/hi] - This is the verb in the sentence. The verb is in the past tense.

[hi]kiti[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]karna[/hi] which means "to do" or "to make." It is used with the postposition [hi]ne[/hi] and indicates that the subject of the sentence did the action of the verb.

Key concept: The use of the postposition [hi]ne[/hi] is dependent on the verb and subject of the sentence.

The next word is outside. English: The cat is outside.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਬਾਹਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] - [hi]billi[/hi] - means "cat"

[hi]ਬਾਹਰ[/hi] - [hi]baahar[/hi] - means "outside"

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - means "is"

The sentence structure is "Subject - Adverb - Verb"

The subject is [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] - the cat

The adverb is [hi]ਬਾਹਰ[/hi] - outside

The verb is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is

This sentence demonstrates the use of a simple present tense verb in Punjabi.

The next word is I. English: I am a university professor.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰੋਫੈਸਰ ਹਾਂ। [hi]main university da professor han[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "I." You will see it often, as it is a core word in any sentence where the speaker is the subject.

[hi]ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "university." This is a good word to learn if you plan on going to a university.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi]: This is a possessive particle that means "of" or "belonging to." This is a really common word and is usually added after nouns.

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਫੈਸਰ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "professor." This is a good word to learn if you are interested in academia.

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "am." You will often see it at the end of sentences to indicate a statement of fact about yourself.

Key concept: This sentence demonstrates a simple grammatical construction in Punjabi. It follows the subject-verb-object pattern common to many languages. The subject "[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi]" is followed by the verb "[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi]" and then the object phrase "[hi]ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰੋਫੈਸਰ[/hi]".

The next word is totally. English: He totally forgot about the meeting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਬਾਰੇ ਬਿਲਕੁਲ ਭੁੱਲ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ[/hi] - Meeting

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - About (postposition)

[hi]ਬਿਲਕੁਲ[/hi] - Totally (adverb)

[hi]ਭੁੱਲ[/hi] - Forget (verb stem)

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - Went (past tense of verb "ਜਾਣਾ")

This sentence uses the past tense of the verb "ਜਾਣਾ" ([hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi]) which is "ਗਿਆ" ([hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi]) and is attached to the verb "ਭੁੱਲ" ([hi]ਭੁੱਲ[/hi]) to create the past tense of "forgot".

The word "[hi]ਬਿਲਕੁਲ[/hi]" is an adverb that intensifies the verb "forgot" meaning he "totally" forgot about the meeting.

English: He totally forgot about the meeting.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਬਾਰੇ ਬਿਲਕੁਲ ਭੁੱਲ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is secretary. English: The secretary is writing a letter.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਕੱਤਰ ਇੱਕ ਪੱਤਰ ਲਿਖ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਕੱਤਰ[/hi] (sakktar) - means "secretary". This is a noun and is in the subject position of the sentence.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] (ikk) - means "one" or "a" and is used before the noun [hi]ਪੱਤਰ[/hi] to indicate one letter.

[hi]ਪੱਤਰ[/hi] (patthar) - means "letter" and is the object of the verb [hi]ਲਿਖ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

[hi]ਲਿਖ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] (likh raha hai) - means "is writing" and is the present continuous tense of the verb [hi]ਲਿਖਣਾ[/hi] (likhna) which means "to write". The present continuous tense is used to indicate that the action is ongoing.

Note:

The word order is Subject-Object-Verb, which is the typical word order in Punjabi.

The [hi]है[/hi] (hai) ending of the verb [hi]ਲਿਖ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] (likh raha hai) indicates the masculine singular form.

This sentence uses the present continuous tense, which is used to indicate an ongoing action.

English: The secretary is writing a letter.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਕੱਤਰ ਇੱਕ ਪੱਤਰ ਲਿਖ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is actual. English: This is the actual book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eਹ [hi]asli [hi]kitaab [hi]hai.

Breakdown:

[hi]Eਹ [hi] - This is a demonstrative pronoun, indicating "this."

[hi]asli [hi] - The word "actual" is translated as [hi]asli [hi], which means "real" or "genuine."

[hi]kitaab [hi] - The noun "book" is translated as [hi]kitaab [hi].

[hi]hai [hi] - The verb "is" is translated as [hi]hai [hi]. This is the present tense of the verb "to be" in Punjabi.

Key Concepts:

Demonstrative Pronoun: [hi]Eਹ [hi] is used to point out a specific item (in this case, "this book").

Noun: [hi]kitaab [hi] represents the object being discussed.

Adjective: [hi]asli [hi] modifies the noun [hi]kitaab [hi] to indicate its specific quality.

Verb: [hi]hai [hi] connects the subject and predicate of the sentence.

English: This is the actual book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eਹ [hi]asli [hi]kitaab [hi]hai.

The next word is answer. Please provide an English word for me to create a Punjabi sentence with. I will then provide a breakdown of the sentence, including the English translation, grammar, and key concepts.

The next word is follow. English: She follows me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਰੇ ਪਿੱਛੇ ਪਿੱਛੇ ਚੱਲਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - She. This is a pronoun.

[hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] - My. This is a possessive adjective.

[hi]ਪਿੱਛੇ[/hi] - Behind. This is a postposition.

[hi]ਪਿੱਛੇ[/hi] - Behind. This is a postposition.

[hi]ਚੱਲਦੀ[/hi] - Walking. This is a verb. It is in the present tense and the feminine singular form.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is. This is a verb. It is the present tense singular form of the verb "to be." This is the third person singular present tense form of the verb "to be". In English, we would use the verb "is", but in Punjabi, we use the verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

Key Concepts:

The order of words in Punjabi sentences can vary, but the verb usually comes at the end.

Postpositions are words that come after the noun they modify. They are similar to prepositions in English.

The verb "to be" in Punjabi is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi]. In English, it is "is."

English: She follows me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਰੇ ਪਿੱਛੇ ਪਿੱਛੇ ਚੱਲਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is else. English: He went to the market, else he would have starved.

Punjabi: [hi] ऊਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ, ਨਹੀਂ ਤਾਂ ਉਹ ਭੁੱਖਾ ਮਰ ਜਾਂਦਾ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ऊਹ[/hi] - He (pronoun)

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - Market (noun)

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - went (verb)

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - not (adverb)

[hi]ਤਾਂ[/hi] - then (conjunction)

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (pronoun)

[hi]ਭੁੱਖਾ[/hi] - hungry (adjective)

[hi]ਮਰ[/hi] - die (verb)

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - would have (auxiliary verb)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ ਤਾਂ[/hi] - This is a common Punjabi phrase that translates to "else" or "otherwise". It is used to express a conditional consequence.

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - This is the past continuous tense of the verb "to go" and is used in this sentence to express a hypothetical situation that would have happened if the subject hadn't gone to the market.

English Translation: He went to the market, else he would have starved.

The next word is big. English: The house is big.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਵੱਡਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - [hi]ghar[/hi] - house

[hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] - [hi]vadḍā[/hi] - big

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

The word order of Punjabi is subject-object-verb (SOV), so the sentence structure is "house big is".

The ending [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a grammatical marker that indicates that the sentence is in the present tense. The [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is similar to the English "is". This ending is attached to the noun which it describes, in this case, [hi]ਘਰ[/hi] which is the subject of the sentence.

This sentence highlights the use of the adjective [hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] to describe the size of the house. This is a simple example of describing a noun in Punjabi.

The next word is more. English: He has more books than me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਦੇ ਕੋਲ ਮੇਰੇ ਨਾਲੋਂ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਦੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun for "his/her," indicating that the books belong to him/her.

[hi]ਕੋਲ[/hi] - This word means "with," and indicates possession. So, it signifies that the books are "with" him/her.

[hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun for "my"

[hi]ਨਾਲੋਂ[/hi] - This is the word for "than," indicating comparison.

[hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ[/hi] - This word means "more."

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the word for "books."

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - This is the present tense verb meaning "are."

Important concepts:

The use of possessive pronouns ([hi]ਉਹਦੇ[/hi], [hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi]) to show ownership.

The use of the word [hi]ਕੋਲ[/hi] to indicate possession.

The use of the word [hi]ਨਾਲੋਂ[/hi] to make comparisons.

The structure of a comparative sentence in Punjabi.

English: He has more books than me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਦੇ ਕੋਲ ਮੇਰੇ ਨਾਲੋਂ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is good. English: This is a good book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh [hi] [hi]kitab[hi] [hi]vadiya[hi] [hi]hai[hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]kitab[hi] - book (feminine noun)

[hi]vadiya[hi] - good (adjective)

[hi]hai[hi] - is (verb, present tense, singular)

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses a different word order than English.

Punjabi is a gendered language, so the gender of nouns affects the grammar.

In this example, the adjective [hi]vadiya[hi] comes after the noun [hi]kitab[hi], which is typical for Punjabi.

English: This is a good book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh [hi] [hi]kitab[hi] [hi]vadiya[hi] [hi]hai[hi].

The next word is come. English: Please come here.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਇੱਥੇ ਆਓ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਰਪਾ[/hi] [hi]ਕਰਕੇ[/hi]: Please (polite request)

[hi]ਇੱਥੇ[/hi]: Here

[hi]ਆਓ[/hi]: Come (imperative, polite form, used for addressing someone with respect)

Key concepts:

[hi]ਕਿਰਪਾ[/hi] [hi]ਕਰਕੇ[/hi]: This is a common way to make a polite request in Punjabi. It is similar to saying "please" in English.

[hi]ਆਓ[/hi]: This is the imperative form of the verb "to come," used when giving a command or making a request. The polite form is used when addressing someone with respect.

English: Please come here.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਇੱਥੇ ਆਓ[/hi]

The next word is fresh. English: The fruit is fresh.

Punjabi: [hi]ਫਲ ਤਾਜ਼ਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਫਲ[/hi] - [hi]phal[/hi] - fruit. This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਤਾਜ਼ਾ[/hi] - [hi]taaza[/hi] - fresh. This is the adjective describing the fruit.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is. This is the present tense of the verb "to be".

This sentence demonstrates the basic structure of a simple Punjabi sentence: subject + adjective + verb.

The word [hi]ਤਾਜ਼ਾ[/hi] is important to remember because it can also mean "new" or "recent" in Punjabi. So, you could use this word to describe new clothes or recent events.

English: The fruit is fresh.

Punjabi: [hi]ਫਲ ਤਾਜ਼ਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is comment. English: She commented on the movie.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne film te comment kiya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi] is a pronoun meaning "she".

[hi]film[/hi] is the noun, meaning "movie".

[hi]te[/hi] is the preposition, meaning "on". It is used to indicate something is being done to something else.

[hi]comment[/hi] is the verb, meaning "commented".

[hi]kiya[/hi] is the past tense of the verb "to do". It is used to indicate that the action happened in the past.

Key concept: The structure of this sentence follows a typical subject-verb-object pattern. The subject "she" is followed by the verb "commented" and then the object "on the movie." The word "te" is important to understand the preposition "on".

Translation: She commented on the movie.

The next word is climb. English: The children climbed the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਦਰੱਖਤ ਉੱਤੇ ਚੜ੍ਹ ਗਏ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi] - [hi]bacche[/hi] - This is the plural form of the word for child, [hi]ਬੱਚਾ[/hi] [hi]baccha[/hi].

[hi]ਦਰੱਖਤ[/hi] - [hi]darakht[/hi] - This word means tree.

[hi]ਉੱਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]utte[/hi] - This is a postposition that indicates location "on" or "upon"

[hi]ਚੜ੍ਹ[/hi] - [hi]charh[/hi] - This verb means to climb. It is in the past tense, so it is conjugated with the suffix [hi]ਗਏ[/hi] [hi]gae[/hi].

The full sentence is literally "Children tree on climbed went" which translates to "The children climbed the tree."

The next word is tire. English: I am tired.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਥਕਾਵਟ ਹੋ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative form of the pronoun "[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi]" (I) in Punjabi and means "to me" or "for me".

[hi]ਥਕਾਵਟ[/hi] - This is the noun for "tiredness".

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be".

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to be".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the singular present tense form of the verb "to be".

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the dative case of the pronoun to emphasize the effect of the tiredness on the speaker.

The use of the present continuous tense emphasizes the ongoing nature of the tiredness.

English: I am tired.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਥਕਾਵਟ ਹੋ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is day. English: It's a beautiful day.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj ikk khoobsurat din hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - today

[hi]ikk[/hi] - one (used here as a quantifier, similar to "a")

[hi]khoobsurat[/hi] - beautiful

[hi]din[/hi] - day

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concept: [hi]Ajj[/hi] is used for "today" and [hi]din[/hi] is used for "day" in Punjabi. The sentence follows the standard subject-verb-object structure.

The next word is member. English: He is a member of our team.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਾਡੀ ਟੀਮ ਦਾ ਮੈਂਬਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She (pronoun) - This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਸਾਡੀ[/hi] - Our (possessive adjective) - This word shows possession and modifies the noun [hi]ਟੀਮ[/hi].

[hi]ਟੀਮ[/hi] - Team (noun) - The noun that is being modified by the possessive adjective.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - Of the (possessive particle) - This word links the possessive adjective to the noun [hi]ਟੀਮ[/hi].

[hi]ਮੈਂਬਰ[/hi] - Member (noun) - This is the noun that the subject is linked to by the verb.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (verb) - This is the present tense form of the verb 'to be', which links the subject to the object.

Key concepts:

Punjabi is an agglutinative language, which means that words are formed by adding suffixes and prefixes to a root word.

The word order in Punjabi is typically subject-object-verb (SOV).

There is no grammatical gender in Punjabi, so the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] can be used for both 'he' and 'she'.

Punjabi has a complex system of possessive particles, which are used to indicate ownership.

This sentence showcases the basic structure of a Punjabi sentence and some of the key grammatical features of the language. The use of the possessive adjective and particle demonstrates how ownership is expressed in Punjabi.

The next word is pass. English: He passed the exam.

Punjabi: ਉਸਨੇ ਇਮਤਿਹਾਨ ਪਾਸ ਕੀਤਾ।

[hi]usne imtihan paas kita[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]usne[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun in the past tense, meaning "he."

[hi]imtihan[/hi] - This means "exam."

[hi]paas[/hi] - This means "to pass."

[hi]kita[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do."

Key concepts:

This sentence demonstrates the use of the past tense in Punjabi.

You can substitute different words for "exam" and the sentence will still be grammatically correct.

Translation: He passed the exam.

The next word is attend. English: He attends the university every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It (masculine singular)

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - [hi]har[/hi] - Every

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]roz[/hi] - Day

[hi]ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ[/hi] - [hi]yuneevarsity[/hi] - University

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - In/At/To

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]jaanda[/hi] - Goes (masculine singular present tense)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - Is (masculine singular present tense, used for stating a fact)

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence follows the Subject-Verb-Object word order, similar to English.

The use of [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] at the end of the sentence signifies that the action of going to the university is a routine or habitual activity.

The word [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] is a versatile preposition that can mean "in," "at," or "to" depending on the context.

The verb [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]jaanda[/hi] changes to [hi]ਜਾਂਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]jaandi[/hi] if the subject is feminine.

English: He attends the university every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is fact. English: It is a fact that the sun rises in the east.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਸੱਚ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਸੂਰਜ ਪੂਰਬ ਵੱਲੋਂ ਨਿਕਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] = This

[hi]ਸੱਚ[/hi] = Truth, fact

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] = is

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] = that

[hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] = Sun

[hi]ਪੂਰਬ[/hi] = East

[hi]ਵੱਲੋਂ[/hi] = From

[hi]ਨਿਕਲਦਾ[/hi] = Rises

This sentence demonstrates the use of the conjunction [hi]ਕਿ[/hi] which means 'that' and links the subject [hi]ਇਹ[/hi] with the predicate that follows it. It also shows the common use of the postposition [hi]ਵੱਲੋਂ[/hi] to indicate direction.

The next word is nearly. English: He nearly missed the bus.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬੱਸ ਤੋਂ ਛੋਟਾ ਜਿਹਾ ਯਾਦ ਆ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He, She, It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਬੱਸ[/hi] - [hi]bas[/hi] - Bus

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] - From

[hi]ਛੋਟਾ ਜਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]chhotaa jihaa[/hi] - nearly, almost, a little

[hi]ਯਾਦ[/hi] - [hi]yaad[/hi] - Remember (verb stem)

[hi]ਆ[/hi] - [hi]aa[/hi] - To come (verb stem)

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]gya[/hi] - Past tense marker for masculine singular subjects

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਛੋਟਾ ਜਿਹਾ[/hi] is a common way to express "nearly" or "almost" in Punjabi. It literally translates to "small bit."

[hi]ਯਾਦ ਆ ਗਿਆ[/hi] is a common idiom meaning "to be forgotten." This is a past tense verb form, meaning it happened in the past.

English: He nearly missed the bus.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬੱਸ ਤੋਂ ਛੋਟਾ ਜਿਹਾ ਯਾਦ ਆ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is bear. English: The bear is sleeping in the cave.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਿੱਛ ਗੁਫ਼ਾ ਵਿੱਚ ਸੌਂ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰਿੱਛ[/hi] - [hi]richh[/hi] - Bear

[hi]ਗੁਫ਼ਾ[/hi] - [hi]gufaa[/hi] - Cave

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - In

[hi]ਸੌਂ[/hi] - [hi]saun[/hi] - Sleeping

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]rihaa[/hi] - Is

Key Concepts:

- [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - This is a postposition that indicates location. Think of it as "in" or "within".

- [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]rihaa[/hi] - This is a suffix that indicates a continuous action in the present tense. In this case, the bear is continuously sleeping.

English: The bear is sleeping in the cave.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਿੱਛ ਗੁਫ਼ਾ ਵਿੱਚ ਸੌਂ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is female. English: She is a female doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਔਰਤ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - "She" - This is the subject pronoun.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - "a" - This is the indefinite article.

[hi]ਔਰਤ[/hi] - "female" - This is the noun. This is the "feminine" word for "person" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] - "doctor" - This is the noun that describes the person.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - "is" - This is the present tense verb.

Key concepts:

Punjabi is a gendered language. There are masculine and feminine forms for words that are gendered. Here, the word for female is [hi]ਔਰਤ[/hi]. The masculine form of this word is [hi]ਆਦਮੀ[/hi].

Punjabi word order follows the standard subject-verb-object structure.

Punjabi uses articles similar to English.

English: She is a female doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਔਰਤ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is simple. English: This is a simple task.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh ek sadā kaam hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This

[hi]ek[/hi] - a, one

[hi]sadā[/hi] - simple

[hi]kaam[/hi] - task, work

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

This sentence demonstrates the basic structure of a Punjabi sentence. The subject ([hi]Eh[/hi] - this) comes first, followed by the object ([hi]kaam[/hi] - task), then the adjective ([hi]sadā[/hi] - simple), and finally the verb ([hi]hai[/hi] - is). [hi]ek[/hi] - a/one is used to indicate that there is only one task.

This is a great starting point to learn the basic elements of Punjabi grammar!

The next word is since. English: Since it is cold, we will stay inside.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਉਂਕਿ ਠੰਡ ਹੈ, ਅਸੀਂ ਘਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਹਾਂਗੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਉਂਕਿ[/hi] - This word means "because" or "since" and introduces a reason for the following statement.

[hi]ਠੰਡ[/hi] - This word means "coldness" or "cold weather."

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in Punjabi, indicating that the weather is cold at the present time.

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - This means "we."

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - This means "home" or "house."

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This preposition means "in" or "inside."

[hi]ਰਹਾਂਗੇ[/hi] - This is the future tense form of the verb "to stay." It implies that the action will take place in the future.

Key Concepts:

Prepositions - Punjabi uses prepositions like [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] just like English.

Tense - There is a future tense in Punjabi ([hi]ਰਹਾਂਗੇ[/hi]), which is different from the present tense ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi]).

Conjunctions - A conjunction like [hi]ਕਿਉਂਕਿ[/hi] links clauses together and creates a cause-and-effect relationship.

English: Since it is cold, we will stay inside.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਉਂਕਿ ਠੰਡ ਹੈ, ਅਸੀਂ ਘਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਹਾਂਗੇ।[/hi]

The next word is conduct. English: He conducted the research project.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਖੋਜ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਦਾ ਸੰਚਾਲਨ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਖੋਜ[/hi] - research

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ[/hi] - project

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਸੰਚਾਲਨ[/hi] - conduct (verb)

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi] - did (past tense verb)

This sentence uses the past tense of the verb "to conduct," which is [hi]ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi] The word [hi]ਸੰਚਾਲਨ[/hi] is the noun form of the verb "to conduct." This sentence uses the possessive particle [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] to show that the research project belongs to the subject pronoun. The word order is subject-verb-object, which is a common word order in Punjabi.

English: He conducted the research project.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਖੋਜ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਦਾ ਸੰਚਾਲਨ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is large. English: The house is large.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਵੱਡਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - Ghar - This means house. It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] - Vadda - This means large, and it is the adjective describing the house.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Hai - This is the verb "to be" in the present tense, and is used to link the subject and the adjective.

Key concept: The Punjabi language uses postpositions (words that follow the noun) to indicate the relationship between words. Here, [hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] comes after [hi]ਘਰ[/hi] to show that the house is large.

English: The house is large.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਵੱਡਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is red. English: The red rose is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲਾਲ ਗੁਲਾਬ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲਾਲ[/hi] means "red" and is an adjective. Adjectives modify nouns (the things in the sentence that are people, places, or things).

[hi]ਗੁਲਾਬ[/hi] means "rose" and is a noun.

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] means "beautiful" and is also an adjective, modifying the noun [hi]ਗੁਲਾਬ[/hi].

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] means "is" and is a verb. Verbs are the words that show action or state of being. In this sentence, it indicates the state of being.

Key Concepts:

Adjectives are words that describe or modify nouns.

Nouns are words that name people, places, things, or ideas.

Verbs are words that show action or state of being.

The sentence is in the present tense and is a simple declarative sentence. It tells us that the rose is beautiful.

English: The red rose is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲਾਲ ਗੁਲਾਬ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is active. English: She is an active member of the club.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਲੱਬ ਦੀ ਇੱਕ ਸਰਗਰਮ ਮੈਂਬਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - She

[hi]ਕਲੱਬ[/hi] - Club

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of the (possessive marker)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - One, a

[hi]ਸਰਗਰਮ[/hi] - Active

[hi]ਮੈਂਬਰ[/hi] - Member

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a possessive marker, indicating belonging to the club.

[hi]ਸਰਗਰਮ[/hi] is an adjective describing the member's activity level.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is the present tense verb "is."

This sentence demonstrates the use of the possessive marker [hi]ਦੀ[/hi], the adjective [hi]ਸਰਗਰਮ[/hi], and the present tense verb [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

English: She is an active member of the club.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਲੱਬ ਦੀ ਇੱਕ ਸਰਗਰਮ ਮੈਂਬਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is trip. English: We went on a trip to the mountains.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਪਹਾੜਾਂ ਤੇ ਯਾਤਰਾ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਪਹਾੜਾਂ[/hi] - Mountains (plural noun)

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - to (preposition)

[hi]ਯਾਤਰਾ[/hi] - trip, journey (noun)

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - did (verb, past tense)

Key concepts:

The Punjabi word for "trip" is [hi]ਯਾਤਰਾ[/hi], which is a common word used for any type of journey.

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] is a very versatile preposition that can mean "on," "to," or "at" depending on the context.

The sentence structure is straightforward: subject (we) + verb (did) + object (trip) + preposition (to) + location (mountains).

English: We went on a trip to the mountains.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਪਹਾੜਾਂ ਤੇ ਯਾਤਰਾ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is out. English: She went out.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਹਰ ਗਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - This is the pronoun "she" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਬਾਹਰ[/hi] - [hi]baahar[/hi] - This means "out" in Punjabi. It's an adverb that describes where the action is happening.

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - [hi]gai[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to go". It literally means "went" in Punjabi.

Key concept: The use of [hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - [hi]gai[/hi] is a great example of how Punjabi verbs change form based on gender and tense. This is a key concept to understand in Punjabi grammar.

English: She went out.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਹਰ ਗਈ।[/hi]

The next word is what. English: What is your name?

Punjabi: [hi]Tuhada naam ki hai?[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Tuhada[/hi] - This is the polite form of "your", used to show respect. It is derived from "aap" (you) and "ada" (your).

[hi]naam[/hi] - This means "name".

[hi]ki[/hi] - This is a conjunction similar to "what" in English, and indicates a question.

[hi]hai?[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be", similar to "is" or "are" in English.

Key concepts:

This sentence uses the polite form "tuhada" to address the listener with respect.

The question word "[hi]ki[/hi]" is used to form a question.

The sentence structure follows the subject-verb-object pattern.

English: What is your name?

Punjabi: [hi]Tuhada naam ki hai?[/hi]

The next word is wind. English: The wind is blowing hard today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj hawa tezi naal chaldi hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - This means "today" and is a common word in Punjabi.

[hi]hawa[/hi] - This is the word for "wind."

[hi]tezi[/hi] - This means "speed" or "force."

[hi]naal[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "with" or "by."

[hi]chaldi[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to move" or "to blow," meaning "is blowing."

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be," meaning "is."

Key Concepts:

Present Tense: The sentence uses the present tense to describe an action happening now.

Prepositions: The preposition "[hi]naal[/hi]" is crucial for expressing the idea of the wind blowing with force.

Word Order: Punjabi word order is generally Subject-Verb-Object, similar to English.

Translation: Today the wind is blowing with force.

The next word is proposal. English: He proposed to her.

Punjabi: ਉਸਨੇ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਵਿਆਹ ਲਈ ਪ੍ਰਪੋਜ਼ ਕੀਤਾ। [hi]usne usnu viyah lai prapoz kita.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]usne[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine form of the pronoun "he". It is a subject pronoun, meaning that it is the doer of the action.

[hi]usnu[/hi] - This is the third person singular feminine form of the pronoun "her". It is an object pronoun, meaning that it is the receiver of the action. In this case, it is the person being proposed to.

[hi]viyah[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "marriage". It is used in this case to specify the type of proposal.

[hi]lai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "for". It is used to show the purpose of the proposal.

[hi]prapoz[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "proposed" and is a verb.

[hi]kita[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do", which in this case means "proposed".

Memorization:

You can memorize this sentence by thinking of the actions involved in a proposal. The man proposes, the woman receives the proposal, and the purpose of the proposal is marriage.

The word [hi]prapoz[/hi] is similar to the English word "propose".

Translation:

He proposed to her. = [hi]usne usnu viyah lai prapoz kita.[/hi]

The next word is coach. English: The coach is training the team.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੋਚ ਟੀਮ ਨੂੰ ਸਿਖਲਾਈ ਦੇ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੋਚ[/hi] (coach) is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਟੀਮ[/hi] (team) is the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] (to) is a preposition that shows the direction of the action.

[hi]ਸਿਖਲਾਈ[/hi] (training) is the action being performed.

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] (give) is a verb used in the present continuous tense.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] (is) is an auxiliary verb used to form the present continuous tense.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is) is an auxiliary verb used to form the present continuous tense.

Key concepts:

The present continuous tense is formed with the verb [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] (give) + [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] (is) + [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is).

The preposition [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] (to) is used to show the direction of the action.

English: The coach is training the team.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੋਚ ਟੀਮ ਨੂੰ ਸਿਖਲਾਈ ਦੇ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is walk. English: He walks to school every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਸਕੂਲ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - Every

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] - Day

[hi]ਸਕੂਲ[/hi] - School

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - Goes (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (present tense, affirmative)

Key Concepts:

Gender agreement: In Punjabi, verbs change based on the gender of the subject. Since "he" is masculine, the verb "goes" is [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] which is the masculine form.

Word order: Punjabi follows a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) word order, similar to English.

Tense: The sentence is in the present tense.

English: He walks to school every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਸਕੂਲ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is so. English: So, she is going to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਲਈ, ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ ਲਈ[/hi] - means "so" and is used to introduce a consequence or result.

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - means "she"

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - means "market"

[hi]ਜਾ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ[/hi] - means "is going" and is the present continuous tense of the verb "to go".

This sentence is grammatically correct and uses the appropriate Punjabi words and conjugation to convey the meaning of "So, she is going to the market."

The next word is over. English: The sun is over the mountains.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੂਰਜ ਪਹਾੜਾਂ ਉੱਪਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] - [hi]sooraj[/hi] - sun

[hi]ਪਹਾੜਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]pahaṛāṁ[/hi] - mountains (plural)

[hi]ਉੱਪਰ[/hi] - [hi]uppar[/hi] - over, above

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਉੱਪਰ[/hi] ([hi]uppar[/hi]) is a postposition, meaning it comes after the noun it modifies. In this case, it modifies [hi]ਪਹਾੜਾਂ[/hi] ([hi]pahaṛāṁ[/hi]).

This sentence demonstrates the use of the simple present tense in Punjabi, formed by using the verb "to be" ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi]) followed by the noun.

English: The sun is over the mountains.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੂਰਜ ਪਹਾੜਾਂ ਉੱਪਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is bad. English: This food is bad.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh khana bura hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

- [hi]Eh[/hi] is a demonstrative pronoun meaning "this"

- [hi]khana[/hi] is the word for "food"

- [hi]bura[/hi] is an adjective meaning "bad"

- [hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense of the verb "to be"

This sentence demonstrates the use of a simple adjective to describe a noun. The grammatical structure is very similar to English.

The next word is for. English: He is going for a walk.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਟਹਿਲਣ ਜਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਟਹਿਲਣ[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb "to walk".

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to go".

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to be".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to be", used as a sentence ending particle.

Key concepts:

Punjabi verbs have different forms depending on the tense and the subject.

The present continuous tense is formed using the verb "to be" plus the present participle of the main verb.

Sentence ending particles are used to indicate the end of a sentence.

This sentence can be translated using espeak-ng as: "Oh, tehlan ja reha hai."

The next word is drive. English: He drove the car to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne gaaड़ी bazaar nu laayi[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has, have, did, does (particle used to indicate action, similar to English "did" or "has")

[hi]gaaड़ी[/hi] - car

[hi]bazaar[/hi] - market

[hi]nu[/hi] - to, towards

[hi]laayi[/hi] - drove, took, brought (verb - past tense)

Key Concepts:

Particles: Punjabi utilizes particles like [hi]ne[/hi] to indicate the tense of a verb.

Direct Object: The direct object ([hi]gaaड़ी[/hi] - car) is placed before the preposition ([hi]nu[/hi] - to).

Preposition: Prepositions in Punjabi are similar to English, but they may have different forms depending on the context.

Word order: The sentence follows the structure Subject (He) + Particle (did) + Object (car) + Preposition (to) + Destination (market)

English: He drove the car to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne gaaड़ी bazaar nu laayi[/hi]

The next word is wife. English: She is my wife.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਰੀ ਪਤਨੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]oh[/hi] - means "she"

[hi]ਮੇਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]meri[/hi] - means "my"

[hi]ਪਤਨੀ[/hi] - [hi]patni[/hi] - means "wife"

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - means "is"

Key Concept: The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb, unlike English which is subject-verb-object. In this sentence the subject is [hi]ਉਹ[/hi], the object is [hi]ਪਤਨੀ[/hi] and the verb is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

English: She is my wife.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਰੀ ਪਤਨੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is like. English: He likes to eat mangoes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਆਮ [hi] ਖਾਣਾ ਪਸੰਦ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ [hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ [hi] (he/she/it) and means "to him/her/it".

[hi]ਆਮ [hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "mango".

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ [hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb "to eat".

[hi]ਪਸੰਦ [hi] - This is the word for "like" and it follows the object of liking.

[hi]ਹੈ [hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be".

The sentence is constructed in the following way:

Subject + Dative Case of Pronoun + Object + Verb (to like) + Verb (to be)

This sentence structure is common in Punjabi for expressing liking or disliking something.

The next word is deal. English: They made a deal.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਸੌਦਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ[/hi] - They (plural, masculine/feminine)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - have (past tense marker)

[hi]ਸੌਦਾ[/hi] - deal

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - did (past tense of verb "ਕਰਨਾ" - to do)

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the past tense.

The word [hi]ਸੌਦਾ[/hi] is a noun and is in the singular form.

The sentence structure is subject-verb-object.

English: They made a deal.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਸੌਦਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is process. English: The process of making bread is long and complex.

Punjabi: [hi]Roti banaune di prakirya lambi te mushkil hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Roti[/hi] - bread

[hi]banaune[/hi] - to make

[hi]di[/hi] - of

[hi]prakirya[/hi] - process

[hi]lambi[/hi] - long

[hi]te[/hi] - and

[hi]mushkil[/hi] - difficult/complex

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi word for "process" is [hi]prakirya[/hi].

The postposition [hi]di[/hi] is used to show possession or relation (in this case, "of").

The conjunction [hi]te[/hi] means "and".

Memorization Tip:

Think of the word "process" as a "procedure" or "way of doing something". This will help you connect the English word to the Punjabi word [hi]prakirya[/hi].

The next word is senior. English: He is a senior citizen.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਸੀਨੀਅਰ ਨਾਗਰਿਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - he/she/it

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a/an

[hi]ਸੀਨੀਅਰ[/hi] - [hi]seenyaar[/hi] - senior

[hi]ਨਾਗਰਿਕ[/hi] - [hi]naagrik[/hi] - citizen

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨਾਗਰਿਕ[/hi] ([hi]naagrik[/hi]) is a key word for "citizen" in Punjabi. It is a noun that can be used in many contexts.

[hi]ਸੀਨੀਅਰ[/hi] ([hi]seenyaar[/hi]) is an adjective that can be used to describe someone who is older or has a higher rank.

The sentence uses the present tense form of the verb "to be" ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi]) to indicate that the subject is a senior citizen.

The next word is decrease. English: The price of vegetables has decreased.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਬਜ਼ੀਆਂ ਦੀਆਂ ਕੀਮਤਾਂ ਘਟ ਗਈਆਂ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਬਜ਼ੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]sabziyaan[/hi] - vegetables (plural)

[hi]ਦੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]diyaan[/hi] - of (possessive marker for plural nouns)

[hi]ਕੀਮਤਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]qimetaan[/hi] - prices (plural)

[hi]ਘਟ[/hi] - [hi]ghạt[/hi] - to decrease

[hi]ਗਈਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]gaiyaan[/hi] - went (past tense of verb [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]jaana[/hi] - to go)

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]han[/hi] - are (present tense of verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]hona[/hi] - to be)

Key concepts:

Pluralization: In Punjabi, plurals are often formed by adding [hi]ਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]aan[/hi] to the singular form of a noun, as in [hi]ਸਬਜ਼ੀ[/hi] - [hi]sabzi[/hi] (vegetable) becoming [hi]ਸਬਜ਼ੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]sabziyaan[/hi] (vegetables).

Possessive markers: The word [hi]ਦੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]diyaan[/hi] indicates possession and connects the word for "vegetables" with the word for "prices."

Past tense: The verb [hi]ਗਈਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]gaiyaan[/hi] is in the past tense, indicating that the decrease in prices has already happened.

Present tense: The verb [hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]han[/hi] is in the present tense, emphasizing that the decreased prices are still current.

English: The price of vegetables has decreased.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਬਜ਼ੀਆਂ ਦੀਆਂ ਕੀਮਤਾਂ ਘਟ ਗਈਆਂ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is negative. English: He does not like to eat mangoes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਅੰਬ ਖਾਣਾ ਪਸੰਦ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is a combination of the pronoun "[hi]ਉਹ[/hi]" (he) and the dative marker "[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi]". It means "to him".

[hi]ਅੰਬ[/hi] - Mango

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - To eat. This is a noun, but it functions as an infinitive.

[hi]ਪਸੰਦ[/hi] - To like

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - Not

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is. This is the present tense marker.

Key Concept: This sentence uses the negative particle "[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi]" to indicate that the subject does not like to eat mangoes. It's important to note that the negative particle is placed before the verb, unlike in English where it is typically placed after the auxiliary verb.

Translation: He does not like to eat mangoes.

The next word is simply. English: It's simply beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh bas sunder hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (pronoun, subject)

[hi]bas[/hi] - simply (adverb, modifying "beautiful")

[hi]sundar[/hi] - beautiful (adjective, describing "it")

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (verb, present tense, linking "it" and "beautiful")

The sentence structure is straightforward, with the subject "it" (implied) followed by the adverb "simply" and then the adjective "beautiful." The verb "is" links the subject and adjective.

Key concept: The word [hi]bas[/hi] "simply" is a useful adverb to convey a sense of uncomplicated beauty.

The next word is suffer. English: He suffers from a terrible headache.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਭਿਆਨਕ ਸਿਰ ਦਰਦ ਤੋਂ ਪੀੜਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - This is the pronoun "he" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਭਿਆਨਕ[/hi] - [hi]bhiyanak[/hi] - This means "terrible" or "horrible." It is an adjective modifying the noun "headache."

[hi]ਸਿਰ[/hi] - [hi]sir[/hi] - This means "head." It is a noun.

[hi]ਦਰਦ[/hi] - [hi]dard[/hi] - This means "pain" or "ache." It is a noun.

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "from" or "of." Here it is used to express the source of the pain.

[hi]ਪੀੜਤ[/hi] - [hi]peedit[/hi] - This is an adjective meaning "suffering" or "affected." It describes the state of the subject "he."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - This is the verb "is" or "be" in the present tense. It acts as the main verb of the sentence.

The sentence is in the present tense and describes a state of suffering. Notice how the word order in the Punjabi sentence differs slightly from the English sentence. In Punjabi, the subject usually comes first, followed by the object, then the verb, and then any prepositions or modifiers. Remember, Punjabi has a different word order than English.

The next word is mainly. English: He mainly goes to the market on Saturdays.

Punjabi: [hi]Oh [hi] [hi]shambaraa[hi] [hi]nuu[hi] [hi]oh[hi] [hi]mu[hi] [hi]bazaar[hi] [hi]jaandaa[hi] [hi]hai[hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Oh [hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "he".

[hi]shambaraa[hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "Saturday".

[hi]nuu[hi]: This is a preposition meaning "on". Remember that [hi]nuu[hi] goes AFTER the day of the week.

[hi]oh[hi]: This is another way to say "he".

[hi]mu[hi]: This is a postposition meaning "to".

[hi]bazaar[hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "market".

[hi]jaandaa[hi]: This is the Punjabi verb for "goes".

[hi]hai[hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "is" or "exists" to signify the present tense.

Key Concepts: This sentence uses a common pattern of [hi]day of week[hi] + [hi]nuu[hi] + [hi]place[hi] to say "on" a day of the week. Also note how the verb "goes" is in the present tense.

English: He mainly goes to the market on Saturdays.

Punjabi: [hi]Oh [hi] [hi]shambaraa[hi] [hi]nuu[hi] [hi]oh[hi] [hi]mu[hi] [hi]bazaar[hi] [hi]jaandaa[hi] [hi]hai[hi].

The next word is unit. English: He is in the engineering unit.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰਿੰਗ ਯੂਨਿਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third-person singular pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਇੰਜੀਨੀਅਰਿੰਗ[/hi] - This is the word for "engineering".

[hi]ਯੂਨਿਟ[/hi] - This is the word for "unit".

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "in".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "is". It is conjugated to match the singular subject.

The sentence follows a standard subject-verb-object structure. The subject "he" is performing the action of being "in" the "engineering unit".

The next word is language. English: They speak many languages in India.

Punjabi: [hi]Bharat vich bahut sariyan boliyan boli jaandiyan ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Bharat[/hi] - India. This is a common word that you will come across often in Punjabi

[hi]vich[/hi] - in, inside (postposition)

[hi]bahut[/hi] - many, a lot

[hi]sariyan[/hi] - plural of [hi]saari[/hi] - all, every

[hi]boliyan[/hi] - languages, dialects (plural of [hi]boli[/hi])

[hi]boli[/hi] - to speak, to say (verb)

[hi]jaandian[/hi] - are spoken, are said (present continuous tense of [hi]jaandi[/hi])

[hi]ne[/hi] - are (plural)

This is an example of a sentence using the present continuous tense in Punjabi. It describes something that is happening right now or is a regular occurrence.

You can replace "India" with another country or region if you want to. For example, [hi]Kanada vich bahut sariyan boliyan boli jaandiyan ne[/hi].

The next word is term. English: The term for this concept is very specific.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਸੰਕਲਪ ਲਈ ਸ਼ਬਦ ਬਹੁਤ ਖਾਸ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਸੰਕਲਪ[/hi] - Concept

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - For

[hi]ਸ਼ਬਦ[/hi] - Word

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Very

[hi]ਖਾਸ[/hi] - Specific

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] (lai) - This is the postposition that marks the object of the preposition "for." It's important to note that postpositions come after the noun they modify, unlike prepositions in English.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] (bahut) - This is the Punjabi word for "very." It's an intensifier that modifies the adjective [hi]ਖਾਸ[/hi] (khaas).

English: The term for this concept is very specific.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਸੰਕਲਪ ਲਈ ਸ਼ਬਦ ਬਹੁਤ ਖਾਸ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is flight. English: The flight was cancelled due to bad weather.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੌਸਮ ਖ਼ਰਾਬ ਹੋਣ ਕਰਕੇ ਉਡਾਣ ਰੱਦ ਕਰ ਦਿੱਤੀ ਗਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੌਸਮ[/hi] [moh-sum] - Weather

[hi]ਖ਼ਰਾਬ[/hi] [kharaab] - Bad

[hi]ਹੋਣ[/hi] [hoan] - To be (verb, present participle)

[hi]ਕਰਕੇ[/hi] [karkaay] - Because of, due to

[hi]ਉਡਾਣ[/hi] [udaan] - Flight

[hi]ਰੱਦ[/hi] [radd] - Cancelled

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] [kar] - To do (verb, present participle)

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] [ditti] - Given (verb, past participle)

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] [gai] - Gone (verb, past participle)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਕਰਕੇ[/hi] is a postposition that indicates cause or reason.

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] is a past participle that is used to indicate that the action of "canceling" is completed.

Translation: The weather was bad, so the flight was canceled.

The next word is staff. English: The staff is very friendly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਟਾਫ ਬਹੁਤ ਦੋਸਤਾਨਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਟਾਫ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "staff."

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "very."

[hi]ਦੋਸਤਾਨਾ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "friendly."

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "is."

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives (like "friendly") agree in gender with the noun they modify (like "staff"). In this case, "staff" is considered masculine, so we use the masculine form of the adjective, "[hi]ਦੋਸਤਾਨਾ[/hi]".

Word Order: The Punjabi sentence follows the structure Subject-Verb-Object. The subject ("staff") comes first, followed by the verb ("is") and then the adjective ("friendly").

English: The staff is very friendly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਟਾਫ ਬਹੁਤ ਦੋਸਤਾਨਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is with. English: He came with his friends.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਆਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun for masculine singular)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - His/Her/Its (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਦੋਸਤਾਂ[/hi] - Friends (plural noun)

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - With (preposition)

[hi]ਆਇਆ।[/hi] - Came (past tense verb)

Key Concepts:

The use of the preposition "[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi]" to indicate "with".

The use of the possessive pronoun "[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi]" to show ownership.

The use of the past tense verb "[hi]ਆਇਆ।[/hi]" to indicate an action that already happened.

English: He came with his friends.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਆਇਆ।[/hi]

The next word is hotel. English: He stayed at a hotel.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹੋਟਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਿਹਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - means "he"

[hi]ਹੋਟਲ[/hi] - means "hotel"

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - means "in"

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ।[/hi] - means "stayed"

Key concepts:

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a postposition that means "in", "at", or "on", depending on the context.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ।[/hi] is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਰਹਿਣਾ[/hi], which means "to stay".

English: He stayed at a hotel.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹੋਟਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਿਹਾ।[/hi]

The next word is within. English: The cat is within the house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਘਰ ਦੇ ਅੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] - [hi]billi[/hi] - (feminine noun) cat

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - [hi]ghar[/hi] - (masculine noun) house

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] - (postposition) of, belonging to

[hi]ਅੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]andar[/hi] - (postposition) inside, within

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - (verb) is

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: In Punjabi, postpositions are used instead of prepositions. The postposition [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] is used to show possession. The postposition [hi]ਅੰਦਰ[/hi] is used to show location, indicating that something is inside something else.

Word Order: The basic word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), but it can be flexible. In this sentence, the object ([hi]ਘਰ[/hi]) comes before the verb ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi]).

English: The cat is within the house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਘਰ ਦੇ ਅੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is range. English: The price range of these shoes is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹਨਾਂ ਜੁੱਤੀਆਂ ਦੀ ਕੀਮਤ ਦਾ ਦਾਇਰਾ ਬਹੁਤ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹਨਾਂ[/hi] - These (plural, used to refer to multiple shoes)

[hi]ਜੁੱਤੀਆਂ[/hi] - Shoes (plural)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of (possessive marker, shows that the price belongs to the shoes)

[hi]ਕੀਮਤ[/hi] - Price

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - Of (possessive marker, shows that the range belongs to the price)

[hi]ਦਾਇਰਾ[/hi] - Range

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Very

[hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ[/hi] - High

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (present tense)

Key Concept: The sentence uses the word [hi]ਦਾਇਰਾ[/hi] to refer to "range" in Punjabi. It's important to note the use of possessive markers [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] and [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] to show possession.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹਨਾਂ ਜੁੱਤੀਆਂ ਦੀ ਕੀਮਤ ਦਾ ਦਾਇਰਾ ਬਹੁਤ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

English: The price range of these shoes is very high.

The next word is then. English: He ate, then he left.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne khaaya, fir o jaa gaya.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He, him (pronoun)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has, have, did (past tense marker)

[hi]khaaya[/hi] - ate, eaten (past tense of [hi]khaana[/hi] - to eat)

[hi]fir[/hi] - then, after that (conjunction)

[hi]o[/hi] - he, him (pronoun)

[hi]jaa[/hi] - go (verb)

[hi]gaya[/hi] - went (past tense of [hi]jaa[/hi] - to go)

Key Concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is typically Subject-Verb-Object.

The past tense marker [hi]ne[/hi] is often used with pronouns to indicate past actions.

[hi]fir[/hi] is used as a conjunction to indicate sequence.

English: He ate, then he left.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne khaaya, fir o jaa gaya.[/hi]

The next word is she. English: She is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]oh[/hi] - She (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]sundar[/hi] - beautiful (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, third person singular, verb "to be")

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives agree in gender with the noun they modify. "Sundar" (beautiful) is feminine because it describes the feminine pronoun "oh" (she).

Word Order: Punjabi is a subject-verb-object language, similar to English.

English: She is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is accept. English: He accepted the offer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪੇਸ਼ਕਸ਼ ਨੂੰ ਸਵੀਕਾਰ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - This is the third-person singular masculine form of the pronoun "he" in the nominative case.

[hi]ਪੇਸ਼ਕਸ਼[/hi] - [hi]peshkesh[/hi] - This word means "offer" or "proposal."

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - This is the dative marker, indicating that the offer is the recipient of the action.

[hi]ਸਵੀਕਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]svikar[/hi] - This verb means "to accept."

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]kita[/hi] - This is the past tense form of the verb "to do," used here as an auxiliary verb to form the perfect tense of the verb "to accept."

Key Concepts:

Nominative case: The subject of the sentence, in this case, "he," is in the nominative case.

Dative case: The object of the preposition "to," in this case, "offer," is in the dative case.

Past tense: The verb "to accept" is in the past tense, indicating that the action has already happened.

English: He accepted the offer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪੇਸ਼ਕਸ਼ ਨੂੰ ਸਵੀਕਾਰ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is each. English: Each student has a book.

Punjabi: [hi]Har ek chhatra nuh ek kitab hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Har[/hi]: means "each" or "every"

[hi]ek[/hi]: means "one"

[hi]chhatra[/hi]: means "student"

[hi]nuh[/hi]: is the Punjabi word for "has"

[hi]ek[/hi]: means "one"

[hi]kitab[/hi]: means "book"

[hi]hai[/hi]: means "is"

Key Concepts:

[hi]Har ek[/hi]: is a common phrase in Punjabi to express the concept of "each"

[hi]nuh[/hi]: is a versatile verb that can mean "has" or "is" depending on the context.

Punjabi: [hi]Har ek chhatra nuh ek kitab hai[/hi].

English: Each student has a book.

The next word is debate. English: They debated for hours about the new policy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਨਵੀਂ ਨੀਤੀ ਬਾਰੇ ਘੰਟਿਆਂ ਤੱਕ ਬਹਿਸ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ[/hi] - They (plural, masculine/feminine)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is a grammatical particle that marks the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਨਵੀਂ[/hi] - new (feminine singular)

[hi]ਨੀਤੀ[/hi] - policy (feminine singular)

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - about

[hi]ਘੰਟਿਆਂ[/hi] - hours (plural)

[hi]ਤੱਕ[/hi] - until

[hi]ਬਹਿਸ[/hi] - debate

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - did (past tense, feminine singular)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives and verbs must agree in gender with the noun they modify. In this example, [hi]ਨਵੀਂ[/hi] (new) agrees with [hi]ਨੀਤੀ[/hi] (policy), which is feminine. [hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] (did) agrees with [hi]ਬਹਿਸ[/hi] (debate), which is feminine.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions, like [hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] (about) and [hi]ਤੱਕ[/hi] (until), instead of prepositions. These words follow the noun they modify.

Translation: They debated for hours about the new policy.

The next word is there. English: There is a book on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਜ 'ਤੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਜ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "table".

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "on". It's a postposition, which means it comes after the noun it modifies. It's similar to the English word "on" in that it indicates location.

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "book".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is". It's a verb, and it indicates that the book exists on the table.

The sentence structure is similar to English: Subject + Verb + Object.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions, which are words that come after the noun they modify.

Punjabi sentence structure is similar to English, but with some differences in word order.

English Translation: There is a book on the table.

Punjabi Translation: [hi]ਮੇਜ 'ਤੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is executive. English: The executive is responsible for making important decisions.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਰਜਕਾਰੀ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਫੈਸਲੇ ਲੈਣ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਾਰਜਕਾਰੀ[/hi] [karjaakari] - This is the Punjabi word for "executive."

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] [mahatvapurna] - This means "important."

[hi]ਫੈਸਲੇ[/hi] [faisale] - This is the plural form of "decision" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਲੈਣ[/hi] [laen] - This is the verb "to take," which in this context means "to make."

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] [lai] - This means "for" or "to."

[hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ[/hi] [zimmevaar] - This means "responsible."

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hai] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be."

Key Concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns have gender. The word for executive, [hi]ਕਾਰਜਕਾਰੀ[/hi] [karjaakari], is masculine.

Plural: Punjabi uses different endings to form plurals. The word for "decision" [hi]ਫੈਸਲਾ[/hi] [faisala] becomes [hi]ਫੈਸਲੇ[/hi] [faisale] in the plural.

English Translation: The executive is responsible for making important decisions.

The next word is decade. English: This decade has been a time of great change for Punjab.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਦਹਾਕਾ ਪੰਜਾਬ ਲਈ ਵੱਡੇ ਬਦਲਾਅ ਦਾ ਸਮਾਂ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - this (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਦਹਾਕਾ[/hi] - decade (noun)

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ[/hi] - Punjab (proper noun)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for (preposition)

[hi]ਵੱਡੇ[/hi] - big (adjective)

[hi]ਬਦਲਾਅ[/hi] - change (noun)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਸਮਾਂ[/hi] - time (noun)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - has been (verb in past continuous tense)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (verb in present tense)

Key concepts:

Punjabi sentence structure: Subject-Verb-Object

Demonstrative pronouns in Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ[/hi] (this), [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (that)

Possessive markers in Punjabi: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] (of), [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (of), [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] (of)

This sentence showcases a simple sentence structure, with a subject ([hi]ਇਹ ਦਹਾਕਾ[/hi]), a verb ([hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi]), and an object ([hi]ਵੱਡੇ ਬਦਲਾਅ ਦਾ ਸਮਾਂ[/hi]). It also demonstrates the use of possessive markers ([hi]ਦਾ[/hi]) and the past continuous tense ([hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi]).

The next word is insurance. English: The insurance policy covers all risks.

Punjabi: [hi]Beema patti sabh nuksaan nu dhakdi hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Beema[/hi] [hi]bee-ma[/hi] means "insurance".

[hi]patti[/hi] [hi]pat-ti[/hi] means "policy", literally "paper".

[hi]sabh[/hi] [hi]sabh[/hi] means "all".

[hi]nuksaan[/hi] [hi]nuksaan[/hi] means "damage, loss".

[hi]dhakdi[/hi] [hi]dhak-di[/hi] is the present continuous tense of the verb "to cover".

Key concepts:

Gender agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives and verbs agree with the gender of the noun they modify. In this sentence, [hi]patti[/hi] is feminine, so the verb [hi]dhakdi[/hi] is also feminine. This is a common feature of South Asian languages.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. The word [hi]nu[/hi] means "to", but it comes after the noun it modifies, in this case [hi]nuksaan[/hi].

This sentence is a good example of the basic structure of Punjabi sentences: subject-verb-object.

The next word is performance. English: The actor's performance was very impressive.

Punjabi: [hi]Adkaari da kirdaar bahut vadiya si[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Adkaari[/hi] - This word means "actor" in Punjabi. It is derived from the Hindi word "Adhikari", which means "one who performs" and can be used for both male and female actors.

[hi]da[/hi] - This is the possessive particle in Punjabi, similar to "of" or "'s" in English. It connects "Adkaari" (actor) to "kirdaar" (performance).

[hi]kirdaar[/hi] - This word translates to "role" or "performance" in English. It refers to the character played by the actor.

[hi]bahut[/hi] - This means "very" or "extremely" in Punjabi. It acts as an intensifier for the adjective "vadiya".

[hi]vadiya[/hi] - This is an adjective meaning "good" or "impressive". Here, it describes the quality of the actor's performance.

[hi]si[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to be" in Punjabi, used to indicate that the performance was impressive in the past.

This sentence highlights the use of possessive particle [hi]da[/hi], the adjective [hi]vadiya[/hi] and the past tense of the verb "to be" [hi]si[/hi]. Remember, Punjabi is a flexible language, and there are several ways to express the same meaning. This example just provides a standard and straightforward way to express the English sentence in Punjabi.

The next word is element. English: The element of surprise is important in a good story.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਧੀਆ ਕਹਾਣੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈਰਾਨੀ ਵਾਲਾ ਤੱਤ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] (vadhiya) - good, excellent

[hi]ਕਹਾਣੀ[/hi] (kahaani) - story

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (vich) - in, within (indicates location)

[hi]ਹੈਰਾਨੀ[/hi] (hairani) - surprise

[hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] (wala) - suffix used to denote "having," "related to," or "possessing" the preceding noun. In this case, it implies "having surprise"

[hi]ਤੱਤ[/hi] (tatt) - element, component, factor

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] (mahatavapurna) - important

[hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] (hunda hai) - is (present tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Punjabi follows a subject-object-verb structure, similar to English.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions like [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (vich) to indicate location, similar to how English uses prepositions.

Suffixes: Suffixes like [hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] (wala) are common in Punjabi to modify nouns and verbs, adding nuance to the meaning.

Gender Agreement: Verbs in Punjabi agree in gender and number with their subjects. In this case, [hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] (hunda hai) is the masculine singular form of "is."

The next word is assessment. English: The professor's assessment of the student's work was very thorough.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਫੈਸਰ ਨੇ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਦੇ ਕੰਮ ਦਾ ਮੁਲਾਂਕਣ ਬਹੁਤ ਡੂੰਘਾਈ ਨਾਲ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਫੈਸਰ[/hi] - Professor

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - has, a grammatical particle

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - student

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - of, possessive marker

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - work

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of, possessive marker

[hi]ਮੁਲਾਂਕਣ[/hi] - assessment

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very

[hi]ਡੂੰਘਾਈ[/hi] - depth

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - with

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - did

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is an important grammatical particle, similar to "has" in English. It's used to indicate the subject of the verb.

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] and [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] are possessive markers, like "of" in English. They show ownership or relation.

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] means "with" and is often used to indicate the way something is done.

English: The professor's assessment of the student's work was very thorough.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਫੈਸਰ ਨੇ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਦੇ ਕੰਮ ਦਾ ਮੁਲਾਂਕਣ ਬਹੁਤ ਡੂੰਘਾਈ ਨਾਲ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is about. English: He told me about his family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਬਾਰੇ ਦੱਸਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine past tense form of the verb [hi]ਕਹਿਣਾ[/hi] (to say). It means "he said" or "he told".

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the indirect object pronoun "to me" or "me".

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun "his" or "her" (referring to the subject of the sentence).

[hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] - This is the noun "family".

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - This is the preposition "about" or "regarding".

[hi]ਦੱਸਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense form of the verb [hi]ਦੱਸਣਾ[/hi] (to tell). It means "he told" or "he explained".

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the preposition [hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] to express the idea of "about".

The sentence demonstrates the use of possessive pronoun [hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] in Punjabi.

The sentence showcases the past tense form of the verb [hi]ਕਹਿਣਾ[/hi] (to say) and [hi]ਦੱਸਣਾ[/hi] (to tell).

English: He told me about his family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਬਾਰੇ ਦੱਸਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is data. English: The data is available on the website.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਾਟਾ ਵੈੱਬਸਾਈਟ 'ਤੇ ਉਪਲਬਧ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡਾਟਾ[/hi] - [hi]data[/hi] - This is the English word "data" directly borrowed into Punjabi.

[hi]ਵੈੱਬਸਾਈਟ[/hi] - [hi]website[/hi] - Another English word directly borrowed into Punjabi.

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]on[/hi] - This is the Punjabi preposition meaning "on." It follows the noun [hi]ਵੈੱਬਸਾਈਟ[/hi]

[hi]ਉਪਲਬਧ[/hi] - [hi]available[/hi] - This is a Punjabi word meaning "available." It is an adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਡਾਟਾ[/hi]

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]is[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." It is the verb in the sentence, which is in the present tense.

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence is in the present tense, and the verb is [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

The sentence is structured as follows: Subject + Adjective + Preposition + Noun + Verb

The English words "data" and "website" are directly borrowed into Punjabi, retaining their original pronunciation.

Remember: [hi]ਡਾਟਾ ਵੈੱਬਸਾਈਟ 'ਤੇ ਉਪਲਬਧ ਹੈ।[/hi] means "The data is available on the website."

The next word is serve. English: The waiter served us delicious food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵੇਟਰ ਨੇ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਸੁਆਦਲਾ ਖਾਣਾ ਪਰੋਸਿਆ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵੇਟਰ[/hi] - waiter (masculine)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - this is a postposition that indicates the subject of the verb. It is often used with the third-person singular. It's similar to "by" in English.

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - us, to us, indirect object marker.

[hi]ਸੁਆਦਲਾ[/hi] - delicious

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - food

[hi]ਪਰੋਸਿਆ[/hi] - served - the past tense of the verb [hi]ਪਰੋਸਣਾ[/hi]

Key concepts:

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is a postposition that marks the subject of the verb.

The structure of the sentence is similar to English.

English: The waiter served us delicious food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵੇਟਰ ਨੇ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਸੁਆਦਲਾ ਖਾਣਾ ਪਰੋਸਿਆ[/hi]

The next word is fairly. English: It's fairly cold today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj thoda thand hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] means "today". It is used to refer to the current day.

[hi]thoda[/hi] means "fairly" or "somewhat". It is used to indicate a moderate degree of something.

[hi]thand[/hi] means "cold". It is used to describe a low temperature.

[hi]hai[/hi] means "is". It is used to indicate the state of being.

Therefore, the sentence means "It's fairly cold today". The sentence structure is simple: subject (it) + verb (is) + adjective (cold) + adverb (fairly). The Punjabi sentence follows the same structure, with the adverb placed before the adjective.

The next word is branch. English: The tree has many branches.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰੁੱਖ ਦੇ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰੇ ਟਾਹਲੀਆਂ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰੁੱਖ[/hi] - [hi]rukH[/hi] - tree

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]bahut saare[/hi] - many

[hi]ਟਾਹਲੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]taahliyaan[/hi] - branches

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - [hi]han.[/hi] - are (plural)

Key concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns have gender. [hi]ਰੁੱਖ[/hi] ([hi]rukH[/hi]) is masculine, so we use the masculine form of the possessive particle [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] ([hi]de[/hi])

Plural: The word for 'branches' ([hi]ਟਾਹਲੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]taahliyaan[/hi]) is already in plural form. The verb ([hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - [hi]han.[/hi]) is also in plural form to agree with the subject.

Translation: The tree has many branches.

The next word is individual. English: Each individual has their own unique talents.

Punjabi: ਹਰੇਕ ਵਿਅਕਤੀ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਵਿਲੱਖਣ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਭਾਵਾਂ ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹੈ। [hi]hareka viakati apniyan vilakhnan pratibhavan rakhada hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]hareka[/hi] - this means 'each' or 'every'. It is the subject of the sentence and is singular

[hi]viakati[/hi] - this means 'individual' or 'person'. It is the subject of the sentence and is singular

[hi]apniyan[/hi] - this is a possessive pronoun meaning 'their' or 'his/her' (since 'viakati' is singular). It is a plural form because it is modifying the plural noun [hi]pratibhavan[/hi]

[hi]vilakhan[/hi] - this means 'unique' or 'special'. It is an adjective modifying the noun [hi]pratibhavan[/hi]

[hi]pratibhavan[/hi] - this means 'talents' or 'abilities'. It is the object of the sentence and is plural

[hi]rakhada hai[/hi] - this means 'has' or 'possesses'. It is the verb of the sentence and is in the present tense.

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the [hi]hai[/hi] (is) form of the verb 'to be'. This is important because this form is frequently used to express possession in Punjabi.

[hi]hareka[/hi] is frequently used in Punjabi. This word is important because it emphasizes individuality.

English: Each individual has their own unique talents.

Punjabi: ਹਰੇਕ ਵਿਅਕਤੀ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਵਿਲੱਖਣ ਪ੍ਰਤਿਭਾਵਾਂ ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹੈ। [hi]hareka viakati apniyan vilakhnan pratibhavan rakhada hai.[/hi]

The next word is stay. English: Please stay here.

Punjabi: [hi] ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਇੱਥੇ ਰਹੋ [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਰਪਾ[/hi] (kirpa) means "please" and is a polite word used when making a request.

[hi]ਕਰਕੇ[/hi] (karke) means "by doing" or "by doing so" and is used to emphasize the request.

[hi]ਇੱਥੇ[/hi] (itthe) means "here".

[hi]ਰਹੋ[/hi] (raho) means "stay". It is the imperative form of the verb "rahna" meaning "to stay".

This sentence uses the polite imperative form of the verb "rahna". The word order is important in Punjabi. The sentence is structured as: polite word + verb + location.

The next word is reference. English: He referenced the book in his essay.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਲੇਖ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਹਵਾਲਾ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - his (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਲੇਖ[/hi] - essay (masculine noun)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in (preposition)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book (feminine noun)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive particle, used with feminine nouns)

[hi]ਹਵਾਲਾ[/hi] - reference (masculine noun)

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi] - gave (past tense of the verb "to give")

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Punjabi follows a subject-verb-object word order, similar to English.

Gender: Punjabi nouns have gender (masculine or feminine). This affects the choice of possessive particles and adjectives.

Possessive Particles: The possessive particle "da" is used with feminine nouns and "di" with masculine nouns.

English: He referenced the book in his essay.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਲੇਖ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਹਵਾਲਾ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is will. English: He will go to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ऊਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾਵੇਗਾ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ऊਹ[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun for 'he'.

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This word means 'market'.

[hi]ਜਾਵੇਗਾ[/hi] - This is the future tense verb 'to go' and is conjugated in the third person singular.

The structure of the sentence follows a subject-verb-object order.

Key Concepts:

Third Person Singular: The pronoun [hi]ऊਹ[/hi] and the verb conjugation [hi]ਜਾਵੇਗਾ[/hi] both mark the subject as singular and male.

Future Tense: The ending [hi]ੇਗਾ[/hi] on the verb [hi]ਜਾ[/hi] indicates that the action will take place in the future.

English: He will go to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ऊਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾਵੇਗਾ[/hi]

The next word is production. English: The production of this film was completed in just two months.

Punjabi: [hi]Is film di utpadan sirf do mahiney vich mukammal hoyi[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]film[/hi] - film

[hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]utpadan[/hi] - production

[hi]sirf[/hi] - only

[hi]do[/hi] - two

[hi]mahiney[/hi] - months

[hi]vich[/hi] - in (preposition)

[hi]mukammal[/hi] - complete

[hi]hoyi[/hi] - was (past tense of verb "to be")

English: The production of this film was completed in just two months.

Punjabi: [hi]Is film di utpadan sirf do mahiney vich mukammal hoyi[/hi].

The next word is aim. English: He aims to become a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਬਣਨ ਦਾ ਟੀਚਾ ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] - Doctor

[hi]ਬਣਨ[/hi] - To become

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - Of/The (possessive marker)

[hi]ਟੀਚਾ[/hi] - Aim/Goal

[hi]ਰੱਖਦਾ[/hi] - Holds/Keeps (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is

This sentence uses the present tense to indicate that the action is ongoing, and it includes a possessive marker ([hi]ਦਾ[/hi]) to show that the aim belongs to him.

Key Concepts:

Possessive markers in Punjabi ([hi]ਦਾ[/hi]) indicate ownership and can be used for both singular and plural nouns.

The verb [hi]ਰੱਖਦਾ[/hi] is in the present tense and is conjugated to agree with the masculine singular subject ([hi]ਉਹ[/hi]).

English: He aims to become a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਬਣਨ ਦਾ ਟੀਚਾ ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is alternative. English: There is an alternative way to do this.

Punjabi: [hi]Is nu karne da hor koi [hi]viklap[hi] hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] means "this"

[hi]nu[/hi] is a postposition that indicates "to/for/with"

[hi]karne[/hi] is the infinitive of the verb "to do"

[hi]da[/hi] is a possessive particle, similar to "of"

[hi]hor[/hi] means "another" or "more"

[hi]koi[/hi] means "any" or "some"

[hi]viklap[hi] is the noun "alternative"

[hi]hai[/hi] means "is"

Important Concepts:

Postposition: In Punjabi, postpositions are words that follow a noun and modify its relationship to other words in the sentence.

Infinitive: The infinitive is the basic form of a verb that expresses action or state of being.

Possessive particle: This particle indicates possession or belonging.

The next word is analysis. English: The analysis of this poem is very complex.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਕਵਿਤਾ ਦੀ ਵਿਸ਼ਲੇਸ਼ਣ ਬਹੁਤ ਜਟਿਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This, demonstrative pronoun

[hi]ਕਵਿਤਾ[/hi] - Poem, noun

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of, possessive marker

[hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਲੇਸ਼ਣ[/hi] - Analysis, noun

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Very, adverb

[hi]ਜਟਿਲ[/hi] - Complex, adjective

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is, auxiliary verb

Key Concepts:

Possessive marker: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to show possession, meaning "of" or "belonging to"

Noun-adjective agreement: The adjective [hi]ਜਟਿਲ[/hi] agrees with the noun [hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਲੇਸ਼ਣ[/hi] in gender and number.

English: The analysis of this poem is very complex.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਕਵਿਤਾ ਦੀ ਵਿਸ਼ਲੇਸ਼ਣ ਬਹੁਤ ਜਟਿਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is contract. English: They signed a contract for the building project.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੇ ਇਮਾਰਤ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਇਕਰਾਰਨਾਮਾ ਸਾਈਨ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - They (plural subject pronoun)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - have (past tense marker)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - a (indefinite article)

[hi]ਇਕਰਾਰਨਾਮਾ[/hi] - contract (noun)

[hi]ਸਾਈਨ[/hi] - signed (past tense verb)

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - did (past tense verb)

[hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi] - building (noun)

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ[/hi] - project (noun)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for (preposition)

Key concepts:

Subject-verb agreement: The verb [hi]ਸਾਈਨ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] agrees with the plural subject [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi].

Past tense markers: The past tense marker [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is used with the verb [hi]ਸਾਈਨ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] to indicate that the action happened in the past.

Prepositions: The preposition [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] shows the purpose of the contract.

Remember: This is one way to translate the English sentence into Punjabi. There are other ways to do it, depending on the context and the desired level of formality.

The next word is wine. English: He drinks wine every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਰੋਜ਼ ਵਾਈਨ ਪੀਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] = He, a pronoun referring to the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] = Every day, an adverb of frequency.

[hi]ਵਾਈਨ[/hi] = Wine, a noun referring to the object of the verb.

[hi]ਪੀਂਦਾ[/hi] = Drinks, a verb in the present tense, indicating an action that happens regularly.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] = Is, a verb indicating the existence of the action.

Key concept: This sentence uses the present tense to indicate an action that happens every day. The verb "[hi]ਪੀਂਦਾ[/hi]" is conjugated to agree with the subject, which is "[hi]ਉਹ[/hi]".

English: He drinks wine every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਰੋਜ਼ ਵਾਈਨ ਪੀਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is cost. English: The cost of this book is ten dollars.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦੀ ਕੀਮਤ ਦਸ ਡਾਲਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - Book (noun)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਕੀਮਤ[/hi] - Cost (noun)

[hi]ਦਸ[/hi] - Ten (number)

[hi]ਡਾਲਰ[/hi] - Dollar (noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (verb)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Marker: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to show possession and is equivalent to "of" in English.

Noun-Adjective Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives agree with the noun they modify in gender and number. Here, [hi]ਕੀਮਤ[/hi] (cost) is feminine, so [hi]ਦਸ[/hi] (ten) is also feminine.

Sentence Structure: Punjabi follows a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) sentence structure, similar to English.

English: The cost of this book is ten dollars.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦੀ ਕੀਮਤ ਦਸ ਡਾਲਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is version. English: This is the latest version of the book.

Punjabi: ਇਹ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਨਵਾਂ ਵਰਜਨ ਹੈ। [hi]eh kitaab da navaan varjan hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

ਇਹ [hi]eh[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

ਕਿਤਾਬ [hi]kitaab[/hi] - Book (noun)

ਦਾ [hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

ਨਵਾਂ [hi]navaan[/hi] - new (adjective)

ਵਰਜਨ [hi]varjan[/hi] - version (noun)

ਹੈ [hi]hai[/hi] - is (verb)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: "da" [hi]da[/hi] is used to show possession (similar to "of" in English).

Noun-Adjective Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives agree with the noun they modify in gender and number. Here "navaan" [hi]navaan[/hi] is masculine and singular to agree with "kitaab" [hi]kitaab[/hi]

English: This is the latest version of the book.

Punjabi: ਇਹ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਨਵਾਂ ਵਰਜਨ ਹੈ। [hi]eh kitaab da navaan varjan hai.[/hi]

The next word is overall. English: Overall, the performance was quite good.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੁੱਲ ਮਿਲਾ ਕੇ, ਪ੍ਰਦਰਸ਼ਨ ਕਾਫ਼ੀ ਵਧੀਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੁੱਲ[/hi] - overall, in total, This is a common word for "total" or "overall"

[hi]ਮਿਲਾ ਕੇ[/hi] - means "together" or "combined"

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਦਰਸ਼ਨ[/hi] - performance, act, This is a common word used to refer to any kind of performance

[hi]ਕਾਫ਼ੀ[/hi] - quite, enough, This is a common word used to express a sufficient amount

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - good, excellent, This is a common word for "good" or "excellent"

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - was, This is the past tense of the verb "to be"

Key Concepts:

The use of [hi]ਕੁੱਲ ਮਿਲਾ ਕੇ[/hi] is a common way to express the idea of "overall" in Punjabi

The sentence uses a simple past tense structure

English: Overall, the performance was quite good.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੁੱਲ ਮਿਲਾ ਕੇ, ਪ੍ਰਦਰਸ਼ਨ ਕਾਫ਼ੀ ਵਧੀਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is quick. English: He quickly finished his work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪਣਾ ਕੰਮ ਜਲਦੀ ਖਤਮ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is the short form of [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] (he/she) and means "he". The use of the short form is common in informal speech.

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - This means "his/her/their" own. It emphasizes that the work belongs to him.

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - This means "work".

[hi]ਜਲਦੀ[/hi] - This means "quickly".

[hi]ਖਤਮ[/hi] - This means "finished".

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do".

Key concept: The sentence uses the past tense of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] (to do) - [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] (did) - to indicate that the action has already happened.

English: He quickly finished his work.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪਣਾ ਕੰਮ ਜਲਦੀ ਖਤਮ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is kind. English: He is a kind person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਵਿਅਕਤੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - one, a

[hi]ਦਿਆਲੂ[/hi] - [hi]dayaloo[/hi] - kind

[hi]ਵਿਅਕਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]viaktee[/hi] - person

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - is used as an indefinite article before a singular noun.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in Punjabi.

English: He is a kind person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਦਿਆਲੂ ਵਿਅਕਤੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is display. English: The display is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਦਿਖਾਵਾ[/hi] [hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਦਿਖਾਵਾ[/hi] [hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

[hi]ਦਿਖਾਵਾ[/hi] [hi]sunder[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi]

[hi]dikhāvā[/hi] -  display

[hi]sunder[/hi] - beautiful

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: The word for "display" [hi]ਦਿਖਾਵਾ[/hi] is masculine, which is why the adjective [hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] also takes the masculine form.

Verb "to be": [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

English: The display is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਦਿਖਾਵਾ[/hi] [hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

The next word is grant. English: He was granted permission to enter the building.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ ਇਮਾਰਤ ਵਿੱਚ ਦਾਖਲ ਹੋਣ ਦੀ ਇਜਾਜ਼ਤ ਦਿੱਤੀ ਗਈ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]usnu[/hi] - to him, to her

[hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi] - [hi]imarat[/hi] - building

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in, into

[hi]ਦਾਖਲ[/hi] - [hi]dakhal[/hi] - entry

[hi]ਹੋਣ[/hi] - [hi]hon[/hi] - to be, to happen

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]ਇਜਾਜ਼ਤ[/hi] - [hi]ijazat[/hi] - permission

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]ditti[/hi] - given

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - [hi]gai[/hi] - went, was

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] - [hi]si.[/hi] - was

Key concepts:

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] ([hi]nu[/hi]) is a postposition that marks the indirect object of a verb.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] ([hi]vich[/hi]) is a postposition that marks location.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] ([hi]di[/hi]) is a possessive marker, indicating ownership or belonging.

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] ([hi]gai[/hi]) is used with the past participle ([hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi]) to form the passive voice.

English: He was granted permission to enter the building.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ ਇਮਾਰਤ ਵਿੱਚ ਦਾਖਲ ਹੋਣ ਦੀ ਇਜਾਜ਼ਤ ਦਿੱਤੀ ਗਈ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is maintain. English: We must maintain peace and harmony.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਸ਼ਾਂਤੀ ਤੇ ਸਦਭਾਵਨਾ ਬਣਾਈ ਰੱਖਣੀ ਚਾਹੀਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - means "we" (to us)

[hi]ਸ਼ਾਂਤੀ[/hi] - means "peace"

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - means "and"

[hi]ਸਦਭਾਵਨਾ[/hi] - means "harmony"

[hi]ਬਣਾਈ ਰੱਖਣੀ[/hi] - means "to maintain"

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi] - means "should" (we should maintain)

Key Concept:

The Punjabi sentence uses the verb "to maintain" which is [hi]ਬਣਾਈ ਰੱਖਣੀ[/hi] in Punjabi. This is a common verb used to express the idea of keeping something in a particular state. It is important to remember the structure of this verb, which is "to keep something doing something" ([hi]ਕੁਝ ਬਣਾਈ ਰੱਖਣਾ[/hi]).

The use of [hi]ਚਾਹੀਦੀ ਹੈ[/hi] highlights that maintaining peace and harmony is a desirable and necessary action.

The word order is important in Punjabi. The subject ([hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi]) comes first, followed by the verb ([hi]ਬਣਾਈ ਰੱਖਣੀ[/hi]), and then the object ([hi]ਸ਼ਾਂਤੀ ਤੇ ਸਦਭਾਵਨਾ[/hi]).

English: We must maintain peace and harmony.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਸ਼ਾਂਤੀ ਤੇ ਸਦਭਾਵਨਾ ਬਣਾਈ ਰੱਖਣੀ ਚਾਹੀਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is rich. English: He is a rich man.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਅਮੀਰ ਆਦਮੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "he." It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "a" or "one." It is used as a quantifier before the noun.

[hi]ਅਮੀਰ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "rich." It is an adjective describing the noun.

[hi]ਆਦਮੀ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "man." It is the noun that is being described by the adjective.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "is." It is the verb that connects the subject to the rest of the sentence.

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb-Object Structure: Punjabi follows a typical Subject-Verb-Object sentence structure, just like English.

Noun-Adjective Order: In Punjabi, adjectives typically precede the noun they modify.

Gender Agreement: Punjabi uses gender-specific words for nouns and pronouns, such as "he" and "she."

Memorization Tip: Notice how the Punjabi sentence follows a very similar structure to the English sentence. This will help you remember the words and how to use them.

The next word is base. English: The base of the house is made of concrete.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘਰ ਦਾ ਅਧਾਰ ਕੰਕਰੀਟ ਦਾ ਬਣਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi]: [hi]ghar[/hi] - house

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi]: [hi]da[/hi] - possessive particle (of)

[hi]ਅਧਾਰ[/hi]: [hi]adhaar[/hi] - base, foundation

[hi]ਕੰਕਰੀਟ[/hi]: [hi]kankriit[/hi] - concrete

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi]: [hi]da[/hi] - possessive particle (of)

[hi]ਬਣਿਆ[/hi]: [hi]bania[/hi] - made

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi]: [hi]hoia[/hi] - past participle (is)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: [hi]hai[/hi] - present tense (is)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] (da) is a possessive particle used to show ownership.

Past Participle: The word [hi]ਬਣਿਆ[/hi] (bania) is a past participle, meaning it describes an action that has already happened.

Present Tense: The word [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai) is the present tense form of the verb "to be."

Translation: The house is made of concrete.

The next word is deny. English: He denied that he was there.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne inkar kia ke oh udhar si[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He, the subject of the sentence. In this case, the pronoun "us" refers to a male person. It is important to note that Punjabi has separate pronouns for masculine and feminine genders, just like English.

[hi]ne[/hi] - The particle 'ne' is a marker of the subject of the sentence. It indicates that the subject is the one performing the action, which is denial in this case.

[hi]inkar[/hi] - This is the verb "to deny" in Punjabi. It means to refuse or reject something.

[hi]kia[/hi] - This is the past tense marker for verbs. It means "did" or "performed" and signifies that the action happened in the past.

[hi]ke[/hi] - This is a conjunction that introduces a subordinate clause. It means "that" or "because."

[hi]oh[/hi] - This is the pronoun "he" in Punjabi, used as the subject of the subordinate clause.

[hi]udhar[/hi] - This means "there" and indicates the location.

[hi]si[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to be" in Punjabi, which indicates existence.

English: He denied that he was there.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne inkar kia ke oh udhar si[/hi]

The next word is love. English: I love my family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਆਪਣਾ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਪਿਆਰਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun "I" (main) and means "to me." The dative case is used to indicate the indirect object of a verb. In this case, "love" is the verb and "my family" is the direct object.

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - This is a possessive pronoun and means "my" or "our" (depending on context). The possessive pronoun is used to indicate possession.

[hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] - This means "family."

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This means "very" or "a lot."

[hi]ਪਿਆਰਾ[/hi] - This means "dear" or "loved."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is a verb meaning "is" or "am." It is the present tense, singular, and third person.

Key Concepts:

Dative case of the pronoun

Possessive Pronoun

Present tense of "to be"

Important note for memorization: The dative case of "main" is always used before verbs that indicate a feeling or emotion such as love, hate, like, dislike, etc.

Translation: I love my family.

The next word is wonderful. English: This is a wonderful day.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh ek shaan-daar din hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ek[/hi] - a (indefinite article)

[hi]shaan-daar[/hi] - wonderful (adjective)

[hi]din[/hi] - day (noun)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (copula verb)

This sentence uses the simple present tense of the verb "to be." The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb, which is different from English.

Key Concepts:

Demonstrative pronouns: [hi]Eh[/hi] (this), [hi]O[/hi] (that), [hi]Eh[/hi] (these), [hi]O[/hi] (those)

Indefinite articles: [hi]ek[/hi] (a, an)

Adjectives: [hi]shaan-daar[/hi] (wonderful), [hi]sundar[/hi] (beautiful), [hi]vadiya[/hi] (good)

Nouns: [hi]din[/hi] (day), [hi]raat[/hi] (night), [hi]ghar[/hi] (house)

Copula verb: [hi]hai[/hi] (is), [hi]ne[/hi] (are), [hi]si[/hi] (was), [hi]san[/hi] (were)

Remember to practice these key concepts to improve your Punjabi language skills!

The next word is commercial. English: This is a commercial building.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਇੱਕ ਵਪਾਰਕ ਇਮਾਰਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - [hi]eh[/hi] - this

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a/an

[hi]ਵਪਾਰਕ[/hi] - [hi]vaparak[/hi] - commercial

[hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi] - [hi]imarat[/hi] - building

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] is a demonstrative pronoun, indicating something close to the speaker.

[hi]ਵਪਾਰਕ[/hi] is an adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi].

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the present tense of the verb "to be."

English: This is a commercial building.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਇੱਕ ਵਪਾਰਕ ਇਮਾਰਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is general. English: This is a general rule.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਇੱਕ ਆਮ ਨਿਯਮ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This, a demonstrative pronoun

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - one, a numeral

[hi]ਆਮ[/hi] - general, an adjective

[hi]ਨਿਯਮ[/hi] - rule, a noun

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is, a verb

This is a simple sentence using the present tense verb "is."

The word "general" is expressed as an adjective "[hi]ਆਮ[/hi]" modifying the noun "[hi]ਨਿਯਮ[/hi]".

English: This is a general rule.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਇੱਕ ਆਮ ਨਿਯਮ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is organization. English: The organization of this project is very important.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਦੀ ਸੰਗਠਨ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ[/hi] - Project (noun)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਸੰਗਠਨ[/hi] - Organization (noun)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Very (adverb)

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] - Important (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (verb)

Key Concepts:

The use of the possessive particle [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] to indicate that the organization belongs to the project.

The use of the adjective [hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] to describe the importance of the organization.

English: The organization of this project is very important.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਦੀ ਸੰਗਠਨ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is generation. English: The new generation is full of energy and enthusiasm.

Punjabi: [hi]Nayi pidhi josh aur utshaah se bhari hoi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Nayi[/hi] (new) - This is the feminine form of [hi]naya[/hi] (new), used to describe the feminine noun [hi]pidhi[/hi] (generation).

[hi]pidhi[/hi] (generation) - This is a noun.

[hi]josh[/hi] (energy, enthusiasm) - This is a masculine noun.

[hi]aur[/hi] (and) - This is a conjunction used to connect two nouns.

[hi]utshaah[/hi] (enthusiasm) - This is a masculine noun.

[hi]se[/hi] (with, by) - This is a postposition, indicating the instrument or source of something.

[hi]bhari[/hi] (filled) - This is the feminine past participle of the verb [hi]bharna[/hi] (to fill). It is used to describe [hi]pidhi[/hi] (generation).

[hi]hoi[/hi] (is) - This is the past participle of the verb [hi]hona[/hi] (to be). It is used in the present perfect tense, indicating a state of being.

[hi]hai[/hi] (is) - This is the present tense form of the verb [hi]hona[/hi] (to be).

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: Note how the adjectives [hi]nayi[/hi] and [hi]bhari[/hi] agree in gender with the noun [hi]pidhi[/hi].

Postpositions: The postposition [hi]se[/hi] indicates the source of the energy and enthusiasm.

Present Perfect Tense: The use of the past participle [hi]hoi[/hi] with [hi]hai[/hi] indicates that the state of being full of energy and enthusiasm continues in the present.

English: The new generation is full of energy and enthusiasm.

Punjabi: [hi]Nayi pidhi josh aur utshaah se bhari hoi hai[/hi].

The next word is recent. English: The recent news is concerning.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਾਲੀਆ[/hi] [hi]ਖ਼ਬਰਾਂ[/hi] [hi]ਚਿੰਤਾਜਨਕ[/hi] [hi]ਨੇ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹਾਲੀਆ[/hi]: This word means "recent". It is an adjective that modifies the noun "[hi]ਖ਼ਬਰਾਂ[/hi]". It is in the singular form, but it is used for both singular and plural nouns.

[hi]ਖ਼ਬਰਾਂ[/hi]: This word means "news". It is a plural noun, and it is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਚਿੰਤਾਜਨਕ[/hi]: This word means "concerning" or "worrisome". It is an adjective describing the news.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi]: This is the ending of the verb "to be" in the present tense. It is used with plural subjects.

Key concepts:

The Punjabi language uses postpositions, not prepositions. This means that the word that describes the noun comes after the noun.

Punjabi has a flexible word order and can change based on the speaker's emphasis.

English: The recent news is concerning.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਾਲੀਆ[/hi] [hi]ਖ਼ਬਰਾਂ[/hi] [hi]ਚਿੰਤਾਜਨਕ[/hi] [hi]ਨੇ[/hi].

The next word is heat. English: The heat is unbearable.

Punjabi: [hi]Garmi sahni nahin hoi[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Garmi[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "heat."

[hi]sahni[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "to bear" or "to endure."

[hi]nahin[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "not."

[hi]hoi[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to be." This is an interesting word because in Punjabi, as well as other Indo-Aryan languages, past tense often takes the form of a perfect tense, similar to the English "have been."

Therefore, the entire sentence translates to, "The heat is unbearable."

Key Concept: The Punjabi language uses a different tense system than English. It makes heavy use of the perfect tense, which is used to denote actions that are completed, similar to the English "have" + past participle structure.

This sentence also demonstrates the common Punjabi structure of using a noun (in this case, [hi]Garmi[/hi]) followed by an adjective (in this case, [hi]sahni nahin[/hi]) to describe that noun.

The next word is sit. English: Please sit down.

Punjabi: [hi]Kripā karke baitho[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Kripā[/hi]: This is a respectful word meaning "please". It's polite to use it when making a request.

[hi]karke[/hi]: This is a grammatical particle, similar to "please" in English, adding politeness to the request.

[hi]baitho[/hi]: This is the imperative form of the verb "to sit" which means "sit down". This form is used to give commands or instructions.

Key Concepts:

Imperative form of verbs: This is used to give commands or instructions.

Grammatical particles: These add nuances of meaning, such as politeness or emphasis, to sentences.

English: Please sit down.

Punjabi: [hi]Kripā karke baitho[/hi].

The next word is communication. English: Communication is important for understanding each other.

Punjabi: [hi]Sampark [hi] ek-dusre nu samjhne lai zaroori hai.

Breakdown:

[hi]Sampark [hi] - This means "communication" in Punjabi. It is a noun.

[hi]ek-dusre [hi] - This means "each other" in Punjabi. This is used for two people.

[hi]nu [hi] - This is a postposition that means "to" or "for."

[hi]samjhne [hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb "to understand" in Punjabi.

[hi]lai [hi] - This means "for" in Punjabi. It is a postposition.

[hi]zaroori [hi] - This means "important" or "necessary" in Punjabi. It is an adjective. It is modifying the noun [hi]sampark [hi].

[hi]hai [hi] - This means "is" in Punjabi. It is the present tense of the verb "to be" in Punjabi.

Key Concepts:

The sentence structure of the Punjabi sentence follows the pattern: Noun + Postposition + Noun + Verb. This is different from the English structure of Subject + Verb + Object.

Punjabi uses postpositions like [hi]nu [hi] and [hi]lai [hi] rather than prepositions like "to" and "for."

Punjabi verb forms are marked for tense, number, and person.

English: Communication is important for understanding each other.

The next word is force. English: He used force to open the door.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਖੋਲ੍ਹਣ ਲਈ ਜ਼ੋਰ ਲਗਾਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He, pronoun in the nominative case.

[hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ[/hi] - Door, noun in the accusative case.

[hi]ਖੋਲ੍ਹਣ[/hi] - To open, infinitive verb.

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - For, postposition.

[hi]ਜ਼ੋਰ[/hi] - Force, noun in the nominative case.

[hi]ਲਗਾਇਆ।[/hi] - He applied, verb in the past tense.

Key Concepts:

The use of [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] as a postposition to connect the purpose of the action.

The infinitive verb [hi]ਖੋਲ੍ਹਣ[/hi] is used to show the purpose of the force.

Note: Punjabi is a very flexible language and other grammatical constructions are possible. This is a direct, but basic, example.

The next word is job. English: He has a good job.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਵਧੀਆ ਨੌਕਰੀ ਮਿਲੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun "he" (literally "to him"). It indicates the recipient of the action.

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - This means "good" and acts as an adjective modifying the noun "[hi]ਨੌਕਰੀ[/hi]".

[hi]ਨੌਕਰੀ[/hi] - This means "job".

[hi]ਮਿਲੀ ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the past perfect tense of the verb "to get" (literally "has gotten"). It indicates that the action of getting the job has already happened.

Key Concepts:

Dative Case: Used to indicate the recipient of an action.

Adjective: Modifies a noun, describing its qualities.

Past Perfect Tense: Indicates an action that was completed before another past action.

Memorization Tip:

Think of the dative case like "to him" and the past perfect tense like "has already happened".

The next word is secret. English: He kept the secret from his friends.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਰਾਜ [hi] [hi]ਛੁਪਾਇਆ[/hi] [hi]।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi]: He/She (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi]: his/her (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਦੋਸਤਾਂ[/hi]: friends (plural noun)

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi]: from (preposition)

[hi]ਰਾਜ[/hi]: secret (noun)

[hi]ਛੁਪਾਇਆ[/hi]: hid (past tense verb)

[hi]।[/hi]: Full stop/period

Key concepts:

Use of possessive pronoun to indicate possession

Use of the preposition from to indicate source

Use of the past tense verb hid to indicate a past action

English: He kept the secret from his friends.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਰਾਜ [hi] [hi]ਛੁਪਾਇਆ[/hi] [hi]।[/hi]

The next word is another. English: He wants another chance.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu hor mauka chahida hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usnu[/hi] is a combination of the pronoun [hi]us[/hi] (he) and the dative marker [hi]nu[/hi]. This signifies that the action of the verb is directed towards him.

[hi]hor[/hi] means "another" or "more." It is used here to indicate that he desires more than what he has already received.

[hi]mauka[/hi] translates to "chance" or "opportunity."

[hi]chahida[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb [hi]chahida[/hi] (to want, to desire).

Key Concepts:

The dative case is used to show the recipient of an action.

[hi]hor[/hi] is a versatile word that can be used in various ways to express quantity, repetition, or addition.

Translation: He wants another chance.

The next word is standard. English: This is the standard procedure.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh standard [hi] [hi]vichar[hi] hai.

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh [hi] - This, singular, masculine

[hi]standard [hi] - standard

[hi]vichar [hi] - procedure, method, way, idea.

[hi]hai [hi] - is.

Key concept: [hi]vichar[hi] is a useful word for 'method' or 'procedure' and is commonly used in Punjab. It is related to the word 'vicharna' which means to discuss or examine.

English: This is the standard procedure.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh standard [hi] [hi]vichar[hi] hai.

The next word is loss. English: He suffered a great loss.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu bada nuksan hoya[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Usnu[/hi] - "to him", "his", the masculine form of the pronoun "he" used as the indirect object in the sentence.

[hi]bada[/hi] - "big", "large", "great" - an adjective describing "loss".

[hi]nuksan[/hi] - "loss", "damage" - the noun object of the sentence.

[hi]hoya[/hi] - "happened", "occurred", "was". The past tense of the verb "hona", to be.

Key Concepts:

The use of the masculine form of the pronoun "[hi]Usnu[/hi]"

The order of the words in the sentence is different from English. The indirect object precedes the object.

"[hi]hoya[/hi]" is a past tense verb which shows that the loss occurred in the past.

English: He suffered a great loss.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu bada nuksan hoya[/hi]

The next word is federal. English: The federal government is responsible for national defense.

Punjabi: [hi]ਫੈਡਰਲ ਸਰਕਾਰ ਦੇਸ਼ ਦੀ ਰੱਖਿਆ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਫੈਡਰਲ[/hi] (federal): This word is derived from English and is commonly used in Punjabi to refer to the federal system of government.

[hi]ਸਰਕਾਰ[/hi] (government): This word represents the governing body of a country or state.

[hi]ਦੇਸ਼[/hi] (country): This word refers to a nation or a sovereign state.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (of the): This is a possessive marker indicating that the government is "of the" country.

[hi]ਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi] (defense): This word signifies the protection and safeguarding of a nation.

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] (for): This preposition indicates the purpose of the government's responsibility.

[hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ[/hi] (responsible): This word highlights the duty and obligation of the federal government.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (is): This is the present tense form of the verb "to be," indicating a state of being.

Therefore, the sentence highlights that the federal government is the body responsible for protecting the country.

The next word is respect. English: We should respect our elders.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਵੱਡਿਆਂ ਦਾ ਆਦਰ ਕਰਨਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]saanu[/hi] - means "to us", the object pronoun in this sentence

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - [hi]aapne[/hi] - means "our"

[hi]ਵੱਡਿਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]vaddiaan[/hi] - means "elders"

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - the possessive marker, translates to "of"

[hi]ਆਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]aadar[/hi] - means "respect"

[hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] - [hi]karna[/hi] - means "to do"

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]chaahida[/hi] - means "should" or "ought to"

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - means "is", the verb to be in the present tense.

Key Concepts:

Possessive Marker: The [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] marker is used to show possession.

Object Pronoun: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] is used to show who is being acted upon.

Conjugation: The verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] is conjugated to fit the subject [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] and the tense of the sentence (present tense).

English: We should respect our elders.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੇ ਵੱਡਿਆਂ ਦਾ ਆਦਰ ਕਰਨਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is well. English: Well, that's good to know.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਾਹ, ਇਹ ਜਾਣਨਾ ਵਧੀਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਾਹ[/hi] - This is an interjection used to express surprise, admiration, or agreement. It's similar to "Wow!" or "Well!" in English.

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This is the word for "this" or "it."

[hi]ਜਾਣਨਾ[/hi] - This is the infinitive verb form of "to know" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - This means "good" or "nice."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be."

Key Concepts:

The sentence structure is Subject + Verb + Object.

The word order in Punjabi is often different from English, so it's important to pay attention to the placement of words.

[hi]ਵਾਹ[/hi] is a useful interjection to learn, as it can be used in many situations.

Remember:

The sentence is in the declarative mood, meaning it states a fact.

Punjabi is a subject-verb-object language, just like English.

The next word is trust. English: She trusts her friend.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਤੇ ਭਰੋਸਾ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - She (fem.)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - her

[hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] - friend

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - on/upon

[hi]ਭਰੋਸਾ[/hi] - trust

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - did

Key concepts:

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] is used to express 'on' or 'upon' in Punjabi. It is commonly used to indicate that something is done upon a person or object. It can also be used to indicate a place.

[hi]ਭਰੋਸਾ[/hi] is a noun that means 'trust'.

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] which means 'to do'. In this case, it means 'did'.

English: She trusts her friend.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਤੇ ਭਰੋਸਾ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi]

The next word is various. English: There are various ways to cook this dish.

Punjabi: [hi]Is waang nu banana layi kai tarike honde ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This (masculine singular)

[hi]waang[/hi] - dish

[hi]nu[/hi] - to (dative case marker)

[hi]banana[/hi] - to cook

[hi]layi[/hi] - for

[hi]kai[/hi] - several, many, various

[hi]tarike[/hi] - ways

[hi]hondi ne[/hi] - are (plural)

Key Concepts:

[hi]nu[/hi] is a dative case marker, indicating that the dish is the recipient of the action of cooking.

[hi]layi[/hi] is a preposition, meaning "for" and indicating the purpose of the cooking.

[hi]hondi ne[/hi] is the plural form of the verb "to be."

The next word is ahead. English: We are walking ahead of them.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਅੱਗੇ ਤੁਰ ਰਹੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]asi[/hi] - we (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]unhaan[/hi] - them (object pronoun)

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] - from, than

[hi]ਅੱਗੇ[/hi] - [hi]agge[/hi] - ahead, in front of

[hi]ਤੁਰ[/hi] - [hi]tur[/hi] - walk (verb stem)

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - [hi]rahe[/hi] - are, present continuous tense marker

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]haan[/hi] - are (present continuous tense marker, used with plural subjects)

Key concepts:

Word order: The subject (we) comes before the verb (walking), and the object (them) comes after the verb.

Prepositions: The preposition [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] is used to indicate movement from something, and [hi]ਅੱਗੇ[/hi] is used to indicate movement ahead of something.

Present continuous tense: The present continuous tense is formed by using the verb stem (tur) + the present continuous tense marker (rahe/haan). This tense indicates an action that is happening now.

English: We are walking ahead of them.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਅੱਗੇ ਤੁਰ ਰਹੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is depend. English: It depends on the weather.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਵਾ-ਪਾਣੀ 'ਤੇ ਨਿਰਭਰ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹਵਾ-ਪਾਣੀ[/hi] - This is a compound word that literally means "air-water" but in this context, it refers to "weather".

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - This is the postposition that indicates "on" or "upon".

[hi]ਨਿਰਭਰ[/hi] - This word means "dependent" or "reliant".

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to do" and is used here to indicate "depends".

So the sentence structure is: "It (understood) depends (on) the weather."

Key Concepts:

Compound Words: Punjabi often uses compound words to convey complex concepts.

Postpositions: These are words that come after the noun they modify, unlike prepositions in English.

Verb Conjugation: Punjabi verbs are conjugated to reflect tense and person.

English: It depends on the weather.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਵਾ-ਪਾਣੀ 'ਤੇ ਨਿਰਭਰ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi].

The next word is action. English: He took action.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne kadam uthaye[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - means "he" or "him" in Punjabi, a pronoun used to refer to a male person.

[hi]ne[/hi] - This is a postposition, similar to "by" or "with" in English. It indicates the agent who performed the action.

[hi]kadam[/hi] - means "step" or "action" in Punjabi. It's a noun, and it is used to represent an action that was taken.

[hi]uthaye[/hi] - is the past tense of the verb "to take" or "to lift" in Punjabi.

Note: You can also use the verb "to do" in Punjabi. You could say [hi]Us ne kadam kita[/hi] which would mean the same thing.

Translation: He took action.

The next word is end. English: The party ended at midnight.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਾਤ ਦੇ ਬਾਰਾਂ ਵਜੇ ਪਾਰਟੀ ਖ਼ਤਮ ਹੋ ਗਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰਾਤ[/hi] - night

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - of, belonging to (possessive particle)

[hi]ਬਾਰਾਂ[/hi] - twelve

[hi]ਵਜੇ[/hi] - o'clock

[hi]ਪਾਰਟੀ[/hi] - party

[hi]ਖ਼ਤਮ[/hi] - ended

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - become (auxiliary verb)

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - went (past tense of [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] - to go)

Key Concept: This sentence utilizes the past tense of the verb "to go" ([hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi]) which is conjugated based on gender and number. [hi]ਗਈ[/hi] is the past tense of the verb used for a singular, feminine subject.

English Translation: The party ended at midnight.

The next word is estimate. English: He estimated that the project would take a month.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne andaja laaya ke project nu ek mahina lagega[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi]: He (pronoun in the third person singular)

[hi]andaja[/hi]: estimate

[hi]laaya[/hi]: past tense of [hi]laana[/hi] (to put, to place), which in this context means "to estimate"

[hi]ke[/hi]: that (conjunction)

[hi]project[/hi]: project

[hi]nu[/hi]: to (preposition)

[hi]ek[/hi]: one

[hi]mahina[/hi]: month

[hi]lagega[/hi]: future tense of [hi]lagna[/hi] (to take, to require)

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]andaja[/hi] is often used for estimates.

[hi]Lagna[/hi] is a versatile verb that can mean "to take," "to require," "to need," or "to feel like."

English: He estimated that the project would take a month.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne andaja laaya ke project nu ek mahina lagega[/hi].

The next word is shoe. English: He is wearing a new shoe.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਨਵਾਂ ਜੁੱਤਾ ਪਾਇਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the pronoun "he" in Punjabi. It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਨਵਾਂ[/hi] - This is the word "new" in Punjabi. It is an adjective describing the noun "shoe".

[hi]ਜੁੱਤਾ[/hi] - This is the word "shoe" in Punjabi. It is the noun in the sentence.

[hi]ਪਾਇਆ[/hi] - This is the past participle of the verb "to wear" (which is [hi]ਪਾਉਣਾ[/hi] ). It is used here in the perfect tense to indicate that the action of wearing the shoe has been completed.

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - This is an auxiliary verb that is used to form the perfect tense. It indicates that the action is completed.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in Punjabi. It is used here to indicate that the state of wearing the shoe is current.

Important concepts:

Word order: In Punjabi, the basic word order is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), which is different from English (SVO).

Tense: Punjabi uses different auxiliary verbs and forms of verbs to express different tenses.

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns and adjectives are marked for gender.

English: He is wearing a new shoe.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਨਵਾਂ ਜੁੱਤਾ ਪਾਇਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is one. English: One student is present.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇੱਕ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹਾਜ਼ਰ ਹੈ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ek[/hi] - one

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]vidyarthi[/hi] - student

[hi]ਹਾਜ਼ਰ[/hi] - [hi]hazir[/hi] - present

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (masculine singular)

Key concepts:

The word order is subject-object-verb (SOV).

In Punjabi, nouns and adjectives (like [hi]ਹਾਜ਼ਰ[/hi] - present) must agree in gender and number. Here, [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] is masculine singular, so the verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] must be masculine singular as well.

English: One student is present.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇੱਕ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹਾਜ਼ਰ ਹੈ। [/hi]

The next word is left. English: He left the house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਘਰੋਂ ਚਲਿਆ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he." It's a third-person singular pronoun.

[hi]ਘਰੋਂ[/hi] - This word means "from the house." It's the postposition [hi]ਘਰ[/hi] (house) with the postpositional particle [hi]ੋਂ[/hi] attached, which indicates "from."

[hi]ਚਲਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to go." It's in the masculine singular form, matching the subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi].

[hi]ਗਿਆ।[/hi] - This is the past participle of the verb "to go" used here as an auxiliary verb. It means "went" in this context and emphasizes the completion of the action.

Key Concept: Punjabi uses postpositions to show relationships between words, much like English uses prepositions.

Translation: He went from the house.

The next word is yesterday. English: Yesterday, I went to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਮੈਂ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] (kallah) - yesterday

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] (main) - I

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] (bazaar) - market

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] (gya) - went (masculine singular past tense of जाना [jana])

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] (si) - was (past tense of होना [hona], used to denote past action)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, verbs and adjectives agree in gender with the noun they modify. Here, [hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] (gya) is masculine singular because [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] (main) is masculine.

Past Tense: The past tense is formed using the auxiliary verb [hi]ਸੀ[/hi] (si) and the past participle of the main verb.

English: Yesterday, I went to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਮੈਂ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is stuff. English: The box is full of stuff.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡੱਬਾ ਸਮਾਨ ਨਾਲ ਭਰਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡੱਬਾ[/hi] (dabba) - This means "box" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਸਮਾਨ[/hi] (samaan) - This word means "stuff" in Punjabi. It is a general term for items, goods, or belongings.

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] (nal) - This means "with" in Punjabi. It is used to connect the box and the stuff.

[hi]ਭਰਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi] (bharya hoya hai) - This means "is full".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai) - This is the present tense of the verb "to be" in Punjabi.

Key Concept: The word [hi]ਸਮਾਨ[/hi] is a useful word to know because it can be used to refer to many different things.

The next word is please. English: Please give me a glass of water.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਗਲਾਸ ਪਾਣੀ ਦੇ ਦਿਓ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]mainnu[/hi] - to me, dative case marker.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - one, indefinite article.

[hi]ਗਲਾਸ[/hi] - [hi]glaas[/hi] - glass.

[hi]ਪਾਣੀ[/hi] - [hi]paani[/hi] - water.

[hi]ਦੇ ਦਿਓ[/hi] - [hi]de deo[/hi] - give. This is the imperative form of the verb "to give" - [hi]dena[/hi]

Key Concepts:

Dative case marker: [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - indicates the recipient of an action.

Imperative form: This is used to give a command or make a request.

This sentence demonstrates a simple request in Punjabi. The use of the dative case marker [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] and the imperative form of the verb [hi]ਦੇ ਦਿਓ[/hi] are crucial to conveying the meaning.

The next word is majority. English: The majority of the students in the class are from Punjab.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲਾਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾਤਰ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਪੰਜਾਬ ਤੋਂ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਲਾਸ[/hi] - [hi]class[/hi]

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]in[/hi]

[hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾਤਰ[/hi] - [hi]majority[/hi], [hi]most[/hi]

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]students[/hi]

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]Punjab[/hi]

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]from[/hi]

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]are[/hi]

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾਤਰ[/hi] is used to express the majority.

The sentence structure is subject-verb-object.

The word [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] is used to indicate the origin or source.

Translation: The majority of the students in the class are from Punjab.

The next word is shake. English: He shook his head.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne apna sir hilaaya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has, have, did (past tense marker)

[hi]apna[/hi] - his, her, its, their (possessive pronoun)

[hi]sir[/hi] - head

[hi]hilaaya[/hi] - shook (past tense of [hi]hilaana[/hi] - to shake)

Key concept: In Punjabi, the verb comes at the end of the sentence. This is similar to English, but the word order can be more flexible.

Translation: He shook his head.

The next word is category. English: This book belongs to the category of fiction.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kitaab kahaniyan di [hi] [hi]shreni[/hi] [hi]vich aondi hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This

[hi]kitaab[/hi] - book

[hi]kahaniyan[/hi] - stories

[hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]shreni[/hi] - category

[hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]aondi[/hi] - comes (present tense)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense)

The sentence uses the word [hi]shreni[/hi] to convey the concept of category. [hi]Shreni[/hi] refers to a classification or division within a larger group. The sentence uses the preposition [hi]vich[/hi] to show that the book belongs within the category of fiction.

English: This book belongs to the category of fiction.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kitaab kahaniyan di shreni vich aondi hai.[/hi]

The next word is particularly. English: He particularly likes Punjabi food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਖਾਸ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਖਾਣਾ ਪਸੰਦ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਖਾਸ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ[/hi] - Particularly (literally "in a special way")

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - Punjabi

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - Food

[hi]ਪਸੰਦ[/hi] - Likes

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - does (masculine singular, present tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਖਾਸ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ[/hi] is a common phrase used to emphasize something specific. It can be used in many contexts.

[hi]ਪਸੰਦ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] is a verb conjugation that means "likes" and is used for a male subject.

English: He particularly likes Punjabi food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਖਾਸ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਖਾਣਾ ਪਸੰਦ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is replace. English: The old car was replaced with a new one.

Punjabi: [hi]purani gadi nu nayi gadi nal badal ditta gaya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]purani[/hi] - This means "old" and is a feminine adjective modifying the noun [hi]gadi[/hi], which means "car."

[hi]gadi[/hi] - This means "car" and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]nu[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "with," indicating that the old car was replaced by something.

[hi]nayi[/hi] - This means "new" and is a feminine adjective modifying the noun [hi]gadi[/hi].

[hi]gadi[/hi] - Again, this means "car" and is the object of the preposition [hi]nal[/hi].

[hi]nal[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "with," indicating that the replacement was done with the new car.

[hi]badal ditta gaya[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to replace" in Punjabi. It is in the passive voice, meaning the car was replaced by an unknown agent (which is implied to be someone).

Key concepts:

Gender: Notice how the adjectives [hi]purani[/hi] and [hi]nayi[/hi] agree in gender with the noun [hi]gadi[/hi]. Punjabi nouns have grammatical gender, so adjectives and verbs must agree with them.

Passive Voice: The sentence is in the passive voice, which is commonly used in Punjabi. This allows the speaker to focus on the action (replacement) without specifying the agent who performed it.

English: The old car was replaced with a new one.

Punjabi: [hi]purani gadi nu nayi gadi nal badal ditta gaya[/hi].

The next word is perfect. English: This is a perfect day for a picnic.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj [hi]picnic [hi]lai [hi]ek [hi]kamila [hi]din [hi]hai. [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj [hi] means "today." It is used to specify the day in question.

[hi]picnic [hi] is the English word "picnic" borrowed into Punjabi.

[hi]lai [hi] is a postposition meaning "for" or "to." It is used to indicate the purpose or destination of something.

[hi]ek [hi] means "one" or "a." It is used here as an indefinite article.

[hi]kamila [hi] means "perfect" or "ideal." It describes the day as being suitable for a picnic.

[hi]din [hi] means "day." It refers to the specific day in question.

[hi]hai [hi] is the verb "to be" in the present tense. It indicates that the day is perfect for a picnic.

English: This is a perfect day for a picnic.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj [hi]picnic [hi]lai [hi]ek [hi]kamila [hi]din [hi]hai. [/hi]

The next word is nation. English: We are all part of one nation.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਸਾਰੇ ਇੱਕ ਰਾਸ਼ਟਰ ਦੇ ਹਿੱਸੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਸਾਰੇ[/hi] - all (adjective)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - one (adjective)

[hi]ਰਾਸ਼ਟਰ[/hi] - nation (noun)

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਹਿੱਸੇ[/hi] - part (noun)

[hi]ਹਾਂ।[/hi] - are (verb)

Key concepts:

Possessive particle: [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] is used to indicate possession (of the nation)

Subject-Verb agreement: The verb [hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] is conjugated to agree with the plural subject [hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi]

Sentence structure: Subject + adjective + adjective + noun + possessive particle + noun + verb.

English: We are all part of one nation.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਸਾਰੇ ਇੱਕ ਰਾਸ਼ਟਰ ਦੇ ਹਿੱਸੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is reason. English: He gave me a reason to be happy.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujhe khush hone di vajah diti[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (masculine, singular). This pronoun is used for a third person male subject.

[hi]ne[/hi] - This is a particle that marks the subject of the sentence and helps with the verb conjugation.

[hi]mujhe[/hi] - Me (singular, direct object).

[hi]khush[/hi] - Happy

[hi]hone[/hi] - To be (infinitive)

[hi]di[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]vajah[/hi] - Reason

[hi]diti[/hi] - Gave (past tense)

Key concepts:

[hi]ne[/hi] is an important particle in Punjabi grammar, used to mark the subject of a sentence and influences how verbs are conjugated.

[hi]di[/hi] functions like the English possessive 'of.' It is used to show ownership or connection.

The sentence structure is Subject-Verb-Object.

English: He gave me a reason to be happy.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujhe khush hone di vajah diti[/hi].

The next word is participate. English: We should participate in the school's annual cultural festival.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ ਸਕੂਲ ਦੇ ਵਾਰਸ਼ਿਕ ਸੱਭਿਆਚਾਰਕ ਤਿਉਹਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਹਿੱਸਾ ਲੈਣਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]saanoo[/hi] - "to us" - This is the dative case of the pronoun "we" which is used when someone or something receives the action of the verb.

[hi]ਸਕੂਲ ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]skool de[/hi] - "of the school" - This is a possessive phrase indicating that the festival belongs to the school.

[hi]ਵਾਰਸ਼ਿਕ[/hi] - [hi]vaarshik[/hi] - "annual" - Describes the frequency of the festival.

[hi]ਸੱਭਿਆਚਾਰਕ[/hi] - [hi]sabhyaacharak[/hi] - "cultural" - Describes the nature of the festival.

[hi]ਤਿਉਹਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]tiouhaar[/hi] - "festival" - The noun for the event being discussed.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - "in" - This preposition denotes the location of the participation.

[hi]ਹਿੱਸਾ[/hi] - [hi]hissa[/hi] - "part" - The object of the verb, representing participation.

[hi]ਲੈਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]laina[/hi] - "to take" - The verb meaning "to participate".

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]chaahida hai[/hi] - "should" - The modal verb indicating necessity or obligation.

Key concepts:

Dative Case: The use of [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] ([hi]saanoo[/hi]) to show who receives the action of the verb.

Possessive Phrases: The use of [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] ([hi]de[/hi]) to show possession like [hi]ਸਕੂਲ ਦੇ[/hi] ([hi]skool de[/hi]).

Prepositions: The use of [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] ([hi]vich[/hi]) to indicate location.

Modal Verbs: The use of [hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]chaahida hai[/hi]) to express obligation or necessity.

This sentence demonstrates the structure of a simple Punjabi sentence and some important grammatical concepts. Keep practicing and you will be fluent in no time!

The next word is garden. English: The garden is full of beautiful flowers.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਾਗ਼ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਫੁੱਲਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਭਰਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਾਗ਼[/hi] - [hi]baag[/hi] - garden (masculine noun)

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]sundar[/hi] - beautiful (adjective)

[hi]ਫੁੱਲਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]phullan[/hi] - flowers (plural, the ending "an" indicates plurality)

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]nal[/hi] - with (postposition)

[hi]ਭਰਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]bharya[/hi] - filled (past participle, used as an adjective)

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]hoya[/hi] - is (past participle of the verb "to be", used as an adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense of the verb "to be")

Key concepts:

Masculine nouns: In Punjabi, many nouns are classified as either masculine or feminine. This affects the grammar, particularly the agreement between adjectives and nouns. In this sentence, [hi]ਬਾਗ਼[/hi] is masculine.

Plurality: The plural form of [hi]ਫੁੱਲ[/hi] (flower) is [hi]ਫੁੱਲਾਂ[/hi] which is formed by adding the suffix "an".

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. In this case, [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] is a postposition indicating "with".

Past participles: Past participles are often used as adjectives. For example, [hi]ਭਰਿਆ[/hi] (filled) describes the garden.

English: The garden is full of beautiful flowers.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਾਗ਼ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਫੁੱਲਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਭਰਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is themselves. English: They did it themselves.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ ਇਹ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "they" (plural)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi particle that marks the subject of the sentence. It is similar to the English "have" in this context.

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi phrase for "themselves."

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "it."

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do." It is the past tense form of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] (to do).

Key Concept: The Punjabi language uses postpositions to show the relationship between nouns and other words in a sentence. In this sentence, [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is a postposition that marks the subject of the verb.

English: They did it themselves.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਆਪ ਇਹ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is decide. English: We have to decide what to do next.

Punjabi: [hi]assaan nu faisla karna chahida hai ki aagey kia karna hai[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]assaan[/hi] - we (plural subject)

[hi]nu[/hi] - to (marks the indirect object)

[hi]faisla[/hi] - decision

[hi]karna[/hi] - to do (verb in present tense)

[hi]chahida[/hi] - should (modal verb)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (verb in present tense)

[hi]ki[/hi] - that (conjunction introducing a clause)

[hi]aagey[/hi] - next

[hi]kia[/hi] - what

[hi]karna[/hi] - to do (verb in present tense)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (verb in present tense)

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the modal verb [hi]chahida[/hi] to express obligation or necessity. It's important to remember that the [hi]chahida[/hi] verb requires the [hi]hai[/hi] verb to follow it.

[hi]nu[/hi] marks the indirect object, which is the recipient of the action.

English: We have to decide what to do next.

Punjabi: [hi]assaan nu faisla karna chahida hai ki aagey kia karna hai[/hi]

The next word is consider. English: He considered her offer carefully.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne us di peshkash nu soch samajh ke vičār kiṭṭā[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (masculine singular)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has/had (past tense marker)

[hi]us[/hi] - her

[hi]di[/hi] - of/belonging to (feminine singular)

[hi]peshkash[/hi] - offer

[hi]nu[/hi] - to/towards

[hi]soch[/hi] - thought

[hi]samajh[/hi] - understanding

[hi]ke[/hi] - with/by

[hi]vičār[/hi] - consideration

[hi]kiṭṭā[/hi] - done

Key concepts:

Case Marking: The word order in Punjabi is flexible, but the use of case markers is crucial for conveying meaning. In this sentence, "[hi]nu[/hi]" indicates the direction of the action (towards the offer).

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions (like "[hi]nu[/hi]") instead of prepositions like in English.

Verb Tense: "[hi]ne[/hi]" signifies the past tense of the verb.

Masculine and Feminine Gender: Punjabi nouns have genders, and this impacts the use of pronouns, adjectives, and other grammatical elements.

English: He considered her offer carefully.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne us di peshkash nu soch samajh ke vičār kiṭṭā[/hi]

The next word is tell. English: He told me that he is going to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਦੱਸਿਆ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine subject pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the first person singular object pronoun, meaning "me".

[hi]ਦੱਸਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to tell", in the third person singular masculine form.

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - This is a conjunction meaning "that".

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine subject pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "market".

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to go", in the third person singular masculine form.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is an auxiliary verb used to form the present continuous tense, meaning "is".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be", in the third person singular masculine form.

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the past tense to indicate that the act of telling happened before the present moment.

The sentence also uses the present continuous tense to indicate that the action of going to the market is ongoing.

The conjunction [hi]ਕਿ[/hi] connects the two clauses of the sentence.

English: He told me that he is going to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਦੱਸਿਆ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is fall. English: The leaves fall from the trees in autumn.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪਤਝੜ ਵਿੱਚ ਰੁੱਖਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਪੱਤੇ ਡਿੱਗਦੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪਤਝੜ[/hi] - [hi]patjhaṛ[/hi] - autumn. This is a very common word and is useful for understanding the changing seasons.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in. This is a very common preposition in Punjabi and is useful for indicating location or time.

[hi]ਰੁੱਖਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]rukhān[/hi] - trees. This is the plural form of the word [hi]ਰੁੱਖ[/hi] - [hi]rukh[/hi] - tree.

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] - from. This is another very common preposition in Punjabi and is useful for indicating the source of something.

[hi]ਪੱਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]patte[/hi] - leaves. This is the plural form of the word [hi]ਪੱਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]patta[/hi] - leaf.

[hi]ਡਿੱਗਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]ḍiggde[/hi] - falling. This is the present continuous tense of the verb [hi]ਡਿੱਗਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]ḍiggnā[/hi] - to fall.

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - [hi]han.[/hi] - are. This is the present tense of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]honā[/hi] - to be.

Key Concepts:

Plural Forms: Note the use of plural forms for [hi]ਰੁੱਖ[/hi] - [hi]rukh[/hi] - tree and [hi]ਪੱਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]patta[/hi] - leaf. This is essential for understanding the grammar of Punjabi.

Prepositions: The prepositions [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in and [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] - from are crucial for indicating relationships between nouns and other words in a sentence.

Present Continuous Tense: The present continuous tense is used to describe an action that is happening now. In this sentence, the leaves are falling right now in the autumn.

This sentence combines several key concepts of Punjabi grammar, providing a solid foundation for further learning.

The next word is weekend. English: We have a three day weekend this week.

Punjabi: [hi]Iss haftay sannu teen din da weekend hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Iss[/hi] - this

[hi]haftay[/hi] - week

[hi]sannu[/hi] - to us (plural, informal)

[hi]teen[/hi] - three

[hi]din[/hi] - day

[hi]da[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]weekend[/hi] - weekend

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

This sentence demonstrates the use of the possessive particle "[hi]da[/hi]" in Punjabi, which is similar to the English "of" or "belonging to". It's important to remember that [hi]da[/hi] is used with masculine words, and its feminine equivalent "[hi]di[/hi]" is used with feminine words.

English: We have a three day weekend this week.

Punjabi: [hi]Iss haftay sannu teen din da weekend hai[/hi].

The next word is skin. English: The child's skin is very soft.

Punjabi: [hi]Bachche di chaal bahut naram hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Bachche[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "child." It is in the singular form and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]di[/hi] - This is the possessive marker for "of the," indicating that the skin belongs to the child.

[hi]chaal[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "skin." It is the object of the sentence.

[hi]bahut[/hi] - This means "very." It is an adverb modifying the adjective "soft."

[hi]naram[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "soft." It is an adjective describing the child's skin.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." It is the verb of the sentence, indicating the state of the child's skin.

Key Concepts:

Possessive markers: The use of [hi]di[/hi] is crucial to indicate ownership, similar to "of the" in English.

Adjectives: The word [hi]naram[/hi] describes the quality of the skin.

Verb conjugation: The verb [hi]hai[/hi] is conjugated to agree with the subject of the sentence, "child."

This sentence is a basic example of a simple sentence structure in Punjabi. It showcases the use of basic vocabulary and grammatical elements.

The next word is anything. English: There is nothing here.

Punjabi: [hi]Idhar kuchh nahin hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Idhar[/hi] - This means "here" or "in this place." It's a common word for indicating location.

[hi]kuchh[/hi] - This word means "something" or "anything." It's a very versatile word and can be used in many contexts.

[hi]nahin[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "not" or "no."

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the verb "to be" in Punjabi.

Important Concepts:

Word order: Punjabi word order is Subject-Object-Verb, so the sentence structure is "There [hi]Idhar[/hi] nothing [hi]kuchh[/hi] is [hi]hai[/hi] not [hi]nahin[/hi]."

[hi]nahin[/hi] placement: The word [hi]nahin[/hi] usually comes after the verb in negative sentences.

Memorization Tip: You can think of [hi]Idhar[/hi] as similar to the English "here," and [hi]kuchh[/hi] as "something." Always remember to place the negative [hi]nahin[/hi] after the verb.

The next word is carefully. English: He carefully opens the door.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਧਿਆਨ ਨਾਲ ਖੋਲ੍ਹਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - He (pronoun)

[hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ[/hi] - Door (masculine noun)

[hi]ਧਿਆਨ ਨਾਲ[/hi] - Carefully (adverb)

[hi]ਖੋਲ੍ਹਿਆ[/hi] - Opened (past tense of verb "to open")

This sentence uses the simple past tense, which describes an action that happened in the past. The word [hi]ਧਿਆਨ ਨਾਲ[/hi] is an adverb that modifies the verb [hi]ਖੋਲ੍ਹਿਆ[/hi].

Key Concepts:

Pronoun: A word that replaces a noun. [hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] is a pronoun that refers to a male person.

Adverb: A word that modifies a verb, adjective, or another adverb. [hi]ਧਿਆਨ ਨਾਲ[/hi] is an adverb that modifies the verb [hi]ਖੋਲ੍ਹਿਆ[/hi].

Past tense: A grammatical tense that refers to an action or state that happened in the past. [hi]ਖੋਲ੍ਹਿਆ[/hi] is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਖੋਲ੍ਹਣਾ[/hi].

English: He carefully opens the door.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਧਿਆਨ ਨਾਲ ਖੋਲ੍ਹਿਆ[/hi].

The next word is suggestion. English: He suggested that we go to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne sajdeea kiya ke aasain bazar jaaye[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (third-person singular masculine pronoun)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has (third-person singular masculine past tense of verb "to have")

[hi]sajdea[/hi] - suggested (past tense of the verb "to suggest")

[hi]kiya[/hi] - did (past tense of the verb "to do"). This is used in a way to emphasize the action of suggesting, so it is not a literal translation of "did".

[hi]ke[/hi] - that

[hi]aasain[/hi] - we (first-person plural pronoun)

[hi]bazar[/hi] - market

[hi]jaaye[/hi] - go (present tense of the verb "to go")

Key Concepts:

Direct Object: The sentence uses a direct object: [hi]sajdea[/hi] (suggest) what? [hi]ke aasain bazar jaaye[/hi] (that we go to the market). The object is the thing being suggested.

Indirect Object: The sentence also includes an indirect object: [hi]Us[/hi] (he) suggested to whom? The indirect object is implied and is "us" which is the people the suggestion is given to, which is "us" (we).

Important: In Punjabi, the past tense of the verb "to do" ( [hi]kiya[/hi]) is used to express the action of suggestion and not a literal translation of "did".

English: He suggested that we go to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne sajdeea kiya ke aasain bazar jaaye[/hi].

The next word is former. English: He is a former student of this university.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇਸ ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ ਦਾ ਸਾਬਕਾ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]oh[/hi] - He

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - [hi]is[/hi] - this

[hi]ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ[/hi] - [hi]yunivarsity[/hi] - University

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of

[hi]ਸਾਬਕਾ[/hi] - [hi]saabka[/hi] - former

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]vidyaarthee[/hi] - student

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਸਾਬਕਾ[/hi] - [hi]saabka[/hi] means "former" and is used to describe someone who was previously in a particular position.

The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] is the possessive particle used to indicate ownership or belonging.

The word [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]vidyaarthee[/hi] is an important word to know when talking about education.

English: He is a former student of this university.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇਸ ਯੂਨੀਵਰਸਿਟੀ ਦਾ ਸਾਬਕਾ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is safety. English: The safety of the children is paramount.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚਿਆਂ ਦੀ ਸੁਰੱਖਿਆ ਸਭ ਤੋਂ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚਿਆਂ[/hi] [hi] بچّਿਆਂ [/hi] - (bacchian) - children (plural)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (di) - possessive marker, indicating possession of the children

[hi]ਸੁਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi] (surakkhia) - safety

[hi]ਸਭ[/hi] (sabh) - all, everything

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] (ton) - from, than

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] (mahatvapurna) - important

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai) - is

Key Concepts:

Possessive Marker: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] indicates possession, like "of the" in English.

Word Order: In Punjabi, the object (children) comes before the subject (safety).

Adjective Placement: The adjective [hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] (important) follows the noun it modifies ([hi]ਸੁਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi] - safety).

The next word is invite. English: You are invited to the party.

Punjabi: [hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ ਪਾਰਟੀ 'ਤੇ ਸੱਦੇ ਹੋ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ[/hi] - You (formal plural) - This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਪਾਰਟੀ[/hi] - Party. - This is the object of the preposition.

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - On, at - This is a preposition that indicates location.

[hi]ਸੱਦੇ[/hi] - Invited (past participle) - This is the main verb in the sentence, indicating that you have been invited.

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - are (present tense) - This is the auxiliary verb that helps to form the passive voice.

Key concepts:

Passive voice: The sentence is in the passive voice, which means that the action (inviting) is being done to the subject (you).

Formal language: The Punjabi sentence uses formal language, which is appropriate when addressing someone in a formal setting.

English: You are invited to the party.

Punjabi: [hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ ਪਾਰਟੀ 'ਤੇ ਸੱਦੇ ਹੋ[/hi].

The next word is bottom. English: The book is at the bottom of the shelf.

Punjabi: ਕਿਤਾਬ ਸ਼ੈਲਫ਼ ਦੇ [hi]ਨੀਵਾਂ[/hi] [hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] ਹੈ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] [hi]ਸ਼ੈਲਫ਼[/hi] [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] [hi]ਨੀਵਾਂ[/hi] [hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] ਹੈ।

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] (kitab) - book

[hi]ਸ਼ੈਲਫ਼[/hi] (shelf) - shelf

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] (de) - possessive particle (of the)

[hi]ਨੀਵਾਂ[/hi] (nivan) - bottom

[hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] (vall) - towards, direction of

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) - is

The sentence uses the postposition [hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] to show direction, emphasizing the location of the book at the bottom of the shelf. Remember that [hi]ਨੀਵਾਂ[/hi] literally means 'low' in Punjabi, but in this case, it signifies the bottom position.

The next word is transport. English: The transport system in India is very complex.

Punjabi: [hi]Bharat di sawaari praanali bahut jhunjhlaati hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Bharat[/hi] - India

[hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive)

[hi]sawaari[/hi] - transport

[hi]praanali[/hi] - system

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]jhunjhlaati[/hi] - complex (literally: annoying)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Possessive marker: [hi]di[/hi] is used to show possession, similar to "of" in English.

Noun phrases: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions, so the noun phrase "India's transport system" is structured as "[hi]Bharat di sawaari praanali[/hi]".

Word order: The verb "is" ([hi]hai[/hi]) comes at the end of the sentence.

English: The transport system in India is very complex.

Punjabi: [hi]Bharat di sawaari praanali bahut jhunjhlaati hai[/hi].

The next word is assume. English: We assume that she is coming.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਮੰਨਦੇ ਹਾਂ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਆ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We (subject, plural)

[hi]ਮੰਨਦੇ[/hi] - assume (verb, present tense, plural)

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - are (helping verb)

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - that (conjunction)

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - she (subject)

[hi]ਆ[/hi] - coming (verb, present continuous tense)

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - is (helping verb)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (helping verb)

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਮੰਨਦੇ[/hi] is the key here. It signifies "assume" in Punjabi. It is the conjugated verb in the sentence, and it is in the plural form, as the subject is "we" [hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi].

The use of the present continuous tense [hi]ਆ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi] to express a future action (she is coming) is a common feature in Punjabi.

English: We assume that she is coming.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਮੰਨਦੇ ਹਾਂ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਆ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is low. English: The price of the car is very low.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਦੀ ਕੀਮਤ ਬਹੁਤ ਘੱਟ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]gaddi[/hi] - car

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of the

[hi]ਕੀਮਤ[/hi] - [hi]qimat[/hi] - price

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਘੱਟ[/hi] - [hi]ghatt[/hi] - low

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a possessive particle used to indicate possession or belonging. It is similar to "of the" in English.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is a verb that means "is" or "exists". It is used to indicate the present tense.

The sentence is in the present tense and uses the possessive particle [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] to show that the price belongs to the car. The word [hi]ਘੱਟ[/hi] is an adjective describing the price.

English: The price of the car is very low.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਦੀ ਕੀਮਤ ਬਹੁਤ ਘੱਟ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is fix. English: The car is broken, please fix it.

Punjabi: [hi]Gaڑی kharab hai, kīn eh nu theek karo[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Gaڑی[/hi] - This is the word for "car" in Punjabi.

[hi]kharab[/hi] - This means "broken" in Punjabi. It is used as an adjective modifying the noun [hi]Gaڑی[/hi].

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is" and it is a linking verb, connecting the subject [hi]Gaڑی[/hi] with the adjective [hi]kharab[/hi].

[hi]kīn[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "please" and is used to make the request more polite.

[hi]eh[/hi] - This is a demonstrative pronoun that refers to the "car", making it clear that we are talking about the specific car mentioned earlier.

[hi]nu[/hi] - This is a preposition that means "to" or "for". In this context, it indicates the object of the action.

[hi]theek karo[/hi] - This means "fix it". [hi]theek[/hi] is the verb "fix" and [hi]karo[/hi] is the imperative form of the verb "to do" in Punjabi, making it a command.

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: The verb [hi]hai[/hi] agrees with the subject [hi]Gaڑی[/hi] in number and gender.

Imperative form: [hi]karo[/hi] is used to create a command.

Demonstrative Pronoun: [hi]eh[/hi] points to the specific car.

English: The car is broken, please fix it.

Punjabi: [hi]Gaڑی kharab hai, kīn eh nu theek karo[/hi]

The next word is facility. English: The new hospital has excellent facilities.

Punjabi: [hi]Navaṁ [hi]hospital [hi]vich [hi]bahut [hi]vaḍḍīyāṁ [hi]sūvidhāāṁ [hi]ne [hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Navaṁ [hi] - New (masculine singular)

[hi]hospital [hi] - hospital (masculine singular)

[hi]vich [hi] - in, within (postposition)

[hi]bahut [hi] - very, many (adverb)

[hi]vaḍḍīyāṁ [hi] - good, excellent (feminine plural)

[hi]sūvidhāāṁ [hi] - facilities (feminine plural)

[hi]ne [hi] - are, exist (verb)

Key Concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns have gender. [hi]hospital [hi] is masculine, while [hi]sūvidhāāṁ [hi] are feminine.

Postposition: [hi]vich [hi] is a postposition, which means it comes after the noun it modifies.

Plural: [hi]vaḍḍīyāṁ [hi] and [hi]sūvidhāāṁ [hi] are both plural forms.

Verb: [hi]ne [hi] is a verb that indicates existence or presence.

English: The new hospital has excellent facilities.

Punjabi: [hi]Navaṁ [hi]hospital [hi]vich [hi]bahut [hi]vaḍḍīyāṁ [hi]sūvidhāāṁ [hi]ne [hi].

The next word is think. English: He thinks about his future.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਭਵਿੱਖ ਬਾਰੇ ਸੋਚਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - his/her/its (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਭਵਿੱਖ[/hi] - future (noun)

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - about (postposition)

[hi]ਸੋਚਦਾ[/hi] - thinks (verb, present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is/exists (verb, present tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions.

Punjabi verbs have different forms for different genders and numbers.

The sentence structure is Subject-Object-Verb.

English: He thinks about his future.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਭਵਿੱਖ ਬਾਰੇ ਸੋਚਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is context. Please provide an English word. I will then provide a Punjabi sentence using that word, along with a breakdown of the grammar and meaning of the sentence. I will use markers to highlight Punjabi words, for example, [hi]Punjabi characters[/hi].

The next word is floor. English: The floor is dirty.

Punjabi: [hi]ਫ਼ਰਸ਼ ਗੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਫ਼ਰਸ਼[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "floor". It is a masculine noun.

[hi]ਗੰਦਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "dirty". It is an adjective.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is". It is a verb that agrees with the masculine noun [hi]ਫ਼ਰਸ਼[/hi].

Key concept: In Punjabi, the verb "to be" changes based on the gender of the noun it is describing.

English: The floor is dirty.

Punjabi: [hi]ਫ਼ਰਸ਼ ਗੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is software. English: The software is very useful for students.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਫਟਵੇਅਰ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਲਈ ਬਹੁਤ ਲਾਭਦਾਇਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਫਟਵੇਅਰ[/hi] - software (This is a loanword from English, commonly used in Punjabi.)

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] - students (plural form of [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi])

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very

[hi]ਲਾਭਦਾਇਕ[/hi] - useful

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] is a preposition meaning "for." It is used to indicate the purpose or beneficiary of an action.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] is an intensifier meaning "very" and is used to emphasize the degree of something.

[hi]ਲਾਭਦਾਇਕ[/hi] is an adjective meaning "useful" or "beneficial."

English Translation: The software is very useful for students.

Punjabi Translation: [hi]ਸਾਫਟਵੇਅਰ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਲਈ ਬਹੁਤ ਲਾਭਦਾਇਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is write. English: I write.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਲਿਖਦਾ ਹਾਂ। [hi]mai likhda haan[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]mai[/hi] = I. This is the subject pronoun for "I".

[hi]likhda[/hi] = to write. This is the present continuous tense form of the verb [hi]likhna[/hi], which means "to write" in Punjabi. The present continuous tense in Punjabi is formed by adding the suffix [hi]da[/hi] or [hi]di[/hi] to the verb stem, depending on the gender of the subject. [hi]likhna[/hi] is a masculine verb, so the present continuous tense is [hi]likhda[/hi] when used with a masculine subject, such as "I" or "he".

[hi]haan[/hi] = am, are, is. This is the present continuous tense marker that is used to indicate that the action of writing is happening now.

Memorization Tip: Remember that the present continuous tense in Punjabi is formed by adding the suffix [hi]da[/hi] or [hi]di[/hi] to the verb stem. Also, remember that [hi]haan[/hi] is the present continuous tense marker.

The next word is laugh. English: He laughed at the joke.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮਜ਼ਾਕ 'ਤੇ ਹੱਸਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine subject pronoun, meaning "he." In Punjabi, the pronoun changes based on the gender of the subject. It can be thought of as "He" in English.

[hi]ਮਜ਼ਾਕ[/hi] - This word is a noun that means "joke."

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - This is a postposition that means "on" or "at." It acts as a preposition in English, and the subject is laughing "at" the joke.

[hi]ਹੱਸਿਆ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to laugh." The masculine third person singular is used because the subject is male.

English: He laughed at the joke.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮਜ਼ਾਕ 'ਤੇ ਹੱਸਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is application. English: She applied for the job.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਨੌਕਰੀ ਲਈ ਅਰਜ਼ੀ ਦਿੱਤੀ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - She

[hi]ਨੌਕਰੀ[/hi] - job

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for

[hi]ਅਰਜ਼ੀ[/hi] - application

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - gave, applied

The verb [hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] (to give). It is used in this context to express the act of applying for something, much like we use "gave" in English.

English: She applied for the job.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਨੌਕਰੀ ਲਈ ਅਰਜ਼ੀ ਦਿੱਤੀ। [/hi]

The next word is ad. English: He gave an advertisement in the newspaper.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਇਸ਼ਤਿਹਾਰ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ਅਖ਼ਬਾਰ[/hi] - Newspaper

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - In

[hi]ਇਸ਼ਤਿਹਾਰ[/hi] - Advertisement

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi] - Gave (past tense)

Key concepts:

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a preposition that indicates location. It is similar to "in" in English.

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] (to give). The ending "[hi]ਾ[/hi]" indicates the past tense in Punjabi.

[hi]ਇਸ਼ਤਿਹਾਰ[/hi] is a noun that refers to an advertisement.

Remember, in Punjabi, the word order can sometimes be different than English, but the meaning remains the same.

The next word is natural. English: The natural beauty of this place is breathtaking.

Punjabi: [hi]Is jagah di kudirat di khubsurti dilkash hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]jagah[/hi] - place

[hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]kudirat[/hi] - nature

[hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]khubsurti[/hi] - beauty

[hi]dilkash[/hi] - breathtaking

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (copula)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particles: [hi]di[/hi] is used to indicate possession, similar to "of" in English.

Demonstrative Pronoun: [hi]Is[/hi] indicates the place being referred to.

Copula: [hi]hai[/hi] acts as a linking verb, connecting the subject ([hi]khubsurti[/hi]) to the predicate ([hi]dilkash[/hi]).

Translation: The beauty of nature in this place is breathtaking.

The next word is black. English: The cat is black.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਕਾਲ਼ੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] = [hi]billi[/hi] (cat, feminine)

[hi]ਕਾਲ਼ੀ[/hi] = [hi]kaali[/hi] (black, feminine)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] = [hi]hai[/hi] (is)

Key concepts:

Gender agreement: Punjabi nouns have genders, and adjectives must agree with the noun in gender. Here, [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] is feminine, so the adjective [hi]ਕਾਲ਼ੀ[/hi] is also feminine.

Word order: Punjabi word order is generally subject-object-verb (SOV), which is different from English (SVO).

English: The cat is black.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਕਾਲ਼ੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is situation. English: The situation is quite complex.

Punjabi: [hi]Halat kafi mushkil ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Halat[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "situation." It is in the nominative case, meaning it is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]kafi[/hi] - This means "quite" or "very" and modifies the adjective [hi]mushkil[/hi].

[hi]mushkil[/hi] - This word means "difficult" or "complex." It is in the nominative case and agrees with [hi]Halat[/hi] in gender and number.

[hi]ne[/hi] - This is the Punjabi equivalent of the English "is." It is the third person singular present tense of the verb "to be."

Key Concepts:

Gender agreement: Punjabi nouns and adjectives are marked for gender. In this sentence, both [hi]Halat[/hi] and [hi]mushkil[/hi] are feminine.

Case marking: Punjabi verbs use different endings depending on their function in the sentence. In this sentence, [hi]Halat[/hi] and [hi]mushkil[/hi] are both in the nominative case, as they are the subject and the adjective describing the subject, respectively.

English: The situation is quite complex.

Punjabi: [hi]Halat kafi mushkil ne[/hi].

The next word is expand. English: The book expands on the history of the region.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਇਸ ਖੇਤਰ ਦੇ ਇਤਿਹਾਸ ਬਾਰੇ ਵਿਸਥਾਰ ਨਾਲ ਦੱਸਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitab[/hi] - book

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - [hi]is[/hi] - this (refers to the region)

[hi]ਖੇਤਰ[/hi] - [hi]khetr[/hi] - region

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਇਤਿਹਾਸ[/hi] - [hi]itihaas[/hi] - history

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]bare[/hi] - about

[hi]ਵਿਸਥਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]visthaar[/hi] - expansion, detail

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]naal[/hi] - with

[hi]ਦੱਸਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]dassdi hai[/hi] - tells (feminine form of the verb, referring to the book)

Key concepts:

Gender in Punjabi: Punjabi verbs have different forms depending on the gender of the subject. Here, the verb [hi]ਦੱਸਦੀ ਹੈ[/hi] (dassdi hai) is in the feminine form because the subject is [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] (kitab), which is feminine.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. For example, instead of "about the history," we use [hi]ਇਤਿਹਾਸ ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] (itihaas bare) where [hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] (bare) acts as a postposition.

Word order: The sentence structure is similar to English, with the subject ([hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi]) followed by the verb ([hi]ਦੱਸਦੀ ਹੈ[/hi]) and then the object ([hi]ਇਸ ਖੇਤਰ ਦੇ ਇਤਿਹਾਸ ਬਾਰੇ ਵਿਸਥਾਰ[/hi]).

English: The book expands on the history of the region.

The next word is stock. English: The stock market is going up.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ੇਅਰ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਉੱਪਰ ਜਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸ਼ੇਅਰ[/hi] - [hi]share[/hi] - refers to shares of a company that are traded on the stock market.

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]market[/hi] - refers to a place where goods and services are traded.

[hi]ਉੱਪਰ[/hi] - [hi]up[/hi] - indicates the direction of the stock market's movement.

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - [hi]going[/hi] - indicates the action of the stock market.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]is[/hi] - indicates the present continuous tense.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]is[/hi] - marks the end of the sentence.

Key Concepts:

The use of the present continuous tense [hi]ਜਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] to indicate an ongoing action.

The use of [hi]ਉੱਪਰ[/hi] to indicate movement in an upward direction.

English: The stock market is going up.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ੇਅਰ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਉੱਪਰ ਜਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is disease. English: He has a serious disease.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਗੰਭੀਰ ਬਿਮਾਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he/she/it). It translates to "to him/her/it" and indicates the recipient of the action.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the indefinite article "a/an" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਗੰਭੀਰ[/hi] - This adjective means "serious" or "severe".

[hi]ਬਿਮਾਰੀ[/hi] - This is the noun for "disease".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "is" in Punjabi.

Key Concept: Dative Case in Punjabi. The dative case is used to indicate the recipient of an action. This is similar to the use of the preposition "to" in English. In this sentence, the disease is affecting "him", so we use the dative case of the pronoun.

Translation: He has a serious disease.

The next word is surround. English: The trees surround the house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰੁੱਖ ਘਰ ਨੂੰ ਘੇਰਦੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰੁੱਖ[/hi] = trees (plural)

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] = house

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] = to (direction)

[hi]ਘੇਰਦੇ[/hi] = surround

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] = are

This sentence uses the present tense of the verb "to surround," which is [hi]ਘੇਰਦੇ[/hi]. The word [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] indicates direction. We use [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] to show the direction of the action. [hi]ਹਨ[/hi] is a common ending for present tense verbs in Punjabi.

English: The trees surround the house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰੁੱਖ ਘਰ ਨੂੰ ਘੇਰਦੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is possible. English: It is possible to learn Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਿੱਖਣਾ ਸੰਭਵ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - this (subject)

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - Punjabi (object)

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਣਾ[/hi] - to learn (verb)

[hi]ਸੰਭਵ[/hi] - possible (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (verb, copula)

This sentence demonstrates the use of a verb in the present tense, an adjective, and a subject-verb-object structure.

English: It is possible to learn Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਿੱਖਣਾ ਸੰਭਵ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is remain. English: He remained at home.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਘਰੇ ਹੀ ਰਿਹਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - he/she/it

[hi]ਘਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]gharay[/hi] - at home

[hi]ਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]hee[/hi] - only/just

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]riha[/hi] - remained (masculine singular)

[hi]।[/hi] - [hi] [/hi] - sentence ending punctuation

Key Concepts:

The verb [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]riha[/hi] is in the past tense and agrees with the masculine singular subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi].

[hi]ਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]hee[/hi] emphasizes that he stayed at home and didn't go anywhere else. It is often used for emphasis and can be translated as 'only' or 'just'.

English: He remained at home.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਘਰੇ ਹੀ ਰਿਹਾ।[/hi]

The next word is land. English: The land is fertile.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ ਉਪਜਾਊ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ[/hi] [zameen]: This is the Punjabi word for "land".

[hi]ਉਪਜਾਊ[/hi] [upjaau]: This word means "fertile". It's a good thing to remember because it's used frequently when talking about agriculture.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hai]: This is the present tense form of the verb "to be". You'll encounter this frequently in Punjabi sentences, just like in English.

Key Concepts:

Word Order: The subject ([hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ[/hi]) comes first, then the adjective ([hi]ਉਪਜਾਊ[/hi]), and finally the verb ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi]).

Pronunciation: The [hi]ਜ਼[/hi] at the beginning of [hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ[/hi] is pronounced like the "z" in "zoo". The [hi]ਉ[/hi] is pronounced like the "oo" in "food". The [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is pronounced like the "hey" in "Hey there!"

English: The land is fertile.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ ਉਪਜਾਊ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is commit. English: He committed a crime.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਜੁਰਮ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he" in the third person singular.

[hi]ਜੁਰਮ[/hi] - This is the noun "crime" in Punjabi. Notice how the ending vowel of the word changes when it is in the singular.

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense verb "did" in Punjabi. Note how it is inflected to match the third person singular subject "he".

Key Concepts:

In Punjabi, nouns and verbs are inflected to match the person and number of the subject. So in this case, the verb [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] has to agree with the third person singular subject [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi].

English: He committed a crime.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਜੁਰਮ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is decision. English: He made a wise decision.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸਮਝਦਾਰੀ ਵਾਲਾ ਫੈਸਲਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine subject pronoun, meaning "he."

[hi]ਸਮਝਦਾਰੀ[/hi] - This is the feminine noun for "wisdom" or "understanding."

[hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] - This is a possessive adjective meaning "having" or "with" and is used to describe the noun before it, [hi]ਫੈਸਲਾ[/hi].

[hi]ਫੈਸਲਾ[/hi] - This is the masculine noun for "decision."

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do" or "to make."

Key Concept: The word [hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] is a versatile word in Punjabi and often used to link adjectives to nouns.

English: He made a wise decision.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸਮਝਦਾਰੀ ਵਾਲਾ ਫੈਸਲਾ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is history. English: History is the study of the past.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਤਿਹਾਸ[/hi] [hi]ਵਿਚ[/hi] [hi]ਭੂਤਕਾਲ[/hi] [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਅਧਿਐਨ[/hi] [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਤਿਹਾਸ[/hi] [hi]ਵਿਚ[/hi] [hi]ਭੂਤਕਾਲ[/hi] [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਅਧਿਐਨ[/hi] [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

[hi]ਇਤਿਹਾਸ[/hi] [hi]ਵਿਚ[/hi] [hi]ਭੂਤਕਾਲ[/hi] [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਅਧਿਐਨ[/hi] [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

[hi]ਇਤਿਹਾਸ[/hi] [hi]ਵਿਚ[/hi] [hi]ਭੂਤਕਾਲ[/hi]  -  History in the past

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] -  of

[hi]ਅਧਿਐਨ[/hi] - study

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is done

Key concepts:

[hi]ਵਿਚ[/hi] - in, within

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - possessive case marker, used to show possession, similar to "of" in English

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is done, is studied

English: History is the study of the past.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਤਿਹਾਸ[/hi] [hi]ਵਿਚ[/hi] [hi]ਭੂਤਕਾਲ[/hi] [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਅਧਿਐਨ[/hi] [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is continue. Please provide me with an English word so I can create a Punjabi sentence with a breakdown for you.

The next word is political. English: The political situation in the country is very volatile.

Punjabi: [hi]Desh di rajnaitik sthiti bahut hi labile hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Desh[/hi] - country

[hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]rajnaitik[/hi] - political

[hi]sthiti[/hi] - situation

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]hi[/hi] - emphasis

[hi]labile[/hi] - volatile

Key concept: The use of the possessive marker [hi]di[/hi] to show possession. [hi]Desh di[/hi] literally translates to "of country".

English: The political situation in the country is very volatile.

Punjabi: [hi]Desh di rajnaitik sthiti bahut hi labile hai[/hi].

The next word is government. English: The government is responsible for the welfare of its people.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਰਕਾਰ ਆਪਣੇ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਦੀ ਭਲਾਈ ਲਈ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਰਕਾਰ[/hi] - government

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - its

[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] - people

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of

[hi]ਭਲਾਈ[/hi] - welfare

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for

[hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ[/hi] - responsible

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (di) is the possessive particle, used to indicate possession, like "of" in English.

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] (lai) is the postposition meaning "for."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai) is the present tense form of the verb "to be."

You can use this sentence to practice saying the words and their combinations. Remember, the tone and rhythm of Punjabi speech can be quite different from English. Listen carefully and practice!

The next word is especially. English: He especially likes to eat fish.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਖਾਣ ਲਈ ਮੱਛੀ ਨੂੰ ਬਹੁਤ ਪਸੰਦ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਖਾਣ[/hi] - to eat (infinitive form)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for (purpose)

[hi]ਮੱਛੀ[/hi] - fish

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - to/for (object marker)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very/extremely

[hi]ਪਸੰਦ[/hi] - like/love

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - does (masculine singular present tense of verb "ਕਰਨਾ")

Key Concepts:

Postposition: [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] and [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] are postpositions, which function similar to prepositions in English. They follow the noun they modify.

Object Marker: [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] is often used as an object marker after verbs like "like" and "eat"

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, verbs and adjectives agree in gender with the subject. The masculine singular form of the verb "to do" ([hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi]) is used here since the subject is masculine ([hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - he).

Translation: He especially likes to eat fish.

The next word is paper. English: The paper is on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਗ਼ਜ਼ ਮੇਜ਼ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਾਗ਼ਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]kaagaz[/hi] - paper

[hi]ਮੇਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]mezz[/hi] - table

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]'te[/hi] - on (marks location)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense verb)

Key Concepts:

Postposition: The word [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is a postposition, which means it comes after the noun it modifies ([hi]ਮੇਜ਼[/hi] in this case). Postpositions are common in Punjabi and often indicate location or direction.

Word Order: Punjabi has a flexible word order, but in this sentence, the subject ([hi]ਕਾਗ਼ਜ਼[/hi]) comes first, followed by the location ([hi]ਮੇਜ਼ 'ਤੇ[/hi]), and finally the verb ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi]).

English: The paper is on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਗ਼ਜ਼ ਮੇਜ਼ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is relate. English: The story relates to the history of Punjab.

Punjabi: [hi]kahani punjab de itihaas naal sambandhit hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]kahani[/hi] - story

[hi]punjab[/hi] - Punjab

[hi]de[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]itihaas[/hi] - history

[hi]naal[/hi] - with

[hi]sambandhit[/hi] - related

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]naal[/hi] is a preposition that means "with" or "to"

[hi]sambandhit[/hi] is an adjective meaning "related"

[hi]de[/hi] is a possessive marker that means "of" and is placed after the noun it modifies.

This sentence demonstrates the use of the preposition [hi]naal[/hi] to connect the story to the history of Punjab. The adjective [hi]sambandhit[/hi] is used to describe the relationship between the two.

The next word is expect. English: We expect the guests to arrive at 7:00 pm.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਮਹਿਮਾਨਾਂ ਦੇ ਸ਼ਾਮ 7:00 ਵਜੇ ਪਹੁੰਚਣ ਦੀ ਉਮੀਦ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਮਹਿਮਾਨਾਂ[/hi] - guests (object pronoun)

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਸ਼ਾਮ[/hi] - evening (time of day)

[hi]7:00[/hi] - 7:00

[hi]ਵਜੇ[/hi] - o'clock (time marker)

[hi]ਪਹੁੰਚਣ[/hi] - arriving (verb)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਉਮੀਦ[/hi] - hope (noun)

[hi]ਕਰਦੇ[/hi] - do (verb)

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - are (copula)

Key concepts:

The sentence is in the present tense, indicating an action that is happening now or habitually.

The use of the possessive particle [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] and [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] in this sentence is essential for expressing possession or relationship.

The word [hi]ਉਮੀਦ[/hi] is a key concept in this sentence, as it implies an expectation or anticipation.

English: We expect the guests to arrive at 7:00 pm.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਮਹਿਮਾਨਾਂ ਦੇ ਸ਼ਾਮ 7:00 ਵਜੇ ਪਹੁੰਚਣ ਦੀ ਉਮੀਦ ਕਰਦੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is enable. English: She enabled him to complete the task.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਕੰਮ ਪੂਰਾ ਕਰਨ ਦੇ ਯੋਗ ਬਣਾਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the subject of the sentence, meaning "she".

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the object of the verb, meaning "him".

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - This is the noun, meaning "work".

[hi]ਪੂਰਾ[/hi] - This is the adjective, meaning "complete".

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] - This is the verb, meaning "to do".

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - This is a postposition, meaning "of".

[hi]ਯੋਗ[/hi] - This is the adjective, meaning "able".

[hi]ਬਣਾਇਆ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to make".

Key concepts:

Postposition: In Punjabi, postpositions are used instead of prepositions.

Past Tense: Punjabi uses a different verb ending to indicate past tense.

English: She enabled him to complete the task.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਕੰਮ ਪੂਰਾ ਕਰਨ ਦੇ ਯੋਗ ਬਣਾਇਆ।[/hi]

The next word is wash. English: The clothes need to be washed.

Punjabi: [hi]Kapde dhoone chahide ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Kapde[/hi] - clothes (plural) - This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]dhoone[/hi] - to wash - This is the verb in the infinitive form, indicating the action needed to be performed.

[hi]chahide[/hi] - need (plural form) - This word indicates the necessity of the action.

[hi]ne[/hi] - are - This is a grammatical particle in Punjabi that indicates the plural form of the subject.

Key Concept: Punjabi verbs can be in different forms based on tense and number. Here, the verb "[hi]dhoone[/hi]" is in the infinitive form, meaning it is not conjugated for tense or person. It simply indicates the action.

English Translation: The clothes need to be washed.

The next word is object. English: The object is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਸਤੂ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਸਤੂ[/hi] - [hi]vastoo[/hi] - This is the word for "object." It's a feminine noun.

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]sundar[/hi] - This means "beautiful." It's an adjective that describes the noun.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be." It's used to link the subject and the adjective.

The sentence structure is: [Subject] + [Adjective] + [Verb]

Here's how it works:

[hi]ਵਸਤੂ[/hi] (object) is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] (beautiful) describes the object.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is) connects the object and its description.

So, the sentence means "The object is beautiful."

The next word is edge. English: The edge of the table is sharp.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਜ ਦਾ ਕਿਨਾਰਾ ਤੇਜ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਜ[/hi] - [hi]mej[/hi] - This is the word for "table."

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - This is a possessive particle, like "of" or "'s."

[hi]ਕਿਨਾਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]kinara[/hi] - This is the word for "edge."

[hi]ਤੇਜ[/hi] - [hi]tej[/hi] - This is the word for "sharp."

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - This is the verb "is," and it's the singular present tense form.

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: The possessive particle [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is used to show possession, similar to "of" or "'s" in English. Here, it indicates that the "edge" belongs to the "table."

Word Order: In Punjabi, the word order can be slightly different from English. Here, we have the "table" first, followed by the possessive particle and then the "edge."

English: The edge of the table is sharp.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਜ ਦਾ ਕਿਨਾਰਾ ਤੇਜ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is learn. English: You should learn Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]tusi [hi] [hi]punjabi [hi] [hi]seekhna [hi] chahida [hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]tusi [hi]: "you" (plural, respectful form)

[hi]punjabi [hi]: "Punjabi" (the language)

[hi]seekhna [hi]: "to learn" (infinitive form)

[hi]chahida [hi]: "should" or "need to" (in this case, implying obligation or necessity)

Key concept: The verb [hi]seekhna [hi] is in the infinitive form and is used with the modal verb [hi]chahida [hi] to express the obligation to learn Punjabi.

English: You should learn Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]tusi [hi] [hi]punjabi [hi] [hi]seekhna [hi] chahida [hi].

The next word is lack. English: He lacks the courage to speak up.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu bolan di himmat di kami hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usnu[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun "he" or "him" and means "to him".

[hi]bolan[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb "to speak".

[hi]di[/hi] - This is the possessive particle, meaning "of" or "belonging to".

[hi]himmat[/hi] - This is the noun "courage".

[hi]di[/hi] - This is the possessive particle, meaning "of" or "belonging to".

[hi]kami[/hi] - This is the noun "lack" or "shortage".

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be".

Important grammatical concepts:

This sentence uses the dative case, which is used to indicate the recipient of an action.

This sentence uses the infinitive form of the verb, which is the base form of the verb and does not indicate tense.

This sentence uses the possessive particle to indicate possession.

English: He lacks the courage to speak up.

Punjabi: [hi]Usnu bolan di himmat di kami hai[/hi].

The next word is neither. English: He is neither a singer nor a dancer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਗਾਇਕ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ ਨਾ ਹੀ ਨਾਚਨ ਵਾਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It. [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਗਾਇਕ[/hi] - singer.

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - not. This negates the word [hi]ਗਾਇਕ[/hi].

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is/am/are. In this case it is "is."

[hi]ਨਾ[/hi] - nor. This is used in conjunction with [hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] to connect the two clauses.

[hi]ਹੀ[/hi] - also/too. This strengthens the negative.

[hi]ਨਾਚਨ ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] - dancer. [hi]ਨਾਚਨ[/hi] is the infinitive form of the verb "to dance".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is/am/are. In this case it is "is."

Key Concept: [hi]ਨਾ ਹੀ[/hi] is used to connect two negative statements. It is the equivalent of "neither" in English.

English: He is neither a singer nor a dancer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਗਾਇਕ ਨਹੀਂ ਹੈ ਨਾ ਹੀ ਨਾਚਨ ਵਾਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is horse. English: The horse is strong.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘੋੜਾ ਤਾਕਤਵਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਘੋੜਾ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "horse". It is in the singular form and in the nominative case (subject of the sentence). It is masculine.

[hi]ਤਾਕਤਵਰ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "strong". It is an adjective and describes the horse.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi verb "to be" in the present tense, third person singular. It is the copula connecting the subject and the adjective.

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns are gendered, and this sentence demonstrates how gender impacts the verb choice. Masculine nouns require masculine forms of the verb.

Case: Punjabi nouns change forms depending on their role in the sentence. In this example, the horse is the subject and thus is in the nominative case.

Copula: The verb "to be" is often called the copula. It serves to link a subject to its attribute.

English: The horse is strong.

Punjabi: [hi]ਘੋੜਾ ਤਾਕਤਵਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is contain. English: This box contains books.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਡੱਬਾ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

- [hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This

- [hi]ਡੱਬਾ[/hi] - box

- [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ[/hi] - books

- [hi]ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - contains. This is the present tense, third person singular verb conjugation of the verb "to keep", which is used in the sense of "to contain" here.

Important concepts:

- Punjabi verbs are conjugated for person (first, second, third) and number (singular, plural).

- "Rakhan" [hi]ਰੱਖਣਾ[/hi] is the infinitive of the verb "to keep" or "to hold".

- The [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] at the end of the verb is the third person singular marker.

English: This box contains books.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਡੱਬਾ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਰੱਖਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is relatively. English: He is relatively tall.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਾਫ਼ੀ ਲੰਮਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - "He" (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਕਾਫ਼ੀ[/hi] - "quite", "relatively" (adverb)

[hi]ਲੰਮਾ[/hi] - "tall" (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - "is" (present tense verb)

Key Concept: Punjabi uses adverbs to modify adjectives in a similar way to English. [hi]ਕਾਫ਼ੀ[/hi] modifies the adjective [hi]ਲੰਮਾ[/hi], indicating that the person is tall in comparison to others.

English: He is relatively tall.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਾਫ਼ੀ ਲੰਮਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is obviously. English: It's obviously a good idea to study.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਤਾਂ ਸਪਸ਼ਟ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਕਰਨੀ ਚੰਗੀ ਗੱਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਤਾਂ[/hi] - then, so, thus

[hi]ਸਪਸ਼ਟ[/hi] - obvious, clear

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - that

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ[/hi] - study

[hi]ਕਰਨੀ[/hi] - to do, to make

[hi]ਚੰਗੀ[/hi] - good

[hi]ਗੱਲ[/hi] - thing, matter, point

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is.

This sentence uses the grammatical structure of [Subject] [Verb] [Object] [Adjective] [Noun] with [hi]ਇਹ[/hi] as the subject and [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] as the verb. The conjunction [hi]ਕਿ[/hi] is used to connect the two clauses of the sentence. This is a simple example of a Punjabi sentence, the core of which you should be able to apply to new scenarios. The use of the word [hi]ਤਾਂ[/hi] in this context emphasizes the obviousness of the statement.

Key Concepts:

Grammatical structure: [Subject] [Verb] [Object] [Adjective] [Noun]

Conjunctions: [hi]ਕਿ[/hi]

Word order: In Punjabi, the word order can be flexible, but the basic structure is still Subject Verb Object.

Emphasis: [hi]ਤਾਂ[/hi]

English: It's obviously a good idea to study.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਤਾਂ ਸਪਸ਼ਟ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਕਰਨੀ ਚੰਗੀ ਗੱਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is pack. English: The bag is packed.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਮਾਨ ਵਾਲਾ ਬੈਗ ਪੈਕ ਹੋ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਮਾਨ[/hi] - " सामान " means "belongings" or "stuff". You can use it with other words, like " [hi]ਕੱਪੜੇ[/hi] " (clothes), "[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi]" (food), etc.

[hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] - means "one" or "the one". It usually comes after a noun.

[hi]ਬੈਗ[/hi] - means "bag".

[hi]ਪੈਕ[/hi] - "ਪੈਕ" is a verb which means "packed" or "to pack". Here, it is being used in the past tense. You will see the verb " [hi]ਹੋ[/hi]" used frequently. This helps make the sentence passive.

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - means "is" or "to be".

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - "ਗਿਆ" is the past tense of " [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi]" (to go). It helps to say "has gone" or "is done". In this case, the act of packing is "done".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Means "is" or "there is". It is the ending of the sentence, which is the present tense of " [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi]" (to be).

English: The bag is packed.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਮਾਨ ਵਾਲਾ ਬੈਗ ਪੈਕ ਹੋ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is quite. English: It is quite hot today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj bahut garmi hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - Today (This is a common word and important to know).

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Very/quite (This word is extremely useful for emphasizing degrees of an adjective).

[hi]garmi[/hi] - Heat (This is important to know because it is a common word and the noun in this sentence. It is the subject of the sentence).

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (This is the verb in the sentence and means "to be" and is used in the present tense).

This sentence demonstrates a simple way to describe the weather in Punjabi. Remember that [hi]hai[/hi] is a verb, so it is important to consider when to use it. The word [hi]bahut[/hi] is an important word to know for emphasizing the degree of any adjective.

The next word is go. English: He goes to school.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਕੂਲ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]ooh[/hi] - he/she/it

[hi]ਸਕੂਲ[/hi] - [hi]skool[/hi] - school

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]jaanda[/hi] - goes (masculine singular present tense)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense)

Key concept: Punjabi uses different verb conjugations based on gender and number (singular/plural).

English: He goes to school.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਕੂਲ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is change. English: He changed his clothes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਕੱਪੜੇ ਬਦਲ ਦਿੱਤੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - means "he" and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - means "his" and is a possessive pronoun.

[hi]ਕੱਪੜੇ[/hi] - means "clothes."

[hi]ਬਦਲ[/hi] - means "change" and is the verb of the sentence.

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੇ[/hi] - means "gave" and is the past tense of the verb "give," used in the past perfect tense in Punjabi.

This sentence is in the past tense, and it uses the past perfect tense to indicate that the action of changing clothes has been completed.

Important grammatical note: In Punjabi, the subject usually comes after the verb in sentences.

The next word is quality. English: The quality of the food is very good.

Punjabi: [hi]Khaaney di quality bahut vadiya hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Khaaney[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "food". It's the object of the sentence, the thing we are talking about.

[hi]di[/hi] - This is the possessive marker, indicating "of the" or "belonging to."

[hi]quality[/hi] - This word is borrowed from English and is used in Punjabi to mean "quality."

[hi]bahut[/hi] - This means "very" or "a lot."

[hi]vadiya[/hi] - This means "good" or "excellent."

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi verb "to be" in the present tense.

So the whole sentence is literally: "Food of the quality is very good." This is a common way to express quality in Punjabi. It's a good way to remember the word [hi]quality[/hi] as you'll see it used often in this way.

English: The quality of the food is very good.

Punjabi: [hi]Khaaney di quality bahut vadiya hai.[/hi]

The next word is usually. English: He usually goes to the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਮ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਪਾਰਕ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (Subject Pronoun)

[hi]ਆਮ[/hi] - Usually/Generally

[hi]ਤੌਰ[/hi] - Manner/Way

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - On/At/In (Postposition, marking location)

[hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] - Park (Noun)

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - Goes (Verb, present tense)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is/Am/Are (Auxiliary Verb)

This sentence uses the common Punjabi construction of [hi]ਆਮ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ[/hi], meaning "usually" or "generally". It's a helpful phrase to learn for expressing routine actions. The [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] postposition is used to indicate location, similar to the English preposition "to". The [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] at the end of the sentence functions as the auxiliary verb, making the sentence grammatically correct.

Remember, in Punjabi, the order of words can sometimes be flexible, but the meaning usually stays the same. This sentence could also be written as [hi]ਉਹ ਪਾਰਕ ਆਮ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

English: He usually goes to the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਮ ਤੌਰ 'ਤੇ ਪਾਰਕ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is form. English: The form of this document is very complex.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਦਸਤਾਵੇਜ਼ ਦਾ ਰੂਪ ਬਹੁਤ ਗੁੰਝਲਦਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This, singular, masculine, nominative case. This word acts as a demonstrative pronoun, pointing to the document in question.

[hi]ਦਸਤਾਵੇਜ਼[/hi] - Document, singular, masculine, nominative case. This is the noun that the demonstrative pronoun modifies.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is the possessive particle, indicating that the form belongs to the document.

[hi]ਰੂਪ[/hi] - This is the noun "form," singular, masculine, nominative case.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This is the word "very" and acts as an adverb modifying the adjective that follows.

[hi]ਗੁੰਝਲਦਾਰ[/hi] - This is the adjective "complex," singular, masculine, nominative case.

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a very important part of the Punjabi sentence structure. It shows possession or belonging.

Masculine and Feminine: In Punjabi, nouns have gender. Here, the nouns [hi]ਦਸਤਾਵੇਜ਼[/hi] and [hi]ਰੂਪ[/hi] are both masculine.

Case: Punjabi nouns change form depending on their function in a sentence. Here, all nouns are in the nominative case because they are subjects.

English Translation: The form of this document is very complex.

The next word is could. English: He could have gone to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਸਕਦਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]bazaar[/hi] - Market

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - [hi]jaa[/hi] - To go

[hi]ਸਕਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]sakda[/hi] - Could

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] - [hi]si[/hi] - Was

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਸਕਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]sakda[/hi] - indicates ability or possibility. It is used to form the "could" tense in Punjabi.

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - [hi]si[/hi] - This is the past tense marker and indicates the action happened in the past.

English: He could have gone to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਸਕਦਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is reader. English: The reader is reading a book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਾਚਕ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਪੜ੍ਹ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਾਚਕ[/hi] [hi]vaachk[/hi] - reader (noun)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] [hi]kitaab[/hi] - book (noun)

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹ[/hi] [hi]padh[/hi] - to read (verb)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]riha hai[/hi] - is/he/she is reading (present continuous tense marker)

Key Concepts:

Punjabi has a rich system of verb conjugations, similar to English, but with more complex rules.

The present continuous tense in Punjabi is formed using the verb "to be" in the present tense followed by the present participle of the verb.

Punjabi uses the direct object (book) before the verb.

English: The reader is reading a book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਾਚਕ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਪੜ੍ਹ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is sun. English: The sun is shining brightly.

Punjabi: [hi]Surj teejhi chamak raha hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Surj[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "sun." It's a noun.

[hi]teejhi[/hi] - This means "brightly." It's an adverb modifying the verb "shining."

[hi]chamak raha hai[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to shine." It literally translates as "shining is" which is how we express the present continuous in Punjabi. The ending [hi]raha hai[/hi] is a common marker for present continuous tense.

Key Concepts:

Nouns: The noun in this sentence is [hi]Surj[/hi] (sun).

Adverbs: The adverb in this sentence is [hi]teejhi[/hi] (brightly) which modifies the verb "shining."

Present Continuous Tense: The Punjabi sentence uses the present continuous tense to express an action happening now. The ending [hi]raha hai[/hi] is a common marker for this tense.

The next word is fail. English: He failed the exam.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਇਮਤਿਹਾਨ ਫੇਲ੍ਹ ਕਰ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - He/She (subject pronoun, used with masculine subjects)

[hi]ਇਮਤਿਹਾਨ[/hi] - Exam

[hi]ਫੇਲ੍ਹ[/hi] - Fail

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - To do (verb, infinitive form)

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] - Gave (past tense of the verb 'to give')

Key Concepts:

Use of the past tense: [hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] indicates that the action of failing the exam is completed.

Direct object: [hi]ਇਮਤਿਹਾਨ[/hi] is the object of the verb [hi]ਫੇਲ੍ਹ ਕਰ[/hi].

English: He failed the exam.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਇਮਤਿਹਾਨ ਫੇਲ੍ਹ ਕਰ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is question. English: She asked a question.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਸਵਾਲ ਪੁੱਛਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the feminine form of the third person singular pronoun "she". It is followed by the past tense marker [hi]ਨੇ[/hi].

[hi]ਸਵਾਲ[/hi] - This is the noun "question".

[hi]ਪੁੱਛਿਆ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to ask".

The entire sentence structure is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV). This is the most common word order in Punjabi.

This sentence is in the simple past tense and is a declarative statement.

The next word is beat. English: The drum beat loudly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡੋਲ [/hi] [hi]ਤੇਜ [/hi] [hi]ਵੱਜਦਾ [/hi] [hi]ਸੀ [/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡੋਲ [/hi] (dol) - drum

[hi]ਤੇਜ [/hi] (tej) - loudly, fast, strong

[hi]ਵੱਜਦਾ [/hi] (vajda) - beating (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਸੀ [/hi] (si) - was (past tense)

This sentence uses the present continuous tense to describe the action of the drum beating. The word [hi]ਤੇਜ [/hi] (tej) modifies the verb [hi]ਵੱਜਦਾ [/hi] (vajda) to indicate how the drum is beating. The past tense marker [hi]ਸੀ [/hi] (si) places the action in the past.

English: The drum beat loudly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡੋਲ [/hi] [hi]ਤੇਜ [/hi] [hi]ਵੱਜਦਾ [/hi] [hi]ਸੀ [/hi].

The next word is otherwise. English: He would have come to the party, otherwise he would have let us know.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਾਰਟੀ ਤੇ ਆਉਂਦਾ, ਨਹੀਂ ਤਾਂ ਉਹ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਦੱਸਦਾ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He, pronoun

[hi]ਪਾਰਟੀ[/hi] - Party, noun

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - To, preposition

[hi]ਆਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - Would come, verb (present continuous)

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - Not, negation

[hi]ਤਾਂ[/hi] - Then, conjunction

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He, pronoun

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - Us, pronoun

[hi]ਦੱਸਦਾ[/hi] - Would tell, verb (present continuous)

The sentence can be broken down into two parts:

The first part, [hi]ਉਹ ਪਾਰਟੀ ਤੇ ਆਉਂਦਾ[/hi], is the hypothetical situation. It's not true.

The second part, [hi]ਨਹੀਂ ਤਾਂ ਉਹ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਦੱਸਦਾ[/hi], is the contrasting situation. It's not true because of the hypothetical situation.

The word [hi]ਤਾਂ[/hi] acts as a conjunction to combine the two parts of the sentence.

Key Concept: [hi]ਨਹੀਂ ਤਾਂ[/hi] is a phrase that means "otherwise" in Punjabi. It is used to express a contrasting situation.

The next word is say. English: He said that he would come tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਕਿਹਾ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਆਵੇਗਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine form of the pronoun "he" in Punjabi, conjugated for the past tense. It means "he" or "him".

[hi]ਕਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to say" in Punjabi. It means "said".

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - This is a conjunction that introduces a subordinate clause. It means "that".

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine form of the pronoun "he" in Punjabi. It means "he".

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] - This is an adverb that means "tomorrow".

[hi]ਆਵੇਗਾ[/hi] - This is the future tense of the verb "to come" in Punjabi. It means "will come".

This sentence uses the past tense form of "to say" to indicate that the statement was made in the past. The subordinate clause introduced by "[hi]ਕਿ[/hi]" clarifies what was said. This sentence also uses the future tense of "to come" to indicate that the action will occur in the future.

The next word is realize. English: I realized that I had forgotten my phone.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਪਤਾ ਲੱਗਾ ਕਿ ਮੈਂ ਆਪਣਾ ਫ਼ੋਨ ਭੁੱਲ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - means "to me" - this is the dative case, indicating the recipient of the action

[hi]ਪਤਾ[/hi] - means "knowledge" - this word can also mean "address"

[hi]ਲੱਗਾ[/hi] - means "got" or "came" - it is the past tense of the verb "lagna" (to get or to come) which means that it is a transitive verb, taking a direct object

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - means "that" - this is a conjunction used to introduce a dependent clause

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - means "I" - this is the nominative case, used for the subject of the verb

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - means "my" or "own" - this is a possessive adjective, used to show that something belongs to the subject

[hi]ਫ਼ੋਨ[/hi] - means "phone"

[hi]ਭੁੱਲ[/hi] - means "forget" - in this context it is an adjective

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - means "gone" or "went" - it is the past tense of the verb "jana" (to go) - since this verb is intransitive, it does not take a direct object, but it is still used to describe a completed action in the past

Key concept: The sentence uses a common phrase "[hi]ਪਤਾ ਲੱਗਾ[/hi]" which means "realized" or "became aware of". The word [hi]ਲੱਗਾ[/hi] is used frequently to convey the idea of something becoming clear or apparent. The sentence also demonstrates the use of the dative case, the nominative case and the past tense of verbs.

English: I realized that I had forgotten my phone.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਪਤਾ ਲੱਗਾ ਕਿ ਮੈਂ ਆਪਣਾ ਫ਼ੋਨ ਭੁੱਲ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is traffic. English: The traffic is very heavy today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj trafɪk bahut zyada hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - This means "today" in Punjabi. It is used to indicate the current day.

[hi]trafɪk[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "traffic". It is a loanword from English and is used to refer to vehicles on the road.

[hi]bahut[/hi] - This means "very" in Punjabi. It is used to intensify the meaning of the adjective following it.

[hi]zyada[/hi] - This means "heavy" or "much" in Punjabi. It is used to describe the intensity of the traffic.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is". It is used to link the subject and the predicate of the sentence.

Key concepts:

Loanwords: [hi]trafɪk[/hi] is an example of a loanword in Punjabi.

Word order: The word order in the Punjabi sentence is slightly different from English. The adjective [hi]zyada[/hi] comes before the noun [hi]trafɪk[/hi].

Translation: The traffic is very heavy today.

The next word is confidence. English: He has confidence in himself.

Punjabi: [hi]Us nu apne te vishvaas hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] = He

[hi]nu[/hi] = to/for/on/upon (indicates the object of the action)

[hi]apne[/hi] = himself/herself/itself (reflexive pronoun)

[hi]te[/hi] = on/upon (indicates location or position)

[hi]vishvaas[/hi] = confidence/belief/trust

[hi]hai[/hi] = is/exists (present tense of verb "to be")

Key Concepts:

The use of the preposition [hi]te[/hi] to indicate that the confidence is "on" or "upon" himself.

The use of the reflexive pronoun [hi]apne[/hi] to emphasize that the confidence is in himself.

English: He has confidence in himself.

Punjabi: [hi]Us nu apne te vishvaas hai[/hi].

The next word is conflict. English: The conflict between the two groups led to violence.

Punjabi: [hi]Do [hi] [hi]dujje [hi] [hi]gruha[hi] [hi]vich[hi] [hi]jhagda[hi] [hi]himsa[hi] [hi]tak[hi] [hi]puchh[hi] [hi]gya[hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Do[hi] - two

[hi]dujje[hi] - others

[hi]gruha[hi] - groups

[hi]vich[hi] - between

[hi]jhagda[hi] - conflict, argument

[hi]himsa[hi] - violence

[hi]tak[hi] - till, until

[hi]puchh[hi] - to reach, to arrive

[hi]gya[hi] - past tense marker

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions like [hi]vich[hi] (between) instead of prepositions like "between" in English.

Word Order: The word order in Punjabi can be different from English. In this sentence, the subject ([hi]jhagda[hi]) comes after the verb ([hi]puchh[hi]).

Past Tense: The past tense marker [hi]gya[hi] is used to indicate that the conflict happened in the past.

Translation: The conflict between the two groups led to violence.

The next word is video. English: He watched the video on his phone.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne apne phone te video dekkhi[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has (past tense marker for verbs)

[hi]apne[/hi] - his (possessive pronoun)

[hi]phone[/hi] - phone

[hi]te[/hi] - on (preposition)

[hi]video[/hi] - video

[hi]dekkhi[/hi] - watched (past tense verb)

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Subject-Verb-Object

Past Tense: The past tense marker [hi]ne[/hi] is used with verbs in the past tense.

Possessive Pronoun: [hi]apne[/hi] is used to show possession.

English: He watched the video on his phone.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne apne phone te video dekkhi[/hi]

The next word is economic. English: The economy is currently experiencing a boom.

Punjabi: [hi]arthik[/hi] [hi]halat[/hi] [hi]vajood[/hi] [hi]vich[/hi] [hi]changa[/hi] [hi]chal[/hi] [hi]rahe[/hi] [hi]ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]arthik[/hi] - (adjective) economic

[hi]halat[/hi] - (noun) situation, condition

[hi]vajood[/hi] - (noun) existence, being

[hi]vich[/hi] - (postposition) in, within

[hi]changa[/hi] - (adjective) good

[hi]chal[/hi] - (noun) movement, progress

[hi]rahe[/hi] - (verb) are (present continuous tense)

[hi]ne[/hi] - (particle) indicates plural subject

Key concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is subject-object-verb (SOV).

The use of postpositions like [hi]vich[/hi] is common in Punjabi.

The verb [hi]rahe[/hi] indicates a continuous action.

The particle [hi]ne[/hi] indicates that the subject is plural.

English: The economy is currently experiencing a boom.

Punjabi: [hi]arthik[/hi] [hi]halat[/hi] [hi]vajood[/hi] [hi]vich[/hi] [hi]changa[/hi] [hi]chal[/hi] [hi]rahe[/hi] [hi]ne[/hi].

The next word is organize. English: We need to organize the books in the library.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਸੰਗਠਿਤ ਕਰਨ ਦੀ ਲੋੜ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We

[hi]ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ[/hi] - Library

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ[/hi] - books

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - to

[hi]ਸੰਗਠਿਤ[/hi] - organize

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] - to do

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of

[hi]ਲੋੜ[/hi] - need

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] is the object marker, used to indicate the object of the verb.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a possessive marker, showing that the need belongs to the action of organizing the books.

Punjabi: We need to organize the books in the library.

The next word is marriage. English: They got married last month.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਪਿਛਲੇ ਮਹੀਨੇ ਵਿਆਹ ਕਰਵਾ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ[/hi] - "They" - this is the subject of the sentence and is in the plural form.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - "have" - this is a helping verb that indicates that the action has already taken place.

[hi]ਪਿਛਲੇ[/hi] - "last" - this is an adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਮਹੀਨੇ[/hi].

[hi]ਮਹੀਨੇ[/hi] - "month" - this is a noun and the object of the preposition [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] that is implied.

[hi]ਵਿਆਹ[/hi] - "marriage" - this is the noun that is the object of the verb.

[hi]ਕਰਵਾ[/hi] - "to have done" - this is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਕਰਵਾਉਣਾ[/hi], which means "to have something done."

[hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] - "taken" - this is a past tense particle that indicates the action has been completed.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses post-positions, which are similar to prepositions in English, but they come after the noun.

The verb [hi]ਕਰਵਾਉਣਾ[/hi] is often used to indicate that something is being done for someone or for oneself.

The past tense particle [hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] is used to indicate that an action has been completed.

English: They got married last month.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਪਿਛਲੇ ਮਹੀਨੇ ਵਿਆਹ ਕਰਵਾ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is stage. English: The actor walked onto the stage.

Punjabi: [hi]अਦਾਕਾਰ ਨੇ ਮੰਚ 'ਤੇ ਤੁਰਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

- [hi]अदाकार[/hi] - actor

- [hi]ने[/hi] - has, did (used for singular masculine subject)

- [hi]मंच[/hi] - stage

- [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - on

- [hi]तुर्या[/hi] - walked

Key concepts:

- The postposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is used to indicate location.

- The verb [hi]तुर्या[/hi] is the past tense of the verb [hi]तुरना[/hi] (to walk).

English: The actor walked onto the stage.

Punjabi: [hi]अदाकार ਨੇ ਮੰਚ 'ਤੇ ਤੁਰਿਆ[/hi].

The next word is site. English: The site of the ancient city is now a museum.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੁਰਾਣੇ ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਦੀ ਥਾਂ ਹੁਣ ਮਿਊਜ਼ੀਅਮ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪੁਰਾਣੇ[/hi] - [hi]purāṇe[/hi] - means "ancient" or "old". It is an adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi] - [hi]shahar[/hi] - meaning "city". The word [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi] is in the genitive case, meaning it is possessed by the [hi]ਥਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]thāṁ[/hi] - meaning "place" or "site".

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]dī[/hi] - indicates that [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi] is the possessed object of [hi]ਥਾਂ[/hi].

[hi]ਥਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]thāṁ[/hi] - is the subject of the sentence and means "site" or "place". It is in the nominative case.

[hi]ਹੁਣ[/hi] - [hi]huṇ[/hi] - is an adverb meaning "now" or "currently". It describes the time frame of the sentence.

[hi]ਮਿਊਜ਼ੀਅਮ[/hi] - [hi]miūzīam[/hi] - is the object of the verb "is" and means "museum".

[hi] ਹੈ। [/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is the verb "is" in the present tense. It is the copular verb connecting the subject [hi]ਥਾਂ[/hi] with the predicate [hi]ਮਿਊਜ਼ੀਅਮ[/hi].

English: The site of the ancient city is now a museum.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੁਰਾਣੇ ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਦੀ ਥਾਂ ਹੁਣ ਮਿਊਜ਼ੀਅਮ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is survey. English: The survey will ask people about their favorite foods.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਰਵੇਖਣ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਦੇ ਮਨਪਸੰਦ ਖਾਣੇ ਬਾਰੇ ਪੁੱਛੇਗਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਰਵੇਖਣ[/hi] - survey. It is pronounced "sur-vay-khan."

[hi]ਲੋਕਾਂ[/hi] - people. It is pronounced "lo-kan."

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - from. It is pronounced "ton."

[hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - their. It is pronounced "un-han."

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - of. It is pronounced "day."

[hi]ਮਨਪਸੰਦ[/hi] - favorite. It is pronounced "man-pas-and."

[hi]ਖਾਣੇ[/hi] - food (plural). It is pronounced "kha-nay."

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - about. It is pronounced "ba-ray."

[hi]ਪੁੱਛੇਗਾ[/hi] - will ask. It is pronounced "pu-ch-ay-ga."

Key concepts:

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] and [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] are postpositions. These follow a noun and usually modify that noun.

The verb [hi]ਪੁੱਛੇਗਾ[/hi] is in the future tense.

English: The survey will ask people about their favorite foods.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਰਵੇਖਣ ਲੋਕਾਂ ਤੋਂ ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਦੇ ਮਨਪਸੰਦ ਖਾਣੇ ਬਾਰੇ ਪੁੱਛੇਗਾ।[/hi]

The next word is holiday. English: We are on holiday.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਛੁੱਟੀਆਂ ਤੇ ਹਾਂ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]asīṁ[/hi] - we

[hi]ਛੁੱਟੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]chhuṭṭiāṁ[/hi] - holidays

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]te[/hi] - on

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]hāṁ[/hi] - are

This sentence is in the present tense and uses the Punjabi word [hi]ਤੇ[/hi], which means "on" or "in." It can be used to indicate location, time, or a state of being. It is useful for saying "on holiday," "in trouble," or "at work."

Key concept: This sentence demonstrates a common way to express a state of being in Punjabi. The verb "to be" in the present tense ([hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi]) is used with the preposition [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] to indicate location or state.

The next word is visitor. English: The visitor came to see the family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮਹਿਮਾਨ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਨੂੰ ਮਿਲਣ ਆਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮਹਿਮਾਨ[/hi] = visitor (masculine)

[hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] = family

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] = to (this indicates that the family is the object of the verb)

[hi]ਮਿਲਣ[/hi] = to meet

[hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] = came (past tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

The word order is subject-object-verb.

The verb [hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] is in the past tense and agrees with the masculine singular subject [hi]ਮਹਿਮਾਨ[/hi].

The word [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] is a postposition that indicates the object of the verb.

English: The visitor came to see the family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮਹਿਮਾਨ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਨੂੰ ਮਿਲਣ ਆਇਆ।[/hi]

The next word is public. English: This is a public park.

Punjabi: [hi]Eਹ ਸਰਵਜਨਕ ਪਾਰਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਸਰਵਜਨਕ[/hi] - public (adjective)

[hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] - park (noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (verb, present tense)

Key concepts:

Demonstrative pronouns in Punjabi ([hi]Eਹ[/hi]) are used to point out specific things.

Adjectives ([hi]ਸਰਵਜਨਕ[/hi]) modify nouns and provide more information about them.

Nouns ([hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi]) are the names of people, places, or things.

The verb "to be" in Punjabi ([hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]) conjugates depending on the subject and tense.

English: This is a public park.

Punjabi: [hi]Eਹ ਸਰਵਜਨਕ ਪਾਰਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is responsible. English: He is a responsible person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ ਵਿਅਕਤੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - "He"

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - "a" (indefinite article)

[hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ[/hi] - "responsible" (adjective)

[hi]ਵਿਅਕਤੀ[/hi] - "person"

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - "is." This is a common Punjabi sentence ending.

Key concepts:

Word order: The word order of the Punjabi sentence is subject-adjective-object-verb, similar to English.

Gender agreement: The adjective [hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਮੇਵਾਰ[/hi] agrees with the gender of the subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (masculine singular).

Translation: He is a responsible person.

The next word is attempt. English: He attempted to climb the mountain.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪਹਾੜ ਚੜ੍ਹਨ ਦੀ ਕੋਸ਼ਿਸ਼ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is a combination of the third-person singular pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he) and the past tense marker [hi]ਨੇ[/hi]. It literally translates to "he/she/it did".

[hi]ਪਹਾੜ[/hi] - This means "mountain".

[hi]ਚੜ੍ਹਨ[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb "to climb", meaning "climbing".

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is the feminine possessive marker, indicating "of the". It is used because [hi]ਕੋਸ਼ਿਸ਼[/hi] is feminine.

[hi]ਕੋਸ਼ਿਸ਼[/hi] - This means "attempt" or "effort".

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense form of the verb "to do".

Key Concepts:

The use of the past tense marker [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] to show that the action has already happened.

The infinitive form of the verb [hi]ਚੜ੍ਹਨ[/hi] is used to indicate the purpose of the attempt.

The feminine possessive marker [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to connect the noun [hi]ਕੋਸ਼ਿਸ਼[/hi] to the noun phrase [hi]ਪਹਾੜ ਚੜ੍ਹਨ[/hi] (climbing the mountain).

English: He attempted to climb the mountain.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪਹਾੜ ਚੜ੍ਹਨ ਦੀ ਕੋਸ਼ਿਸ਼ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is count. English: We counted the birds in the garden.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਬਗੀਚੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਪੰਛੀਆਂ ਦੀ ਗਿਣਤੀ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਬਗੀਚੇ[/hi] - Garden (masculine noun)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - In (postposition)

[hi]ਪੰਛੀਆਂ[/hi] - Birds (plural noun)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਗਿਣਤੀ[/hi] - Count (noun)

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi] - Did (past tense verb)

Key concepts:

Postpositions: In Punjabi, postpositions are used to show relationships between words, similar to prepositions in English.

Possessive marker: The possessive marker [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to show possession.

Past tense: The past tense verb [hi]ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi] is formed by adding [hi]।[/hi] to the verb stem.

English: We counted the birds in the garden.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਬਗੀਚੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਪੰਛੀਆਂ ਦੀ ਗਿਣਤੀ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is because. English: He went to the market because he needed groceries.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ ਕਿਉਂਕਿ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਕਿਰਾਣਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - Market (noun)

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - Went (past tense verb)

[hi]ਕਿਉਂਕਿ[/hi] - Because (conjunction)

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] - He/She/It (object pronoun)

[hi]ਕਿਰਾਣਾ[/hi] - Groceries (noun)

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਸੀ।[/hi] - Needed (past tense verb)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਕਿਉਂਕਿ[/hi] is a conjunction that introduces a subordinate clause, explaining the reason for the main clause.

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਸੀ।[/hi] is a common phrase in Punjabi that expresses a need or necessity.

Translation: He went to the market because he needed groceries.

The next word is official. English: The official language of Punjab is Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ ਦੀ ਅਧਿਕਾਰਕ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬ[/hi] [hi]Punjab[/hi]

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] [hi]of[/hi] (possessive marker)

[hi]ਅਧਿਕਾਰਕ[/hi] [hi]official[/hi]

[hi]ਭਾਸ਼ਾ[/hi] [hi]language[/hi]

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] [hi]Punjabi[/hi]

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]is.[/hi]

Key Concepts:

Possessive marker: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] indicates possession, similar to "of" in English. It is used to show that Punjab has an official language.

Word order: In Punjabi, the sentence structure is often Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), as opposed to the Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) order common in English.

Grammatical gender: Punjabi nouns have grammatical gender (masculine, feminine, or neuter). In this case, [hi]ਭਾਸ਼ਾ[/hi] (language) is feminine, which is why the possessive marker is [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] instead of [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] (masculine).

Important Note: The Punjabi word [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a verb that means "is." It is used to connect the subject ([hi]ਭਾਸ਼ਾ[/hi]) and the predicate ([hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi]).

The next word is person. English: The person is sitting on the chair.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੋਕ ਕੁਰਸੀ 'ਤੇ ਬੈਠਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲੋਕ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "person" in the singular form. This is a noun.

[hi]ਕੁਰਸੀ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "chair". This is a noun.

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi]: This is a postposition meaning "on". It is similar to the English "on".

[hi]ਬੈਠਾ[/hi]: This is a verb meaning "sitting". It is in the present tense and is the masculine singular form. This is similar to the english word "is sitting".

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions.

Punjabi verbs are conjugated for gender and number.

The word order in Punjabi is often Subject-Object-Verb.

English: The person is sitting on the chair.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੋਕ ਕੁਰਸੀ 'ਤੇ ਬੈਠਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is positive. English: He is a positive person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਸਕਾਰਾਤਮਕ ਵਿਅਕਤੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - a/an

[hi]ਸਕਾਰਾਤਮਕ[/hi] - positive

[hi]ਵਿਅਕਤੀ[/hi] - person

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is.

This sentence uses the simple present tense. [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb "to be" (in the third person singular).

The Punjabi word [hi]ਸਕਾਰਾਤਮਕ[/hi] is the noun form of the adjective "positive".

The next word is failure. English: He failed the exam.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਇਮਤਿਹਾਨ 'ਚ ਫੇਲ ਹੋ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]uhne[/hi] - He (masculine singular) - This is a contracted form of [hi]ਉਸ ਨੇ[/hi] ([hi]us ne[/hi]), which is the more formal way of saying "He".

[hi]ਇਮਤਿਹਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]imtihaan[/hi] - Exam - This word is derived from the Persian word "imtihan".

[hi]'ਚ[/hi] - [hi]'ch[/hi] - In, inside - This is a shortened form of [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] ([hi]vich[/hi]), which means "in". This short form is used in casual speech and writing.

[hi]ਫੇਲ[/hi] - [hi]fail[/hi] - Fail - This word is borrowed from English.

[hi]ਹੋ ਗਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]ho gaya[/hi] - Became, happened - This is the past tense of the verb "to be" ([hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]hona[/hi]). This sentence structure "verb + [hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] ([hi]gya[/hi])" is often used to express an action that was completed in the past.

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi uses grammatical gender, so the word for "he" is different from the word for "she".

Contractions: Punjabi often uses contractions to simplify speech.

Borrowed words: Punjabi has borrowed words from other languages, particularly Persian and English.

English: He failed the exam.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਇਮਤਿਹਾਨ 'ਚ ਫੇਲ ਹੋ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is glass. English: The glass is broken.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਚਾ ਟੁੱਟ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੱਚਾ[/hi] - [hi]kacchā[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "glass". It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਟੁੱਟ[/hi] - [hi]ṭuṭṭ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to break".

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]gayā[/hi] - This is a past tense marker that indicates the action has already happened.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - This is the present tense marker in Punjabi. It indicates that the action is complete.

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, the adjective [hi]ਟੁੱਟ[/hi] agrees with the gender of the noun [hi]ਕੱਚਾ[/hi], which is masculine.

Tense Markers: Punjabi uses different tense markers to indicate the time of the action. In this sentence, [hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] together indicate past tense.

This sentence highlights how Punjabi uses suffixes to mark grammatical features like tense and gender agreement.

The next word is satisfy. English: He satisfied his hunger.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਭੁੱਖ ਮਿਟਾਈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He/She/It (Third-person singular pronoun) + [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - (Grammatical particle marking subject in a sentence)

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - His/Her/Its (possessive pronoun, agrees with the subject)

[hi]ਭੁੱਖ[/hi] - Hunger (noun)

[hi]ਮਿਟਾਈ[/hi] - Satisfied (past tense of verb "ਮਿਟਾਉਣਾ")

This sentence uses the past tense of the verb [hi]ਮਿਟਾਉਣਾ[/hi], which means "to satisfy" or "to quench". It is important to note the subject-verb agreement; the subject is singular ([hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He) and the verb is also in the singular form ([hi]ਮਿਟਾਈ[/hi]).

English: He satisfied his hunger.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਭੁੱਖ ਮਿਟਾਈ[/hi].

The next word is sale. English: The sale is tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਵਿਕਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] - means "tomorrow".

[hi]ਵਿਕਰੀ[/hi] - means "sale".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is the present tense form of the verb "to be"

The sentence is in the simple present tense. It is a declarative sentence, meaning it makes a statement.

English: The sale is tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਵਿਕਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is someone. English: Someone is here.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੋਈ[/hi] [hi]ਇੱਥੇ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੋਈ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "someone." It's a pronoun, and it's used to refer to an unspecified person.

[hi]ਇੱਥੇ[/hi] - This word means "here." It's an adverb that indicates location.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi verb "to be." In this sentence, it's in the present tense, and it's used to indicate that someone exists in the present moment.

Key concept: The Punjabi sentence structure is similar to English in this example. The subject, "someone," is followed by the location, "here," and then the verb "is."

The next word is hot. English: It is very hot today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj bahut garmi hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] means "today". This is a very common word in Punjabi and it's useful for talking about the present day.

[hi]bahut[/hi] means "very". This is an important word for expressing intensity, just like "very" in English.

[hi]garmi[/hi] means "heat" or "hotness". It refers to the temperature of the environment.

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense of the verb "to be". It's used to describe a state or condition, in this case, the state of the weather.

Key Concept: The structure of this sentence is very similar to the English structure. It follows the subject-verb-object pattern. Remember that the word order in Punjabi is typically Subject-Object-Verb.

The next word is death. English: Death is a natural part of life.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੌਤ ਜ਼ਿੰਦਗੀ ਦਾ ਇੱਕ ਕੁਦਰਤੀ ਹਿੱਸਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੌਤ[/hi] - death. This is the main word. It is a noun.

[hi]ਜ਼ਿੰਦਗੀ[/hi] - life. Another noun, the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of. This is a postposition that shows possession.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - a/one. This is an indefinite article.

[hi]ਕੁਦਰਤੀ[/hi] - natural. This is an adjective. It describes the noun [hi]ਹਿੱਸਾ[/hi].

[hi]ਹਿੱਸਾ[/hi] - part. This is a noun.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is. This is the copula or linking verb. It links the subject and predicate.

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: These function like prepositions in English. They show the relationship between words.

Copula: The verb to be links the subject of the sentence to the predicate.

Definite and Indefinite Articles: [hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] is an indefinite article like "a" or "an" in English. There is no definite article in Punjabi.

Translation:

[hi]ਮੌਤ ਜ਼ਿੰਦਗੀ ਦਾ ਇੱਕ ਕੁਦਰਤੀ ਹਿੱਸਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - Death is a natural part of life.

The next word is citizen. English: He is a citizen of India.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਭਾਰਤ ਦਾ ਨਾਗਰਿਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਭਾਰਤ[/hi] - [hi]bharat[/hi] - India

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of, belonging to

[hi]ਨਾਗਰਿਕ[/hi] - [hi]naagrik[/hi] - citizen

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a possessive particle that indicates belonging. Here, it shows that the citizen belongs to India.

[hi]ਨਾਗਰਿਕ[/hi] is a noun that refers to a citizen of a country.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb "to be." It is used to state a fact or an existing state.

Memorization tip:

Remember the phrase [hi]ਭਾਰਤ ਦਾ ਨਾਗਰਿਕ[/hi] (citizen of India) as it is commonly used and will help you build your vocabulary.

The next word is paint. English: He painted the wall with blue paint.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦਿਵਾਰ ਨੂੰ ਨੀਲੇ ਰੰਗ ਨਾਲ ਰੰਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She/It (masculine singular) - Subject pronoun

[hi]ਦਿਵਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]diwaar[/hi] - Wall - Object of the verb

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - To/For - Preposition indicating direction

[hi]ਨੀਲੇ[/hi] - [hi]neele[/hi] - Blue - Adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਰੰਗ[/hi] (color)

[hi]ਰੰਗ[/hi] - [hi]rang[/hi] - Color - Object of the preposition [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] (with)

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]naal[/hi] - With - Preposition indicating instrument or accompaniment

[hi]ਰੰਗਿਆ।[/hi] - [hi]rangya.[/hi] - Painted - Past tense verb

Key concepts:

Gender in Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] (usne) is used because the subject is masculine.

Prepositions: Punjabi uses prepositions like [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] (nu) and [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] (naal) to indicate direction, purpose, or instrument.

Word order: The basic word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb.

English: He painted the wall with blue paint.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦਿਵਾਰ ਨੂੰ ਨੀਲੇ ਰੰਗ ਨਾਲ ਰੰਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is benefit. English: This is a great benefit for the whole community.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਸਮੁੱਚੇ ਭਾਈਚਾਰੇ ਲਈ ਵੱਡਾ ਲਾਭ ਹੈ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਸਮੁੱਚੇ[/hi] - whole/entire

[hi]ਭਾਈਚਾਰੇ[/hi] - community

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for

[hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] - big/great

[hi]ਲਾਭ[/hi] - benefit

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] is a postposition that can mean “for” but also “to” depending on the context.

[hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] is a very common adjective meaning “big” or “great.” It is important to remember that in Punjabi adjectives usually come after the noun.

The next word is inside. English: The cat is inside the house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਘਰ ਦੇ ਅੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] - [hi]billi[/hi] - "cat" (feminine noun)

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - [hi]ghar[/hi] - "house" (masculine noun)

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] - "of" - indicates possession and is used before a noun

[hi]ਅੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]andar[/hi] - "inside" (preposition) - indicates location.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - "is" (present tense, singular, third person)

Key concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns are gendered, so it's important to learn the gender of each noun.

Case: Punjabi uses a case system, which indicates the function of a noun in a sentence. Here, "of" (de) is a possessive case marker.

Prepositions: Prepositions like "inside" (andar) are used to show the relationship between a noun and another element in the sentence.

Verb conjugation: Punjabi verbs are conjugated based on person, number, and tense.

English: The cat is inside the house.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਘਰ ਦੇ ਅੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is collection. English: He has a collection of old coins.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਪੁਰਾਣੇ ਸਿੱਕਿਆਂ ਦਾ ਇੱਕ ਸੰਗ੍ਰਹਿ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he" in the possessive form. It means "his" or "he has."

[hi]ਪੁਰਾਣੇ[/hi] - This is an adjective, meaning "old". It modifies the next word.

[hi]ਸਿੱਕਿਆਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of [hi]ਸਿੱਕਾ[/hi], meaning "coin". This is the object of the sentence, and it is in the plural because we are talking about more than one coin.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is a postposition that indicates possession. It means "of" or "belonging to". It connects the noun "coins" to the next word.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the numeral "one", meaning "a" or "an" in this context.

[hi]ਸੰਗ੍ਰਹਿ[/hi] - This is a noun, meaning "collection". It is the object of the sentence.

Key Concepts:

The use of the possessive form [hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] to indicate ownership

The pluralization of nouns like [hi]ਸਿੱਕਿਆਂ[/hi]

The use of the postposition [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] to show possession

The structure of the sentence, with the subject, verb, and object

English: He has a collection of old coins.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਪੁਰਾਣੇ ਸਿੱਕਿਆਂ ਦਾ ਇੱਕ ਸੰਗ੍ਰਹਿ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is likely. English: It is likely that he will come tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਲ ਉਹ ਆਉਣਾ ਸੰਭਵ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਲ[/hi] - kal - tomorrow

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - oh - he

[hi]ਆਉਣਾ[/hi] - auna - to come

[hi]ਸੰਭਵ[/hi] - sambhav - possible, likely

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - hai - is

This sentence uses the present tense of the verb "to be" ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - hai) and the future tense of the verb "to come" ([hi]ਆਉਣਾ[/hi] - auna) to express that something is likely to occur. The word "likely" is translated as [hi]ਸੰਭਵ[/hi] - sambhav.

Remember that the word order in Punjabi can be quite flexible. While the most common word order for a simple sentence is subject-verb-object, the subject can also be placed at the end.

The next word is prepare. English: I am preparing for the exam.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਪ੍ਰੀਖਿਆ ਦੀ ਤਿਆਰੀ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ।

[hi]maiṁ prīkhā dī tayārī kar rahiā haaṁ.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]maiṁ[/hi] - I, me

[hi]prīkhā[/hi] - exam

[hi]dī[/hi] - of

[hi]tayārī[/hi] - preparation

[hi]kar[/hi] - do/make

[hi]rahiā[/hi] - am doing (present continuous tense, masculine singular)

[hi]haaṁ[/hi] - I am (present tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

[hi]dī[/hi] - This is used to show possession, similar to the English 'of'

[hi]kar[/hi] - This is a very common verb meaning 'to do/make'

[hi]rahiā[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb 'kar' for the masculine singular. You will find yourself using this tense a lot as it shows that an action is ongoing.

English: I am preparing for the exam.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਪ੍ਰੀਖਿਆ ਦੀ ਤਿਆਰੀ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ।

[hi]maiṁ prīkhā dī tayārī kar rahiā haaṁ.[/hi]

The next word is that. English: That is a beautiful book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh [hi] [hi]ek [hi] [hi]sundar [hi] [hi]kitab [hi] [hi]hai [hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh [hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun, pointing to something nearby)

[hi]ek [hi] - one (indefinite article)

[hi]sundar [hi] - beautiful (adjective)

[hi]kitab [hi] - book (noun)

[hi]hai [hi] - is (copula verb, linking the subject and the adjective)

Key Concepts:

Demonstrative Pronoun: [hi]Eh [hi] indicates that the book is close to the speaker.

Indefinite Article: [hi]ek [hi] is used because it is one book and not a specific book.

Adjective: [hi]sundar [hi] describes the book.

Copula Verb: [hi]hai [hi] links the subject ([hi]Eh [hi] [hi]kitab [hi]) and the adjective ([hi]sundar [hi]).

English: That is a beautiful book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh [hi] [hi]ek [hi] [hi]sundar [hi] [hi]kitab [hi] [hi]hai [hi].

The next word is stick. English: The stick is on the ground.

Punjabi: [hi]Laṭṭī zameen te hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Laṭṭī[/hi] - stick (feminine)

[hi]zameen[/hi] - ground

[hi]te[/hi] - on

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

The word [hi]Laṭṭī[/hi] for stick is feminine in Punjabi, so the verb [hi]hai[/hi] (is) is also in the feminine form.

The word [hi]te[/hi] is a postposition that indicates location, and it is used with the noun [hi]zameen[/hi] to show that the stick is on the ground.

English: The stick is on the ground.

Punjabi: [hi]Laṭṭī zameen te hai[/hi].

The next word is gas. English: The car ran out of gas.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਦਾ ਪੈਟਰੋਲ ਖਤਮ ਹੋ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੱਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]gaddi[/hi] - car

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - possessive particle, meaning "of"

[hi]ਪੈਟਰੋਲ[/hi] - [hi]petroal[/hi] - gasoline, petrol

[hi]ਖਤਮ[/hi] - [hi]khatam[/hi] - finished, ended

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - [hi]ho[/hi] - auxiliary verb, meaning "became"

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]gya[/hi] - past tense particle, indicating completion of the action

Key concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a possessive particle, similar to "of" in English.

[hi]ਹੋ ਗਿਆ[/hi] indicates that the action is finished.

[hi]ਪੈਟਰੋਲ[/hi] is the Punjabi word for gasoline or petrol.

English: The car ran out of gas.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੱਡੀ ਦਾ ਪੈਟਰੋਲ ਖਤਮ ਹੋ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is child. English: The child is playing in the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚਾ ਪਾਰਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਖੇਡ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚਾ[/hi] - [hi]bacchā[/hi] - child (masculine)

[hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] - [hi]pārka[/hi] - park

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vicch[/hi] - in

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - [hi]khed[/hi] - play (verb)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]rihā hai[/hi] - is playing (present continuous tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is a postposition meaning "in" or "within." It is similar to the English preposition "in."

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - This is a common construction in Punjabi for the present continuous tense. It is made up of the present participle of the verb (in this case [hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - [hi]khed[/hi]) and the auxiliary verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi].

Translation: The child is playing in the park.

The next word is completely. English: He completely forgot about the meeting.

Punjabi: ਉਹ ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਬਾਰੇ ਪੂਰੀ ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ ਭੁੱਲ ਗਿਆ।

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] [hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ[/hi] [hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] [hi]ਪੂਰੀ[/hi] [hi]ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] [hi]ਭੁੱਲ[/hi] [hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun, subject)

[hi]ਮੀਟਿੰਗ[/hi] - Meeting (noun, object)

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - About (postposition, indicating relation to the meeting)

[hi]ਪੂਰੀ[/hi] - Complete (adjective, modifying "ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ" - "way")

[hi]ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - Way (noun, indicates manner)

[hi]ਭੁੱਲ[/hi] - Forgot (verb, past tense)

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - Went (auxiliary verb, indicating past tense)

Key Concept: [hi]ਪੂਰੀ[/hi] [hi]ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] together mean "completely", and [hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] is the auxiliary verb indicating past tense.

English: He completely forgot about the meeting.

Punjabi: ਉਹ ਮੀਟਿੰਗ ਬਾਰੇ ਪੂਰੀ ਤਰ੍ਹਾਂ ਭੁੱਲ ਗਿਆ।

The next word is part. English: He is part of the team.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਟੀਮ ਦਾ ਹਿੱਸਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He, she, it (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਟੀਮ[/hi] - Team (noun, object of the preposition)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - Of (possessive particle, showing possession)

[hi]ਹਿੱਸਾ[/hi] - Part (noun, object of the preposition)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (copula verb)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a possessive particle, similar to "of" in English. It connects the noun "team" to the noun "part."

This sentence uses the copula verb "[hi]ਹੈ[/hi]" to link the subject "he" to the predicative noun phrase "[hi]ਟੀਮ ਦਾ ਹਿੱਸਾ[/hi]"

Translation: He is part of the team.

The next word is reply. Please provide an English word so I can create a Punjabi sentence for you with a detailed breakdown. I am excited to share my knowledge of the Punjabi language with you!

The next word is far. English: He is far away from home.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਘਰੋਂ ਦੂਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਘਰੋਂ[/hi] - From home (This is a postposition, meaning it comes after the noun it modifies).

[hi]ਦੂਰ[/hi] - Far. This word is an adjective modifying [hi]ਘਰੋਂ[/hi]

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (This is the present tense form of the verb "to be").

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions, which are words that come after the noun they modify. These are similar to prepositions in English (e.g., "from", "to", "on").

Word Order: In Punjabi, the basic word order is subject-object-verb (SOV), unlike English which is subject-verb-object (SVO).

Translation: He is far away from home.

The next word is cheap. English: This shirt is cheap.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kurtaa sasta hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]kurtaa[/hi] - Shirt

[hi]sasta[/hi] - Cheap (adjective)

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (verb "to be")

This sentence uses the structure "subject + adjective + verb". The word order is important in Punjabi, and the adjective always comes before the verb.

Key concept: In Punjabi, adjectives often follow the noun they modify.

The next word is afternoon. English: It's afternoon.

Punjabi: [hi]ਦੁਪਹਿਰ ਹੋ ਗਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਦੁਪਹਿਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "afternoon".

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - This is the verb "to be" in the present tense, used here as a helping verb.

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - This is the past participle of the verb "to go".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be".

This is a common way to express the time of day in Punjabi. You will see this pattern with other times of day: [hi]ਸਵੇਰ ਹੋ ਗਈ ਹੈ[/hi] - "It's morning".

Important Note: [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is very important to use at the end of the sentence. It can never be omitted!

The next word is we. English: We are going to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਰਹੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]asīṁ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun for "we" in Punjabi. It is used for both plural and formal singular.

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]bāzār[/hi] - This word means "market" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - [hi]jā[/hi] - This is the verb "to go" in the present continuous tense. It is conjugated based on the subject. In this case, the subject is [hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - "we".

[hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - [hi]rahe[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense marker for the verb "to be" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]hāṁ[/hi] - This is the auxiliary verb that indicates that the action is happening in the present continuous tense.

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: The verb conjugation in Punjabi changes depending on the subject pronoun. In this sentence, because the subject is [hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - "we", the verb "to go" is conjugated as [hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - [hi]jā[/hi] and not just [hi]ਜਾਉ[/hi] - [hi]jāo[/hi] which is the singular form.

Present Continuous Tense: This tense is used to describe an action that is happening right now. In Punjabi, the present continuous tense is formed by using the present tense of the verb "to be" (in this case [hi]ਰਹੇ[/hi] - [hi]rahe[/hi]) along with the present continuous tense marker of the main verb.

Auxiliary Verbs: Auxiliary verbs, such as [hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]hāṁ[/hi], are used to help form different tenses and moods in a sentence. In this case, [hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]hāṁ[/hi] is used to indicate that the action is happening in the present continuous tense.

English: We are going to the market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਰਹੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is which. English: Which book did you buy?

Punjabi: [hi]Tuhaanu kis kitab vaalaa kitaab kharidaa?[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Tuhaanu[/hi] - This is the polite form of "you" in Punjabi.

[hi]kis[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "which" and is used to ask about a specific item from a group.

[hi]kitab vaalaa[/hi] - This is a compound word, meaning "book-related". Vaalaa is a suffix that is often added to nouns to indicate a quality or association.

[hi]kitab[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "book".

[hi]kharidaa[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to buy" in Punjabi.

Key Concept: Punjabi uses a different grammatical structure than English, employing a word order that emphasizes the object of the sentence. This is common in South Asian languages.

Memorization: Think of "kis" as the Punjabi equivalent of "which" and "kitab vaalaa" as a shortcut for "book-related".

English: Which book did you buy?

Punjabi: [hi]Tuhaanu kis kitab vaalaa kitaab kharidaa?[/hi]

The next word is novel. English: She is reading a novel.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਨਾਵਲ ਪੜ੍ਹ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "she" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the indefinite article "a" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਨਾਵਲ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "novel".

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi verb for "read", in the present continuous tense. It is conjugated to match the gender and number of the subject pronoun "she", hence the ending [hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi].

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense marker in Punjabi, used in this sentence to indicate that she is currently reading the novel.

Remember, this is a simple sentence structure, subject-verb-object. The verb "read" is in the present continuous tense. To emphasize the ongoing action of reading.

Key Concept: Punjabi verbs can be conjugated to match the gender and number of the subject. For example, in this case, the verb "read" is conjugated with the ending [hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] because the subject is "she", which is feminine singular.

English: She is reading a novel.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਨਾਵਲ ਪੜ੍ਹ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is behind. English: The dog is hiding behind the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੁੱਤਾ ਦਰੱਖਤ ਦੇ ਪਿੱਛੇ ਲੁਕਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੁੱਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]kutta[/hi] (dog) - This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਦਰੱਖਤ[/hi] - [hi]darakht[/hi] (tree) - This is the object of the preposition.

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] (of) - This is a postposition, indicating possession or belonging.

[hi]ਪਿੱਛੇ[/hi] - [hi]pichhe[/hi] (behind) - This is the preposition, indicating location.

[hi]ਲੁਕਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]lukiya[/hi] (hidden) - This is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਲੁਕਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]lukna[/hi] (to hide) and describes the state of the dog.

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]hoya[/hi] (being) - This is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]hona[/hi] (to be) and is used to make the sentence grammatically correct.

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the postposition [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] (of) to indicate possession or belonging. This is common in Punjabi, and is similar to the English "of" in phrases like "the roof of the house."

The past participle form of verbs is used in Punjabi to describe states or actions that have already occurred. This is similar to the English use of past participles in phrases like "He is tired," or "The door is open."

Remember that Punjabi is a flexible language, and there are many ways to express the same idea. You can also use the preposition [hi]ਪਿੱਛੇ[/hi] - [hi]pichhe[/hi] (behind) with other postpositions, such as [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]te[/hi] (on) or [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] (in). For example, you could say [hi]ਕੁੱਤਾ ਦਰੱਖਤ ਦੇ ਪਿੱਛੇ ਤੇ ਬੈਠਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]kutta darakht de pichhe te baitha hai[/hi] (The dog is sitting behind the tree)

English: The dog is hiding behind the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੁੱਤਾ ਦਰੱਖਤ ਦੇ ਪਿੱਛੇ ਲੁਕਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is hide. English: The cat hid under the table.

Punjabi: ਬਿੱਲੀ ਮੇਜ਼ ਦੇ ਹੇਠਾਂ ਲੁਕ ਗਈ।

[hi]billi[/hi] [hi]mezz[/hi] [hi]de[/hi] [hi]hetthan[/hi] [hi]luk[/hi] [hi]gai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]billi[/hi] (cat) - The subject of the sentence.

[hi]mezz[/hi] (table) - The object under which the cat hid.

[hi]de[/hi] (of) - This is a postposition indicating the location of the table.

[hi]hetthan[/hi] (under) - This is another postposition indicating the location relative to the table.

[hi]luk[/hi] (hid) - The past tense verb of the sentence.

[hi]gai[/hi] (went) - This is a past tense auxiliary verb, which completes the sentence. It is used with intransitive verbs to mark past tense.

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions to indicate location.

Punjabi utilizes a past tense auxiliary verb with intransitive verbs.

The next word is join. English: The two pieces of fabric are joined together.

Punjabi: [hi]Do [hi] kapde [hi] ek [hi] saath [hi] jude [hi] hue [hi] ne. [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Do [hi] (two)

[hi]kapde [hi] (pieces of fabric)

[hi]ek [hi] saath [hi] (together) - the word [hi]saath [hi] means "with" in this instance

[hi]jude [hi] (joined) - the past participle of the verb [hi]judna [hi] (to join)

[hi]hue [hi] (are) - the verb [hi]hona [hi] (to be) in the past participle. This is part of the present continuous tense which is formed using [hi]hue [hi] with the past participle of another verb.

[hi]ne [hi] (are) - the ending of the sentence, which is required in Punjabi to show the sentence is plural and in the present continuous tense.

This sentence uses the past participle of the verb [hi]judna [hi] (to join) which is [hi]jude [hi]. This word is a key word to learn. The sentence uses the present continuous tense which is formed with [hi]hue [hi] followed by the past participle of another verb. This sentence also uses the plural ending [hi]ne [hi].

The next word is effort. English: He put a lot of effort into his studies.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne apni padhai vich bahut mehnat ki[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi] = He (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]apni[/hi] = his (possessive pronoun)

[hi]padhai[/hi] = studies (noun, feminine)

[hi]vich[/hi] = in (preposition, used to show location or time)

[hi]bahut[/hi] = a lot (adverb)

[hi]mehnat[/hi] = effort (noun, feminine)

[hi]ki[/hi] = did (past tense of verb "karna", to do)

Key Concepts:

The use of the preposition [hi]vich[/hi] to indicate location (in his studies)

The use of the noun [hi]mehnat[/hi] to denote effort

The use of the past tense verb [hi]ki[/hi] to indicate an action that was completed in the past.

English: He put a lot of effort into his studies.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne apni padhai vich bahut mehnat ki[/hi]

The next word is real. English: This is a real problem.

Punjabi: [hi]Ee [hi]ek [hi]asli [hi]masla [hi]hai. [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Ee [hi] is the demonstrative pronoun "this".

[hi]ek [hi] means "a" or "one".

[hi]asli [hi] means "real".

[hi]masla [hi] means "problem".

[hi]hai [hi] means "is".

This sentence uses the word order typical of Punjabi - Subject-Object-Verb. It also demonstrates the use of the "hai" verb, which is used in present tense and is often used in the simple present tense.

English: This is a real problem.

Punjabi: [hi]Ee [hi]ek [hi]asli [hi]masla [hi]hai. [/hi]

The next word is activity. English: The children are engaged in an activity.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਕਿਰਿਆ ਵਿੱਚ ਰੁੱਝੇ ਹੋਏ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi] - [hi]bacche[/hi] - children

[hi]ਕਿਰਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]kiriya[/hi] - activity

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]ਰੁੱਝੇ[/hi] - [hi]rujhe[/hi] - engaged

[hi]ਹੋਏ[/hi] - [hi]hoye[/hi] - are

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - [hi]han.[/hi] - This is the ending particle that marks the end of the sentence, akin to a period in English.

Key concepts:

Noun: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi] - [hi]bacche[/hi] - children

Noun: [hi]ਕਿਰਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]kiriya[/hi] - activity

Preposition: [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in

Verb: [hi]ਰੁੱਝੇ[/hi] - [hi]rujhe[/hi] - engaged

Auxiliary verb: [hi]ਹੋਏ[/hi] - [hi]hoye[/hi] - are

Sentence ending particle: [hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - [hi]han.[/hi]

Note: This sentence demonstrates the use of the present continuous tense, which is formed with the verb "to be" (in this case, [hi]ਹੋਏ[/hi] - [hi]hoye[/hi]) and a present participle (in this case, [hi]ਰੁੱਝੇ[/hi] - [hi]rujhe[/hi]).

The next word is win. English: He won the competition.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੁਕਾਬਲਾ ਜਿੱਤ ਲਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun, meaning "he" or "she".

[hi]ਮੁਕਾਬਲਾ[/hi] - This is the noun, meaning "competition".

[hi]ਜਿੱਤ[/hi] - This is the verb, meaning "to win". Note: The verb is used in the past tense.

[hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] - This is a particle that emphasizes that the action happened.

Key Concept:

In Punjabi, the verb typically comes after the object. In this sentence, the verb [hi]ਜਿੱਤ[/hi] comes after the object [hi]ਮੁਕਾਬਲਾ[/hi]. This is a common pattern in Punjabi grammar.

Translation: He won the competition.

The next word is hall. English: The students gathered in the hall.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹਾਲ ਵਿੱਚ ਇਕੱਠੇ ਹੋਏ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]vidyarthi[/hi] - student (plural)

[hi]ਹਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]haal[/hi] - hall

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]ਇਕੱਠੇ[/hi] - [hi]ikathhe[/hi] - gathered, together

[hi]ਹੋਏ[/hi] - [hi]hoye[/hi] - were, became

Key Concepts:

Postposition: The word [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a postposition, similar to the English preposition "in". It is placed after the noun it modifies ([hi]ਹਾਲ[/hi] - hall).

Verb Conjugation: The verb [hi]ਹੋਏ[/hi] is conjugated in the past tense, indicating that the action has already occurred.

Word Order: Punjabi generally follows a Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) word order. In this sentence, the subject ([hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi]) comes first, followed by the object ([hi]ਹਾਲ[/hi]), and then the verb ([hi]ਹੋਏ[/hi]).

Translation: The students gathered in the hall.

The next word is environmental. English: The environment is important for our health.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਾਤਾਵਰਨ ਸਾਡੀ ਸਿਹਤ ਲਈ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਾਤਾਵਰਨ[/hi] - [hi]vaataavaran[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "environment." It is a noun and is used here to represent the surroundings and conditions in which we live.

[hi]ਸਾਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]saadi[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "our." It is a possessive adjective that modifies the noun [hi]ਸਿਹਤ[/hi] (health). It is a form of the Punjabi word for "we."

[hi]ਸਿਹਤ[/hi] - [hi]sihat[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "health." It is a noun and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - [hi]lai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "for." It is a preposition that connects the noun [hi]ਸਿਹਤ[/hi] (health) to the adjective [hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] (important).

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] - [hi]mahatavapurna[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "important." It is an adjective that describes the noun [hi]ਸਿਹਤ[/hi] (health).

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is." It is a verb that acts as the copula linking the subject [hi]ਸਿਹਤ[/hi] (health) with the adjective [hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] (important).

Key Concepts:

Punjabi is a subject-verb-object (SVO) language. This means the subject of the sentence usually comes first, followed by the verb, and then the object.

Punjabi uses a copula (a verb that connects the subject and predicate).

Punjabi has a rich grammatical system. Understanding these concepts is essential to understanding the sentence structure.

English: The environment is important for our health.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਾਤਾਵਰਨ ਸਾਡੀ ਸਿਹਤ ਲਈ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is trade. English: They traded their old car for a new one.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ ਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਪੁਰਾਣੀ ਕਾਰ ਇੱਕ ਨਵੀਂ ਕਾਰ ਦੇ ਬਦਲੇ ਵੇਚ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨਾਂ[/hi] - They (plural subject)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - -ne (postposition marking the subject of a transitive verb)

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - Their (possessive adjective)

[hi]ਪੁਰਾਣੀ[/hi] - Old (adjective)

[hi]ਕਾਰ[/hi] - Car (noun)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - One (indefinite article)

[hi]ਨਵੀਂ[/hi] - New (adjective)

[hi]ਕਾਰ[/hi] - Car (noun)

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - Of/from (postposition)

[hi]ਬਦਲੇ[/hi] - In exchange (postposition)

[hi]ਵੇਚ[/hi] - To sell (verb)

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - Gave (past tense of [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] - to give)

Key concepts:

The use of the postposition [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] to mark the subject of the verb.

The use of possessive adjectives like [hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] to indicate possession.

The postposition [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] used to show ownership or source.

The use of the postposition [hi]ਬਦਲੇ[/hi] to indicate exchange.

This sentence showcases a common Punjabi grammatical structure. The sentence structure follows subject-verb-object order and uses postpositions to indicate relationships between words.

The next word is opinion. English: What is your opinion on this matter?

Punjabi: [hi]Is nu [hi]kise [hi]nu [hi]ki [hi]raa[hi] [hi]hai?[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Is [hi] - This

[hi]nu [hi] - To

[hi]kise [hi] - Anyone (formal/polite)

[hi]nu [hi] - To (optional, but makes it sound more polite)

[hi]ki [hi] - What

[hi]raa[hi] - Opinion

[hi]hai? [hi] - Is? (Is there?)

This sentence uses the formal/polite version of "you" (formal "you" in Punjabi is "aap" but in this case, "aap" is implied, so we use "nu"). It's a common polite way to ask for someone's opinion. In Punjabi, we can express "what's your opinion" in a few different ways, but this is a common one.

The next word is partner. English: My partner is a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ ਸਾਥੀ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]mera[/hi] (my)

[hi]ਸਾਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]saathi[/hi] (partner)

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] - [hi]ḍākṭar[/hi] (doctor)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] (is)

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Subject-Verb-Object (SVO)

Gender Agreement: The noun [hi]ਸਾਥੀ[/hi] (partner) is masculine, and the verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is) agrees with it.

Possessive Pronoun: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] (my) modifies the noun [hi]ਸਾਥੀ[/hi] (partner)

English: My partner is a doctor.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ ਸਾਥੀ ਡਾਕਟਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is correct. English: He corrected the mistake.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne galti sudhari[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun, third person singular, masculine)

[hi]galti[/hi] - Mistake (noun, feminine)

[hi]sudhari[/hi] - Corrected (verb, past tense, feminine)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, nouns and adjectives have gender (masculine or feminine). Verbs also agree with the subject in gender. Here, "[hi]galti[/hi]" is feminine, so the verb "[hi]sudhari[/hi]" is also feminine.

Translation: He corrected the mistake.

The next word is regard. English: He regards her as his daughter.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੀ ਧੀ ਸਮਝਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] - Her (direct object)

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - His (possessive)

[hi]ਧੀ[/hi] - Daughter

[hi]ਸਮਝਦਾ[/hi] - Regards/Considers

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is

Key Concepts:

Direct Object: [hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] is the direct object of the verb [hi]ਸਮਝਦਾ[/hi]. It is the person being regarded.

Possessive: [hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] is a possessive adjective, showing that the daughter belongs to him.

Present Tense: The verb [hi]ਸਮਝਦਾ[/hi] is in the present tense, indicating a continuous action.

English: He regards her as his daughter.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਆਪਣੀ ਧੀ ਸਮਝਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is group. English: The group of students is very lively.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਦਾ ਸਮੂਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਜੀਵੰਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] - [hi]vidyaarthian[/hi] - students (plural) - This is the plural form of the word [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] [hi]vidyaarthi[/hi] - student.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of - This is a possessive particle that connects the noun [hi]ਸਮੂਹ[/hi] [hi]samooh[/hi] - group to the noun [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] [hi]vidyaarthian[/hi] - students.

[hi]ਸਮੂਹ[/hi] - [hi]samooh[/hi] - group - This is a noun meaning "group" and is in the singular form.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very - This is an intensifier that emphasizes the adjective [hi]ਜੀਵੰਤ[/hi] [hi]jeevant[/hi] - lively.

[hi]ਜੀਵੰਤ[/hi] - [hi]jeevant[/hi] - lively - This is an adjective describing the group of students.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in Punjabi, and it agrees with the singular noun [hi]ਸਮੂਹ[/hi] [hi]samooh[/hi] - group.

Key Concept: This sentence highlights the use of possessive particles in Punjabi. The particle [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] connects the noun [hi]ਸਮੂਹ[/hi] [hi]samooh[/hi] - group to the noun [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] [hi]vidyaarthian[/hi] - students, indicating that the group belongs to the students.

The next word is successful. English: He was successful in his business.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਕਾਰੋਬਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਕਾਮਯਾਬ ਹੋ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He / She / It

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - his / her / its (possessive)

[hi]ਕਾਰੋਬਾਰ[/hi] - business

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਕਾਮਯਾਬ[/hi] - successful

[hi]ਹੋ ਗਿਆ[/hi] - became

Key concept: This sentence uses the past tense of the verb "to become" ([hi]ਹੋ ਗਿਆ[/hi]). This means that the action of becoming successful is already completed. The word [hi]ਕਾਮਯਾਬ[/hi] is an adjective describing the noun "[hi]ਕਾਰੋਬਾਰ[/hi]".

The next word is press. English: He pressed the button.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne button nu dabaaya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "he" or "she"

[hi]ne[/hi] - This is a particle that marks the subject of the sentence, similar to "has" or "have" in English.

[hi]button[/hi] - This is the word for "button."

[hi]nu[/hi] - This is the accusative case marker, indicating that the button is the object of the verb.

[hi]dabaaya[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to press."

Key Concepts:

Subject-Object Agreement: The verb "[hi]dabaaya[/hi]" is in the singular form because the subject "[hi]Us[/hi]" is singular.

Accusative Case: The word "[hi]button[/hi]" is marked with the accusative case marker "[hi]nu[/hi]" to indicate that it is the direct object of the verb.

English: He pressed the button.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne button nu dabaaya[/hi].

The next word is side. English: He sat on the side of the road.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੜਕ ਦੇ ਕਿਨਾਰੇ ਬੈਠਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he".

[hi]ਸੜਕ[/hi] - This is the noun "road".

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - This is the postposition "of" which is used to indicate possession or relation.

[hi]ਕਿਨਾਰੇ[/hi] - This is the noun "side" or "edge". It refers to the edge of the road.

[hi]ਬੈਠਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense participle "sitting" indicating that the action is completed.

[hi]ਸੀ।[/hi] - This is the past tense copula "was" which means "he was sitting".

Note: In Punjabi, the postposition "de" is often used with nouns to indicate possession or relation. This sentence demonstrates how the postposition [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] works in conjunction with the noun [hi]ਕਿਨਾਰੇ[/hi] to indicate the "side" of the "road".

This sentence is grammatically correct and demonstrates a common structure used in Punjabi. Remember that the order of the words in Punjabi is flexible but the postposition "de" must always precede the noun it modifies.

The next word is time. English: Time is precious.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਕਤ ਬਹੁਤ ਕੀਮਤੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਕਤ[/hi] [hi]vakata[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "time". It is a noun.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] [hi]bahuta[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "very" or "much". It is an adverb.

[hi]ਕੀਮਤੀ[/hi] [hi]keemti[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "precious" or "valuable". It is an adjective.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is". It is a verb and is in the present tense.

Key Concepts:

Sentence Structure: The Punjabi sentence follows the Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) structure just like English.

Word Order: Adjectives generally come before the nouns they modify, just like in English.

Agreement: The verb "[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]" agrees with the subject "[hi]ਵਕਤ[/hi]", which is singular.

English: Time is precious.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਕਤ ਬਹੁਤ ਕੀਮਤੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is who. English: Who is she?

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kaun hai?[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] means "this" or "she" depending on context.

[hi]kaun[/hi] means "who"

[hi]hai[/hi] means "is"

This sentence uses the interrogative pronoun [hi]kaun[/hi] to ask about the identity of a female person.

The next word is telephone. English: I called my mother on the telephone.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਫ਼ੋਨ ਤੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਮਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਫ਼ੋਨ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] means "I"

[hi]ਫ਼ੋਨ[/hi] means "telephone"

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] means "on" (used to indicate the telephone)

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] means "my" (possessive pronoun for mother)

[hi]ਮਾਂ[/hi] means "mother"

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] means "to" (object marker used with verbs)

[hi]ਫ਼ੋਨ[/hi] means "phone" (verb - to call)

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] means "did" (past tense of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] - to do)

The sentence uses a combination of the noun [hi]ਫ਼ੋਨ[/hi] as a telephone, and as a verb to call. It also utilizes the object marker [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] to connect the verb [hi]ਫ਼ੋਨ[/hi] with the object [hi]ਮਾਂ[/hi].

This sentence demonstrates how a single Punjabi word, [hi]ਫ਼ੋਨ[/hi], can act as both a noun and verb, making the language efficient and expressive. This is a common feature of Punjabi grammar, which is agglutinative, allowing for multiple meanings within a single word or phrase.

The next word is water. English: The water is cold.

Punjabi: [hi]Paani thanda hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Paani[/hi] (water) is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]thanda[/hi] (cold) is the adjective that describes the water.

[hi]hai[/hi] (is) is the present tense verb.

This sentence uses the simple present tense, and is a basic subject-verb-adjective construction. Remember that Punjabi is a subject-verb-object language, unlike English which is subject-object-verb.

The next word is study. English: She studies diligently.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਮਿਹਨਤ ਨਾਲ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third-person singular feminine subject pronoun in the past tense, meaning "she."

[hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ[/hi] - This is the noun "hard work" or "diligence."

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - This is the preposition "with."

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ[/hi] - This is the noun "studies." It is also used as a verb in this context, "to study."

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do," indicating that the action of studying has been completed.

Key Concepts:

This sentence uses the past tense, indicating that the action of studying has already taken place.

The word [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] is often used to express the way or manner in which something is done. In this case, it emphasizes that the studying is done with diligence.

English: She studies diligently.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਮਿਹਨਤ ਨਾਲ ਪੜ੍ਹਾਈ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is excellent. English: This is an excellent book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kitāb bahut vadiya hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi]: This (singular, masculine) - This word is used to refer to something that is nearby or already mentioned.

[hi]kitāb[/hi]: book - This is a common noun, meaning a collection of written or printed pages bound together.

[hi]bahut[/hi]: very, extremely - This is an adverb used to emphasize the degree of something.

[hi]vadiya[/hi]: excellent, good - This is an adjective describing the quality of the book.

[hi]hai[/hi]: is - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be," used to describe the state of the book.

Key Concepts:

Gender in Punjabi: In Punjabi, nouns have a gender, and the choice of pronouns, adjectives, and verbs must agree with that gender. In this case, "[hi]kitāb[/hi]" is a masculine noun, so the pronoun "[hi]Eh[/hi]" (this) is used.

Adverbs in Punjabi: Adverbs are used to modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. In this sentence, "[hi]bahut[/hi]" modifies the adjective "[hi]vadiya[/hi]," indicating a high degree of excellence.

Translation: This book is very good.

The next word is high. English: The building is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ ਬਹੁਤ ਉੱਚੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi] - [hi]imaarat[/hi] - building

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਉੱਚੀ[/hi] - [hi]oochhi[/hi] - high

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ[/hi] is a feminine noun, so the adjective [hi]ਉੱਚੀ[/hi] needs to be in the feminine form.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the present tense of the verb "to be".

English: The building is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਮਾਰਤ ਬਹੁਤ ਉੱਚੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is basis. English: The basis of our happiness is love.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਡੀ ਖੁਸ਼ੀ ਦਾ ਆਧਾਰ ਪਿਆਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਡੀ[/hi] = [hi]saadi[/hi] = our

[hi]ਖੁਸ਼ੀ[/hi] = [hi]khushi[/hi] = happiness

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] = [hi]da[/hi] = of

[hi]ਆਧਾਰ[/hi] = [hi]aadhaar[/hi] = basis

[hi]ਪਿਆਰ[/hi] = [hi]pyaar[/hi] = love

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] = [hi]hai.[/hi] = is

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi word for basis is [hi]ਆਧਾਰ[/hi] [hi]aadhaar[/hi].

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] is used to show possession and is equivalent to "of" in English.

The sentence structure is similar to English, but the word order is slightly different. The subject ([hi]ਖੁਸ਼ੀ[/hi] [hi]khushi[/hi] - happiness) comes before the object ([hi]ਆਧਾਰ[/hi] [hi]aadhaar[/hi] - basis) and the verb ([hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] - is).

English: The basis of our happiness is love.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਡੀ ਖੁਸ਼ੀ ਦਾ ਆਧਾਰ ਪਿਆਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is without. English: He went to the market without buying anything.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ ਪਰ ਕੁਝ ਨਹੀਂ ਖ਼ਰੀਦਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - Market

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - Went (masculine singular past tense of [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] - to go)

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - was (past tense of [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - to be)

[hi]ਪਰ[/hi] - But

[hi]ਕੁਝ[/hi] - Anything/Something

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - Not

[hi]ਖ਼ਰੀਦਿਆ[/hi] - Bought (masculine singular past tense of [hi]ਖ਼ਰੀਦਣਾ[/hi] - to buy)

Key Concept: The Punjabi sentence uses a conjunction [hi]ਪਰ[/hi] (but) to express that the action of going to the market happened without the action of buying anything.

English Translation: He went to the market without buying anything.

The next word is prevent. English: We should prevent accidents.

Punjabi: [hi]Asin nu hadso [hi] [hi]rokan[/hi] [hi]chahiye[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Asin[/hi] - We

[hi]nu[/hi] - to/for us (dative case marker)

[hi]hadso[/hi] - accident(s)

[hi]rokan[/hi] - to prevent

[hi]chahiye[/hi] - should/ought to

Note: [hi]rokan[/hi] is the infinitive form of the verb "to prevent" in Punjabi. [hi]chahiye[/hi] is a modal verb, which indicates obligation or necessity.

English: We should prevent accidents.

The next word is brother. English: He is my brother.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਰਾ ਭਰਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He - This is the subject pronoun for "he" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] - My - This is the possessive adjective for "my" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਭਰਾ[/hi] - Brother - This is the noun for "brother" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in Punjabi, conjugated for the third person singular.

Key concepts:

In Punjabi, the subject pronoun comes before the adjective and the noun.

The verb "to be" comes at the end of the sentence.

Translation: He is my brother.

The next word is election. English: The election was held yesterday.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਚੋਣਾਂ ਹੋਈਆਂ ਸਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] - means "yesterday"

[hi]ਚੋਣਾਂ[/hi] - means "elections"

[hi]ਹੋਈਆਂ[/hi] - is the past participle of the verb "to happen", indicating that the elections took place

[hi]ਸਨ।[/hi] - is the past tense of the verb "to be"

This sentence follows the standard Punjabi sentence structure of subject-verb-object. The subject is implied in this case and refers to the elections.

The word [hi]ਚੋਣਾਂ[/hi] is a feminine noun, which is why the past participle [hi]ਹੋਈਆਂ[/hi] takes the feminine form. This is an important grammatical concept in Punjabi.

This sentence can be helpful in learning about Punjabi tense and gender agreement in Punjabi.

The next word is at. English: He is at the store.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੁਕਾਨ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It. This is the subject of the sentence. This is the third person singular pronoun.

[hi]ਦੁਕਾਨ[/hi] - Store. This is the direct object of the sentence. It is in the singular form.

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - at. This is a postposition and it is used to show location. The postposition is followed by the direct object of the sentence.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is. This is the verb of the sentence. It is in the present tense. It is a third person singular verb and agrees with the subject.

English: He is at the store.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੁਕਾਨ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is switch. English: She switched the light off.

Punjabi: [hi]ਓਹਨੇ ਬੱਤੀ ਬੰਦ ਕਰ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਓਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular past tense pronoun, meaning "she".

[hi]ਬੱਤੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "light".

[hi]ਬੰਦ[/hi] - This means "off".

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - This is the verb "to do", here used in the past tense with the suffix [hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi]. This suffix is used to show that the action was performed by a woman.

The sentence is in the past tense.

Key concepts:

Gender agreement - in Punjabi verbs must agree in gender with the subject of the sentence.

Past tense - Past tense in Punjabi is formed by adding different suffixes to the verb stem.

English: She switched the light off.

Punjabi: [hi]ਓਹਨੇ ਬੱਤੀ ਬੰਦ ਕਰ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is cultural. English: The Punjabi culture is rich and vibrant.

Punjabi: [hi]Punjabi di sanskriti bahut amir te jivan-shali hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Punjabi[/hi] - Punjabi (noun)

[hi]di[/hi] - of, belonging to (possessive particle)

[hi]sanskriti[/hi] - culture (noun)

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very, a lot (adverb)

[hi]amir[/hi] - rich (adjective)

[hi]te[/hi] - and (conjunction)

[hi]jivan-shali[/hi] - vibrant, lively (adjective)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (verb)

Key concepts:

Possessive particles: [hi]di[/hi] indicates possession, like "of" or "belonging to".

Adjectives: [hi]amir[/hi] and [hi]jivan-shali[/hi] describe the noun [hi]sanskriti[/hi].

Conjunctions: [hi]te[/hi] connects two words or phrases, in this case, two adjectives.

The next word is user. Please provide an English word so I can create a Punjabi sentence for you, with a breakdown of the grammar and meaning!

The next word is a. English: A cat is sleeping.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਸੌਂ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] - [hi]billi[/hi] - this is the word for "cat"

[hi]ਸੌਂ[/hi] - [hi]saun[/hi] - this is the word for "sleep". It is in the present continuous tense

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]rahi[/hi] - the ending for present continuous, it denotes 'is doing something'. It is added to the verb in the present tense

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - this is the verb "to be" in the present tense

English: A cat is sleeping.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਸੌਂ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is section. English: The book is divided into three sections.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਤਿੰਨ [hi]ਖੰਡਾਂ[/hi] ਵਿੱਚ ਵੰਡੀ ਹੋਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitab[/hi] - book

[hi]ਤਿੰਨ[/hi] - [hi]tin[/hi] - three

[hi]ਖੰਡਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]khanḍāṁ[/hi] - sections (plural of [hi]ਖੰਡ[/hi] - [hi]khaṇḍ[/hi])

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vicch[/hi] - in

[hi]ਵੰਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]vaṇḍī[/hi] - divided

[hi]ਹੋਈ[/hi] - [hi]hoī[/hi] - is (feminine past participle of the verb "to be")

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is (present tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਖੰਡ[/hi] is an important word to know as it means "section" or "part".

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is used to indicate location, similar to the English "in".

The sentence uses the past participle [hi]ਵੰਡੀ[/hi] to describe a completed action.

Translation: The book is divided into three sections.

The next word is discussion. English: We had a discussion about the new syllabus.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਨਵੇਂ ਸਿਲੇਬਸ ਬਾਰੇ ਗੱਲਬਾਤ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We (subject pronoun, plural)

[hi]ਨਵੇਂ[/hi] - new (adjective)

[hi]ਸਿਲੇਬਸ[/hi] - syllabus (noun)

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - about (postposition)

[hi]ਗੱਲਬਾਤ[/hi] - discussion (noun)

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi] - did (past tense verb)

Key Concepts:

Postposition: [hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] is a postposition, similar to a preposition in English. It follows the noun it modifies, "syllabus" in this case.

Past Tense: The verb [hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] is in the past tense, indicating that the discussion happened in the past.

English: We had a discussion about the new syllabus.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਨਵੇਂ ਸਿਲੇਬਸ ਬਾਰੇ ਗੱਲਬਾਤ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is piece. English: The cat ate a piece of fish.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਨੇ ਮੱਛੀ ਦਾ ਇੱਕ ਟੁਕੜਾ ਖਾਧਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] [hi]billi[/hi] - means "cat".

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]ne[/hi] - is the marker for the subject of a sentence that is performing an action. It is the "has" or "did" particle.

[hi]ਮੱਛੀ[/hi] [hi]machhi[/hi] - means "fish".

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] - This is the possessive marker. It means "of" or "belonging to" in this sentence. It is used to show that the fish belongs to the cat.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] [hi]ikk[/hi] - means "one". It is used to show that there is one piece of fish.

[hi]ਟੁਕੜਾ[/hi] [hi]tukra[/hi] - means "piece". It is used to show that it is a part of something else.

[hi]ਖਾਧਾ[/hi] [hi]khaadha[/hi] - is the past tense of the verb "to eat".

Key Concepts:

Possessive marker: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] is used to show possession.

Subject marker: [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]ne[/hi] is used to mark the subject of a sentence.

Past tense: [hi]ਖਾਧਾ[/hi] [hi]khaadha[/hi] is the past tense of the verb "to eat".

English: The cat ate a piece of fish.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ ਨੇ ਮੱਛੀ ਦਾ ਇੱਕ ਟੁਕੜਾ ਖਾਧਾ।[/hi]

The next word is science. English: Science is a fascinating subject.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਗਿਆਨ ਇੱਕ ਦਿਲਚਸਪ ਵਿਸ਼ਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਗਿਆਨ[/hi] [hi]vigyaan[/hi] - science

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] [hi]ikk[/hi] - a

[hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪ[/hi] [hi]dilchasp[/hi] - fascinating

[hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਾ[/hi] [hi]visha[/hi] - subject

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

[hi]ਵਿਗਿਆਨ[/hi] [hi]vigyaan[/hi] is the Punjabi word for "science". It is a noun.

[hi]ਦਿਲਚਸਪ[/hi] [hi]dilchasp[/hi] is an adjective that means "fascinating".

[hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਾ[/hi] [hi]visha[/hi] is a noun that means "subject".

This sentence is in the present tense and uses the verb "to be" in the form "hai". Remember that the word order is subject-verb-object.

The next word is importance. English: The importance of education is undeniable.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਿੱਖਿਆ ਦੀ ਮਹੱਤਤਾ ਨਾਕਾਰਨਯੋਗ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਿਆ[/hi]: This is the word for "education."

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi]: This is the possessive particle, indicating that the importance belongs to education.

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਤਾ[/hi]: This is the word for "importance".

[hi]ਨਾਕਾਰਨਯੋਗ[/hi]: This is an adjective that means "undeniable" or "cannot be denied."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: This is the verb "to be" in the present tense, indicating that the importance of education is something that exists.

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: The word "[hi]ਦੀ[/hi]" functions as a possessive particle in Punjabi, indicating that the importance belongs to education. Think of it like the English "of" in the phrase "the importance of education."

Adjectives: The adjective "[hi]ਨਾਕਾਰਨਯੋਗ[/hi]" describes the noun "[hi]ਮਹੱਤਤਾ[/hi]".

Verb "To Be": The verb "[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]" is the Punjabi equivalent of the English verb "to be" in the present tense, used to indicate a state of being.

English: The importance of education is undeniable.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਿੱਖਿਆ ਦੀ ਮਹੱਤਤਾ ਨਾਕਾਰਨਯੋਗ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is usual. English: This is his usual routine.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh us da aam riwaz hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This

[hi]us[/hi] - his

[hi]da[/hi] - possessive marker, means 'of'

[hi]aam[/hi] - usual

[hi]riwaz[/hi] - routine, habit

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

The sentence uses the word [hi]aam[/hi] for usual and the word [hi]riwaz[/hi] for routine. It is important to remember that [hi]riwaz[/hi] is the word for a daily routine or habit, while [hi]aadat[/hi] is more closely related to a bad habit.

The next word is final. English: This is the final exam.

Punjabi: [hi]Ee [hi] akhirla [hi] imtihaan [hi] hai.

Breakdown:

[hi]Ee [hi] - this

[hi]akhirla [hi] - final (adjective)

[hi]imtihaan [hi] - exam

[hi]hai [hi] - is

This sentence uses the direct translation of “final” as [hi]akhirla [hi], which means last or final. It is an adjective that describes the exam. [hi]Ee [hi] is a demonstrative pronoun (this). This sentence is in the present tense.

Punjabi: This is the final exam.

The next word is president. English: The president of India is the head of state.

Punjabi: [hi]ਭਾਰਤ ਦਾ ਰਾਸ਼ਟਰਪਤੀ ਰਾਸ਼ਟਰ ਦਾ ਮੁਖੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਭਾਰਤ[/hi] [hi]bharat[/hi] - India

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] - of

[hi]ਰਾਸ਼ਟਰਪਤੀ[/hi] [hi]rashtrapati[/hi] - president (literally "nation's leader")

[hi]ਰਾਸ਼ਟਰ[/hi] [hi]rashtara[/hi] - nation

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] - of

[hi]ਮੁਖੀ[/hi] [hi]mukhi[/hi] - head (leader)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Post-position: Punjabi uses post-positions (like "da" meaning "of") instead of prepositions like English.

Word order: Punjabi follows a Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) word order.

Gender Agreement: Punjabi has gender agreement, so the post-position "da" changes based on the gender of the noun it modifies.

The next word is save. English: Save the food for tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]Kal ley khana rakh do[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Kal[/hi]: Tomorrow (This is a common word in Punjabi, so it is easy to learn).

[hi]ley[/hi]: For (Remember this word, it is used for many different things in Punjabi).

[hi]khana[/hi]: Food (Another common word, it is important to know this).

[hi]rakh[/hi]: Keep (A useful verb in Punjabi that means to "keep" or "store" something).

[hi]do[/hi]: Please (This is the polite way to ask someone to do something in Punjabi).

This sentence literally translates to "For tomorrow, keep the food".

English: Save the food for tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]Kal ley khana rakh do[/hi]

The next word is sight. English: The sight of the mountains was breathtaking.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪਹਾੜਾਂ ਦਾ ਨਜ਼ਾਰਾ ਦਿਲ ਨੂੰ ਛੂਹ ਗਿਆ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪਹਾੜਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]pahaṛāṁ[/hi] - means "mountains" and is the plural form of [hi]ਪਹਾੜ[/hi] - [hi]pahaṛ[/hi]

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]dā[/hi] - is the possessive particle, meaning "of" and connecting the mountains to the next word

[hi]ਨਜ਼ਾਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]nazārā[/hi] - means "sight" or "view"

[hi]ਦਿਲ[/hi] - [hi]dil[/hi] - means "heart"

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nūṁ[/hi] - is the dative marker, indicating that the heart is the recipient of the action

[hi]ਛੂਹ[/hi] - [hi]chūh[/hi] - means "to touch"

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]gayā[/hi] - is the past tense marker, indicating that the action has already happened

Key Concepts:

Possessive particle ([hi]ਦਾ[/hi]): Used to show ownership or possession.

Dative marker ([hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi]): Indicates the indirect object or recipient of an action.

Past tense marker ([hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi]): Used to indicate that an action has occurred in the past.

This sentence uses a beautiful imagery to describe the sight of mountains, using the word [hi]ਨਜ਼ਾਰਾ[/hi] which is an excellent word to use to describe a scene that is both pleasing and impactful.

The next word is express. English: He expressed his gratitude to his teacher.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne apne استاد [ustad] nu apna shukriya zahir kiya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (pronoun, third person singular masculine)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has, have (past tense marker for verbs)

[hi]apne[/hi] - his, her, their (possessive pronoun)

[hi]استاد [ustad][/hi] - teacher

[hi]nu[/hi] - to (preposition)

[hi]apna[/hi] - his, her, their (possessive pronoun)

[hi]shukriya[/hi] - gratitude

[hi]zahir[/hi] - express

[hi]kiya[/hi] - did (past tense of verb "karna" - to do)

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the past tense to describe an action that already occurred.

The use of the possessive pronouns [hi]apne[/hi] and [hi]apna[/hi] emphasizes that the gratitude belongs to the person expressing it.

The preposition [hi]nu[/hi] indicates the direction of the gratitude.

English: He expressed his gratitude to his teacher.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne apne استاد [ustad] nu apna shukriya zahir kiya[/hi].

The next word is doctor. English: The doctor examined the patient.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ ਨੇ ਮਰੀਜ਼ ਦੀ ਜਾਂਚ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] (doctor) - This is the subject of the sentence. It is in the singular form.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] (has) - This is a marker for the past tense and indicates that the action has been completed. It is used with the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਮਰੀਜ਼[/hi] (patient) - This is the object of the sentence. It is in the singular form.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] (of) - This is a possessive particle that connects the patient to the next word.

[hi]ਜਾਂਚ[/hi] (examination) - This is the action being performed by the doctor.

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] (did) - This is the past tense of the verb "to do". It signifies that the examination was completed.

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb-Object Structure: This sentence follows the typical subject-verb-object structure common in Punjabi.

Possessive Particles: The use of "[hi]ਦੀ[/hi]" demonstrates the possessive form in Punjabi, indicating ownership or belonging.

Past Tense: The use of "[hi]ਨੇ[/hi]" and "[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi]" marks the action as completed in the past.

English: The doctor examined the patient.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ ਨੇ ਮਰੀਜ਼ ਦੀ ਜਾਂਚ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is place. English: He placed the book on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮੇਜ਼ ਤੇ ਰੱਖ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun "he". It is in the nominative case.

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - This is the noun "book". It is in the accusative case as it is the object of the verb.

[hi]ਮੇਜ਼[/hi] - This is the noun "table". It is in the ablative case as it is being used to show "on top of".

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - This is the postposition "on". It is used to show location.

[hi]ਰੱਖ[/hi] - This is the verb "to place". It is in the past tense.

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - This is the feminine singular past participle of the verb "to give". It is used as a marker to indicate that the past action is complete.

Key Concepts:

The ablative case is used to show location or direction.

The postposition [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] is used to show location. It is similar to the preposition "on" in English.

The past participle [hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] indicates that the action of placing the book on the table is complete.

English: He placed the book on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮੇਜ਼ ਤੇ ਰੱਖ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is peace. English: Peace is important for everyone.

Punjabi: [hi]Shaanti sabh nu zaruri hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Shaanti[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "peace."

[hi]sabh[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "everyone."

[hi]nu[/hi] - This is a postposition meaning "to" or "for."

[hi]zaruri[/hi] - This word means "important" or "necessary."

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi verb "to be" in the present tense, making it the equivalent of "is."

Important Note: Punjabi often uses a more flexible word order than English, but it is still important to maintain the correct word order for meaning.

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions to modify nouns, like the postposition "nu" in this sentence.

Verb Conjugation: The Punjabi verb "hai" is conjugated to agree with the subject "shaanti," which is singular and feminine.

The next word is employ. English: He is employed by the company.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੰਪਨੀ ਵੱਲੋਂ ਨੌਕਰੀ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "he" and acts as the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਕੰਪਨੀ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "company".

[hi]ਵੱਲੋਂ[/hi]: This is a preposition indicating "by" or "from". It signifies that the action of employment originates from the company.

[hi]ਨੌਕਰੀ[/hi]: This is the Punjabi word for "job" or "employment".

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi]: This is the present tense verb "to do" conjugated in the third person singular. It indicates that the action of employment is ongoing.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]: This is the present tense verb "to be" conjugated in the third person singular and acts as the auxiliary verb indicating that the action is happening in the present.

Key concepts:

Prepositions: [hi]ਵੱਲੋਂ[/hi] is a preposition indicating "by" or "from", it is important to learn the prepositions and their correct usage as they add a layer of meaning to sentences.

Verb conjugation: [hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] are conjugated verbs, and understanding how to conjugate verbs is crucial to constructing grammatically correct Punjabi sentences.

Word order: In Punjabi, the subject typically comes before the verb and the object.

English: He is employed by the company.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੰਪਨੀ ਵੱਲੋਂ ਨੌਕਰੀ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is entire. English: The entire class is present today.

Punjabi: [hi]āj saare kelas [hi]hazri [hi]aa [hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]āj [hi] - today

[hi]saare [hi] - entire, whole, all

[hi]kelas [hi] - class

[hi]hazri [hi] - presence, attendance

[hi]aa [hi] - is (present)

Key Concepts:

Punjabi frequently uses post-positions, words that come after the noun they modify. Here, [hi]hazri [hi] is a post-position, meaning "in attendance" and is modifying the noun [hi]kelas [hi]

Punjabi frequently uses the word [hi]aa [hi] to indicate the present tense.

The sentence literally translates to: "Today all (the) class is in attendance."

English: The entire class is present today.

Punjabi: [hi]āj saare kelas [hi]hazri [hi]aa [hi].

The next word is document. English: She documented the trip in her journal.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਡਾਇਰੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਯਾਤਰਾ ਦਰਜ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - She

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - her

[hi]ਡਾਇਰੀ[/hi] - journal

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਯਾਤਰਾ[/hi] - trip

[hi]ਦਰਜ[/hi] - documented

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi] - did

Key concepts:

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is a preposition indicating "in" and can be used with many other words in Punjabi.

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do." It is an important verb in Punjabi, and many verbs in the past tense are formed using this word.

English: She documented the trip in her journal.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਡਾਇਰੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਯਾਤਰਾ ਦਰਜ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is return. English: He returned home yesterday.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਘਰ ਵਾਪਸ ਆ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (pronoun)

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] - Yesterday (adverb)

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - Home (noun)

[hi]ਵਾਪਸ[/hi] - Back (adverb)

[hi]ਆ[/hi] - To come (verb)

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - He went (past tense verb)

Key concepts:

The verb [hi]ਆ[/hi] (to come) is used with the adverb [hi]ਵਾਪਸ[/hi] (back) to form the meaning of "return."

The past tense of the verb [hi]ਆ[/hi] is [hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] for masculine subjects.

The word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV), which is different from English (SVO).

Translation: He returned home yesterday.

The next word is worth. English: This book is worth reading.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਪੜ੍ਹਨ ਜੋਗੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - Book (noun)

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਨ[/hi] - To read (verb stem)

[hi]ਜੋਗੀ[/hi] - Worthy (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (copula)

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the adjective [hi]ਜੋਗੀ[/hi] (worthy) to express the value of reading the book.

The construction [hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਨ ਜੋਗੀ[/hi] is an example of a compound adjective formed by combining a verb stem ([hi]ਪੜ੍ਹਨ[/hi] - to read) with the adjective [hi]ਜੋਗੀ[/hi] (worthy).

Translation: This book is worth reading.

The next word is life. English: Life is precious.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜੀਵਨ ਕੀਮਤੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜੀਵਨ[/hi]: [hi]ji:van[/hi] means "life" and is the subject of the sentence. It is a noun.

[hi]ਕੀਮਤੀ[/hi]: [hi]ki:mati[/hi] means "precious" and modifies the subject. It is an adjective.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi]: [hi]hai[/hi] means "is" and is the verb in the sentence. The verb is a form of the verb "to be" that indicates the present tense.

Important Concepts:

This sentence is in the present tense.

The word order is Subject-Adjective-Verb.

Translation: [hi]ji:van ki:mati hai.[/hi]

The next word is eventually. English: Eventually, he will graduate from university.

Punjabi: [hi]Aakhīr ch, oh university ton graduate ho jaavega[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Aakhīr[/hi] - This is an adverb meaning eventually. It is used to indicate something will happen in the future but not immediately.

[hi]ch[/hi] - This is a postposition meaning “in” or “at.” It is used to specify a location or time.

[hi]oh[/hi] - This is a pronoun meaning “he.” It is used to refer to a male person.

[hi]university[/hi] - This is a noun meaning “university.” It refers to a higher education institution.

[hi]ton[/hi] - This is a postposition meaning “from.” It is used to indicate the place something is coming from.

[hi]graduate[/hi] - This is a verb meaning “to graduate.” It refers to completing a course of study and receiving a degree.

[hi]ho[/hi] - This is an auxiliary verb meaning "to be." It is used to form the future tense of the verb.

[hi]jaavega[/hi] - This is a verb meaning “will go.” It is used to indicate that the action will happen in the future.

The sentence uses the future tense, which is formed by using the auxiliary verb [hi]ho[/hi] followed by the verb in its base form. The sentence also uses the postposition [hi]ton[/hi] to indicate that the man will graduate from the university.

English: Eventually, he will graduate from university.

Punjabi: [hi]Aakhīr ch, oh university ton graduate ho jaavega[/hi].

The next word is customer. English: The customer is always right.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗਾਹਕ ਹਮੇਸ਼ਾ ਸਹੀ ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗਾਹਕ[/hi] - [hi]gahak[/hi] - customer

[hi]ਹਮੇਸ਼ਾ[/hi] - [hi]hameesha[/hi] - always

[hi]ਸਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]sahi[/hi] - right

[hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hunda hai[/hi] - is (masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: Punjabi nouns have genders (masculine, feminine, neuter). The verb [hi]ਹੁੰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] (is) must agree in gender with the noun [hi]ਗਾਹਕ[/hi] (customer), which is masculine.

Word Order: The word order in Punjabi is typically subject-verb-object (SVO), as seen in this sentence.

Translation: The customer is always right.

The next word is exercise. English: He exercises every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਕਸਰਤ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the pronoun for “he”. It is in the nominative case and acts as the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - This word means "every" and modifies the word "day" ([hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi]).

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] - This word means "day". It is used to indicate the frequency of the action.

[hi]ਕਸਰਤ[/hi] - This word means "exercise". It is the object of the verb "[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi]".

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to do". It is conjugated for the third person singular masculine.

Key concepts:

The word order in this sentence is Subject-Adverb-Object-Verb.

The verb "[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi]" is used with many nouns in Punjabi to indicate various actions, including "exercise", "work", "study", etc.

English: He exercises every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਕਸਰਤ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is wall. English: The wall is high.

Punjabi: [hi] ਦੀਵਾਰ ਉੱਚੀ ਹੈ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi] ਦੀਵਾਰ [/hi] = [hi] divaar [/hi] = wall.

[hi] ਉੱਚੀ [/hi] = [hi] oochi [/hi] = high.

[hi] ਹੈ [/hi] = [hi] hai [/hi] = is.

The sentence literally translates to "The wall is high."

The key concept to remember here is the word order: subject (wall) + adjective (high) + verb (is). This is the standard structure for describing things in Punjabi.

The next word is himself. English: He himself did this.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪ ਇਹ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun "he" in the nominative case. It's the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਆਪ[/hi] - This word means "himself" and emphasizes that the subject performed the action alone. It's a reflexive pronoun.

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This is the demonstrative pronoun "this" and refers to the action that was done.

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do". It indicates that the action has already been completed.

Key concepts:

Pronouns in Punjabi: Masculine and feminine pronouns in Punjabi change depending on the context (subject, object, etc.).

Reflexive Pronouns: Punjabi uses reflexive pronouns to indicate that the subject is both the actor and the receiver of the action.

Past Tense: The Punjabi verb "to do" conjugates in different ways depending on the subject and the tense.

English Translation: He himself did this.

The next word is dangerous. English: This path is dangerous.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਰਾਹ ਖ਼ਤਰਨਾਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun, used for things close to the speaker)

[hi]ਰਾਹ[/hi] - path, road

[hi]ਖ਼ਤਰਨਾਕ[/hi] - dangerous

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (present tense, singular, copula, used to link subject and predicate)

Key Concepts:

This sentence demonstrates the use of the copula [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] in Punjabi.

The use of [hi]ਇਹ[/hi] for "this" is important to remember, as it is used frequently in Punjabi.

The word [hi]ਖ਼ਤਰਨਾਕ[/hi] is used to describe something that is dangerous.

English: This path is dangerous.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਰਾਹ ਖ਼ਤਰਨਾਕ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is wide. English: The river is very wide.

Punjabi: [hi]Nahr bahut chauri hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Nahr[/hi] - River. This is a noun in the nominative case.

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very - This is an adverb modifying the adjective chauri.

[hi]chauri[/hi] - Wide. This is an adjective modifying nahr.

[hi]hai[/hi] - is. This is a copula (linking verb) connecting the subject and the adjective.

Key Concepts:

Nominative Case: The subject of the sentence (nahr) is in the nominative case.

Adverb: The word bahut is an adverb that modifies the adjective chauri.

Copula: The verb hai is a copula, which links the subject to the adjective.

English: The river is very wide.

Punjabi: [hi]Nahr bahut chauri hai[/hi].

The next word is idea. English: He has a great idea.

Punjabi: [hi]Usde kol ek vadiya vichaar aa[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usde[/hi]: This is a possessive pronoun meaning "his".

[hi]kol[/hi]: This means "with" or "near", often used in the sense of possession.

[hi]ek[/hi]: This means "one" or "a".

[hi]vadiya[/hi]: This means "good" or "great".

[hi]vichaar[/hi]: This means "idea" or "thought".

[hi]aa[/hi]: This is a particle that indicates the existence of something.

Therefore, the full sentence translates to "He has a great idea".

Memorization Tips:

You can think of [hi]kol[/hi] as "having" or "possessing", which can make it easier to remember in the context of possession.

[hi]vichaar[/hi] can be associated with "think" or "think about", which can aid in recall.

The particle [hi]aa[/hi] can be remembered as marking the presence of something.

The next word is door. English: The door is open.

Punjabi: [hi]Darwaza khula hoya hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Darwaza[/hi] - door

[hi]khula[/hi] - open (adjective)

[hi]hoya[/hi] - is (present participle of verb "hona" - to be)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense of verb "hona" - to be)

Key concepts:

[hi]Darwaza[/hi] is a common noun, so it is not capitalized.

[hi]khula[/hi] is an adjective modifying the noun [hi]Darwaza[/hi].

The verb [hi]hona[/hi] is used to express the state of being.

The present participle [hi]hoya[/hi] is used to indicate that the door is in a state of being open.

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense of the verb [hi]hona[/hi], completing the sentence and indicating that the door is currently open.

Translation: The door is open.

The next word is ready. English: The teacher is ready to start the lesson.

Punjabi: [hi]Adhyapak [hi]padhai [hi]shuru [hi]karne [hi]vaaste [hi]taiyaar [hi]hai. [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Adhyapak [hi]: Teacher (masculine)

[hi]padhai [hi]: Lesson, studies (feminine)

[hi]shuru [hi]: Start (verb)

[hi]karne [hi]: To do, to make (verb, infinitive form)

[hi]vaaste [hi]: For, in order to (preposition)

[hi]taiyaar [hi]: Ready (adjective)

[hi]hai [hi]: Is (verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]vaaste [hi]: A very common preposition used to express purpose.

[hi]taiyaar [hi]: This adjective can also be used with the verb [hi]hona [hi] (to be) to form the phrase [hi]taiyaar hona [hi] which means to be ready.

[hi]karne [hi]: The infinitive form of verbs is frequently used after prepositions like [hi]vaaste [hi]

English: The teacher is ready to start the lesson.

Punjabi: [hi]Adhyapak [hi]padhai [hi]shuru [hi]karne [hi]vaaste [hi]taiyaar [hi]hai. [/hi]

The next word is confirm. English: Please confirm your reservation.

Punjabi: ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਬੁਕਿੰਗ ਦੀ ਪੁਸ਼ਟੀ ਕਰੋ।

[hi]Kirpa karke aapni booking di pushti karo.[/hi]

Breakdown:

Kirpa karke [hi]ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ[/hi]: Please (polite request)

aapni [hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi]: your (possessive pronoun)

booking [hi]ਬੁਕਿੰਗ[/hi]: reservation
di [hi]ਦੀ[/hi]: of (possessive marker)

pushti [hi]ਪੁਸ਼ਟੀ[/hi]: confirmation
karo [hi]ਕਰੋ[/hi]: do (imperative verb)

Important: The word "di" [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a possessive marker that comes after the noun and acts like "of." This is used very frequently in Punjabi.

Remember: The verb at the end of a sentence is common in Punjabi.

Translation: Please confirm your reservation.

The next word is dream. English: I dreamt of a beautiful garden.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਸੁਪਨੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਇੱਕ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਬਾਗ਼ ਦੇਖਿਆ। [hi]mai supne vich ik sundar baag dekha[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]mai[/hi] - I (subject pronoun)

[hi]supne[/hi] - dream (in the dative case, which indicates the recipient of the action, here "in a dream")

[hi]vich[/hi] - in (preposition)

[hi]ik[/hi] - a (indefinite article, singular)

[hi]sundar[/hi] - beautiful (adjective)

[hi]baag[/hi] - garden (noun)

[hi]dekhya[/hi] - saw (past tense of the verb "to see")

Key concepts:

Punjabi grammar uses postpositions instead of prepositions. For example, "in the dream" is "dream in" ([hi]supne vich[/hi]) in Punjabi.

Punjabi adjectives come after the noun they modify.

The word order in Punjabi sentences is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV).

English: I dreamt of a beautiful garden.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਸੁਪਨੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਇੱਕ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਬਾਗ਼ ਦੇਖਿਆ। [hi]mai supne vich ik sundar baag dekha[/hi].

The next word is team. English: The team is playing well.

Punjabi: [hi]ਟੀਮ ਵਧੀਆ ਖੇਡ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਟੀਮ[/hi] - [hi]team[/hi] (This is the subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - [hi]well[/hi] (This is an adverb modifying the verb)

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - [hi]playing[/hi] (This is the verb, in the present continuous tense)

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]is[/hi] (This is the helping verb)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]is[/hi] (This is the auxiliary verb, used to form the present continuous tense)

Key concepts:

Present Continuous Tense: The present continuous tense is formed by using the helping verb "is" (or "are" for plural subjects) and the present participle of the verb (ending in "-ing").

Adverb: An adverb is a word that modifies a verb, adjective, or another adverb. It tells us how, when, where, or to what extent something is done.

Memorization: To remember the Punjabi word for "team," think of the English word "team" and then try to associate it with the sound "teem."

The next word is scale. English: The child is scaling the wall.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚਾ ਕੰਧ 'ਤੇ ਚੜ੍ਹ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚਾ[/hi] - [hi]baccha[/hi] (child) - This is the subject of the sentence and is in the nominative case.

[hi]ਕੰਧ[/hi] - [hi]kandh[/hi] (wall) - This is the object of the preposition 'on' and is in the accusative case.

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]'te[/hi] - This is the preposition 'on' and indicates location.

[hi]ਚੜ੍ਹ[/hi] - [hi]chaṛh[/hi] - This is the verb 'to climb' and is in the present continuous tense.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]riha hai[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense marker.

Key concepts:

Nominative Case: The subject of the sentence is in the nominative case, meaning it is the one performing the action.

Accusative Case: The object of the preposition is in the accusative case, indicating that it is the thing being acted upon.

Present Continuous Tense: This tense is used to describe an action that is happening now.

English: The child is scaling the wall.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚਾ ਕੰਧ 'ਤੇ ਚੜ੍ਹ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is delivery. English: The delivery person is bringing us the food.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਿਲਿਵਰੀ ਵਾਲਾ ਸਾਨੂੰ ਖਾਣਾ ਲੈ ਕੇ ਆ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡਿਲਿਵਰੀ ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] - This is the compound word for "delivery person". It literally means "the one who does the delivery".

[hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun [hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] (we) and indicates the recipient of the action. It literally means "to us".

[hi]ਖਾਣਾ[/hi] - This is the noun "food".

[hi]ਲੈ ਕੇ ਆ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb [hi]ਲੈ ਕੇ ਆਉਣਾ[/hi] (to bring). The literal translation is "is bringing".

Key Concepts:

Compound Words: Punjabi often uses compound words to express a concept succinctly, like [hi]ਡਿਲਿਵਰੀ ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] (delivery person).

Dative Case: The dative case is used to indicate the recipient of an action, as in [hi]ਸਾਨੂੰ[/hi] (to us).

Present Continuous Tense: Punjabi uses the present continuous tense to express an action happening now, like [hi]ਲੈ ਕੇ ਆ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] (is bringing).

Translation: The delivery person is bringing us the food.

The next word is machine. English: The machine is broken.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮਸ਼ੀਨ ਖ਼ਰਾਬ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮਸ਼ੀਨ[/hi] - [hi]mashin[/hi] - This is the word for "machine." It is a noun.

[hi]ਖ਼ਰਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kharab[/hi] - This is the word for "broken" or "bad." It is an adjective.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - This is the verb "to be" in the present tense, singular.

[hi]।[/hi] - [hi]period[/hi] - This is the punctuation mark for a period, or a full stop.

The sentence is structured as Noun + Adjective + Verb. The verb "to be" agrees in number with the noun "machine" as the machine is singular, so it is "hai" rather than "haan". This is a simple, straightforward sentence.

Note: It is very helpful to practice the pronunciation of these words. You can use a resource like [hi]Forvo[/hi] to hear the correct pronunciation.

The next word is daily. English: I go to the market daily.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਰੋਜ਼ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun, "I".

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] - This is the word for "daily" or "everyday". It is similar to the English word "rose" but the pronunciation is different.

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This is the noun "market".

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "go". The ending [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] indicates the masculine singular subject.

Key Concepts:

Gender: In Punjabi, nouns have gender. "Market" is masculine, so the verb ending is [hi]ਦਾ[/hi].

Tense: Punjabi verbs have various endings to indicate tense. [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] is present tense.

English: I go to the market daily.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਰੋਜ਼ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is bring. English: Please bring me the book.

Punjabi: ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਲਿਆਓ। [hi]kirpaa karake mainnoo kitaab laa-o.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]kirpaa[/hi] (please) is a polite request word. It is often used to soften a command.

[hi]karake[/hi] (do) is used to connect the request with the verb.

[hi]mainnoo[/hi] (me) is the object of the verb. It means "to me".

[hi]kitaab[/hi] (book) is the direct object of the verb.

[hi]laa-o[/hi] (bring) is the imperative form of the verb, which means "bring".

Key concepts:

The Punjabi imperative form of a verb is used to give commands.

The object pronoun [hi]mainnoo[/hi] is used before the verb.

English: Please bring me the book.

Punjabi: ਕਿਰਪਾ ਕਰਕੇ ਮੈਨੂੰ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਲਿਆਓ। [hi]kirpaa karake mainnoo kitaab laa-o.[/hi]

The next word is hit. English: He hit the ball.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਗੇਂਦ ਨੂੰ ਮਾਰਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - This is a third person singular pronoun, meaning "he" or "she" in English.

[hi]ਗੇਂਦ[/hi] - [hi]gend[/hi] - This is the noun meaning "ball" in English.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - This is the postposition meaning "to" or "at" in English. This is attached to the noun "ball" to show the direction of the action.

[hi]ਮਾਰਿਆ।[/hi] - [hi]mariya[/hi] - This is the verb meaning "hit" in English, conjugated for past tense in the third person singular.

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: The pronoun [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] ([hi]usne[/hi]) must agree in gender with the noun [hi]ਗੇਂਦ[/hi] ([hi]gend[/hi]). "Ball" in Punjabi is considered feminine, hence the feminine pronoun [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] is used.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions, which are similar to prepositions in English. They are placed after the noun they modify.

Memorization Tip: Remember to use the correct postposition, [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] ([hi]nu[/hi]), for the direction of the action, and the past tense verb ending, [hi]ਿਆ[/hi] ([hi]iya[/hi]), to show that the hitting happened in the past.

The next word is background. English: The background of this painting is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]Is tasveera da [hi] [hi]pichhla[/hi] [hi]bhaag[/hi] [hi]sunder[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi] - This

[hi]tasveera[/hi] - painting

[hi]da[/hi] - of

[hi]pichhla[/hi] - background

[hi]bhaag[/hi] - part

[hi]sunder[/hi] - beautiful

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

The sentence is structured like a simple English sentence with the subject first, then the verb. In this sentence, the noun phrase "the background" is replaced with the phrase "this painting's background", which is expressed with the Punjabi possessive structure. The word [hi]pichhla[/hi] - background is a very important word to remember, as it directly translates to background and is used in many contexts. The word [hi]bhaag[/hi] can be used to describe any part of a larger object.

English: The background of this painting is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]Is tasveera da [hi]pichhla[/hi] [hi]bhaag[/hi] [hi]sunder[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

The next word is herself. English: She did it herself.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪੇ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] is the third person singular feminine pronoun in the past tense. It translates to "she" or "her" in the past tense.

[hi]ਆਪੇ[/hi] means "herself" or "himself" depending on the context. This is a key word and is very common in Punjabi.

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] means "did" and is the past tense of the verb "to do".

Therefore, the sentence [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਆਪੇ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] translates to "She did it herself."

The next word is technical. English: This is a technical issue, not a personal one.

Punjabi: [hi]Ee ikh tehkneekee [hi] samasya [hi] hai, [hi] shakhsee [hi] nahin.

Breakdown:

[hi]Ee [hi] - This

[hi]ikh [hi] - a, one (indefinite article, also used for emphasis)

[hi]tehkneekee [hi] - technical

[hi]samasya [hi] - problem, issue

[hi]hai [hi] - is

[hi]shakhsee [hi] - personal

[hi]nahin [hi] - not

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses the word [hi]ikh [hi] for both "a" and "one" in English.

The word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb, which differs from the Subject-Verb-Object order in English.

The word [hi]hai [hi] is used for "is" and "am".

The word [hi]nahin [hi] is used for "not" in Punjabi.

Translation: This is a technical issue, not a personal one.

The next word is television. English: He watches television every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਟੈਲੀਵਿਜ਼ਨ ਵੇਖਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the pronoun "he."

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - This means "every" and modifies the next word, [hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi].

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] - This means "day." Together, [hi]ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] means "everyday."

[hi]ਟੈਲੀਵਿਜ਼ਨ[/hi] - The word "television."

[hi]ਵੇਖਦਾ[/hi] - This is the verb "watches" in the present tense.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the copula "is" or "are" which is used to link a subject and a predicate. In this case, it is linking the subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he) and the predicate [hi]ਟੈਲੀਵਿਜ਼ਨ ਵੇਖਦਾ[/hi] (watches television).

Key concepts:

The use of the copula [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] to connect the subject to the predicate.

The use of the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] to refer to a male third person singular subject.

The use of the verb [hi]ਵੇਖਦਾ[/hi] in its present tense form.

English: He watches television every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਟੈਲੀਵਿਜ਼ਨ ਵੇਖਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is museum. English: He visited the museum yesterday.

Punjabi: [hi]ऊਹ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਮਿਊਜ਼ੀਅਮ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ऊਹ[/hi] - He (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ਕੱਲ੍ਹ[/hi] - yesterday

[hi]ਮਿਊਜ਼ੀਅਮ[/hi] - museum

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - went (masculine past tense of [hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] - to go)

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - was (past tense of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - to be)

This sentence is in the past tense and uses the structure "Subject + Past Tense Verb + Object + Past Tense of [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi]".

Key concept: Notice the use of the past tense of [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] ([hi]ਸੀ[/hi]) to indicate the action happened in the past.

English: He visited the museum yesterday.

Punjabi: [hi]ऊਹ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਮਿਊਜ਼ੀਅਮ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is he. English: He is a good student.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਵਧੀਆ ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he."

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "a" or "one."

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "good."

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "student."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is."

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses a subject-verb-object word order, similar to English.

The word order in the sentence is "subject (he), article (a), adjective (good), noun (student), verb (is)."

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is a common ending for present tense verbs.

Translation: He is a good student.

The next word is improve. English: He improved his writing skills.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਲਿਖਾਈ ਵਿੱਚ ਸੁਧਾਰ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He (subject pronoun, masculine singular)

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - his/her (possessive adjective, singular)

[hi]ਲਿਖਾਈ[/hi] - writing (noun)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in (postposition)

[hi]ਸੁਧਾਰ[/hi] - improvement (noun)

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi] - did (past tense verb, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

Postposition: In Punjabi, postpositions are used to show the relationship between nouns. In this case, [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] shows that the improvement happened in the writing.

Gender Agreement: Punjabi verbs and adjectives agree in gender with their subjects. Here, [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] is masculine singular, so the verb [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] is also masculine singular.

Possessive Adjectives: [hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] is a possessive adjective that indicates ownership. It can mean "his" or "her" depending on the context.

English: He improved his writing skills.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੀ ਲਿਖਾਈ ਵਿੱਚ ਸੁਧਾਰ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is school. English: He goes to school every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਸਕੂਲ ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "he." It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "every." It modifies the next word, "day."

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "day." It is the object of the preposition "in," but the preposition is not explicitly stated.

[hi]ਸਕੂਲ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "school." It is the object of the verb "goes."

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "goes." It is the verb in the sentence and it is in the present tense. It is also conjugated to indicate the gender and number of the subject, "he."

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi, like many other languages, uses gender for nouns. The verb "goes" has to agree with the gender of the subject "he."

Number: Punjabi, like many other languages, uses number for nouns. The verb "goes" has to agree with the number of the subject "he."

Word Order: Punjabi is a subject-verb-object language, just like English. However, the order can sometimes be more flexible than in English.

Prepositions: Prepositions are used to connect nouns, pronouns, and verbs to other words in a sentence. In the above example, the preposition "in" is not explicitly stated, but it is implied.

Remember, Punjabi is a beautiful and rich language. By practicing these simple sentences, you are taking the first step on your journey to fluency.

The next word is easily. English: He can easily read Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਸਾਨੀ ਨਾਲ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਪੜ੍ਹ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - "He" (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਆਸਾਨੀ ਨਾਲ[/hi] - "easily" (adverb)

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - "Punjabi" (noun)

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹ[/hi] - "to read" (verb)

[hi]ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - "can" (modal verb) - This part of the sentence signifies ability.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਆਸਾਨੀ ਨਾਲ[/hi] is a common phrase in Punjabi meaning "easily." It's important to remember this as it's frequently used.

The verb [hi]ਪੜ੍ਹ[/hi] is in the present tense. It's useful to learn different conjugations of verbs to be able to express different tenses.

The modal verb [hi]ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] adds to the meaning of ability. This is a crucial concept in Punjabi grammar as it allows you to express different types of possibility and ability.

This sentence demonstrates a simple and clear use of the word "easily" in Punjabi. By understanding the grammar and key concepts, you can learn to express the same idea using different words and sentence structures.

The next word is moreover. English: Moreover, the students also participated in the cultural event.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਤੋਂ ਇਲਾਵਾ, ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ ਨੇ ਸੱਭਿਆਚਾਰਕ ਪ੍ਰੋਗਰਾਮ ਵਿੱਚ ਵੀ ਹਿੱਸਾ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - From

[hi]ਇਲਾਵਾ[/hi] - Besides, in addition to

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀਆਂ[/hi] - Students

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - have (past tense marker)

[hi]ਸੱਭਿਆਚਾਰਕ[/hi] - Cultural

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਗਰਾਮ[/hi] - Program

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - In

[hi]ਵੀ[/hi] - Also

[hi]ਹਿੱਸਾ[/hi] - Part

[hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] - Took

The word [hi]ਇਲਾਵਾ[/hi] signifies "in addition to" or "besides." In this sentence, it connects the previous idea of the students' participation in the event with the additional information that they also took part in the cultural program. This demonstrates the use of "moreover" to introduce supplementary information.

The sentence uses the past tense, as indicated by the marker [hi]ਨੇ[/hi]. The phrase [hi]ਇਸ ਤੋਂ ਇਲਾਵਾ[/hi] can be used in different contexts to express "moreover" or "furthermore".

Remember:

[hi]ਇਸ ਤੋਂ ਇਲਾਵਾ[/hi] is useful for adding more information to a statement.

[hi]ਇਸ ਤੋਂ ਇਲਾਵਾ[/hi] is a commonly used phrase that can be helpful in everyday conversation.

The next word is ride. English: He rides his bike every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਆਪਣਾ ਸਾਈਕਲ ਚਲਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - Every

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] - Day

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] - His/Her/Its (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਸਾਈਕਲ[/hi] - Bicycle

[hi]ਚਲਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - Rides (present tense, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (present tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the present tense to indicate a daily action.

[hi]ਆਪਣਾ[/hi] is a possessive pronoun and is used to show ownership.

[hi]ਚਲਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] is the verb in this sentence and is conjugated in the present tense.

English: He rides his bike every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਆਪਣਾ ਸਾਈਕਲ ਚਲਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is lie. English: He lies about his age.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੀ ਉਮਰ ਬਾਰੇ ਝੂਠ ਬੋਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - This is the possessive adjective "his" in Punjabi. The possessive adjectives in Punjabi are very important and come before the noun they modify.

[hi]ਉਮਰ[/hi] - This is the noun "age" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਬਾਰੇ[/hi] - This is the postposition "about" in Punjabi. Postpositions in Punjabi follow the noun or pronoun they modify.

[hi]ਝੂਠ[/hi] - This is the noun "lie" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਬੋਲਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "tells" in Punjabi.

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses a subject-verb-object word order.

Punjabi uses postpositions, which are like prepositions in English but they follow the noun or pronoun they modify.

Punjabi verbs have tenses. This verb is in the present tense.

English: He lies about his age.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੀ ਉਮਰ ਬਾਰੇ ਝੂਠ ਬੋਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is technology. English: Technology has changed the way we live.

Punjabi: [hi]ਟੈਕਨਾਲੋਜੀ ਨੇ ਸਾਡੇ ਜੀਵਨ ਨੂੰ ਬਦਲ ਦਿੱਤਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਟੈਕਨਾਲੋਜੀ[/hi] - technology

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - has (marks the subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਸਾਡੇ[/hi] - our

[hi]ਜੀਵਨ[/hi] - life

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - (marks the object of the sentence)

[hi]ਬਦਲ[/hi] - changed

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] - (past tense marker)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - (is)

Key Concepts:

Punjabi verbs use a combination of suffixes and auxiliary verbs to indicate tense. Here, [hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] are combined to signify the past tense.

The word order in Punjabi is different from English. The subject comes before the verb, but the object follows it.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is a grammatical particle that marks the subject of a sentence.

English: Technology has changed the way we live.

Punjabi: [hi]ਟੈਕਨਾਲੋਜੀ ਨੇ ਸਾਡੇ ਜੀਵਨ ਨੂੰ ਬਦਲ ਦਿੱਤਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is put. English: He put the book on the table.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਮੇਜ਼ 'ਤੇ ਰੱਖ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun in the past tense, meaning "he".

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - This is the word for "book".

[hi]ਮੇਜ਼[/hi] - This is the word for "table".

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - This is a postposition that indicates location, meaning "on".

[hi]ਰੱਖ[/hi] - This is the verb "to put".

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to give".

The sentence structure is subject-verb-object-prepositional phrase. The verb "to put" is combined with the verb "to give" to create a more complex action, indicating that the book was placed on the table.

Remember the Punjabi word [hi]ਰੱਖ[/hi] is similar to the English word "rack" as in "book rack" and "coat rack", which is helpful for remembering the word.

The next word is less. English: He has less money than me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਦੇ ਕੋਲ ਮੇਰੇ ਨਾਲੋਂ ਘੱਟ ਪੈਸੇ ਨੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਦੇ[/hi] - means "his", the possessive form of "he"

[hi]ਕੋਲ[/hi] - means "with", "near", or "at hand".

[hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] - means "my", the possessive form of "I"

[hi]ਨਾਲੋਂ[/hi] - means "than", used for comparisons

[hi]ਘੱਟ[/hi] - means "less"

[hi]ਪੈਸੇ[/hi] - means "money"

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - is the plural form of the verb "to be" in this context

This sentence uses the comparative form, which is used to compare two things or people. Here, we are comparing the amount of money the other person has to the amount of money the speaker has.

English: He has less money than me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਦੇ ਕੋਲ ਮੇਰੇ ਨਾਲੋਂ ਘੱਟ ਪੈਸੇ ਨੇ।[/hi]

The next word is thing. English: This is a thing.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh cheez hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This, demonstrative pronoun, singular, used to refer to something close at hand

[hi]cheez[/hi] - thing, noun, refers to an object or item

[hi]hai[/hi] - is, verb, present tense, singular

Key Concepts:

Demonstrative pronouns like [hi]eh[/hi] are used to point out specific objects or people

Nouns like [hi]cheez[/hi] name people, places, things, or ideas

Verbs like [hi]hai[/hi] describe actions or states of being

Notes:

The word order in Punjabi is usually subject-verb-object.

In this sentence, the subject [hi]eh[/hi] is being described by the verb [hi]hai[/hi] and the noun [hi]cheez[/hi].

The next word is flow. English: The water flows smoothly from the river.

Punjabi: [hi]ਨਦੀ ਤੋਂ ਪਾਣੀ ਸੁਚੱਜੇ ਢੰਗ ਨਾਲ ਵਹਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਨਦੀ[/hi] (nadi) - river

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] (ton) - from

[hi]ਪਾਣੀ[/hi] (paani) - water

[hi]ਸੁਚੱਜੇ[/hi] (suchajje) - smoothly

[hi]ਢੰਗ[/hi] (dhanga) - way, manner

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] (naal) - with

[hi]ਵਹਿੰਦਾ[/hi] (vahinda) - flows (present continuous)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) - is (present tense)

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions like [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] (ton) to indicate direction, location, or time, which are similar to prepositions in English.

Present Continuous Tense: The present continuous tense is formed with the verb [hi]ਵਹਿੰਦਾ[/hi] (vahinda) which is the present participle form of the verb [hi]ਵਹਿਣਾ[/hi] (vaihna) - to flow.

Word Order: The basic word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV).

English: The water flows smoothly from the river.

Punjabi: [hi]ਨਦੀ ਤੋਂ ਪਾਣੀ ਸੁਚੱਜੇ ਢੰਗ ਨਾਲ ਵਹਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is roll. English: The ball rolled down the hill.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੇਂਦ ਪਹਾੜੀ ਤੋਂ ਹੇਠਾਂ ਲੁੜਕ ਗਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਗੇਂਦ[/hi] - [hi]gend[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "ball".

[hi]ਪਹਾੜੀ[/hi] - [hi]pahaari[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "hill".

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - [hi]ton[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "from". It indicates the starting point of the rolling action.

[hi]ਹੇਠਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]hethan[/hi] - This is an adverb meaning "down". It indicates the direction of the rolling action.

[hi]ਲੁੜਕ[/hi] - [hi]luruk[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to roll". It describes the action of the ball.

[hi]ਗਈ।[/hi] - [hi]gai[/hi] - This is a past tense marker, indicating that the action of rolling has already happened. It translates to "went".

Key Concepts:

Prepositions like [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] ("from") and [hi]ਹੇਠਾਂ[/hi] ("down") are important in Punjabi as they show relationships between words.

Verbs like [hi]ਲੁੜਕ[/hi] ("rolled") convey the action in the sentence.

Past Tense Markers like [hi]ਗਈ।[/hi] ("went") show that the action happened in the past.

English: The ball rolled down the hill.

Punjabi: [hi]ਗੇਂਦ ਪਹਾੜੀ ਤੋਂ ਹੇਠਾਂ ਲੁੜਕ ਗਈ।[/hi]

The next word is never. English: He never eats sweets.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕਦੇ ਵੀ ਮਿਠਾਈ ਨਹੀਂ ਖਾਂਦਾ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun for "he".

[hi]ਕਦੇ ਵੀ[/hi] - This means "never" in Punjabi. It is an adverb of frequency that emphasizes the action's complete absence.

[hi]ਮਿਠਾਈ[/hi] - This is the noun "sweets".

[hi]ਨਹੀਂ[/hi] - This is the negative particle in Punjabi, meaning "not".

[hi]ਖਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "eats".

This sentence uses the simple present tense and emphasizes that the action of eating sweets does not happen at all. It's like saying, "He doesn't eat sweets, ever".

The next word is type. English: He types very quickly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਤੇਜ਼ੀ ਨਾਲ ਟਾਈਪ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He, him, this is the subject pronoun in the sentence

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - very, this word modifies the speed of typing, very is an adverb of degree

[hi]ਤੇਜ਼ੀ[/hi] - speed, fast, this noun acts as the object of the preposition [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi]

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - with, this preposition connects [hi]ਤੇਜ਼ੀ[/hi] to the verb, [hi]ਟਾਈਪ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi]

[hi]ਟਾਈਪ[/hi] - to type, this is the verb

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - does, this verb is the present tense conjugation of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] to do

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is, this is the copula verb. Since we are talking about the speed of the action, this copula is adding that the action is happening in the present.

English: He types very quickly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਬਹੁਤ ਤੇਜ਼ੀ ਨਾਲ ਟਾਈਪ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is relation. English: My relation with my brother is very strong.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰੇ ਭਰਾ ਨਾਲ ਮੇਰਾ ਰਿਸ਼ਤਾ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]mere[/hi] - My (masculine)

[hi]ਭਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]bharā[/hi] - Brother

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]nāl[/hi] - With

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]merā[/hi] - My (masculine)

[hi]ਰਿਸ਼ਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]rishta[/hi] - Relation

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - Very

[hi]ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ[/hi] - [hi]mazbūt[/hi] - Strong

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - Is

Key Concepts:

Masculine: Notice the use of [hi]ਮੇਰੇ[/hi] (mere) and [hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] (merā) for "my" because they refer to a masculine noun, [hi]ਭਰਾ[/hi] (bharā). This is a very important concept in Punjabi grammar. There are both masculine and feminine forms of words, and the grammatical gender impacts the form of the words around it.

English: My relation with my brother is very strong.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰੇ ਭਰਾ ਨਾਲ ਮੇਰਾ ਰਿਸ਼ਤਾ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਜ਼ਬੂਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is ever. English: I have never been to India.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਕਦੇ ਭਾਰਤ ਨਹੀਂ ਗਿਆ। [hi]maĩ kade bharat nahĩ giya.[/hi]

Breakdown:

ਮੈਂ [hi]maĩ[/hi] - This is the first-person singular pronoun, meaning "I".

ਕਦੇ [hi]kade[/hi] - This word means "ever" or "at any time". It emphasizes the idea that the action has never happened.

ਭਾਰਤ [hi]bharat[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "India".

ਨਹੀਂ [hi]nahĩ[/hi] - This word means "not" and is used for negation.

ਗਿਆ [hi]giya[/hi] - This is the past participle of the verb "ਜਾਣਾ [hi]jaana[/hi]" (to go). It indicates that the action of going to India has not taken place.

Key Concept: The use of "ਕਦੇ [hi]kade[/hi]" in negative sentences emphasizes the lack of experience or occurrence.

English: I have never been to India.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਕਦੇ ਭਾਰਤ ਨਹੀਂ ਗਿਆ। [hi]maĩ kade bharat nahĩ giya.[/hi]

The next word is town. English: He lives in a small town.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਛੋਟੇ ਜਿਹੇ ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਹਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (pronounced "oh") means "he" and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਛੋਟੇ ਜਿਹੇ[/hi] (pronounced "chhote jihe") means "small" and is an adjective modifying the noun [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi]

[hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi] (pronounced "shahar") means "town" or "city".

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (pronounced "vich") means "in" and is a preposition used to indicate location.

[hi]ਰਹਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] (pronounced "rehnda hai") means "lives" and is the verb in the sentence. It is in the present tense.

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: Punjabi nouns have genders, and articles and adjectives must agree with the gender of the noun. In this example, [hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi] is masculine, so the adjective [hi]ਛੋਟੇ ਜਿਹੇ[/hi] is also masculine.

Word Order: Punjabi word order is Subject-Object-Verb, similar to English.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions, which are similar to prepositions in English but appear after the noun they modify. [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a postposition that means "in".

English: He lives in a small town.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਛੋਟੇ ਜਿਹੇ ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਹਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is past. English: He went to the market yesterday.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੱਲ ਮੰਡੀ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]He/She[/hi]

[hi]ਕੱਲ[/hi] - [hi]Yesterday[/hi]

[hi]ਮੰਡੀ[/hi] - [hi]Market[/hi]

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]Went (masculine singular)[/hi]

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - [hi]Was (past tense)[/hi]

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: Punjabi verbs change based on the gender of the subject. [hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] is used because the subject, [hi]ਉਹ[/hi], is masculine.

Past Tense: [hi]ਸੀ[/hi] indicates the past tense, meaning the action happened in the past.

Word Order: Subject-Time-Place-Verb

English: He went to the market yesterday.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੱਲ ਮੰਡੀ ਗਿਆ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is distance. English: The distance between the two cities is 100 kilometers.

Punjabi: [hi]Do šaharāṁ [hi] de [hi] vič [hi] 100 [hi] kilometer [hi] da [hi] fasla [hi] hai.

Breakdown:

[hi]Do šaharāṁ [hi] - means "two cities". The word "[hi]šahar [hi]" means "city".

[hi]de [hi] - This is the possessive particle. It is used to show possession. It literally means "of".

[hi]vič [hi] - This is a preposition that means "between" or "in".

[hi]100 [hi] - The number 100.

[hi]kilometer [hi] - The word for kilometer, a unit of measurement for distance.

[hi]da [hi] - This is the possessive particle. It is used to show possession. It literally means "of".

[hi]fasla [hi] - This is the word for "distance" or "interval".

[hi]hai [hi] - This means "is".

Key concept: Note the use of the possessive particle [hi]de [hi] and [hi]da [hi] for showing possession. Also, note the use of the preposition [hi]vič [hi] for "between".

The Punjabi sentence uses the same grammatical structure as the English sentence, making it easier to understand and learn.

The next word is dress. English: She is wearing a beautiful dress.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੋਹਣਾ ਕੁੜਤਾ ਪਾਇਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - She/He (depends on context)

[hi]ਸੋਹਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]sohna[/hi] - beautiful

[hi]ਕੁੜਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]kurta[/hi] - dress (specifically a long, loose-fitting shirt)

[hi]ਪਾਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]paya[/hi] - worn (past participle of [hi]ਪਾਉਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]pauna[/hi] - to wear)

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]hoya[/hi] - is (past participle of [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]hona[/hi] - to be)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense of [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]hona[/hi] - to be)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives and verbs agree in gender with the noun they modify. Here, [hi]ਸੋਹਣਾ[/hi] ([hi]sohna[/hi]) - "beautiful" and [hi]ਪਾਇਆ[/hi] ([hi]paya[/hi]) - "worn" are masculine because [hi]ਕੁੜਤਾ[/hi] ([hi]kurta[/hi]) - "dress" is masculine.

Past Participles: Notice how the past participle of the verb [hi]ਪਾਉਣਾ[/hi] ([hi]pauna[/hi]) - "to wear" is used to describe a state of being, rather than a completed action.

Word Order: Punjabi sentence structure is flexible, but typically follows subject-object-verb.

English: She is wearing a beautiful dress.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੋਹਣਾ ਕੁੜਤਾ ਪਾਇਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is event. English: The event was very enjoyable.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਇਵੈਂਟ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਜ਼ੇਦਾਰ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This, it (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਇਵੈਂਟ[/hi] - Event (subject)

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Very (adverb)

[hi]ਮਜ਼ੇਦਾਰ[/hi] - Enjoyable (adjective)

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - Was (verb - past tense)

Key Concept: Punjabi word order: Subject - Adverb - Adjective - Verb

English: The event was very enjoyable.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਇਵੈਂਟ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਜ਼ੇਦਾਰ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is tear. English: The child's tear fell on the ground.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੱਚੇ ਦਾ ਅੱਥਰੂ ਜ਼ਮੀਨ 'ਤੇ ਡਿੱਗ ਪਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੱਚੇ[/hi] - [hi]bacche[/hi] - child

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - 's (possessive particle)

[hi]ਅੱਥਰੂ[/hi] - [hi]athroo[/hi] - tear

[hi]ਜ਼ਮੀਨ[/hi] - [hi]zameen[/hi] - ground

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]'te[/hi] - on

[hi]ਡਿੱਗ[/hi] - [hi]digg[/hi] - to fall (past tense)

[hi]ਪਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]pya[/hi] - (past tense marker, indicating that the action is complete)

Key concepts:

Possessive particle: The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] ([hi]da[/hi]) is a possessive particle, like " 's" in English, showing that the tear belongs to the child.

Postposition: The word [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] ([hi]'te[/hi]) is a postposition, similar to a preposition in English, indicating location.

Past tense markers: Punjabi has several ways of indicating past tense. In this sentence, [hi]ਡਿੱਗ[/hi] ([hi]digg[/hi]) is the past tense form of the verb "to fall" and [hi]ਪਿਆ[/hi] ([hi]pya[/hi]) functions as a past tense marker.

Translation: The child's tear fell on the ground.

The next word is box. English: The box is small.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡੱਬਾ ਛੋਟਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡੱਬਾ[/hi] - [hi]dabba[/hi] (masculine noun) - box

[hi]ਛੋਟਾ[/hi] - [hi]chhotaa[/hi] (adjective) - small

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] (verb, present tense, 3rd person singular) - is

The Punjabi sentence is in the present tense and is a simple declarative sentence that states a fact. It uses the singular masculine form of the noun and adjective to describe a single small box.

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have genders, and the gender of the noun affects the form of the adjective. For instance, the word [hi]ਛੋਟਾ[/hi] ([hi]chhotaa[/hi]) is the masculine singular form of the adjective "small."

Word order: Punjabi generally follows a subject-verb-object word order, though there are exceptions.

Verb conjugation: Verbs in Punjabi are conjugated to agree with the subject in terms of person, number, and gender.

Memorization Tip: Think of the image of a small box and associate it with the sound of the words [hi]ਡੱਬਾ[/hi] ([hi]dabba[/hi]) and [hi]ਛੋਟਾ[/hi] ([hi]chhotaa[/hi]).

The next word is anyone. English: Anyone can learn Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੋਈ ਵੀ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਿੱਖ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੋਈ ਵੀ[/hi] - This is the subject of the sentence. It means "anyone" and it is the indeclinable form of the word. This means that it doesn't change form. This word is very important to learn, as it is used in many situations.

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - This is the object of the sentence, and it means "Punjabi." It is also used as an adjective, meaning "of Punjab."

[hi]ਸਿੱਖ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] This is the verb of the sentence, and it means "can learn." The verb is conjugated to the third person singular masculine, and the suffix [-hi]da hai[/hi] is used to indicate "can."

The next word is if. English: If you study hard, you will succeed.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜੇ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਮਿਹਨਤ ਨਾਲ ਪੜ੍ਹੋਗੇ ਤਾਂ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਸਫ਼ਲ ਹੋਵੋਗੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜੇ[/hi] - [hi]je[/hi] (if) - This is a conjunction that introduces a conditional clause.

[hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]tusi[/hi] (you) - This is the subject pronoun in the nominative case, referring to the person being addressed.

[hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]mihnat nal[/hi] (hard, with effort) - This is an adverbial phrase that modifies the verb "study".

[hi]ਪੜ੍ਹੋਗੇ[/hi] - [hi]padhoge[/hi] (will study) - This is the future tense of the verb "to study".

[hi]ਤਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]tan[/hi] (then) - This is a conjunction that connects the conditional clause to the main clause.

[hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]tusi[/hi] (you) - This is the subject pronoun in the nominative case, referring to the person being addressed.

[hi]ਸਫ਼ਲ[/hi] - [hi]safal[/hi] (successful) - This is an adjective modifying the noun "you".

[hi]ਹੋਵੋਗੇ।[/hi] - [hi]hovoge[/hi] (will be) - This is the future tense of the verb "to be".

Key Concepts:

Conditional clauses in Punjabi are introduced by the conjunction [hi]ਜੇ[/hi] (je).

The future tense of verbs in Punjabi is formed by adding the suffix [hi]ੋਗੇ[/hi] (oge) to the verb stem.

The order of words in Punjabi sentences can vary, but the subject typically comes before the verb.

Remember: Punjabi is a rich and beautiful language with a unique grammar system. With practice and dedication, you can master this language and unlock a world of new experiences.

The next word is agree. English: He agreed to help me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੇਰੀ ਮਦਦ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਹਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਹਾਂ ਕਿਹਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] = He

[hi]ਮੇਰੀ[/hi] = My

[hi]ਮਦਦ[/hi] = Help

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] = To do

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] = For

[hi]ਹਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਹਾਂ[/hi] = To agree

[hi]ਕਿਹਾ।[/hi] = Said.

English: He agreed to help me.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਮੇਰੀ ਮਦਦ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਹਾਂ ਵਿੱਚ ਹਾਂ ਕਿਹਾ।[/hi]

The next word is personal. English: This is my personal opinion.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh mera shakhsi raa hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] = This, singular

[hi]mera[/hi] = My, possessive adjective

[hi]shakhsi[/hi] = Personal, adjective

[hi]raa[/hi] = Opinion, noun

[hi]hai[/hi] = is, present tense

This sentence uses the possessive adjective "[hi]mera[/hi]" (my) to show ownership of the opinion. [hi]Shakhsi[/hi] is the adjective for "personal" and is used to describe the type of opinion being expressed. The verb "[hi]hai[/hi]" (is) is used to link the subject ("my personal opinion") to the predicate ("this").

This sentence is a simple sentence with a subject, a verb, and a predicate. It is a good example of how to use the possessive adjective and adjectives in Punjabi.

The next word is other. English: He has other things to do.

Punjabi: [hi]Us nu hor kaam aa [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi]: This is the third person singular pronoun, meaning "He" or "She"

[hi]nu[/hi]: This is the dative marker, indicating the recipient of the action.

[hi]hor[/hi]: This is an adjective meaning "other" or "more"

[hi]kaam[/hi]: This is a noun meaning "work" or "task"

[hi]aa[/hi]: This is the present tense of the verb "to be" meaning "is" or "are".

This sentence uses the dative case to indicate that "he" is the recipient of the "other things to do" It is a common way to express that something is "for" someone or "belongs to" someone.

Key Concepts:

Dative case: A grammatical case used to indicate the recipient of an action. In Punjabi, it is marked by the particle [hi]nu[/hi].

Present tense: The verb "to be" in Punjabi is highly contextual, and its form changes based on the situation and the noun it refers to.

English: He has other things to do.

Punjabi: [hi]Us nu hor kaam aa [/hi]

The next word is practice. English: He practices speaking Punjabi every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਬੋਲਣ ਦਾ ਅਭਿਆਸ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - Every (determiner)

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] - Day (noun)

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - Punjabi (adjective modifying [hi]ਬੋਲਣ[/hi])

[hi]ਬੋਲਣ[/hi] - Speaking (verb)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਅਭਿਆਸ[/hi] - Practice (noun)

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - Does (verb, present tense, 3rd person singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (copula, present tense, 3rd person singular)

Key concepts:

The sentence uses the present tense.

The object of the verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] is [hi]ਅਭਿਆਸ[/hi].

The preposition [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] connects the object of the verb to the noun phrase [hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਬੋਲਣ[/hi].

Translation: He practices speaking Punjabi every day.

The next word is phone. English: He is on the phone.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਫੋਨ 'ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਫੋਨ[/hi] - Phone

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - On/At (postposition used after a noun)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is (present tense of the verb "to be")

This sentence uses the postposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] to indicate location. The postposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] is used after a noun and indicates that something is "on" or "at" that noun. In this case, the phone is the noun, and [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] indicates that the person is "on" the phone.

The next word is believe. English: I believe in God.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਪਰਮਾਤਮਾ ਤੇ ਵਿਸ਼ਵਾਸ ਕਰਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - I

[hi]ਪਰਮਾਤਮਾ[/hi] - God

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - on

[hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਵਾਸ[/hi] - belief

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - do

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - am

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] is a preposition that means "on" or "in". It can also mean "and".

[hi]ਵਿਸ਼ਵਾਸ[/hi] is a noun that means "belief".

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] is a verb that means "do" or "make". It is conjugated in the present tense.

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] is a verb that means "am" or "is". It is conjugated in the present tense.

English: I believe in God.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਪਰਮਾਤਮਾ ਤੇ ਵਿਸ਼ਵਾਸ ਕਰਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is spend. English: He spends all his money on clothes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਾਰੇ ਪੈਸੇ ਕੱਪੜਿਆਂ 'ਤੇ ਖਰਚ ਕਰ ਦਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (Subject pronoun)

[hi]ਸਾਰੇ[/hi] - all (adjective)

[hi]ਪੈਸੇ[/hi] - money (Noun)

[hi]ਕੱਪੜਿਆਂ[/hi] - clothes (Noun, in the dative case, which means it is the indirect object)

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - on (preposition)

[hi]ਖਰਚ[/hi] - spend (Verb)

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - do (Auxiliary verb, this makes the verb [hi]ਖਰਚ[/hi] into the past tense)

[hi]ਦਿੰਦਾ[/hi] - gives (verb, the third person singular present indicative form of [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] to give)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (copula verb, marks the end of the sentence)

Key concepts:

Word order: Punjabi is a verb-final language, meaning that the verb comes at the end of the sentence.

Dative Case: The dative case in Punjabi is used to show the indirect object of a verb.

Auxiliary verbs: Punjabi uses auxiliary verbs to express tense and mood. Here the verb [hi]ਕਰ[/hi] is used to create the past tense of the verb [hi]ਖਰਚ[/hi].

Present Indicative: The verb [hi]ਦਿੰਦਾ[/hi] is in the present indicative, showing an action that is happening now.

English: He spends all his money on clothes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਾਰੇ ਪੈਸੇ ਕੱਪੜਿਆਂ 'ਤੇ ਖਰਚ ਕਰ ਦਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is equal. English: Everyone is equal in the eyes of the law.

Punjabi: [hi]Sabh log kanun di nazr vich barabar ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Sabh[/hi] means "all" or "everyone".

[hi]log[/hi] means "people".

[hi]kanun[/hi] means "law".

[hi]di[/hi] is a possessive particle that indicates that the law belongs to someone (in this case, everyone).

[hi]nazr[/hi] means "eyes".

[hi]vich[/hi] means "in".

[hi]barabar[/hi] means "equal".

[hi]ne[/hi] is a plural marker that indicates that the people are equal.

This sentence uses a simple subject-verb-object structure and is a common expression in Punjabi. It emphasizes the principle of equality before the law, which is a fundamental principle of many legal systems.

English: Everyone is equal in the eyes of the law.

Punjabi: [hi]Sabh log kanun di nazr vich barabar ne[/hi].

The next word is reach. English: She reached the library.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਪਹੁੰਚ ਗਈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - She. This is a pronoun in the feminine singular form. It is used to refer to a female person.

[hi]ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ[/hi] - Library. This is a noun, the name of a place.

[hi]ਪਹੁੰਚ[/hi] - Reach, a verb meaning to arrive at a destination. The verb in this sentence is in the past tense. The suffix [hi]ਗਈ[/hi] is added to the verb [hi]ਪਹੁੰਚ[/hi] to show the past tense and that the subject was female.

[hi]ਗਈ[/hi] - This is the past tense suffix used with female subjects.

Key Concepts:

Verb conjugation in Punjabi - Note how the verb [hi]ਪਹੁੰਚ[/hi] is modified by the suffix [hi]ਗਈ[/hi] to show the past tense.

Gender agreement - Notice how the suffix [hi]ਗਈ[/hi] is attached to the verb. This is because the subject of the sentence [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] is feminine.

English: She reached the library.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਪਹੁੰਚ ਗਈ।[/hi]

The next word is property. English: This is my property.

Punjabi: [hi]ee meraa mulk hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ee[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]meraa[/hi] - My (possessive adjective)

[hi]mulk[/hi] - property, land, country (noun)

[hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense of the verb "to be")

Key concepts:

Demonstrative pronouns: Point to specific things. [hi]ee[/hi] refers to something near the speaker.

Possessive adjectives: Show ownership. [hi]meraa[/hi] means "my."

Nouns: Name people, places, or things. [hi]mulk[/hi] refers to property or land.

Verb conjugation: The verb "to be" ([hi]hai[/hi]) changes form depending on the subject and tense. In this sentence, it is in the present tense, singular, and third person.

Translation: This is my property.

The next word is mark. English: He marked the paper with a red pen.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਲਾਲ ਪੈਨ ਨਾਲ ਕਾਗਜ਼ ਨੂੰ ਨਿਸ਼ਾਨ ਲਾਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - he/she/it (masculine singular)

[hi]ਲਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]laal[/hi] - red

[hi]ਪੈਨ[/hi] - [hi]pen[/hi] - pen

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]naal[/hi] - with

[hi]ਕਾਗਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]kaagaz[/hi] - paper

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - to/on/for

[hi]ਨਿਸ਼ਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]nishan[/hi] - mark

[hi]ਲਾਇਆ।[/hi] - [hi]laaya[/hi] - marked/put

Key concepts:

Postposition: The word [hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] ([hi]naal[/hi]) functions as a postposition in Punjabi, similar to "with" in English. It shows the instrument or accompaniment used for the action.

Object marker: The word [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] ([hi]nu[/hi]) acts as an object marker in Punjabi. It marks the object of the verb, indicating the thing being acted upon.

Verb conjugation: The verb [hi]ਲਾਇਆ[/hi] ([hi]laaya[/hi]) is conjugated in the past tense and agrees with the subject, which is masculine singular ([hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi]).

English: He marked the paper with a red pen.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਲਾਲ ਪੈਨ ਨਾਲ ਕਾਗਜ਼ ਨੂੰ ਨਿਸ਼ਾਨ ਲਾਇਆ।[/hi]

The next word is station. English: I am waiting at the station for my friend.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਲਈ ਸਟੇਸ਼ਨ 'ਤੇ ਉਡੀਕ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - means "I" and is the subject of the sentence. It is in the nominative case.

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - means "my" and is a possessive pronoun modifying the noun [hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] (friend).

[hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] - means "friend" and is the object of the preposition [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] (for).

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - means "for" and is a preposition. It introduces a prepositional phrase that modifies the verb [hi]ਉਡੀਕ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi] (waiting).

[hi]ਸਟੇਸ਼ਨ[/hi] - means "station" and is the object of the preposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] (at).

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - means "at" and is a preposition that introduces a prepositional phrase modifying the verb [hi]ਉਡੀਕ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi] (waiting).

[hi]ਉਡੀਕ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi] - means "waiting" and is the verb of the sentence. It is in the present continuous tense.

Key concept:

This sentence uses the preposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] (at), which is a common way to indicate location in Punjabi.

English: I am waiting at the station for my friend.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਲਈ ਸਟੇਸ਼ਨ 'ਤੇ ਉਡੀਕ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is solution. English: The student found a solution to the problem.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਨੇ ਸਮੱਸਿਆ ਦਾ ਹੱਲ ਪਾ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ[/hi] - [hi]vidyaarthi[/hi] - student

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]ne[/hi] - has (this is a particle that indicates the subject is performing the action)

[hi]ਸਮੱਸਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]sammasyaa[/hi] - problem

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਹੱਲ[/hi] - [hi]hall[/hi] - solution

[hi]ਪਾ[/hi] - [hi]paa[/hi] - to find

[hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]liyaa[/hi] - past tense marker for verbs

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence follows a Subject-Object-Verb structure, which is different from the English Subject-Verb-Object structure.

The word order is important in Punjabi, and changing it can alter the meaning of the sentence.

The possessive marker [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is used to show that the solution belongs to the problem.

The past tense marker [hi]ਲਿਆ[/hi] is attached to the verb [hi]ਪਾ[/hi] to indicate that the action has already happened.

English: The student found a solution to the problem.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਦਿਆਰਥੀ ਨੇ ਸਮੱਸਿਆ ਦਾ ਹੱਲ ਪਾ ਲਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is sector. English: The industrial sector is growing rapidly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਦਯੋਗਿਕ ਖੇਤਰ ਤੇਜ਼ੀ ਨਾਲ ਵੱਧ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਦਯੋਗਿਕ[/hi] - [hi]udyoigik[/hi] - industrial

[hi]ਖੇਤਰ[/hi] - [hi]khetr[/hi] - sector, field, area

[hi]ਤੇਜ਼ੀ[/hi] - [hi]tezi[/hi] - speed, rapidity

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]nal[/hi] - with, along with

[hi]ਵੱਧ[/hi] - [hi]vadh[/hi] - increase, grow

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]riha[/hi] - is, is being

This sentence uses the present continuous tense, which is formed by using the present participle of the verb (in this case, [hi]ਵੱਧ[/hi]) along with the auxiliary verb [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi]. It's important to note that the auxiliary verb [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] is used for singular subjects and masculine genders, so the form will change depending on the subject's gender and number.

Key concept: The [hi]ਖੇਤਰ[/hi] is a key concept for understanding different domains of activity. This sentence highlights the growth of the industrial sector, which is an important aspect of economic development.

The next word is take. English: He took the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਲਈ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She/It (3rd person singular, masculine or feminine)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitaab[/hi] - book

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - [hi]lai[/hi] - took

Key Concept:

The verb [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - [hi]lai[/hi] (to take) is used in the past tense in this sentence. You can see the past tense from the ending of the word [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - [hi]lai[/hi].

English: He took the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਲਈ[/hi]

The next word is tend. English: He tends to the garden every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਬਾਗ਼ ਦੀ ਦੇਖਭਾਲ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (Pronoun, Subject)

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - Every

[hi]ਰੋਜ਼[/hi] - Day (Noun)

[hi]ਬਾਗ਼[/hi] - Garden (Noun, Object)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of (Possessive particle)

[hi]ਦੇਖਭਾਲ[/hi] - Care/Tending (Noun)

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - Does (Verb, Present Tense)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (Verb, Copula)

This sentence is in the present tense and uses a simple subject-verb-object structure. The word "[hi]ਦੇਖਭਾਲ[/hi]" is an important concept, as it highlights the act of tending to something, like a garden. You can use this concept in other contexts, like tending to a patient or tending to a business.

English: He tends to the garden every day.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਰੋਜ਼ ਬਾਗ਼ ਦੀ ਦੇਖਭਾਲ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is attack. English: The dog attacked the cat.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੁੱਤੇ ਨੇ ਬਿੱਲੀ ਤੇ ਹਮਲਾ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕੁੱਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]Kutte[/hi] - "Dog" (subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]Ne[/hi] - A grammatical particle that marks the subject in a sentence. It often follows the subject and is used with verbs in the past tense.

[hi]ਬਿੱਲੀ[/hi] - [hi]Billi[/hi] - "Cat" (object of the sentence)

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]Te[/hi] - "On" or "upon," indicating the direction of the attack

[hi]ਹਮਲਾ[/hi] - [hi]Hamla[/hi] - "Attack" (action performed by the dog)

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]Kita[/hi] - Past tense of the verb "to do," indicating that the attack happened in the past.

Key concepts:

Subject-Verb-Object Structure: The sentence follows the basic subject-verb-object structure common in Punjabi, where the subject performs the action on the object.

Past Tense: The sentence uses the past tense, indicated by the verb [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] ([hi]Kita[/hi]).

Prepositions: The preposition [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] ([hi]Te[/hi]) indicates the direction of the attack, similar to "on" or "upon" in English.

English: The dog attacked the cat.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕੁੱਤੇ ਨੇ ਬਿੱਲੀ ਤੇ ਹਮਲਾ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi].

The next word is occasion. English: This is a special occasion.

Punjabi: [hi]Eho ikh vishesh mauka hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

- [hi]Eho[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

- [hi]ikh[/hi] - a (indefinite article)

- [hi]vishesh[/hi] - special (adjective)

- [hi]mauka[/hi] - occasion (noun)

- [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, verb "to be")

Key Concepts:

- Demonstrative Pronouns: [hi]Eho[/hi] (this) and [hi]Eh[/hi] (this/that) are used to point out specific things.

- Indefinite Articles: [hi]ikh[/hi] (a) and [hi]ek[/hi] (one) are used to indicate an unspecified singular noun.

- Present Tense: [hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

English: This is a special occasion.

Punjabi: [hi]Eho ikh vishesh mauka hai.[/hi]

The next word is boy. English: The boy is playing in the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੁੰਡਾ ਪਾਰਕ ਚ ਖੇਡ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੁੰਡਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "boy." It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "park." It is the location where the action is taking place.

[hi]ਚ[/hi] - This is a Punjabi preposition that means "in" or "at." It is used to indicate the location of the boy.

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "play."

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - This is a Punjabi verb phrase that means "is playing." It is the present continuous tense, indicating that the action is ongoing.

The sentence is structured in a Subject-Verb-Object order, which is the common word order in Punjabi. The word [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a helping verb that makes the verb phrase [hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] grammatically correct.

Key concept: The sentence demonstrates the use of the present continuous tense in Punjabi, which is formed by adding the suffix [hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ[/hi] to the verb stem.

English: The boy is playing in the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੁੰਡਾ ਪਾਰਕ ਚ ਖੇਡ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is blood. English: The blood is red.

Punjabi: [hi]ਖੂਨ ਲਾਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਖੂਨ[/hi] - [hi]khoon[/hi] - blood

[hi]ਲਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]laal[/hi] - red

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi word for "blood" is [hi]ਖੂਨ[/hi], pronounced as [hi]khoon[/hi].

The Punjabi word for "red" is [hi]ਲਾਲ[/hi], pronounced as [hi]laal[/hi].

The Punjabi word for "is" is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi], pronounced as [hi]hai[/hi]. It is used for singular subjects.

This sentence is a simple declarative sentence. It follows the Subject-Verb-Object structure. The subject of the sentence is [hi]ਖੂਨ[/hi] (blood) and the verb is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is). The adjective [hi]ਲਾਲ[/hi] (red) modifies the subject.

English: The blood is red.

Punjabi: [hi]ਖੂਨ ਲਾਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is drink. English: He drinks tea every morning.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਰ ਸਵੇਰ ਚਾਹ ਪੀਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun "he" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "every" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਸਵੇਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "morning" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਚਾਹ[/hi] - This is the word for "tea" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਪੀਂਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense verb "drinks" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the particle "is" at the end of a sentence.

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Punjabi follows a subject-verb-object word order, just like English.

Verb Conjugation: Punjabi verbs are conjugated for person, tense, and number.

Particles: Punjabi uses particles like [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] to indicate the end of a sentence.

Translation: He drinks tea every morning.

The next word is where. English: Where is the book?

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਕਿੱਥੇ ਹੈ?[/hi] [hi]kitab kithe hai?[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] [hi]kitab[/hi] - book

[hi]ਕਿੱਥੇ[/hi] [hi]kithe[/hi] - where - This is an interrogative word that asks about location.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - is

This is a simple sentence in Punjabi, using the word [hi]ਕਿੱਥੇ[/hi] [hi]kithe[/hi] for "where", followed by the noun [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] [hi]kitab[/hi] (book) and then the verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] (is).

The next word is star. English: The star is shining brightly in the sky.

Punjabi: [hi]ਤਾਰਾ ਅਸਮਾਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਚਮਕ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਤਾਰਾ[/hi] (tara) - star

[hi]ਅਸਮਾਨ[/hi] (asmaan) - sky

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (vich) - in

[hi]ਚਮਕ[/hi] (chamak) - shine

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] (riha) - is (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) - is (present tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (vich) is a postposition that means "in" or "within."

The Punjabi sentence uses the present continuous tense, indicated by the use of [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] (riha), to describe the star's continuous action of shining.

English: The star is shining brightly in the sky.

Punjabi: [hi]ਤਾਰਾ ਅਸਮਾਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਚਮਕ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is might. English: He might go to the market.

Punjabi: [hi] ਓਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਓਹ[/hi] - This is the third-person singular pronoun for "he" or "she." It's the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "market."

[hi]ਜਾ[/hi] - This is the verb "to go." In this sentence, it is in the infinitive form.

[hi]ਸਕਦਾ[/hi] - This is the modal verb "might" or "can." It indicates possibility.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" (is/am/are). It is used to complete the sentence.

Key concepts:

Modal verbs: Modal verbs (like "might", "can", "should") are used to express ability, permission, possibility, obligation, etc. They always come before the main verb in a sentence.

Infinitive: The infinitive is the base form of a verb. In Punjabi, it is often used with modal verbs.

English Translation: He might go to the market.

Punjabi Translation: [hi] ਓਹ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਜਾ ਸਕਦਾ ਹੈ। [/hi]

The next word is award. English: He was awarded the Nobel Prize.

Punjabi: ਉਸਨੂੰ ਨੋਬਲ ਇਨਾਮ ਦਿੱਤਾ ਗਿਆ। [hi]usnu nobel inam ditta gaya.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]usnu[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun "he" in Punjabi, meaning "to him".

[hi]nobel[/hi] - This is the English word "Nobel" transcribed into the Punjabi script.

[hi]inam[/hi] - This word means "award" or "prize".

[hi]ditta[/hi] - This is the past participle of the verb "to give", meaning "given".

[hi]gaya[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to go", but in this context it signifies that the action of giving the award was completed.

The Punjabi sentence structure is different from English. In English, we would say "He was awarded the Nobel Prize", whereas in Punjabi, it translates to "To him Nobel award given was".

The sentence highlights the concept of the passive voice, where the receiver of the action (the person being awarded) is the subject of the sentence. It also showcases the use of the dative case in Punjabi to indicate the recipient of the action.

The next word is wonder. English: I wonder what he is doing.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਹੈਰਾਨੀ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਕੀ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is a combination of [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] (to me) and [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is). These two words are often used together to express "I" or "me". This is a good example of how Punjabi words can be combined to form new meaning.

[hi]ਹੈਰਾਨੀ[/hi] - This means "wonder" or "surprise"

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This means "is"

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - This is a conjunction that means "that" or "whether"

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This means "he"

[hi]ਕੀ[/hi] - This means "what"

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - This means "to do"

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] (to do) and it means "is doing"

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This means "is"

English: I wonder what he is doing.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਹੈਰਾਨੀ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਉਹ ਕੀ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is road. English: We walked down the road.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਸੜਕ 'ਤੇ ਤੁਰੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] [asi] - We (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਸੜਕ[/hi] [sadak] - Road (feminine noun)

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] [te] - On (postposition used with feminine nouns)

[hi]ਤੁਰੇ[/hi] [ture] - Walked (past tense verb, masculine plural, agreeing with the subject)

Key Concept: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions (like "on" in English). The postposition [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] (te) is used for location, and it changes depending on the gender of the noun it modifies. In this case, [hi]ਸੜਕ[/hi] (sadak) is feminine, so we use [hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] (te).

Translation: We walked down the road.

The next word is understand. English: I understand your point.

Punjabi: ਮੈਂ ਤੁਹਾਡੀ ਗੱਲ ਸਮਝਦਾ ਹਾਂ। [hi]maĩ tuhādī gāll samajhdā hā̃.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]maĩ[/hi] means "I" - this is the subject of the sentence

[hi]tuhādī[/hi] means "your" - this is a possessive adjective modifying "gāll"

[hi]gāll[/hi] means "point" or "argument" - this is the object of the verb

[hi]samajhdā[/hi] means "understand" - this is the verb in the present tense

Key concept: Punjabi uses a word order similar to English, with the subject, verb, and object usually appearing in that order.

The next word is actor. English: The actor is very famous.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਦਾਕਾਰ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਦਾਕਾਰ[/hi] - This is the word for "actor". It is in the singular form and masculine gender.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This means "very". It is an adverb that modifies the adjective "famous".

[hi]ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ[/hi] - This means "famous". It is an adjective describing the actor.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be" in the singular, masculine form. It is used to indicate that the actor is famous.

Key Concepts:

Gender agreement: The adjective [hi]ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ[/hi] and the verb [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] both agree with the masculine gender of the noun [hi]ਅਦਾਕਾਰ[/hi].

Word order: The sentence follows the typical Punjabi word order of subject-adjective-verb.

Translation: The actor is very famous.

The next word is service. English: He provides good service.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਵਧੀਆ ਸੇਵਾ ਦਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - Good (adjective)

[hi]ਸੇਵਾ[/hi] - Service (noun)

[hi]ਦਿੰਦਾ[/hi] - Gives (present tense verb, masculine singular)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (copula, present tense)

The sentence follows the standard Subject-Verb-Object structure in Punjabi. It uses the masculine singular form of the pronoun and verb to agree with the subject. "[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]" acts as the copula, connecting the subject and the adjective. This sentence is simple and useful for learning the word [hi]ਸੇਵਾ[/hi] and the verb [hi]ਦਿੰਦਾ[/hi].

The next word is task. English: He has a lot of tasks to complete today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਅੱਜ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰੇ ਕੰਮ ਕਰਨੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun "he", meaning "to him".

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "today".

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰੇ[/hi] - This means "many" or "a lot of".

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "task" or "work".

[hi]ਕਰਨੇ ਹਨ[/hi] - This is the present tense of the verb "to do" in the plural form. The "h" at the end of the verb indicates that the subject is plural (in this case, "tasks").

English: He has a lot of tasks to complete today.

The next word is onto. English: She stepped onto the stage.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਸਟੇਜ ਤੇ ਕਦਮ ਰੱਖਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular feminine pronoun, "she," in the past tense.

[hi]ਸਟੇਜ[/hi] - This is the word for "stage."

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - This is the postposition "on" or "onto."

[hi]ਕਦਮ[/hi] - This means "step."

[hi]ਰੱਖਿਆ।[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to put" or "to place." The "a" at the end is the feminine singular ending of the verb.

This sentence demonstrates the use of the postposition [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] to show location. This postposition is often used in Punjabi and is key to understanding spatial relationships.

The next word is smoke. English: He smokes cigarettes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਿਗਰਟ ਪੀਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - he (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਸਿਗਰਟ[/hi] - [hi]sigarat[/hi] - cigarette (object)

[hi]ਪੀਂਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]peenda[/hi] - smokes (present tense verb)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense copula)

Key concepts:

Subject-Verb-Object structure: The basic word order in Punjabi is subject-verb-object, similar to English.

Present tense verb conjugation: The present tense verb [hi]ਪੀਂਦਾ[/hi] is conjugated to agree with the masculine subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi]

Copula: The copula [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is used to link the subject and the predicate.

The next word is heart. English: My heart is full of joy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ ਦਿਲ ਖੁਸ਼ੀ ਨਾਲ ਭਰਿਆ ਹੋਇਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]mera[/hi] - My (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਦਿਲ[/hi] - [hi]dil[/hi] - Heart

[hi]ਖੁਸ਼ੀ[/hi] - [hi]khushi[/hi] - Joy

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - [hi]nal[/hi] - With

[hi]ਭਰਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]bharya[/hi] - Filled (past participle of verb "bharna" - to fill)

[hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] - [hi]hoya[/hi] - Being (past participle of verb "hona" - to be)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - Is (present tense of verb "hona" - to be)

Key Concepts:

Possessive Pronoun: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] (mera) indicates possession, similar to "my" in English.

Past Participles: [hi]ਭਰਿਆ[/hi] (bharya) and [hi]ਹੋਇਆ[/hi] (hoya) act like adjectives describing the state of the heart.

Present Tense: [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] (hai) shows that the state of being full of joy is happening now.

Translation: My heart is full of joy.

The next word is period. English: The period of the school year is about to end.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਕੂਲ ਵਰ੍ਹੇ ਦਾ ਦੌਰ ਖ਼ਤਮ ਹੋਣ ਵਾਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਕੂਲ[/hi] - school

[hi]ਵਰ੍ਹੇ[/hi] - year

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of

[hi]ਦੌਰ[/hi] - period, time, duration

[hi]ਖ਼ਤਮ[/hi] - end, finish

[hi]ਹੋਣ[/hi] - to be

[hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] - going to, about to

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is a possessive marker, similar to "of" in English.

[hi]ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] is a suffix that indicates future tense.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] is a present tense verb, similar to "is" in English.

This sentence demonstrates the use of possessive markers, future tense, and present tense verbs in Punjabi.

The next word is some. English: Some people are kind.

Punjabi: [hi]Kuchh lok kirpaalu honde ne[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Kuchh[/hi] means "some" and is used for a few or an indefinite number of something.

[hi]lok[/hi] means "people".

[hi]kirpaalu[/hi] means "kind".

[hi]hon de ne[/hi] is a verb phrase meaning "are" and is used for plural subjects.

The sentence uses the Punjabi word order for subject-verb-object, which is different from English.

[hi]Kuchh lok kirpaalu honde ne[/hi]

Some people kind are.

It's a simple sentence structure that is easy to understand and remember.

The next word is speech. English: The speaker's speech was very inspiring.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੋਲਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਦੀ ਬੋਲੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਪ੍ਰੇਰਣਾਦਾਇਕ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੋਲਣ ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] - means "the speaker"

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - is the possessive marker, similar to "of" or "'s" in English.

[hi]ਬੋਲੀ[/hi] - is the noun for "speech"

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - is the word for "very"

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੇਰਣਾਦਾਇਕ[/hi] - means "inspiring"

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - is the past tense of "to be"

Important concepts:

Gender agreement: In Punjabi, nouns have genders, and the adjectives and verbs need to agree with that gender. The noun [hi]ਬੋਲੀ[/hi] is feminine, so the adjective [hi]ਪ੍ਰੇਰਣਾਦਾਇਕ[/hi] and the verb [hi]ਸੀ[/hi] are also feminine.

Remember, [hi]ਬੋਲਣ ਵਾਲੇ [/hi] is a noun phrase for the speaker in this sentence, not just a verb.

English: The speaker's speech was very inspiring.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੋਲਣ ਵਾਲੇ ਦੀ ਬੋਲੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਪ੍ਰੇਰਣਾਦਾਇਕ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is green. English: The leaves are green.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੱਤੇ ਹਰੇ ਹਨ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪੱਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]patte[/hi] - leaves (plural) - This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਹਰੇ[/hi] - [hi]hare[/hi] - green - This is the adjective describing the leaves.

[hi]ਹਨ[/hi] - [hi]han[/hi] - are - This is the present tense verb "to be" in Punjabi.

Key concept: Punjabi uses a subject-adjective-verb structure in this sentence.

English: The leaves are green.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੱਤੇ ਹਰੇ ਹਨ[/hi].

The next word is print. English: He printed the document.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦਸਤਾਵੇਜ਼ ਛਾਪਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - He/She

[hi]ਦਸਤਾਵੇਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]dastawez[/hi] - Document

[hi]ਛਾਪਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]chhapiya[/hi] - Printed (past tense of [hi]ਛਾਪਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]chhaapna[/hi] - to print)

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb Agreement: The verb [hi]ਛਾਪਿਆ[/hi] is in the past tense and agrees with the singular subject [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi].

Direct Object: The word [hi]ਦਸਤਾਵੇਜ਼[/hi] is the direct object of the verb.

Remember: In Punjabi, the verb often comes at the end of the sentence, unlike English.

The next word is top. English: He is at the top of his class.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੀ ਕਲਾਸ ਵਿੱਚ ਸਿਖਰ ਤੇ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] - his/her/its (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਕਲਾਸ[/hi] - class (noun)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in (preposition)

[hi]ਸਿਖਰ[/hi] - top (noun)

[hi]ਤੇ[/hi] - at/on (postposition)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (verb)

The sentence is in the present tense, meaning that the person is currently at the top of their class. The word [hi]ਸਿਖਰ[/hi] is a noun, so it is preceded by the postposition [hi]ਤੇ[/hi], which translates to "at" or "on" in this context. The word [hi]ਆਪਣੀ[/hi] is a possessive pronoun and indicates that the class belongs to the person referred to by the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi].

Key concept: Use of postpositions like [hi]ਤੇ[/hi] to indicate location.

The next word is fish. English: The fish is swimming in the water.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੱਛੀ ਪਾਣੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਤੈਰ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੱਛੀ[/hi] - [hi]macchi[/hi] - fish

[hi]ਪਾਣੀ[/hi] - [hi]paani[/hi] - water

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]ਤੈਰ[/hi] - [hi]tair[/hi] - to swim

[hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]rahi[/hi] - is

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

The use of the [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] postposition to express location.

The present continuous tense is used in Punjabi by adding the [hi]ਰਹੀ[/hi] - [hi]rahi[/hi] suffix to the verb stem.

English: The fish is swimming in the water.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੱਛੀ ਪਾਣੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਤੈਰ ਰਹੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is maybe. English: Maybe we should go to the park.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸ਼ਾਇਦ ਅਸੀਂ ਪਾਰਕ ਜਾਣਾ ਚਾਹੀਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸ਼ਾਇਦ[/hi] - Maybe. This is the key word, and is one of the many ways to express maybe.

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - We (subject).

[hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] - Park (object).

[hi]ਜਾਣਾ[/hi] - To go (verb).

[hi]ਚਾਹੀਦਾ[/hi] - Should (modal verb).

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (copula).

This sentence uses the grammatical structure of subject, modal verb, object, copula, and verb.

The next word is global. English: The world is a global village now.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਰੀ ਦੁਨੀਆ ਹੁਣ ਇੱਕ ਗਲੋਬਲ ਪਿੰਡ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਰੀ[/hi] - means "all" or "whole" and is used to modify the noun [hi]ਦੁਨੀਆ[/hi].

[hi]ਦੁਨੀਆ[/hi] - means "world" and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਹੁਣ[/hi] - means "now" and is an adverb of time.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - means "one" and modifies the noun [hi]ਪਿੰਡ[/hi].

[hi]ਗਲੋਬਲ[/hi] - means "global" and modifies the noun [hi]ਪਿੰਡ[/hi] to emphasize the interconnected nature of the world.

[hi]ਪਿੰਡ[/hi] - means "village" and is the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is the present tense form of the verb "to be" (in Punjabi: [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi]), indicating that the statement is true in the present time.

Key concept: The sentence highlights the modern concept of globalization, how the world has become interconnected through technology, trade, and other factors.

The next word is support. English: He supports his family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਦਾ ਸਮਰਥਨ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]ooh[/hi] - He

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - [hi]aapne[/hi] - his/her/their (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]parivaar[/hi] - family

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਸਮਰਥਨ[/hi] - [hi]samarthan[/hi] - support

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]karda hai.[/hi] - does/is doing (present tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] ([hi]da[/hi]) is a possessive marker used to indicate ownership. It is often translated as "of".

The verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] ([hi]karda hai[/hi]) is in the present tense and is used to indicate an action that is happening now. It is conjugated to agree with the subject (in this case, "he").

English: He supports his family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਆਪਣੇ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਦਾ ਸਮਰਥਨ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is package. English: He brought a package of cookies.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne kukiz da [hi]pakkat [hi]laiya. [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us [hi] is the third-person singular pronoun for "he."

[hi]ne [hi] indicates the subject is performing an action.

[hi]kukiz [hi] is the plural form of "cookie" in Punjabi.

[hi]da [hi] is the possessive particle that means "of."

[hi]pakkat [hi] means "package" or "packet" in Punjabi.

[hi]laiya [hi] is the past tense of the verb "to take" or "to bring" in Punjabi.

Key Concept: The use of [hi]da [hi] is important to understand the possessive nature of the package. It clarifies that the package belongs to the cookies.

English: He brought a package of cookies.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne kukiz da [hi]pakkat [hi]laiya. [/hi]

The next word is expression. English: He expressed his feelings to her.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne apne vichara nu usde samne vyakt kiya[/hi].

Breakdown:

Us ne - He (masculine)

apne vichara nu - his feelings (literally his thoughts)

usde samne - in front of her
vyakt kiya - expressed

Key Concepts:

Ne is a grammatical particle that marks the subject of a sentence in Punjabi.

Nu is a postposition that indicates the object of a verb.

Samne is a postposition that indicates location.

Vyakt karna is a verb that means to express.

English: He expressed his feelings to her.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne apne vichara nu usde samne vyakt kiya[/hi].

The next word is tough. English: This task is tough.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kaam kathin hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun, singular, neuter)

[hi]kaam[/hi] - Work/task (noun)

[hi]kathin[/hi] - Tough/difficult (adjective)

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (present tense of the verb "to be")

This sentence uses a simple subject-verb-object structure. The key takeaway is the use of the adjective [hi]kathin[/hi] to describe the noun [hi]kaam[/hi].

Remember that in Punjabi, the adjective follows the noun, unlike English.

The next word is brief. English: The lecture was brief.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੈਕਚਰ ਛੋਟਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲੈਕਚਰ[/hi] (laekchar) - lecture

[hi]ਛੋਟਾ[/hi] (chhotaa) - small, short

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] (si) - was (past tense of [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) - is)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਛੋਟਾ[/hi] (chhotaa) can mean small or short in Punjabi.

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] (si) is the past tense of [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) - "is".

You need to use the past tense when talking about something that already happened.

English: The lecture was brief.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੈਕਚਰ ਛੋਟਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is involve. English: The project involves many different tasks.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ ਵਿੱਚ ਬਹੁਤ ਸਾਰੇ ਕੰਮ ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ[/hi] [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] [hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] [hi]ਸਾਰੇ[/hi] [hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] [hi]ਸ਼ਾਮਲ[/hi] [hi]ਹਨ।[/hi]

[hi]ਪ੍ਰੋਜੈਕਟ[/hi] - project

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - many, much

[hi]ਸਾਰੇ[/hi] - all, all of them

[hi]ਕੰਮ[/hi] - work, tasks

[hi]ਸ਼ਾਮਲ[/hi] - involved

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - are. This is the plural form of the present tense of the verb "to be"

The Punjabi word [hi]ਸ਼ਾਮਲ[/hi] is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਸ਼ਾਮਲ ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] (to involve) but it is being used as an adjective in this sentence.

Key concepts:

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a preposition that can be translated as "in" or "into"

[hi]ਸ਼ਾਮਲ[/hi] can also be translated as "include".

The next word is between. English: The book is between the two pencils.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦੋ ਪੈਨਸਿਲਾਂ ਦੇ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - [hi]kitab[/hi] - book (feminine)

[hi]ਦੋ[/hi] - [hi]do[/hi] - two

[hi]ਪੈਨਸਿਲਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]pensilan[/hi] - pencils (plural, feminine)

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - [hi]de[/hi] - of (possessive marker for feminine nouns)

[hi]ਵਿਚਕਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]vichkar[/hi] - between

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, singular, feminine)

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns have gender, which affects the choice of articles and verbs. In this sentence, [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] is feminine, so we use the feminine forms of [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] and [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

Plural: Punjabi nouns have distinct plural forms, as seen in [hi]ਪੈਨਸਿਲਾਂ[/hi].

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions (words that come after the noun) instead of prepositions (words that come before the noun). In this sentence, [hi]ਵਿਚਕਾਰ[/hi] functions as a postposition.

English: The book is between the two pencils.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦੋ ਪੈਨਸਿਲਾਂ ਦੇ ਵਿਚਕਾਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is blow. English: The wind blew the leaves off the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਵਾ ਨੇ ਪੱਤੇ ਦਰੱਖਤ ਤੋਂ ਉਡਾ ਦਿੱਤੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹਵਾ[/hi] [hava] - wind. This is a feminine noun in Punjabi.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [ne] - This is a grammatical particle that marks the subject of the sentence as the doer of the action. It is used with verbs in the past tense.

[hi]ਪੱਤੇ[/hi] [patte] - leaves (plural). This is a masculine noun.

[hi]ਦਰੱਖਤ[/hi] [darakht] - tree. This is a masculine noun.

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] [ton] - from. This is a postposition used to indicate the source of movement.

[hi]ਉਡਾ[/hi] [uda] - to fly away. This is a verb in the past tense. It is in the singular form because the subject ([hi]ਹਵਾ[/hi] [hava]) is singular.

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੇ[/hi] [ditte] - gave. This is an auxiliary verb that is used with the past tense of verbs. It is in the plural form because the object ([hi]ਪੱਤੇ[/hi] [patte]) is plural.

Key Concepts:

Gender: Punjabi nouns are classified as masculine or feminine. This affects the agreement of adjectives and verbs.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions.

Auxiliary Verbs: Punjabi uses auxiliary verbs to form different tenses.

English: The wind blew the leaves off the tree.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹਵਾ ਨੇ ਪੱਤੇ ਦਰੱਖਤ ਤੋਂ ਉਡਾ ਦਿੱਤੇ।[/hi]

The next word is small. English: The child is small.

Punjabi: [hi]Bachcha chhota hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Bachcha[/hi] - Means "child". It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]chhota[/hi] - Means "small". This is the adjective describing the child.

[hi]hai[/hi] - Means "is". This is the verb that connects the subject and the adjective.

Key Concepts:

This sentence uses the simple present tense, indicating a state of being.

It uses the adjective [hi]chhota[/hi] to describe the child's size.

The word order is subject-adjective-verb, which is typical for Punjabi sentences.

English: The child is small.

Punjabi: [hi]Bachcha chhota hai[/hi].

The next word is principle. English: The principle of honesty is important in life.

Punjabi: [hi]ਈਮਾਨਦਾਰੀ ਦਾ ਸਿਧਾਂਤ ਜੀਵਨ ਵਿੱਚ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਈਮਾਨਦਾਰੀ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] [hi]ਸਿਧਾਂਤ[/hi] [hi]ਜੀਵਨ[/hi] [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] [hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]

[hi]ਈਮਾਨਦਾਰੀ[/hi] - honesty

[hi]da[/hi] -  possessive particle, "of"

[hi]ਸਿਧਾਂਤ[/hi] - principle

[hi]ਜੀਵਨ[/hi] - life

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] - important

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

Possessive Particle: [hi]da[/hi] is a possessive particle similar to "of" in English. It connects the principle of honesty to the concept of life.

Postposition: [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a postposition similar to "in" in English. It places the principle of honesty within the context of life.

Word Order: Punjabi is a subject-object-verb (SOV) language, so the subject ([hi]ਸਿਧਾਂਤ[/hi]) comes first, followed by the object ([hi]ਜੀਵਨ[/hi]), and finally the verb ([hi]ਹੈ।[/hi]).

Important Note: The pronunciation of [hi]da[/hi] is similar to "da" in English. It is important to remember the correct pronunciation for clarity and understanding.

The next word is share. English: We shared a delicious meal together.

Punjabi: [hi]Aasां ne saath mila ke ek swadish khana share kiya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Aasां[/hi] - We (plural, inclusive)

[hi]ne[/hi] - have (past tense)

[hi]saath mila ke[/hi] - together (lit. "with together")

[hi]ek[/hi] - one (used here as a definite article)

[hi]swadish[/hi] - delicious

[hi]khana[/hi] - food, meal

[hi]share kiya[/hi] - shared (past tense)

This sentence uses the past tense of the verb [hi]share karna[/hi] (to share) which is [hi]share kiya[/hi]. The phrase [hi]saath mila ke[/hi] is often used to emphasize that something was done together, like eating a meal, or working on a project. This is an example of a simple, everyday sentence in Punjabi, that you can use to practice your language skills.

The next word is name. English: What is your name?

Punjabi: [hi]Tusi da naam kia hai?[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Tusi[/hi] is the polite form of "you". It is used when addressing someone older than you or someone you want to show respect to.

[hi]da[/hi] is a possessive particle, meaning "of" or "belonging to".

[hi]naam[/hi] means "name".

[hi]kia[/hi] means "what".

[hi]hai?[/hi] is the question marker, similar to "is" or "are" in English.

This sentence is a simple question asking for the listener's name in a polite manner.

The next word is example. Please provide an English word so I can create a Punjabi sentence, breakdown, and translation for you.

The next word is experiment. English: The scientist conducted an experiment to test the hypothesis.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਗਿਆਨੀ ਨੇ ਪਰਖ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਪ੍ਰਯੋਗ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਿਗਿਆਨੀ[/hi] [hi]vigyaani[/hi] - scientist (masculine)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]ne[/hi] - the particle marking the subject of a verb in the past tense

[hi]ਪਰਖ[/hi] [hi]parakh[/hi] - to test

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] [hi]karan[/hi] - to do, to make

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] [hi]lai[/hi] - for

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] [hi]ikk[/hi] - one

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਯੋਗ[/hi] [hi]prayog[/hi] - experiment

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] [hi]kita[/hi] - did, made (past tense of [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi])

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence structure is SOV (Subject-Object-Verb)

The particle [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] is used to mark the subject of a verb in the past tense.

The word [hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] is a very common verb meaning "to do" or "to make".

The word [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] indicates purpose.

The past tense of [hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] is [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi].

English: The scientist conducted an experiment to test the hypothesis.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਿਗਿਆਨੀ ਨੇ ਪਰਖ ਕਰਨ ਲਈ ਇੱਕ ਪ੍ਰਯੋਗ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is weather. English: The weather is beautiful today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅੱਜ ਮੌਸਮ ਬਹੁਤ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅੱਜ[/hi] - Today. This is a common word and used frequently.

[hi]ਮੌਸਮ[/hi] - Weather. This is another very common word and you will see it a lot.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - Very. This is a very useful word to know and is used often.

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] - Beautiful. This word is also used often. It can also mean pretty or handsome depending on context.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is. This is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

The sentence uses the subject-verb-object structure, which is common in Punjabi.

This sentence is in the present tense and describes a state of being.

English: The weather is beautiful today.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅੱਜ ਮੌਸਮ ਬਹੁਤ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is game. English: He is playing a game.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਖੇਡ ਖੇਡ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This means "he". This is a pronoun.

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - This means "game". This is a noun.

[hi]ਖੇਡ[/hi] - This means "playing". This is a verb.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is a verb ending that signifies the present continuous tense (is playing).

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This means "is". This is a verb.

Key Concepts:

Present Continuous Tense: The present continuous tense is used to describe an action that is happening now.

Noun-Verb Agreement: The verb in a sentence must agree with the noun in number and gender. In this case, the noun "he" is singular and masculine, so the verb must also be singular and masculine.

English: He is playing a game.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਖੇਡ ਖੇਡ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is test. English: The test is tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪਰਖ਼[/hi] [hi]ਕੱਲ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] .

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪਰਖ਼[/hi] [hi]ਕੱਲ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] .

[hi]ਪਰਖ਼[/hi] is the word for "test". Note that it is pronounced with a short "u" sound, like the "u" in "put".

[hi]ਕੱਲ[/hi] is the word for "tomorrow".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the verb "is". This is a crucial verb as it indicates the present tense.

English: The test is tomorrow.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪਰਖ਼[/hi] [hi]ਕੱਲ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] .

The next word is favorite. English: My favorite color is blue.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਰਾ ਮਨਪਸੰਦ ਰੰਗ ਨੀਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] - My (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਮਨਪਸੰਦ[/hi] - Favorite (adjective)

[hi]ਰੰਗ[/hi] - Color (noun)

[hi]ਨੀਲਾ[/hi] - Blue (adjective)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is (verb - present tense)

This is a simple sentence in Punjabi that demonstrates the use of possessive pronouns, adjectives, and verbs. Notice the word order: possessive pronoun + adjective + noun + adjective + verb. This is a common word order in Punjabi sentences.

The next word is egg. English: The chicken laid an egg.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੁਰਗੀ ਨੇ ਅੰਡਾ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੁਰਗੀ[/hi] - [hi]murgi[/hi] - chicken

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]ne[/hi] - has (used with the subject to show that the subject performed the action)

[hi]ਅੰਡਾ[/hi] - [hi]anda[/hi] - egg

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]ditta[/hi] - gave (past tense of [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]dena[/hi] - to give)

Key Concept:

The use of [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]ne[/hi] in Punjabi sentences is crucial in indicating the subject that performs the action. It is similar to using "has" or "have" in English sentences.

Translation: The chicken has given an egg.

The next word is push. English: He pushed the door open.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਧੱਕਾ ਮਾਰ ਕੇ ਖੋਲ੍ਹਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third-person singular pronoun "he" in the nominative case.

[hi]ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ[/hi] - This means "door".

[hi]ਧੱਕਾ ਮਾਰ ਕੇ[/hi] - This is a phrase that means "by pushing" or "by shoving". The [hi]ਮਾਰ ਕੇ[/hi] is a postposition that means "by" or "by means of" and [hi]ਧੱਕਾ[/hi] means "push" or "shove".

[hi]ਖੋਲ੍ਹਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to open".

This sentence uses the past tense of the verb, so it tells us that the action of pushing and opening the door has already happened.

Key concepts:

Postposition: This is a word that follows the noun or pronoun it modifies. In this sentence, [hi]ਮਾਰ ਕੇ[/hi] is a postposition modifying the verb [hi]ਧੱਕਾ[/hi].

Past Tense: This is a verb tense that describes an action that happened in the past.

English: He pushed the door open.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਦਰਵਾਜ਼ਾ ਧੱਕਾ ਮਾਰ ਕੇ ਖੋਲ੍ਹਿਆ[/hi].

The next word is produce. English: She produces beautiful paintings.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸੁੰਦਰ ਤਸਵੀਰਾਂ ਬਣਾਉਂਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] = She

[hi]ਸੁੰਦਰ[/hi] = Beautiful

[hi]ਤਸਵੀਰਾਂ[/hi] = Paintings

[hi]ਬਣਾਉਂਦੀ[/hi] = Produces (feminine singular present tense verb)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] = Is/exists, indicating that the action is in the present tense

Key Concept: The verb [hi]ਬਣਾਉਂਦੀ[/hi] in this sentence is conjugated in the feminine singular present tense because the subject of the sentence ([hi]ਉਹ[/hi], meaning she) is female. This is important for understanding the grammar of Punjabi verbs.

The next word is mistake. English: He made a mistake.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne galti kar di[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi]: This is a third person singular pronoun, meaning "he" or "she" and it refers to the person who made the mistake.

[hi]galti[/hi]: This word means "mistake".

[hi]kar di[/hi]: This is the past tense of the verb "to do" and it indicates that the mistake has already happened. It is a past tense form used to indicate that something is completed.

Key Concepts: Pronouns and verb conjugations are important in Punjabi, as they indicate who is doing what and when it happened.

English: He made a mistake.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne galti kar di[/hi].

The next word is second. English: He is the second son in the family.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਰਿਵਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਦੂਜਾ ਪੁੱਤਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - This is a pronoun meaning "he".

[hi]ਪਰਿਵਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]parivar[/hi] - This is a noun meaning "family".

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - This is a preposition meaning "in".

[hi]ਦੂਜਾ[/hi] - [hi]duja[/hi] - This is an adjective meaning "second".

[hi]ਪੁੱਤਰ[/hi] - [hi]puttar[/hi] - This is a noun meaning "son".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - This is a verb meaning "is".

Key Concepts:

Word Order: Punjabi follows a Subject-Object-Verb (SOV) word order, which is different from English's Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) word order.

Gender Agreement: In Punjabi, adjectives must agree with the noun they describe in gender and number. In this sentence, the adjective [hi]ਦੂਜਾ[/hi] ([hi]duja[/hi]) is masculine singular, matching the noun [hi]ਪੁੱਤਰ[/hi] ([hi]puttar[/hi]).

Translation: He is the second son in the family.

The next word is again. English: He came back again.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਦੁਬਾਰਾ ਆਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਦੁਬਾਰਾ[/hi] - [hi]dubara[/hi] - again

[hi]ਆਇਆ।[/hi] - [hi]aaya.[/hi] - came (masculine singular past tense)

Key concepts:

The word [hi]ਦੁਬਾਰਾ[/hi] ([hi]dubara[/hi]) means "again" and is used to indicate repetition.

The verb [hi]ਆਇਆ[/hi] ([hi]aaya[/hi]) is in the past tense and agrees with the masculine singular subject [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] ([hi]uh[/hi]).

Translation: He came back again.

The next word is writer. English: The writer is famous for his books.

Punjabi: ਲੇਖਕ ਆਪਣੀਆਂ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਲਈ ਮਸ਼ਹੂਰ ਹੈ।

[hi]Lekhak apniyan kitaaban layi mashhoor hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Lekhak[/hi] means writer. It's the subject of the sentence.

[hi]Apniyan[/hi] means his/her/their. It's a possessive adjective modifying [hi]kitaaban[/hi].

[hi]Kitaaban[/hi] means books. It's the object of the preposition [hi]layi[/hi].

[hi]Layi[/hi] means for. It's a preposition connecting the object of the sentence [hi]kitaaban[/hi] with the adjective [hi]mashhoor[/hi].

[hi]Mashhoor[/hi] means famous. It's the adjective describing the writer.

[hi]Hai[/hi] is the present tense of the verb "to be."

The sentence uses the simple present tense, indicating that the writer is always famous for his/her books. It also emphasizes the writer's fame. This is a good sentence to learn because it uses several common words.

The next word is forward. English: He moved forward.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅੱਗੇ ਵੱਧਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He, him, she, her (the pronoun used to indicate a male person in this instance)

[hi]ਅੱਗੇ[/hi] - Forward, ahead. This word signifies moving in the direction that is in front of you.

[hi]ਵੱਧਿਆ।[/hi] - Moved, progressed. The past tense of the verb "to move".

The Punjabi word order is Subject-Adverb-Verb. The word [hi]ਅੱਗੇ[/hi] is used as an adverb of place in this sentence, modifying the verb [hi]ਵੱਧਿਆ।[/hi]

English: He moved forward.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਅੱਗੇ ਵੱਧਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is despite. English: Despite the rain, the children went out to play.

Punjabi: [hi]Barish hone de bavajood, bacche khelne gaye.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Barish[/hi] - rain

[hi]hone[/hi] - to happen/occur

[hi]de[/hi] - possessive particle, "of" or "belonging to"

[hi]bavajood[/hi] - despite, in spite of

[hi]bacche[/hi] - children

[hi]khelne[/hi] - to play

[hi]gaye[/hi] - went

This sentence uses the postposition [hi]bavajood[/hi] to express the idea of "despite" or "in spite of." The postposition always follows the noun or pronoun it modifies, in this case, [hi]Barish[/hi] (rain).

Key Concept: The use of the postposition [hi]bavajood[/hi] is a common way to express the concept of "despite" in Punjabi. It is important to remember that it always follows the noun it modifies.

The next word is word. Please provide the English word you would like me to use in a Punjabi sentence. I am ready to create a sentence with a breakdown of grammar and meaning, using [hi] markers for Punjabi words.

The next word is animal. English: The animal is in the cage.

Punjabi: [hi]ਜਾਨਵਰ ਪਿੰਜਰੇ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਜਾਨਵਰ[/hi] (jaanvar) - This is the Punjabi word for "animal." It is a noun and is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਪਿੰਜਰੇ[/hi] (pinjray) - This is the Punjabi word for "cage." It is a noun and is the object of the preposition "in."

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] (vich) - This is the Punjabi preposition "in." It indicates the location of the animal.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (hai) - This is the Punjabi verb "is." It is in the present tense.

This sentence is a simple sentence with a subject, verb, and object. It demonstrates the use of the preposition "in" and the verb "is" in Punjabi. Remember, the key concept here is the use of prepositions to describe location.

The next word is host. English: The host welcomed us warmly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਜ਼ਬਾਨ ਨੇ ਸਾਡਾ ਗਰਮਜੋਸ਼ੀ ਨਾਲ ਸਵਾਗਤ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੇਜ਼ਬਾਨ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "host" or "hostess". It is a noun.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular past tense marker for verbs in Punjabi. It is similar to the English "did" or "has" or "have".

[hi]ਸਾਡਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "our" or "us". It is a possessive pronoun.

[hi]ਗਰਮਜੋਸ਼ੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "warmth" or "hospitality". It is a noun.

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "with". It is a preposition.

[hi]ਸਵਾਗਤ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "welcome". It is a noun.

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to do" in Punjabi.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi is an SOV (Subject-Object-Verb) language, so the sentence structure is different than English. The subject ([hi]ਮੇਜ਼ਬਾਨ[/hi]) comes first, followed by the object ([hi]ਸਾਡਾ[/hi]), and then the verb ([hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi]).

Punjabi has a number of grammatical markers that are used to indicate tense, person, and number. This is different than English, which uses auxiliary verbs to indicate these things.

English: The host welcomed us warmly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੇਜ਼ਬਾਨ ਨੇ ਸਾਡਾ ਗਰਮਜੋਸ਼ੀ ਨਾਲ ਸਵਾਗਤ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is opportunity. English: This is a great opportunity to learn Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਿੱਖਣ ਦਾ ਇੱਕ ਵਧੀਆ ਮੌਕਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਪੰਜਾਬੀ[/hi] - Punjabi

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਣ[/hi] - Learning (gerund form)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - a, one

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - good, nice

[hi]ਮੌਕਾ[/hi] - opportunity, chance

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

Key concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] marks possession

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਣ[/hi] is the gerund form of the verb [hi]ਸਿੱਖਣਾ[/hi] (to learn) and is used here to act as a noun

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] is used to introduce the subject of the sentence

[hi]ਮੌਕਾ[/hi] is a noun meaning opportunity or chance

English: This is a great opportunity to learn Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਸਿੱਖਣ ਦਾ ਇੱਕ ਵਧੀਆ ਮੌਕਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is music. English: The music is very beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]Sangīt bahut sundar hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Sangīt[/hi] means "music". It is an important concept in Punjabi culture.

[hi]bahut[/hi] means "very". You can use this word to emphasize adjectives.

[hi]sundar[/hi] means "beautiful". It is a common adjective in Punjabi.

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense of the verb "to be".

This sentence uses a simple subject-verb-object structure. The word order is important for understanding the meaning.

English: The music is very beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]Sangīt bahut sundar hai[/hi].

The next word is revenue. English: The company's revenue is increasing this year.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਸਾਲ ਕੰਪਨੀ ਦਾ ਮੁਨਾਫ਼ਾ ਵੱਧ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਸਾਲ[/hi] - Year

[hi]ਕੰਪਨੀ[/hi] - Company

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਮੁਨਾਫ਼ਾ[/hi] - Revenue, profit

[hi]ਵੱਧ[/hi] - More, increasing

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - Is (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is. (verb)

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This possessive particle is used to indicate possession.

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - The present continuous tense in Punjabi is formed by adding [hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] to the verb stem.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the common way to end a sentence in Punjabi.

Translation: The company's revenue is increasing this year.

The next word is treatment. English: The doctor gave the patient a special treatment.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ ਨੇ ਮਰੀਜ਼ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਖਾਸ ਇਲਾਜ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi] [hi]doctor[/hi] - This is the subject of the sentence and is in the nominative case.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]has/have[/hi] - This is a grammatical particle that marks the subject.

[hi]ਮਰੀਜ਼[/hi] [hi]patient[/hi] - This is the indirect object of the sentence and is in the dative case.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] [hi]to[/hi] - This is a preposition that marks the indirect object.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] [hi]a/one[/hi] - This is an indefinite article.

[hi]ਖਾਸ[/hi] [hi]special[/hi] - This is an adjective that modifies the noun [hi]ਇਲਾਜ[/hi].

[hi]ਇਲਾਜ[/hi] [hi]treatment[/hi] - This is the direct object of the sentence.

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] [hi]gave[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb [hi]ਦੇਣਾ[/hi] [hi]to give[/hi].

Key Concepts:

The sentence is in the past tense.

The subject of the sentence is [hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ[/hi].

The object of the sentence is [hi]ਇਲਾਜ[/hi].

The indirect object of the sentence is [hi]ਮਰੀਜ਼[/hi].

English: The doctor gave the patient a special treatment.

Punjabi: [hi]ਡਾਕਟਰ ਨੇ ਮਰੀਜ਼ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਖਾਸ ਇਲਾਜ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is shift. English: The worker shifted the heavy box.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਮੇ ਨੇ ਭਾਰੀ ਸੰਦੂਕ ਨੂੰ ਸ਼ਿਫਟ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਾਮੇ[/hi] - The worker (masculine)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - Has/did (indicates past tense, masculine subject)

[hi]ਭਾਰੀ[/hi] - Heavy

[hi]ਸੰਦੂਕ[/hi] - Box

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - To/towards (object marker)

[hi]ਸ਼ਿਫਟ[/hi] - Shift (verb, past tense)

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - Done/made (past tense, masculine subject)

Key concepts:

Gender Agreement: Punjabi verbs and some adjectives agree in gender with their subjects. "Kaame" (worker) is masculine, so the verb "kiita" is also masculine.

Object Marker: The word "nu" marks the direct object of the verb.

Past Tense: The past tense is indicated by the verb endings "ne" and "kiita."

English: The worker shifted the heavy box.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਮੇ ਨੇ ਭਾਰੀ ਸੰਦੂਕ ਨੂੰ ਸ਼ਿਫਟ ਕੀਤਾ[/hi]

The next word is conference. English: The conference will be held in Chandigarh.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੰਮੇਲਨ ਚੰਡੀਗੜ੍ਹ ਵਿੱਚ ਹੋਵੇਗਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੰਮੇਲਨ[/hi] - [hi]sammelan[/hi] - conference

[hi]ਚੰਡੀਗੜ੍ਹ[/hi] - [hi]chandigarh[/hi] - Chandigarh

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]ਹੋਵੇਗਾ[/hi] - [hi]hovega[/hi] - will be held

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਸੰਮੇਲਨ[/hi] is a noun and refers to a conference.

The word [hi]ਚੰਡੀਗੜ੍ਹ[/hi] is a proper noun and refers to the city of Chandigarh.

The word [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a postposition and indicates location.

The word [hi]ਹੋਵੇਗਾ[/hi] is a verb in the future tense and means "will be held".

Translation: The conference will be held in Chandigarh.

The next word is see. English: I see a book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਵੇਖ ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - This is the first-person singular pronoun meaning "I".

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - This is the noun meaning "book".

[hi]ਵੇਖ[/hi] - This is the verb "to see" in the present continuous tense. The ending [hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi] indicates the present continuous tense and that the action is ongoing.

Key Concepts:

Present Continuous Tense: This tense is used to describe actions happening at the present moment. It is formed by using the present participle (verb + ing) and the auxiliary verb "to be". In Punjabi, the present continuous tense is formed by adding [hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi] to the verb stem.

Pronouns: Pronouns are words that replace nouns to avoid repetition. In this sentence, [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] replaces the speaker's name.

Memorization Tip: Think of the word [hi]ਵੇਖ[/hi] as meaning "to look at" or "to see." The ending [hi]ਰਿਹਾ ਹਾਂ[/hi] is like saying "I am seeing".

The next word is band. English: The band is playing loudly.

Punjabi: [hi]ਬੈਂਡ ਜ਼ੋਰ ਨਾਲ ਵਜਾ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਬੈਂਡ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "band".

[hi]ਜੋਰ[/hi] - This means "loud" or "forcefully".

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - This indicates that the band is playing with force.

[hi]ਵਜਾ[/hi] - This is the verb "to play" (an instrument).

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - This is the present continuous tense marker, indicating that the action is happening now.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense marker, indicating a statement of fact.

This sentence uses a simple subject-verb-object structure with a descriptive phrase to illustrate how the band is playing. "Loudly" is conveyed using the word "forcefully" which is more direct and common in Punjabi.

The next word is require. English: I require your help.

Punjabi: ਮੈਨੂੰ ਤੇਰੀ ਮਦਦ ਦੀ ਲੋੜ ਹੈ।

[hi]Mainu teri madad di loṛ hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Mainu[/hi] - This is the object marker for "I". It is a very common Punjabi word.

[hi]teri[/hi] - This means "your" - "your" is the possessive form of "you". In this instance, it is the possessive form of "you" in the informal singular form. If the "you" was plural it would be [hi]tuhadi[/hi] which means "your".

[hi]madad[/hi] - This means "help".

[hi]di[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "of" or "belonging to". This word is almost always used in the possessive case.

[hi]loṛ[/hi] - This means "need" or "require".

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is".

The literal translation of the Punjabi is "To me your help of need is". It is a very common and natural way to say "I need your help".

The next word is pound. English: The carpenter pounded the nail into the wood.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲੱਕੜ਼ੀ ਵਾਲਾ ਨੇ ਕਿੱਲੇ ਨੂੰ ਠੋਕਿਆ[/hi] [hi]ਲੱਕੜੀ[/hi] [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲੱਕੜ਼ੀ ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [hi]ਕਿੱਲੇ[/hi] [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] [hi]ਠੋਕਿਆ[/hi] [hi]ਲੱਕੜੀ[/hi] [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This literally means "The carpenter pounded the nail into the wood."

Key concepts:

[hi]ਲੱਕੜ਼ੀ ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] - "Carpenter" literally means "wood person"

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - This is a post-position marking the subject of the sentence, similar to "by" in English

[hi]ਕਿੱਲੇ[/hi] - "Nail"

[hi]ਠੋਕਿਆ[/hi] - Past tense of the verb "to pound"

[hi]ਲੱਕੜੀ[/hi] - "Wood"

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - "Inside" or "into"

Remember that the use of post-positions, like [hi]ਨੇ[/hi] and [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi], is common in Punjabi grammar.

The next word is per. English: He walks per the rules.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਨਿਯਮਾਂ ਅਨੁਸਾਰ ਚੱਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਨਿਯਮਾਂ[/hi] - Rules (plural)

[hi]ਅਨੁਸਾਰ[/hi] - According to, per, as per, in accordance with

[hi]ਚੱਲਦਾ[/hi] - Walks

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is

Key concepts:

The word [hi]ਅਨੁਸਾਰ[/hi] is used to express that something is done "according to" or "in accordance with" something else.

The [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] at the end of the sentence is used to indicate that the verb is in the present tense.

English: He walks per the rules.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਨਿਯਮਾਂ ਅਨੁਸਾਰ ਚੱਲਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is wear. English: He wears a blue shirt.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਨੀਲੀ ਕਮੀਜ਼ ਪਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She/It (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਨੀਲੀ[/hi] - [hi]neeli[/hi] - Blue (adjective, modifies the noun "shirt")

[hi]ਕਮੀਜ਼[/hi] - [hi]kamiz[/hi] - Shirt (noun, object of the verb "wears")

[hi]ਪਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]paunda hai[/hi] - Wears (verb, present tense, masculine singular)

Key concepts:

Gender agreement: In Punjabi, verbs and adjectives agree with the gender of the noun they modify. Since "[hi]ਕਮੀਜ਼[/hi]" is masculine, the verb "[hi]ਪਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi]" is also in the masculine form.

Tense: The verb "[hi]ਪਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi]" indicates that the action happens regularly (present tense)

English: He wears a blue shirt.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਨੀਲੀ ਕਮੀਜ਼ ਪਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is cancer. English: Cancer is a serious disease.

Punjabi: [hi]Kanser ek gambhir bimari hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Kanser[/hi] - Cancer.

[hi]ek[/hi] - a, one. The word [hi]ek[/hi] is used for both singular and plural in Punjabi.

[hi]gambhir[/hi] - serious.

[hi]bimari[/hi] - disease.

[hi]hai[/hi] - is.

Key Concepts:

Punjabi uses the word [hi]ek[/hi] for both singular and plural.

The word order in Punjabi sentences is typically subject-verb-object.

English: Cancer is a serious disease.

Punjabi: [hi]Kanser ek gambhir bimari hai[/hi].

The next word is immediately. English: He immediately left the room.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਤੁਰੰਤ ਕਮਰੇ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਬਾਹਰ ਚਲਾ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਤੁਰੰਤ[/hi] - immediately

[hi]ਕਮਰੇ[/hi] - room

[hi]ਵਿੱਚੋਂ[/hi] - from

[hi]ਬਾਹਰ[/hi] - out

[hi]ਚਲਾ[/hi] - went

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - he (past tense marker)

Key Concept: The word [hi]ਤੁਰੰਤ[/hi] is a very versatile adverb that can be used in a variety of contexts to express immediacy.

English: He immediately left the room.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਤੁਰੰਤ ਕਮਰੇ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਬਾਹਰ ਚਲਾ ਗਿਆ।[/hi]

The next word is ring. English: The ring is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਿੰਗ ਸੋਹਣੀ ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਰਿੰਗ[/hi] means "ring"

[hi]ਸੋਹਣੀ[/hi] means "beautiful"

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb "to be"

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is a very common verb in Punjabi and is used to indicate "is" or "am" or "are"

In this example, [hi]ਸੋਹਣੀ[/hi] is used as an adjective to describe the ring.

The word order in Punjabi is different than English, the adjective ([hi]ਸੋਹਣੀ[/hi]) comes before the noun ([hi]ਰਿੰਗ[/hi]).

English: The ring is beautiful.

Punjabi: [hi]ਰਿੰਗ ਸੋਹਣੀ ਹੈ[/hi].

The next word is fast. English: He runs fast.

Punjabi: [hi]ऊਹ ਤੇਜ਼ ਦੌੜਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ऊह[/hi] - He (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]तेज़[/hi] - fast (adjective, describing the verb)

[hi]दौड़दा[/hi] - runs (verb, present continuous tense)

[hi]है।[/hi] - is (verb, helping verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses the present continuous tense, indicated by the verb ending in [hi]दा[/hi].

The word order is Subject-Adjective-Verb-Helping Verb, which is typical of Punjabi.

The use of the helping verb [hi]है।[/hi] emphasizes that the action of running is happening at the present moment.

Translation: He runs fast.

The next word is nice. English: This is a nice day.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh din bahut vadiya hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This. Pronunciation: eh (the "h" is silent). It's a demonstrative pronoun.

[hi]din[/hi] - Day. Pronunciation: din (the "i" is short and sounds like the "i" in "pin"). It's a noun.

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Very. Pronunciation: bahut (the "u" is short and sounds like the "u" in "put"). It's an adverb of degree.

[hi]vadiya[/hi] - Nice. Pronunciation: vadiya (the "i" is long and sounds like the "i" in "machine"). It's an adjective.

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is. Pronunciation: hai (the "a" is short and sounds like the "a" in "cat"). It's the present tense of the verb "to be" (singular).

Key concept: Punjabi word order is generally Subject-Verb-Object (SVO), similar to English. The word "nice" in this sentence is represented by the Punjabi word [hi]vadiya[/hi], and it's used to describe the noun [hi]din[/hi].

Word memorization: This sentence is a great way to learn the Punjabi words for "day" ([hi]din[/hi]), "very" ([hi]bahut[/hi]), and "nice" ([hi]vadiya[/hi]).

The next word is tape. English: He taped the letter to the wall.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਚਿੱਠੀ ਕੰਧ 'ਤੇ ਟੇਪ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun, meaning "he."

[hi]ਚਿੱਠੀ[/hi] - This is the noun for "letter."

[hi]ਕੰਧ[/hi] - This is the noun for "wall."

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - This is the postposition indicating "on" or "to."

[hi]ਟੇਪ[/hi] - This is the verb "to tape." In Punjabi, the verb is often conjugated by using the past tense of the verb, "to do," [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] (which is the conjugated form of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi]) followed by the present participle form of the verb, [hi]ਟੇਪ[/hi] (which is the present participle of the verb [hi]ਟੇਪ ਕਰਨਾ[/hi], meaning "to tape").

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - This is the past tense conjugation of the verb [hi]ਕਰਨਾ[/hi], "to do," indicating that the action has already been completed.

Important concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. These are words that follow the noun or pronoun they modify.

Verb Conjugation: Punjabi verbs are conjugated based on person, number, and tense.

Word Order: Punjabi is a subject-object-verb (SOV) language, meaning the subject comes first, followed by the object, and then the verb.

English: He taped the letter to the wall.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਚਿੱਠੀ ਕੰਧ 'ਤੇ ਟੇਪ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is oil. English: The oil is used for cooking.

Punjabi: [hi]तेल[/hi] [hi]ਖਾਣ[/hi] [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] [hi]ਵਰਤਿਆ[/hi] [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]तेल[/hi] [hi]ਖਾਣ[/hi] [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] [hi]ਵਰਤਿਆ[/hi] [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] [hi]ਹੈ[/hi]

[hi]तेल[/hi] - Oil

[hi]ਖਾਣ[/hi] - To eat (infinitive form)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - For (this word is crucial to understanding the purpose)

[hi]ਵਰਤਿਆ[/hi] - Used (past participle)

[hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] - Is (present continuous tense)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - It is (present tense)

Key concept: The sentence uses the past participle form [hi]ਵਰਤਿਆ[/hi] to indicate that the oil is used in the present. [hi]ਜਾਂਦਾ[/hi] adds the continuous aspect of the action.

English: The oil is used for cooking.

The next word is suggest. English: He suggested that we go to the park.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne sajdeea kiya ke asī bāgh vich jāīye[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us ne[/hi] - This is the subject, "He" in English.

[hi]sajdeea kiya[/hi] - This is the verb, "suggested" in English.

[hi]ke[/hi] - This is a conjunction, connecting the subject with the following clause. It means "that" in English.

[hi]asī[/hi] - This is the pronoun "we" in English.

[hi]bāgh vich[/hi] - This is the phrase "to the park" in English.

[hi]jāīye[/hi] - This is the verb "go" in English. It's in the imperative form, making it a suggestion.

Key Concepts:

[hi]sajdeea kiya[/hi] is a common way to say "suggested" in Punjabi.

[hi]ke[/hi] is a versatile conjunction used in many contexts.

[hi]vich[/hi] means "in" or "inside" and is used in this case to indicate a location.

[hi]jāīye[/hi] is an imperative verb, implying a suggestion or command.

English: He suggested that we go to the park.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne sajdeea kiya ke asī bāgh vich jāīye[/hi].

The next word is main. English: I am the main person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਮੁੱਖ ਹਾਂ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - [hi]main[/hi] - I

[hi]ਮੁੱਖ[/hi] - [hi]mukh[/hi] - main, chief, head

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]haan[/hi] - am

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਮੁੱਖ[/hi] is often used to indicate something primary, chief, or most important.

In this sentence, the subject is [hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi], and the predicate is [hi]ਮੁੱਖ ਹਾਂ[/hi].

English: I am the main person.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਮੁੱਖ ਹਾਂ[/hi].

The next word is this. English: This is a book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kitaab hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun). This is the most common way to say "this" in Punjabi. It is used for things that are near the speaker.

[hi]kitaab[/hi] - Book. This is the noun in the sentence. You can use it in many ways.

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (present tense of the verb "to be"). This is the verb in the sentence.

This sentence is a simple declarative sentence using the standard subject-verb-object structure. Note that the word order can be different in Punjabi than in English, but this is a typical sentence structure.

This is a key sentence to learn as it is used all the time! Memorize it!

English: This is a book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh kitaab hai[/hi].

The next word is apart. English: He sat apart from the group.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਮੂਹ ਤੋਂ ਵੱਖ ਬੈਠਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He

[hi]ਸਮੂਹ[/hi] - group

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - from

[hi]ਵੱਖ[/hi] - apart

[hi]ਬੈਠਾ[/hi] - sat

[hi]ਸੀ[/hi] - was

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi word for "apart" is [hi]ਵੱਖ[/hi].

The word [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] indicates "from."

The verb [hi]ਬੈਠਾ[/hi] is in the past tense, meaning "sat."

The word [hi]ਸੀ[/hi] is used to indicate that the action happened in the past.

English: He sat apart from the group.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਮੂਹ ਤੋਂ ਵੱਖ ਬੈਠਾ ਸੀ।[/hi]

The next word is affect. English: The weather affects our mood.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੌਸਮ ਸਾਡੇ ਮੂਡ ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵਿਤ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੌਸਮ[/hi] - [hi]mausam[/hi] - weather. This is a common noun and the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਸਾਡੇ[/hi] - [hi]saade[/hi] - our - This is a possessive adjective modifying the next word.

[hi]ਮੂਡ[/hi] - [hi]mood[/hi] - mood - This is a noun and the object of the verb.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] - This is a postposition that indicates the object of the verb, similar to the English "to."

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵਿਤ[/hi] - [hi]prabhavit[/hi] - This is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵਿਤ ਕਰਨਾ[/hi] - [hi]prabhavit karna[/hi] - to affect. This is used in the present tense with the auxiliary verb [hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]karda hai[/hi] - does.

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]karda hai[/hi] - This is the present tense, third person singular form of the verb "to do." It is used as an auxiliary verb in this sentence.

Key concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions. A postposition is a word that follows the noun it modifies.

Auxiliary Verbs: Punjabi uses auxiliary verbs to express tense and aspect.

Translation:

English: The weather affects our mood.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੌਸਮ ਸਾਡੇ ਮੂਡ ਨੂੰ ਪ੍ਰਭਾਵਿਤ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is basically. English: He basically knows everything about the history of Punjab.

Punjabi: [hi]Oh [hi] [hi]Punjab [hi] de [hi]itihaas [hi] baare [hi] oh [hi] aas [hi] sab [hi] kujh [hi] jaanda [hi] hai [hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Oh [hi] - He

[hi]Punjab [hi] - Punjab

[hi]de [hi] - of

[hi]itihaas [hi] - history

[hi]baare [hi] - about

[hi]oh [hi] - he

[hi]aas [hi] - basically

[hi]sab [hi] - all

[hi]kujh [hi] - something

[hi]jaanda [hi] - knows

[hi]hai [hi] - is

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]aas [hi] is used to emphasize that he knows most of the history, not necessarily all of it.

The sentence structure is similar to English, with a subject ([hi]oh [hi]), a verb ([hi]jaanda [hi]), and an object ([hi]sab [hi] [hi]kujh [hi]).

English: He basically knows everything about the history of Punjab.

Punjabi: [hi]Oh [hi] [hi]Punjab [hi] de [hi]itihaas [hi] baare [hi] oh [hi] aas [hi] sab [hi] kujh [hi] jaanda [hi] hai [hi].

The next word is village. English: He lives in the village.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਿੰਡ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਹਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਪਿੰਡ[/hi] - village (noun)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in (postposition) - Indicates location

[hi]ਰਹਿੰਦਾ[/hi] - lives (verb) - Present tense

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is (auxiliary verb, used to indicate present tense)

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses a postposition ([hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi]) to indicate location.

The verb [hi]ਰਹਿੰਦਾ[/hi] is in the present tense.

The auxiliary verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is used to form the present tense.

English: He lives in the village.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਪਿੰਡ ਵਿੱਚ ਰਹਿੰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is announce. English: They announced the arrival of the guest.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ ਨੇ ਮਹਿਮਾਨ ਦੇ ਆਉਣ ਦਾ ਐਲਾਨ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਨ੍ਹਾਂ[/hi] - They (plural pronoun)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - Have (helping verb, indicates past tense)

[hi]ਮਹਿਮਾਨ[/hi] - Guest

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਆਉਣ[/hi] - Arrival (gerund)

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]ਐਲਾਨ[/hi] - Announcement

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - Did (past tense of the verb "ਕਰਨਾ" - to do)

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: Punjabi nouns have gender, which is reflected in the possessive particles ([hi]ਦੇ[/hi] vs. [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] for feminine nouns). In this case, the noun [hi]ਮਹਿਮਾਨ[/hi] (guest) is masculine, so we use the masculine possessive particle [hi]ਦੇ[/hi].

Gerund: The word [hi]ਆਉਣ[/hi] (arrival) functions as a gerund, which is a verb form used as a noun.

This sentence uses the simple past tense, indicating an action that happened in the past. The word "announced" is translated by the verb "[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi]" and the noun phrase "[hi]ਐਲਾਨ[/hi]" (announcement). The phrase "[hi]ਮਹਿਮਾਨ ਦੇ ਆਉਣ ਦਾ[/hi]" (of the guest's arrival) functions as the object of the verb.

The next word is length. English: The length of this road is five kilometers.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਸੜਕ ਦੀ ਲੰਬਾਈ ਪੰਜ ਕਿਲੋਮੀਟਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਸ[/hi] - This (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਸੜਕ[/hi] - Road (noun)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of (possessive particle, indicates belonging to the road)

[hi]ਲੰਬਾਈ[/hi] - Length (noun)

[hi]ਪੰਜ[/hi] - Five (numeral)

[hi]ਕਿਲੋਮੀਟਰ[/hi] - Kilometers (noun)

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is (copula verb, connects subject and predicate)

Key concepts:

Possessive particle: [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is used to show possession, similar to "of" in English.

Copula verb: [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] acts as a linking verb, connecting the subject ([hi]ਲੰਬਾਈ[/hi]) with the predicate ([hi]ਪੰਜ ਕਿਲੋਮੀਟਰ[/hi]).

English: The length of this road is five kilometers.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਸ ਸੜਕ ਦੀ ਲੰਬਾਈ ਪੰਜ ਕਿਲੋਮੀਟਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is choose. English: He chose to stay home.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਘਰ ਰਹਿਣਾ ਚੁਣਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine subject pronoun, meaning "he."

[hi]ਘਰ[/hi] - This means "home."

[hi]ਰਹਿਣਾ[/hi] - This is the infinitive form of the verb "to stay."

[hi]ਚੁਣਿਆ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to choose."

The sentence follows the structure of subject + verb + object, which is a common sentence structure in Punjabi.

Key concepts:

Punjabi has a system of grammatical genders (masculine, feminine, and neuter).

Infinitives in Punjabi are used in a similar way to English.

Verb conjugation in Punjabi is more complex than in English.

Translation: He chose to stay home.

The next word is copy. English: He copied the assignment from his friend.

Punjabi: ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਤੋਂ ਇਹ ਅਸਾਈਨਮੈਂਟ [hi]ਨਕਲ[/hi] ਕੀਤੀ।

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - his/her/its (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] - friend (noun)

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - from (postposition)

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - this (demonstrative pronoun)

[hi]ਅਸਾਈਨਮੈਂਟ[/hi] - assignment (noun)

[hi]ਨਕਲ[/hi] - copied (past tense verb)

[hi]ਕੀਤੀ[/hi] - did/made (past tense auxiliary verb)

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the past tense to indicate that the action of copying has already happened.

The word [hi]ਨਕਲ[/hi] is a noun, but it is used as a verb in this sentence. This is a common phenomenon in Punjabi, where nouns can be used as verbs depending on the context.

English: He copied the assignment from his friend.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਦੋਸਤ ਤੋਂ ਇਹ ਅਸਾਈਨਮੈਂਟ ਨਕਲ ਕੀਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is soldier. English: The soldier is brave.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਿਪਾਹੀ ਬਹਾਦਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਿਪਾਹੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for soldier.

[hi]ਬਹਾਦਰ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for brave. It is an adjective that describes the noun, soldier.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is" - it is the present tense form of the verb "to be."

Key Concepts:

Noun: [hi]ਸਿਪਾਹੀ[/hi] (soldier)

Adjective: [hi]ਬਹਾਦਰ[/hi] (brave)

Verb: [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] (is)

Translation: The soldier is brave.

The next word is clear. English: The sky is clear.

Punjabi: [hi]Aasmaan saaf hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Aasmaan[/hi] means sky. It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]saaf[/hi] means clear. It is the adjective describing the sky.

[hi]hai[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb "to be." It is the copula connecting the subject and the adjective.

English: The sky is clear.

Punjabi: [hi]Aasmaan saaf hai[/hi].

The next word is description. English: He gave a detailed description of the event.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne ghatna di vistaar sahit varnan kiya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Usne[/hi] - He

[hi]ghatna[/hi] - Event

[hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive particle)

[hi]vistaar[/hi] - detail

[hi]sahit[/hi] - with

[hi]varnan[/hi] - description

[hi]kiya[/hi] - did

Key Concepts:

The use of the possessive particle [hi]di[/hi] to indicate possession.

The use of the preposition [hi]sahit[/hi] to indicate "with" or "including".

English: He gave a detailed description of the event.

Punjabi: [hi]Usne ghatna di vistaar sahit varnan kiya[/hi].

The next word is invest. English: He invested all his money in the stock market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਸਾਰੇ ਪੈਸੇ ਸ਼ੇਅਰ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਲਗਾ ਦਿੱਤੇ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular masculine pronoun in the past tense. It translates to "he" in English.

[hi]ਆਪਣੇ[/hi] - This is the possessive pronoun that means "his" or "her" depending on the context. Here, it refers to the money that belongs to the person.

[hi]ਸਾਰੇ[/hi] - This is the word for "all" or "entire" and is used to emphasize that the entire amount of money was invested.

[hi]ਪੈਸੇ[/hi] - This is the word for "money" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਸ਼ੇਅਰ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ[/hi] - This is the term for the stock market in Punjabi.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - This is the preposition that means "in" or "into" and is used to indicate the place where the money was invested.

[hi]ਲਗਾ ਦਿੱਤੇ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to invest". It is a combination of the verb "ਲਗਾਉਣਾ" [hi]lagauna[/hi] (to invest) and the past tense marker "ਦਿੱਤੇ" [hi]ditte[/hi].

The key concept here is the use of the past tense to indicate a completed action. This sentence tells us that the investment has already taken place.

English: He invested all his money in the stock market.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਆਪਣੇ ਸਾਰੇ ਪੈਸੇ ਸ਼ੇਅਰ ਬਾਜ਼ਾਰ ਵਿੱਚ ਲਗਾ ਦਿੱਤੇ।[/hi]

The next word is seek. English: He seeks knowledge.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਗਿਆਨ ਦੀ ਤਲਾਸ਼ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਗਿਆਨ[/hi] - Knowledge

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - Of (possessive marker, signifies belonging to knowledge)

[hi]ਤਲਾਸ਼[/hi] - Search

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - Does, in this case, 'seeks'

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - Is. This signifies present tense.

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is a very important marker for possession, signifying belonging to the word preceding it.

[hi]ਕਰਦਾ[/hi] - This word is used often for verbs, and indicates present tense.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is a very important marker, indicating the present tense.

English: He seeks knowledge.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਗਿਆਨ ਦੀ ਤਲਾਸ਼ ਕਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is friend. English: He is my friend.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਰਾ ਦੋਸਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He (pronoun, subject of the sentence)

[hi]ਮੇਰਾ[/hi] - my (possessive adjective, modifies [hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi])

[hi]ਦੋਸਤ[/hi] - friend (noun, object of the sentence)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - is (present tense verb, linking verb)

Key concepts:

Punjabi word order is generally subject-object-verb (SOV).

Possessive adjectives precede the noun they modify.

The verb "to be" is expressed by the verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi].

English: He is my friend.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਮੇਰਾ ਦੋਸਤ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is problem. English: There is a problem in the car.

Punjabi: [hi]Gaڑی وچّ کوئی مسئلہ اے।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Gaڑی[/hi] - car

[hi]وچّ[/hi] - in

[hi]کوئی[/hi] - any

[hi]مسئلہ[/hi] - problem

[hi]اے[/hi] - is

This sentence uses the postposition [hi]وچّ[/hi] (in) to show location. The word [hi]کوئی[/hi] (any) emphasizes that the problem is not specified. The final word [hi]اے[/hi] (is) is the verb in the sentence, and it indicates that there is a problem in the car.

The next word is original. English: The original book is in the library.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੂਲ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਚ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੂਲ[/hi] - original

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book

[hi]ਲਾਇਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ[/hi] - library

[hi]ਚ[/hi] - in

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਚ[/hi] is a postposition indicating location. It is similar to the English "in" and "at".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

This sentence is in the simple present tense and is a declarative sentence.

Remember: The Punjabi sentence structure is Subject-Object-Verb (SOV). This means that the subject comes first, then the object, and finally the verb.

The next word is gather. English: We gathered at the park for a picnic.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਪਾਰਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਪਿਕਨਿਕ ਲਈ ਇਕੱਠੇ ਹੋਏ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - we (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] - park (masculine noun)

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - in (postposition)

[hi]ਪਿਕਨਿਕ[/hi] - picnic (feminine noun)

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for (postposition)

[hi]ਇਕੱਠੇ[/hi] - together (adjective)

[hi]ਹੋਏ।[/hi] - gathered (verb, past tense)

Key Concepts:

Punjabi word order: Subject-Object-Verb (SOV)

Postpositions: Used instead of prepositions in Punjabi to show relationships between words

Gendered nouns: Punjabi nouns have genders (masculine, feminine, neuter), which affect the use of adjectives and verbs. Here, [hi]ਪਾਰਕ[/hi] (park) is masculine, so the adjective [hi]ਇਕੱਠੇ[/hi] (together) is also masculine.

English: We gathered at the park for a picnic.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਪਾਰਕ ਵਿੱਚ ਪਿਕਨਿਕ ਲਈ ਇਕੱਠੇ ਹੋਏ।[/hi]

The next word is river. English: The river flows through the valley.

Punjabi: [hi]ਨਦੀ ਵਾਦੀ ਵਿੱਚੋਂ ਵਗਦੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਨਦੀ[/hi] [nadi] - This is the Punjabi word for "river." It is a feminine noun.

[hi]ਵਾਦੀ[/hi] [vaadi] - This is the Punjabi word for "valley." It is a feminine noun.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚੋਂ[/hi] [vichon] - This is a postposition that means "through." It indicates movement.

[hi]ਵਗਦੀ[/hi] [vagdi] - This is the present continuous tense of the verb "to flow" ( [hi]ਵਗਣਾ[/hi] [vagna]). It is conjugated in the feminine form because the noun "river" is feminine.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hai] - This is the present tense of the verb "to be." It is used as a copula to link the subject "river" to the predicate "flows through the valley."

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: Punjabi nouns have grammatical gender. Verbs and adjectives must agree in gender with the noun they modify.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions instead of prepositions to indicate location and direction.

Present Continuous Tense: The present continuous tense in Punjabi is formed by using the present participle of the verb and adding the auxiliary verb "to be."

Translation: The river flows through the valley.

The next word is feature. English: This house features a beautiful garden.

Punjabi: [hi]Is ghar wich ek khoobsurat bagh hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Is[/hi]: This (demonstrative pronoun, singular)

[hi]ghar[/hi]: house (noun)

[hi]wich[/hi]: in, inside (preposition)

[hi]ek[/hi]: a, one (indefinite article)

[hi]khoobsurat[/hi]: beautiful (adjective)

[hi]bagh[/hi]: garden (noun)

[hi]hai[/hi]: is, exists (verb, present tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]wich[/hi]: a common preposition used to indicate location

[hi]ek[/hi]: indefinite article used to indicate one item

[hi]hai[/hi]: a versatile verb that can be used in various tenses

Translation: This house has a beautiful garden.

The next word is position. English: The teacher's position is very important.

Punjabi: [hi] अधਿਆਪਕ ਦੀ ਸਥਿਤੀ ਬਹੁਤ ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ ਹੈ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]अध्यापक[/hi] - This is the word for "teacher" in Punjabi. The [hi]अ[/hi] at the start is important because it is a vowel and will help espeak-ng get the pronunciation right.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi equivalent of the English possessive "of" or "'s." It shows ownership. In this sentence, it shows that the position belongs to the teacher.

[hi]ਸਥਿਤੀ[/hi] - This word means "position" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This word means "very."

[hi]ਮਹੱਤਵਪੂਰਨ[/hi] - This word means "important" in Punjabi.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the Punjabi equivalent of the English "is." It's the present tense verb.

Key Concepts:

1. Possessive: The [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] particle is essential to show ownership in Punjabi, like the "'s" in English.

2. Present Tense Verb: The [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is the core of the sentence, similar to the "is" in English.

Remember, it's helpful to practice reading these Punjabi sentences aloud to get a better grasp of the pronunciation.

The next word is teach. English: The teacher teaches us Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]Adhyapak asanu Punjabi sikhaunda hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Adhyapak[/hi] - teacher.

[hi]asanu[/hi] - us (plural). It is the object of the verb [hi]sikhaunda[/hi], which means 'teaches'. The verb [hi]sikhaunda[/hi] is an example of the present continuous tense, used for ongoing actions.

[hi]Punjabi[/hi] - Punjabi language.

[hi]sikhaunda[/hi] - teaches. It is in the present continuous tense.

[hi]hai[/hi] - is. It is a helping verb that indicates the present continuous tense.

Note: The sentence structure is Subject-Verb-Object.

English: The teacher teaches us Punjabi.

Punjabi: [hi]Adhyapak asanu Punjabi sikhaunda hai[/hi].

The next word is own. English: This is my own book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh meri khud di kitab hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Eh[/hi] - This (pronoun)

[hi]meri[/hi] - My (possessive adjective)

[hi]khud[/hi] - Own (adjective)

[hi]di[/hi] - Of (possessive particle)

[hi]kitab[/hi] - Book (noun)

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is (verb)

Key concepts:

Possessive adjectives: [hi]meri[/hi] shows possession and is used before the noun [hi]kitab[/hi].

Possessive particle: [hi]di[/hi] is used to connect the adjective [hi]khud[/hi] to the noun [hi]kitab[/hi] and indicates that the book belongs to the speaker.

English: This is my own book.

Punjabi: [hi]Eh meri khud di kitab hai.[/hi]

The next word is reform. English: The government has pledged to reform the education system.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਰਕਾਰ ਨੇ ਸਿੱਖਿਆ ਪ੍ਰਣਾਲੀ ਵਿੱਚ ਸੁਧਾਰ ਕਰਨ ਦਾ ਵਾਅਦਾ ਕੀਤਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਰਕਾਰ[/hi] [Government] - This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] [has] - This is the past tense marker for the verb "to have".

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਿਆ[/hi] [education] - This is the object of the verb "to reform".

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਣਾਲੀ[/hi] [system] - This modifies the object, "education".

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] [in] - This is a preposition that indicates location.

[hi]ਸੁਧਾਰ[/hi] [reform] - This is the verb in the sentence.

[hi]ਕਰਨ[/hi] [to do] - This is an infinitive verb that helps to form the future tense.

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [of] - This is a possessive marker that indicates ownership.

[hi]ਵਾਅਦਾ[/hi] [promise] - This is the object of the verb "to make".

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] [made] - This is the past tense marker for the verb "to make".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] [is] - This is the present tense marker for the verb "to be".

Key concepts:

The sentence uses the past tense to indicate a past event.

The verb "to reform" is used in the present tense to indicate a future action.

The sentence uses a possessive marker to indicate that the promise belongs to the government.

This sentence can be helpful in memorizing the Punjabi word for "reform" which is [hi]ਸੁਧਾਰ[/hi].

The next word is whereas. English: He is a singer, whereas his brother is a dancer.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਗਾਇਕ ਹੈ, ਜਦਕਿ ਉਸਦਾ ਭਰਾ ਨਾਚਨ ਵਾਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] means "He" (masculine singular pronoun)

[hi]ਗਾਇਕ[/hi] means "singer" (masculine noun)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] means "is" (present tense verb)

[hi]ਜਦਕਿ[/hi] means "whereas" (conjunction)

[hi]ਉਸਦਾ[/hi] means "his" (possessive pronoun)

[hi]ਭਰਾ[/hi] means "brother" (masculine noun)

[hi]ਨਾਚਨ ਵਾਲਾ[/hi] means "dancer" (masculine noun)

Key concepts:

The Punjabi word for "whereas" is [hi]ਜਦਕਿ[/hi].

The word order in Punjabi is subject-verb-object.

Punjabi is a gendered language, so the pronoun and noun for "he" and "singer" are masculine.

Translation: He is a singer, whereas his brother is a dancer.

The next word is procedure. English: The doctor explained the procedure for the surgery.

Punjabi: ਡਾਕਟਰ ਨੇ ਸਰਜਰੀ ਦੀ [hi]ਕਾਰਵਾਈ[/hi] ਬਾਰੇ ਦੱਸਿਆ। [hi]ḍākṭar ne sarjarī dī kāravāī bārē dassyā.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ḍākṭar[/hi] (doctor) - This is the subject of the sentence, the one performing the action.

[hi]ne[/hi] (has/have) - This is a grammatical particle used to connect the subject to the verb.

[hi]sarjarī[/hi] (surgery) - This is the object of the preposition "for," indicating the topic of the procedure.

[hi]dī[/hi] (of/from) - This is a possessive marker, indicating that the procedure belongs to the surgery.

[hi]kāravāī[/hi] (procedure) - This is the object of the verb, indicating the thing that was explained.

[hi]bārē[/hi] (about) - This is a preposition that specifies the topic of the explanation.

[hi]dassyā[/hi] (explained) - This is the past tense of the verb "to explain."

Key Concepts:

Gender Agreement: Notice how the possessive marker [hi]dī[/hi] (of/from) agrees in gender with the noun [hi]sarjarī[/hi] (surgery), which is feminine. This is an important feature of Punjabi grammar.

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions, like [hi]bārē[/hi] (about), instead of prepositions. These follow the noun they modify.

Past Tense: The verb [hi]dassyā[/hi] (explained) is in the past tense, indicating that the action happened in the past.

The next word is method. English: This method is effective for learning a new language.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਤਰੀਕਾ ਨਵੀਂ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਸਿੱਖਣ ਲਈ ਕਾਰਗਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਤਰੀਕਾ[/hi] - method

[hi]ਨਵੀਂ[/hi] - new

[hi]ਭਾਸ਼ਾ[/hi] - language

[hi]ਸਿੱਖਣ[/hi] - to learn

[hi]ਲਈ[/hi] - for

[hi]ਕਾਰਗਰ[/hi] - effective

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

The sentence uses the postposition [hi]ਲਈ[/hi] which is similar to the English "for".

[hi]ਕਾਰਗਰ[/hi] is an adjective meaning "effective".

The word order in this sentence is Subject-Verb-Object.

English: This method is effective for learning a new language.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਤਰੀਕਾ ਨਵੀਂ ਭਾਸ਼ਾ ਸਿੱਖਣ ਲਈ ਕਾਰਗਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is equipment. English: The equipment is heavy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਮਾਨ ਭਾਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਾਮਾਨ[/hi]: This is the word for "equipment" in Punjabi. It is a noun and is in the singular form.

[hi]ਭਾਰੀ[/hi]: This word means "heavy". It is an adjective describing the equipment.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi]: This is the present tense form of the verb "to be", in the singular form.

Key Concept: In Punjabi, adjectives usually come after the noun they modify.

English: The equipment is heavy.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਾਮਾਨ ਭਾਰੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is summer. English: The summer is very hot.

Punjabi: [hi]Garmi bahut garmi hoti hai.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Garmi[/hi] (summer) is the subject of the sentence, a noun.

[hi]bahut[/hi] (very) modifies the adjective [hi]garmi[/hi] (hot), emphasizing its intensity.

[hi]garmi[/hi] (hot) is the adjective describing the summer.

[hi]hoti hai[/hi] is the verb "to be" in the present tense, indicating the state of the summer.

Key Concept: Punjabi uses postpositions like [hi]ne[/hi] (to/for) instead of prepositions like "to" or "for" in English.

English Translation: The summer is very hot.

The next word is ask. English: He asked me about my day.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujh to din baray puchhya[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (masculine singular)

[hi]ne[/hi] - marks the subject of the sentence (he)

[hi]mujh[/hi] - me (first person singular)

[hi]to[/hi] - from (a preposition that is often used in questions)

[hi]din[/hi] - day

[hi]baray[/hi] - about

[hi]puchhya[/hi] - asked (past tense)

Key concept: The verb [hi]puchhya[/hi] is conjugated for past tense and is used with the preposition [hi]to[/hi] to indicate a question.

English: He asked me about my day.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mujh to din baray puchhya[/hi]

The next word is fee. English: The college fee is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਲਜ ਦੀ ਫ਼ੀਸ ਬਹੁਤ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਾਲਜ[/hi] - [hi]kaalj[/hi] - college

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - of (possessive marker for feminine noun)

[hi]ਫ਼ੀਸ[/hi] - [hi]fees[/hi] - fee

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]zyaada[/hi] - high, much, excessive

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, 3rd person singular)

Key concepts:

Possessive marker: The word [hi]ਦੀ[/hi] is a possessive marker indicating that the fee belongs to the college.

Word order: Punjabi word order is flexible but generally follows a Subject-Verb-Object (SVO) structure.

Tense: The verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] is in the present tense, indicating that the fee is currently high.

English: The college fee is very high.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਾਲਜ ਦੀ ਫ਼ੀਸ ਬਹੁਤ ਜ਼ਿਆਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is establish. English: He established a new business.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਨਵਾਂ ਕਾਰੋਬਾਰ ਸਥਾਪਿਤ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]usne[/hi] - he/she/it (masculine singular)

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a/an/one

[hi]ਨਵਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]nawa[/hi] - new

[hi]ਕਾਰੋਬਾਰ[/hi] - [hi]karobar[/hi] - business

[hi]ਸਥਾਪਿਤ[/hi] - [hi]sthaapit[/hi] - established

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - [hi]kita[/hi] - did (past tense, masculine singular)

Key Concepts:

The use of the third person singular pronoun [hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] (usne) and the past tense verb [hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] (kita) indicate a completed action in the past by a male subject.

The word [hi]ਸਥਾਪਿਤ[/hi] (sthaapit) is a past participle used as an adjective to modify the noun [hi]ਕਾਰੋਬਾਰ[/hi] (karobar), indicating that the business is already established.

This sentence exemplifies a simple past tense structure in Punjabi, which is often used to describe completed actions in the past.

English: He established a new business.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਇੱਕ ਨਵਾਂ ਕਾਰੋਬਾਰ ਸਥਾਪਿਤ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is arrest. English: The police arrested the thief.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ ਨੇ ਚੋਰ ਨੂੰ ਗ੍ਰਿਫ਼ਤਾਰ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ[/hi] - Police (subject)

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - has, have, did (particle)

[hi]ਚੋਰ[/hi] - thief (object)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - to, for (preposition)

[hi]ਗ੍ਰਿਫ਼ਤਾਰ[/hi] - arrest (verb)

[hi]ਕੀਤਾ[/hi] - did (past tense)

Key concept: The sentence is in the past tense, indicating that the action of arresting has already happened. The Punjabi sentence follows a structure similar to the English sentence, where the subject, verb, and object are clearly identifiable.

English: The police arrested the thief.

Punjabi: [hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ ਨੇ ਚੋਰ ਨੂੰ ਗ੍ਰਿਫ਼ਤਾਰ ਕੀਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is south. English: The sun sets in the south.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੂਰਜ ਦੱਖਣ ਵੱਲ ਡੁੱਬਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੂਰਜ[/hi] - [hi]sooraj[/hi] - sun

[hi]ਦੱਖਣ[/hi] - [hi]dakkhan[/hi] - south

[hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] - [hi]vall[/hi] - towards

[hi]ਡੁੱਬਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]dubbda[/hi] - sets (verb, present continuous)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense, copula)

This sentence uses the verb "to set" in the present continuous tense. The present continuous is used to describe actions that are happening now. The verb "to be" (in this case, "is") is used as a copula to connect the subject (sun) to the predicate (sets in the south).

Remember:

[hi]ਵੱਲ[/hi] - [hi]vall[/hi] - is a postposition, like "towards" in English. It modifies nouns or pronouns and shows direction.

[hi]ਡੁੱਬਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]dubbda[/hi] - is the present continuous form of the verb [hi]ਡੁੱਬਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]dubbana[/hi] - "to set" or "to sink."

The verb [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - "is" is crucial in Punjabi grammar because it functions as a copula, connecting the subject to the predicate.

English: The sun sets in the south.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੂਰਜ ਦੱਖਣ ਵੱਲ ਡੁੱਬਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is husband. English: He is a good husband.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਇੱਕ ਵਧੀਆ ਪਤੀ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]uh[/hi] - He/She

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - a/an (indefinite article)

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - [hi]vadhiya[/hi] - good

[hi]ਪਤੀ[/hi] - [hi]pati[/hi] - husband

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb.

The use of the indefinite article "[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi]" - [hi]ikk[/hi] - indicates that this is a general statement about husbands.

The use of the verb "[hi]ਹੈ[/hi]" - [hi]hai[/hi] - indicates present tense.

Translation: He is a good husband.

The next word is little. English: The little child is playing in the garden.

Punjabi: [hi]Chhota baccha bagh vich khel raha hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Chhota[/hi] (little) - This is an adjective describing the noun [hi]baccha[/hi] (child).

[hi]baccha[/hi] (child) - The subject of the sentence.

[hi]bagh[/hi] (garden) - The location where the action takes place.

[hi]vich[/hi] (in) - A preposition indicating location.

[hi]khel[/hi] (play) - The verb, present continuous tense.

[hi]raha[/hi] (is) - The helping verb in the present continuous tense.

[hi]hai[/hi] (is) - The auxiliary verb in the present continuous tense.

Key Concepts:

Adjectives: [hi]Chhota[/hi] describes the child.

Nouns: [hi]baccha[/hi] and [hi]bagh[/hi] are the nouns in the sentence.

Prepositions: [hi]vich[/hi] indicates location.

Verbs: [hi]khel[/hi] (play) is the main verb.

Tenses: The sentence uses the present continuous tense ([hi]raha hai[/hi]).

English: The little child is playing in the garden.

Punjabi: [hi]Chhota baccha bagh vich khel raha hai[/hi].

The next word is square. English: The square is big.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਰਗ ਵੱਡਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਵਰਗ[/hi] - varg - means square. It is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] - vadḍā - means big. This is the adjective that describes the square.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - hai - is the present tense form of the verb "to be". It indicates that the square is big.

Key Concepts:

The Punjabi sentence follows a Subject-Adjective-Verb structure, similar to English.

The use of [hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - hai - marks the sentence as declarative.

The use of [hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] - vadḍā - is a descriptive adjective, indicating the size of the square.

English: The square is big.

Punjabi: [hi]ਵਰਗ ਵੱਡਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is hope. English: I hope you are well.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਆਸ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਠੀਕ ਹੋ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - means "to me" and is used here as part of the verb "to hope."

[hi]ਆਸ[/hi] - means "hope."

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - means "is" and functions as the copula (linking verb).

[hi]ਕਿ[/hi] - means "that" and introduces the dependent clause.

[hi]ਤੁਸੀਂ[/hi] - means "you."

[hi]ਠੀਕ[/hi] - means "okay" or "fine" and functions as an adjective modifying "you."

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - means "are" and functions as the main verb.

The sentence uses the simple present tense to express hope for the present condition of the person being addressed.

You can memorize this sentence by understanding the meaning of each word and how they connect together. This sentence is a very common expression in Punjabi and is used in many situations.

English: I hope you are well.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਆਸ ਹੈ ਕਿ ਤੁਸੀਂ ਠੀਕ ਹੋ।[/hi]

The next word is rate. English: She rated the movie as very good.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਫਿਲਮ ਨੂੰ ਬਹੁਤ ਵਧੀਆ ਦਰਜਾ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third-person singular feminine pronoun in the past tense. It means "She" or "Her" in the past tense.

[hi]ਫਿਲਮ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "movie."

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is a postposition that means "to" or "for". Here, it is used to indicate the object of the verb "rated".

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - This means "very" or "extremely" and modifies the adjective "good".

[hi]ਵਧੀਆ[/hi] - This means "good" and is the adjective used to describe the movie.

[hi]ਦਰਜਾ[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "rating" or "grade."

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to give" which means "gave".

Key Concepts:

Postpositions: Punjabi uses postpositions to express relationships between nouns and other words in a sentence. [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] is a common postposition.

Word Order: Punjabi is a flexible language, but the basic word order is subject-object-verb (SOV). However, in this sentence, the object "[hi]ਫਿਲਮ[/hi]" comes before the verb "[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi]".

Gender: Punjabi has grammatical gender. This means that nouns and adjectives are marked for gender. In this sentence, the past tense pronoun "[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi]" is feminine because it refers to "she".

Tense: Punjabi has a system of tenses that indicate when an action takes place. In this sentence, the verb "[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi]" is in the past tense.

English: She rated the movie as very good.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਫਿਲਮ ਨੂੰ ਬਹੁਤ ਵਧੀਆ ਦਰਜਾ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is color. English: The color of the sky is blue.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸਮਾਨ ਦਾ ਰੰਗ ਨੀਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸਮਾਨ[/hi] [hi]asmaan[/hi] - sky

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] - possessive particle "of"

[hi]ਰੰਗ[/hi] [hi]rang[/hi] - color

[hi]ਨੀਲਾ[/hi] [hi]neela[/hi] - blue

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi] - is

This sentence uses the post-position [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] to show possession, similar to the English "of." This is common in Punjabi, and it is helpful to remember that the possessive particle comes after the noun it modifies.

Also, note the use of the word [hi]ਹੈ[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi], which functions as a copula, or linking verb, similar to "is" in English.

This sentence uses a simple subject-verb-object structure, which is common in Punjabi.

English: The color of the sky is blue.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸਮਾਨ ਦਾ ਰੰਗ ਨੀਲਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is buy. English: I want to buy a book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਂ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਖ਼ਰੀਦਣਾ ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਂ[/hi] - I (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book (noun)

[hi]ਖ਼ਰੀਦਣਾ[/hi] - to buy (verb)

[hi]ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ[/hi] - want (verb)

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] - am (present tense conjugation)

The sentence is in the present tense, indicating that the speaker wants to buy a book right now. The verb [hi]ਖ਼ਰੀਦਣਾ[/hi] is in the infinitive form, which is used in conjunction with the verb [hi]ਚਾਹੁੰਦਾ[/hi] to express the desire to buy a book.

Key concepts:

The use of the infinitive form of the verb [hi]ਖ਼ਰੀਦਣਾ[/hi] is common in Punjabi when expressing a desire or intention.

The present tense conjugation [hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] is used at the end of the sentence to indicate that the speaker is the one who wants to buy the book.

This sentence is a good example of a simple Punjabi sentence with a clear subject and verb. It can be easily translated into English and is a good starting point for learning more about Punjabi grammar.

The next word is major. English: He is a major in the army.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਫ਼ੌਜ ਵਿੱਚ ਮੇਜਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]oh[/hi] - he

[hi]ਫ਼ੌਜ[/hi] - [hi]fauj[/hi] - army

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] - [hi]vich[/hi] - in

[hi]ਮੇਜਰ[/hi] - [hi]major[/hi] - major

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is.

Key Concepts:

The word [hi]ਮੇਜਰ[/hi] is a loan word in Punjabi, which is used in this case.

[hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] is a preposition that is used to indicate location. It is similar to the English word "in". You can think of [hi]ਵਿੱਚ[/hi] as being similar to [hi]ਵਿਚ[/hi] (which means inside). The extra "h" is there for pronunciation purposes and should not impact your understanding of the word.

English: He is a major in the army.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਫ਼ੌਜ ਵਿੱਚ ਮੇਜਰ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is when. English: When did you come to India?

Punjabi: [hi]Tuhadaa India vich kab aaia?[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Tuhadaa[/hi] - Your (possessive pronoun)

[hi]India[/hi] - India

[hi]vich[/hi] - in (postposition)

[hi]kab[/hi] - when (question word)

[hi]aaia[/hi] - came (past tense verb)

Key Concepts:

Postposition: The word [hi]vich[/hi] functions as a postposition, similar to a preposition in English, and indicates location.

Question Word: The word [hi]kab[/hi] acts as a question word, similar to "when" in English, seeking information about time.

Past Tense: The verb [hi]aaia[/hi] is in the past tense, indicating an action that occurred in the past.

Note: The Punjabi sentence uses a slightly different word order than English. The question word [hi]kab[/hi] comes before the subject [hi]tuhadaa[/hi] and verb [hi]aaia[/hi].

English: When did you come to India?

Punjabi: [hi]Tuhadaa India vich kab aaia?[/hi]

The next word is message. English: He sent a message to his friend.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne apne dost nu ik message bheja[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He (third person singular masculine subject pronoun)

[hi]ne[/hi] - has, has done (past tense marker for masculine singular subject)

[hi]apne[/hi] - his, her, their (possessive pronoun)

[hi]dost[/hi] - friend

[hi]nu[/hi] - to, for, towards (indirect object marker)

[hi]ik[/hi] - one, a, an (indefinite article)

[hi]message[/hi] - message (English word borrowed into Punjabi)

[hi]bheja[/hi] - sent

Key concepts:

Punjabi uses postpositions (like [hi]nu[/hi]) instead of prepositions (like "to").

Punjabi has a grammatical gender system, and the verb conjugation changes based on gender.

[hi]ne[/hi] is the past tense marker for a masculine singular subject.

English: He sent a message to his friend.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne apne dost nu ik message bheja[/hi]

The next word is account. English: He has a bank account.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਦਾ ਬੈਂਕ ਖਾਤਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਦਾ[/hi] - This is a possessive pronoun meaning "his". It is formed by combining the third person singular pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] ("he") with the possessive particle [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] ("of").

[hi]ਬੈਂਕ[/hi] - This is the word for "bank".

[hi]ਖਾਤਾ[/hi] - This is the word for "account".

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses a possessive pronoun to show ownership of the account.

The word order in Punjabi is typically Subject-Object-Verb, which is different from English.

English: He has a bank account.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਦਾ ਬੈਂਕ ਖਾਤਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is deep. English: The well is very deep.

Punjabi: [hi]Kuaँ bahut gehra hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Kuaँ[/hi] - well

[hi]bahut[/hi] - very

[hi]gehra[/hi] - deep

[hi]hai[/hi] - is

The word [hi]gehra[/hi] is the key here, meaning "deep." It's an adjective, and it modifies the noun [hi]kuaँ[/hi], which is the well. [hi]Bahut[/hi] is an intensifier, making the depth of the well very evident.

The sentence uses the present tense in the Punjabi language.

The next word is adult. English: He is an adult now.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੁਣ ਉਹ ਵੱਡਾ ਹੋ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਹੁਣ[/hi] - [hi]hun[/hi] - now

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - [hi]oh[/hi] - he

[hi]ਵੱਡਾ[/hi] - [hi]vadḍā[/hi] - big / adult

[hi]ਹੋ[/hi] - [hi]ho[/hi] - become, is

[hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi] - [hi]gayā[/hi] - gone, has become

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is

Key Concepts:

[hi]ਹੋ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ[/hi] - a common phrase that means "has become". This is a combination of the verb "to be" ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi]) with the past tense of "to become" ([hi]ਗਿਆ[/hi])

English: He is an adult now.

Punjabi: [hi]ਹੁਣ ਉਹ ਵੱਡਾ ਹੋ ਗਿਆ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is financial. English: He has financial problems.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਵਿੱਤੀ ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲਾਂ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the dative case of the pronoun [hi]ਉਹ[/hi] (he/she/it) and means "to him/her/it."

[hi]ਵਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - This is the adjective form of the noun [hi]ਵਿੱਤ[/hi] (finance) and means "financial."

[hi]ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲਾਂ[/hi] - This is the plural form of the noun [hi]ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲ[/hi] (problem/difficulty) and means "problems/difficulties."

[hi]ਹਨ।[/hi] - This is the third-person plural present tense of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] (to be) and means "are."

Key Concepts:

Dative case: This grammatical case is used to indicate the recipient of an action or the object to which something is given.

Adjective form: This form of a noun is used to describe or modify another noun.

Plural form: This form of a noun is used to indicate that there is more than one of the noun.

Third-person plural present tense: This tense of a verb indicates that the action is being performed by multiple subjects.

English: He has financial problems.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੂੰ ਵਿੱਤੀ ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲਾਂ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is report. English: He reported the accident to the police.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪੁਲਿਸ ਨੂੰ ਹਾਦਸੇ ਦੀ ਰਿਪੋਰਟ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - He/She/It (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ[/hi] - Police (direct object)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - to (preposition) - This is the dative case marker, showing the indirect object

[hi]ਹਾਦਸੇ[/hi] - accident (object of the preposition)

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - of the (possessive marker) - This indicates possession and is attached to the object of the preposition

[hi]ਰਿਪੋਰਟ[/hi] - report (object of the verb)

[hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] - gave (verb in past tense)

Key Concepts:

The verb [hi]ਦਿੱਤੀ[/hi] is in the past tense and shows that the action has already happened.

The sentence uses the dative case with the preposition [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] to show the indirect object ([hi]ਪੁਲਿਸ[/hi]) - who the action is being done to.

The object of the verb, [hi]ਰਿਪੋਰਟ[/hi], is the thing being given.

English: He reported the accident to the police.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਪੁਲਿਸ ਨੂੰ ਹਾਦਸੇ ਦੀ ਰਿਪੋਰਟ ਦਿੱਤੀ।[/hi]

The next word is title. English: This is the title of the book.

Punjabi: [hi]ਇਹ ਕਿਤਾਬ ਦਾ ਸਿਰਲੇਖ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਇਹ[/hi] - This

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] - book

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - of (possessive marker)

[hi]ਸਿਰਲੇਖ[/hi] - title

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - is

This sentence is in the present tense and uses the basic subject-verb-object structure. The word [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] is important because it marks the possessive case of the word [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] (book). This is a common pattern in Punjabi and is used frequently. Think of it like a 'of the' or 'belonging to'. So you can think of [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] as almost the same as the English word 'of'.

The next word is need. English: I need a pen.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਕਲਮ ਦੀ ਲੋੜ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]mainnu[/hi] - "to me" - This is the dative case of the pronoun "I," used when something is given to or received by someone.

[hi]ਇੱਕ[/hi] - [hi]ikk[/hi] - "a" - This is the indefinite article used before singular nouns.

[hi]ਕਲਮ[/hi] - [hi]kalam[/hi] - "pen" - This is the noun that represents the object of need.

[hi]ਦੀ[/hi] - [hi]di[/hi] - "of" - This is the possessive marker indicating that the pen belongs to someone or something.

[hi]ਲੋੜ[/hi] - [hi]lor[/hi] - "need" - This is the noun representing the action of needing.

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai.[/hi] - "is" - This is the present tense form of the verb "to be," indicating that the need exists.

Key Concepts:

Dative case of pronouns

Indefinite article

Possessive marker

Present tense verb "to be"

The next word is movie. English: We watched a movie last night.

Punjabi: ਅਸੀਂ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਰਾਤ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਫ਼ਿਲਮ ਦੇਖੀ। [hi]asi kal raat nu ik film dekhi.[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]asi[/hi] - We (subject pronoun)

[hi]kal[/hi] - Yesterday (adverb of time)

[hi]raat[/hi] - Night (noun)

[hi]nu[/hi] - To, at, in (preposition)

[hi]ik[/hi] - One (indefinite article)

[hi]film[/hi] - Movie (noun)

[hi]dekhi[/hi] - Watched (past tense verb)

Key Concepts:

Gender: [hi]film[/hi] is a feminine noun, so the verb [hi]dekhi[/hi] is in the feminine form.

Word order: The subject ([hi]asi[/hi]) comes before the verb ([hi]dekhi[/hi]) in this sentence, which is the typical word order in Punjabi.

Prepositions: The preposition [hi]nu[/hi] is used to show the time when the action took place (last night).

Direct object: The movie ([hi]film[/hi]) is the direct object of the verb.

English: We watched a movie last night.

Punjabi: ਅਸੀਂ ਕੱਲ੍ਹ ਰਾਤ ਨੂੰ ਇੱਕ ਫ਼ਿਲਮ ਦੇਖੀ। [hi]asi kal raat nu ik film dekhi.[/hi]

The next word is funny. English: He told a funny joke.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne ik hasi wala joke kiha[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ne[/hi] - (marks the subject, in this case, the pronoun [hi]Us[/hi])

[hi]ik[/hi] - a/one

[hi]hasi[/hi] - laughter

[hi]wala[/hi] - (indicates that the [hi]joke[/hi] has the quality of being [hi]hasi[/hi] (laughter)

[hi]joke[/hi] - joke

[hi]kiha[/hi] - said/told

Key concept: The use of [hi]wala[/hi] in Punjabi is very important to understand the structure of the language. [hi]wala[/hi] is used to indicate that a noun has a quality or characteristic.

English: He told a funny joke.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne ik hasi wala joke kiha[/hi].

The next word is yes. ## English: He is yes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] means "he"

[hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] means "yes"

The sentence structure is very simple and direct. [hi]ਹਾਂ[/hi] is used as a short answer to a question.

English: He is yes.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is combine. English: The two groups combined to form a larger group.

Punjabi: [hi]Do [hi] [hi]jath[hi] [hi]milke[hi] [hi]ek[hi] [hi]vada[hi] [hi]jath[hi] [hi]ban gaye[hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Do[hi] - two (masculine plural form)

[hi]jath[hi] - groups (masculine plural form)

[hi]milke[hi] - combining, merging (present participle)

[hi]ek[hi] - one

[hi]vada[hi] - large

[hi]jath[hi] - group (masculine singular form)

[hi]ban gaye[hi] - became (past tense)

Key concepts:

The word [hi]milke[hi] is an important verb in this sentence that means "to combine" or "to merge."

The words [hi]jath[hi] and [hi]vada[hi] are both important nouns that denote groups and size, respectively.

English: The two groups combined to form a larger group.

Punjabi: [hi]Do [hi] [hi]jath[hi] [hi]milke[hi] [hi]ek[hi] [hi]vada[hi] [hi]jath[hi] [hi]ban gaye[hi].

The next word is employee. English: The employee is working hard.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਰਮਚਾਰੀ ਸਖ਼ਤ ਮਿਹਨਤ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਕਰਮਚਾਰੀ[/hi] - [hi]karamchari[/hi] - employee (masculine)

[hi]ਸਖ਼ਤ[/hi] - [hi]sakht[/hi] - hard

[hi]ਮਿਹਨਤ[/hi] - [hi]mehnat[/hi] - work

[hi]ਕਰ[/hi] - [hi]kar[/hi] - to do (present tense)

[hi]ਰਿਹਾ[/hi] - [hi]riha[/hi] - is (present continuous tense, masculine)

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - is (present tense)

Key concepts:

The Punjabi sentence uses the present continuous tense to indicate that the employee is currently working hard.

The word [hi]ਕਰਮਚਾਰੀ[/hi] is masculine, so the verb conjugation uses the masculine form.

English: The employee is working hard.

Punjabi: [hi]ਕਰਮਚਾਰੀ ਸਖ਼ਤ ਮਿਹਨਤ ਕਰ ਰਿਹਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is sum. English: The sum of all the numbers is 100.

Punjabi: [hi]Sabh angkaan da jōṛ 100 hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Sabh[/hi] - All

[hi]angkaan[/hi] - Numbers (plural)

[hi]da[/hi] - Of (possessive marker)

[hi]jōṛ[/hi] - Sum

[hi]100[/hi] - 100

[hi]hai[/hi] - Is

Key Concepts:

[hi]da[/hi] is a possessive marker, similar to "of" in English. It indicates that the numbers belong to the sum.

[hi]jōṛ[/hi] is a noun meaning "sum".

This sentence is grammatically correct and uses the correct Punjabi words for "sum". The structure of the sentence follows the standard Subject-Verb-Object order in Punjabi.

The next word is fly. English: The bird flies in the sky.

Punjabi: [hi]Chidiya aasmaan vich udddi[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Chidiya[/hi] - Bird. This is a feminine noun.

[hi]aasmaan[/hi] - Sky. This is a masculine noun.

[hi]vich[/hi] - In. This is a postposition, which functions like a preposition in English, and indicates location.

[hi]udddi[/hi] - Flies. This is the third person singular feminine past tense of the verb [hi]uddan[/hi] (to fly). Since the subject, [hi]chidiya[/hi], is feminine, the verb must also agree.

Key Concepts:

Gender agreement: The verb must agree with its subject in gender. In this case, the verb [hi]udddi[/hi] is feminine to agree with the feminine noun [hi]chidiya[/hi].

English: The bird flies in the sky.

Punjabi: [hi]Chidiya aasmaan vich udddi[/hi].

The next word is library. English: The library is full of books.

Punjabi: [hi]ਲਾਈਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ ਨਾਲ ਭਰੀ ਹੋਈ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਲਾਈਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ[/hi] - Library. This word is a loanword from English.

[hi]ਕਿਤਾਬਾਂ[/hi] - Books. The plural form of [hi]ਕਿਤਾਬ[/hi] (book)

[hi]ਨਾਲ[/hi] - With, by, using. This is a preposition and signifies something accompanying something else.

[hi]ਭਰੀ[/hi] - Filled. This is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਭਰਨਾ[/hi] (to fill).

[hi]ਹੋਈ[/hi] - This is the past participle of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi] (to be). In this sentence, it indicates that the state of being filled is complete.

[hi]ਹੈ[/hi] - Is. This is the present tense of the verb [hi]ਹੋਣਾ[/hi].

This sentence is in the present tense. The subject is [hi]ਲਾਈਬ੍ਰੇਰੀ[/hi] and the verb is [hi]ਹੈ[/hi]. The rest of the sentence describes the state of the library, which is filled with books.

Translation: The library is full of books.

The next word is addition. English: The addition of two numbers gives us the sum.

Punjabi: [hi]Do [hi] [hi]ankhon[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] [hi]joڑ[/hi] [hi]asnu[/hi] [hi]jog[/hi] [hi]deta[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Do[/hi] means "two"

[hi]ankhon[/hi] means "numbers"

[hi]da[/hi] indicates possession, so [hi]do [hi] [hi]ankhon[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] means "of two numbers".

[hi]joڑ[/hi] means "addition" or "sum"

[hi]asnu[/hi] means "us"

[hi]jog[/hi] means "sum"

[hi]deta[/hi] means "gives"

[hi]hai[/hi] means "is"

English: The addition of two numbers gives us the sum.

Punjabi: [hi]Do [hi] [hi]ankhon[/hi] [hi]da[/hi] [hi]joڑ[/hi] [hi]asnu[/hi] [hi]jog[/hi] [hi]deta[/hi] [hi]hai[/hi].

The next word is propose. English: He proposed to her.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਵਿਆਹ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਸਤਾਵ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਸਨੇ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun for "he" in the nominative case.

[hi]ਉਸਨੂੰ[/hi] - This is the object pronoun for "her" in the dative case.

[hi]ਵਿਆਹ[/hi] - This means "marriage" or "wedding".

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - This is the possessive particle for "of" in this case.

[hi]ਪ੍ਰਸਤਾਵ[/hi] - This means "proposal".

[hi]ਦਿੱਤਾ[/hi] - This is the past tense of the verb "to give", meaning "gave" or "proposed". It is the third person singular masculine form of the verb.

Key concepts:

Dative case: This case is used to show the indirect object of a verb. In this sentence, the indirect object is "her".

Possessive particle: This particle is used to show possession. In this sentence, the possessive particle is used to show that the "proposal" is "of" the "marriage".

Past tense: The verb in this sentence is in the past tense, which means that the action happened in the past.

English: He proposed to her.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਸਨੇ ਉਸਨੂੰ ਵਿਆਹ ਦਾ ਪ੍ਰਸਤਾਵ ਦਿੱਤਾ।[/hi]

The next word is damage. English: The storm caused a lot of damage to the crops.

Punjabi: [hi]ਤੂਫ਼ਾਨ ਨੇ ਫ਼ਸਲਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਬਹੁਤ ਨੁਕਸਾਨ ਪਹੁੰਚਾਇਆ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਤੂਫ਼ਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]tufaan[/hi] (storm) - This is the subject of the sentence.

[hi]ਨੇ[/hi] - [hi]ne[/hi] (has) - This is a marker for the subject of the sentence, indicating it is the doer of the action. It's similar to the "has" in English.

[hi]ਫ਼ਸਲਾਂ[/hi] - [hi]faslan[/hi] (crops) - This is the object of the sentence.

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - [hi]nu[/hi] (to, towards) - This is a preposition that shows the direction of the action. It indicates that the damage was inflicted on the crops.

[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi] - [hi]bahut[/hi] (a lot, much) - This is an adverb that modifies the noun "damage".

[hi]ਨੁਕਸਾਨ[/hi] - [hi]nuqsan[/hi] (damage) - This is the noun that describes the action of the storm.

[hi]ਪਹੁੰਚਾਇਆ।[/hi] - [hi]pahunchaaya[/hi] (caused, inflicted) - This is the past tense verb that describes the action of the storm.

Key Concepts:

Subject-Verb-Object structure: The sentence follows the basic Subject-Verb-Object structure of many languages, with the storm as the subject, the verb "caused," and the crops as the object.

Prepositions: The preposition "[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi]" is essential in conveying the direction of the action, indicating the damage was directed towards the crops.

Adverbs: The adverb "[hi]ਬਹੁਤ[/hi]" helps quantify the amount of damage, highlighting the severity of the storm's impact.

Translation: The storm caused a lot of damage to the crops.

The next word is both. English: Both of us are hungry.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਦੋਵੇਂ ਭੁੱਖੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਅਸੀਂ[/hi] - [hi]asi[/hi] - We (subject pronoun)

[hi]ਦੋਵੇਂ[/hi] - [hi]dove[/hi] - both (adjective)

[hi]ਭੁੱਖੇ[/hi] - [hi]bhuke[/hi] - hungry (adjective)

[hi]ਹਾਂ।[/hi] - [hi]haan.[/hi] - are (verb, present tense)

Key concepts:

Subject-verb agreement: The verb "are" agrees with the plural subject "we."

Adjective placement: The adjectives "both" and "hungry" are placed before the noun "we."

Word order: The Punjabi sentence follows the subject-verb-object word order.

English: Both of us are hungry.

Punjabi: [hi]ਅਸੀਂ ਦੋਵੇਂ ਭੁੱਖੇ ਹਾਂ।[/hi]

The next word is competition. English: The competition for the job was fierce.

Punjabi: [hi]Naukri lai muqabala bahut teez si[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Naukri[/hi] - Job

[hi]lai[/hi] - For

[hi]muqabala[/hi] - Competition

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Very

[hi]teez[/hi] - Fierce

[hi]si[/hi] - Was

Key Concepts:

The word order in Punjabi is Subject-Object-Verb, unlike English which is Subject-Verb-Object.

The Punjabi word [hi]lai[/hi] is a postposition, meaning it comes after the noun it modifies.

The word [hi]si[/hi] is the past tense of the verb "to be".

English: The competition for the job was fierce.

Punjabi: [hi]Naukri lai muqabala bahut teez si[/hi].

The next word is map. English: The map shows the different locations in the city.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਪ ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਦੇ ਵੱਖ-ਵੱਖ ਥਾਵਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਦਰਸਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ। [/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਮੈਪ[/hi] (map) is the subject of the sentence. It is singular and masculine in Punjabi.

[hi]ਸ਼ਹਿਰ[/hi] (city) is also singular and masculine, and is the object of the preposition [hi]ਦੇ[/hi] (of, belonging to).

[hi]ਵੱਖ-ਵੱਖ[/hi] (different) modifies [hi]ਥਾਵਾਂ[/hi] (places)

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] (to, towards, into, on) is the object marker.

[hi]ਦਰਸਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] (shows) is the verb, conjugated for the third person singular masculine.

Key Concept: The Punjabi verb [hi]ਦਰਸਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ[/hi] can also be used for the English word “illustrates.”

English: The map shows the different locations in the city.

Punjabi: [hi]ਮੈਪ ਸ਼ਹਿਰ ਦੇ ਵੱਖ-ਵੱਖ ਥਾਵਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਦਰਸਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ। [/hi]

The next word is spirit. English: The spirit of the nation is strong.

Punjabi: [hi]Qaum di aatma mazboot hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Qaum[/hi] = nation

[hi]di[/hi] = of (possessive marker)

[hi]aatma[/hi] = spirit

[hi]mazboot[/hi] = strong

[hi]hai[/hi] = is

Key concept: The possessive marker [hi]di[/hi] is used to show that the spirit belongs to the nation.

The sentence structure is simple, Subject-Verb-Adjective.

English: The spirit of the nation is strong.

Punjabi: [hi]Qaum di aatma mazboot hai[/hi].

The next word is contribution. English: He made a great contribution to the community.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne samaaj nu bahut bada yogdaan dita[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He / Him

[hi]ne[/hi] - Has/Have (Grammatical marker of past tense)

[hi]samaaj[/hi] - Community

[hi]nu[/hi] - To, For (Preposition)

[hi]bahut[/hi] - Very

[hi]bada[/hi] - Big

[hi]yogdaan[/hi] - Contribution

[hi]dita[/hi] - Gave (Past Tense)

Key Concepts:

[hi]nu[/hi]: This preposition is essential in Punjabi as it denotes direction or purpose. It can be translated to "to," "for," or "towards."

[hi]ne[/hi]: This is a grammatical marker that indicates past tense in Punjabi. It is often used with verbs.

Translation: He made a great contribution to the community.

The next word is tourist. English: The tourists are visiting the Golden Temple.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੈਲਾਨੀ ਸੋਨੇ ਵਾਲੇ ਮੰਦਰ 'ਤੇ ਜਾ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸੈਲਾਨੀ[/hi] - [hi]sailāni[/hi] - this is the Punjabi word for tourist. It is a noun and is plural, so it signifies more than one person.

[hi]ਸੋਨੇ ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] - [hi]sone wale[/hi] - this translates to "golden" and describes the temple. [hi]ਵਾਲੇ[/hi] means belonging to.

[hi]ਮੰਦਰ[/hi] - [hi]mandar[/hi] - this word means "temple" and is a noun.

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - [hi]'te[/hi] - means "on" or "at" and is used to show location.

[hi]ਜਾ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi] - [hi]ja rahe han[/hi] - means "are going". [hi]ਹਨ[/hi] is the plural form of the verb "to be". It signifies that there is more than one tourist.

English: The tourists are visiting the Golden Temple.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸੈਲਾਨੀ ਸੋਨੇ ਵਾਲੇ ਮੰਦਰ 'ਤੇ ਜਾ ਰਹੇ ਹਨ।[/hi]

The next word is smile. English: He smiled at me.

Punjabi: [hi]Us ne mere te has ke dekhya[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ne[/hi] - has/have (past tense)

[hi]mere[/hi] - my

[hi]te[/hi] - on/at

[hi]has ke[/hi] - smiling

[hi]dekhya[/hi] - looked

Key concepts:

The use of the preposition [hi]te[/hi] (on/at) is important to understand the direction of the action.

[hi]has ke[/hi] is a common Punjabi phrase that means "smiling."

Therefore, the sentence "[hi]Us ne mere te has ke dekhya[/hi]" means "He smiled at me."

The next word is represent. English: He represents the values of our community.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਾਡੇ ਸਮਾਜ ਦੇ ਮੁੱਲਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਦਰਸਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - He/She/It

[hi]ਸਾਡੇ[/hi] - Our

[hi]ਸਮਾਜ[/hi] - Community

[hi]ਦੇ[/hi] - Of

[hi]ਮੁੱਲਾਂ[/hi] - Values

[hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi] - To

[hi]ਦਰਸਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] - Represents (present tense, masculine singular)

The key concept here is the verb [hi]ਦਰਸਾਉਂਦਾ[/hi] which means "represents." It is a common verb with a wide range of applications. We see here that the sentence is in the present tense.

English: He represents the values of our community.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਸਾਡੇ ਸਮਾਜ ਦੇ ਮੁੱਲਾਂ ਨੂੰ ਦਰਸਾਉਂਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

The next word is step. English: He stepped on the grass.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਘਾਹ 'ਤੇ ਕਦਮ ਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi] - This is the third person singular pronoun (he/she/it) in the past tense, meaning "he/she/it did"

[hi]ਘਾਹ[/hi] - This means "grass"

[hi]'ਤੇ[/hi] - This means "on"

[hi]ਕਦਮ[/hi] - This means "step"

[hi]ਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi] - This means "placed"

Key concepts:

The Punjabi word order is Subject-Object-Verb, unlike English's Subject-Verb-Object.

The verb [hi]ਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi] is conjugated to agree with the subject, [hi]ਉਹਨੇ[/hi].

English: He stepped on the grass.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹਨੇ ਘਾਹ 'ਤੇ ਕਦਮ ਰੱਖਿਆ[/hi].

The next word is concept. English: The concept of time is difficult to grasp.

Punjabi: [hi]ਸਮੇਂ ਦਾ ਸੰਕਲਪ ਸਮਝਣਾ ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਸਮੇਂ[/hi] - [hi]samain[/hi] - Time

[hi]ਦਾ[/hi] - [hi]da[/hi] - Of, belonging to (possessive marker)

[hi]ਸੰਕਲਪ[/hi] - [hi]sankalp[/hi] - Concept

[hi]ਸਮਝਣਾ[/hi] - [hi]samjhna[/hi] - To understand

[hi]ਮੁਸ਼ਕਲ[/hi] - [hi]mushkil[/hi] - Difficult

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - [hi]hai[/hi] - Is (present tense, singular)

Key Concepts:

Possessive marker: [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] ([hi]da[/hi]) indicates possession, similar to "of" or "'s" in English.

Direct Object: The concept of time ([hi]ਸਮੇਂ ਦਾ ਸੰਕਲਪ[/hi]) is the direct object of the verb [hi]ਸਮਝਣਾ[/hi] (to understand).

Subject-Verb Agreement: The subject ([hi]ਸੰਕਲਪ[/hi]) is singular, so the verb agrees in singular form ([hi]ਹੈ[/hi]).

Remember: The structure of the sentence is Subject-Verb-Object.

The next word is cup. English: He has a cup of tea in his hand.

Punjabi: [hi]Us de hath vich chah da killam hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Us[/hi] - This is a pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]de[/hi] - This is a possessive particle, indicating possession, like "his" or "her".

[hi]hath[/hi] - This means "hand".

[hi]vich[/hi] - This means "in" or "inside".

[hi]chah[/hi] - This means "tea".

[hi]da[/hi] - This is a possessive particle, indicating possession, like "his" or "her".

[hi]killam[/hi] - This means "cup".

[hi]hai[/hi] - This means "is".

Key concepts:

Possessive particles: [hi]de[/hi] and [hi]da[/hi] are used to indicate possession.

Prepositions: [hi]vich[/hi] is a preposition meaning "in" or "inside".

Word order: In Punjabi, the order of words in a sentence can vary, but the subject generally comes before the verb. The noun [hi]hath[/hi] comes before the preposition [hi]vich[/hi], and the verb [hi]hai[/hi] is at the end.

English: He has a cup of tea in his hand.

Punjabi: [hi]Us de hath vich chah da killam hai[/hi].

The next word is temperature. English: The temperature is very hot today.

Punjabi: [hi]Ajj gharmi bahut zyada hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Ajj[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "today." It's a very commonly used word and can be used in any context.

[hi]gharmi[/hi] - This is the word for "heat" or "hot." The word literally means "summer" but it's often used colloquially to mean hot weather.

[hi]bahut[/hi] - The word for "very" or "a lot."

[hi]zyada[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "more" or "too much." This word is often used to describe something being excessive.

[hi]hai[/hi] - This is the Punjabi word for "is" or "is there" in the present tense.

Key Concepts:

Gurmukhi Script: Punjabi is written in the Gurmukhi script.

Word Order: Punjabi uses a subject-verb-object word order, just like English.

This sentence uses simple vocabulary and common grammar.

The next word is fear. English: He is afraid of the dog.

Punjabi: [hi]ਉਹ ਕੁੱਤੇ ਤੋਂ ਡਰਦਾ ਹੈ।[/hi]

Breakdown:

[hi]ਉਹ[/hi] - This is the subject pronoun, meaning "he".

[hi]ਕੁੱਤੇ[/hi] - This is the noun "dog", in the dative case. The dative case is used to indicate the indirect object of a verb.

[hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] - This is a postposition meaning "from". It's used to indicate the source of fear.

[hi]ਡਰਦਾ[/hi] - This is the present tense, third person singular form of the verb "to fear" meaning "he fears".

[hi]ਹੈ।[/hi] - This is the present tense copula, meaning "is". It is used to link the subject and the predicate of the sentence.

Key Concepts:

Dative Case: The dative case is used to indicate the indirect object of a verb. The dative case is often used with verbs of giving, telling, showing, etc. In this case, it is being used to indicate the source of the fear. The dative case is usually marked with the postposition [hi]ਨੂੰ[/hi]. But the postposition [hi]ਤੋਂ[/hi] can also be used to indicate the source of fear.

Present Tense Copula: The present tense copula, [hi]ਹੈ[/hi], is used to link the subject and the predicate of the sentence. It is also used to indicate that something exists or is true.

The Punjabi word for "fear" is [hi]ਡਰ[/hi]. The word [hi]ਡਰਦਾ[/hi] is the present tense, third person singular form of the verb "to fear" and is formed by adding the present tense suffix [hi]ਦਾ[/hi] to the word [hi]ਡਰ[/hi]. The present tense, third person singular form of the verb "to fear" is often used in the context of a person's fear of something or someone.

The next word is white. English: The white dog is very cute.

Punjabi: [hi]Safeda kutta bahut pyaara hai[/hi].

Breakdown:

[hi]Safeda[/hi] (White) is the adjective modifying the noun [hi]kutta[/hi] (dog).

[hi]bahut[/hi] (very) is an adverb modifying the adjective [hi]pyaara[/hi] (cute).

[hi]hai[/hi] (is) is the present tense form of the verb "to be".

Key Concepts:

Adjectives: Describe nouns, like [hi]safeda[/hi] (white) describes [hi]kutta[/hi] (dog).

Adverbs: Modify adjectives or verbs, like [hi]bahut[/hi] (very) modifies [hi]pyaara[/hi] (cute).

Present Tense: Indicates an action happening now, like [hi]hai[/hi] (is) indicates the dog is cute at this moment.

Remember:

[hi]Safeda[/hi] is the commonly used term for white in Punjabi, though [hi]sufed[/hi] can also be used depending on context.

Translation: The white dog is very cute.